f       '^"/^      ,.u 


John  Swett 


wii  .•?' 


,^.a;  -^Jry^^^lMy. 


%^\^.  ^ 


\U9W 


'o-nn 


^  j^i^W/ 


•2^  t 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/compendiousgermaOOwhitrich 


WHITNEY'S  MODERN  LANGUAGE  BOOKS. 


FRENCH. 


A  FRENCH  GRAMMAR.  With  Exercises  and  Illustrative 
Sentences  from  French  Authors.     i2mo,  442  pp. 

PRACTICAL  FRENCH.  Taken  from  the  Author's  larger 
Grammar,  and  Supplemented  by  Conversations  and  Idio- 
matic Phrases.     i2mo,  304  pp. 

BRIEF  FRENCH  GRAMMAR.     i6mo,  177  pp. 

GERMAN. 

A  COMPENDIOUS  GERMAN  GRAMMAR,     izmo,  303  pp. 
BRIEF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR.     i6mo,   143  pp. 
GERMAN  READER.     i2mo,  523  pp. 
GERMAN-ENGLISH  DICTIONARY.    8vo,  900  pages. 
GERMAN  TEXTS     Edited  by  Prof.  W.  D.  Whitney. 
Lessing's  Minna  von  Barnhelm.     Annotated  by  W.  D.  Whit- 
ney, Prof  in  Yal    College.     i6mo,   138  pp. 
Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell.     Annotated  by  Prof.  A.  Sachtleben, 

of  Charleston,  S.  C.     i6mo,  199  pp. 
Goethe's  Faust.     Annotate  '  by  Wiw.  Cook.     i6mo,  229  pp. 
Goethe's  Iphigenie  a      Tauris,     Annotated  "by  Prof  Franklin 
Carter,  Williams  College.     i6mo,  113  pp'. 

Schiller's  Maria  Stuar-  Annotated  by  E.  S.  Joynes,  Prof,  in 
University  of  South  Carolina.     i6mo,  222  pp. 

Lessing's  Nathan  der  Weise.  Annotated  by  H.  C.  G.  Brandt, 
Prof,  in  Hamilton  College.     i6mo,  158  pp. 

WHITNEY-KLEMM   GERMAN   SERIES. 

By  William  D.  Whitney  and  L.  R.  Klemm. 

GERMAN  BY  PRACTICE.     i2mo,  305  pp.  *■ 

ELEMENTARY  GERMAN  READER.     i2mo,  237  pp. 


HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.,  Publishers.  NEW  YORK. 


COMPENDIOUS 

QEEMAE^  GEAMMAK 


BT 


WILLIAM  D.  WHITNEY 

Professor  of  Sanskrit  and  Comparative  Philology  and  Instructor 
in  Modern  Languages  in  Yale  College 


SIXTH  EDITION,   THOKOUGHLY   REVISED 

AND 

WITH  NEW  EXERCISES 


NEW  YOKE 

HENKY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

F.  W.  Christern 

Boston:  Oabl  Schoenhof 


COPTBIGHT,   1888, 
BY 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO. 

EDUCATION  DEPt; 


PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION. 

(somewhat  abbreviated.) 

THE  author  of  a  new  German  grammar,  in  a  community 
where  so  many  are  already  in  use,  and  with  so  much 
approval,  may  well  feel  called  upon  to  explain  and  defend 
his  undertaking — esj)ecially,  when  his  work  is  compara- 
tively wanting  in  those  practical  exercises,  for  writing 
and  speaking,  which  make  the  principal  part  of  the  other 
grammars  now  most  in  use. 

That  system  of  instruction  in  modern  languages  of  which 
the  Ollendorff  grammars  are  popularly  regarded  as  the 
type  has  its  unquestionable  advantages  where  learning  to 
speak  is  the  main  object  directly  aimed  at,  and  where  the 
smallness  of  the  classes,  and  the  time  spent  with  the  in- 
structor, render  it  possible  for  the  latter  to  give  each  pupil 
that  amount  of  personal  attention  and  drilling  which  is 
needed  in  order  to  make  the  system  yield  its  best  results. 

But  in  our  schools  and  colleges  this  is  for  the  most  part 
impracticable.  Their  circumstances  and  methods  of  in- 
struction render  translation  and  construction  the  means 
by  which  the  most  useful  knowledge  and  the  best  discipline 
can  be  gained.  To  the  very  great  majority  of  those  who 
learn  German,  ability  to  speak  is  an  object  inferior  in 
importance  to  ability  to  understand  accurately  and  readily 
the  language  as  written  or  printed  ;  and  the  attainment 
of  the  former  is  properly  to  be  made  posterior  to  that  of 
the  latter.  One  who  has  mastered  the  principles  of 
grammar,  and  acquired  by  reading  a  fair  vocabulary  and 
a  feeling  for  the  right  use  of  it,  will  learn  to  speak  and 
to  write  rapidly  and  well  when  circumstances  require  of 
him  that  ability. 


54 ! 584 


IV  PBETACE. 

Moreover,  there  is  a  large  and  increasing  class  of  students 
whose  philological  training  has  to  be  won  chiefly  or  alto- 
gether in  the  study  of  the  modern  languages,  instead  of 
the  classical — and  who  must  win  it  by  methods  somewhat 
akin  with  those  so  long  and  so  successfully  followed  in 
classical  study.  For  the  class  referred  to,  German  offers 
peculiar  advantages,  quite  superior  to  those  presented  by 
any  other  modern  language.  In  words,  forms,  and  con- 
structions, it  is  enough  unlike  English  to  call  forth  and 
exercise  all  the  pupil's  powers  of  discrimination,  to  sharpen 
his  attention  to  the  niceties  of  word  and  phrase,  and  to 
train  his  j^hilological  insight ;  while,  at  the  same  ^ime,  the 
fundamental  relation  of  German  to  the  most  central  and 
intimate  part  of  English  makes  the  study  instinct  with 
practical  bearings  on  our  own  tongue,  and  equivalent  to 
a  historical  and  comparative  study  of  English  itself ;  and, 
both  on  the  esthetic  and  on  the  practical  side,  there  is  no 
other  modern  literature  so  rich  in  attraction  and  so  liberal 
of  reward  to  us  as  the  German. 

It  has  appeared  to  me  that,  in  these  aspects  of  the  study, 
hardly  sufficient  assistance  was  furnished  the  teacher  and 
learner  by  the  grammars  hitherto  accessible.  Three  sub- 
jects especially  have  called  for  more  careful  exposition  : 
the  derivation  of  German  words  from  one  another  ;  the 
construction  of  sentences ;  and  the  correspondences  be- 
tween German  and  English.  I  have  also  desired  to  see  in 
some  respects  a  more  acceptable  arrangement  of  the  ordi- 
nary subject-matter  of  a  grammar — one  having  in  view 
the  history  of  words  and  forms,  although  not  obtruding 
the  details  of  that  history  unnecessarily  upon  pupils  un- 
prepared for  their  study. 

At  the  same  time,  I  have  endeavored  to  make  a  really 
compendious  and  simple  grammar,  according  to  the  promise^ 
of  the  title-page,  a  grammar  which  might  answer  the  needs 
even  of  young  scholars,  although  containing  some  things 
which  they  would  not  fairly  understand  and  appreciate 


PEEFAOE.  t 

until  later.  That  I  shall  have  satisfied  others'  ideal  of  a 
compendious  grammar,  by  including  all  they  may  deem 
essential  and  omitting  the  unessential,  I  do  not  venture  to 
hope  ;  but  only  trust  that  I  may  have  come  pretty  near  to 
meeting  the  wants  of  many. 

A  careful  distinction  of  the  contents  of  the  book  by 
variety  of  type,  according  to  their  degree  of  immediate 
importance,  has  been  attempted  throughout.  Especially, 
I  have  meant  to  put  in  the  largest  type  (sm.  pica)  just 
about  so  much  as  the  scholar  ought  to  learn  carefully  and 
thoroughly  in  his  first  course  of  grammar-lessons,  pre- 
paratory to  reading.  This  a  class  should  acquire,  accord- 
ing to  the  age  and  capacity  and  previous  training  of  its 
members,  in  from  twelve  to  twenty-five  lessons ;  and 
should  then  at  once  be  put  into  reading,  while  the  grammar 
is  taken  up  again,  and  such  part  of  what  was  before 
omitted  is  learned  as  the  judgment  of  the  intelligent 
teacher  shall  direct. 

After  enough  reading  has  been  done  to  give  some  fami- 
liarity with  forms  and  constructions,  I  would  have  the 
writing  of  exercises  begun ;  and  I  feel  confident  that  a 
better  result  in  reading  and  writing  together  will  be  won 
thus,  in  a  given  time,  than  by  any  other  method.  I  have 
myself  been  accustomed  to  prepare  exercises  for  my  classes, 
for  turning  into  German,  from  whatever  text  the  class 
were  reading;  taking  a  sentence  or  paragraph,  and  putting 
its  phrases  into  a  different  shape  from  that  presented  in 
the  text,  so  that  the  student  shall  have  his  main  vocabulary 
before  him  on  the  page,  instead  of  having  to  hunt  for 
proper  expressions  in  the  dictionary,  with  knowledge  in- 
sufficient for  the  task.  This  method  I  would  recommend 
to  others. 

Some  of  the  subjects  treated  in  the  grammar  (especially 
word-derivation,  and  the  relation  of  English  and  German) 
need  support  from  the  lexicon.  Considering  the  general 
deficiency  of  information  on  these  subjects  in  the  access- 


VI  PREFACE. 

ible  dictionaries,  I  am  endeavoring  to  give  the  beginner 
help  till  he  can  make  his  analyses  and  comparisons  for 
himself,  in  the  Vocabulary  to  a  German  Eeader,  which  is 
published  as  a  companion-book  to  the  present  one.  From 
its  pages  have  been  drawn  a  large  part  of  the  examples 
given  in  the  Grammar. 

Of  course,  I  have  consulted,  and  more  or  less  used,  a 
good  many  grammars  while  engaged  in  the  preparation  of 
this  one,  deriving  more  or  less  of  valuable  information  or 
suggestion  from  each  and  all  of  them.  But  I  do  not  feel 
that  I  need  to  make  special  acknowledgments  save  to  one — 
the  work  of  Heyse  (in  its  two  editions,  the  Schul-  Grammatik 
and  the  AusflZhrliches  Lehrhuch).  To  it  my  obligations 
have  been  more  constant  and  various  than  I  can  well  point 
out  in  detail  ;  hence  this  general  confession  of  indebted- 
ness. Those  familiar  with  Heyse  will  have  no  difficulty  in 
tracing  its  influence  in  many  parts  (for  examjDle,  in  the 
classification  of  verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation,  which  I  have 
taken  almost  without  modification  from  that  authority); 
while  they  will  also  find  that  I  have  nowhere  followed  it 
slavishly. 

It  has  everywhere  been  my  intention  so  to  set  forth  the 
facts  of  the  language  as  to  favor  the  recognition  of 
language  as  a  growth,  as  something  which  has  been  grad- 
ually converted  into  what  it  is,  from  a  very  different  con- 
dition, by  those  who  have  used  it — a  recognition  which  is 
the  first  need,  if  one  would  really  understand  language, 
and  which  must  lead  the  way  to  those  deepen  studies  into 
the  history  of  languages  and  of  language,  constituting  so 
important  a  branch  of  modern  science. 

The  study  of  German  is  so  rapidly  increasing  in  preva- 
lence that  there  is  pressing  need  of  raising  it  to  a  some- 
what higher  plane.  I  trust  it  will  be  found  that  this 
volume  contributes  its  part,  though  a  small  one,  to  so  de- 
sirable an  end.  W.  D.  W» 

Yale  College,  New  Ha\en,  Aug.  1869. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  SIXTH  EDITION. 

TN  the  revision  of  this  work  no  fundamental  changes  have 
-*-  been  made  in  its  plan  or  structure.  Even  the  para- 
graphing has  been  kept  unchanged  throughout,  so  as  not 
to  interfere  with  the  pertinence  of  the  references  exten- 
sively made  to  it  in  text-books  heretofore  published.  But 
many  additions  and  improvements  have  been  introduced — 
partly  the  result  of  the  author's  own  experience  in  the  use 
of  the  work,  partly  due  to  the  suggestions  of  other  users  : 
among  whom  are  to  be  specially  mentioned,  with  thanks. 
Prof.  A.  S.  Wheeler  of  the  Sheffield  Scientific  School  of 
Yale  College,  and  Prof.  O.  Seidensticker  of  Philadelphia. 
The  so-called  New  Orthography  of  German  words  has  also 
been  described,  and  everywhere  introduced,  in  brackets, 
beside  the  old  spelling  :  it  has  not  yet  been  so  widely 
adopted  in  German  literature  that  its  acceptance  in  place 
of  the  old  seemed  advisable.  And,  especially,  an  entire 
new  set  of  Exercises  has  been  prepared,  including  illustra- 
tions of  the  intricacies  of  German  usage  by  extracts  from 
the  best  German  authors  :  as  to  their  use,  see  the  Note 
below. 

To  obviate  objections  made  from  some  quarters  to  the 
use  of  the  smaller  type  of  the  first  edition,  something  of  the 
former  elaborate  classification  of  the  matter  of  the  volume 
by  three  sizes  of  the  type,  etc.,  has  been  abandoned,  and 
only  two  sizes,  of  superior  legibility,  are  now  employed. 

Grateful  for  the  favor  with  which  the  work  has  been 
received  during  nearly  twenty  years,  the  author  hopes 
that  in  its  somewhat  changed  form  it  will  continue  to 
merit  the  approval  of  teachers  and  students. 

Yale  College,  New  Haven,  May  1888. 

I  am  indebted  to  friends,  especially  to  Mr.  Herrmann 
Knapp,  of  San  Jose,  Cal.,  for  sundry  corrections  in  this 
year's  impression.  January,  1893. 

vii 


NOTE  ON  THE  EXERCISES. 

The  exercises  (pp.  285 — 395)  are  intended  to  be  used  in 
connection  with  the  first  study  of  the  grammar ;  but  it  has 
seemed  best  to  put  them  together,  instead  of  scattering  thetu 
through  the  body  of  the  text.  They  are  divided  into  two 
series.  The  first  series  consists  of  simple  exercises  for  trans- 
lating from  German  into  English  and  vice-versa.  These  follow 
in  the  main  the  arrangement  of  the  grammar,  though  in  some 
places  this  order  is  abandoned — as,  by  introducing  a  lesson  on 
prepositions  quite  early  in  the  series,  and  by  taking  up  the 
subject  of  sentence-construction  before  going  on  to  the  sub- 
junctive and  infinitive,  the  use  of  which  necessitates  more 
involved  sentences  than  the  pupil  is  prepared  for.  Each  exer- 
cise is  accompanied  by  a  vocabulary  of  the  words  used  for 
the  first  time  in  it,  the  object  being  to  familiarize  the  pupil 
gradually  with  a  good  number  of  the  most- used  German  words, 
and  thus  to  give  him  a  vocabulary  which  he  will  find  useful  in 
all  reading  or  speaking.  There  are  also  general  vocabularies 
at  the  end,  including  all  the  words  used  in  both  series  of 
exercises. 

The  second  series  of  exercises  consists  of  sentences  selected 
from  the  writings  of  well-known  German  authors,  illustrative 
of  the  usages  of  the  language,  including  also  those  more 
special  idiomatic  points  not  taken  up  in  the  first  series. 
Accompanying  these  are  short  English  themes  for  translation 
into  German,  in  which  are  used  as  far  as  possible  the  same 
words  or  the  same  constructions  which  are  to  be  found  in  the 
illustrative  sentences.  With  the  help  of  the  English  vocabulary, 
the  pupil  will  be  able  without  too  much  difficulty  to  render 
these  into  German, 

In  making  use  of  these  exercises  each  teacher  will  of  course  be 
guided  by  his  own  judgment  and  the  necessities  and  capabil- 
ities of  his  class.  If  the  exercises  are  too  long,  they  can  be 
divided.  If  too  short,  or  not  full  enough,  it  will  be  easy,  still 
using  the  same  words  or  constructions,  to  add  an  indefinite 
number  of  sentences  to  each  exercise.  If  the  object  is  to  get 
the  class  to  the  point  of  reading  German  as  soon  as  possible, 
it  will  be  best  merely  to  read  through  the  German  exercises  of 
the  first  series,  leaving  the  English  ones  to  be  taken  up  and 
written  after  some  reading  has  been  done.  In  the  same  way, 
the  reading  through  of  the  illustrative  sentences,  and  the 


PREFACE.  ix 

writing  of  the  English  themes  accompanying  them,  will  serve 
as  a  review  of  the  grammar  or  a  valuable  auxiliary  to  reading. 
After  studying  carefully  the  illustrative  sentences,  the  student 
will  meet  with  little  in  any  German  reading  which  can  cause 
him  grammatical  dilSculty  and  the  working  through  of  the 
English  themes  should  be  sufficient  preparation  for  rendering 
into  German,  or  writing  in  German,  in  a  freer  and  more  general 
way.  All  the  exercises  are  annotated  with  references  to  the 
grammar  in  cases  of  special  difficulty. 

The  illustrative  sentences  are  classified  by  the  paragraph 
of  the  grammar  which  they  illustrate,  the  number  of  the 
paragraph  being  given  in  brackets.  Each  sentence  is  followed 
by  the  name  of  its  author  in  parenthesis.  For  those  authors 
most  frequently  met  with  are  used  the  following  abbreviations: 


grei. 

Freitag. 

^lop. 

Klopstock. 

a 

Goethe. 

M* 

Lessing. 

sr.®r. 

A.  Grimm, 

a^.9?. 

Jean  Paul  Richter. 

^.®r. 

Herman  Grimm. 

SRutf. 

Riickert. 

a@r. 

Jakob  Grimm, 

m» 

Schiller. 

€>ei. 

Heine. 

©piet 

Spielhagen. 

^e^. 

Heyse. 

@pr. 

Spruch  (proverb). 

$umb. 

Humboldt. 

m 

Uhland. 

TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


^^The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 


Alphabet,  1-4. 

Use  of  capitals,  4. 

New  Orthography,  5. 

Pronunciation,  6-55. 

Vowels,  7-22 ;  consonants,  23-53 ;  foreign  words,  54 ;  ac- 
cent, 55. 

Parts  of  Speech,  56. 

Declension,  57-62. 

Rules  for  gender  of  nouns,  61. 

Articles,  63-67. 

Use  of  articles,  66. 

Nouns,  68-113. 

General  rules  of  declension,  68-73;  First  or  strong  de- 
clension, 74-90;  first  class,  75-80;  second  class,  81-86; 
third  class,  87-90;  Second  or  weak  declension,  91-95;  ir- 
regular declension,  96-100;  nouns  of  foreign  origin,  101; 
proper  names,  102-108;  modifying  adjuncts  of  the  noun, 
109-112 ;  equivalents  of  the  noun,  113. 

Adjectives,    114-148. 

When  declined,  114-118;  first  and  second  declensions, 
119-128;  mixed  declension,  124.2;  adjective  used  as  sub- 
stantive, 129 ;  as  adverb,  130 ;  participles  as  adjectives,  131 ; 
comparison  of  adjectives,  133-142 ;  comparison  withadverbp 
141 ;  modifying  adjuncts  of  the  adjective,  143-148. 


CONTENrS.  XI 

Pbonouns,  14.9-195. 

Personal  pronouns,  151-156;  possessive  pronominal  ad- 
jectives, 157-162 ;  demonstratives,  163-166 ;  determinatives, 
167-171 ;  interrogatives,  172-176  ;  relatives,  177-183  ;  inde- 
finite pronouns  and  indefinite  numerals,  184-195. 

NuMERAi^,  196-208. 

Cardinals,  197-202 ;  ordinals,  203 ;  multipUcatives,  etc., 
202-206  ;  derivatives  from  ordinals,  207-208. 

Uses  of  the  Forms  of  Declension,  209-230. 

Numbers,  210-211;  cases:— nominative,  212-214;  genitive, 
215-220 ;  dative,  221-225 ;  accusative,  226-230. 

Conjugation,  231. 

Verbs,  232-319. 

Classification,  233 ;  simple  forms  of  the  verb,  235-237 ; 
compound  forms,  238-240 ;  use  of  l)abzn  or  jetn  as  auxiliary 
of  tense,  241-244 ;  conjugations,  245-246 ;  New  or  weak 
conjugation,  247-250 ;  modal  auxiliaries,  251-260 ;  Old  or 
strong  conjugation,  261-273 ;  passive  verbs,  274r-282 ; 
reflexive  verbs,  283-290  ;  impersonal  verbs,  291-295  ;  com- 
pound verbs,  296 ;  separable,  297-301 ;  inseparable,  302-307 ; 
separable  or  inseparable,  308-311 ;  other  compound  verbs, 
312-313 ;  verbal  adjuncts,  314-319. 

Uses  of  the  Forms  of  Conjugation,  320-359. 

Person  and  number,  320-322  ;  mode  and  tense: — indicative, 
323-328;  subjunctive,  329-333;  conditional,  334-336;  im- 
perative, 337-338  ;  infinitive,  339-348  ;  participles,  349-359. 

Indeclinables,  360. 

Adverbs,  361-370. 

Classification,  362 ;  origin,  363-367 ;  comparison,  368 ; 
special  uses,  369  ;  place,  370. 

Prepositions,  371-381. 

Cases  governed  by  them,  372-376. 

Conjunctions,  382-386. 
Classification,  383. 

Interjections,  387-392.  - 


XU  CONTENTS. 

WOKD-FORMATION,  DERIVATION,   393-417. 

Introductory  explanations,  393-402  ;  derivation  of  verbs, 
403-406  ;  of  nouns,  407-412 ;  of  adjectives,  413-416  ;  of  the 
other  parts  of  speech,  417. 

WOED-COMBINATION,   COMPOSITION,  418-425. 

Introductory  explanations,  418-419  ;  composition  of  verbs, 
420;  of  nouns,  421-422  ;  of  adjectives,  423-424;  of  particles, 
425. 

Construction  of  Sentences,  426-446. 

Introductory  explanations,  426-429  ;  regular  order  of  the 
sentence,  430:  inverted  order,  ^^  l  interrogative  and  opta- 
tive sentences,  432 ;  conditional  clauses,  433^  transposed 
order,  434 ;  dependent  clauses,  435-439  ;  substantive  depen- 
dent clause,  436  ;  adjective  dependent  clause,  437  ;  adverbial 
dependent  clause,  438 ;  summary  of  the  rules  of  arrangement, 
440-444 ;  concluding  remarks,  445-446. 

Belation  of  German  to  English,  447-461. 

Introductory  explanations,  447-452 ;  the  law  of  progres- 
sion of  mutes,  453-457  ;  correspondences,  458-60. 

Brief  History  of  the  German  Language,  462-469. 

Three  periods  of  history  of  High-German,  463 ;  Old  High- 
German  period,  464 ;  Middle  High-German  period,  465 ;  New 
High-German  period,  467  ;  what  the  present  German  is,  468  ; 
remarks,  469. 

German  Written  Character,  pp.  275. 

List  of  Irregular  Verbs,  pp.  278-284. 

Exercises,  First  Series,  pp.  285-334. 

"         Second  Series,  pp.  335-395. 

German-English  Vocabulary,  pp.  397-444. 

English-German  Vocabulary,  pp.  445-461. 

Index,  pp.  463-472. 


GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 


ALPHABET. 

1.  The  German  language  is  usually  printed  in  an 
alphabet  having  the  same  origin  as  our  own,  and  the 
same  extent ;  but  in  the  form  of  its  characters  nearly 
resembling  what  we  call  "Old  English,"  or  "Black- 
letter." 

This  is  one  of  the  derivative  forms  of  the  old  Latin  alphabet,  a 
product  of  the  perverse  ingenuity  of  monkish  scribes  in  the  Middle 
Ages.  It  was  in  general  use  throughout  Europe  at  the  time  of  the 
invention  of  printing,  but  was  abandoned  by  one  nation  after  another 
for  the  simpler,  neater,  and  more  legible  character  which  we  call 
"Roman,"  and  which  the  Germans  know  as  "Latin"  (lateinisch).  For 
scientific  hterature,  the  latter  is  in  more  common  use  among  the  Ger- 
mans themselves,  and  many  of  the  best  German  scholars  are  in  favor  of 
the  entire  relinquishment  of  the  other. 

2.  The  letters  of  the  ordinary  German  alphabet,  with 
their  "Koman"  equivalents,  and  the  names  by  which 
the  Germans  call  them,  are  as  follows : 


German 

Roman 

German 

German 

Boman 

German 

letters. 

equiv'ts. 

names. 

letters. 

equiv'ts. 

names. 

%  a 

a 

a,  (ah) 

®,9 

g 

ga 

33,6 

b 

ba  {bay) 

€>,^ 

h 

U 

S,  c 

c 

tsa 

5,  i 

i 

e{ee) 

®,b 

d 

da 

3,i 

J 

yot 

e,.  e 

e 

a 

«,  ! 

k 

ka 

^,  f 

f 

ef 

?,  I 

1 

el 

2   ' 

c      cc.    . 

•  •  • 
*  *  *      • 

ALPHABET. 

[4- 

kSfeiroali »  ' 

♦itoriiah** 

'German 

German 

Roman 

German 

letters. 

equiv'ts. 

names. 

letters. 

equiv'ts 

names. 

m,m 

m 

em 

X,t 

t 

ta 

%  n 

n 

en 

n,  u 

U 

u  (oo) 

0,0 

0 

0 

«,  u 

V 

fou  (found) 

%P 

P 

pa 

2B,tt) 

w 

va 

0,q 

q 

ku  (koo) 

X,  3? 

X 

ix 

di,x 

r 

er 

?)-9 

y 

ipsilon 

®,f, « 

s 

es 

3'i 

z 

tset 

1.  There  is  a  special  written  alphabet,  as  well  as  a  printed, 
for  the  German.  The  forms  of  its  letters,  and  specimens  of 
written  texts,  will  be  given  at  the  end  of  this  work.  The  begin- 
ner had  better  not  concern  himself  with  it,  as  he  can  make  prac- 
tical use  of  it  to  advantage  only  when  he  has  already  gained 
considerable  famiharity  with  the  language. 

,  2.  When  German  is  written  or  printed  in  the  "  Latin "  char- 
acter, each  German  letter  is  represented  by  its  Latin  equivalent, 
with  the  single  exception  that  for  the  compound  ^,  sz,  is  usually 
and  preferably  substituted  ss  (or  fs  :  see  49). 

3.  Certain  points  concerning  this  alphabet  require 
special  notice  on  the  part  of  the  learner : 

1.  Of  the  two  forms  of  small  s,  the  second,  or  short  §,  is  used 
y  at  the  end  of  a  word ;  the  other,  or  long  |,  in  other  situations : 

thus,  Ia§ ;  but  lejen,  fo. 

If  a  word  ending  in  §  is  followed  by  another  in  composition, 
it  is  still  written  with  short  § :  thus,  loycje^en,  In^'^er,  bc§^al6, 
baSfelbe,  ^onnerStaG,  Sicbe^Iirief.  Short  §  is  also  used  before  an 
ending  of  derivation  beginning  with  a  consonant :  thus,  33i§tf)um 
[^^i§him],  2Bei§!)cit,  BDel)aft,  ^a5d]t\\,  Utoeleui,  loybar;  further,  in 
foreign  words  before  other  consonants  than  t  or  |) :  thus,  5[Ra§fe 
33o§!et  or  35D§quet,  ^i§cour§,  ^igcipUn,  ^atriotigmug. 

2.  Some  of  the  letters  are  modified  in  form  by  combination 
with  one  another:  thus,  c^,  ch;  cf,  ck;  §,  sz;  ^,  tz. 

3.  Some  letters  resemble  one  another  so  much  as  to  be  easily 
confounded  by  the  beginner  : 

Thus,  33,  h,  and  35,  v;  g,  c,  and  ®,  e;  (S,  g,  and  @,  s;  ^,  fc, 
9?,  n,  and  ^,  r;  %,  d,  £),  o,  and  Q,  q;-  also,  b,  h,  b,  d,  and  ]^,  h; 
f,/,  and  f,  s;  !,  k,  and  t,  t;  r,  r,  and  r,  oc. 

4.  The  German  uses  capital  initial  letters 


f~ 


4]  NEW  ORTHOGRAPHY.'    ',   '  ,',3     '  '3' 

1.  As  the  English,  at  the  beginning  6i  senli^nces;  'of  ^'''^ 
lines  in  poetry,  and  of  direct  quotations. 

2.  For  all  nouns,  common  as  well  as  proper,  and  for      ^ 
words  used  as  nouns. 

Words  used  as  nouns  are  especially  adjectives  (129)  and    ^ 
infinitives  (340).    As  no  fixed  line  divides  their  ordinary  from 
their  substantive  use,  there  are  doubtful  cases  in  each  class, 
with  regard  to  which  usage  is  conflicting. 

But  nouns  and  noun-forms  used  as  other  parts  of  speech  — 
adverbs,  prepositions,  prefixes,  etc. — do  not  take  capitals :  thus, 
ftatt,  fang,  f(uG§,  lelb  tt)un. 

3.  For  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  when  used  in 
address,  with  the  value  of  those  of  the  second  person 
(153). 

That  is,  especially,  ©ie,  with  its  oblique  cases,  and  its  corre-    ;< 
sponding  possessive  3^r;  but  not  its  reflexive,  ]t(f). 

4.  Pronouns  of  the  second  person  properly  take  capitals  only 
when  intended  to  come  under  the  eye  of  the  person  addressed 
(as  in  letters,  etc.) ;  but  they  are  sometimes  written  with  capitals 
also  in  other  cases. 

5.  Kespecting  the  indefinite  pronouns  ^e'^^^^^^^^^  every  one, 
Semonb  any  one,  Dliemanb  no  one,  etc.,  and  the  pronominal 
adjectives  used  substantively,  such  as  afle§  everything,  matK^er 
many  a  one,  einige  some,  usage  is  very  various.  Some  write  ein 
with  a  capital  when  it  is  emphatic,  or  means  one. 

6.  For  adjectives  derived  from  names  of  persons  or 
places,  usually ;  but  not  for  adjectives  of  nationality,  as   /^ 
englijd)  English,  fran^ofifd)  French, 

7.  Adjectives  of  title,  or  those  used  in  respectful  and  compli- 
mentary address,  also  usually  take  capital  initials :  thus,  @ure 
^oniglic^e  C>ol&eit  your  royal  highness,  ©ic,  SBoWfleborener  ^txx 
you,  excellent  sir,  griebrid)  ber  .3tt)eite  or  ber  ^ro^e. 

NEW  ORTHOG-RAPHY. 

5.  1.  German  scholars  have,  for  some  time  past,  been 
attempting  to  improve  the  spelling  of  the  language  in  the  direc- 
tion of  simplicity  and  consistency,  especially  as  regards  the  use 
of  double  vowels,  of  double  consonants,  of  1^  as  the  sign  of  a  A. 
long  vowel,  etc.  Some  of  these  changes  have  recently  been 
officially  authorized,  and  are  gradually  coming  into  more  or  less 


4:\  PrvONUNClATION.  [6- 

general  use,  while  others  are  liable  to  be  met  with  in  the  works 
of  certain  authors. 

2.  In  this  grammar  the  old  and  stiU  prevailingly  used  orthog- 
raphy will  be  employed;   but  the  authorized  changes  will  be 
►   given  under  the  head  of  Pronunciation  after  the  various  letters, 
and  the  new  spelUng  of  each  word  wiQ  be  added  after  it  in 
brackets  wherever  it  occurs. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

6.  The  precise  mode  of  production  of  German  articulated 
sounds,  taken  singly  or  in  combination,  as  well  as  the  general 
tone  and  style  of  utterance,  can  only  be  acquired  through  means 
of  oral  instruction,  and  by  long  practice.  The  following  rules, 
however,  will  help  the  learner,  with  or  without  a  teacher,  to 
approximate  to  the  true  pronunciation  of  German  words. 

The  subject  is  a  comparatively  easy  one  to  deal  with,  because 

^    1.  There  are  no  silent  letters,  either  vowels  or  con- 
sonants. 

i-   Excepting  sometimes  ^  (28). 

y     2.  As  a  rule,  the  same  letter  receives  the  same  sound 
under  all  circumstances. 

^  Exceptions,  5,  c,  b,  g,  f,  t) — see  those  letters,  below. 

3.  The  German,  however,  like  many  other  languages, 
writes  certain  simple  sounds,  vowel  or  consonant,  with 
combinations  of  two  and  of  three  letters,  or  with 
digraphs  and  trigraphs. 

VOWELS. 

7.  Each  simple  vowel  sound  is  either  long  or  short, 
varying  in  quantity,  or  time  of  utterance,  without  at  the 
same  time  varying,  like  our  English  vowels,  to  any- 
notable  extent,  in  quality,  or  nature  of  sound. 

The  distinction  of  long  and  short  vowels  must  to  a  great 
extent  be  learned  by  experience ;  but  the  following  rules  will  be 
found  of  service : 
4-    1.  A  vowel  doubled,  or  followed  by  ^,  is  long. 

2.  A  vowel  is  short  before  a  double  consonant,  and 
"^"^aorfiL  usually  before  a  group  of  two  consonants  -  unless 


10]  VOWELS.  5 

tlie  latter  of  the  pair  or  group  belongs  to  an  appended 
ending  or  suffix. 

8.  %,  tt. — ^t  has  always  the  sound  of  our  open  or   ,•<; 
Italian  a,  in  far,  father. 

It  is  long  in  %a\,  ^aax,  33a^n,  naft,  5^amen. 

It  is  short  in  33afl,  5Rann,  ^atte,  ^anh,  fcf)arf,  !ann,  Balb. 

Particularly  avoid  the  flattening  of  this  vowel,  or  its  reduc- 
tion to  a  sound  at  all  resembling  that  of  our  "short  a"  in  hat,  can, 

1.  Some  words  vary  in  spelling  between  aa  and  a;  of  those 
more  usually  having  aa  the  New  Orthography  prescribes  a  in 
gjia^  measure,  ©c^af  sheep,  ©(^ar  troop  (and  =]d)ar  in  $flug* 
fd^ar),  ©tar  starling,  SBage  scales,  2Bare  w;are,  Bar  in  cash 
(Sarf(^aft  cas/i). 

9.  @,  e. — (S  is  pronounced  nearly  as  our  e  in  they,  or 
our  "long  a"  in/a^e,  only  without  the  distinct  vanishing- 
sound  of  ee  into  which  our  a  passes  at  its  close.  Short 
e  is  nearly  our  "  short  e  "  in  met,  men. 

It  is  long  in  §eer,  meftr,  'Sttij, 

It  is  short  in  benn,  fc^nell,  nett,  §err,  2Belt. 

In  long  syllables — and  by  some  authorities  also  in  short  ones 
— is  distinguished  a  closer  and  an  opener  utterance  of  the  e,  the 
latter  inclining  very  slightly  toward  our  "  short  a  "  (in  hat,  can). 
The  difference  is  analogous  to  that  between  the  French  e  and  e. 
Thus,  e  is  said  to  be  close  in  me'^r,  Ute!^,  jeber  (first  syllable),  and 
open  in  (the  first  syllables  of)  Seben,  geben,  beten.  No  rules  are 
to  be  given  respecting  the  occurrence  of  this  distinction ;  nor  is 
it  much  to  be  insisted  on. 

Unlike  the  other  vowels,  e  is  notably  slighted  and  obscured  in 
sound  when  unaccented.  Especially  before  a  liquid  (n,  I,  r),  in  a 
syllable  following  the  accent,  it  acquires  nearly  the  tone  of  our 
"  short  It "  (in  but),  and  becomes  very  inconspicuous. 

Guard  against  giving  to  final  e  the  sound  of  English  e;  it 
should  have  a  very  open  utterance,  and  in  parts  of  Germany 
even  becomes  like  our  "short  u"  (in  but,  puff). 

1.  The  New  Orthography  writes  §erbe  herd,  instead  of  §eerbe. 

10.  3f  t. — 3  has  the  sound  of  our  i  inpiqice,  machine, 
or  of  our  "  long  e,"  or  double  ee.  When  short,  it  is  more 
like  our  "  short  i  "  (in  pin),  yet  somewhat  less  removed 
than  that  is  from  our  "  long  e." 


-f- 


6  PRONUNCIATION.  [10^ 

It  is  long  in  t^n,  t^r,  Sgel,  bir,  Wint. 

It  is  short  in  biflig,  bitten,  ^jinter,  ift,  ^rift. 

3  is  never  written  double,  and  it  is  followed  by  ^  only  in  the 
personal  pronouns  i^n,  t^m,  i^r,  i^rer,  i^nen,  and  the  possessives 
i^r  and  i^rig.  To  indicate  its  long  sound  an  e  is  generally 
added,  making  the  digraph,  or  compound  vowel,  ie  (18). 

11.  C,  0. — D  has  always  the  tone  of  our  "longo/' 
except  the  distinct  vanishing-sound  of  u  (po)  with  which 
the  latter  ends. 

It  is  long  in  5!Jloor,  33ol^ne,  ^otp  (Bebot,  ^ober. 

It  is  short  in  ']oU,  (SJott,  often,  molh,  ^opf. 

Never  give  to  o  the  quahty  of  our  "short  o"  in  Iwt,  on,  etc.; 
this  is  no  proper  o-sound,  but  pretty  nearly  the  German  short  a. 

1.  The  New  Orthography  writes  So§  lot  (and  lofen  and 
Sofung). 

12.  U,  tl. — Vi  long  is  our  u  in  ruhf  or  oo  in  hoot ; 
VL  short  is  nearly  our  u  in  pvM,  or  oo  in  book,  but  less 
removed  from  long  u. 

It  is  long  in  UI)r,  nun,  gut,  ru^en. 

It  is  short  in  q^ruft,  ©tunbe,  !RuII. 

U  is  never  doubled. 

Be  especially  careful  not  to  give  to  u,  under  any  circum- 
stances, the  pronunciation  of  English  u  in  union,  mute,  cure ;  to 
do  so  is  to  put  a  y  before  it. 

13.  ^,  ^. — ^  is  found  only  in  foreign  words  (except, 
according  to  the  usage  of  some,  in  the  digraphs  al),  et) : 
see  below,  19.3),  and  is  ordinarily  pronounced  as  an  t 
in  the  same  situation. 

Examples :  ©^rup,  %\\)\,  \X)X\]^,  9J^t)rte. 

Some  require  that  in  words  from  the  Greek,  of  more  learned 
and  less  popular  use,  it  should  have  the  sound  of  ii  (17)- 

MODIFIED  V0WEI.S. 

14.  1.  The  modified  vowels  are,  historically,  prod- 
ucts of  the  mixture  of  an  e  or  t-sound  with  a,  o,  u,  or  of 
the  phonetic  assimilation  of  the  latter  to  the  former  in 
a  succeeding  syllable.  They  were  written  %q,  Dc,  Uc, 
ae,  oe,  ue,  and  are  still  often  so  written  when  the  vowel 


17]  MODIFIED  VOWELS.  7 

modified  is  a  capital ;  but  when  small  letters  were 
used,  the  e  came  to  be  first  written  above  the  other 
vowel — thus,  a,  Of  it — and  then,  for  convenience,  was 
reduced  in  common  use  to  a  couple  of  dots — as  d,  b,  it. 

2.  They  are  never  doubled  ;  and  hence,  a  noun  containing  in 
the  singular  a  double  vowel,  if  requiring  modification  in  the 
plural,  loses  one  vowel :  thus,  (gaal  forms  ©die,  %a^  forms  S]er. 

15.  %,  S.— S  has  the  sound  of  an  open  c — that  is  to 
say,  of  an  e  very  slightly  approaching  our  *'  short  a"; 
it  is  everywhere  hardly  distinguishable  from  an  e  in 
the  same  situation. 

It  is  long  in  |?(dger,  prdgen,  Sfer,  Spacer,  ^[fldftre. 
It  is  short  in  §dnbe,  Spfel,  ftdttc,  ^drfer,  fdflen. 

1.  A  number  of  words  vary  in  their  spelhng  between  d  and  e. 
Of  those  often  spelt  with  e  the  New  Orthography  prefers  d  in 
©ebdrbe  gesture;  and  in  those  oftenest  written  with  d  it  prefers 
e  in  uBerfd)tt)cnQUd)  exuberant,  and  tnelfd)  Welsh.  For  the  inter- 
change of  du  and  eu  see  below,  21.3. 

16.  O,  5. — D  is  really  produced  by  a  combination 
of  that  position  of  the  tongue  in  which  e  (e  in  they)  is 
uttered,  and  of  that  position  of  the  lips  in  which  o  is 
uttered ;  but  it  is  not  easily  given  by  a  conscious  effort 
so  to  dispose  the  organs.  It  is  nearest  in  tone  to  our 
u  in  hurt,  but  is  notably  different  from  this,  verging 
considerably  toward  the  e  of  they.  It  is  closely  akin 
with  the  French  e^^-sounds. 

It  is  long  in  Ofen,  mo^^en,  fc^on,  ftoren,  6l. 

It  is  short  in  fonnte,  bffnen,  C)o(Ic,  ©potter,  Orter. 

To  form  o,  therefore,  endeavor  to  hit  an  intermediate  sound 
between  the  vowels  of  hurt  and  hate. 

The  German  poets  frequently  make  o  rime  with  the  simple 
C,  and  in  parts  of  Germany  the  two  are  hardly  distinguished. 
But  their  real  difference,  as  properly  pronounced,  is  quite 
marked,  and  should  never  be  neglected. 

17.  tl,  tt. — U  is  produced  by  a  combination  of  that 
position  of  the  tongue  in  which  i  (^  in  piqiie,  pin)  is 
uttered,  and  of  that  position  of  the  lips  in  which  u  {u  in 


8  PEONUNCIATION.  [17- 

rule^  pull)  is  uttered.  It  is  tlie  same  sound  with,  the 
French  u.  To  utter  it,  first  round  the  lips  to  the 
U-position,  and  then,  without  moving  them,  fix  the 
tongue  to  say  i  (ee) — or  vice  versa. 

It  is  long  in  libel,  8d)ulcr,  miibe,  tntju,  tix%  iibcr. 

It  is  short  in  ^IM,  Tlixikx,  Uppigfeit,  fiiEcn,  §iittc,  biinn. 

The  sounds  of  o  and  ii  are,  among  the  German  vowels,  much 
the  hardest  to  acquire,  and  cannot  be  mastered  without  assidu- 
ous practice  under  a  teacher. 

DIPHTHONGS  AND  VOCAL  DIGRAPHS. 

18.  For  t,  D,  11,  see  Modified  Vowels,  above  (14-17). 
3c,  as  already  noticed  (10),  is  an  t  made  long  by  the 

addition  of  an  e,  instead  of  by  doubling,  or  the  addition 
of  ^. 

Historically,  te  often  represents  an  original  combination  of 
separate  vowels. 

Examples :  bie,  lief,  liegen,  grieben,  3fliemen. 

At  the  end  of  a  few  words  (mostly  coming  from  the  Latin, 
and  always  accented  on  the  preceding  syllable),  the  e  of  ie  has 
its  own  proper  sound,  and  the  i  is  pronounced  like  y  before  it, 
or  else  forms  an  independent  syllable:  thus,  Sinien,  (^lorie, 
gamilie,  Sragobte ;  also  ^nie  (plural  of  ^nie,  and  better  spelt 
^niee). 

1.  The  New  Orthography  writes  te  instead  of  i  in  verbs  (404, 
II.  4)  hke  marfd^ieren,  ftubieren,  ^antieren. 

19.  1.  ?li. — %i  is  a  combination  of  letters  represent- 
ing a  true  diphthongal  sound,  which  is  composed  of  the 
two  elements  a  (a  in  far)  and  i  {{  in  pique).  It  is  pro- 
nounced nearly  as  the  English  aye  (meaning  *  yes '),  or 
like  the  "long  *"  oi  aisle,  ish,  but  with  the  first  con- 
stituent of  that  sound  made  very  slightly  opener  and 
more  conspicuous,  a  little  dwelt  on.  It  occurs  in  very 
few  words. 

Examples:  §ain,  SSaife,  5!}^ai. 

2.  @i. — (Si  represents  the  same  sound,  and  is  of 
very  much  more  frequent  occurrence,  being  the  ordin- 
ary German  equivalent  of  our  "long  *." 


24]  DIPHTHONGS.  9 

Examples :  ^ein,  33eil,  @imer,  fei,  (Si,  ©itelfeit. 

3.  ^^  and  et)  were  formerly  written  in  certain  words  instead 
of  ai  and  ei :  they  are  now  gone  nearly  out  of  use,  only  a  few 
authors  retaining  them. 

Examples :  Tlat),  fetjn,  fel),  ^oliset). 

20.  ?(lt. — 5(u  combines  the  two  sounds  of  a  (in  far) 
and  u  (in  rule),  and  is  pronounced  almost  precisely  like 
the  English  ou,  ow,  in  house,  down,  but  with  the  first 
element,  the  a-sound,  a  shade  more  distinct. 

Examples:  §au§,  faufen,  luge,  ©au,  braun,  Waul. 

21.  1.  ©tt. — ^u  is  most  nearly  like  the  English  oi, 
oy,  in  hoil,  loy,  differing  chiefly  in  having  the  first  ele- 
ment briefer  and  less  conspicuous.  Theoretically,  its 
final  element  is  the  ii-sound. 

Examples :  i^eutc,  ncu,  ©uter,  greunbe,  euer. 

2.  9(u,  ttU. — Su  is  the  modified  diphthong  corre- 
sponding to  ait,  as  d  to  a.  It  is  pronounced  in  the 
same  manner  as  eu. 

Examples:  SuQier,  Oaute,  Braunen,  ^rciume. 

3.  There  are  a  number  of  words  which  vary  in  their  spelling 
between  eu  and  du.  Of  those  oftenest  spelt  with  du  the  New 
Orthography  prefers  eu  in  bleueu  maul,  beud)ten  seem,  (SJreuel 
horror,  greulid)  horrible,  leugnen  deny,  f(f)neu5en  snuff. 

22.  Hi. — Ui  is  found  only  in  :^ui,  pfut,  and  is  pro- 
nounced like  we. 

CONSONANTS. 

23.  S,  b. — 33  has  the  same  sound  as  in  English,  when 
followed  in  the  same  syllable  by  a  vowel  or  a  semivowel 
(r,  I),  or  when  doubled. 

Examples :  33iber,  33uBe,  1)dbtn,  ober,  33Iet,  breci^en,  ^bbe. 

In  other  situations — i.e.,  when  final,  or  followed  by  a 
consonant  in  general — it  loses  its  sonant  character,  and 
is  converted  into  the  corresponding  surd,  p. 

Examples:  ©tab,  (je^oBt,  ob,  f^ub,  C)cib§bura'. 

24.  6,  e.-^(£,  in  words  properly  German,  is  found 


10  PEONUNCIATION.  [24- 

only  in  the  combinations  (^,  d,  fd),  for  which  see  below, 
43,  44,  48. 

In  words  borrowed  from  other  languages  and  not 
Germanized  in  spelling,  it  is,  as  in  English,  hard  before 
a,  0,  u,  I,  n,  r,  but  soft  before  c,  i,  t) :  in  the  former  case, 
it  is  pronounced  as  k,  in  the  latter,  as  ts  (German  ^:  42). 

Examples :  ^ato,  (^^arcer,  (Concert,  Sicero,  CUaubiu^,  Ocean. 

1.  There  are  many  foreign  words  in  regard  to  which  usage  is 
still  unsettled,  either  !  or  c  being  written  for  the  hard  sound, 
and  either  3  or  c  for  the  soft  sound :  thus,  farcer  or  ^arjer, 
(Concert  or  ^onjert. 

25.*  2),  b. — ^,  like  h,  has  its  own  proper  sonant 
sound,  that  of  English  d,  before  a  vowel,  or  any  con- 
sonant that  may  intervene  between  it  and  a  vowel  in 
the  same  syllable  ;  also  when  doubled. 

Examples :  ^amm,  bid,  ^orf,  bu,  ^bel,  brei,  ^voaU,  ^robbel. 

At  the  end  of  a  word,  or  of  a  syllable  before  another 
consonant,  it  is  changed  to  the  corresponding  surd,  t. 

Examples :  2kh,  ^iahi,  milb,  ^Ibenb,  lanblid). 

1.  The  combination  bt  is  the  equivalent  of  a  double  t,  the  b 
not  being  separately  pronounced :  thus,  gefanbt,  berebt,  Idbt, 
f anbte ;  and  in  a  few  words  the  spelling  wavers  between  bt  and  t. 
The  New  Orthography  writes  tot  dead,  instead  of  the  usual 
tobt  (hence  also  toten,  etc.) ;  also  Qcfcl)eit  clever,  instead  of 
gefdjeibt. 

26.  |5,  f . — 5  ^^s  always  the  same  sound  as  in 
English. 

27.  @,  g. — @,  like  the  other  sonant  mutes,  h  and  b, 
has  its  proper  hard  sound  (as  English  g  in  go,  give,  get) 
when  doubled,  or  when  followed  in  the  same  syllable 
by  a  vowel  or  a  liquid  ((,  it,  r).  It  is  never  softened 
before  e  or  t — as  it  also  is  not  in  any  English  word  of 
Germanic  origin. 

Examples :  (S5an§,  Qcgen,  (^ier,  gut,  grog,  ^la§,  (^nabe,  ^ogge. 

In  the  same  situations  in  which  h  and  b  become  p  and 
t,  g  is  also  changed  to  a  surd ;  it  does  not,  however, 
assume  the*  value  of  !,  but  rather  that  of  cI)  (43). 


34]  CONSONANTS.  11 

Examples:  %aQ,  aoQ,  3w9/  ^ogt,  ^J^afib,  ru^ig,  laglic^. 

There  is  much  difference  of  usage  among  Germans,  and  of 
opinion  among  German  orthoepists,  as  to  the  pronunciation  of 
g.  All,  indeed,  agree  to  give  it  the  hard  sound  when  initial. 
But  in  other  situations,  some  always  soften  it  to  d) — e.  g.,  in 
^^Qsn,  Siege.  Others  do  not  allow  it  anywhere  the  precise 
c^-sound,  especially  not  after  the  hard  vowels  (a,  0,  u),  but  pro- 
nounce it  nearly  as  f,  or  as  something  between  a  g  and  f,  or 
between  a  f  and  (f) — and  so  on. 

In  many  words  taken  from  the  French,  g  has  its  French 
sound,  like  that  of  the  English  s  in  vision,  or  z  in  azure:  thus, 
(^enie,  ^age,  Sngenieur,  Orange,  genieren. 

28.  §,  1^. — §  has  the  sound  of  English  h  when  it 
begins  a  word  (or  either  of  the  suffixes  {)eit,  I)aft).  Else- 
where it  is  silent,  serving  either  to  lengthen  the  pre- 
ceding vowel,  or  to  make  a  hiatus  between  two  vowels. 

For  tf),  which  is  pronounced  as  simple  t,  see  below  (37.2).  For 
(^  and  jd),  see  below  (43,  48). 

Examples:  I)in,  fter,  ^at, ©of,  ^ni,  ^ol^er,  l!inbI)cit,J)al)l^aft,frDft, 
raf(^,  ©^u^,  rul)en,  %^r\,  (^I)re,  cl)cr,  i()m,  O^r,  tl)un,  ^t!)er. 

29.  Sf  J» — 3  ^s  always  pronounced  like  our  y  con- 
sonant. 

Examples:  3a!^r,  jung,  ieber,  So^ann,  bejaften. 

30.  B,  f, — ^  has  always  the  sound  of  English  h 
Instead  of  double  f  is  written  c!  (which,  however,  if 
separated  in  syllabication,  becomes  t4). 

Examples :  faun,  fennen,  f^eib,  £reibe,  ^nie,  ^nabe,  ^lode,  bruf= 
fen  (but  brurfcn). 

31.  8,  I ;  SK,  tit. — These  letters  have  the  same 
sounds  as  their  English  correspondents. 

32.  91,  II. — ^  has  usually  the  same  "Sound  as  Eng- 
lish n.  Like  the  latter,  it  has  before  f  the  value  of  ng : 
thus,  finfen,  ^ant 

For  the  digraph  ng,  see  below  (45). 

33.  $JJ,  Ji. — ^  is  pronounced  as  in  English.  For 
the  digraph  pi),  see  below  (46.2). 

34.  £l,  r|. — O,  as  in  English,  is  always  followed  by 


12  PEONUNCIATION.  [34- 

XI,  and  qu  is  pronounced  as  hv,  but  with  the  pure  labial 
utterance  of  the  -y-sound,  as  explained  below  (under 
ttj,  39). 
Examples :  Oual,  quer,  Ouirl,  quoH. 

35.  91,  t. — ^  has  a  decidedly  more  distinct  and 
forcible  utterance  than  in  English,  being  more  or  less 
rolled  or  trilled,  and  hence  formed  a  little  further  for- 
ward in  the  mouth  than  our  r.  In  every  situation,  it 
must  be  clearly  heard. 

Examples :  9ianb,  reben,  flitter,  Sfloftr,  runb,  ^cr,  §crr,  ^Irbetter, 
gii^rer,  t)ermer!en,  marmorner,  eriernbarer. 

36.  @,  f,  §. — ©,  after  a  manner  analogous  with  b, 
b,  and  g,  has  its  proper  surd  or  hissing  sound  only 
when  doubled,  final,  or  standing  before  a  consonant; 
before  a  vowel  (not  before  a  semivowel ;  nor  when  pre- 
ceded by  a  surd  consonant,  as  t,  cf),  or  a  liquid,  I,  m,  n, 
r)  it  approaches  a  sonant,  or  buzzing  sound,  that  of  our 
z,  and  in  the  usage  of  some  localities,  or  of  some  classes, 
it  is  a  full  s;  according,  however,  to  the  better  sup- 
ported pronunciation,  it  is  a  compromise  between  s 
and  2,  a  kind  of  sz.  Before  t  and  p  at  the  beginning 
of  a  word,  it  is  usually  and  regularly  pronounced 
as  sh  (rather  less  broadly  and  conspicuously  than  our 
common  sh);  but  the  pronunciation  as  written  has  also 
good  usage  (especially  in  Northern  Germany)  in  its 
favor. 

Double  §>  (f^,  ff)  is  always  surd  or  hissing;  for  % 
see  49. 

Examples:  (S5Ia§,  ^(x\i,  S3o§f)eit,  tt)tj]en,  Sootfe,  emftG,  alfo,  ©o:^n, 
©eele,  33efcn,  (S^efang,  fteif,  ©trang,  ©pur,  fpringen. 

37.  %,  t. — %,  in  words  properly  German,  has  always 
the  ordinary  sound  of  English  t 

Examples:  %o.\t\,  Saube,  %zii,  treten,  Xritt,  ^inte. 

1.  In  the  terminations  of  certain  words  from  the 
Latin  or  French,  t  is  pronounced  as  ^  (i.  e.,  as  English 
ts)  before  ia,  te,  io :  thus,  martialifd^,  patient,  Station. 


39]  CONSONANTS.  13 

2.  Xf)  is  pronounced  always  as  simple  t,  its  I)  having, 
in  real  German  words,  no  historical  ground,  but  only  a 
phonetic  value,  as  indicating  the  long  quantity  of  the 
neighboring  vowel :  thus,  ^f)a(,  Zi)at,  Zi)on,  t^un,  Xt)ure, 
X^rcine. 

3.  The  New  Orthography  omits  the  "f)  of  tft  at  the  beginning  of 
a  word  in  all  cases  in  which  the  following  vowel  is  otherwise 
shown  to  be  long:  thus,  %m  animal,  %d\  part  (with  Urteil, 
SSorteil,  etc.),  ^eer  tor,  kmx  dear,  %an  dew,  t)erteibiGen  defend; 
also  in  %^vixm  tower,  and  in  the  suffix  =tum  (for  ^f^uin)  :  thus, 
9tei^tum  wealth.  But  the  f)  is  retained  in  xi)ee  tea.  It  writes 
t  instead  of  t^  everywhere  at  the  end  of  a  word  (or  of  a  radical 
syllable  before  a  suffix  or  ending) :  thus,  glut  flood,  9Jlut  spirit, 
5^ot  need,  ^at  council,  rot  red,  mert  dear,  Sddtjel  riddh,  ^tem 
breath,  5!Jliete  hire,  ^ute  rod — instead  of  giut^,  etc. 

Some  writers  omit  the  Ij  of  t^  in  all  cases. 
For  ^,  see  below  (61). 

38,  §B,  H. — '^  is  hardly  found  except  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word,  and  there  has  the  sound  of  English  /. 
In  the  case  or  two  where  it  occurs  in  the  interior  of 
words  before  a  vowel,  it  is  pronounced  as  our  v;  as 
also,  in  words  taken  from  foreign  languages  which  give 
it  the  latter  sound. 

Examples:  35atcr,  ml,  SSerfaH,  t)or,  t)oIIig,  SSolf,  freDeIn, 
S!Iat)e,  55acan3,  SSenebig,  t)ioIett,  ^ult)er. 

39.  SB,  Ul. — 3S,  when  not  preceded  by  a  consonant 
in  the  same  syllable,  is  commonly  and  correctly  pro- 
nounced precisely  as  the  English  v,  or  between  the 
edges  of  the  upper  teeth  and  lower  lip.  Another  mode 
of  its  utterance,  which  is  also  supported  by  good 
authority,  excludes  the  action  of  the  teeth,  and  pro- 
duces the  sound  between  the  edges  of  the  lips  alone. 
As  thus  made,  it  is  still  distinctly  a  v  (not  a  w),  though 
one  of  a  different  quality  from  our  v :  the  difference, 
however,  is  not  conspicuous  to  an  unpractised  ear.  All 
authorities  agree  in  requiring  this  purely  labial  pro- 
nunciation after  a  consonant  (which  consonant  is  nearly 


14  PBONUNCIATION.  [34- 

always  a  sibilant,  fc^  or  j) :  and  the  same  belongs,  as 
above  noticed  (34),  to  the  u  of  the  combination  qu. 

Examples:  2Belle,  2Baf)n,  2But^,  mliQn,  {corner,  aiDei,  %mtU 

40.  X,  J. — 3£  is  found  in  only  an  exceedingly  small 
number  of  words  originally  German.  It  has  the  sound 
of  English  x  (ks),  whether  as  initial  or  elsewhere. 

Examples:  Igt,  C)e£e,  %tii,  ^mopljon,  3Eenien,  3Ei)roGra|)l)tc. 

41.  ^,  ^. — ^  in  German  is  a  vowel  only  (13). 

42.  2,  3. — 3  is  always  pronounced  as  ts,  except  in 
the  combination  [3  (see  below,  49) :  its  two  constituents 
should  be  sharply  and  distinctly  uttered.  Instead  of 
double  J  is  written  t^  (51). 

Examples :  ^inn,  SoH,  ju,  gerjiel^en,  gagen,  ^eijen,  ^rinj,  §ol3, 
^ers,  $Iafe,  stDei. 

CONSONANTAL  DIGEAPHS  AND  TETGKAPHS. 

43.  g]|,  dj. — The  compound  d)  has  two  sounds: 
one  is  deeper  or  more  guttural,  nearly  our  throat- 
clearing  or  hawking  sound,  and  is  heard  after  a,  0,  u, 
an ;  the  other,  after  any  other  vowel  or  a  consonant,  is 
more  palatal,  made  over  the  middle  of  the  tongue,  and 
approaches  the  sA-sound,  or  is  nearly  as  we  should 
pronounce  Jiy  in  hyen. 

(^^,  in  all  situations,  is  a  rough  breathing,  an  h,  rasped  out 
with  conspicuous  force  through  as  nearly  as  possible  the  same 
position  of  the  organs  in  which  the  preceding  vowel  was  uttered. 
According,  then,  as  the  vowel  is  one  produced  in  the  throat — 
namely,  a,  0,  U — or  one  which  comes  forth  between  the  flat  of 
the  tongue  and  the  palate — namely,  c,  i,  t),  d,  b,  ix — or  as  it  is  a 
diphthong  whose  final  constituent  is  of  each  class  respectively 
— -namely,  an  on  the  one  hand ;  a\,  ei,  Ciu,  cu  on  the  other — the 
following  d)  has  a  different  pronunciation,  guttural  or  palatal. 

1 .  (If)  after  a  consonant  has  the  softer  or  palatal  sound. 

As  above  noticed  (27),  c\  not  followed  by  a  vowel  etc. 
ha.s  the  sound  which  d)  would  have  in  the  same  situa- 
tion. 


46]  CONSONANTS.  15 

Examples :  guttural  c^ :  35a(^,  ho6),  33u(^,  an^,  Tla6)tx,  %^t\xm, 

palatal  c^:  ^ec^,  rc(i)t,  i(^,  ni(^t§,  ftd^er,  33ud)er, 
a^kn,  Sdc^er,  Soccer,  rei(^,  euc^,  feud)!,  bduc^te,  burc^,  i)old^,  man* 
(f)er,  2Bea,  ric^tig,  9)^dgbe,  beugte,  Suglein,  Stt'erg. 

The  fault  particularly  to  be  avoided  in  practising  the  d) -sound 
is  the  closure  of  the  organs,  forming  a  mute  consonant,  a  kind 
of  k  or  g.  If  such  a  mispronunciation  is  once  acquired,  it  can- 
not be  unlearned  without  great  trouble.  Much  better  utter  a 
mere  breathing,  an  h,  at  first,  depending  upon  further  practice 
to  enable  one  by  degrees  to  roughen  it  to  the  desired  point  of 
distinctness. 

2.  (£^  before  §,  when  the  §>  belongs  to  the  stem  of 
the  word,  and  not  to  an  added  suffix  or  inflectional  end- 
ing, loses  its  peculiar  sound,  and  is  uttered  as  Jc  (i.e., 

d)g  as  x). 
Examples:  2Ba(^§,  Od}fe,  5u(^§,  33ud)fe,  ®ei(^fel,  tt)cc^feln. 

3.  In  words  taken  from  the  Greek,  d)  has  usually  the  softer 
or  palatal  d)-sound  before  e  or  i,  as  (S;i)irurg,  $cted)ien ;  but  else- 
where it  is  pronounced  as  f :  thus,  (XI)aractcr,  (^I)or,  S^lor,  (Sftrift. 
In  words  from  the  French,  it  has  the  French  c/i-sound,  or  that 
of  German  fd)  (our  sh):  thus,  9ied)erc^e,  d)armant,  (Sl)auf]ee. 

44.  ^t,  i, — Sf,  as  already  explained  (30),  is  the 
written  equivalent  of  a  double  4. 

45.  91g,  tt(|. — 9^CJ  is  the  guttural  nasal,  the  equiva- 
lent of  English  ng,  standing  related  to  !  and  c^  as  it  to  t 
and  b,  and  iii  to  p  and  h.  Its  g  is  not  separately  uttered, 
as  g,  before  either  a  vowel  or  a  consonant :  thus,  finger 
like  singer  J  not  like  finger;  Ijimgrig  like  hangrope,  not 
like  hungry. 

Examples :  jung,  fingen,  (Bang,  ^dngc,  Idngcr,  bringlid^. 

46.  1.  ^f,  J)f. — ^f  is  often  etymologically  the  equiva- 
lent of  our  p  (^fiuib  pound,  ^]al'){  pale),  but  it  is  uttered 
regularly  as  a  combination  of  p  and  f. 

2.  ^J,  ^^, — ^f)  is  found  only  in  words  of  foreign 
origin,  and  has  the  sound  of  f,  as  in  English. 

Examples :  ^fcffer,  ^jerb,to|)f,  rupfcn ;  ^f)a]e,  $ftD§pl)or,  ^rap^it. 


16  PRONTTNCIATION.  [47- 

47.  Ctt,  (\n. — This  combination  has  been  abeady 
explained  (34,  39). 

48.  ^Sf,  f^. — @c^  is  the  equivalent  of  our  sk 

Examples:  ©d^iff,  f(?^on,  ](^eu,  %]^^,  5if(^,  ©r^nur,  <B^mn, 
©(^lo^,  ©d^merg,  fc^reiben,  !inbif(^. 

49.  @},  ^. — @J  is  pronounced  as  a  double  g  (ff,  36), 
the  J  losing  its  distinctive  character  in  the  combination. 
Double  ff  is  not  written  at  the  end  of  a  word,  nor  before 
a  consonant  (t),  nor  after  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong, 
^  being  in  such  situations  substituted  for  it. 

Examples:  lap  la^t  (from  lajfen),  ©c^oB  (but  ©d^bffe), genic^en, 
©trau^  and  ©trdu^e,  ^a^,  ^'d^li^,  t)a^te  (but  f)afjett). 

As  was  remarked  above  (2.2),  when  German  is  written  or 
printed  in  the  Roman  character,  §  should  be  represented  by  ss 
(according  to  the  rules  of  the  New  Orthography,  rather  by  the 
obsolete  and  barbarous  combination  fs). 

1.  The  New  Orthography  writes  the  suffix  =ni^  (408-9)  with  a 
single  g :  thus,  (^Ieid)tu§,  ginfterntS. 

60.  Xi^,  i^. — Xf),  as  noticed  above  (37),  is  equivalent 
to  t  simply. 

61.  X},  ^. — ^^  is  the  written  equivalent  of  a  double 
5,  and  is  pronounced  in  the  same  manner  as  a  single  ^. 

Examples :  pafe,  pd^e,  ft^en,  Tlix^t,  iefet,  pIbfeUd). 

GENEEAL  SUPPLEMENTAKY  EULES. 

52.  1.  Other  combinations  of  letters  than  those 
treated  of  above,  whether  of  vowels  or  of  consonants, 
are  pronounced  as  the  single  letters  of  which  they  are 
made  up. 

2.  Doubled  consonants,  however,  are  not  pronounced 
double,  but  in  the  same  manner  as  single  ones. 

Double  consonants,  in  general,  have  no  etymological  ground, 
but  are  an  orthographical  device  for  indicating  the  short  quan- 
tity of  the  preceding  vowel. 

53.  But  doubled  consonants,  or  double  vowels,  or  any  of  the 
foregoing  combinations  of  vowels  or  consonants,  if  produced  by 


55]  FOEEIGN  WOBDS.  17 

the  coming  together  of  the  final  and  initial  letters  of  the  parts 
making  up  a  word — either  by  composition  or  by  the  addition  of 
prefixes  or  of  suffixes  of  derivation  beginning  with  a  consonant 
— are  pronounced  as  in  those  parts  taken  separately.    Thus, 

beerbet  (be=erbet)    not  as  ^eere;  geirrt  (ge4rrt)  not  as  @eier; 

beurtt)eilt  (bentrt^eitt)"  33eute;  ^anbbruc!  (^onb=bruc!)  "  (Sbba; 

SHittag  (9)nt4ag)        "  'Mittt;  iiJegging  (weg.ging)        "  (Sgge; 

5lbbUb  <m=-bUb)         "  (Sbbe;  auffaUt  (auMallt)  '*  3tffe; 

t)ieUeicf)t  (t)iel4ei(f)t)    "  Selle;  benuoc^  (ben^norf))  "  §enne; 

tierreift  (uer-reift)        "  fperren;  ba^felbe  (bag4etbe)  "  beffen; 

tuatfifam  (tt)Qd)4am)     "  H)ad)fen;  ungar  (uu-gar)  "  Ungar; 

^ougrfjen  (C5au§=(f)en)  "  ^af^en;  §oii§5in8  (^auS^^jing)     "  au^er; 

^utsuder(^u^u(fer)  "  ^ilje;  megeffen  (tt)eg=e[fen)        "  gegeffen; 

Slbart  (5tb=Qrt)  "  ?tbenb;  ^anbeifen  (§anb=eifen)  "  f)anbe(n» 

54.  Foreign  Wards. — 1.  Many  words  taken  into  German  from 
other  languages  (especially  French)  are  made  more  or  less  like 
German  words  in  spelling  and  in  pronunciation.  But  many 
others  retain  their  foreign  peculiarities.  The  most  common  and 
important  of  these  have  been  noticed  above,  under  the  different 
consonants;  less  frequent  are  the  following:  c^n,  pronounced 
like  ny,  as  in  gftampagne,  Sorgnette;  II,  like  hj,  as  in  33iEarb, 
SBillet;  gu,  as  hard  g,  as  in  ^uitarre;  qu,  as  k,  as  in33ouquet; 
n  with  preceding  vowel  as  a  nasal  vowel,  as  in  Baffin,  9lefrain, 
33aIIon.  So  also  among  vowels  :  a\,  as  a,  as  in  ^Iffaire ;  an  and 
eau,  as  o,  as  in  (Epaulette,  pateau ;  eu,  as  o,  as  in  ^bieu,  Sn^^nieur ; 
DU,  as  u,  as  in  feoufin,  ^DUr;  oi,  hke  English  wa  in  was,  as  in 
SJlemoiren,  toilette, 

2.  In  pronouncing  the  classical  languages,  Latin  and  Greek, 
the  Germans  follow,  in  general,  the  rules  of  utterance  of  their 
own  letters,  both  vowels  and  consonants.  But,  in  reading  Latin, 
g  is  always  hard,  and  v  has  the  sound  of  EngUsh  v  (German  to), 
not  of  German  t)  (English/). 


ACCENT. 

55.  Tlie  accentuation  of  German  words  is  so  generally 
accordant  in  its  principles  witli  that  of  English  words, 
that  it  occasions  little  difficulty,  even  to  the  beginner, 
and  can  be  left  to  be  learned  by  practice,  without  detailed 
exposition  and  illustration.  The  following  are  its  lead- 
ing rules : 


18  ACCENT.  [55- 

1.  The  accent  ordinarily  rests,  in  words  uncom- 
pounded,  on  the  radical  or  chiefly  significant  syllable — 
never  on  terminations  of  declension  or  conjugation, 
almost  never  on  suffixes  of  derivation,  and  never  on  the 
inseparable  prefixes  of  verbs  (302),  either  in  the  forms 
of  conjugation  or  in  derivative  words. 

Exceptions  are  :  the  sufBx  el  (408);  the  i  or  ie  of  verbs  ending 
in  the  infinitive  in  tren  or  ieren  (404) ;  and  a  few  wholly  anomalous 
words,  as  leben'big  (from  le'ben,  le'benb). 

2.  In  compound  words,  except  compound  particles, 
the  accent  rests,  as  in  English,  upon  the  first  member. 
The  separable  prefixes  of  verbs  are  treated  as  forming 
compounds,  and  receive  the  accent,  in  the  verbal  forms 
and  in  most  verbal  derivatives. 

Exceptions  are :  many  compounds  with  all,  as  aflma^'tig 
almighty,  aflein  alone,  allererft  first  of  all;  compound  words  of 
direction,  like  ©iiboft  south-east;  and  a  number  of  others,  as 
Sa^rl^un'bert  century,  leibei'gen  vassal,  tDiflforn'men  welcome. 

3.  Compound  particles  usually  accent  the  final  mem- 
ber :  thus,  ba^in  thither,  obgleicf)  although,  ^u\oVc\t  accord- 
ing to,  jut) or  previously. 

Exceptions  are :  many  adverbs  which  are  properly  cases  of 
compound  nouns  or  adjectives  ;  and  some  others :  compare  425. 

4  The  negative  prefix  m\  has  the  accent  commonly, 
but  not  always  (compare  416.46).  The  same  is  the  case 
with  er^  and  ur. 

5.  Words  from  foreign  languages  regularly  retain  the  accent 
belonging  to  them  in  those  languages — yet  with  not  a  few,  and 
irregular,  exceptions.  As  the  greater  part  of  them  are  French, 
or  Latin  with  the  unaccented  syllables  at  the  end  dropped  off, 
they  more  usually  accent  the  final  syllable.  Some  change  their 
accent  in  the  plural:  thus,  2)o!'tor,  ®o!to'ren,  (S;:^ar after,  S^a= 
ralte're. 

PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

56.  The  parts  of  speech  are  the  same  in  German  as 
in  English. 


69]  DECLENSION.  19 

They  are  classified  according  to  the  fact  and  the  mode  of 
their  grammatical  variation,  or  inflection. 

1.  Nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  are  declined. 

Among  these  are  here  included  articles,  numerals,  and  par- 
ticiples, which  are  sometimes  reckoned  as  separate  parts  of 
speech. 

2.  Verbs  are  conjugated. 

3.  Adverbs,  prepositions,  and  conjunctions  are  unin- 
flected. 

4  Interjections  are  a  class  by  themselves,  not  enter- 
ing as  members  into  the  construction  of  the  sentence. 


DECLENSION. 

57,  Declension  is  the  variation  of  nouns,  adjectives, 
and  pronouns  for  number,  case,  and  gender. 

68.  There  are  two  numbers,  singular  and  plural,  of 
which  the  value  and  use  are  in  general  the  same  as  in 
English. 

For  special  rules  concerning  the  use  of  the  numbers  in  Ger- 
man, see  211. 

69,  There  are  four  cases  in  German,  as  in  the  oldest 
known  form  of  English  (Anglo-Saxon). 

1.  The  nominative,  answering  to  the  English  nomina- 
tive. 

The  nominative  case  belongs  to  the  subject  of  a  sentence, 
to  a  word  in  apposition  with  it,  or  a  predicate  noun  qualifying 
it;  it  is  alse  used  in  address  (as  the  Latin  vocative).  See 
212-14. 

2.  The  genitive,  answering  nearly  to  the  English  pos- 
sessive, or  objective  with  of. 

It  is  therefore  most  often  dependent  upon  a  noim,  but  is  also 
used  as  the  object  of  certain  adjectives,  verbs,  and  prepositions; 
and  it  stands  not  infrequently  without  a  governing  word,  in  an 
adverbial  sense.    See  215-20. 


20  DECLENSION.  [5&^ 

3.  The  dative,  corresponding  to  the  Latin  and  Greek 
dative,  or  to  the  English  objective  with  to  or  for. 

The  dative  stands  as  indirect  object  of  many  verbs,  transitive 
or  intransitive,  and  also  follows  certain  adjectives  and  preposi- 
tions. In  rare  cases,  it  is  the  equivalent  of  an  ablative.  See 
221-5. 

4  The  accusative,  nearly  the  same  with  our  objective. 

This  is  especially  the  case  of  the  direct  object  of  a  transitive 
verb ;  certain  prepositions  are  followed  by  it ;  it  is  used  to 
express  measure  (including  duration  of  time  and  extent  of 
space),  also  the  time  when  anything  is  or  is  done ;  and  it  occa- 
sionally stands  absolutely,  as  if  governed  by  having  understood. 
See  226-30. 

A  noun  in  apposition  with  a  noun  standing  in  any  of  these 
relations  is  in  general  put  in  the  same  case  with  it  (but  see 
213.2). 

60.  There  are  three  genders,  masculine,  feminine, 
and  neuter. 

Each  noun  is  of  one  or  the  other  of  these  genders,  yet  not 
wholly  according  to  the  natural  sex  of  the  object  indicated  by  it. 
The  names  of  most  objects  having  conspicuous  sex  are,  indeed, 
mascuUne  or  feminine,  according  as  those  objects  are  male  or 
female ;  but  there  are  not  infrequent  exceptions ;  and  the  names 
of  objects  destitute  of  sex  have  a  grammatical  gender,  as  mas- 
culine, feminine,  or  neuter,  according  to  rules  of  which  the 
original  ground  is  in  great  part  impossible  to  discover,  and 
which  do  not  admit  of  succinct  statement. 

61.  In  the  main,  therefore,  the  gender  of  German 
words  must  be  learned  outright;  but  the  following 
practical  rules  will  be  found  of  value  : 

1.  Exceptions  to  the  natural  gender  of  creatures  having  sex. 

a.  All  diminutives  formed  by  the  suffixes  c^en  and  lein  (410.1) 
are  neuter:  thus,  ba§  3[Rdb(^en  the  girl,  ba§  grdulein  the  young 
lady. 

h.  Besides  the  special  names  which  designate  the  male  and 
female  of  a  few  species,  there  is  a  neuter  name  for  the  young,  or 
for  the  species,  or  for  both :  thus,  ber  ®ber  the  hoar,  bie  ©au 
the  sow,  ba§  Serfel  the  pig,  \)a^  ©d^tucin  the  Iwg. 


61]  GENDEE.  21 

But  most  names  of  animals  are  of  one  gender  only,  and  gener- 
ally either  masculine  or  feminine:  thus,  ber  ©afe  the  hare,  bie 
S^ad^tigaE  the  nightingale;  but  ba§  (Srocobil  the  crocodile. 

c.  Of  anomalous  exceptions,  only  'Cia§  SScib  woman,  requires 
special  notice. 

2.  Attribution  of  gender  to  classes  of  inanimate  objects. 

a.  Names  of  the  seasons,  months,  and  days  of  the  week,  of 
the  points  of  compass,  and  of  stones,  are  mascuhne :  thus,  ber 
SSinter  vnnter,  ber  Wax  May,  ber  2}ZDnta9  Monday,  ber  5lorb 
ncyrth,  ber  ^tefel  fiint 

b.  Most  names  of  plants,  fruits,  and  flowers  (usually  ending 
in  e),  are  feminine :  thus,  bie  gtc()te  the  pine,  bie  ^flaume  the 
plum,  bie  9lcl!e  the  pink. 

c.  Most  names  of  countries  and  places,  of  metals,  the  names 
of  the  letters,  and  other  parts  of  speech  used  as  nouns,  are 
neuter:  thus,  ba§  Stalien  Itahj,  ba§  33erUn  Berlin,  ha^i  ©ifen 
iron,  ba§  1  the  letter  x,  ba§  ^a  unb  ^ein  tM  ^jes  and  no. 

3.  Geyider  as  determined  bij  derivation  or  termination  (for 
further  details,  see  408-11). 

a.  Masculine  are  the  greater  number  of  derivatives  formed 
from  roots  without  suffix,  by  change  of  vowel;  also  (though 
with  very  numerous  exceptions)  of  words  in  el,  en,  and  er ;  and 
all  derivatives  formed  by  ing  and  ling. 

Thus,  ber  ©|)ru(^  the  speech,  ber  5]agel  the  nail,  ber  9legen  the 
rain,  ber  ginger  the  finger,  ber  S^edel  the  covei\  ber  33Dl^rer  the 
gimlet,  ber  Sinbling  the  foundling. 

b.  Feminine  are  most  derivatives  in  e  and  t,  and  all  those 
formed  by  the  secondary  suffixes  ei,  I)ett,  !ett,  fdjaft,  nng,  and  in 
(or  inn). 

Thus,  bie  ©)3ra(^e  speech,  bie  ^a^i  might,  bie  ©(!)mei^elel 
flattej^j,  bie  2Bci§!)cit  wisdcm,  bie  @itel!eit  vanity,  bie  Stcnnbfd)aft 
friendship,  bie  Orbnung  order,  bie  greunbin  the  female  friend. 

c.  Neuter  are  all  diminutives  formed  with  d)en  and  Icin  (as 
already  noticed),  most  nouns  formed  by  the  suffixes  jel,  fal,  ni^ 
[ni^],  and  tl}um  [turn],  most  collectives  and  abstracts  formed  by 
the  prefix  ge,  and  all  infinitives  used  as  nouns. 

Thus,  ba§  9J^dnn(^en  tJie  mannikin,  ba§  ^nablein  the  little  boy, 
bag  mtm  [9ldtfel]  the  riddle,  ha^  ©c()icffal  fate,  ha^^  mi^m^ 
[(Slei(!)ntg]  the  likeness,  ha^  I?i3nigtf)um  [.^onigtum]  the  kingdmn, 
ha^  ^efieber  plumage,  ba§  diejprdd)  talk,  'i)a^  ^tel^en  the  act  of 
standing, 

4  Gender  of  compound  nouns. 


22  GENDER.  [61- 

Compound  nouns  regularly  and  usually  take  the  gender  of 
their  final  member. 

Exceptions  are  bie  ^ntmort  answer  (ba§  SBort  word),  ber  ^b* 
f(^eu  abhorrence  (bie  (Sc^eu  fear),  several  compounds  of  ber 
DJlut^  [9Jlut]  spirit,  as,  bie  (^rofemut!)  [(^ro^mut]  magnanimity, 
©anftmutl^  [Sanftmut]  gentleness,  and  2)emut5  [^emut]  humility, 
etc.,  names  of  cities  (which  are  neuter),  and  a  few  others  (421). 

5.  Gender  of  nouns  of  foreign  origin. 

Excepting  a  few  words — which,  having  become  thoroughly 
Germanized,  have  had  their  original  gender  altered  by  assimila- 
tion to  analogous  German  words,  or  otherwise  anomalously— 
nouns  from  other  languages  are  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter, 
as  in  the  tongues  whence  they  come :  thus,  ber  %\kl  the  title 
(Lat.  titulus,  m.),  bie  ^rone  the  crown  (Lat  corona,  t),  ba§ 
^l^dnomen  the  plienomenon  (Gr.  phainomenon,  n.) ;  but  ber 
^brper  the  body  (Lat.  corpus,  n.),  ha^  genfter  the  window  (Lat. 
fenestra,  1),  bie  DIummer  the  number  (Lat.  numerus,  m.). 

6.  Some  nouns  are  used  as  of  more  than  one  gender.  Thus, 
some  of  those  in  rti^  [nt§]  are  either  feminine  or  neuter :  see 
408,  in.  6.  %\)dl  [%n\]  is  generally  mascuhne,  but  sometimes 
neuter,  especially  when  used  in  the  sense  of  share;  its  com- 
pounds also  vary  in  gender.  Other  examples  are :  ber  (or  ba§) 
^dfig  cage,  Ort  place,  g^or  chorus;  bie  (or  ber)  33utter  butter, 
©emmel  roll;  ba§  (or  ber)  glo^  raft,  2}lunbel  ward,  gieratT^ 
[Sterat]  ornament;  and  so  on. 

7.  A  number  of  nouns  are  of  more  than  one  gender  according 
to  differences  of  meaning :  being  either  of  kindred  derivation,  or 
of  only  accidental  coincidence  of  form.  The  commonest  of 
these  are  as  follows : 

ber  S3aitb,  volume  ba^  iBanb,  hand,  rihbon 

ber  33unb,  covenant  tcc^  S3unb,  bundle 

ber  (Srbe,  heir  \>Ci^  @rbe,  inheritance 

bie  gtur,  meadow  ber  (or  bie)  %tuv,  floor 

ber  @e^ott,  contents  bo§  (or  ber)  (S>tl\a\t,  wages 

ber  ^aft,  hold  bie  §aft,  confinement 

ber  §eibc,  heathen  bie  §eibe,  heath 

ber  ^ut,  hat  bie  §ut,  guard 

ber  ^uube,  customer  bie  ^iinbe,  information 

ber  @c!^ilb,  shield  ba^  @d^ilb,  si^/n 

ber  @ee,  lake  bie  @ee,  sea,  ocean 

ber  (Sproffe,  descendant  bie  @proffe,  rownd  (of  ladder) 

ber  @tift,  pegr  ba§  ®tift, /oMrwIaiion 

bie  SSel^r,  defense  ba8  Se^r,  loeir 


64]  ARTICLES.  23 

bcr  Surfct,  hump  bie  SBurf cl,  6os5 

ber  liefer,  ja?^  bie  liefer,  pine-free 

ber  Inciter,  guide  bie  better,  ladder 

bcr  3JJangeI,  Zacfc  bie  SJlangel,  mangle 

bie  3Jlar!,  marfc,  marc?i  ba§  3)Jar!,  marrow 

ber  3Raft,  masf  {of  a  ship)  bie  9}Jaft,/o(Mer 

ber  9J?effer,  measurer  ,      ba§  SJJeffer,  fcni/e 

ber  2;i)or, /ooZ  baS  2;^or,  gra<e 
ber  (or  bie)  2Beif)e,  fci^e  (6irc?)     bie  SBei^e,  consecration 

62,  Adjectives  and  most  pronouns  are  inflected  in 
the  singular  in  all  the  three  genders,  in  order  to  agree 
in  gender  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify  or  to 
which  they  relate.  No  such  word  makes  a  distinction 
of  gender  in  the  plural. 

ARTICLES. 

63.  For  the  sake  of  convenience,  the  declension  of  the 
definite  and  indefinite  articles  is  first  given. 

The  definite  article  is  the  same  with  the  demonstrative  pro- 
noun, in  its  adjective  use  (164.1) ;  the  indefinite  is  the  same  with 
the  numeral  ein  one  (198).    Our  own  articles  are  of  like  origin. 

Definite  Article. 
Singular.  Plural. 


X 


masc. 

fern. 

neut. 

m.  f.  n. 

Nom.  bcr 

bie 

ha^ 

bie 

the 

Gen.  be§ 

ber 

be§ 

ber 

of  the 

Dat.    bent 

ber 

bem 

ben 

to  the 

Ace.    \>m 

bie 

has. 

bie 

the 

Indeftnite 

Articles. 

Singular. 

N. 

ciu 

eine 

ein 

a 

G. 

eine§ 

einer 

eine§ 

of  a 

D. 

einem 

einer 

einem 

to  a 

A 

einen 

eine 

ein 

a 

64.    1.  The  stem  (base,  theme) 

of  the  definite  article  is  b  only ; 

of  the  indefinite,  eitt :  the  rest  is  declensional  ending. 

2.  Notice  that  the  declension  of  ein  differs  from  that  of  ber  in 
that  the  former  has  no  ending  in  the  nom,  masculine  and  thQ 
nom.  and  ace,  neuter. 


24  AETIOLES.  [65- 

65.  The  ace.  neuter  ba§,  and  the  dat.  masc.  and  neuter 
bem  are  frequently  appended  to  prepositions  in  the  form  of 
simple  §  and  m,  being  written  as  one  word  with  the  preposition ; 
and,  in  such  contracted  forms,  a  preposition  ending  in  n  (an,  in, 
t)on)  loses  its  n  before  m.  The  dat.  feminine  ber  is  in  like 
manner  cut  down  to  r,  but  only  after  ju,  forming  jur. 

The  commonest  cases  of  this  contraction  and  combination 
are  am,  im,  t)om,  jum,  beim  (for  an  bem,  in  bem,  Don  bem,  gu  bem, 
bel  bem),  and  an§,  auf§,  tn§,  fur§,  t)or§  (for  an  ha^,  etc.).  Much 
less  frequent  are  aufm,  t)orm,  bur(f)§,  and,  with  dissyllabic  prepo- 
sitions, uber§,  iiberm,  and  the  like. 

Earely,  the  ace.  masculine  ben  is  similarly  treated,  forming 
iibern,  l^intern,  and  so  on.  ■ 

The  contractions  are  almost  always  used  in  adverbial  phrases : 
thus,  am  ^nbe  in  fine,  im  (^angen  on  the  whole,  etc. 

Some  writers  mark  the  omission  of  part  of  the  article  in  these 
contracted  forms  by  an  apostrophe :  thus,  auf  §,  iibef  m,  ^intef  n, 
etc. 

Very  rarely,  the  same  contraction  is  made  after  other  words 
than  prepositions :  thus,  mann  enbli(^  au^aefungen  iff  §  alte,  emige 
Sieb  when  will  the  everlasting  old  song  he  sung  out  ? 

USE  OF  THE  ARTICLES. 

66,  In  general,  the  articles  are  used  in  German 
nearly  as  in  English.  But  there  are  also  not  a  few 
differences,  the  more  important  of  which  are  stated 
below. 

1.  The  definite  article  regularly  stands  in  German  before  a 
noun  used  in  its  most  comprehensive  or  universal  sense,  as 
indicating  the  whole  substance,  class,  or  kind  of  which  it  is  the 
appellation:  as,  ha§  ^olb  ift  gelb  gold  is  yellow;  bte  33Iatter 
b  e  r  ^flangen  jinb  griin  leaves  of  plants  are  green. 

2.  By  a  Uke  usage,  it  stands  before  abstract  nouns :  as,  \ja§ 
Seben  ift  fura,  bie  ^unft  ift  lang  life  is  short,  art  is  long;  ber 
^laube  ma^t  felig  faith  makes  happy;  xn§  35erberben  lorfen  to 
entice  to  destruction. 

3.  It  is  often  used  where  we  use  a  possessive  pronominal 
adjective  (161),  when  the  connection  sufficiently  points  out  the 
possessor,  or  when  the  latter  is  indicated  by  a  noim  or  pronoun 
in  the  dative,  dependent  on  the  verb  of  the  sentence :  as,  ber  SSater 


66]  AETICLES.  25 

fdiiittcltc  ben  ^opf  the  father  shook  his  head;  ba  crGteiff^  t^m 
b  i  e  ©eelc  then  it  takes  hold  upon  his  soid. 

4.  It  is  prefixed  to  words  of  certain  classes  which  in  English 
are  used  without  it :  as, 

a.  To  the  names  of  seasons,  months,  and  days  of  the  week : 
as,  im  WiXiitx  in  winter ;  in  bem  (or  im)  OJlai  in  May;  am  5rei= 
ia(^  on  Friday. 

h.  To  names  of  streets  and  mountains,  and  to  feminine  names 
of  countries:  as,  in  ber  ^riebric^^flrage  in  Frederick  street; 
ber35efut)  Vesuvius;  in  ber  (Bdjm'u  in  Switzerland. 

c.  Often  to  proper  names,  especially  when  preceded  by  adjec- 
tives or  titles :  as,  b  e  m  franfen  (^eorg  to  sick  George;  b  a  §  fc^one 
33erlin  beautiful  Berlin; — or,  when  the  name  of  an  author  is 
used  for  his  works :  as,  i(?^  (efe  b  e  n  ©(^iEer  lam  reading  Schiller; 
— or,  in  a  famiUar  or  contemptuous  w^ay :  as,  rufe  ben  ^oftann 
call  John ; — or,  to  indicate  more  plainly  the  case  of  the  noun :  as, 
ber  ©(fatten  ber  DJZaria  Maria's  shadx)w;  ben  ^Irginofth  be§ 
^nbronifuS  the  jealousy  of  Andronicus  (compare  104). 

5.  There  are  numerous  phrases,  in  German  as  in  English,  in 
which  the  article  is  omitted,  although  called  for  by  general  ana- 
logies. These  often  correspond  in  the  two  languages :  as,  gu 
33ette  to  bed,  bei  ^ijc^  at  table,  ^Infer  merfen  to  cast  amhor,  SSinb 
nnb  3Bctter  wind  and  iveather,  9J^ei[ter  rii^rt  fic^  unb  (^efelle  master 
and  mail  bestir  themselves; — in  other  cases,  the  German  retains 
the  article  which  is  omitted  in  Enghsh:  as,  in  bie  ©^ule  to 
school,  i  m  C^immel  unb  auf  ber  @rbe  in  heaven  and  on  earth,  a  m 
^benb  at  evening; — or,  less  often,  the  article,  retained  in  Eng- 
lish, is  omitted  in  the  German:  as,  Dor  ^lugen  before  the  eyes, 
Qen  Often  toward  the  East; — and  the  article  is  often  omitted  in 
proverbial  phrases:  thus,  ^Rorgenfhmb'  l^at  ©olb  im  3JJunb 
the  morning-hour  has  gold  in  its  mouth. 

6.  The  article  is  usually  omitted  in  technical  phraseology 
before  words  referring  to  persons  or  things  as  already  men- 
tioned or  to  be  mentioned,  as  befagt,  Qcbad)t,  genannt  the  afare^ 
said,  folgcnb  the  following,  erfter  and  letter  former  and  latter, 
etc.;  also  before  certain  nouns,  as  3n^aber  holder,  UeberbrinGei 
bearer,  etc. 

7.  In  place  of  our  indefinite  article  with  a  distributive  sense, 
the  German  employs  the  definite  article :  as,  jo  Die!  ho.^  ^f unb 
so  much  A  pound;  be§  ^benb§  of  an  evening;  breimal  bie 
2Bo(^e  three  times  a  week.  Also,  in  certain  cases,  the  definite 
article  in  combination  with  a  preposition  stands  where  the 
indefinite  would  be  expected:    as,  (©taat  um  (^taat  foUte  gur 


26  NOUNS.  [66- 

^rot)iti5  tocrben  state  after  state  was  to  he  turned  into  a  prov- 
ince. 

8.  The  indefinite  article  is  often  omitted  before  a  predicate 
noun,  and  before  a  noun  in  apposition  after  al§  as,  signifying 
occupation,  office,  rank,  or  the  like :  thus,  er  tvax  ,^aufmann,  tt)tE 
aber  ie^t  ©olbat  tDerben  he  was  a  merchant,  but  noiv  icants  to 
become  a  soldier,  [^  fann  e§  al§  5Jlann  nid)!  bulben  /  cannot,  as 
A  man,  endure  it. 

The  above  are  only  the  leading  points  that  require  notice  in 
comparing  the  German  and  English  use  of  the  articles.  The 
German  allows,  especially  in  poetry,  considerable  irregularity 
and  freedom  in  their  employment,  and  they  are  not  rarely 
found  introduced — and,  much  more  often,  omitted — where  gen- 
eral analogies  would  favor  a  contrary  treatment. 

67.  In  regard  to  their  position — the  definite  article 
precedes  all  other  qualifying  words  (except  all  all) ; 
and  the  indefinite  suffers  before  it  only  jo  or  fold)  sicch, 
tDeld)  what,  and  tva§>  fitr  ivhat  sort  of. 

Thus,  bie  beibcn  l^naben  both  the  boys,  ber  bo|)|)clte  ^rei»  dx)uble 
the  price,  folc^  cin  DJ^ann  (or  ein  fol(i)cr  Tflann)  such  a  man,  ml^ 
ein  §elb  what  a  hero:  but  eine  fialbe  ©tunbe  half  an  hour,  ein  fo 
armer  5Jlann  so  poor  a  man,  cine  gans  fd)5ne  ^u^fic^t  quite  a  fine 
view. 

NOUNS. 

68.  In  order  to  decline  a  German  noun,  we  need  to 
know  how  it  forms  its  genitive  singular  and  its  nom- 
inative plural ;  and  upon  these  two  cases  depends  the 
classification  of  German  declensions. 

1.  Compound  nouns  have  the  inflection  of  their  final  member ; 
excepting  ^Soflmad^t  commission,  O^nma^t /ain^,  which  are  of  the 
2nd  declension,  while  9J^a(i)t  might  is  of  the  1st  declension,  2nd 
class. 

69.  1.  The  great  majority  of  masculine  nouns,  and 
all  neuters,  form  their  genitive  singular  by  adding  ^  or 
e§  to  the  nominative.  These  constitute  the  first  or 
STRONG  DECLENSION ;  which  is  then  divided  into  classes 
according  to  the  mode  of  formation  of  the  nominative 
plural. 


71]  GENERAL  RULES  OF  DECLENSION.  27 

a.  The  first  class  takes  no  additional  ending  for  the 
plural,  but  sometimes  modifies  the  vowel  of  the  theme : 
thus,  (Spaten  spade,  (Spaten  spades ;  but  3Sater  father, 
^akx/atJiers. 

h.  The  second  doss  adds  the  ending  e,  usually  also 
modifying  the  vowel:  thus,  Sa^r  year,  Sat)re  years; 
gufe/oof,  %\\\i^feet. 

c.  The  third  class  adds  the  ending  cr,  and  always 
modifies  the  vowel  (when  this  is  capable  of  modification) : 
thus,  9}^annma7i,  Wiimnamen;  %mh  grave,  ^xah^x  graves. 

d.  By  modification  of  the  vowel  is  meant  the  substitution  of 
the  modified  vowels  (i,  b,  \i  (14),  and  an  (21.2),  for  the  simpler 
a,  0,  U,  and  ail,  in  themes  containing  the  latter.  The  change  of 
Vowel  in  English  man  and  men,  foot  and  feet,  mouse  and  mice^ 
and  their  like,  is  originally  the  same  process. 

2.  Some  feminines  form  their  plural  after  the  first  and 
second  of  these  methods,  and  are  therefore  reckoned  as 
belonging  to  the  first  and  second  classes  of  the  first 
declension,  although  they  do  not  now  take  §>  in  the 
genitive  singular. 

70.  The  rest  of  the  masculine  nouns  add  n  or  en  to 
the  theme  to  form  the  genitive  singular,  and  take  the 
same  ending  also  in  the  nominative  plural.  Most  fem- 
inines form  their  plural  in  the  same  way,  and  are  there- 
fore classified  with  them,  making  up  the  second  or  weak 

DECLENSION. 

The  feminines  have  to  be  classified  by  the  form  of  their 
plurals  only,  because,  as  is  pointed  out  below,  all  feminine 
nouns  are  now  invariable  in  the  singular. 

71.  The  two  cases  above  mentioned  being  known, 
the  rest  of  the  declension  is  found  by  the  following 
general  rules : 

1.  Singular,  a.  Feminines  are  invariable  in  the  sin- 
gular. 

For  exceptions,  see  below,  95. 

h.  In  the  masculines  and  neuters  of  the  first  or 
strong  declension,  the  accusative  singular  is  like  the 


28  NOUNS.  [71- 

nominative.  Nouns  which  add  only  §  in  the  genitive  have 
the  dative  also  like  the  nominative ;  those  which  add  e§ 
in  the  genitive  regularly  take  e  in  the  dative,  but  may 
also  omit  it — it  being  proper  to  form  the  dative  of  any 
noun  of  the  first  declension  like  the  nominative. 

c.  Masculines  of  the  second  or  weak  declension  have 
all  their  oblique  cases  like  the  genitive. 

2.  Plural,  a.  The  nominative,  genitive,  and  accu- 
sative are  always  alike  in  the  plural. 

h.  The  dative  plural  ends  always  in  n :  it  is  formed 
by  adding  n  to  the  nominative  plural,  provided  that 
case  end  in  any  other  letter  than  n  (namely,  in  e,  I,  or  r, 
the  only  other  finals  that  occur  there) ;  if  it  end  in 
n,  all  the  cases  of  the  plural  are  alike. 

c.  But  nouns  making  foreign  plurals  (101.  4, 5)  have  no  dative 
plural  different  from  the  other  cases. 

72.  1.  The  general  scheme  of  noun-declension,  then, 
is  as  follows : 


1st  (strong)  Dect.ension 

'. 

2nd  (weak)  De 

X]T,F,NS 

Singular  : 

m.    n. 

f. 

m. 

f. 

K 

0 

0 

0 

0 

G. 

=e§,  ■■ 

=§ 

0 

»en,  =n 

0 

D. 

-c, 

0 

0 

=en,  =n 

0 

A. 

0 

0 

=en,  ^n 

0 

Plural: 

let  01. 

2nd  01. 

I 

3rd  CI. 

N. 

0 

=e 

=er 

=en, 

:=n 

G. 

0 

*c 

=er 

«cn. 

*tt 

D. 

*n 

*cn 

=crn 

-en, 

^n 

A. 

0 

't 

*cr 

^ett, 

=n 

vowel 
sometimet 
modified. 

vowel 

=fiilr 

vowel 
always 
modified. 

vowel 

never 

modified. 

2.  The  following  general  rules,  applying  to  all  declension-- 
that  of  noims,  adjectives,  and  pronouns — are  worthy  of  notice; 

a.  The  ace.  singular  of  the  fem.  and  neuter  is  like  the  nom- 
inative. 

h.    The  dat.  plural  (except  of  personal  pronouns)  ends  in  n. 


76]         GENEKAL  RULES  OF  DECLENSION.         29 

73.  It  will  be  seen,  on  comparing  the  declension  of  nouns 
with  that  of  the  definite  article  (63),  that  the  former  is  less  full, 
distinguishing  fewer  cases  by  appropriate  terminations.  Besides 
their  plural  ending — which,  moreover,  is  wanting  in  a  consider- 
able class  of  words — nouns  have  distinct  forms  only  for  the 
genitive  singular  and  the  dative  plural,  with  traces  of  a  dative 
singular — and  even  these  in  by  no  means  all  words. 

a.  The  names  strong  and  weak  declension  were  introduced  by  Grimm, 
and,  though  destitute  of  any  resonable  ground  of  application,  have 
become  too  generally  and  firmly  established  to  be  gotten  rid  of.  A 
historically  suitable  designation  would  be  "vowel-declension"  and 
"  n-declension, "  since  the  first  mode  of  declension  properly  belongs  to 
themes  originally  ending  in  a  vowel  (though  the  plural-ending  ei*  comes 
from  themes  in  g) ;  the  second,  to  those  ending  in  n  :  other  consonant- 
endings  with  their  peculiarities  of  declension  have  disappeared.  The 
whole  German  declensional  system  has  undergone  such  extensive  cor- 
ruption, mutilation,  and  transfer,  that  the  old  historical  classifications 
are  pretty  thoroughly  effaced,  and  to  attempt  to  restore  them,  or  make 
any  account  of  them,  would  only  confuse  the  learner. 

FIKST  OR  STRONG  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

74.  As  already  explained,  the  first  or  strong  declen- 
sion contains  all  the  neuter  nouns  in  the  language,  all 
masculines  which  form  their  genitive  singular  by  adding 
g  or  e§  to  the  nominative,  and  such  feminines  as  form 
their  nominative  plural  either  without  an  added  ending, 
or  else  by  appending  c  to  the  stem. 

FIRST   CLASS. 

75.  The  characteristic  of  the  first  class  is  that  it 
adds  no  ending  to  form  the  plural :  its  nominatives  are 
alike  in  both  numbers — except  that  in  a  few  words  the 
vowel  of  the  singular  is  modified  for  the  plural. 

76.  To  this  class  belong 

1.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  having  the  endings  e(, 
er,  en  (including  infinitives  used  as  nouns,  340),  and  one 
or  two  in  ent ; 

2.  A  few  neuter  nouns  having  the  prefix  ge  and  ending 
in  e ;  also  one  masculine  in  e  (^df e  cheese) ; 

3.  All  neuter  diminutives  formed  with  the  suffixes 
(^en,  lein,  and  )el ; 


30 


NOUNS. 


[76- 


4  Two  feminines  ending  in  er  (SKutter  mother  and 
Slodjter  daughter). 

No  nouns  of  this  class  are  monosyllabic  (except  the  infinitives 
t^un  and  fein).  The  endings  el,  er  do  not  include  iel,  eel,  ier,  eer, 
but  imply  the  simple  vowel  e  as  that  of  the  termination. 

77.  Nouns  of  the  first  class  add  only  §  (not  e^^)  to 
form  the  genitive  singular,  and  never  take  e  in  the 
dative. 

Their  only  variation  for  case,  therefore,  is  by  the  assumption 
of  §  in  the  gen.  sing,  (of  masc.  and  neut.  nouns),  and  of  n  in  the 
dat.  plural. 

78.  About  twenty  masculines,  and  both  feminines, 
modify  in  the  plural  the  vowel  of  the  principal  syllable. 

1.    The  masculines  modifying  the  vowel  in  the  plural  are : 

Stcfer,  cultivated  field  §ofen,  Jiarbor 

5lpfel,  apple  ^ammel,  ram 

S3oben,  ^oor  jammer,  hammer 

S3ogen,  l)ow  §anbel,  business 

5Bruber,  brother  ?aben,  shop 

^aben,  thread  9J?aiigeI,  want 

©avten,  garden  SJiantet,  cloak 

©raben,  ditch  ^ahd,  navel 
SBogen,  ^aben,  and  ^amniel  sometimes  have  the  unmodified  vowel 

79.  Examples : — 
I.    With  vowel  unchanged  in  the  plural : 


9^agc(,  naU 
Ofen,  stove 
(Sattel,  saddle 
®d)aben,  harm 
@d)nabe(,  beak 
©d^iDoger,  brother-in-law 
SBater,  father 
SSogel,  bird 


©paten  i<pade,  m. 

(^emalbe  picture,  n. 

^dfe  cheese,  m. 

Singular. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

ber  ©paten 
be§  ©patent 
bem  ©paten 
ben  ©paten 

ha§>  ©emcilbe 
be§  ©emcitbeS 
bem  ©emiilbe 
ha^  ©emcilbe 

Plural. 

ber  ^afe 
be§  Sl'afeg 
bem  ^dfe 
ben  ^afe 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A 

bie  ©paten 
ber  ©paten 
ben  ©paten 
bie  ©paten 

bie  ^emalbe 
ber  ©emcilbe 
ben  (^emntben 
bie  (^emdlbe 

bie  ^afe 
ber  f  afe 
ben  ^afen 
bie  ^^dfe 

d2] 


FIRST  OR  STRONG  DECLENSION. 


31 


II.    With  vowel  modified  in  the  pkiral 


33rubcr  brother,  m. 

^lofter  convent,  n. 

Gutter  mother,  f. 

Singular. 

N. 

ber  33ruber 

hc[§>  mo]itx 

bie  9[Rntter 

G. 

be§  ^ruberg 

be§  ^lofterg 

ber  99intter 

D. 

bem  ^ruber 

bem  S^lofter 

ber  aJ^utter 

A. 

ben  33riiber 

Flural 

bie  mutkx 

N. 

bie  ^riiber 

bie  ^'Ibfter 

bie  ^miitter 

a 

ber  33ruber 

ber  Softer 

ber  ^O^iitter 

D. 

ben  53rubern 

ben  £Ibftern 

ben  SJiiittern 

A. 

bie  33riiber 

bie  mofter 

bie  ai^iitter 

80.  1.  A  few  nouns  are  of  this  class  in  the  singular  and  of 
the  second  declension  in  the  plural ;  a  few  others  have  lost  an 
original  ending  n  or  en  in  the  nom.  (or  nom.  and  ace.)  singular : 
for  all  these,  see  Irregular  Declension  (96—8). 

2.  Among  the  infinitive-nouns  belonging  to  this  class  are 
a  few  of  irregular  ending  :  namely,  %\jun  doing  and  8ein  being, 
with  their  compounds,  some  of  which  are  in  common  use  as 
nouns— e.  g.,  ^afein  existence,  2BDl)lfein  welfare—;  and  others 
which  end  in  eln  and  crn :  thus,  2[Banbeln  lualklng,  SSanbern 
wandering. 

[Exercise  1.    Nouns  of  First  Declension,  1st  Class.] 
second  class. 

81.  The  characteristic  of  the  second  class  is  that  it 
forms  the  plural  by  adding  e  to  the  singular ;  at  the 
same  time,  the  vowel  of  the  principal  syllable  is  usually 
modified  in  the  plural ;  but  to  this  there  are  many  ex- 
ceptions. 

82.  To  this  class  belong 

1.  The  greater  number  of  masculine  nouns ; 

2.  Many  neuters ; 

3.  More  than  thirty  monosyllabic  feminines  (with 
their  compounds,  and  including  the  compounds  of  funft, 
not  in  use  as  an  independent  word),  with  the  feminines 


32 


NOtJNS. 


[82- 


formed  by  the  suffixes  m^  [n\§]  (about  a  dozen  in  num- 
ber) and  ]ai  (two  or  three). 
The  feminines  belonging  to  this  class  are : 

Stngft,  anxiety  §anb,  hand  9?ac^t,  night 

Slpt,  axe  ^aut,  skin  ^a\)t,  seam 

SBanf,  bench  ^(uft,  cleft  9?ot^  [9f?ot],  need 

SBraut,  bride  ^raft,  strength  ^u%  nut 

SBrunft,  fervor  ^uf|,  cow  ®au,  sow 

S3ruft,  breast  ^unft,  arf  @(f)nur,  sHng 

l^auft,  /s<  2au8,  Zouse  ©cf)tx)ulft,  swelling 

^lnd)t,  flight  i^uft,  air  ©tobt,  city 

^ruc^t,  /rM«  ?uft,  pZeoswre  SBonb,  loaZZ 

®ang,  sroose  9}?a(^t,  might  SBurft,  sausage 

@ruft,  uawZ<  9}?agb,  maid  3u(f)t,  training 

@un\t,  favor  9J?au8,  mowse  3unft,  gfwiZd 

9?ot^  [9^ot]  hardly  forms  a  plural  except  in  the  dative,  9^bt^en,  in 
certain  phrases.     ©c^tDuIft  makes  also  @d)tt)utften. 

83.  Masculines  and  neuters  form  their  genitive 
singular  by  adding  either  §  or  e^;  the  dative  is 
like  the  nominative,   or  adds   e. 

1.  The  ending  eg  is  more  often  taken  by  monosyllables,  §  by 
polysyllables  ;  but  many  words  may  assume  either,  according 
to  the  choice  of  the  writer  or  speaker,  depending  partly  on 
euphony,  and  partly  on  the  style  he  is  employing — e§  belonging 
to  a  more  serious  or  elaborate  style,  and  §  being  more  collo- 
quial. Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  with  unaccented  final 
containing  e  hardly  admit  e  in  the  ending.  On  the  other  hand, 
nouns  having  a  final  sibilant  require  an  e  to  make  the  genitive 
ending  perceptible.  Thus,  %aQ^  or  %aQt§,  ^bnxQ^  rather  than 
^onigeS,  almost  always  ©c^metterltngg,  and  always  glomes, 
Sud^fe§,  Sa^eg. 

2.  The  use  or  omission  of  e  in  the  dative  is  nearly  parallel 
with  the  use  of  e§  or  §  in  the  genitive  ;  but  it  may  be  left  oft 
from  every  noun  without  exception.  It  is  regularly  omitted 
from  a  noun  immediately  following  a  preposition ;  thus,  mit 
9ie(^t  with  right,  tjor  3orn  for  anger;  exceptions  are  gu  or  nad^ 
§aufe  Iwme. 

84.  Of  the  masculines,  the  great  majority  take  the 
modified  vowel  in  the  plural,  there  being  only  about 
fifty  exceptions ;  of  the  neuters,  only  two,  gtofe  raft  and 
&)QX  choir,  require  the  modification,  and  two  others, 


85] 


FIEST  OR  STRONG  DECLENSION. 


33 


S5oot  hoat  and  9^ol)r  reed,  may  take  it  or  not;  of  the 
feminines,  all  except  those  ending  in  ni^  [ni^]  and  ]a( 
modify  the  vowel. 

1.    The  masculines  not  modifying  the  vowel  in  the  plural 
are: 


%Qi\,  ed 
%QiX,  eagle 
5tmbofe,  anvil 
%xm,  arm 
S3ou,  building 
S3efu(^,  visit 
SSorn,  fountain 
S)ad^g,  badger 
2)oId^,  dagger 
2)od^t,  wick 
S)om,  fMhedral 
S)orn,  thorn 
2)rud,  print 
§orft,  forest 
®rab,  degree 
province 


®aum,  palate 
§all,  sound 
^alm,  stalk 
^aud),  breath 
^uf,  /lOO/ 

^unb,  (^ofif 
kxaljxi  [^xan]f  crane 
^ad}^,  salmon 
Saut,  sound 

Sump,  ragamuffin 
SJiorb,  murder 
Ort,  pZace 
^arf,  parfc 
^fab,  paf/i 
^Jpfau,  peacock 


^|^unf(^,  punch 
Ouaft,  tosseZ 
©c^uft,  wretch 
<Bdin^,  shoe 
@taar  L®tar],  starling 
(Stoff,  s«w# 

ZaQ,  day 
2^^roit,  throne 
Xobf  death 
Zxnpp,  troop 
Xn\^,  flourish 
35erfu(^,  trial 


®aVL,  ^alm,  and  2;^ron  also  make  plurals  of  the  second  or  weak 
declension,    ^fau  is  also  declined  throughout  by  the  second  declension. 


85.     Examples : — 

I.    With  vowel  modified  in  the  plural 


©ol&n  son,  m. 


N.  ber  (So^tt 

G.  beg  ©oI)ne§ 

I),  bem  (Soljue 

A.  ben  ©ofjit 


N.  bte  ©o^c 

G.  ber  (Si)f)ne 

D.  htn  <Bo[)ntn 

A.  bie  (Sof)ue 


8lo§  ra/if,  n. 
Singular, 

be§  glo^eg 
bem  gto^e 
ba§  g(o6 

Plural. 

bie  Siofee 
ber  glofje 
ben  glofjeu 
bie  Slbjje 


§anb  /iamZ,  f, 

bte  §anb' 
ber  §anb 
ber  §anb 
bie  $onb,' 


bie  §anbe 
ber  ^anbe 
ben  ^ditbeii 
bie  §dnbe 


34  NOUNS. 

n.    With  vowel  unchanged  in  the  plural : 


[85. 


9Jlonat  month,  m.       Sal)r  year,  n.       ©rfparni^  [=ni§]  saving,  f. 


N.  ber  SQZonat 

G.  be§  Tlomi^ 

D.  bem  93Zonat 

A.  ben  Monat 


N.  bie  SQ^onate 

G.  ber  SJ^ouate 

D.  ben  5Dlonaten 

A.  bie  93Zonate 


Singular. 

\>a^  3af)r 
beg  Sa^reS 
bem  ^a^xt 
ha§  3a^r 

Plural 

bie  3a^re 
ber  3a()re 
ben  Qa^ren 
bie  ^a^xt 


bie  Grfparni^  [-nig] 
ber  (Srfparnig  [:=ni§] 
ber  dTfparni^  [=ni§] 
bie  C^rfparni^  [=ni§] 


bie  (Srfparniffe 
ber  (Srfparniffe 
ben  (Srfparniffen 
bie  ©rfpamiffe 


86.  Most  nouns  of  foreign  origin  belong  to  this  class.  For 
some  irregularities  in  their  declension,  as  well  as  in  that  of 
other  members  of  the  class,  see  below,  97  etc. 

[Exercise  2.    Nouns  of  First  Declension,  2nd  Class.] 

l^}^\  THIRD  CLASS. 

L  I  i'  V  /  8|j).  The  characteristic  of  tliis<jlass  is  the  assumption 
otthe  ending  er  to  form  the  nominative  plural,  along 
with  modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  theme  (if  it  admits 
of  modification). 

88.  The  class  is  composed  chiefly  of  neuter  nouns, 
with  a  few  masculines,  but  no  feminines. 

Besides  the  nouns  formed  by  the  suffix  t^um  [turn]  (which  are, 
with  two  or  three  exceptions,  neuter,  and  which  modify  the 
vowel  of  the  suffix,  not  that  of  the  radical  syllable),  there  are 
not  far  from  fifty  neuters,  and  about  a  dozen  masculines,  be- 
16nging  to  the  class ;  also,  three  or  four  words  of  foreign  origin. 


90] 


FIRST  OR  STRONG  DECLENSION. 


35 


1.    The  neuters  are 
5tag,  carcass 
Stmt,  office 
S3ab,  bath 
33anb,  ribbon 
^i(b,  picture 
matt,  leaf 
33rctt,  board 
iBud),  book 
'3) ad),  roof 
2)enfma(t,  monument 
S)ingt,  ^/trngf 
S)orf,  village 
(Si,  egf^r 
^ad^,  departmerd 

®elb,  money 
©emad^t,  chamber 


©eiuanbt,  garment 

@(ieb,  Zinfc 
@rab,  gfrnt-e 
@ra§,  gfrass 
@ut,  property 
^aiipt,  Aead 

^emb,  s/iirf 
^olj,  wood 
^orut,  horn 

3oc^t,  yoke 
^alb,  caZ/ 
^inb,  child 
^leib,  dress 
^orn,  srmm 


?ieb,  songf 
$?ocf),  /ioZe 
2Ralt,  mark 
2«at)lt,  meaZ 
9J?au(,  moi*</i 
9?eft,  "es< 

9?ab,  whed 

9?iub,  mMe 
@cf)eitt,  6iM 
@cf)ilbt,  si^fn 
@(^Io§,  castle 
©c^raevt,  sioord 
©tiftt,  foundation 
%\)Ci[,  valley 
%\\6)%  cloth 
SSotf,  people 
SSamniS,  waistcoat 
SBeib,  woman 
SSortt,  loord 


35ormunb,  guardian 
SSalb,  /ores^ 
2Burm,  loorm 


^raut,  /ier6 
©emiit^  [©emiit],  disposition  ?amm,  Zam6 
@efcf){ed)t,  seic  !i?anbt,  Zarw^ 

@e[td)t,  face  ^id,tt,  %M 

@e[penft,  gr/iosi 

2.     The  mascuUnes  are: 
^ofett)i(^tt,  scamp      3JJann,  man 
@eift,  spirit  Drtt,  place 

@ott,  (?o(2  9lanb,  rim 

?eib,  &o(Zy  ©traiifet,  bouquet 

The  nouns  marked  with  t  in  the  ahove  hsts  make  also  plurals  in  e, 
SBurm  and  @trauJ3  with  modification  of  the  vowel. 

89.  Eespecting  the  form  of  tlie  genitive  singular 
ending,  whether  g  or  e^,  and  respecting  the  dative, 
whether  like  the  nominative  or  adding  e,  the  same  rules 
apply  as  in  the  second  class  (83). 

/^   Examples:—       OJ^.o.jr'     f^^M^ 

C)au§  2Beib  Strt^um  t=tum]  ^ann 

hotcse^  n.  woman,  n.  error,  m.  man,  m. 

Singular. 

N.     \)a§>  §au§  SScib  ber  ^v^t^um  ^ann 

G.    be§  §aufe§         SSeibeg  be§  3rrt^um§  aJJanneg 

D.     bem  §aufc  SSeiOe  bent  Srrt^um  3[Ranne 

A.     bag  §aug  SSeib  ben  ^i^i^t^um  Tlann 


36 


N. 

bte  §aufer 

G. 

ber  §aufer 

D. 

ben  |)aufern 

A. 

bie  §dufer 

NOUNS. 

Plural 

SSeiber         bie  3rrt!)umer 
SSeiOer         ber  Srrt^iimer 
SSeibern       h^n  Qrrt^iimern 
SSeiber         bie  3rrtl)iimer 


(90- 


Wdnmx 
Tl'dnncv 
SJ^cinncru 
SO^cinncr 


[Exercise  3.    Nouns  of  First  Declension,  3rd  Class.] 
-^Cx^      SECOND  OE  WEAK  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

yl.  To  the  second  or  weak  declension  belong  only 
masculine  and  feminine  nouns.  They  form  all  the  cases 
of  the  plural  by  adding  n  or  en  to  the  stem,  and  mas- 
culines add  the  same  in  the  oblique  cases  of  the  singular. 

92.  1.  Nearly  all  the  feminine  nouns  in  the  language 
are  of  this  declension  :  namely — 

a.  All  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable,  whether  prim- 
itive words,  as  ©eite  side;  or  primary  derivatives,  as  ^ab^  gift; 
words  formed  with  prefixes,  as  (SJefal^r  danger,  or  with  suffixes, 
as  ^ugenb  virtue,  'iBa\)X^ni  truth,  ^ixx\t\n  princess ;  or  words  de- 
rived from  other  languages,  as  9}linute  minute,  5}lelobie  melody, 
Station  nation,  Unit)eriitGt  university. 

Exceptions :  those  having  the  suffixes  ni^  [m^]  or  jal  (see  82.3). 

h.    About  sixty  monosyllables :  namely — 


5lrt,  manner 

^oft,  fare 

©ci^rift,  writing 

2(u,  meadow 

^a%  burden 

©(f)utb,  fault 

Sba^n^  track 

?ift,  trick 

®d)ur,  shearing 

SBrut,  brood 

Wait,  mark 

®ee,  sea 

SBu&it,  bay 

mik,  milt 

®pur,  trace 

iBurg,  casile 

9^uU,  nought 

@tatt,  place 

%a\)vt,  passage 

''^a(i)t,  agreement  I 

1                 ©tint,  forehead 

glur,  field 

WW,  duty 

©treu,  liUer 

glutf)  [%{nt],  fiood   ^0%  post 

©ud)t,  malady 

^orm,  form 

Ouol,  torment 

Xi)at,  deed 

grarfit,  freight 

ma\t,  rest 

Z\)nv,  door 

^rau,  woman 

@aat,  seed 

2^racl)t,  cosiume 

grift,  period 

@au,  sow 

%x\\i,  pasture 

@ei{3,  goat 

'Bdjaax  [<B6)ax'], 

company  \\i)X,  watch 

@ic^t,  gout 

@rf)ar,  share  (of  a 

,  plough)  aSc^r,  defense 

@ift,  gift 

@(i)i(^t,  layer 

SSelt,  world 

^ut,  heed 

®d|Iacf)t,  battle 

3al){,  number 

3ad^t,  yacht 

@rf)Iucf)t,  ravine 

3eit,  time 

3agb,  hunt 

©d^nur,  daughter 

-in-law 

94j 


SECOND   OE  WEAK  DECLENSION. 


37 


2.    Masculines  of  the  second  declension  are 
a.    Words  of  more  than  one  syllable  in  e,  as  53ote  messenger^ 
^aiit  spouse,  ^nabt  boy — including  those  that  have  the  prefix 
QC,  as  ^cf d!)rte  companion,  ©efeEe  fellow,  and  some  nouns  of  na- 
tionality, as  ^xm^t  Prussian,  ^xan^o']t  Frenclmian ;  also  a  few 
in  er  and  or,  as  33aicr  Bavarian,  Ungar  Hungarian, 
h.    About  twenty  monosyllabic  root-words :  namely — 
%^\\,  forefather  ^elb,  hero  0(^§,  ox 

33ar,  hear  ^err,  gentleman  %x\\\i,  prince 

33urfd),  student  ^\xi,  shepherd  ®(f)ent,  cuphearet 

^(§.lixi\t,  Christian  Tlt\i\d),  man  ^d)dp§,  icether 

^int,  finch  9Ro^r,  moor  @pal^,  sparrow 

^ixx^t,  prince  SRaxx,  fool  (Btxau%  ostrich 

@raf,  count  9^ert),  nerve  2^^or,  fool. 

The  nominatives  S3urjd)e,  Dd)\t,  and  <®(^enfe  are  also  in  use. 
c.    Many  foreign  words,  as  ©tubent  student,  Tlonaxd)  monarch, 
S3  arbor  barbaman. 

^3^   Nouns  ending  in  e,  cl,  er,  and  ax  unaccented,  add 
only  n  to  the  stem ;  others  add  en. 

1.  Before  this  ending,  the  n  of  the  sufBx  in  is  doubled  :  thus, 
giirftin,  giirftinnen. 

2.  ^nx  gentleman,  in  modern  usage,  ordinarily  adds  n  in  the 
singular,  and  en  in  the  plural,  being  the  only  masculine  whose 
forms  differ  in  the  two  numbers. 

'  g?  No  noun  of  this  declension  modifies  its  vowel  in 
the  plural.  n 


94.     Examples  :- 

-          J^ 

^  ' '-'' 

I.  Feminines: 

^-^^ 

©eitc. 

%W, 

SSa^r^ieit,  ^ 

5^attDn, 

side. 

deed. 

truth. 

nation. 

Singular. 

N.        bie  (Scite 

^^at 

SSnfjrljeit 

Nation 

G.        ber  Seite 

Xijat 

SSaljr^eit 

Station 

r>.        ber  (Seite 

Zi)at 

SSaljrIjeit 

D^ation 

A.         bie  ©eite 

Plural 

SSaljr^eit 

Station 

N.        bie  ©eiten 

^§atcn 

SSarjrljeiten 

9?ationcu 

Gr.        ber  <Seiten 

^f)aten 

SSaljr^eiten 

9?atiDneu 

r>.        ben  (Seitcn 

3:l)atcn 

SSaI)rI)eiten 

9^ationen 

A.        bie  <^eiten 

^f>ateu 

SlSa^r^eiten 

^f^atiptieu 

38 


NOUNS. 


[94^ 


n.    Masculines : 

©tubent 
student. 

^naBe 
boy. 

55ater          5Henf(^ 
Bavarian.         man. 

N.        ber  ^mh^ 
G-.D.A.      Slnabeu 

Singular. 
q3ater          ^enfc^ 
^aiern        SJienjc^ett 

Plural. 

©tubent 
©tubcutcu 

N.G.D.A.  ^mUn 

SBaiern        93^enfc^en 

©tubenten 

95.  1.  Formerly,  many  feminine  nouns  of  this  declension, 
like  the  masculines,  took  the  declensional  ending  in  the  genitive 
and  dative  singular  ;  and  this  ending  is  still  commonly  retained 
in  certain  phrases :  e.  g.,  auf  @rben  on  earth,  t)on  ©eiten  on  the 
part  of.  Occasionally,  also,  it  appears  in  a  gen.  feminine  pre- 
ceding the  governing  noun,  as  um  feiner  ©eelcn  §eil  for  the  wel- 
fare of  his  soul;  and  yet  more  rarely,  by  poetic  license,  in  other 
situations :  e.  g.,  auf  ber  (^affen  on  the  street,  ha^  2id)t  ber  ©onnen 
the  light  of  the  sun. 

2.  Occasionally,  when  two  nouns  are  used  together,  the 
ending  en  of  the  second  declension  is  omitted ;  thus,  §elb  unb 
^id^ter  (accus.)  he7^o  and  poet,  5Jlenf (^  3U  SJlenfcf)  man  to  man. 

[Exercise  4.    Nouns  of  Second  Declension.] 

IRREGULA.E  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

96.  Irregularities  in  the  declension  of  nouns  of  foreign 
origin,  and  of  proper  names,  will  be  considered  below,  under 
those  titles  respectively  (see  101-8). 

97.  Mixed  Declension. 

1.  A  number  of  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  are  regularly 
and  usually  declined  in  the  singular  according  to  the  first 
declension,  and  in  the  plural  according  to  the  second.  Such 
are:  masculines — 


S3auev,  peasant 
©eoatter,  godfather 
l^orbeer,  laurel 
2Haft,  mast 
Mvi^l^\,  musck 


9^ad)bor,  neighbor 
^antoffel,  slipper 
<B6)mn],  pain 
@ee,  lake 
(^toat,  state 


®tarf)et,  goad 
©tral)!,  ray 
llntert!)Qn,  subject 
S>ettcr,  cousin 
3ievat^  [-xai],  ormnmni. 


IIIREGUIAR  DECLENSION. 


89 


Neuters — 

Sliige,  eye 
S3ett,  bed 

©nbe,  end 
^cmb,  shirt 

O^r,  ear 
2Be^,  pain. 

Several  of  these  words  have  other  forms.  Thus,  (S^eDatter, 
and  ^^antoffcl  and  SSettcr  make  a  plural  also  according  to  the 
first  declension  1st  class ;  ^auer,  9la(i)bar,  and  Untertftan  make 
a  singular  also  of  the  second  declension. 

2.  Further,  certain  nouns  of  foreign  origin  are  of  the  first 
declension  in  the  singular,  and  the  second  in  the  plural,  as  3n= 
feet  insect,  gen.  sing.  3nfecte§ ;  pi.  gnfecten :— especially  those 
ending  in  unaccented  or  (which,  however,  throw  the  accent  for- 
ward, upon  the  or,  in  the  plural),  as  ^oc'tor,  gen.  sing.  ®Dc1or§, 
pi.  ^octo'ren. 


3.    Examples : — 

@taat 

9?a(^bar 

2)octor 

5luge 

state,  m. 

neighbor,  m. 

Singular. 

doctor,  m. 

eye,  n. 

N.    ber  <Bia(\i 

9^acf)bar 

doctor 

ha^  ^nge 

G.     be§  ©taateg 

9^acpar§ 

®octor§ 

beg  5Iuge§ 

D.    bent  (Staate 

9Zac!)bar 

2)Dctor 

bent  5lnge 

A.     ben  ©taat 

9kd}0ar 
Plural 

doctor 

bag  5tuge 

^.  etc.  bie  ©taateti 

9^ac()barn 

SDoctoren 

^ngen 

98.    Declension  with  defective  stem. 

1.  A  few  masculines^  otherwise  declined  according  to  the  1st 
class  of  the  first  declension,  p,s  stems  in  en,  sometimes  or  usu- 
ally drop  the  n  or  en  in  the  nominative  singular.    Thus : 


%tU  (  or  =jen),  rock 
griebe  (or  =ben),  peace 
gunte  (or  4m),  spark 
©ebanfe  (or  .!en),  thought 
@(aube  (or  -Mn),  belief 


§aufe  (or  .en),  heap 

^ame  (or  =men),  name 

®Qme  (or  .men),  seed 

SBiUe  (or  4eu),  will 

@c^abe  (or  =ben),  (ci  inplur.)  harm 


2.  Like  the  above,  ber  ©(^mers  pain  has  sometimes  the 
genitive  in  en§;  and  ba§  ^erg  heart  has  a  corresponding  declen- 
sion, but  with  the  accusative  like  the  ncxninative. 


40 


NOUNS. 


[98- 


3 

.    Examples  :^ 

^amtn  name,  m. 

^vkhtn  peace,  m. 

^crj  ^ear<,  n. 

Singular. 

N. 

ber  DZame  (or  :=men) 

griebe  (or 

=ben) 

ha^  §er§" 

a 

be§  9^amen§ 

grieben§ 

beg  ^ergeng 

D. 

bem  D^amen 

grieben 

bem  ^erjen 

A. 

ben  Seamen 

grieben 
Plural. 

ha^  ^erj 

N., 

etc.    Seamen 

grieben 

^erjen 

99.    Bedundant  Declension. 

1.  A  considerable  number  of  nouns  are  declined,  either  in 
the  singular  or  the  plural,  or  in  both,  after  more  than  one  form. 
The  most  important  of  these  have  been  already  pointed  out 
above  under  the  different  declensions  and  classes ;  others  are 
sometimes  met  with  in  dialectic,  and  even  in  literary,  use. 

2.  A  smaller  number  have  two  well  established  forms  of  the 
plural,  belonging  to  different  significations  of  the  word ;  they 
are  as  follows : 


bag  iBoitb 

^anber,  ribbons 

53anbe,  bonds 

bie  53on! 

SSdnfe,  benches 

^on!en,  banks 

ber  S3auer 

S3auern,  peasants 

iBauer,  builders 

ber  S3ogen 

iBogen,  sheet  of  paper 

33ogen,  bows  (for  shooting) 

ha^  2)ing 

S)inge,  things 

2)inger,  creatures 

ber  guB 

m^^rfeet 

^U^e,  feet  (a  measure) 

bag  ©efid^t 

@efid)te,  apparitions 

©efic^ter, /aces 

ha^  ^orn 

§orne,  kinds  of  horn 

Corner,  horns  (of  animals) 

ber  ^aben 

Saben,  shutters 

:2a ben,  shops 

bag  $?anb 

Sanbe,  regions 

^iinbtv,  countries 

bag  Sid^t 

iidjtt,  candles 

$?i(^ter,  lights 

ber  Wann 

9JJanner,  men 

Ttanmn,  vassals 

ber  monh 

SJJonbe,  moons 

SJJonben,  months 

ber  Ort 

Dxte,  regions 

Orter,  places  (towns) 

bie  @au 

@aue,  sows 

®auen,  wild  pigs 

ber  @(^itb 

©d^itbe,  shields 

@d)i(ber,  signs 

bag  Znd} 

Xu^e,  kinds  of  cloth 

Xn6)ev,  pieces  of  cloth 

bag  Sort 

SSorte,  words 

Sorter,  vocables 

100.    Defective  Declension. 

1.  In  German,  as  in  English,  there  are  classes  of  nouns — es- 
pecially abstracts,  as  ^emutl^  [^emut]  humilityj  and  names  of 


101]  IRKEGXILAR  DECLENSION,  41 

substances,  as  ^olb  gold  (unless,  as  is  sometimes  the  case,  they 
have  taken  on  also  a  concrete  or  individualized  sense,  as  %'iiot= 
Ijtikn  follies,  ^apiere  papers) — which,  in  virtue  of  their  significa- 
tion, have  no  plural. 

Some  abstract  nouns,  when  they  take  such  a  modified  sense 
as  to  admit  of  plural  use,  substitute  other,  derivative  or  com- 
pound, forms :  as,  %oh  death,  ^obegfaKe  deatJis  (literally,  cases  of 
death),  35eftre6en  exertion,  33eftreBun0en  exertions,  efforts. 

2.  A  much  smaller  number  have  no  singular :  as,  (^Ikxn  parents, 
DJiafern  measles,  Striimmer  ruins,  Seute  people. 

3.  Compounds  of  9J^ann  man  substitute  leute  for  mann  in  the 
plural,  when  taken  collectively :  thus,  ^aufmann  merchant,  ^auf= 
leute  merchants;  but  53iebermanner  worthy  men,  ©"^renmdnner  wen 
of  honor,  as  individuals  only,  not  forming  a  class. 

NOUNS  OF  FOREIGN  ORIGIN. 

^01.  1.  Nouns  derived  from  foreign  languages  are 
variously  treated,  according  to  the  completeness  of  their 
naturalization. 

2.  The  great  mass  of  them  are  assimilated  in  inflec- 
tion to  German  models,  and  belong  to  the  regular  de- 
clensions and  classes,  as  already  stated. 

3.  A  class  of  nouns  in  um  from  the  Latin  form  a  plural  in  en ; 
thus,  3nbit)ibuum,  3nbit)tbuen;  ©tubium,  ©tubien;  and  a  few  in 
qI  and  il  add  ien :  thus,  l^apital,  llapitalien  j  goffil,  goffilien.  One 
German  noun,  ^Icinob  jewel,  makes  a  similar  plural,  ^leinobien. 

4.  A  few,  as  in  English,  form  their  plurals  after  the  manner  of 
the  languages  from  which  they  come ;  but  are  hardly  capable 
of  any  other  variation,  except  an  §  as  sign  of  the  genitive  sing- 
ular: thus,  9Jluftcu§,  9J?ufici;  5:eTnpu§,  Slempora ;  factum,  Sacta. 

5.  Some  from  the  French  and  English,  or  other  modern 
languages,  form  the  plural,  as  well  as  the  genitive  singular,  in  § : 
thus,  feibene  ©op^a§  silken  sofas,  bie  Sorb§  the  lords. 

Sometimes,  rather  than  add  a  genitive  sign  §  to  a  word  which 
in  the  original  took  none  such,  an  author  prefers  to  leave  it,  like 
a  proper  name,  uninflected  :  thus,  be§  ^aQUax  of  the  jaguar,  be§ 
^lima  of  the  climate. 

Before  this  foreign  and  irregular  §,  some  authorities  set  an 
apostrophe,  both  in  the  genitive  and  the  plural,  especially  after 
a  vowel.    The  same  is  true  in  proper  names. 


42  NOUNS.  [102- 

PROPER  NAMES. 

/102.  Proper  names  are  inflected  like  common  nouns, 
unless  they  are  names  of  persons,  of  places  (towns  and 
tha  like),  or  neuter  names  of  countries. 

\  103.  Names  of  countries  and  places  admit  only  the  genitive 
ending  §  (not  e§) ;  if,  as  terminating  in  a  sibilant,  they  cannot 
take  that  ending,  they  are  not  declined  at  all :  thus,  bie  SSiiften 
5lfrt!a§  the  deserts  of  Africa,  bie  SiniDoftner  ^erling  the  inhabitants 
of  Berlin,  but  bie  ^inmo^ner  t)on  ^art^  t1ie  inhabitants  of  Paris 
(or,  bie  SintDol^ner  ber  6tabt  $ari§). 

( 104?  Names  of  persons  were  formerly  more  generally  and 
more  fully  declined  than  at  present ;  now,  the  article  is  custom- 
arily used  to  indicate  the  case,  and  the  name  itself  remains  un- 
varied after  it  in  the  singular. 

But  the  genitive  takes  an  ending  if  followed  by  the  governing 
word :  as,  be§  grofeen  griebrid)^  S^ftaten  Frederwk  the  Great's  deeds. 
i  105.  )  When  used  without  the  article,  such  nouns  add  §  in  the 
genitiv^ :  thus,  (5cf)iner§,  5riebrid}§.  But  masculine  names  end- 
ing in  a  sibilant,  and  feminines  in  e,  have  en§  in  the  genitive : 
thus,  9}^a5en§,  ©opftienS.      i  p^  '^ 

The  dative  and  accusative,  of  both  genders,  were  formerly 
made  to  end  in  n  or  en,  which  ending  is  now  more  often,  and 
preferably,  omitted,  and  the  name  left  unvaried  in  those  cases. 

^y  But  classical  names  ending  in  §  are  unchanged  in  the  gen- 
itive: thus,  ^Itreu§'  6oI)n  Atrem'  son,  ^emo§tl^ene§'  Sfleben  De- 
mosthenes' speeches.  And  German  nouns  ending  in  a  sibilant  are 
sometimes  treated  in  the  same  way :  e.  g.  3^blt^^  (^ebii^te  Zedlitz' 
poems.  The  use  of  the  apostrophe  in  such  cases  is  common,  but 
not  universal. 

^  106.  J  The  plurals  of  masculine  names,  with  or  without  the 
article,  have  e  (rarely  en),  with  n  added  in  the  dative ;  of  fem- 
inines, n  or  en.  Those  in  o  (from  Latin  themes  in  on)  add  ne: 
thus,  gato,  Satone. 

107.  ;  3^11^^  ^^d  6^riflu§  are  still  usually  dechned  as  Latin 
neuns :'  gen.  ^efu,  Sf)nfti ;  dat.  3efu,  (Skifto  ;  ace.  3ef urn,  (S:^riftum. 
Other  classical  names  were  formerly  treated  in  the  same  man- 
ner, and  cases  thus  formed  are  occasionally  met  with,  even  in 
recent  works. 

108.  1.  A  proper  name  following  a  title  that  has  the  article 
before  it  k  left  unvaried ;  if  without  the  article,  it  takes  the 


110]  ADJUNCTS  OP  THE  NOUN.  43 

genitive  sign,  and  the  title  (except  §err)  is  unvaried:  thus, 
ber  ©o^n  Haljer  griebric^S  the  son  of  Emperor  Frederick,  §errn 
©d^mibtg  ^an^  Mr.  Smith's  house,  but  ^reusgufi  be§  ^aijers  grieb= 
rid)  tJw  crusade  of  Emperor  Frederick. 

2.  An  appended  title  is  declined,  whether  the  preceding  name 
be  declined  or  not;  thus,  ^Ue^anbcra  bc§  (^ro^cn  (^e(d)i(^te 
Alexander  the  GreaVs  history,  bie  51'^aten  be§  .^i)niQ§  Sriebri(5^  be§ 
3tt)eiten  the  deeds  of  King  Frederick  the  Second. 

3.  Of  two  or  more  proper  names  belonging  to  the  same 
person,  only  the  last  is  liable  to  variation  under  the  preceding 
rules:  thus,  §errn  3o^ann  ©d^mibt^  ^au^  Mr.  John  Smith's 
house;  but,  if  the  last  be  a  family  name  preceded  by  t)On,  it 
takes  the  genitive  ending  only  before  the  governing  noun: 
thus,  gricbrid)  Don  ©d^lEerS  2Ber!e,  but  bie  2Ber!e  r^riebrid)§  bon 
©d)iner  the  works  of  Frederick  von  Schiller. 

[Exercise  5.,  Nouns  of  Mixed  Declension,  etc.] 

MODIFYING  ADJUNCTS  OF  THE  N3UN. 

109.  A  noun  may  enter  as  an  element  into  the  structure  of 
the  sentence  not  only  by  itself,  but  is  modified  and  limited  by 
adjuncts  of  various  kinds. 

110.  1.  The  most  usual  adjunct  of  a  noun  is  an  adjective 
(including  under  this  term  the  pronominal  and  numeral  ad- 
jectives and  the  articles) :  namely 

a.  An  attributive  adjective,  directly  qualifying  the  noun, 
preceding  it,  and  agreeing  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case : 
as,  ctn  Quter  DJJann  a  good  man,  ber  fc^onen  Srau  of  the  beautiful 
woman,  biejen  artigen  ^Hnbern  to  these  well-hehaved  children  (see 
115). 

h.  An  appositive  adjective,  less  directly  qualifying  the  noun, 
immediately  following  it,  and  in  German  not  varied  to  agree 
with  it  (treated,  rather,  as  if  the  predicate  of  an  adjective 
clause) :  thus,  ein  Sel^nftuI)!  reid)  gefc^nifet  unb  tDunberlic^  an  arm- 
chair [which  is]  richly  carved  and  quaint  (see  116.2). 

But  an  adjective  may  follow  a  noun,  as  if  appositive,  and  yet 
be  declined,  being  treated  as  if  having  a  noun  understood  after 
it:  thus,  bie  geinbe,  bie  mac^tigen,  jiegcn  the  enemies,  the  mighty, 
prevail,  menn  id)  Dergang'ner  Stage,  gliidlid)er,  311  benfen  tuage  when 
I  venture  to  think  of  past  days,  happy  ones,  Such  cases  are 
poetic  and  rare. 


44  NOUNS.  [110> 

c.  An  adjective  clause,  containing  a  verb  and  its  subject,  and 
introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun  or  conjunction :  as,  ber  3f{tng, 
ben  fie  mir  (^a'i)  the  ring  which  she  gave  to  me,  bie  ©iitte,  tt)D  ber  alte 
S3ergmann  tt)ol^nt  the  cottage  where  the  old  miner  lives  (see  437). 

2.  Sometimes  an  adverb,  by  an  elliptical  construction  (as  rep- 
resenting the  predicate  of  an  adjective  clause),  stands  as 
adjunct  to  a  noun :  as,  ber  Tlann  Ijkx  the  man  here,  ber  S)immel 
bort  oBen  heaven  above:  that  is,  the  man  who  is  here,  etc. 

111.  A  noun  is  very  often  limited  by  another  noun. 

1.  By  a  noun  dependent  on  it,  and  placed  either  before  or 
after  it. 

a.  Usually  in  the  genitive  case,  and  expressing  a  great 
variety  of  relations  (216). 

b.  Very  rarely,  in  the  dative  case  (225.1). 

2.  By  an  appositive  noun,  following  it,  and  agreeing  with  it 
in  case  (but  not  necessarily  in  gender  or  number) :  as,  er  l^at  ben 
^atfer  griebric^,  feinen  ^txxn,  t)errat5en  [t)erraten]  he  has  betrayed 
the  Emperor  Frederick,  his  master,  ben  fie,  meine  (^eliebte,  mir 
Q^Oih  which  she,  my  beloved,  gave  me. 

The  appositive  noun  is  sometimes  connected  with  its  subject 
by  the  conjunction  al§  as:  thus,  gieftt,  al^  ber  lefete  ^ii^ter,  ber 
le^te  SJlenf  (^  !&inau§  the  last  man  marches  out  as  last  poet. 

3.  The  ether  parts  of  speech  used  as  substantives  (113),  of 
course,  may  take  the  place  of  the  Umiting  noun. 

112.  A  noun  is  limited  by  a  prepositional  phrase :  that  is,  by 
a  noun  whose  relation  to  it  is  defined  by  a  preposition :  as,  ber 
©(^litffel  3U  ©amletS  33etraQen  the  key  to  Hamlefs  behavior. 

This  construction  is  especially  frequent  with  verbal  derivatives 
retaining  something  of  the  verbal  force:  thus,  ^rgiejung  gur 
Sreifteit  education  to  freedom,  bie  ^offnung  auf  eine  ^inigung  tnit 
bem  ^aifer  the  Iwping  for  an  understanding  with  the  emperor. 

In  other  cases,  the  prepositional  phrase  is  virtually  the  predi- 
cate (3186)  of  an  adjective  clause:  as,  ber  SJiann  im  Often  the 
man  [wlio  was  or  lived]  in  the  East. 

EQUIVALENTS  OF  THE  NOUN. 

113.  1.  Other  parts  of  speech  are  habitually  or  occasionally 
used  as  substantives,  and  may  be  substituted  for  the  noun  in  a 
part  or  all  of  its  constructions.    These  are 

a.  The  substantive  pronouns  and  numerals :  as,  t(^  I,  birf) 
thee,  fie  she,  her,  they,  them,  mx  who,  fe(f)g  ber  9)^dnner  six  of  the 
men. 


116]  EQUIVALENTS  OF  THE  NOUN.  45 

b.  Infinitives  of  verbs  (which  are  properly  verbal  nouns):  see 
339  etc. 

c.  Adjectives  (including  pronominal  and  numeral  adjectives 
and  participles)  are  often  converted  into  nouns  (see  129). 

2.  Any  word  or  phrase,  viewed  in  itself,  as  concrete  rep- 
resentative of  what  it  signifies,  may  be  used  as  a  neuter  sub- 
stantive :  thus,  fein  eigen  3c^  his  own  "I",  ol^ne  SOSenn  ober  ^ber 
without  "if"  or  "hut",  jebeg  Siir  unb  SBlber  every  pro  and  con, 

3.  A  substantive  clause,  containing  a  verb  and  its  subject, 
and  introduced  generally  by  ba§  that,  oB  whether,  or  a  compound 
relative  word,  takes  the  place  of  a  noun  in  some  constructions 
(see  436). 

For  a  fuller  definition  of  the  relations  and  constructions  in 
which  the  various  equivalents  of  the  noun  may  be  used,  see  the 
several  parts  of  speech  concerned. 


-iS 


ADJECTIVES. 


The  Adjective,   in  German,   is   declined  only 
wli6n  used  attributively  or  substantively. 

/il6/^4'  The  attributive  adjective  always  precedes 
rhe  noun  Vhich  it  qualifies  ;  it  is  varied  for  number  and 
case,  and  (in  the  singular  only)  for  gender,  and  agrees 
in  all  these  particulars  with  its  noun. 

But  the  noun  to  which  the  adjective  relates  is  often  omitted: 
the  latter,  in  such  case,  has  the  same  form  as  if  followed  by  the 
noun:  as,  er  T^at  tDei^e  Ociufer,  unb  mx  l^aben  Braune  lie  has  white 
houses,  and  we  have  brown,  geben  ©ie  mir  stDcierIci  %n6:),  rot^e^ 
[rote§]  unb  f  d)  tt)  a  r  5  e  §  give  me  two  kinds  of  cloth,  red  and  black. 

2,-^ov  the  adjective  used  as  a  substantive,  see  below,  129. 

\  116)  The  adjective  remains  uninflected  when  used 
predicatively,  appositively,  or  adverbially. 

1.  A  predicate  adjective  (316)  is  one  which  is  by  means  of  a 
verb  made  to  belong  to  and  qualify  a  noun  (or  pronoun,  etc.). 
Its  uses  may  be  classified  as — a.  simple  predicate,  after 
verbs  that  signify  being,  becoming,  continuing,  seeming,  and  the 
like :  as,  fein  ^an^  Wax  jd)on  unb  m\^,  w'xxh  aha  je^t  alt,  unb  fiel)t 
l^dfjlid)  an§  his  liouse  was  handsome  and  white,  but  is  now 
growing  old,  and  looks  ugly ; — b.  adverbial  predicate,  divid- 


46  ADJECTIVES.  [116- 

ing  its  qualifying  force  between  the  noun  and  the  verb :  as,  ba§ 
C)au§  [te^^t  feft^^/te  Iwuse  stands  firm,  tobt  [tot]  unb  ftarr  liegt  bie 
SBiifte  l^ingeftredft  the  steppe  lies  stretched  out  dead  and  stiff; — c. 
objective  or  factitive  predicate,  expressing  a  condition 
effected  in  or  ascribed  to  an  object  by  the  action  of  a  transitive 
verb :  as,  ba§  mad)t  mid^  traurig  that  makes  me  sad,  ]\^  fialh  tobt 
ftot]  lac^en  to  laugh  one's  self  half  to  death,  er  Baut  ha^  §au§  ftoc^ 
he  builds  the  house  high,  ic^  mli  meine  5lugen  off  en  bel^alten  I  will 
keep  my  eyes  open,  bie  lang^  ic^  t)erGeffen  geglaubt  which  I  had  long 
believed  forgotten — whence,  of  course,  also  as  simple  predicate  in 
the  corresponding  passive  expression:  as,  ha^  't)au§  toirb  IjO^ 
Qebaut  the  house  is  built  high. 

2.  The  appositive  adjective  follows  the  noun :  as,  tt)ir  tt)aren 
glDei  ^inber,  flein  unb  fro!)  we  were  two  childj-en  small  aiid  merry, 
2Borte  fii^  mie  DJionblid^t  words  sweet  as  moonlight. 

3.  For  the  adjective  used  as  adverb,  see  below,  130. 

4.  The  uses  of  the  adjective  in  apposition,  as  predicate,  and  as  adverb, 
pass  into  one  another  by  insensible  gradations,  and  the  same  word 
often  admits  of  more  than  one  understanding.  The  appositive  adjective 
is  distinguished  from  the  attributive  rather  formally  than  logically,  and 
sometimes,  in  poetry,  an  adjective  really  attributive  in  meaning  is 
treated  as  appositive :  as,  bei  etnem  SSirt^e  [Sirte]  tvunberntilb  with  a 
host  wondrous  kind;  einen  53Iicf  sum  ^imtnel  ^q6)  a  look  to  Heaven  high. 
The  attributive  adjective  was  formerly  permitted  after  the  noun  as  well 
as  before,  and  was  declined  in  that  position ;  as  was  also  the  adjective 
used  predicatively. 

^/ll7,  A  few  adjectives  are  always  used  predicatively, 
and  are  therefore  never  declined ;  others  are  used  only 
attributively,  and  are  therefore  always  declined. 

a.  Of  the  first  class,  some  of  the  most  common  are  Bereit 
ready,  fetnb  hostile,  funb  known,  c^mahx  aware,  eingeben!  mindful, 
tfteil^aft  [teilftaft]  participating,  nii^  useful. 

b.  To  the  second  class  belong  many  adjectives  expressing, 
formal  relations — viz.,  certain  pronominal  adjectives,  as  jener 
yon,  jeber  every,  meinig  mine,  felbig  self-same;  some  adjectives  of 
number,  time,  and  place,  as  gtt)ett  second,  '^eutig  of  to-day,  bortig 
there  situated,  tdglirf)  daily,  Ci\\\'CiX[<^X\&^  in  the  first  place;  and,  in 
general,  adjectives  of  material  in  en,  ern,  for  which  prepositional 
phrases  are  usually  substituted  in  predicate  construction. 


120]  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  47 


DECLENSION  OP  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

118..^  Each  adjective,  in  its  attributive  use,  is  subject 
to  two  different  modes  of  declension,  according  as  it  is 
or  is  not  preceded  by  certain  limiting  words.  These 
we  shall  call  the  fiest  and  second,  or  stkong  and  weak, 
declensions  (see  132). 

(ll9./  1.  The  endings  of  the  fiest  or  steong  declen- 
sion are  the  same  with  those  of  the  definite  article,  al- 
ready given  (63). 

Excepting  that  the  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  neuter  have  e§  in- 
stead of  a§,  and  the  nom.  and  ace.  plural  and  fem.  singular 
have  c  instead  of  ie :  that  is,  the  final  and  characteristic  letter 
is  the  same,  but  differently  preceded. 

2.  The  second  or  weak  declension  has  only  two 
endings,  e  and  cu :  e  belongs  to  the  nominative  singular 
of  all  genders,  and  hence  also  (see  72.2a),  to  the  ac- 
cusative of  the  feminine  and  neuter;  en  is  found  in  all 
the  other  cases.     Thus 

Adjective  Endings  of  Declension. 

First  (strong)  Declension.         Second  (weak)  Declension. 

Singular.       Plural. 

m.         f.  n.      m.f.  n. 

^e  -e  :=e  ==eu 

-en  =en  ^cn  ^en 

=:en  ^en  -en  ^en 

-en  ^e  =e  ^tn 

3.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  first  declension  has  more  than 
twice  as  many  distinct  endings  as  the  second,  and  that  it  there- 
fore makes  a  correspondingly  superior,  though  a  far  from 
conapl^e,  distinction  of  genders  and  cases. 

(  120.  \l.  The  endings  as  given  are  appended  through- 
out to  the  stem  of  the  adjective,  or  to  the  adjective  in 
its  simple  predicative  form. 

Thus,  from  gut  good  are  formed,  in  the  first  declension,  Quter, 
Qute,  oute§,  fiutem,  gutenj  in  the  second,  gutc,  guten. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

m. 

f.        n. 

m.  t.  n. 

N. 

^er 

=:e     ^c§ 

=e 

G. 

:=e§ 

:=er   ^c^ 

^er 

D. 

=^em 

-er   :=em 

==en 

A. 

=en 

=e     ==e§ 

-e 

48  ADJECTIVES.  [120- 

2.  But  adjectives  ending  in  e  reject  this  e  in  every  case  be- 
fore taking  the  en^ding  (or,  what  is  the  same  thing,  reject  the  c 
of  every  ending). 

Thus,  from  trdge  lazy  come  trdQer,  trage,  trageg,  tragem,  Iragen. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  the  unaccented  terminational  syl- 
lables el,  en,  er,  also  usually  reject  the  e  either  of  those  syllables 
or  of  the  declensional  ending. 

Thus,  from  ebel  noble  come  ebler,  eble,  eble§,  and  generally 
eblem  and  eblen,  less  often  ebelm,  ebein ;  from  l^eiler  cheerful  come 
usually  l^eitrer,  l^eitre,  5^itre§,  and  :^eilerm  and  l)ettern,  or  l^eitrem 
and  ^eitren;  from  eben  even  come  ebner,  ebne,  ebne§,  ebtiem, 
ebnen.  The  full  forms  of  these  words,  however — as  ebener,  l^eite* 
rer,  and,  less  often,  ebele^ — are  also  in  good  use,  especially  in  a 
more  stately  or  solemn  style. 

4.  §DC^  high  loses  its  c  when  declined:  thus,  ^ol^er,  fto^e, 
6Qi>£|,  etc. 

/  121. \  1.  The  adjective  takes  the  more  distinctive 
endings  of  the  first  declension,  unless  preceded  by  a 
pronominal  limiting  word  (i.  e.  an  article,  pronoun,  or 
pronominal  adjective:  see  123)  which  itself  has  those 
endings. 

Thus,  as  we  say  ber  5Jlann  the  man,  so  also  guter  Wann  good 
man,  but  ber  Qute  3JJann  the  good  man;  as  bie  grauen  the  women, 
so  gute  Srauen,  and  gute  fc^one  grauen,  but  bie  guten  fd^onen 
Srauen  the  good  handsome  wanien;  as  bem  ^inbe  to  the  child,  so 
fiutem  ^tnbe,  and  gutem,  frf)onem,  artigem  ^inbe,  but  bem  guten, 
jc^onen,  artigen  ^inbe  to  the  good,  handsome,  well-behaved  child. 

2.  Or,  in  other  words,  a  pronominal  limiting  word 
before  the  adjective,  if  it  have  itself  the  more  dis- 
tinctive adjective  ending  characteristic  of  the  case  and 
gender  of  the  qualified  noun,  takes  that  ending  away 
from  the  adjective,  reducing  the  latter  from  the  first  to 
the  second  declension :  the  distinctive  ending  is  not  re- 
peated upon  both  words. 

Note  that  certain  cases — the  ace.  sing,  masculine,  the  nom. 
and  ace.  sing,  feminine,  and  the  dat.  plural — have  the  same 
ending  in  the  one  declension  as  in  the  other,  and  are  therefore 
not  altered,  whatever  the  situation  in  which  the  adjective  is 
placed. 


122]  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  49 

^^  Apparently  by  an  irregular  extension  of  this  tendency  to 
avoid  the  unnecessary  repetition  of  a  distinctive  ending,  a  gen. 
sing.  mascuUne  or  neuter  ending  in  §  takes  before  it  usually 
the  second  form  of  the  adjective  (in  en),  instead  of  the  first  (in 
e§). 

Thus,  fallen  SSafferS  of  coU  water,  frozen  Tlni^t^  [mum]  with 
joyous  spirit,  (jro^en  %\)n\^  [Xeil§]  in  great  part,  and  so  on,  are 
much  more  common  than  !alte§  2Baffer§,  ]xo^t%  2Jlutl)eg  [2)Zute§] 
etc.,  although  the  latter  are  not  incorrect. 

C  12^.    Examples  :— 

1.  Complete  decj^nsion  of  an  adjective,  gut  good,  in  both 
forms. 

^lEST  Declension. 


m. 

N.  guter 

G.  gute^ 

D.  gutem 

A.  guten 


Singular, 
f. 
gute 
guter 
guter 
gute 


Plural. 

m.  f .  n. 

gute 
guter 
guteit 
gute 


Second  Declension. 
Singular. 


N.  ber  gute 

G.  be§  guten 

D.  bem  guten 

A.  htn  guten 


bie  gute  ha^  gute 

ber  guten  be§  guten 

ber  guten  bem  guten 

bie  gute  ha^  gute 


Plural. 

m.  f.  n. 

bie  guten 
ber  guten 
ben  guten 
bie  guten 


2.  Declension  of  noun  and  accompanying  adjective:  rotifer 
[roter]  2Bein  red  wine,  gro^e  3reube  great  joy,  fd^lei^teg  ^elb  had 
money. 


First  Declension. 


Second  Declension. 


Singular, 

m. 

N.  rotter  [roter]  3Sein 

G.  rot^eS  [roteg]  or  rot{)en  Seined 

D.  rot^em  [rotem]  SSeine 

A.  rotfjen  [roten]  StSein 


ber  rot^e  [rote]  SSein 
be§  rotI)en  [roten]  2Beine§ 
bem  rotfien  [roten]  ^eine 
ben  rottjen  [roten]  SSein 


50  ADJECTIVES.  [12a- 

Bingidar, . 

N.  groge  S^eubc  bte  groge  Sreitbc 

G.  groBer  greube  ber  groBen  greube 

D.  grower  greube  ber  gro^en  greube 

A.  gro^e  greube  bie  gro^e  greube 


N.  f^tec^teg  ^etb  ha^  fd^Ied^te  ©etb 

a  fc^Ie^teg  or  4eu  ©elbe§  be§  fc^Iec^teu  @etbe0 

D.  fc^Iec^tem  (S^elbe  bent  fd^lecl^ten  ©elbe 

A.  fc^lec^teg  ®elb  bag  fc^tec^te  ®elb 

Flural 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  rot^e  [rote]  SSeine  2C.  bte  rotten  [roten]  SSetne  2C. 

G.  grower  greuben  2C.  ber  gro^eu  greuben  2C. 

D.  f(^led)ten  ©elbern  :c.  ben  fc^Iedjten  (^elbern  2C. 

A.  gro^e  greuben  2C.  bie  gro^en  greuben  jc. 

123.  The  words  which,  when  placed  before  an  adjec- 
tive, take  away  its  distinctive  ending,  or  reduce  it  from 
the  first  to  the  second  declension,  are — 

1.  The  two  articles,  ber  and  ein,  with  fetn  (195.2),  the  negative 
of  the  latter. 

2.  The  possessive  adjectives,  mein,  bein,  fein,  unfer,  euer,  il^r 
(157  etc.). 

3.  The  demonstrative,  interrogative,  and  relative  pronominal 
adjectives  ber,  bie§  and  Jen  (163),  and  ml<i)  (174). 

4.  The  indefinite  pronolomal  adjectives  and  numeral  adjectives 
ieb,  iegli(5^,  foli^,  mand),  anber,  etntg,  etli(^,  afl,  t)iel,  trenig,  me^r, 
me^irer  (170, 189-194). 

But  )o\^  after  ein  is  treated  as  a  simple  adjective,  and  does 
not  affect  a  following  adjective :  thus,  ein  fold^er  guter  5!Jlann. 

5.  A  few  proper  adjectives:  namely,  t)erjc?^tebene  pi.  sundry 
(nearly  equivalent  with  einige  and  me^rere),  and  folgenb,  eriDd^nt, 
obig,  and  their  like,  used  idiomatically  without  the  article  (66.6) 
to  indicate  things  which  have  been  specified  or  are  to  be  speci- 
fied. 

124.  1.  Since,  however,  a  part  of  these  words — 
namely,  ein,  fein,  and  the  possessive  adjectives — lack  the 


125]  DECLENSION  OP  ADJECTIVES.  51 

distinctive  ending  in  three  of  their  forms,  the  nominative 
singular  masculine  and  the  nominative  and  accusative 
singular  neuter,  the  adjective  following  those  cases 
retains  the  ending. 

Thus,  as  we  say  guter  DJlann,  Qute^  ^inb,  so  also  em  Quter  ^ann, 
ein  Qute§  ^inb  (as  opposed  to  bcr  Quk  Tlann,  ba§  gute  ^inb),  be- 
cause there  is  nothing  about  the  ein  which  should  render  the 
full  ending  upon  the  adjective  unnecessary. 

2.  In  this  way  arises  what  is  sometimes  reckoned  as 
a  "  third  "  or  "  mixed  "  declension,  composed  of  three 
forms  taken  from  the  first  declension,  and  the  rest  from 
the  second.  For  example,  mein  guter  7ny  good  is  declined 

Singular,  Plural. 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.    mein  guter  meinc  gute         mein  gute^         meine  guten 

G.  meine§  guten  meiner  guten  melne§  guten  meiner  guten 
D.  meinem  guten  meiner  guten  meinem  guten  meinen  guten 
A.    meinen  guten      meine  gute         mein  gute§  meine  guten 

There  is  neither  propriety  nor  advantage  in  treating  this  as  a 
separate  declension.  For  each  gender  and  case,  there  are  two 
forms  of  the  adjective,  and  only  two,  and  the  learner  should  be 
taught  to  distinguish  between  them,  and  to  note,  in  every  case, 
the  reason  of  their  respective  use — which  reason  is  the  same  in 
the  "  mixed  "  declension  as  elsewhere. 

3.  In  like  manner,  when  mand),  n)el(^,  and  fold)  are  used  with- 
out an  ending  of  declension  (see  170,  174,  191),  the  succeeding 
adjective  takes  the  full  ending  of  the  first  declension. 

Thus,  mcM)  reic^er  §inimel  what  a  rich  sky,  but  me((^er  reicl)e 
C)immel;  mand)  Bunte  33lumen,  but  manege  bunten  33Iumen  many 
variegated  flowers. 

4.  The  same  is  true  after  all,  Dtel,  mentg,  and  me'^r,  when  they 
are  undeclined  :  thus,  t)iel  gute§  Dbft  much  good  fruit,  me^r  off ene 
SOBogen  mxyre  open  carriages. 

/^125.  1.  The  adjective  follows  the  first  declension  not  only 
when  it  has  no  other  limiting  word,  or  only  another  adjective, 
before  it,  but  also  when  preceded  by  an  indeclinable  word,  such 
as  ettt)a§,  genug,  allerlei,  and  the  numerals. 

2.  After  the  personal  pronouns  (which  do  not  take  the  endings 
of  adjective  declension),  the  adjective  ought,  by  analogy,  to  be 
of  the  first  declension  ;  and  this  is  not  absolutely  forbidden ;  but 


52  '    ADJECTITES.  [125- 

in  common  usage  the  adjective  takes  the  distinctive  endings 
only  in  the  nominative  singular  (with  the  accusative  neuter),  and 
follows  in  the  other  cases  the  second  declension. — That  is  to 
say,  the  adjective  after  a  personal  pronoun  is  declined  as  after 
ein,  or  by  the  "mixed"  declension  (124.2). 

Thus,  id)  armer  Xl^ox  I  poor  fool,  bu  IkU^  lluib  thou  dear  child; 
but  tDir  armen  5:i&oren  we  poor  fools,  i^r  fii^en  Sieber  ye  sweet  songs. 

126.  1.  The  ending  e§  of  the  nom.  and  ace.  neuter  in  the  first 
declension  is  sometimes  dropped :  this  omission  is  especially 
frequent  in  poetry. 

Thus,  fd)5n  ^tikx  firie  weather,  ^ al\ 6)  (Btlh  false  money,  ein 
anber  geft  a  different  festival,  ber  35ol!er  ^eilig  9te^t  the  sacred 
law  of  nations. 

2.  In  old  style  German,  and  in  poetry,  the  ending  is  sometimes 
dropped  in  other  cases  also :  thus,  licb  SJJutter  dear  mother,  Ueb 
^nabe  dear  boy. 

3.  Adjectives  used  as  collective  nouns  are  uninflected  in  such 
combinations  as  mit  ^ro^  unb  ^lein  with  great  and  small,  bei  ^Ht 
unb  Sung  among  old  and  young. 

4.  Certain  adjectives  are  in  all  constructions  indeclinable ; 
thus,^  a.  those  ending  in  lei  (415.11)  and  those  in  er  from  nouns 
of  places  (415.5) ;  b.  lauter  mere,  mtfjx  more,  mniQU  less;  c.  certain 
foreign  names  of  color  (properly  nouns)  as,  rofa  rose,  lila  lilac. 

127.  After  a  part  of  the  pronominal  adjectives  mentioned 
above,  123.4,  it  is  allowable,  and  even  usual,  to  use  the  ending 
of  the  first  declension  instead  of  the  second  in  the  nom.  and  ace. 
plural. 

Thus,  einige  Qto^e  ^aften  sundry  big  boxes,  mandjt  QlndU^t 
^blkx  many  fortunate  races,  me^rere  lange  (Stra^en  several  long 
streets. 

128.  1.  When  two  or  more  adjectives  precede  and  qualify 
the  same  noun,  unless  the  first  be  one  of  those  mentioned  in 
123,  all  regularly  and  usually  take  the  same  ending. 

2.  Rarely,  however,  when  the  following  adjective  stands  in  a 
closer  relation  to  the  substantive,  as  forming  with  it  a  kind  of 
compound  idea,  to  which  the  preceding  adjective  is  then  added 
as  a  more  adventitious  determinative,  the  second  is  allowed  to 
be  of  the  second  declension,  though  the  first  is  of  the  first ;  but 
only  in  the  genitive  and  dative  cases. 

Thus,  l^ofte  f(^atttge  33dume  high  shady  trees,  mit  frobem  leti^tem 
©inn  with  light  joyous  mind,  guter  alter  foftbarer  SBein  good  old 


120]  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  53 

costly  wine ;— hut  tion  f(^onem  tollmen  [rolen]  Sluc^c  of  handsome 
red  cloth,  frif(^erI}o(Idnbtf(^en  .t)dnnGe  of  fresh  Dutch  herrings,  mit 
etgnem  inneren  DrganiSmu^  ivlth  peculiar  internal  organization. 

3.  Occasionally,  what  is  more  properly  an  adjective  qualifying 
the  noun  is  treated  in  German  as  an  adverb  limiting  a  following 
adjective  before  the  noun,  and  so  (130)  is  left  undeclined :  thus, 
bie  SBoIfen,  bie  forrnlo^  graucn  2od)ter  ber  2uft  the  clouds,  the  gray 
shapeless  daughters  of  the  air,  bie  unGlucfjelig  h'aurige  53eGcgnim(i 
the  unhappy  sad  meeting,  ber  uralt  fromtnen  ©itte  of  the  ancient 
pious  custom. 

4.  So  also,  of  two  adjectives  connected  by  unb  and,  the  former 
is  occasionally  left  without  an  ending :  thus,  ein  unglaublid)  reid^ 
unb  Ueblid)er  9J^unb  an  incredibly  rich  and  lovely  mouth. 

[Exercise  6.    Adjectives  of  First  Declension.] 
[Exercise  7.     Adjectives  of  Second  Declension.] 

The  Adjective  used  as  Substantive. 

In  German,  as  in  other  languages,  adjectives  are 
rerj  often  used  as  substantives,  either  with  or  without 
an  article  or  other  determining  word. 

2)  When  so  used,  the  adjective  is  written  with  a 
capital  letter,  like  any  other  substantive ;  but  it  retains 
its  proper  declension  as  an  adjective,  taking  the  endings 
of  the  first  or  of  the  second  declension  according  to  the 
rules  already  given. 

3.  An  adjective  used  as  a  substantive  in  the  masculine  or 
feminine  gender  usually  denotes  a  person;  in  the  neuter 
(singular  only),  a  concrete  abstract — a  thing  which,  or  that  in 
general  which,  possesses  the  quality  designated  by  the  ad- 
jective. 

Thus,  ber  ®utc  rdumt  ben  $Iafe  bem  33cjcn  the  good  (man)  gives 
vUwe  to  the  ivicked,  ba^  l^ie  unb  ia  ein  ©liidlid^er  QetDefen  that  here 
and  there  has  been  one  happy  person,  eineSc^one  a  beaidy,  mcine 
©eliebte  my  beloved,  3^re  9flc(i)te  your  right  hand,—\vo  ha§  ©trenae 
mit  bem  S^i'ten,  mo  ©tarfeg  fid)  unb  5DliIbe§  paarten  where  the  hard 
has  united  with  the  tender,  where  what  is  strong  and  ivhat  is  gentle 
Imve  combined,  burc^  0einere§  gum  ©ro^ern  mic^  geiDO^nen  ac- 
custom  me  by  the  less  to  the  greater. 

4.  Some  adjectives  are  so  constantly  used  in  this  way  as  to 
have  quite  acquired  the  character  of  substantives,    From  these 


64  ADJECTIVES.  [129- 

are  to  be  distinguished  certain  neuters  derived  from  adjectives 
without  a  suffix,  and  declined  as  nouns  of  the  first  declension : 
as,  @ut  property,  9te(^t  right,  ^ot^  [9iot]  red,  ^eutfd)  German 
(language). 

5.  After  etlt)a§  something,  tr)a§  what,  something,  ni(^t§  nothing, 
an  adjective  is  treated  neither  as  attributive  nor  as  appositive, 
but  as  an  adjective  used  as  substantive,  in  apposition :  it  is 
therefore  of  the  first  declension,  and  (regularly  and  usually) 
written  with  a  capital  initial. 

Thus, e§ mu^  no(^  ettr)a§  @ro^ere§,no(f)etn)a§  Q^xxVx^txt^ 
fommen  there  must  he  coming  something  more  that  is  greater  and 
more  splendid,  tt)a§  id)  ©raufameg  erlitt  wlutt  that  was  dread- 
ful I  endured,  e§  ift  nid)t§  ^i  e  u  e  §  it  is  nothing  new,  t)on  ettr)a§ 
5lnbercm  of  something  else. 

6.  There  is  no  strict  and  definite  limit  between  the  adjective 
belonging  to  a  noun  understood  and  the  adjective  used  as  a 
noun,  and  many  cases  admit  of  interpretation  as  either  the  one 
or  the  other. 

The  Adjective  used  as  Adverb, 

ly  adjective,  in  German,  may  be  used  in  its  predica- 
tive or  iininflected  form  as  an  adverb. 

Thus,  ein  ganseg  ^avi§  a  whole  hx)me,  but  ein  g  a  n  a  fc^oncg  ^a\i§ 
a  wholly  beautiful  house,  and  ein  flans  fd}on  gebaute§  |)au§ 
a  quite  heautifuUy  built  house,  er  |(^reibt  o  u  t  he  writes  well,  er 
Ia(^te  no^  t)tel  bummer  he  laughed  ijet  much  more  foolishly. 

See  further  363;  and,  for  the  adjective  with  adverbial  form, 
128.3. 

[Exercise  8.    Adjectives  as  Substantives  and  Adverbs.] 

131.  Participles  as  Adjectives. — Participles,  being  verbal  ad- 
jectives, are  treated  in  nearly  all  respects  as  adjectives — as 
regards  their  various  use,  their  mode  of  declension,  and  their 
comparison.     See  further  349  etc. 

132.  The  double  declension  of  the  adjective  is  in  some  respects 
analogous  with  the  two-fold  mode  of  declension  of  nouns,  and  is  often, 
like  the  latter,  called  "strong"  and  "weak"  declension.  The  second 
or  "weak"  declension  of  adjectives,  like  that  of  nouns,  is  made  upon 
the  model  of  a  theme  ending  in  n.  But  the  other  shares  in  the  pecu- 
liarities of  the  old  pronominal  inflection  ;  being  originally  formed,  it  is 
assumed,  by  the  composition  of  a  declined  pronoun  (long  since  lost  in 
separate  use)  with  the  adjective  theme.     The  principle  on  which  the 


136]  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIYES.  55 

distinction  in  the  use  of  the  two  is  now  based  -  namely,  the  economical 
avoidance  of  unnecessary  explicitness — is  of  comparatively  recent  intro- 
duction. The  first  declension  was  formerly  used  when  the  logical 
emphasis  rested  on  the  attribute ;  the  second,  when  it  rested  on  the 
person  or  thing  to  which  the  attribute  related  ;  the  "strong"  adjective 
qualified  an  indefinite  or  abstract  object ;  the  **weak,"  one  definite  or 
individualized. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

133.  Although  the  subject  of  comparison,  or  formation  of 
derivative  adjectives  of  the  comparative  and  superlative 
degrees,  comes  more  properly  under  the  head  of  derivation  or 
word-formation,  it  will  be,  for  the  sake  of  practical  convenience, 
treated  here. 

134.  The  German  adjective,  like  the  English,  is  sub- 
ject to  variation  by  termination  in  order  to  express 
degree  of  quality  indicated ;  a  comparative  and  a  super- 
lative degree  are  thus  formed  from  the  simple  adjective, 
which,  with  reference  to  them,  is  called  positive. 

135.  1.  The  endings  forming  the  comparative  and 
superlative  are  the  same  as  in  English — namely,  er  and 
eft.    But 

2.  Adjectives  ending  in  c  add  only  r  for  the  comparative; 
and  those  in  el,  en,  er  usually  (before  the  endings  of  declension, 
always)  reject  the  e  of  those  terminations  before  er. 

3.  Except  after  a  sibilant  letter  (3,  §,  ^,  jd)),  and  a  b  or  t  usu- 
ally (especially  when  preceded  by  another  consonant:  and 
excepting  the  nb  of  the  present  participle),  the  e  of  the  super- 
lative ending  eft  is  regularly  omitted,  and  the  ending  reduced 
to  simple  ft.  After  a  vowel,  except  e,  the  e  may  be  either  omit- 
ted or  retained. 

136.  Monosyllabic  adjectives  whose  vowel  is  a,  0,  or 
U  (not  an)  more  usually  modify  those  vowels  in  the 
comparative  and  superlative :  but  there  are  many  (about 
fifty,  including  several  which  may  follow  either  method) 
that  leave  the  vowel  unchanged. 


56 


ADJECTIVES. 


[136- 


These  adjectives  are : 

baitgt,  anxious  taljl,  bald  fcinft,  gentle 

hax\d),  harsh  !arg,  miserly  fatt,  sated 

hlant,  shining  !Iart,  clear  tc^taff,  relaxed 

6Ia^t,  pale  tnapp,  close  \d)lani,  slender 

blo^,  bare  la^m,  lame  ff^^offf  rough 

bratt,  brave  la%,  weary  ftarr,  stiff 

Bunt,  ^ay  ^^^*'  ^^^  ^**'^^'  ^^^^ 

bumpf,  dull  morfc^,  ro«eri  ftraff,  fense 

\alil,  fallow  mdt,  naked  ftumm,  c?um6 

falb,     *•  na^t,  ioe<  ftumpf,  obtuse 

\a\\(i),  false  p\att,Jki,t  toK,  mad! 

\iad),  flat  ^Jtump,  blunt  r)oU,full 

fro^,  happy  y:ci\^,  q^^ck  UJa^r,  /rue 

frommt,piows  roi),  rowgf/i  tt)unb,  wounded 

gtattt,  smoo<^  i^«ni>/  ^^wnd  gflfjmt,  tame 

\)0^l,  hollow  fac^t,  sq/i(  gartt,  tender 
j^olb,  gracious 
Adjectives  marked  with  a  f  in  the  list  sometimes  modify  the  vowel  in 
comparison,  but  the  unmodified  form  is  in  better  usage. 

137.  The  formation  of  comparatives  and  superlatives  by  the 
endings  er  and  eft  is  not,  as  in  English,  hmited  to  monosyllabic 
adjectives.  But  superlatives  of  harsh  combination  are  avoided ; 
nor  are  adjectives  compared  which  (see  11 7^)  are  used  only 
predicatively,  and  are  incapable  of  declension. 

Of  course,  as  in  English,  some  adjectives  are  by  their  sig- 
nification excluded  from  comparison:  e.  g.,  gang  entire,  tobt 
dead,  trben  earthen. 


138.    Examples : — 

Positwe. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

\^m,  beautiful 

f(^oner 

ftf)onft 

Ifieife,  hot 

^ei^er 

l^ei^eft 

Irdge,  la^y 

trager 

trdgeft 

fret,  free 

freier 

freift,  freieft 

alt,  old 

alter 

alteft 

fromm,  pix)us 

frfimmer 

frommft 

furg,  short 

fiirger 

fiirgeft 

froi  joyous 

fro!)er 

fro^ieft 

bunfel,  dark 

bunfler 

bunfelft 

tnagcr,  thin 

magrer,  magerer 

magerft 

offen,  open 

offner,  offener 

offenft 

bemorfen,  abandoned 

bertDorfener 

bertDorfenft 

Bebeutenb,  significant 

Bebeutenber 

Bebeutenbft 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  67 

139.  Irregular  and  Defective  Comparison. 

1.  A  few  adjectives  are  irregular  in  the  comparative,  or  in 
the  superlative,  or  in  both :  namely — 

Gut,  good  Befler  beft 

t)lel,  mwih  mel^r  meifl 

1^0^,  Ugh  l^ol^er  pd^ft 

nal^,  nigh  na!)er  nd(i)]t 

gro^,  great  grbfeer  9ro|t  (rarely  gro^cft) 

2.  A  few  are  defective,  lacking  a  positive : 

little  tninber  minbeft 

mid  mittler  mittelft 

especially,  a  class  derived  from  prepositions  or  adverbs : 
[in,  in]  inner  innerft 

[au§,  out]  au^er  du^erft 

[ober,  oben,  above]  oBer  oBerft 

[unter,  unten,  hehw]        unter  unterft 

[t)or,  in /ronq  t)orbcr  Dorberft 

[l^inter,  ^inten,  behind]     l^inler  l^interft 

3.  Two  lack  (as  adjectives)  both  positive  and  comparative : 
Me,  ere]  [e^er,  sooner]     ti\\,  first 

Me  le^t,  lajst 

From  these  two  superlatives  are  irregularly  formed  new 
comparatives,  erfler /ormer  and  letter  latter.  So  also,  from  the 
comparative  me^r  more,  the  double  comparative  me'^rer  (used 
almost  only  in  the  plural  me^rere  several)  is  made. 

140.  Declension  of  Comparatives  and  Superlatives. 

1.  In  general,  comparatives  and  superlatives  are 
subject  to  the  same  rules  of  declension  as  their 
positives,  the  simple  adjectives. 

That  is  to  say,  they  are  uninflected  when  used  in  apposition, 
as  predicate,  or  as  adverb  (with  exceptions  noted  just  below), 
and  declined  when  used  attributively  or  Substantively ;  and 
they  have  the  same  double  declension  as  simple  adjectives, 
determined  by  the  same  circumstances.  The  comparative 
presents  no  irregularities,  but— 

2.  a.  The  superlative  does  not  often  occur  without  an  article 
or  other  limiting  word  before  it,  and  is  therefore  more  usually 
of  the  second  declension. 

It  occurs  of  the  first  declension  especially  in  the  vocative, 
after  a  limiting  genitive,  and  in  phrases  which  omit  the  article : 


58  ADJECTIVES.  [140- 

thus,  ItcBfter  35rubcr  dearest  brother,  auf  beg  9Jleere§  tiefunterftem 
^runbe  on  the  sea's  very  lowest  bottom,  in.  Joc^fter  (Jile  in  extreme 
(higfwst)  haste,  meiner  2Bunf(i^e  tuarmfter,  innigfler  the  warmest,  most 
heartfelt  of  my  wishes. 

b.  "What  is  of  much  more  importance,  the  superlative  is  not, 
Uke  the  positive  and  comparative,  used  predicatively  in  its  unin- 
flected  form ;  but  for  this  is  substituted  an  adverbial  expression, 
formed  with  the  preposition  an  and  the  definite  article  bem  (dat. 
sing,  neuter),  contracted  into  am. 

Thus,  er  ift  mir  am  1 1  e  b  ft e n  he  is  dearest  to  me,  m  ©ommer 
finb  bie  Sage  ju  fur 3;  im  C>erbfte,  no(^  fiirger;  aber  am  fur  = 
S  e  ft  c  n  tm  SBinter  in  summer  the  days  are  too  short ;  in  autumn 
yet  shorter ;  but  shortest  in  winter. 

This  expression  means  literally  *  at  the  dearest,'  '  at  the  short- 
est,' and  so  on,  but  is  employed  as  general  predicate  in  many 
cases  where  we  could  not  substitute  such  a  phrase  for  it.  Its 
sphere  of  use  borders  close  upon  that  of  the  superlative  with 
preceding  article,  agreeing  with  a  noun  understood ;  and  it  is 
often  inaccurately  used  in  place  of  the  latter :  e.  g.,  er  ift  am 
flei^igften  unter  alien  ©d^iilern  he  is  most  diligent  of  all  the  scholars, 
for  er  ift  ber  flei^igfte  2c.  lie  is  the  most  diligent,  etc.  Thus,  we 
ought  to  say,  biefer  ©turm  mar  geftern  am  fteftigften  this  storm  was 
most  violent  yesterday,  but  ber  fleftrige  ©turm  mar  ber  l^eftigfte  the 
storm  of  yesterday  was  the  most  violent  (e.  g.,  of  the  year). 

Only  aUerliebft  is  used  directly  as  predicate :  ha^  mar  aHerliebft 
that  was  charming. 

c.  For  the  superlative  as  adverb  are  also  generally  substi- 
tuted adverbial  phrases  formed  with  am,  auf§,  and  gum  (see 
363.2). 

[■   141.     Comparison  with  Adverbs. 

1.  Adjectives  not  admitting  of  comparison  in  the  usual  man- 
ner, by  er  and  eft  (137),  may  be  compared,  as  in  English,  with 
help  of  the  adverbs  mz^x  more  and  am  meiften  most. 

Thus,  er  ift  mir  meftr  feinb,  alg  i^  iftm  lie  is  nmre  unfriendly  to 
me  than  I  to  him,  er  mar  mir  am  meiften  niife  lie  was  most  useful 
to  me. 

2.  When,  of  two  qualities  belonging  to  the  same  object,  one  is 
declared  to  be  in  excess  of  the  other,  the  comparison  is  usually 
and  more  properly  made  with  mel^r. 

Thus,  er  mar  mel^r  ta|)fer  al§  flug  he  was  more  bold  than  prudent ; 
but,  ma'^rer,  al§  tlug  unb  fromm  more  true  than  prudent  and 
dutiful  (Goethe). 


145]  COMPARISON  OP  ADJECTIVES.  59 

142.  Additional  Bemarks. 

1.  The  superlative  has,  as  in  other  languages,  a  twofold  mean- 
ing and  use:  one  implying  direct  comparison  and  eminence 
above  others  (superlative  relative) ;  the  other,  general  eminence, 
or  possession  of  the  designated  quality  in  a  high  degree  (super- 
lative absolute). 

Thus,  f(^onfte  33Iumen  ifnost  beautiful  (exceedingly  beautiful) 
flowers,  bie  fi^onften  33Iumen  the  most  beautiful  flowers  (of  all  those 
had  in  view). 

This  distinction  appears  especially  in  adverbial  superlatives : 
see  363.2c. 

2.  Less  often,  the  comparative  is  used  absolutely,  without 
direct  comparison  implied:  thus,  cine  Idngere  Sfiebe  a  lengthy 
speech,  I)ol}ere  (5d)ulen  high  schools. 

3.  To  a  superlative  is  often  prefixed  aHer,  in  order  further  to 
intensify  its  meaning:  thus,  ber  aUerfd^bnfte  the  rnost  beautiful 
of  all. 

^Iler  is  the  gen.  pi.  of  all  all,  and  so  is  used  in  its  hteral  sense, 
only  combined  with  the  adjective,  and  often  in  connections  where 
its  introduction  as  an  independent  adjunct  of  the  adjective  would 
be  impossible. 

[Exercise  9.    Comparative  and  Superlative  of  Adjectives.] 

MODIFYING  ADJUNCTS  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

143.  The  adjective,  in  all  its  uses  as  adjective  and  as  substan- 
tive (for  its  adverbial  use,  see  under  Adverbs,  363),  is  hable  to 
be  hmited  by  modifying  adjuncts  of  various  kinds. 

144.  1.  The  customary  adjunct  of  an  adjective  is  an  adverb : 
as,  ]"e^r  gut  very  good,  l^erglii^  fro^  heartily  glad. 

2.  An  adjective  may  be  limited  by  an  adverbial  clause,  con- 
taining a  verb  and  its  subject,  and  introduced  by  a  conjunction 
(see  438.36). 

Thus,  er  ift  fo  gut,  ba§  \^  iftn  nur  licBen  !ann  he  is  so  good,  that 
lean  not  but  love  him,  frdnfer  al§  man  glaulite  sicker  than  was 
supposed. 

An  adverbial  clause  can  hardly  qualify  an  adjective,  except  as 
a  specification  of  degree,  where  a  comparison  is  made. 

145.  An  adjective  is  often  limited  by  a  noun  (or  pronoun) 
dependent  on  it. 

1.  By  a  noun  in  the  genitive  case :  thus,  lebtg  aHer  ^f(i(^t  free 
from  all  obligation,  x^x^x  ^tnk  gemi^  sure  of  its  prey:  see  817. 


60  PRONOUNS.  [14:5- 

2.  By  a  noun  in  the  dative  case :  thus,  t'^m  ctQCn  peculiar  to 
Mm,  glei(^  einer  Seid^e  like  a  corpse:  see  223. 

3.  By  a  noun  in  the  accusative  case,  but  only  very  rarely,  and 
in  predicative  construction :  thus,  id^  bin  e§  miibe  I  am  tired  of  it : 
see  229. 

4.  By  an  infinitive,  with  its  sign  gu  to:  thus,  leic^t  gu  t)erf(^affen 
easy  to  procure :  see  344. 

146.  An  adjective  is  limited  by  a  prepositional  phrase :  that 
is,  by  a  noun  whose  relation  to  it  is  defined  by  a  preposition : 
thus,  t)om  ©(^aumc  rein  free  from  scum,  anQcnel^m  t)on  (55eftalt 
agreeable  in  figure. 

147.  1.  An  adverbial  adjunct  to  an  adjective  always  pre- 
cedes it — except  the  adverb  genug  erumgh. 

2.  An  adjective  used  attributively  must  be  preceded  by  all  its 
modifying  adjuncts :  thus,  aller  t)on  bem  beut]d)en  9f{ei(^c  abl^dngi= 
gen,  ober  bagu  gel^briQen  SBolferftdmme  of  all  tJw  rax^es  dependent  on 
the  German  empire,  or  belonging  to  it. 

3.  Adjectives  used  in  the  predicate  or  in  apposition  may  take 
the  limiting  noun,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  either  before 
or  after  them :  but  the  adjective  more  usually  follows ;  and 
necessarily,  if  the  limiting  word  be  a  pronoun  without  a  prep- 
osition. 

148.  Participles,  as  verbal  adjectives,  share  in  most  of  the 
constructions  of  the  adjective ;  see  349  etc. 

PRONOUNS. 


149.    In  German,  as  in  English,  substantive  pronouns  and 

pronominal  adjectives  (or  adjective  pronouns)  are  for  the  most 
part  not  distinguished  from  one  another  (as  they  are  distin- 
guished in  French)  by  different  forms,  but  the  same  word  is 
used,  according  to  circumstances,  with  either  value.  It  will  be 
convenient,  therefore,  to  treat  both  classes  together,  explaining 
under  each  word  its  own  proper  use  or  uses. 

L15CL    The  principal  classes  of  pronouns  are — 

1.  The  personal; 

2.  The  possessive ; 

3.  The  demonstrative  (including  the  determinative) ; 

4.  The  interrogative ; 


152] 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


61 


5.  The  relative  (all  of  which  are  also  either  de- 
monstrative or  interrogative) ; 

6.  The  indefinite,  with  the  indefinite  numerals. 

The  determinative,  indefinite,  and  numeral  pronouns  are  in 
part  of  ambiguous  character,  being  intermediate  classes  through 
which  the  pronouns  shade  off  into  ordinary  adjectives  and 
numerals. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


161. 


r 


The  personal  pronouns  are 
First  Peeson. 
Singular,         '  Plural. 


1 

N. 

^          ^ 

^ 

t^ir 

we 

G. 

meiner,  mein 

of  me 

unfer 

of  us 

D. 

mtr 

to  me 

un^  K-^vW  to  us 

A- 

ntid^^ 

me 

un0 

us 

Second  Person. 

N. 

bu 

thou 

xf)X 

ye 

G. 

beiner,  bein 

of  thee 

euer 

of  you 

D. 

bir 

to  thee 

euc^ 

to  you 

A. 

bic^- 

thee 

tu6) 

you 

\ 

Third  Person, 

Singular, 

masc. 

fern. 

neut. 

N. 

er 

he 

fie 

she 

e§ 

it 

X^. 

feiner,  fetn  of  him 

t^rer 

of  her       feiner,  fein  of  it 

D. 

if)m 

to  him 

if)r 

to  her       it)m 

to  a 

A. 

i()n 

him 

fie 
Plural 

m.  f.  n. 

her 

e§ 

it 

/ 


N.  fie  they 

G.  i^rer  of  them 

D.  i^nen  ,  to  them 

A.  fie  them 

Si(^,  the  special  reflexive  of  the  third  person  (see  155.3),  is 
also  a  member  of  this  class,  a  personal  pronoun. 

152.  1.  5[Rein,  bein,  jein  are  older  forms  of  the  gen.  singular, 
now  antiquated,  but  still  met  with  in  certain  phrases ;  i()r,  for 


62  PEONOXTNS.  [152- 

t^rer,  does  not  occur  ^,   unferer,  for  unfer,  and  curcr,  for  euer,  are 
not  unknown,  but  rare. 

Examples  are :  il)r  Snftnimente  f^ottet  mein  ye  instruments  mock 
me,  n)a§  bebarf  man  fein  what  do  they  require  of  him?  ntd)t  au^ 
SSerac^tutiQ  euer  rmt  out  of  contempt  of  you. 

2.  These  genitives  in  composition  with  l^alBen,  tDegen,  and 
tDiHen  add  a  wholly  anomalous  et ;  and  unfer  and  euer,  in  like 
manner,  add  a  t:  thus,  meinetl^arben,  beinettt)eQen,  urn  feinettDillen, 
unferttDegen,  euert!&alben,  etc. 

3.  Genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  are  everywhere  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  only  as  objects  of  verbs  (219)  and  adjectives 
(217).  For  the  genitive  Umiting  a  noun  is  substituted  a  posses- 
sive adjective  (158.2). 

il53v    Use  of  the  Personal  Pronouns  in  address. 

1.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  pronoun  of  the  second  pers. 
singular,  bu  thou,  is  no  longer  used  in  address,  in  the  ordinary 
intercourse  of  Ufe. 

It  is  retained  (as  in  English)  in  the  language  of  worship  and 
of  poetry :  and  further,  in  that  of  familiarity— the  familiarity  of 
intimacy,  between  equals,  as  between  husband  and  wife,  near 
relations,  or  particular  friends,  also  among  children; — the 
familiarity  toward  inferior  age  and  -otation,  as  on  the  part  of 
any  one  toward  young  children,  or  on  the  part  of  teachers  or 
employers  toward  youthful  pupils  or  .A^^vesitsf; — and  even, 
sometimes,  the  familiarity  of  insult  or  comtempt. 

2.  The  pronoun  of  the  second  pers.  plural — il)r  ye  etc. — was 
at  one  time  generally  current  in  Germany  for  the  singular  (like 
our  you),  and  is  still  met  with  in  poetry  or  narrative:  but 
modern  use  authorizes  it  only  in  addressing  more  than  one  of 
such  persons  as  may,  singly,  be  addressed  with  bu. 

3.  The  singular  pronouns  of  the  third  person — er  he,  fie  she, 
etc. — were  also  once  used  in  customary  address,  but  soon  sank 
to  the  condition  of  address  by  an  acknowledged  "superior  to  an 
Inferior — as  by  a  monarch  to  a  subject,  a  master  to  a  servant, 
and  the  like — with  which  value  they  are  still  retained,  but  are 
going  out  of  vogue.  * 

Employed  in  this  way,  er  and  fie  and  their  cases  are  usually 
and  properly  written  with  a  capital. 

4  At  present,  the  pronoun  of  the  third  pers.  plural 
^[ie  they — and  its   possessive,    xijx    their,    are   alone 


154]  PBONOUNS  m  ADDRESS.  63 

allowed,  in  the  sense  of  you,  your,  in  common  life, 
in  addressing  either  one  person  or  more  than  one. 
When  thus  used,  they  are,  for  distinction,  written  with 
capital  letters,  @te,  S^nen,  Sljr,  etc.  (but  the  reflexive 
fti^  is  not  so  written). 

Thus,  id)  banfe  Sl^nen  fiir  S^re  ©efalliflfeit,  bag  ©ie  fi(^  bie 
93Zuf)e  QCficben  l^aben  I  thank  you  for  your  kindness,  in  that  you 
have  given  yourself  the  trouble. 

The  verb  with  (gie  is  always  in  the  plural,  whether  one  person 
or  more  be  intended.  But  a  following  adjective  is  either 
singular  or  plural,  according  to  the  sense :  thus,  ©ie  ungliicf= 
Ii(f)er  you  unhappy  man!  but  ©ie  unglucfUd)en  you  unhappy  ones! 

The  use  of  @ie  in  address  is  quite  modem,  not  having  become 
generally  established  till  about  the  middle  of  the  last  century. 

5.  Some  authorities  write  all  the  pronouns  of  address  with 
a  capital,  even  ^u,  ^i(^,  (Ju(f),  etc. ;  but  this  is  not  to  be  ap- 
proved, except  in  such  documents  as  letters,  where  the  words 
are  to  reach  the  person  addressed  through  the  eye. 

\154}  Peculiarities  in  the  use  of  Pronouns  of  the  third  person. 

1.  As  a  general  rule,  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person, 
in  the  singular,  takes  the  gender  of  the  noun  to  which 
it  relates. 

Thus,  when  speaking  of  a  hat  (ber  Qvi\),  we  use  er  and  i'^n ;  of 
a  pen  (bie  Seber),  fie;  of  bread  {)ia^  33rob),  e§. 

Excepted  from  this  rule  are  such  words  as  SBeib  woman,  which 
are  neuter,  thou^  designating  female  persons ;  also  diminu- 
tives (neuter)  of  personal  appellations,  such  as  5!Jidbrf)en  girl, 
f^rdulein  young  lady,  ^ndblein  little  hoy :  a  pronoun  referring  to 
one  of  these  often  follows  the  natural  gender,  instead  of  the 
grammatical.     I^inb  child  is  represented  by  e§  it,  as  with  us. 

2.  But  these  pronouns  are  seldom  used  in  the  genitive  or 
dative  for  things  without  life.  For  the  genitive  is  substituted 
the  genitive  of  a  demonstrative,  ber  or  berfelBe ;  for  the  dative, 
the  dative  of  the  same :  or,  if  governed  by  a  preposition,  a 
combination  of  that  preposition  with  the  adverb  'tio,  (or  bar) 
there. 

.Thus,  bamit  therewith,  bat)on  thereof,  barin  therein,  barnad^ 
thereafter,  and  so  on,  are  used  instead  of  mit  i^m  or  i!^r  with  it, 
etc.    ^ar  is  put  instead  of  ba  before  a  vowel  or  n. 


64  PBONOUNS.  [154r- 

Similar  substitutions  of  the  demonstratives  are  often  made 
also  in  other  cases  where  we  employ  the  personal  pronoims : 
see  below,  171. 

3.  The  neuter  accusative  c§  is,  in  like  manner,  almost  never 
allowed  after  a  preposition,  but  is  replaced  by  ba  before  the 
preposition :  thus,  bafiir,  barum,  for  fiir  e§  for  it,  urn  e§  about  it. 

4.  The  neuter  e§  has  certain  special  uses. 

a.  It  is,  as  in  EngUsh,  the  indefinite  and  impersonal  subject 
of  a  verb :  thus,  e§  regnet  it  rains,  e§  tft  fein  33ruber  it  is  his  brother, 
e§  freut  m\^,  ©ie  gu  f el^en  it  rejoices  me  to  see  you. 

b.  In  this  use,  it  often  answers  to  our  there  before  a  verb :  as, 
e§  ttjar  ein  ^ern  barin  there  was  a  kernel  in  it,  e§  mirb  Sf^iemanb 
tommcn  there  will  no  one  come. 

c.  Yet  more  often,  it  serves  the  purpose  of  a  mere  grammat- 
ical device  for  shifting  the  true  subject  to  a  position  after  the 
verb,  and  is  itself  untranslatable :  as,  e§  fperren  bie  9flie|en  ben 
ctnfamen  SBeg  the  giants  bar  the  lonely  way,  e§  fur(i)te  bie  (^btter 
^a§  5Jlenf(5^en0ef(!^Ie(5^t  let  the  human  race  fear  the  gods. 

d.  In  all  these  uses,  the  verb  agrees  in  number  with  the  fol- 
lowing noun,  the  logical  subject  or  the  predicate :  thus,  e§  tDaren 
bie  alIerfd)onften  it  was  ("or,  they  were)  the  very  finest  ones. 

e.  (J§  also  stands  as  indefinite  object ;  also  as  predicate, 
representing  another  word  or  phrase  already  used,  and  of 
which  the  repetition  is  avoided  (to  be  rendered,  then,  by  so, 
be  so,  do  so,  or  the  like) :  thus,  \^  felber  bin  e  §  ni(i)t  me^r 
I  myself  am  so  [what  I  was]  no  longer,  al§  i(^  e  §  no(^  fonnte 
when  I  was  still  able  to  do  so. 

/.  Instead  of  it  is  I,  and  the  hke,  the  German  reverses  the  ex- 
pression, and  says  \^  bin  e§  I  am  it,  ©ie  njoren  e§  you  were  it 
(i.  e.,  it  was  you),  etc. 

g.  (^§,  in  all  situations,  is  liable  to  be  abbreviated  to  ^§ :  the 
apostrophe  should  in  such  case  always  be  written,  but  is  some- 
times omitted. 

166.)  Beflexive  use  of  the  Personal  Pronouns. 

XTa.  reflexive  pronoun  is  one  which  represents  the  same  per- 
son or  thing  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  but  in  the  relation  of 
object — namely,  as  object,  direct  or  indirect,  of  the  verb  in  the 
sentence ;  or  (less  properly)  in  a  prepositional  adjunct  to  that 
verb. 


155]  PEBSONAL  PEONOUNS.  66 

It  is  usually  to  be  rendered  by  a  personal  pronoun  with  the 
word  self  added:  thus,  id)  tr)af(^e  m\^  I  wash  myself,  \^  f(^mei(^Ic 
ttitr  I  flatter  myself  \^  fc^one  tnetner  (or  nttc^)  I  spare  myself  i^ 
fto^e  fie  t)on  mir  I  thrust  them  from  myself  (or,  from  me). 

\2^  In  the  first  and  second  persons,  singular  and 
plural,  the  reflexive  pronoun  is  the  same  with  the  per- 
sonal in  every  case,  the  latter  being  used  in  a  reflexive 
sense,  without  any  adjunct  corresponding  to  our  self 
(but  compare  5,  below). 

The  same  is  the  case  with  the  genitive  of  the  third  person — 
as,  er  fd)ont  feiner  he  spares  himself— hut 

ir3.)ln  the  third  person,  there  is  a  special  reflexive 
prbnoun,  ftc^,  which  must  always  be  used  instead  of  the 
dative  or  accusative  of  a  personal  pronoun,  after  either 
verb  or  preposition,  when  the  subject  of  the  sentence 
is  referred  to.  It  has  the  value  of  both  accusative  and 
dative,  of  either  number,  and  of  any  gender. 

Thus,  er,  fie,  e§  tDcifd^t  fi(^,  fd)mei(^elt  jic^  he,  she,  or  it  washes  or 
flatters  himself,  herself,  or  itself,  fie  n)afd)en  fic^,  fc^meic^eln  \i^  they 
wash  themselves,  or  flatter  themselves,  ba§  ift  an  unb  fiir  fid)  gut 
thut  is  good  in  and  by  itself. 

4.  In  German,  as  in  French  (there  is  no  corresponding  usage 
in  English),  the  reflexive  pronoun  in  the  plural  is  not  seldom 
employed  in  what  is  called  a  "reciprocal"  sense,  answering  to 
our  one  another. 

Thus,  tt)ir  1;)aikn  un§  nte  fe^en  foUen  we  ought  never  to  have 
seen  one  another,  \\)i  "^affet  euc^  %ie  hate  each  other,  fie  (©ie) 
geben  ft  c^  ba§  3eid)en  they  (you)  give  one  another  the  signal. 

Instead  of  the  reciprocal  reflexive  (or,  rarely  and  redundantly, 
along  with  it),  the  word  einanber  one  another  is  often  employed. 

Only  the  connection  and  the  requirement  of  the  sense  can 
show  in  any  case  whether  the  pronoun  has  its  directly  or  its 
reciprocally  reflexive  value. 

5.  ©elbft  (or  felBer)  self  may  be  added  to  any  reflexive  pro- 
noun, for  greater  emphasis ;  or,  in  the  plural,  to  exclude  the 
reciprocal  sense. 

It  may  also  be  added  for  emphasis  to  any  pronoun,  or  noun, 
answering  to  our  myself,  thyself,  itself,  etc. 


66  PEONOUNS.    '  [156- 

156.  The  dative  of  a  personal  pronoun  is  sometimes  intro- 
duced into  a  clause  expletively,  for  liveliness  of  expression  :  as, 
Ia|  mtr  ^min  ben  %lkn  let  the  old  man  in  here  {for  me): 
compare  222.  III.  c. 

[Exercise  10.    Personal  Pronouns.] 
POSSESSIYE  PKONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES. 

157.  The  personal  pronouns  are  always  substantive ; 
their  corresponding  adjectives  are  the  possessives : 
namely 


mem,  my 

unjer,  our 

bein,  thy 

euer,  your 

fein,  his,  its 

xtjX,  their 

t^r,  her 

(3i)r,  your) 

The  possessives  of  the  masc.  and  neut.  singular  are  the  same, 
{ein.  The  possessive  of  the  fern,  singular  and  that  of  the  plural 
of  all  genders  also  agree  in  form ;  and,  as  the  latter  (see  153.4:) 
is  used  in  the  sense  of  a  second  person,  \tjx  has  three  meanings, 
her,  tlieir,  and  your  (the  last  of  which  is  distinguished  to  the 
eye  by  the  capital  initial). 

158.  1.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  possessives  correspond 
closely  in  form  with  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns, 
being,  in  fact,  the  same  words  in  a  different  condition. 

2.  The  ofQce,  also,  of  the  possessive,  agrees  with  that  of  the 
genitive  of  a  noun.  The  genitive  of  the  pronoun  is  very  seldom 
used  to  limit  a  noun,  but  for  it  is  substituted  a  possessive  in  the 
form  of  an  adjective,  qualifying  the  noun  (216.3). 

Thus,  bie  ^Irme  be§  9Jlanne§  the  man's  arms;  but  feine  ^rme  his 
arms,  not  bie  ^rme  feiner  the  arms  of  him.  Karely,  such  cases 
occur  as  33el^errfrf)un()  eurer  felbft  control  of  yourself  (a  verbal 
noun  imitating  the  construction  of  the  verb). 

(^§^i  As  regards  their  declension,  possessives  are 
treated  in  the  same  manner  as  other  adjectives. 

1.  They  are  used  predicatively  in  their  simple  or  thematic 
form. 

Thus,  ber  33e(i)er  tft  bein  the  goblet  is  thine,  bie  ^raut  jei  mein  he 
the  bride  mine. 


169] 


POSSESSIVES. 


67 


2.  When  used  attributively  (their  regular  and  or- 
dinary office),  they  are  declined,  not  like  ber  tlm,  but  like 
cin  a  (63).     Thus,  mcin  my  is  declined— 


VI 


N.  mein 

Gr.  meineg 

D.  meinem 

A.  tneinen 

and  unfer  our  — 

N.  unfer 

G.  unfereg 

D.  imferem 

A.  unferen 


Singular, 
t. 
meine 
meiner 
tneiner 
meine 


unfere 
unferer 
nnferer 
nnfere 


n. 

mein 
meine§ 
meinem 
mein 


nnfer 
nnferel 
unferem 
unfer 


Plural. 

m.  f.  n. 

meine 
meiner 
meinen 
meine 

unfere 
unferer 
unferen 
unfere 


Unfer  and  eucr  follow  the  same  rules  as  other  adjectives  (120.3) 
respecting  the  contraction  of  their  endings :  thus,  we  may  have 
unfere  or  unfre,  unfere^,  unfer^,  or  unfre§,  and  so  on. 

3.  The  possessive  is  also  often  used  substantively,  or  with 
the  value  of  a  pronoun  (not  qualifying  a  noun  expressed,  but 
representing  one  understood) ;  in  that  case,  it  is  declined  in  full 
like  an  adjective  of  the  first  or  strong  declension:  thus, 
nominatives  meiner,  meine,  meine§,  meine. 

For  example,  ba§  ift  nid)t  bein  ^ed)er;  c§  ift  mein  er  that  is  not 
thy  goblet;  it  is  mineji.  e.,  my  goblet);  fein  Q'xxn,  Vok  meineS  his 
brain,  like  my  own. 

4.  In  the  same  substantive  use,  the  possessive  may  be 
preceded  by  the  definite  article ;  and  it  is  then  declined  hke  any 
other  adjective  in  like  circumstances,  or  by  the  second  or 
weak  adjective  declension  (119.2) :  thus,  nom.  ber,  bie,  ba§  meine, 
gen.  bc^,  ber,  bc§  meinen,  etc. 

For  example,  fein  9lid)tcrfhil)l  ift  nid)t  ber  meine  his  judgment- 
seat  is  not  mine ;  loft  mir  bag  ^^ers,  baji  id)  b  a§  eure  riiftre  set  my 
heart  free,  that  I  may  touch  yours. 

5.  Again,  for  the  simple  possessive,  in  its  absolute  or  pro- 
nominal use  after  the  definite  article,  is  substituted  a  derivative 
in  ig:  thus,  mcinig,  unfrifi,  etc.  These  are  never  used  except 
with  the  article,  and  therefore  always  follow  the  second  ad- 
jective declension.    The  nominatives  of  the  whole  series  are — 


68 


PBONOTJNS. 


[159 


m. 

bcr  meinige 
ber  beinige 
ber  feinige 
ber  i^rige 
ber  unfrige 
ber  eurige 
ber  i'^rige 
[ber  Sl^rige 


Singular, 
f. 

bic  meinige 
bie  beinige 
bie  feinige 
bie  i^rige 
bie  unfrige 
bie  eurige 
bie  il^rige 
bie  3t)rige 


bag  meinige 
bag  beinige 
ha^  feinige 
bag  i^rigc 
ha^  unfrige 
bag  eurige 
bag  il^rige 
bag  3^rigc 


Plural. 

m.  f.  n. 

bie  meinigen,  mine 
bie  beinigen,  thine 
bie  feinigen,  his,  its 
bie  i^rigen,  hers 
bie  unfrigen,  ours 
bie  eurigen,  yours 
bie  il)rigen,  theirs 
bie  S^rigen,  yours] 


Neither  the  derivatives  in  tg,  nor  the  simple  possessives  pre- 
ceded by  the  article,  are  ever  used  attributively,  quaUfyiQg  a 
noun  expressed. 

SJJein  etc.,  used  predicatively,  assert  o^vIlerslup  pure  and  simple  :  thus, 
ber  §ut  ift  mein  the  hat  belongs  to  me,  and  to  no  one  else.  Tlnntx,  ber 
meine,  and  ber  meinige  are  nearly  equivalent  expressions,  adding  to  the 
idea  of  property  that  of  particularizing  or  identifying  the  thing  owned  : 
thus,  er  ift  meiner  etc.  it  is  the  one  that  belongs  to  me.  S)er  meinige  etc. 
are  most  common  in  colloquial  use ;  ber  meine  etc.  are  preferred  in 
higher  styles. 

160.  The  absolute  possessives  preceded  by  the  article  (ber 
meine,  ber  meinige,  etc.)  are  sometimes  used  substantively  (like 
other  adjectives :  see  129) :  the  neuter  singular  denoting  'what 
belongs  to  one'  (his  property,  his  duty,  or  the  hke) ;  the  plural 
*  those  who  belong  to  one'  (as  his  family,  his  friends). 

Thus,  unfere  $f(id)t  ift,  auf  ba§  Unfrige  gu  feften,  unb  fiir  bie 
Hnfrigen  gu  forgen  our  duty  is  to  attend  to  our  business  and  take 
care  of  our  dependents,  er  ermunterte  bie  ©einen  he  encouraged  his 
men,  gemorbet  t)on  ben  ©einen  auf  bem  ©emen  murdered  by  his 
own  people  on  his  own  ground. 

161.  The  German,  like  the  French,  avoids  the  use  of  the  pos- 
sessives in  many  situations  where  we  employ  them :  either  put- 
ting in  their  stead  the  definite  article  only,  where  the  possessor 
is  sufficiently  pointed  out  by  the  connection ;  or,  along  with  the 
article  (or  even  without  it),  using  the  dative  of  the  correspond- 
ing personal  pronoun,  where  it  can  be  construed  as  indirect 
object  of  the  verb  in  the  sentence  (see  222.  III.  b). 

Thus,  er  fc^iittelte  ben  ^opf  he  shook  his  head,  ber  grofl  bringt 
mir  burd)  afle  ^noc^en  the  frost  penetrates  through  all  my  bones, 
er  pel  i^r  um  ben  §al§  he  fell  upon  her  neck,  e§  !am  mir  in 
(Sinn  it  came  into  my  mind. 


164]  DEMONSTKATIVES.  69 

162.  ®cro  and  ^ftto  are  old-style  expressions,  used  in  cere- 
monious address,  before  titles,  etc. :  thus,  ^^^ro  3}laieftdt  your 
majesty,  ^ero  33efe^le  your  commands. 

Before  titles,  jeine  and  feiner  are  often  abbreviated  to  ©e.  and 
©r. ;  and  for  cucr,  cure,  is  written  ^tt). 

DEMONSTEATIYES. 

163.  The  proper  demonstratives  are  bcr  this,  that, 
bie^3  this,  that,  and  jcn  yon,  that.  Their  original  value  is 
that  of  adjectives ;  but  they  are  now  with  equal  free- 
dom used  adjectively,  qualifying  a  noun  expressed,  and 
absolutely,  or  as  pronouns,  standing  for  a  noun  under- 
stood. 

3)er  is  historically  the  same  word  with  our  the,  that,  and  they;  bieS  is 
our  this,  these,  those ;  jen  is  our  yon,  and  may  by  this  correspondence  be 
conveniently  distinguished  from  jeb  (jeber)  every  (see  190),  with  which 
it  is  apt  to  be  confounded  by  learners. 

164.  1.  ^er  when  used  adjectively  is  declined  like 
the  article  \)tx  (63) :  being,  in  fact,  the  same  word,  and 
distinguished  from  it  only  by  greater  distinctness,  of 
meaning  and  of  utterance. 

Thus,  ber  Drt  ift  iibel  regiert  that  place  is  ill  governed,  ber  einc 
6ot  bie,  bie  anberen  anbere,  ©aben  one  has  these  gifts,  others  have 
other. 

2.  ^cr  when  used  absolutely,  or  as  pronoun,  has  pecu- 
liar forms  in  a  part  of  its  cases — namely,  the  genitives 
singular  and  plural  and  the  dative  plural — where  it 
adds  cii  to  the  adjective  forms,  at  the  same  time  doub- 
ling their  final  §> :  thus, 

Singular.  Plural. 

m.  t.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  ber  bie  ha§>  bie 

G.  beffen,  (be^)  beren,  (ber)  beffen,  (be^)  beren,  (berer) 

D.  bem  ber  bent  benen 

A.  ben  bie  ha^  bie 

The  genitives  singular  be^,  ber,  be^  are  also  allowed,  but  very 
rarely  used,  except  the  neuter  in  certain  compounds,  as  be^^ 
we^en,  beS^db  (also  written  be^megen^  be^l^alb). 


70  PRONOUNS.  [164- 

In  the  genitive  plural,  berer  is  used  instead  of  beren  when  a 
limiting  addition,  usually  a  relative  clause,  follows  :  thus,  berer, 
bie  mi^  lieben  of  those  who  hve  me,  berer  t)Dn  $ari§  of  them  of 
Paris  (^people  from  Paris). 

165.  ^te^  and  jen  are  declined  as  adjectives  of  the 

first  declension,  or  like  the  definite  article  (only  with  c^ 

instead  of  a^  in  the  nom  and  ace.  neuter) ;  and  without 

any  difference,  whether  they  are  used  as  adjectives  or 

as  pronouns.     Thus, 

Singular.  Plural. 

m.  f .  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  biefer  biefe  biefe§,  (bieS)  biefe 

G.  biefeg  biefer  biefe^  biefer 

D.  biefem  biefer  -biefem  biefen 

A.  biefen  biefe  biefe^,  (bie§)  biefe 

The  nom.  and  ace.  neuter  biefeS  is  often  abbreviated  to  bie§ 
(or  bie^),  especially  when  the  word  is  used  as  a  pronoun. 
« 

166.  Use  of  the  Demonstratives. 

1.  liefer  is  a  general  demonstrative,  answering  to  both  this 
and  that.  If,  however,  the  idea  of  remoteness  in  place  or  time 
is  at  all  emphasized,  either  by  the  antithesis  of  this  and  that,  or 
in  any  other  way,  that  must  be  represented  by  jener.  Often,  biefer 
and  jener  are  to  be  rendered  the  latter  (biefer,  the  one  last  men- 
tioned, the  nearer)  and  the  f<yrmer  (iener,  the  one  mentioned 
earlier,  the  remoter).  ^ie§  and  ba§  are  also  sometimes  con- 
trasted as  this  and  that. 

2.  ^er  has  a  great  range  of  meaning,  from  the  faint  indefinite- 
ness  of  the  article  to  the  determinateness  of  biefer — depending 
mainly  on  the  emphasis  with  which  it  is  uttered.  Special  uses 
worthy  of  note  are  as  follows : 

a.  ®er  is  the  demonstrative  employed  in  such  phrases  as 
unfere  $ferbe  unb  bie  ber  Sremben  our  horses  and  those  of  the 
strangers,  ber  mil  ben  ^ellen  ^ugen  he  (the  one)  with  the  sharp 
eyes. 

Karely,  berienige  (168)  is  used  in  the  same  sense. 

h.  It  takes  the  place  of  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person  used 
emphatically :  thus,  b  i  e  mu^  rec^t  bumm  f ein  she  (this  person) 
must  he  right  stupid,  ber  fiittrc  ^rdl)'u  mciy  he  (that  one)  be  food 
for  CTQW^, 


169]  DEMONSTBATIVES.  fl 

3.  The  neuters  singular,  bQ§,  bie§  (or  bie|,  biefe^),  and  (rarely) 
iene§,  are  used,  like  e§  (154.4),  as  indefinite  subjects  of  verbs ; 
and,  if  a  plural  predicate  noun  follows  the  verb,  the  latter  agrees 
with  the  noun:  thus,  ba§  ift  mcin  3Sater  that  is  my  father,  ba§ 
finb  bie  Sftcisunflen  those  are  the  charms,  bie§  ift  ber  ^ampf  ber 
^^ferbe  unb  f^if(i)e  this  is  the  combat  of  horses  and  fishes.  ®q§  is 
sometimes  used  in  a  half-humorous,  half-contemptuous  way  of 
persons,  singular  or  plural:  e.  g.  \)a^  fc^lenbert  tt)ie  bie  ©d^neden 
tliose  people  loiter  like  snails. 

4.  Compounds  of  the  adverbs  ba  and  ^ier  with  prepositions 
are  very  frequently  used  instead  of  cases  of  the  demonstratives 
with  governing  prepositions :  thus,  ):)ami  therewith,  barin^/iemn, 
for  mit  bem,  in  bem ;  ftiermit  herewith,  pterin  herein,  for  mit  biefem, 
in  biefem. 

5.  For  the  demonstratives  as  substitutes  for  the  personal 
pronoun,  see  below,  171. 

DETEEMINATIYES. 

167.  Certain  pronominal  words,  connected  with  the  demon- 
stratives in  derivation  or  meaning,  or  in  both,  are  ordinarily 
called  determinatives. 

168.  ^erienige. — 1.  This  is  made  up  of  the  definite  article  ber, 
and  ienig,  a  derivative  from  |en  yon,  that  (like  meinig  from  mein, 
etc.,  159.5).  The  latter  part  never  occurs  without  the  former, 
and  they  are  written  together  as  a  single  word,  although  each 
is  separately  declined,  the  one  as  the  article  the  other  as  an 
adjective  of  the  second  declension.    Thus, 

Singular.  Plural. 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 


N. 

berjenige 

bicienige 

bngjeuige 

bieienigen 

G. 

begienigen 

berienigen 

be^jenigen 

berienigen 

D. 

bemjenigen 

berjenigen 

bemieuigen 

benienigen 

A. 

benienigen 

bteienige 

ba^ienige 

bieienigen 

2.  ^erienige  is  used  both  as  adjective  and  as  pronoun,  more 
often  the  latter.  Its  specific  ofiice  is  that  of  antecedent  to  a 
following  relative  ;  in  this  ofQce  it  is  interchangeable  with  the 
demonstrative  ber,  as  the  latter 's  more  prosaic  and  colloquial 
substitute :  thus,  berienige,  or  berjenige  5J?ann,  mclc^er  tt)eife  ift,  ift 
gufrieben  he  (that  man)  who  is  wise  is  contented. 

169.  ^erfelbe. — 1.  This  word  is  composed  of  the  definite  ar- 
ticle and  the  adjective  fclb.  Both  its  parts  are  declined,  after 
the  manner  of  berjenige  (168.1). 


72  PRONOUNS.  [169- 

2.  ^erfelBc  is  both  adjective  and  pronoun,  and  means  literally 
the  same.  But  it  also  interchanges  with  the  demonstratives  as 
substitute  for  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person  (see  171). 

3.  For  berjelbe  are  sometimes  used  berfclbige  and  felbiger, 
which,  however,  are  antiquated  expressions,  ^er  namlic()e  is  its 
equivalent  in  the  full  sense  of  the  same. 

©elber  and  felbft  (155.5)  are  indeclinable  forms  of  the  same 
adjective  jelb,  always  following,  appositively,  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun which  they  qualify,  often  at  a  distance  from  it.  Selbft  is 
also  used  adverbially,  meaning  even,  and  as  substantive  in  the 
phrase  t)on  felbft  of  its  own  accord. 

©elb  is  also,  rarely,  declined  after  biefer  as  after  bet.  The 
genitive  of  berfelbe  is  written  either  be^felben  or  befjelben:  the 
former  is  theoretically  preferable  (3.1),  the  latter  more  usual 
(likewise  baSfelbe,  neuter). 

170.  ©dIc^. — 1.  ©oI(?^  is  the  English  such,  and  is  used,  both 
as  adjective  and  as  pronoun,  in  nearly  the  same  manner.  It  is 
declined  like  biefer  (165) ;  or,  when  preceded  by  ein,  as  any  other 
adjective  would  be  in  the  same  situation  (124). 

2.  Such  a  is  either  fo^  ein,  or  ein  foI(f)er,  the  adjective  being 
undeclined  when  placed  before  the  article.  For  as,  when  used 
after  such  with  the  value  of  a  relative  pronoun,  the  German  uses 
the  relative:  thus,  foI(i)en,  bie  i^n  fannten  to  such  as  knew  him. 

171.    The  Demxmstratives  and  Determinatives  as  Substitutes. 

The  pronouns  of  these  classes  are  often  used  where  we  put 
the  third  personal  pronoim  or  its  possessive : 

1.  For  the  emphatic  pronoun  of  the  third  person  (166.26),  and 
the  antecedent  of  a  relative  clause  (168.2),  as  already  explained. 

2.  Where  the  demonstrative  meaning  helps  avoid  an  ambi- 
guity: as,  er  ging  mit  meinem  ^Setter  unb  beffen  ©o{)n,  or  bem 
©ol^ne  b  e  §  f  e  I  b  e  n  he  went  with  my  cousin  and  his  (the  latter' s) 
son;— or  an  awkward- repetition :  as,  er  fjai  eine  ©c^mefter:  fennen 
©ie  btejclbe  (for  fennen  ©ie  fie)?  he  has  a  sister ;  do  you  know 
her? 

3.  In  the  obUque  cases,  where  things  and  not  persons  are  in- 
tended :  as,  [^  bin  beffen  benotI)iGt  [benotigt]  I  am  in  need  of  it 
(fetner  would  mean  of  him,  rather).  In  like  manner,  with  prepo- 
sitions, instead  of  the  adverbial  compounds  with  ba  (154.2,3) : 
as,  id)  "i^aU  einen  (Garten,  unb  Qtijt  oft  in  bemfelben  (or  barin) 
fi)a3ieren  I  have  a  garden,  and  often  go  to  walk  in  it. 


174]  INTEBKOGATIYES.  73 

4.  The  substitution,  especially  of  berfelbe,  is  often  made,  in 
popular  use,  in  cases  where  no  reason  can  be  assigned,  and 
where  the  personal  pronoun  would  be  preferable. 

[Exercise  11.    Possessive  and  Demonstrative  Pronouns.] 

INTEEEOGATIVES. 

172.  The  interrogatives  are  U)er  who,  tt)a^  what,  and 
it)ctd)er  what,  tvhich.  3Ser  and  lt)a§  are  pronouns  only; 
n)eld)er  is  primarily  adjective,  but  also  frequently  used 
as  pronoun. 

173.  1.  SBer  and  tva^  are  peculiar  in  having  no  plural ; 
also,  in  conveying  no  idea  of  gender,  but  being  distin- 
guished precisely  as  our  who  and  what,  the  one  denoting 
persons,  the  other  things.  They  are  declined  as  follows : 

N.  tDer  who  tva§  what 

G.  meffen,  (tre^)  whose  meffen,  (tDe§)  of  what 

D.  tuem  to  whom  

A.  tt)en  whom  tr»a§  what 

2.  SSefe  as  genitive  of  mx  is  antiquated  and  out  of  use,  and  as 
genitive  of  tt)a§  is  hardly  met  with  except  in  compounds  like 
TDe§tt)egen,  tDcS^alb  (or  me^tregen,  mefe^alB).  2Ba§  has  regularly 
no  dative ;  for  both  its  dative  and  accusative  as  governed  by 
prepositions  are  substituted  compounds  of  those  prepositions 
with  the  adverb  tt)0  or  iDor  where:  thus,  tDomit  wherewith,  with 
what,  tDorin  wherein,  in  what,  trofiir  wherefore,  for  what  (hke 
bamit,  ftiermit,  etc. :  see  154.2, 166.4). 

3.  Popular  colloquial  usage  sometimes  puts  tt)a§,  both  as  ac- 
cusative and  as  dative,  after  prepositions :  thus,  tnit  toa^  with 
what,  |iir  tDa§  for  what,  and  instances  of  such  use  are  occasion- 
ally met  with  in  hterature. 

4.  2Be§  is,  quite  rarely,  used  adjectively :  as,  tt)  c  ^  8inne§  bcr 
§crr  fei  of  what  disposition  the  master  is. 

174.  1.  SSeld^  is  declined  like  btc§  (165),  or  as  an 
adjective  of  the  first  declension.  As  an  adjective,  quali- 
fying a  noun  expressed,  it  means  either  what  or  which; 
used  absolutely,  it  is  our  which. 


74  PRONOUNS.  [174r- 

2.  Before  etn  or  an  adjective,  especially  when  used  in  an  ex- 
clamatory way,  tt)el(^  generally  loses  its  declensional  endings, 
and  appears  in  its  undeclined  form. 

Thus,  tt)el(^e§  33u(^  what  (or  which)  hook,  ml^t§  t)Dn  biefen 
^iic^ern  which  of  these  books:— votl^  tiefe§  6ummen,  trelc^  ein  l^eller 
^on  what  deep  mmimiur,  what  a  clear  tone !  tDeld)  f (^Ie(i)te  Sitten 
what  bad  manners ! 

175.  2Ba§  with  the  preposition  fiir  fm-  after  it  (sometimes 
separated  from  it  by  intervening  words),  is  used  in  the  sense  of 
what  sort  of,  what  kind  of.  It  is  then  invariable,  and  the  words 
to  which  it  is  prefixed  have  the  same  construction  as  if  they 
stood  by  themselves. 

Thus,  n)a§  Iiaft  bu  fiir  einen  5tf(^  Gefangen  what  sort  of  a  fish 
have  you  caught  ?  t)on  tt)a§  fiir  3^ii9^TT,  unb  mit  n)a§  fiir  eitiem  2Ber!- 
geuQe,  mac^en  ©ie  ba§  of  what  kind  of  stuffs,  and  with  what  sort  of 
an  instrument,  do  you  make  that  ? 

176.  1.  All  the  interrogatives  are  used  also  as  rel- 
atives (see  177). 

2.  2Ba§  stands  often  for  ettt)a§  something;  tt)er,  in  the  sense  of 
some  one,  is  quite  rare ;  tt)el(f),  as  pronoun  only,  is  famiUarly, 
but  not  elegantly,  used  to  signify  some. 

Thus,  nD(^  raa^  mertft  [mert]  still  worth  something,  \^  mo(^te  Xva^ 
^jrofitiren  I  would  fain  profit  somewhat,  meinte  mer  aii§  ber  ^efell= 
fdjaft  remarked  some  one  in  the  company,  ^aBen  <Bk  ^flaumen  ? 
geben  Sie  mtr  tDclc^e  have  you  plums?  give  me  some. 

3.  2Ba§  is  used  not  rarely  for  um  n)a§,  or  tDorum  why?  thus, 
tt)a§  Birgft  bu  bein  (^efid)t  why  hidest  tJwu  thy  face?  and  sometimes 
for  it)te  how:  thus,  \va^  mein  arme§  Q^x^  gittert  how  my  poor  heart 
trembles! 

RELATIVES. 

177.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  (not  adjective : 
164.1)  ber,  and  the  interrogatives  Wqx,  Wa^S,  IDQ^  fiir,  and 
treldjer  (both  adjective  and  pronoun),  are  used  also  as 
relatives ;  they  are  declined,  as  such,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  when  having  their  more  original  and  proper 
value. 

178.  ®er  and  tt)eld)er  are  the  ordinary  simple  relatives  follow- 
ing an  antecedent,    In  the  nominative  and  accusative,  they  are 


179]  RELATIVES.  75 

used  interchangeably,  according  to  the  arbitrary  choice  of 
spealier  or  writer.  In  the  dative  (except  after  prepositions)  the 
cases  of  ber  are  rather  preferred  to  those  of  tt)el(^er;  and,  in  the 
genitive  (as  pronouns),  only  befjen  and  beren  are  ever  met  with. 

179.  1.  2Ber  and  ma^,  Voa§  fiir,  and  tDeId)cr  used  adjectively 
(also  absolutely,  when  meaning  which),  like  who  and  what  in 
English,  are  properly  compomid  relatives,  or  antecedent  and 
relative  combined. 

Thus,  met  Bel  9lad)t  t)orBeifu5r,.  'jatj  bie  Slammen  he  who  (who- 
ever) went  by  at  night  saw  the  flames,  tt)a§  im  DJ^enfc^en  nic^t  tft, 
fommt  au(^  nic^t  aua  i^m  what  (wliatever)  is  not  in  a  man  does  not 
come  out  of  him,  id)  tt)ifl  Deraeffen,  tDcr  id^  Bin,  unb  \va§  id)  litt 
I  will  forget  who  I  am  and  what  I  have  suffered,  mit  iiix  iranbelt, 
tt)  c  m  fie  bie  SBei^e  liel^  with  her  walks  he  on  whom  she  has  bestowed 
consecration,  man  fnd)te  gn  t)ergeffen,  n)eld)e  ^otl)  [5^ot]  uBeraH 
5errf(^te  one  sought  to  forget  what  distress  was  everywhere  prevail- 
ing, rt)er  mei^,  m a§  f  iir  eine  Sift  ba^tnter  ftedt  who  knows  what  sort 
of  a  trick  is  hidden  in  that  ? 

2.  But  the  demonstrative  is  repeated,  for  distinctness,  after 
the  compound  relative,  much  more  often  in  German  than  in 
English : 

Thus,  tt)er  nid)t  t^ormart^  ge'^t,  ber  fommt  guriide  who  (whoever) 
does  not  advance,  he  (that  one)  falls  back,  to  a  §  bu  nie  Derlierft,  ha^ 
mu^t  bu  Beiceinen  what  you  never  lose,  that  you  have  to  bewail, 
tt)a§  id)  fiir  §errUd)feit  Gefd)ant,  ba§  ftel)t  nid)t  in  ber  SBorte  ^ad)t 
ivliat  kind  of  magniftcerice  I  saw,  that  is  not  in  the  power  of  words 
to  tell 

3.  As  occasional  irregular  variations  of  the  mode  of  relative 
expression  may  be  noticed  the  use  of  the  personal  pronoun  in- 
stead of  ber  as  antecedent  after  mer,  of  ber  instead  of  mer  as 
preceding  relative,  of  tDer  instead  of  U)eld)er  after  ber,  etc. 

4.  The  examples  show  that  mer  and  tt)a§  are  sometimes  to  be 
translated  by  whoever  and  whatever.  To  give  them  more 
distinctly  this  indefinite  sense,  they  may  be  followed  (either  im- 
mediately, or,  more  often,  after  one  or  more  interposed  words) 
by  auc^  even,  nur  only,  or  immer  ever,  especially  the  first:  thus, 
iDaS  er  and)  tftue  whatever  he  may  do.  ^lud)  is  often  added 
with  the  same  sense  to  relative  adverbs :  thus,  mo  er  and)  fei 
wherever  he  may  be,  \mt  fie  fid)  and)  baQegcn  ftreBcn  however  they 
may  remt. 


76  PRONOUNS.  [179- 

5.  After  a  neuter  pronoun,  personal,  demonstrative,  or  in- 
definite (as  c§,  ba§,  alle^,  ettt)a§,  md)t§,  manrf)e§,  Did,  tDcnig),  also 
after  an  adjective  (especially  a  superlative)  taken  in  a  general 
sense  and  not  referring  to  some  definite  object,  the  compound 
relative  tDa§  is  used,  instead  of  the  simple  relative  ba§  or  tt)el(^e§. 

Thus,  iiber  ba§,  h)a§  er  jelbft  erja^Ite  about  that  which  he  was 
himself  relating,  qKc^  U)  a  §  t)on  bir  mir  fom  all  that  came  to  me 
from  thee,  ni(^t§  tt)a§  meine  5!JieinunQ  ftorte  nothing  that  sliould 
shake  my  opinion,  ba§  erfte  tuaS  fie  i)orten  the  first  thing  which 
they  heard. 

That  is  to  say,  for  an  adjective  clause  qualifying  the  ante- 
cedent is  substituted  a  substantive  clause  in  apposition  with  it 
(436.3c.). 

6.  Like  ba§  (166.3),  tt)a§  is  sometimes  used  collectively  of 
persons  in  the  singular  or  plural :  thus,  \x\i\)  iibt  jt(f)  tt)a§  ein 
9}^eifter  tDerben  tuiU  whoever  would  he  a  master  begins  to  practice 
early. 

^  180.  For  the  dative  or  accusative  case  of  a  relative  (either 
simple  or  compound)  governed  by  a  preposition  is  usually  sub- 
stituted, when  things  and  not  persons  are  referred  to,  the  com- 
pound of  the  preposition  with  an  adverb  (as  in  the  case  of  the 
demonstratives  and  interrogatives :  see  166.4,  173.2).  But  the 
compounds  of  ha  (bat)on,  barau^,  etc.)  are  only  rarely  used  rela- 
tively, those  of  tt)o  (n)Dt)on,  tDorau§,  etc.)  being  preferred. 

181.  A  verb  agreeing  with  a  relative  is  put  in  the  third  per- 
son even  when  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  was  a  pronoun  of 
the  first  or  second  person  (or  a  vocative),  unless  that  pronoun 
be  repeated  after  the  relative. 

Thus,  um  mid),  bcr  f  id)  rettet  su  bir  about  me,  who  am  taking 
refuge  with  tlwe,  U\i  bu  e§,  ber  fo  gittert  is  it  tlwu  who  art  trem- 
bling thus?— hut  um  mi(!),  bcr  td^  mi(f)  rette ;  bift  bu  e§,  ber  bu  fo 
3itterft ;— gliirffeliger  ^lepnber,  ber  bu  ^ialknm^,i\dt)Z]i fortunate 
Alexander,  that  didst  never  see  Italy ! 

182.  1.  In  antiquated  or  archaic  style,  f  o  is  used  as  indeclin- 
able relative,  representing  the  nominative  and  accusative  cases 
of  ber  and  votl^tx :  thus,  ber  DJlanu,  f  o  e§  f  agte  the  man  who  said  it. 

2.  In  a  like  manner,  ba  is  appended  to  a  relative  to  express 
indefiniteness,  itself  being  wholly  untranslatable  :  thus,  trer  ba 
atl^tnet  fatmet]  im  rofiQcn  Sid)t  whoever  Weathes  in  the  rosy  light. 


188]  INDEFINITES.  77 

183.  The  relative,  often  omitted  in  English,  must  always  be 
£xpressed  in  German:  thus,  bic  greunbe,  b  ie  id)  IteBe  the  friends 
I  love. 

[Exercise  12.    Interrogative  and  Eelative  Pronouns.] 

INDEriNITE  PKONOUNS  AND  INDEFINITE  NUMERALS. 

184.  A  class  of  words  needs  some  attention  under  the  above 
head,  in  connection  with  the  pronouns,  as  being  more  or  less 
related  with  the  latter,  and  differing  from  ordinary  nouns  and 
adjectives,  in  derivation  or  in  office,  or  both. 

185.  30^ an  one.—^an  (originally  the  same  word  with  3!Jlann 
man)  is  employed  as  wholly  indefinite  subject  to  a  verb,  like  the 
French  on,  our  one,  they,  people,  we,  taken  indefinitely.  Thus, 
man  f  acit  cme  says,  they  say,  it  is  said.  If  any  other  case  than  a 
nominative  is  required,  einer  (195)  is  used  instead. 

186.  Semanb  some  one,  5^iemattb  no  one.— These  are  com- 
pounds of  DJlann  man  with  the  adverbs  je  ever  and  nic  never. 
They  ought,  therefore,  to  be  declinable  only  as  substantives  of 
the  first  declension  ;  and  it  is  proper  always  so  to  treat  them, 
adding  §  in  the  genitive,  and  leaving  the  other  cases  like  the 
nominative.  But  (especially  where  the  phrase  would  otherwise 
be  ambiguous  or  indistinct)  they  are  allowed  to  take  the  endings 
em  or  en  in  the  dative,  and  en  in  the  accusative. 

3^iemanb  no  one  must  be  used  instead  of  nt(^t  Semanb  not  any 
one,  except  in  an  interrogative  sentence. 

187.  Sei^si^ntann  every  one. — This  word  is  made  up  of  Jeber 
every  (190)  and  5}^ann  man,  but  is  used  without  distinction  of 
gender.  Its  first  part  is  undeclined,  and  it  is  varied  only  by 
adding  §  to  form  the  genitive. 

188.  (Jttt)a§  something,  nid)t§  nothing. — These  words  are  in- 
variable in  form,  and  always  have  a  substantive  value.  A  fol- 
lowing limiting  adjective  is  treated  as  a  substantive  in  apposi- 
tion with  them  (129.5) :  and  the  same  construction  is  usual  with 
a  noun  after  etlDaS :  thus,  etir)a»  ©elb  some  money.  Both  are 
often  used  adverbially. 

For  n)a§  in  the  sense  of  ettDa^,  see  176.2. 

5^i(^t§  is  usually  and  regularly  used  instead  of  nlc^t  etn)a§  not 
anything,  except  when  the  sentence  is  interrogative  as  well  as 
negative. 


78  PRONOUNS.  [189- 

189.  Sinig,  etli(^  some. — These  are  used  chiefly  in  the  plural, 
and  declined  like  hk§  (165).  They  are  employed  both  adjec- 
tively  and  substantively. 

@tU)eI(^  is  a  word,  now  antiquated,  having  the  same  meaning : 
for  this,  tt)el(f)er  is  often  used  colloquially  (176.2),  as  tt)a§  for 

190.  3^^/  icfiUt^,  iebmeb  each,  every.— Only  the  first  of  these 
is  in  familiar  use.  All  are  declined  like  bte§  ;  or,  the  first  two  as 
adjectives  of  the  "mixed"  declension  (124.2)  when  preceded  by 
ein,  the  only  limiting  word  which  can  stand  before  them.  They 
are  used  either  adjectively  or  substantively. 

The  original  themes  are  {eber  and  jebtDcber,  and  their  er  has 
not  until  modern  times  been  treated  as  ending  of  declension 
only.    For  Sebermann,  see  above,  187. 

191.  Tlan^  many. — In  the  singular,  mancf)  means  many  a; 
in  the  plural,  many.  It  is  usually  declined  like  bie§  (165),  but, 
before  an  adjective,  may  be  left  uninflected :  thus,  mand)  bunte 
^Inmtn  many  variegated  flowers,  mand)  giilben  ®ett)anb  77iany  a 
golden  garment.    It  is  also  used  substantively. 

192.  SSiel  much,  tuenig  little. — 1.  After  another  limiting  word, 
t)lel  and  toenifi  are  declined  as  any  other  adjectives  would  be  in 
the  same  situation — except  in  ein  tt)enit3  a  little.  If  they  precede 
the  noun  which  they  qualify  (or  another  adjective  qualifying  it), 
they  are  sometimes  declined  and  sometimes  left  unvaried — and 
the  former  more  when  the  meaning  is  distributive,  the  latter 
more  when  collective  :  thus,  t)iel  2Bein  a  great  quantity  of  wine, 
but  Dieler  SBein  wine  of  many  kinds;  t)iel  Iei(^t  bej^mingte  ^dfte 
anumber  of  light-winged  guests,  but  j^iele  anbere  2^^ier[2^ier=]ge= 
flalten  m^any  other  animal  shapes  (individual) —  but  this  distinc- 
tion is  by  no  means  closely  observed.  Both  words  are  used 
substantively  as  well  as  adjectively,  and  may  govern  a  partitive 
genitive  :  as,  uiele  ber  gufecjanger  many  of  the  pedestrians. 

2.  3CReI)r  more  and  tueniger  less,  comparatives  of  bid  and  tDenig, 
are  generally  invariable.  But  nie^r  has  a  plural,  me^re,  or  (irreg- 
ularly, but  much  more  commonly)  mel)rere,  meaning  several, 
many. 

193.  %U  all. — 1.  When  it  directly  precedes  the  noun  it  quali- 
fies, aU  is  fully  declined  (like  bie§,  165) ;  but  before  a  pronominal 
word  (adjectively  or  substantively  used)  it  may  remain  unvaried 
(with  a  tendency  toward  the  same  distinction  of  collective  and 
distributive  meaning  that  appears  in  Diel :  see  192.1). 


197]  INDEFINITES.  79 

Thus,  allcr  2[Betteifer  all  2eal;—aUt  beine  ftoften  2Ber!e  all  thy  lofty 
works,  afle  bte  %aq,t  be§  gefteg  all  the  days  of  the  festival,  t)on  all 
bent  flange  by  all  the  splendor,  bei  all  biefen  35erl)dltnif)en  in  view 
of  all  these  circumstances. 

2.  In  certain  phrases,  a  He  is  used  instead  of  aH  undeclined : 
thus,  Bei  alle  bent  in  spite  of  all  that. 

3.  The  neuter  singular  alle§  (hke  the  corresponding  case  of 
other  pronominal  words)  is  employed  in  an  indefinite  way  of 
persons,  meaning  every  one:  thus,  aEe§  nal^ert  ftc^  einanber  all 
draw  near  to  one  another. 

4.  The  plural  of  aH  is  sometimes  used  distributively :  as,  aEe 
2So(f)en  every  week. 

194.  ^nber  other  is  a  pronominal  word,  but  not  distinguished 
in  its  uses  from  an  ordinary  adjective. 

For  nD(^  ein  in  place  of  anber,  see  198.3c;  for  anber  as  ordinal, 
203.1a. 

195.  (Sin  one,  an,  a,  fein  not  one,  none,  no. — 1.  The  numeral 
ein  one  is  also  used  as  indefinite  pronoun  (see  198.2),  and  as 
article  (63). 

2.  ^ein  is  the  negative  of  ein,  and  is  everywhere  dechned  as 
the  latter  would  be  in  the  same  situation.  Like  D^iemanb  (186) 
and  nid)t§  (188),  it  often  requires  to  be  taken  apart  in  translat- 
ing into  ein  and  nic^t  not;  e.  g.  fo  fein  ^efi^t  ja^  id}  in  meinem 
Seben  such  a  face  I  never  saw  in  my  life. 

NUMERALS. 

196.  Although  the  numerals  do  not  form  in  the  proper  sense 
a  separate  part  of  speech,  their  peculiarities  of  form  and  use  are 
Buch  that  they  require  to  be  treated  as  a  class  by  themselves. 

197.  1.  The  fundamental  words  denoting  number, 
the  CA.RDINAL  numerals,  are  as  follows : 


1.  ein 

11.  elf 

21.  ein  nnb  gtrangifi 

2.  gmei 

12.  amoif 

22.  atuei  nnb  siDangiG 

3.  brei 

13.  breigel^n 

30.  breifjig 

4.  t)ier 

14.  Dierse'^n 

40.  Diergifi 

5.  fiinf 

15.  fiinfjelin 

50.  fiintsig 

6.  ]ed)§ 

16.  fed)3el)n 

60.  ]cdm 

7.  jieben 

17.  fiebijel)n 

70.  fiebaig 

8.  a^t 

18.  ad)t3eftn 

80.  ad)t3ig 

9.  neun 

19.  neun3el)n 

90.  nenngig 

LO.  seftn 

20.  gtnanaiQ 

100.  l)unbert 

1000. 

taujcnb 

1,000,000.  DJaUion 

80  NUMERALS.  [197- 

2.  An  older  form  of  elf  11,  now  nearly  out  of  use,  is  cilf.  For 
fiinfseftn  15,  and  funfatg  50,  the  less  regularly  derived  forms 
funfge^n  and  funf^ig  are  also  in  good  and  approved  use.  6ieben= 
ge^n  17  and  fieBenaifi  70,  instead  of  the  contracted  fieBje^n  and 
fieBgig,  are  not  infrequent,  ©ed^ae^tt  16  and  fediaig  60  are  ab- 
breviated, for  ease  of  pronunciation,  from  |e(^§3eftn  and  ferfjSgtg, 
which  may  likewise  be  employed. 

3.  The  odd  numbers,  between  twenty  and  a  hundred,  are 
formed  always  by  prefixing  the  name  of  the  unit  to  that  of  the 
ten,  with  unb  and  interposed :  thus,  brel  unb  gti^ansig  three  and 
twenty  (not  gtuanatg^brel  twenty-three).  With  the  higher  numbers, 
the  odd  numbers  follow,  as  in  English  :  thus,  l^unbert  unb  fieben 
107 ;  tauf enb  unb  bret  unb  biergig  1043 ;  and  the  unb  and  may  be 
dropped,  especially  when  more  than  two  numbers  are  put  to- 
gether :  as,  ein  taufenb  ad)t  ^unbert  neun  unb  fe(f)gig,  or  a(f)tael^n 
l&unbert  neun  unb  fe(i)stg,  1869. 

4.  The  higher  numbers,  l^unbert,  taufenb,  mtHion,  are  multiplied 
by  prefixed  numbers,  as  in  English :  thus,  fe(^§  ^unbert  600 ; 
brei  unb  ac^tgig  taufenb  83,000.  The  German  says  eine  9}liflion 
a  million,  as  we  do ;  but  simply  l^unbert  a  hundred,  taufenb  a 
thousand:  ein  ^unbert,  ein  taufenb,  mean  one  hundred,  one 
thousand. 

198.     ^in  is  the  only  cardinal  number  that  is  fully  inflected. 

1.  K  used  adjectively,  or  qualifying  a  noun  expressed,  it  is 
(unless  preceded  by  another  qualifying  word :  see  3)  declined 
when  numeral  in  the  same  manner  as  when  indefinite  article  (63). 

Thus,  ein  SJiann  one  man  or  a  man,  ein  ^inb  one  child  or  a 
child. 

2.  When  used  absolutely,  or  pronominally,  standing  for  a 
noun  understood,  it  is  declined  like  bte§  (165),  or  an  adjective 
of  the  first  declension  (but  eine§  is  usually  contracted  to  etn§  in 
the  nom.  and  ace.  neuter). 

Thus,  um  ein  (^\\th,  unb  bann  urn  nocf)  ein§  Idnger  longer  by  one 
joint,  and  then  by  one  more,  einer  t)on  end)  one  of  you,  einer  ber  auf 
ein  ^benteuer  auSge^^t  one  who  goes  out  upon  an  adventure,  t)on  \\6) 
gu  iagen,  n)a§  etnem  lieb  ift  to  drive  away  from  one's  self  what  is 
dear  to  one! 

3.  When  preceded  by  another  limiting  word  (usually  the  def- 
inite article),  it  is  declined  as  any  adjective  would  be  after  the 
same  word. 

Thus,  ber  eine  ]pxad^  the  one  spoke,  mtt  biefer  ein  en  Strung 
with  this  one  error,  auf  f etnem  ein  en  ^eine  on  his  one  leg. 


200]  CARDINALS.  81 

a.  ®er  etnc  is  often  employed  where  we  should  say  one 
simply  ;  occasionally  it  forms  a  plural,  bie  einen  the  ones,  some. 

b.  In  numeration,  the  pronominal  neuter,  ein§,  is  used :  thus, 
cin§,  gmct,  brei  one,  two,  three;  einmal  ein§  \\t  ein§  once  one  is  one. 

c.  5^o(^  ein  one  mare  is  employed  instead  of  ein  anber  another, 
where  simple  addition,  not  difference,  is  signified :  thus,  ntmm 
no^  ein  (55olbflii(i  take  another  gold  piece  (i.  e.  in  addition  to  the 
one  you  have) ;  but  ntmm  ein  anbereg  take  another  (i.  e.  in  place 
of  the  one  you  have). 

d.  In  the  compound  numbers,  ein  unb  StDanjig  21,  etc.,  ein  is 
invariable :  also,  usually,  in  ein  unb  berfelbe,  ein  paax,  ein  mmq, 
ein  l^alb,  etc :  thus,  mit  ein  tt)enifi  SBafjer  with  a  little  water,  mil 
ein  paax  ©(^ritten  with  a  few  steps,  ein  ^x'xtkl  Don  ein  Qalb  a  third 
from  a  half. 

,  e.  In  order  to  distinguish  to  the  eye  ein  used  as  pronoun  or 
'numeral  from  the  same  word  as  article,  some  write  it  with  a 
capital,  ©in ;  others,  with  the  letters  spaced,  e  i  n  (the  ordinary 
German  equivalent  of  our  italics) ;  others,  with  an  accent  upon 
the  e,  ein :  others  leave  the  difference  of  value  to  be  pointed  out 
by  the  connection. 

/.  The  neuter  ein§  is  sometimes  used  in  an  indefinite  way  of 
persons :  thus,  unfer  ein§  one  of  tis,  nun  f ag^  mir  ein§,  man  foil  !ein 
SBunber  glauben  riow  let  any  one  tell  me  we  are  not  to  believe  in 
miracles ! 

199.  3^^^  2  and  brei  3  are  generally  unvaried,  but  have 
gen.  and  dat.  plural  forms— gmeier,  gweien ;  breier,  breien— which 
may  be  used  whei-e  the  case  would  not  otherwise  be  indicated. 

a.  For  gn)ei,  the  old  masculine  gtt)een  (twain)  and  feminine  3tt)o 
are  antiquated,  but  still  occasionally  met  with :  thus,  ttJaren  mit 
mir  3n)een  C^enoffen  were  with  me  two  comrades,  gmo  ©djmdben 
fangen  um  bie  SBette  two  swallows  were  singing  in  emulation. 

b.  33eibe  both  is  often  used  where  we  say  two:  thus,  meine 
beiben  SBriiber  my  two  brothers. 

200.  1.  From  the  other  units  and  tens,  only  a  dative  in  en  is 
occasionally  formed,  when  the  words  are  used  substantively ; 
or,  yet  more  rarely,  from  all  the  units,  a  nom.  and  ace.  in  e  (a 
relic  of  a  former  fuller  declension)— namely,  in  certain  special 
uses,  as  aUt  SSiere  all  fours ;  or  in  poetry,  to  make  an  additional 
syllable  ;  or  in  colloquial  and  low  style. 


82  NUMEEALS.  [200- 

2.  §unbert  100,  and  taufenb  1000,  are  frequently  construed 
and  declined  as  (neuter)  collective  substantives.  SJliOion  (fern.) 
is  regularly  and  usually  so  treated. 

3.  As  names  of  the  figures  designating  them,  the  numerals 
are  treated  as  feminine  nouns  [Qdijl  f.  number  being  understood), 
and  take  the  plural  ending  en,  and  sometimes  e  in  the  singular : 
etn  forms  bie  ^in§,  bie  ©infen. 

201.  1.  The  cardinal  numerals  are  used  in  general  with  equal 
freedom  as  substantives  and  as  adjectives :  thus,  ein  ^inb  a 
child,  ein§  ber  ^'inber  one  of  the  children,  t)ier  ober  fiinf  folrfier 
9Jldb(?^en  four  or  five  of  su^h  girls,  tuir  brei  greunbe  we  three 
friends,  unf  er  brei  three  of  us,  etc. 

2.  For  the  use  of  a  singular  instead  of  a  plural  noun  of 
measure  after  numerals,  see  211.2. 

202.  From  the  cardinals  come,  by  derivation  or  composition, : 
all  the  other  classes  of  numerals,  the  most  important  of  which 
are  explained  below. 

203.  Ordinals,  1.  The  ordinals  are  a  series  of  ad- 
jective derivatives,  formed  from  the  cardinals  by  the 
suffixes  t  and  ft :  from  the  numbers  2-19,  by  adding  t ; 
from  the  higher  numbers  by  adding  ft. 

Thus,  3tt)eit  second,  neunt  ninth,  fec^gel^nt  sixteenth,  gtDanstQft 
twentieth,  l^unbertft  hundredth,  taufenbft  thousandth. 

a.  But  the  ordinal  of  ein  is  tx\t  first;  brei  forms  irregularly  britt, 
and  a(i^t,  ad^t  (instead  of  ad)tt);  anhtx  other  is  sometunes  used 
instead  of  gtDeit  second. 

h.  Compound  numbers  add,  as  in  EngUsh,  the  ordinal  ending 
only  to  their  last  member:  thus,  ber  gtDei  unb  stDangigfte  22d,  ber 
l^unbert  unb  erfte  lOls^,  im  ac^^tge^n  ^unbert  fieben  unb  aditgigften 
Saftre  in  the  ISSlth  year. 

2.  The  ordinals  are  not  used  predicatively  or  adverbi- 
ally and  consequently  do  not  appear  (except  in  compo- 
sition) in  their  simple  undeclined  form.  They  are 
declined  in  all  respects  like  other  adjectives. 

[Exercise  13.     Cardinal  and  Ordinal  Numerals.] 

204.  Multiplicatives.  These  are  formed  by  compounding 
the  cardinals  with  the  words  fad)  or  fdltig :  thus,  einfa(|  or  ein* 


208]  NUMEKAL  DERIVATIVES.  8S 

fdltia  simple,  gmeifac^  or  gtDeifdlttQ  double,  gel^nfad)  or  geftnfdltig 
ten-fold.  They  are  adjectives,  and  are  treated  in  all  respects 
like  other  adjectives. 

205.  Variatives.  These  add  eriet  to  the  cardinals:  thus, 
einerlei  of  one  sort,  breierlei  of  three  sorts,  tiielerlei  of  many  sorts. 
They  are  used  as  adjectives  (see  415.11),  but  are  incapable  of 
declension. 

206.  Iteratives.  These  are  adverbs,  formed  by  compound- 
ing the  numeral  with  mai  (literally  mark;  hence  repetition, 
time):  thus,  einmal  once,  gel^nmal  ten  times,  tnand^mal  many 
times,  often. 

a.  The  word  mat  is  often  written  apart  from  the  numeral, 
sometimes  with  a  capital,  as  an  independent  word. 

h.  As  the  examples  have  shown,  derivative  words  of  these 
three  classes  are  formed  also  from  the  indefinite  numerals. 


207.  Derivatives  from  the  Ordinals. 

1.  IXmidiiatives  are  formed  by  adding  ^alB  half  to  the  ordinal 
as  ending  in  te  (or  t),  and  denote  a  quantity  half  a  unit  less 
than  the  corresponding  cardinal.  Thus,  t)ierte^alb  or  t)iertl)alb 
four  less  a  half  or  three  and  a  half.  They  are  construed  as  invari- 
able adjectives. 

The  implied  meaning  is,  ['the  first,  second,  and  third 
complete;  but]  the  fourth,  [only]  half*  Instead  of  gtDeiteftalb 
1|,  anbertt)al6,  irregularly  fortned  from  anber  other,  in  the  sense 
of  second  (203.1a),  is  in  use. 

2.  Fractionals  are  originally  compounds  of  the  ordinals  with 
%\)Z\\  [^eil]  part,  but  are  abbreviated  by  the  contraction  of  the 
latter  into  tel,  before  which  the  final  t  of  the  ordinal  is  dropped : 
thus,  brittel  (britt=tcl,  britt  Xfteil  [^eil])  third,  mxizi  quarter,  ixom= 
gigftel  twentieth  part. 

Instead  of  gmeitel  second  part  is  used  only  I)alb,  ^a\\k  half. 

3.  Ordinal  Adverbs  add  the  ending  en§  to  the  ordinal  theme : 
thus,  n\izx[^  firstly,  gipanjiflften^  in  the  twentieth  place. 

208.  Other  derivative  numeral  words  it  belongs  rather  to 
the  dictionary  than  to  the  grammar  to  explain. 


84  USi;S  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [209- 

USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  DECLENSION. 

209.  The  following  rules  apply  only  to  nouns  and  to  words 
(pronouns,  numerals,  adjectives,  infinitives :  see  113)  used  as 
nouns ;  since  the  declension  of  all  adjectives  and  words  used 
adjectively  (articles,  pronominal  adjectives,  and  participles)  is 
determined  by  that  of  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong,  and 
with  which  they  are  made  to  agree  in  number,  case,  and  gender. 

NUMBERS. 

210.  The  value  and  use  of  the  numbers  are,  in  general,  the 
same  in  German  as  in  English. 

211.  1.  This  does  not  exclude  minor  differences  in  regard  to 
particular  words,  which  the  one  language  may,  in  general  or  in 
certain  connections,  use  as  singular  and  the  other  as  plural : 
for  example,  Sange  (sing.)  tongs  (pi.),  Slattern  (pi.)  small-pox  (sing.), 
auf  bem  ^rm  (sing.)  in  the  amis,  (gie  (ht.  they  pi.),  you  (meaning 
one  or  more :  see  153.4),  etc. 

2.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  used  to  express  measure- 
ment, of  extent,  quantity,  weight,  or  number,  generally  stand 
in  the  singular  instead  of  the  plural  after  numerals  (whether 
cardinal  or  indefinite);  also,  the  fem.  ^Dlarf  marks. 

Thus,  fie  ^aben  fieben  bi§  a6:jt  3u^  Sdnge  they  have  seven  or 
eight  feet  of  length,  gebn  5  a  ^  33ier  ten  casks  of  beer,  n)ict)iel 
^funb  Su^er  how  many  pounds  of  sugar?  ein  ^ulf^^cer  t)on  ge^n 
taufenb  3Jlann  an  auodliary  army  of  10,000  7nen,  gmanaig  ^D^f 
Sflinber  twenty  head  of  cattle,  brei  Soil  breit  three  inches  broad. 

But  brei  ®  11  e  n  (f.)  %Vi^  three  yards  of  cloth,  fiinf  ^  e  i  I  e  n  (f.) 
tt)eit  Jive  miles  distant ; — and  also  taufenb  ©  d)  r  i  1 1  e  (m.)  lang 
1000  paces  kmg.  Kespecting  the  form  of  the  noun  expressing 
the  thing  measured,  see  below,  216.5a. 

3.  In  the  familiar  expressions  for  the  time  of  day,  U^r  hour 
is  also  unvaried  after  a  numeral :  thus,  neun  U^r  nine  o'clock. 

CASES. 
Nominative. 

212.  The  proper  office  of  the  nominative  is  to  stand  as  the 
subject  of  the  sentence :  as,  ber  3}lenf (^  benft,  ^ott  lenft  man  pro- 
poses, God  disposes. 

Of  course,  also,  a  noun  in  apposition  with  a  subject  nom- 
inative is  put  in  the  nominative ;  since  (111.2)  an  appositive 
noun  always  agrees  in  case  with  the  noun  it  explains. 


215]  GENITIVE.  85 

213.  1.  With  the  verb  jcin  to  he,  and  a  few  others,  of  kindred 
meaning — such  as  tuerben  become,  bleibcn  continue,  l^ci^en  he 
called,  fd^einen  appear — also,  with  the  passive  of  verbs  that 
govern  a  second  accusative  as  objective  predicate  (227.36),  a 
noun  may  be  used  in  the  nominative  as  predicate:  (i.  e.  as, 
through  the  verb,  describing  and  qualifying  the  subject:  com- 
pare 116.1). 

Thus,  mein  33ruber  tft  b  e  r  2  e  "^  r  e  r  biefe§  ^naben  ray  brother  is 
this  hoy's  teacher,  ber  bleiBt  e in  91  art  fetn  Seben  lang  he  (lit.  that 
one)  remains  a  fool  his  whole  life  long,  er  tDtrb  etn(^eigl^al§  ge* 
fd^olten  he  is  called  reproachfully  a  miser. 

a.  With  icerben,  however,  the  noun  is  often  put  in  the  dative, 
after  the  preposition  gu:  as,  ba  tt)erben  SBeiber  gu  C)t)dnen 
then  women  heccnne  hyenas  (turn  to  hyenas). 

2.  The  nominative  is  sometimes  used  in  apposition  and  pred- 
ication relating  to  a  word  (usually  a  pronoun)  in  an  oblique 
case.  Thus,  la^  mic^  bein  greunb  (more  usually  beinen  Steunb) 
fein  let  me  be  thy  friend,  id)  fel)e  jte  ein  (or  einen)  9taub  ber  glam^ 
men  tuerben  I  see  them  become  a  prey  to  the  flames,  er  nennt  mii^ 
fein  (or  feinen)  greunb  lie  calls  me  his  friend,  al§  i(^  mid)  einen 
grembling  in  biefem  l^reife  \at}  (Schiller)  as  I  saw  mijself  a  stranger 
in  this  circle;  but@ie  fet)en  mic^  ein  Uanb  ber  Snellen  (Lessing)  you 
see  me  a  prey  to  the  waves;  so  also  after  tt)ie  and  al§ :  thus,  ber 
3flu!)m  biefeg  ^JJlanne§  al§  berebter  3ftebner  (or  al§  eineg  berebten  9teb:= 
ner§)  mar  meit  oerbreitet  this  man's  fame  as  an  eloquent  speaker 
was  spread  widely  abroad,  always  jein  9lubm  al§  3flebner  his  fame 
as  orator,  einem  9Jlanne  mie  6ie  fann  e§  nid)t  an  ^elb  fel)len  (Les- 
sing) a  man  like  you  cannot  want  for  money. 

214.  The  nominative  is  used  in  address  (as  a  "  vocative  "). 
Thus,  l^olber  griebe,  fii^e  ©intrac^t,  meilet  iiber  blefer  ©tabt  lovely 

Peace!  sweet  Concord!  linger  aver  this  city. 

Genitive. 

215.  The  genitive  in  German,  as  in  the  other  related  lan- 
guages, is  primarily  and  especially  the  adjective  or  adnominal 
case,  denoting  by  a  form  of  the  noun  a  variety  of  relations 
such  as  might  be  expressed  by  a  derivative  adjective.  As  was 
remarked  above  (under  158.2),  it  is  in  part  traceably  of  adjective 
origin.  But  its  later  uses  arise  also  in  part  from  its  being 
merged  with  other  primitive  cases — particularly  the  ablative, 
the  case  representing  the /ram  relation,  of  origin  or  removal— 


86  USES  OF  THE  FOEMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [215- 

and  assuming  their  office.  To  trace  all  these  uses  to  their 
origin  would  require  vastly  too  much  of  detailed  historical  dis- 
cussion, and  will  not  be  attempted  here. 

216.    Tlie  Genitive  with  Nouns. 

1.  The  German  genitive  is  especially  the  case  of  a  noun  that 
is  added  to  another  noun  in  order  to  limit  or  define  its  meaning. 

2.  It  is  used,  accordingly,  in  all  the  senses  in  which  we  use 
the  possessive  case  of  a  noun,  or  a  pronominal  possessive  (my, 
your,  his,  etc.) ;  also,  in  most  of  the  senses  belonging  to  a  noun 
connected  with  another  noun  by  the  preposition  of:  thus, 

a.  As  genitive  of  possession  or  appurtenance:  ha^  ^an^ 
meine§  35ater§  the  house  of  my  father,  be§  9Jlanne»  ^op\  the  man's 
head. 

6.  As  genitive  of  origin  or  cause :  in  be§  (3(^rerfen§  ^aijn  in 
the  madness  of  terror,  ber  ^rtcb  ber  (^ro^mut^  [(^ro^mut]  the 
impulse  of  magnanimity. 

c.  As  complement  of  relation  (designating  that  toward  which 
the  relation  expressed  by  the  governing  noun  is  sustained) :  't)tx 
SSater  beS  ©otineg  the  father  of  the  son,  be§  3Sater§  ©ol^n  the 
fatJwr's  son,  ^onig  biefeg  9fteid)§  king  of  this  realm. 

d.  As  partitive  genitive  (expressing  a  whole  of  which  the 
governing  noun  is  a  part),  in  all  its  varieties :  bet  ©c^rerfUi^fte 
ber  ©(^reden  the  most  terrible  of  terrors,  ein§  ber  fleinften  ^inber 
one  of  the  smallest  children,  iebeS  biejer  33eburfni[fe  each  of  these 
needs,  allgut)iel  be§  ©pa^e§  quite  too  much  of  the  joke. 

e.  As  genitive  of  material,  constitution,  or  equivalence :  ein 
SS)a(^  fc^attenber  ^ud^en  a  roof  of  shady  beeches,  ber  Sraeige  Iau= 
BigeS  fitter  the  leafy  trellis-work  of  the  branches,  eine  ^nga^I 
f(^reienber  ^naBen  a  number  of  shouting  boys,  be§  ®oIbe§  ©trbme 
streams  of  gold. 

f.  As  genitive  of  characteristic :  ein  Tlann  ^o^en  9iange§  unb 
grower  ^ugenb  a  man  of  high  raiik  and  great  virtue,  ein  .f)irten= 
ftamm  tiirftfc^er  ^bfunft  a  slwpherd-race  of  Turkish  descent. 

g.  As  subjective  genitive  (implying  an  action  of  which  the 
thing  designated  by  the  genitive  is  the  subject) :  be§  SturmeS 
©aufen  the  roaring  of  the  storm,  ber  9Jlagnete  ©ciffen  unb  Sieben 
the  hating  and  loving  (attraction  and  repulsion)  of  magnets. 

h.  As  objective  genitive  (implying  an  action  of  which  the 
thing  designated  by  the  genitive  is  the  object) :  bein  SBunfcf)  be§ 
^uten  thy  desire  of  good,  SSerbefferer  ber  SBelt  unb  be§  ©efe^e§ 
Improver  of  the  WojM  and  of  the  Law. 


216]  GENETIVE.  87 

The  relation  of  the  genitive  to  its  governing  noun  is  so  in- 
flnitively  various  that  neither  the  above  classification  nor  any 
other  is  exhaustive  or  peremptory. 

3.  In  these  relations,  the  genitive  of  a  personal  pronoun  is 
rarely  admitted ;  but  for  it  is  usually  substituted  a  possessive 
pronominal  adjective,  qualifying  the  noun  to  be  limited  (158.2). 

Exceptions  :  certain  cases  of  partitives,  of  genitives  followed 
by  a  qualifying  word,  and  a  few  others :  as,  unf er  einer  ofie  of  us, 
\f)xtx  Beibcn  (Jinbriicfe  the  impressions  of  them  both,  il^rer  5}lcifter 
tt)erben  to  get  the  better  of  them. 

4.  For  the  genitive,  in  all  these  uses,  may  be  substituted  a 
dative  with  the  preposition  t)on  o/,  as  in  English. 

a.  The  substitution  is  made,  especially,  when  the  expression 
would  otherwise  be  ambiguous  or  unclear,  from  the  want  of  a 
distinct  ending  to  the  genitive,  or  of  a  limiting  word  showing 
its  character:  thus,  bie  ^IntDO'^ner  t)Dn  ^ari»  the  inhabitaiits  of 
Paris,  35ater  t)on  jed)§  ^inbern  father  of  six  children;  but  bie  (&'u\= 
moaner  55erUn§  the  inhabitants  of  Berlin,  33ater  biefer  |ecl)g  ^inber 
father  of  these  six  children; — or,  to  avoid  a  succession  of  several 
genitives:  as,  ber  ©oftn  t)on  bent  Dftetme  ^aijer  @manuel§  the  son 
of  tlie  uncle  of  Emperor  Emanuel.  And  the  construction  with  t)on 
is  the  regular  and  usual  one  instead  of  the  genitive  of  material 
and  of  characteristic. 

5.  a.  After  nouns  signifying  measure,  of  extent,  quantity, 
weight,  or  number,  the  noun  designating  the  substance  measured, 
if  not  preceded  by  an  adjective,  is  usually  put  neither  in  the 
genitive  (partitive  genitive),  nor  in  the  dative  with  tion  of,  but 
is  treated  as  indeclinable. 

b.  Thus,  ein  (^Ia§  SBein  a  glass  of  wine  (i.  e.,  wine,  to  the  extent 
of  one  glass),  gmei  ^funb  %^zt  two  pounds  of  tea,  brei  ©Hen  Xnd) 
three  yards  of  cloth,  einige  33u(^  papier  a  few  quires  of  paper, 
gro^e  33Idtter  9iauf(i)gDlb  great  sheets  of  gold-tinsel ;— hut,  cin  ^Ia§ 
biefe§  SSeing  or  t)on  btefcm  2Betne  a  glass  of  this  wine,  jtrci  ^^^funb 
guten  %l)tt^  two  pounds  of  good  tea. 

c.  Exceptions  are  occasionally  met  with:  thus,  ben  beften 
33e(^er  2Betng  the  best  goblet  of  wine,  300  Centner  @oIbe§  300  cwt. 
of  gold. 

d.  By  abbreviation,  the  name  of  the  month  is  left  unvaried 
after  a  numeral  designating  the  day :  thus,  ben  neunten  9Jlai  the 
ninth  of  May. 

6.  The  genitive,  in  any  of  its  senses,  may  be  placed  either  be- 
fore or  after  the  noun  which  it  limits  (aj^  is  shown  by  the  exam- 


88  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [216- 

pies  given).  But  its  position  before  the  noun,  especially  if  lim- 
ited by  any  other  word  than  an  article,  belongs  rather  to  a 
higher  or  poetic  style ;  in  plain  colloquial  prose,  the  genitive 
ordinarily  follows  the  noun  that  governs  it.  An  objective  gen- 
itive most  rarely  precedes ;  and  never,  if  another  genitive  be 
dependent  on  the  same  noun :  thus,  be§  ^onigg  2BaT^l  eine§  Tl\= 
nifterg  the  king's  choice  of  a  minister. 

As  in  English,  the  noun  preceded  by  a  dependent  genitive 
takes  no  article :  thus,  meine§  greunbe^  ^n^  my  friend's  heart, 
but  ba§  §er3  meine^  greunbeg  the  heart  of  my  friend. 

217.  The  Genitive  with  Adjectives. 

About  thirty  adjectives  (with  their  corresponding  negatives) 
are  followed  by  a  genitive,  denoting  that  in  respect  of  which  the 
action  or  quality  they  express  is  exerted. 

Thus,  be§  6ingeti§  miibe  weary  of  singing,  tt)iirbtger  be§  9ling§ 
more  worthy  of  the  ring,  etne§  ©ultonS  untoiirbig  unworthy  of  a 
Sultan,  jii^er  ©rinnerung  \)oUfull  of  sweet  memories. 

a.  These  adjectives  are  mostly  such  as  are  followed  by  of  in 
English,  although  some  admit  a  different  construction.  Among 
the  commonest  of  them  (besides  those  already  instanced)  are 
BetDU^t  conscious,  fd^ig  capable,  getBi^  sure,  fc^ulbtg  guilty,  fatt 
sated,  uBerbriiffig  tired,  )3oUfull.  Some  of  them  also  are  construed 
with  prepositions,  and  a  few  (229)  even  govern  an  accusative, 
when  used  with  the  verbs  jein  and  tDerben. 

218.  The  Genitive  with  Prepositions. 

About  twenty  prepositions  govern  the  genitive. 

Thus,  tDcgen  feiner  ©iinbe  on  account  of  his  sin,  tt)dftrcnb  meincr 
toUen  SaQh  during  my  mad  chase,  ungea(^tet  biefer  ©rfldrung  not- 
witJistanding  this  explanation,  ftatt  buf tiger  ©drten  instead  of  fra- 
grant gardens. 

a.  The  prepositions  governing  the  genitive  are  mostly  of 
recent  derivation  from  nouns  and  adjectives.  For  a  list  of  them, 
see  below,  under  Prepositions  (373). 

219.  The  Genitive  as  Object  of  Verbs. 

1.  A  genitive  immediately  dependent  upon  a  verb  has  gener- 
ally the  office  of  a  remoter  object,  further  qualifying  the  action 
of  the  verb  upon  its  nearer  personal  object. 

2.  A  number  of  transitive  verbs  govern  a  genitive  in  addition 
to  their  direct  object,  the  accusative. 


219]  GENITIVE.  89 

a.  These  are  verbs  of  removing,  depriving,  accusing,  convict- 
ing, admonishing,  assuring,  and  the  hke,  and  one  or  two  others 
(miirDigcn  esteem  worthij,  Dertroften  console). 

Thus,  er  flagt  ben  Wiener  be§  i)ieBftal^l§  an  he  accuses  the  servant 
of  theft,  er  ft  at  un§  einer  gro^en  gurc^t  entlebigt  he  has  rid  us  of  a 
great  fear,  cr  berauBt  ben  Ungliidliiiien  ber  '^offnung  he  robs  the 
wretched  man  of  hope. 

3.  A  number  of  reflexive  verbs  admit  a  genitive  in  addition  to 
their  reflexive  object. 

a.  These  verbs  are  of  too  various  meaning  to  admit  of  classifi- 
cation. Some  of  them  may  be  rendered  in  English  either  by  a 
construction  resembling  the  German,  or  as  simple  transitive 
verbs  taking  a  genitive  as  direct  object :  thus,  freue  bi(^  b einer 
Sugenb  rejoice  thyself  of  (enjmj)  thy  youth,  er  entfinnt  \i^  jebeg 
2Borte§  he  bethinks  himself  of  (recollects)  every  word,  fic^  9efdftr= 
Iid)er  SBaffcn  bebienen  to  serve  one's  self  with  (employ)  dangerous 
weapons; — others,  only  in  the  latter  method:  thus,  mit  @ifer 
ftab'  ic^  m^  ber  ©tnbten  befltfjen  zealously  have  I  pursued  my 
studies,  bemer  fteiltgen  Seii^en,  o  2Baftrfteit,  ftat  ber  33etrug  fi(^  an= 
gema^t  thy  holy  signs,  0  Truth !  has  deceit  usurped. 

4.  A  few  impersonal  verbs  take  a  genitive  of  the  object,  with 
an  accusative  of  the  subject,  of  the  feeling  they  represent. 

a.  They  are  erBarmen  pitij,  geliiften  long,  jammern  grieve,  reuen 
or  gereuen  rue:  thus,  mid)  erbarmt  feine§  @lenb§  I  pity  his  misery. 

5.  A  number  of  verbs  may  take  a  genitive  only  (corresponding 
to  a  direct  object  in  English). 

The  commonest  of  these  are  ac^ten  regard,  Bebiirfen  neea, 
brau(^en  use,  benfen  think  of,  entbeftren  do  without,  ermangeln  lack, 
eriDdftnen  mention,  gebenfen  remember,  genie^en  enjoy,  gefdjmeigen 
keep  silence  about,  ftarren  await,  ftiiten  guard,  Iad)en  laugh  at, 
pflegen  nurse,  )d)Dnen  spare,  fpotten  mock,  uerfeftlen  miss,  t)ergefjen 
forget,  \QOi^xx[t\)mtxi  perceive,  voaxiiXi  wait  for. 

Thus,  er  a^)kiz  ntd)t  ber  marmen  ©onne  he  heeded  not  the  warm 
sun,  e§  Bebarf  ber  ^nnaftme  nicftt  it  needs  not  the  assumption, 
anbrer  greoel  nidjt  gu  gebenfen  not  to  mention  other  atrocities,  la^ 
mid)  ber  neuen  greifteit  genie^en  let  me  enjoy  the  new  freedom,  jebeg 
,\^eiben§  i^ergeffenb  forgetting  every  trial,  \{)x  fpottet  mein  ye  mock 
me,  mo  id)  beiner  xoaxit  where  I  wait  for  thee, 

6.  Many  of  the  verbs  in  these  various  classes  may  take  instead 
of  the  genitive  an  accusative,  or  else  a  noun  governed  by  a 
preposition :  for  example,  all  the  impersonals,  and  all  but  two 


&0        USES  OF  THE  FOEMS  OF  DECLENSION.      [219-' 

(ermanG^In  and  gejd)tt)etgen)  of  the  last  class.  The  construction 
with  the  genitive  is  an  older  one,  which  has  for  some  time  been 
going  gradually  out  of  use,  and  is  now  mainly  antiquated  or 
poetic :  thus,  biefc  grei^eit,  b  i  e  i(i)  {e^t  genie^e  this  liberty  which  I 
now  enjoy,  benen,  auf  bie  bie  emigc  gi^eil^eit  tDartet  to  those  for 
whom  eternal  freedom  is  waiting,  er  f reut  \\^  ii b  e r  f ein  ©liidf 
he  rejoices  at  his  good  fortune. 

220.     Other  uses  of  the  Genitive. 

1.  The  genitive  of  a  noun  is  often  used  in  an  adverbial  sense, 
especially  (with  or  without  a  limiting  adjective)  to  denote  time ; 
also  (with  adjective)  not  infrequently  manner,  more  rarely  place. 

Thus,  eine§  %aQt^  im  Senge  one  day  in  spring,  be§  2Binter§  jinb 
tDtr  tt)ie  t)ergraben  in  bem  ©(^nee  in  the  winter  we  are,  as  it  were, 
buried  up  in  the  snow,  bie  2BoI!en,  bie  5!Jlor9en§  unb  ^^benb§  iiBer 
tl)n  l^in  f  egelten  the  clouds  which  sailed  along  over  him  of  a  morn- 
ing and  evening,  er  fdiliirft  langen  -!palfe§  he  sips  with  outstretched 
neck,  prft  bu'§  flingen  mdd^ttgen  9lufe§  dx)st  thou  hear  it  ring  with 
mighty  sound  ?  \^  ermal^nte  iftn  afle§  ©rnfte§  I  admonished  him  in 
all  seriousness,  ja^te  f4)Iei(^^  x^  meiner  SBege  I  softly  steal  off  on 
my  way. 

a.  A  large  number  of  adverbs  are,  by  origin,  genitives  of 
nouns  or  adjectives,  or  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  word  which 
have  grown  together  by  familiar  use :  see  363-5. 

2.  A  genitive  is  sometimes  used  with  a  verb  (especially  jein 
and  tuerben)  in  the  sense  of  a  predicative  adjective,  or  as  predi- 
cate genitive :  thus,  fie  tt)aren  munter  unb  Quter  ^inge  they  were 
merry  and  of  good  cheer,  bie  toaxtn  oft  ni(^t  jo  gro^,  ober  gleid^en 
^Iter§  mit  tl)m  they  were  often  not  so  big,  or  of  equal  age  with  him, 
alle  raerben  auf  einmal  eine§  ©tnne§  all  become  suddenly  of  one 
mind,  \^  bin  SSiEen^  I  am  of  a  mind. 

a.  The  genitive  in  this  construction  is  allied  with  the  genitive 
of  characteristic  (216.2/). 

3.  By  a  construction  formerly  not  rare,  but  now  little  used,  a 
partitive  genitive  is  used  with  verbs :  thus,  er  tranf  be§  33a(i)e§ 
he  drank  of  the  brook,  fie  brac^tc  be§  flaren  ^errlid^en  2Beine§  she 
brought  of  the  clear  excellent  wine. 

4.  Yet  more  unusual  are  cases  of  the  occurrence  of  a  posses- 
sive genitive  and  of  a  genitive  of  origin  with  verbs  :  thus,  tl^ue 
n)a§  betne§  %mk§  tft  dx)  what  belongs  to  (is  of)  thy  office,  |)unger§ 
flerben  to  die  of  hunger. 


222]  DATITE  WITH  VERBS.  91 

5.  A  genitive  is  sometimes  used  with  an  interjection,  to  signify 
the  thing  which  is  the  occasion  of  the  exclamation :  thus,  ad)  be§ 
Ungliitf^  alas  for  the  mishap  (see  392). 

Dative. 

221.  1.  The  dative  is  originally  and  properly  the  case  of  the  indirect 
personal  object,  designating  the  person  or  persons  with  reference  to 
whom,  or  as  aSectmg  whom,  anything  is  or  is  done — a  relation  which  is 
ordinarily  (though  not  always)  expressed  in  English  by  the  preposition 
to  or /or.  In  this  sense,  the  dative  in  German  is  usually  the  adjunct  of 
a  verb,  much  less  often  of  an  adjective,  very  rarely  of  a  noun. 

2.  The  dative  has  also  inherited  the  offices  of  primitive  cases,  now 
lost ;  especially  of  the  instrumental,  expressing  the  with  or  by  relation, 
and  the  locative,  expressing  the  in  relation.  In  these  senses,  it  is  ordin- 
arily governed  by  prepositions. 

222.  The  Dative  with  Verbs. 

The  dative,  in  German,  is  most  often  the  indirect  personal  ob- 
ject of  a  verb. 

a.  It  is  thus  doubly  contrasted  in  office  with  the  genitive  :  the 
latter  usually  limits  a  noun  ;  and,  as  indirect  object,  it  is  prevail- 
ingly not  personal :  thus,  [^  i)er|id)ere  iftn  einer  ©ac^e  /  assure 
him  of  a  matter,  but  i(^  t)erfid)ere  i^m  eine  ©ac^e  I  assure  (vouch 
for)  a  matter  to  him;  \i)  Beraube  i^n  feine§  (^elbeg  Iroh  him  of  his 
money,  but  {^  raube  \tim  fein  (^elb  I  steal  from  him  his  money. 

h.  The  connection  of  the  dative  with  the  action  of  the  verb  is 
of  every  degree  of  closeness,  from  constituting  its  essential  or 
necessary  complement  to  indicating  a  mere  incidental  interest 
in  its  action:  thus,  er  bot  mir  bie  §anb  he  offered  me  his  hand, 
i^  legte  e^  i^m  auf  ben  %\\d^  Ilaid  it  on  the  table  for  him. 

I.  1.  A  large  number  of  transitive  verbs  take,  along  with  the 
accusative,  a  dative  as  more  or  less  necessary  complement  of 
their  action.    Such  are 

a.  Many  simple  verbs,  especially  such  as  denote  a  bringing 
near  or  removing,  a  giving  or  taking,  imparting,  commanding, 
permitting  or  refusing,  and  the  like. 

Thus,  er  brac^te  ben  9ting  ber  Allien  he  brought  the  ring  to  the  old 
woman,  id)  fdjrelbe  meinem  SSater  einen  33rief  I  write  my  father  a 
letter,  man  eriaubt  afle§  einem  greunbe  one  permits  a  friend  any- 
thing, 

h.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  inseparable  or  separable 
prefixes,  especially  ent,  er,  t)er,  and  auf,  a^,  bet,  nadi,  dor,  $u. 


92  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [22^ 

Thus,  er  Dermarfit  ben  9fling  bem  liebften  feiner  ©bl^ne  he  makes 
over  the  ring  to  the  dearest  of  his  sons,  er  mollte  'xi)m  bie  ^rone  auf= 
fefeen  he  wished  to  set  the  crown  on  his  head,  fie  mu^te  i^m  bie 
Sungfrau  gufagen  she  had  to  promise  him  the  girl. 

c.  A  few  verbs  that  require  a  reflexive  object  in  the  dative, 
forming  a  class  of  improper  reflexives  (290) :  thus,  i(^  l^abt  mir 
33eif  qE  Derbient  I  have  earned  myself  applause. 

d.  A  few  verbs  compounded  with  adjectives,  or  verb-phrases 
akin  with  such :  e.  g.,  tra^rf agen  prophesy,  funb  ma^tn  make 
known. 

2.  In  the  passive  of  these  verbs,  where  the  object-accusative 
becomes  a  subject-nominative,  the  dative  remains  as  sole  object : 
thus,  ber  Sling  murbe  ber  ^Iten  gebracS^t  the  ring  was  brought  to  the 
old  woman,  e^  tt)irb  mir  !unb  gema^t  it  is  made  known  to  me. 

3.  As  the  examples  have  shown,  the  English  also  often  uses 
its  objective  without  a  preposition  (when  placed  next  the  verb) 
in  a  dative  sense.  In  other  cases,  it  expresses  the  dative 
relation  by  prepositions,  especially  to.  But,  where  the  verb 
implies  removal,  the  dative  frequently  answers  to  our  objective 
with  from. 

Thus,  nimm  meiner  Dlebe  ieben  ©tad^el  take  from  my  words  all 
sting,  e§  ftaftl  mir  ba§  SeBcn  it  stole  my  life  from  me,  e§  betnem 
5}litleib  gu  entgie'^en  to  withdraw  it  from  thy  compassion,  er  foU 
mir  ni(^t  lebenbig  geften  he  shall  not  get  away  from  me  alive. 

a.  The  same  is  true  of  the  dative  after  intransitive  verbs :  see 
below. 

4.  Either  the  direct  or  indirect  object  may  often  be  omitted, 
and  the  verb  used  with  the  other  alone:  thus,  einem  ein  33u(j^ 
borlefen  to  read  a  book  aloud  to  some  one,  ein  53u(^  Dorlefen  to 
read  a  book  aloud,  einem  t)orIefen  to  read  aloud  to  some  one;  also, 
simply  t)DrIefen  to  read  aloud,  lecture. 

II.    1.  Many  verbs  take  a  dative  as  their  sole  'object. 

These,  as  not  admitting  an  accusative,  are  reckoned  as  in- 
transitive ;  but  many  of  them  correspond  to  verbs  which  in 
English  are  looked  upon  as  transitive  (227.1«,  b). 

a.  A  number  of  simple  verbs,  together  with  a  few  that  have 
the  inseparable  prefixes  be,  ge,  er ;  also,  the  contraries  of  several 
of  them,  formed  with  the  prefix  mi^. 

The  commonest  of  these  are  antmorten  answer,  banfen  thank, 
bienen  serve,  bro^ien  threaten,  f(uc!)en  curse,  folgen  follow,  l^elfen 


222]  DATIVE  WITH  VEKBS.  93 

help,  f(^aben  harm,  fd)meid)eln  flatter,  tro^en  defy,  trauen  trust, 
h)el)ren  control,  Begegnen  meei,  gefaEen  please,  ge^orc^^en  obey, 
criDtebern  answer. 

Thus,  feib  il^r  tl^nen  nic^t  begegnet  did  you  not  meet  them  ?  folgt 
hnxd)  ben  ^etfter  bem  ©tral^l  follows  the  beam  of  light  through  the 
ether,  nok'§  t^nen  gefciHt  as  it  pleases  them,  mnn  e§  mir  nic^t  mi^fiele 
if  it  did  not  displease  me,  iann  e§  bir  nic^t  f(^aben  can  it  not  harm 
thee  ?  :^elft  mir  help  me !  ben  9taumen  unb  Seiten  gu  tro^en  to  defy 
space  and  time. 

b.  A  large  number  of  verbs  compounded  with  the  inseparable 
prefix  ent,  and  with  the  prepositions  ab,  an,  auf,  au§,  bet,  ein, 
entgegen,  nad^,  nnter,  t)or,  miber,  su ;  deriving  their  power  to  take 
the  dative  object  from  the  modification  of  meaning  given  by  the 
prefix. 

Thus,  bie  ©(^tt)erter  entfliegen  ber  ©(^eibe  the  swords  leap  from 
the  scabbard,  t)iele  ftimmten  biefer  ^nftd)t  bei  many  acceded  to  this 
view,  fommt  einer  \i)m  entgegen  if  one  comes  to  meet  him,  urn  d5n= 
Ud)en  ©reigniffen  uorsubengen  in  order  to  avoid  such  occurrences, 
ml^tt  ben  ^efe(i)ten  gnfa^  who  was  looking  on  at  the  contests. 

The  meaning  added  by  the  prefix  is,  as  the  examples  show,  to 
be  very  variously  rendered  in  English. 

c.  A  number  of  verbs  compounded  with  nouns,  adverbs,  and 
adjectives  ;  also,  of  verbal  phrases  akin  with  such. 

Thus,  ba^  fein  (SJefang  feinem  0eibe  gleic^fommen  miiffe  that  his 
song  mu^t  correspond  with  his  attire,  er  elite  feinem  SSater  jn  ^\ii\t 
he  hastened  to  the  help  of  his  father,  e§  tl)nt  mir  leib  it  pains  me, 
er  ma^t  biefer  ^ame  ben  ©of  he  is  paying  court  to  this  lady,  e§ 
tDarb  i^m  gu  XtjiW  \%t\\'\  it  was  granted  him  (fell  to  his  share). 

d.  SSerben  become  is  sometimes  used  alone  with  a  (possessive) 
dative  in  the  sense  of  gu  ^l^eil  [%t\\\  merben :  thus,  bagn  n)arb  bem 
5[Renf d^en  ber  35erftanb  for  that  end  was  understanding  given  to  man 
(became  his).  Quite  rarely,  such  a  possessive  dative  follows  f ein : 
as,  e§  ift  il^m  it  is  his  (belongs  to  him). 

e.  A  few  impersonal  verbs,  or  verbs  used  impersonally,  take 
a  dative  designating  the  subject  of  the  feeling  or  condition  they 
express :  thus,  e§  grant  mir  lam  horrified,  il^m  fd)n)inbelt  he  turns 
giddy.    Some  of  these  take  also  the  accusative. 

/.  Also  fein,  tuerbcn,  and  gel^en  or  ergeften,  with  adverbial  ad- 
juncts, are  frequently  thus  used  impersonally  with  the  dative 
(292.4:) :  thus,  if)m  tt)ar  bange  he  was  in  anxiety,  mir  mirb  fo  mol^l 


94  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [222- 

so  pleasant  a  feeling  is  ccmiing  over  me,  \o\t  \\i  mir  benn  Iww  is  it 
then  with  me  ?  bcm  ift  f  o  the  case  is  thus  (it  is  thus  with  regard  to 
that). 

2.  Of  the  intransitive  verbs  governing  the  dative,  a  part — 
especially  those  that  denote  an  action  proceeding  from  a 
person — may  form  an  impersonal  passive  governing  the  same 
case  (see  279.2). 

Thus,  e§  waxh  mir  l^art  beocQnet  I  have  been  harshly  dealt  with 
(met),  e§  tpurbe  i^m  gel^olfen  he  was  helped. 

III.  In  a  looser  and  less  strictly  dependent  construction — as 
denoting  the  person  (or  thing)  in  behalf  of  whom,  or  as  affecting 
whom,  anything  is  or  is  done,  the  dative  ( "  dative  of  interest " ) 
is  used  so  freely,  and  with  so  many  verbs,  that  to  attempt  giv- 
ing rules  for  its  occurrence  would  be  useless.  Only  one  or  two 
points  call  for  special  notice. 

a.  A  dative  grammatically  dependent  on  the  verb  is  often 
used  instead  of  a  possessive  genitive  quaUfying  a  noun  in  the 
sentence:  thus,  bem  '3)iener  urn  ben  Qa\§  faEenb  falling  upon  the 
servant's  neck,  leget  ben  3D^toEner  ber  9Jiaib  in  ben  ©d^oo^  lay 
Miollner  in  the  maid's  lap. 

b.  This  is  especially  common  with  the  personal  pronouns : 
thus,  e§  Bli^t  au§  htn  ^ugen  i^m  fii^n  a  daring  look  beams  from 
his  eyes  (see  161). 

c.  The  personal  pronoun  is  sometimes  thus  used  in  a  manner 
that  seems  to  us  expletive :  thus,  jiel^  mir  oh  fie  fommen  see  (for 
me)  whether  they  are  coming  (compare  156). 

IV.  For  the  dative  dependent  upon  a  verb,  in  all  its  varieties 
(but  not  with  all  verbs :  especially  not  with  those  which  take 
the  dative  after  the  manner  of  a  direct  object,  Il.la),  is  some- 
times substituted  a  case  governed  by  a  preposition  (as  gu  to,  fiir 
for,  Hon  from).  This  substitution  is  notably  more  frequent  with 
a  noun  than  with  a  personal  pronoun  ;  a  dative  of  the  latter  is 
often  used  where  one  of  the  former  would  make  a  harsh  or 
forced  construction. 

223.     The  Dative  with  Adjectives. 

1.  The  construction  of  the  dative  with  adjectives  is  analogous 
to  its  construction  with  verbs.  Some  adjectives  call  for  the 
case  as  their  essential  or  natural  defining  complement ;  others 
admitit  in  a  looser  relation,  after  the  manner  of  a  "  dative  of 
interest "  (above,  222.III.). 


2U]  DATIVE.  9^ 

2.  Adjectives  taking  the  dative  as  their  more  essential  com- 
plement are  especially  those  that  signify  nearness  or  remoteness, 
likeness  or  unlikeness,  suitableness,  property,  inclination,  ad- 
vantage or  disadvantage,  and  the  like.  Usually,  they  require 
in  English  the  preposition  to  before  a  noun  Umiting  them. 

Thus,  mt  nai)  fii^r  i^  m\^  bir  how  near  I  feel  myself  to  thee! 
bem  ^Idferbau  fremb  strangers  to  agriculture,  2BoI!en  qU'i^  gittigen 
clouds  like  wings,  einen  il^m  eigenen  SBertft  a  value  peculiar  to  it, 
eine  ©eele,  bie  ber  %\)0i\  nit^t  getDac^fen  ift  a  soul  that  is  not  equal  to 
the  deed,  ein  mir  unDer^offteg  (^lixd  a  happiness  unhopedfor  by  me. 

3.  Participles  of  verbs  governing  the  dative  admit  a  comple- 
ment in  the  same  case,  in  analogy  with  the  uses  of  the  verbs 
from  which  they  come,  and  according  to  their  own  character  as 
active,  passive,  or  neuter  participles. 

4.  Verbal  derivatives  in  Bar  and  It(^,  signifying  possibility, 
take  a  dative  of  the  person  whom  the  possibility  concerns: 
thus,  mir  begreiflid)  comprehensible  to  me,  bem  9!Jlenfcf)en  unbetro^n- 
bar  uninhabitable  by  man. 

5.  Almost  any  adjective  qualified  by  gu  too  or  getiug  suffi,- 
dently,  enough  admits  an  adjunct  in  the  dative :  thus,  ba§  0eib 
ift  mir  gu  lang,  i^m  aber  nid)t  lang  genug  the  garment  is  too  long  for 
me,  but  not  long  enough  far  him. 

6.  Many  adjectives  admit  a  dative  adjunct  more  readily,  or 
only,  when  used  with  a  verb,  either  predicatively  or  forming  a 
more  or  less  closely  compounded  verbal  phrase :  thus,  ba§  ift 
mir  rec^t  that  suits  me  (seems  to  me  right),  ba§  tt)trb  bem  £naben 
fc^tt)er  that  grows  hard  for  the  boy. 

For  such  phrases,  with  transitive,  intransitive,  and  impersonal 
verbs,  see  above,  222.1.1(^,  II.lc,/. 

7.  For  the  dative  with  an  adjective,  also,  is  often  used  a  case 
governed  by  a  preposition  (especially  Don /rom,  fiir/or). 

224.     TJie  Dative  with  Prepositions. 

1.  About  twenty  prepositions  govern  the  dative. 
For  the  list  of  them,  see  under  Prepositions  (374). 

2.  Nine  prepositions  govern  the  dative  when  the  relation  ex- 
pressed is  that  of  situation  or  locality ;  but  the  accusative,  when 
motion  or  tendency  toward  anything  is  implied. 

These  are  an,  auf,  I)inter,  in,  neben,  iiber,  unter,  Dor,  3tt)if(f)ett 
(see  376). 


96  USES  OF  THE  FOEMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [225- 

225.  The  Dative  in  other  constructions. 

1.  The  use  of  the  dative  as  a  virtual  possessive  genitive, 
grammatically  dependent  on  a  verb,  but  logically,  or  according 
to  its  real  meaning,  qualifying  a  noun,  has  been  explained  above 
(222.III.a,&).  Karely,  the  dative  js  found  having  the  same  value 
with  a  noun  alone :  as,  bem  9liefen  giir  Sufi /or  the  gianfs  pleasure 
(for  a  pleasure  to  the  giant),  er  gab,  iftm  gu  (S^ren,  mandie  gefte  he 
gave  many  festivals  in  his  honor.  Yet  more  rarely,  it  occurs  with 
a  noun  in  other  relations  usually  expressed  by  a  genitive,  or 
with  the  aid  of  a  preposition :  as,  ein  9Jiufter  ^iiroern  unb  33auern 
a  model  for  citizens  and  peasants,  ©emipeit  einem  neuen  33unbe 
assurance  of  a  new  covenant. 

2.  The  dative  sometimes  follows  a  noun  in  exclamatory 
phrases  (as  if  the  imperative  of  jein  to  he  were  understood) : 
thus,  bem  33uben  unb  bem  ^nt^t  bie  ^(^t  outlawry  to  the  villain 
and  flunkey!  greube  bem  6terbli(!)en  joy  to  the  mortal!  Some 
words  habitually  employed  as  exclamations  are  also  followed  by 
a  dative  signifying  the  person  toward  whom  the  feeling  ex- 
pressed by  the  exclamation  is  directed:  such  are  tt)0^l,  §eil, 
SIBe^,  and  the  like  (see  392). 

ACCUSATIVE. 

226.  The  relations  of  the  accusative  are  more  simple  than  those  of 
the  other  oblique  cases.  Its  proper  office  is  to  stand  as  direct  object 
of  a  verbal  action ;  and  also,  in  the  relation,  most  nearly  akin  with  the 
former,  of  the  goal  of  motion ;  but  this  it  has  in  German  only  in  part. 
The  German  uses  it  also  as  the  case  absolute, 

227.  The  Accusative  with  Verbs. 

1.  The  accusative  is  especially  the  case  belonging  to  the 
direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb :  as,  ic^  fe^^e  ben  9JJann;  er  trdgt 
clnen  S)ut  I  see  the  man;  he  wears  a  hat. 

a.  And  a  transitive  verb,  on  the  other  hand,  is  one  that  takes 
a  direct  object  in  the  accusative.  The  classification  of  verbs  as 
transitive  and  intransitive  is  in  part  formal  rather  than  logical 
(i.  e.  a  matter  of  usage,  and  not  of  essential  meaning),  and — 

h.  Some  verbs  which  in  English  are  regarded  as  transitive 
take  in  German  the  genitive  (219.5)  or  the  dative  (222.  II.l),  and 
therefore  belong  to  the  class  of  intransitives.  Again,  some  verbs 
which  to  us  are  intransitive  are  in  German,  uniformly  or  oc- 
casionally, transitive:  as,  i^r  Ijobt  mid)  fpre(^en  iDoHen  you  have 
desired  to  speak  to  me. 


227]  ACCUSATIVE.  97 

2.  The  accusative  is  also  sometimes  used  as  the  object  of  a 
verb  properly  intransitive. 

a.  Some  verbs  may  be  followed  by  an  accusative  of  meaning 
akin  with  their  own,  or  signifying  a  substantive  idea  which  they 
themselves  virtually  involve  ( "  cognate  accusative  " ). 

Thus,  tt)ir  fterben  ^ier  ben  2:ob  ber  greien  we  die  here  the  death 
of  the  free,  betet  einen  frommen  ©pruc^  way  a  piom  phrase,  fie 
](^ldft  ben  le^ten  ©d^Iaf  she  sleeps  the  last  sleep. 

h.  By  a  pregnant  construction,  an  intransitive  may  be  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  of  that  which  is  effected  or  made  to  ap- 
pear by  the  action  it  designates:  thus,  tont  bie  ^lode  (^rab^efang 
the  bell  tolls  a  funeral  hymn,  wa^  grinfeft  bu  mir  Ijzx  what  grinnest 
thou  at  me  (what  does  thy  grinning  signify)  ?— or  by  an  accusa- 
tive and  an  adjective  or  other  equivalent  expression  as  objective 
predicate,  signifying  the  condition  into  which  that  which  is 
designated  by  the  accusative  is  brought  by  the  action  described 
by  the  verb :  thus,  \i^  ^alb  tobt  [tot]  lai^en  to  laugh  one's  self  half 
dead,  \^  tranm^  al§  ^inb  m\^  ^uxMt  I  dream  myself  back  into 
childhood  (as  child),  bu  tt)irft  bie  SBdd^ter  an§  bem  ©djlafe  fc^reien 
tliou  wilt  scream  the  guards  out  of  sleep. 

c.  Some  impersonal  verbs,  denoting  a  personal  condition  or 
state  of  feeling,  take  an  accusative  signifying  the  person  af- 
fected :  thus,  e§  liiftet  feinen,  euer  9Jlann  3U  tuerben  no  one  desires 
to  become  your  husband,  mid)  T^ungert  Jam  hungry.    See  294. 

With  these  are  included  also  biinfen,  bdu(^ten  [beuc^ten]  seem 
(the  only  verbs  in  which  a  like  construction  still  appears  in 
English) :  thus,  mi^  hmitmethii^ks,  mid)  bduc^te  [beud)te]  methought 
(292.2).  These  (and  some  of  the  others  also)  admit  a  dative 
instead  of  an  accusative  object  (222.II.le). 

d.  For  the  accusative  after  Jein  or  merben  with  certain  adjec- 
tives, see  below  (229). 

3.  A  few  transitive  verbs  govern  two  accusatives :  namely — 

a.  Se^ren  teach  takes  an  accusative  of  the  thing  taught  to- 
gether with  an  accusative  (or  sometimes  a  dative)  of  the  person 
to  whom  it  is  taught :  thus,  id^  lebre  iftn  (or  i^m)  bie  Tln\it  I  teach 
him  music.  §ragen  ask  and  bitten  beg  also  sometimes  add  to  their 
personal  object  a  pronominal  accusative  of  the  thing  desired: 
thus,  \^  bitte  bid)  nur  bie§  I  beg  of  thee  only  this. 

b.  C)ei^en  and  nennen  call,  name,  fd)impfen  and  fd^elten  call  by 
way  of  reproach,  and  tauf  en  christen,  which  add  to  their  personal 
object  a  second  accusative  as  objective  predicate,  denoting  the 


^8  USES  OF  THE  FOEMS  OF  DECLENSION.  [227- 

name  or  title  given:  thus,  t(^  toill  alk§  eine  (Sd)ictunQ  nennen 
I  will  call  the  whole  a  wm^k  of  destiny,  er  fc^impfte  feinen  ^egner 
einen  DIarren  he  reviled  his  adversary  as  a  fool. 

c.  A  noun  in  the  accusative  as  objective  predicate  now  and 
then  appears  with  other  verbs— as,  fo  glaube  jeber  feinen  ^ting  ben 
ed^ten  then  let  each  believe  his  own  ring  the  genuine  one ;  but  tliis 
construction  is  generally  avoided  by  the  use  of  a  different  ex- 
pression :  as,  man  ma^i  or  nja^It  tftn  gum  ^onifl  tliey  make,  or 
choose,  him  king  (for  king),  \^  l^alte  i^n  fiir  meinen  greunb  I  deem 
him  my  friend,  \6)  fenne  iftn  al§  einen  ^l^renmonn  I  kmm  him  a 
man  of  honor. 

228.  The  Accusative  with  Prepositions. 

1.  Eight  prepositions  always  govern  the  accusative. 

They  are  bi§,  bur(i),  fiir,  Qegen  or  gen,  ol&ne,  fonber,  urn,  n)iber 
(see  375). 

2.  Nine  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  accusative  when  they 
indicate  motion  or  tendency  toward ;  otherwise,  by  the  dative. 

They  are  an,  auf,  Winter,  in,  neBen,  iiber,  unter,  t)Dr,  gtt)if(f)en 
(see  376). 

229.  The  Accusative  with  Adjectives. 

A  few  adjectives,  when  used  predicatively  with  fein  or  h)erben 
(especially  the  latter),  may  take  an  object  in  the  accusative. 

They  are  anfii^tig,  bemu^t,  gema^r,  gemol^nt,  Io§,  miibe,  fatt, 
iiberbriiffig,  gufrieben:  thus,  bie  ©eifter  njerb'  id)  nun  nid)t  log 
I  cannot  now  get  rid  of  the  spirits,  id)  \mf  eg  gufrieben  I  should  be 
content  with  it,  menu  mx  nic^t  fein  (Jingreifen  gema^r  tt)iirben  if  we 
did  not  feel  its  taking  hold. 

This  anomalous  construction  is  of  quite  modern  origin,  and 
in  part  owing  to  a  misapprehension  of  the  old  genitive  eg  as  an 
accusative.  It  is  easier  with  a  pronoun  than  with  a  noun  as 
object,  and  in  the  case  of  gufrieben  contented  is  limited  to  a 
pronoun.  The  governing  force  belongs  to  the  combination  of 
adjective  and  verb  (compare  223.6). 

230.  The  Accusative  in  absolute  construction. 

1.  The  accusative  is  used  absolutely  (that  is,  as  adverbial  ad- 
junct of  a  verb  or  adjective,  but  not  properly  governed  by  them) 
to  express  measure — whether  of  duration  of  time,  of  extent  of 
space,  of  weight,  of  value,  or  of  number. 


230]  ACCUSATIVE.  99 

Thus,  er  I)or(^te  eincn  ^lugenbUc!  he  listened  for  a  moment,  an  bie 
id)  Diele  3at)re  nirf)t  ocbad)t  of  which  I  have  not  thought  for  many 
years,  man  I)atte  fie  nur  mn'm  2.age  border  Gcfeften  they  had  been 
seen  only  a  few  days  before,  stDangig  3a^^^  ^^^  twenty  years  since, 
al»  fie  eine  oute  ©ti-cc!e  fortgcoanaen  tuaren  when  they  had  gone  on 
a  good  piece,  cine  !)albe  Stiinbc  )oox  bcm  (Bdjlo^  half  a  league  outside 
the  castle,  ad^t  9J2orGen  tief  eight  furlongs  deep,  c^  luieflt  ein  ^funb 
it  weiglis  a  pound,  ba§  foflet  ivozi  %\)a\tx  that  costs  two  dollars,  ein 
C)eer  300,000  Wann  ftar!  an  army  300,000  men  strong. 

a.  To  an  accusative  expressing  duration  of  time  is  often 
added  the  adverb  lanG  long :  as,  er  lag  fieben  3a^re  lanfi  he  lay 
for  seven  ijears,  ben  flangcn  %a(^  lang  the  whole  day  long; — less 
often  other  adverbs:  as,  bag  Qange  3al)r  burc^  tlie  whole  year 
through,  biefe  '^txi  iiber  all  this  time. 

h.  By  a  similar  construction,  an  adverb  of  direction  or  motion 
is  very  frequently  added  to  an  accusative  of  space,  in  such  way 
as  almost  to  have  the  value  of  a  preposition  governing  it :  thus, 
bie  ^reppen  l^erunter  down  the  stairs,  ben  58erg  l^inan  up  the 
mountain,  ben  SBcg  am  33ad)  l^tnauf  up  the  path  by  the  brook,  ben 
Oangen  (S^orfo  I)in  unb  n)ieber  through  the  whole  Corso  and  back. 

2.  The  accusative  is  also  used  to  express  the  time  of  occur- 
rence ("time  when"). 

Thus,  ba§  ficfd)at)  iebe§  ^al^x  that  happened  every  year,  ben 
^benb  beim  %aniz  that  evening  at  the  dunce,  er  fie^t  bie  SKelt  faum 
einen  geiertag  he  sees  the  world  only  on  a  holiday. 

a.  This  use  of  the  accusative  borders  on  that  of  the  adverbial 
genitive  (220.1) :  but  the  accusative  has  the  more  definite  mean- 
ing, and  cannot  be  used  witliout  a  defining  adjunct :  thus, 
^lbenb§,  be§  ^benb§  of  an  eveniiig,  in  the  evening  (now  and  then, 
or  habitually) ;  but  bicfen  ^benb  this  evening,  le^ten  ^benb  last 
evening,  and  so  on. 

3.  a.  A  noun  in  the  accusative  is  sometimes  used  absolutely, 
with  an  adjunct  (prepositional  or  adjective),  to  express  an  ac- 
companying or  characterizing  circumstance — as  if  governed  by 
with  or  having  understood. 

Thus,  bie  D^lilttcr  crfc^icnen,  ben  ©dugUng  im  ^rme  the  mothers 
appeared,  (with)  their  infants  in  their  arms,  anbere  fliet)en,  iDtlbc 
^Ingft  im  funfelnben  ^ugc  others  fly,  wild  terror  in  their  flashing 
eyes. 

h.  This  is  especially  usual  with  a  participle  as  adjunct  of  the 
noun :  thus,  mnli  ung,  bie  ^-acfcl  unuicmanbt  beckons  to  us,  with 


100  CONJUGATION.  [230- 

torch  inverted,  man  aeiDoftnt  e§,  ben  ^op^  Qegen  ben  ^orfo  Gend)let; 
ftill  gu  fte^en  it  is  trained  to  stand  still,  (having)  the  head  directed 
toward  the  Corso,  jelbft  ^ranfe  nic£)t  auSgenommen  even  sick  persons 
not  excepted. 

c.  Allied  with  this  is ,  the  so-called  imperative  use  of  the 
participle  (see  359.3). 

CONJUG-ATION. 

231.  Conjugation  is  variation  for  mode,  tense,  number, 
and  person. 

Only  verbs  are  conjugated :  hence,  the  subject  of  con- 
jugation is  coincident  with  that  of  verbal  inflection. 

VERBS. 

232.  The  essential  characteristic  of  a  verb  is  that  it  predi- 
cates or  asserts  something  of  a  subject:  that  is  to  say,  it 
ascribes  some  action,  or  state,  or  quality,  to  some  being  or 
thing  expressed  by  a  noun  or  pronoun. 

This  predication  or  ascription  is  not  always  direct  and  positive ; 
it  may  be  contingent,  inquiring,  or  optative :  compare  427. 

233.  Verbs  are  variously  classified. 

1.  They  are  divided  into  transitive  and  intransitive,  accord- 
ing to  the  nature  of  the  relation  they  sustain  to  a  noun  repre- 
senting the  object  of  their  action :  a  verb  that  admits  an  object 
in  the  accusative  is  called  transitive ;  otherwise,  intransitive. 

Thus,  transitive  verbs,  ii^  lobe  \^\\  I  praise  him,  er  jdjIdQtmid) 
he  strikes  me; — intransitive,  ic^  \\t^t,  er  fdflt  I  stand,  he  falls,  er 
fd^onet  feitie§  Setnbeg  he  spares  his  enemy,  tcE)  banfe  3^nen  I  thank 
you. 

a.  That  the  distinction  of  transitive  and  intransitive  is  in  part  formal 
rather  than  essential,  has  been  pointed  out  above  (227.  la,  6) ;  practically, 
however,  it  is  one  of  importance. 

2.  Under  these  classes  are  distinguished — 

a.  Reflexive  verbs,  which  take  an  object  designating  the 
same  person  or  thing  with  their  subject. 

h.  Impersonal  verbs,  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular, 
and  either  with  an  indefinite  subject  or  without  an  expressed 
subject. 


236]  SIMPLE  FOEMS  OF,  THE  VEEB.   ,        101 

3.  Transitive  verbs,  again,  fornl  by'"tl]LeTielp  bf'ah  auxiliaiy 
verb  a  passive  voice,  denoting  the  suffering  of  an  action,  and 
talcing  as  its  subject  what  was  the  object  of  the  transitive  verb : 
which  latter,  by  contrast  with  the  other,  is  said  to  be  of  the 

ACTIVE  VOICE. 

4.  Nearly  all  verbs,  moreover,  admit  of  being  compounded 
with  certain  prefixes,  of  a  prepositional  character  ;  with  refer- 
ence to  such  composition,  therefore,  they  are  distinguished  as 

SIMPLE  and   COMPOUND. 

234.  The  general  rules  of  conjugation  apply  alike  to  all  verbs, 
of  whatever  class  they  may  be.  They  will  be  first  stated  and 
illustrated  in  their  application  to  simple  personal  verbs  in  the 
active  voice. 

SIMPLE  FORMS  OF  THE  VERB. 

235.  The  German  verb  has  the  same  simple  forms 
as  the  English,  namely : 

1.  Two  tenses,  the  present,  and  the  preterit,  or  indef- 
inite past 

a.  The  value  and  use  of  these  tenses  nearly  correspond  in  the 
two  languages.  But  the  present  is  sometimes  employed  in  place 
of  our  perfect,  or  our  future  ;  and  the  limits  of  the  preterit  and 
the  perfect  are  also  not  precisely  the  same  in  both :  see  324  etc. 

2.  These  tenses  are  formed  each  in  two  modes,  the 
indicative  and  the  subjunctive. 

a.  The  subjunctive  is  nearly  extinct  in  English :  the  German 
subjunctive  is  employed  sometimes  for  our  potential  and  con- 
ditional ;  others  of  its  uses  have  no  correspondent  in  English : 
see  329  etc. 

b.  The  rendering  of  the  subjunctive  tenses  in  the  paradigms, 
therefore,  by  may  and  might  is  only  conventional,  and  for  the 
sake  of  uniformity;  such  rendering  gives  but  one  of  their 
various  meanings. 

3.  Each  tense  is  declined  in  two  numhers,  with  three 
persons  in  each  number,  as  in  English. 

4.  Of  an  imperative  mode  there  are  two  persons,  the 
second  singular  and  the  second  plural. 

5.  An  infinitive,  or  verbal  noun  (339). 


102 


VEEBS. 


[235- 


6.  Two  PAETiciPLES,  or  verbal  adjectives  (349):  one 
present  and  active ;  the  other  past,  and  prevailingly 
passive. 

a.  The  infinitive  and  participles  are  not  proper  verbal  forms,  since 
they  contain  no  idea  of  predication.  They  present  the  verbal  idea  in 
the  condition  of  noun  and  of  adjective  respectively;  but,  as  regards 
their  adjuncts,  they  share  in  the  construction  of  their  corresponding 
verbal  forms :  see  348  and  357. 

236.     Examples : 

1.  Iteben  love  (root,  IteB). 


Indicative. 

pers.      singular. 

1  \6)  lieBe      Hove 

2  bu  liebft     thou  lovest 

3  er  (iebt       he  loves 

PLURAL. 

1  W'w  lieben  we  love 

2  x^x  Hebt      ye  love 

3  fie  lieben    they  love 


SINGULAR. 


Subjunctive. 
Present 

SINGULAR. 

\(i)  liebe  /  may  love 

bu  Itebeft  thou  mayest  love 

er  Hebe  he  may  love 

PLURAL. 

tvxv  lieben  ive  may  love 

xi)X  liebet  ye  may  love 

fie  lieben  they  may  love 


Preterit, 


SINGULAR. 


1  id§  liebte     I  loved  id^  liebte,  =bete       I  might  love 

2  bu  liebteft  thou  lovedst   bu  liebteft,  :=beteft   thou  mightest  love 

3  er  liebte      he  loved         er  liebte,  -bete        he  might  love 


PLURAL. 

1  U)ir  Itebteu  we  loved 

2  i^r  liebtet   ye  loved 

3  fie  liebten   they  loved 


PLURAL. 

Wix  liebten,  =beten  we  might  love 
xijx  liebtet,  ==betet  ye  might  love 
fie  liebten,  ==beten    they  might  love 


Imperative, 
singular. 
2  liebe,  liebe  bu    love  thou 

Infinitive. 
lieben        to  love 


PLURAL. 

liebt,  liebt  xl)x 


love  ye 


Participles. 


Present. 
liebenb    loving 


Past. 
geliebt    loved 


236] 


SIMPLE  FOEMS  OF  THE  VEEB. 


103 


Bemarks.  1.  This  verb  illustrates  the  mode  of  inflection  of 
verbs  of  the  New  or  weak  conjugation,  corresponding  with  what 
are  wont  to  be  called  "  regular  verbs  "  in  English.  The  special 
rules  concerning  the  inflection  of  such  verbs  are  given  below : 
see  246  etc. 

2.  The  forms  liebeft  and  liebct  may  be  used  also  in  the  present 
indicative  and  the  imperative,  as  well  as  UeBete  etc.  in  the  preterit 
indicative,  and  geliebet  in  the  past  participle ;  see  below,  237.3.C. 

2.  geben  give  (root,  geb). 


Indicative. 


SINGULAR. 


SUBJUNCTIVK 


Present, 


1  tdf)  gebe  I  give         .    id^  gebe 

2  bit  giebft,  giOft  thou  givest       bu  gebeft 

3  er  glebt,  gibt    he  gives  er  gebe 


SINGULAR. 


/  may  give 
thou  mayest  give 
he  may  give 


PLURAL. 

1  tt)ir  geben  we  give 

2  \i)x  gebt  ye  give 

3  fie  geben  they  give 


PLURAL. 

tt)tr  geben  we  may  give 
\S)x  gebet  ye  may  give 
fie  geben        they  may  give 


Preterit, 


SINGULAR. 


SINGULAR. 


1  \6)  gab 

2  bn  gabft 

3  er  gab 


/  gave 
thou  gavest 
he  gave 


i(^  gabe 
bn  gab  eft 
er  gcibe 


/  might  give 
thou  mightest  give 
he  might  give 


PLURAL. 


1  n)ir  gaben 

2  i^r  gabt 

3  fie  gaben 


we  gave 
ye  gave 
they  gave 


PLURAL. 


iDir  gdben 
ibr  gcibet 
fie  gaben 


Imperative. 


SINGULAR. 


2  gieb,  gib  bn    give  thou 


Present. 
gebenb    giving 


Infinitive. 
geben        to  give 

Participles. 


we  might  give 
ye  might  give 
they  might  give 


PLURAL. 


Q^thi,  gebt  \^x    give  ye 


Past 

gegeben    given 


104  YEEBS.  [236- 

Bemarks.  1.  This  verb  illustrates  the  mode  of  inflection  of 
verbs  of  the  Old  or  strong  conjugation,  corresponding  with 
what  are  wont  to  be  called  "irregular  verbs"  in  English.  The 
special  rules  concerning  the  inflection  of  such  verbs  are  given 
below:  see  261  etc. 

2.  The  forms  geBet,  QaBeft,  Qobtt  (for  gebt,  fiabft,  Qobt)  are 
occasionally  met  with ;  also  gaBft,  Qobi  (for  gabeft,  Qabel).  For 
the  double  forms  giebft,  gibft,  etc.,  see  268.16. 

237.     General  Rules  respecting  the  Simple  Forms  of  the  Verb. 

1.  Of  the  forms  thus  given,  three  are  called  the 
PKiNcrPAL  PARTS,  because,  when  they  are  known,  all  the 
others  can  be  inferred  from  them :  these  are  the  infin- 
itive, the  1st  pers.  sing. preterit,  and  the  -pBist  participle: 
thus,  lieBen,  Itebte,  geliebt;  geben,  ^ab,  gegeben. 

or.  The  infinitive  always  ends  in  n,  and  almost  always 
in  en.  The  rejection  of  this  n  or  en  gives  us  the  eoot 
(3935)  of  the  verb. 

Not  ending  in  en  are  only  fein  he,  iljnn  do,  and  infinitives  from 
roots  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending  in  I  or  r,  as  tt)anbeln  walk, 
tDonbern  wander. 

K  There  are,  as  the  examples  show,  two  ways  of 
forming  the  preterit  and  past  participle :  the  preterit 
adding  ete  or  te  to  the  root,  or  else  adding  nothing,  but 
changing  the  radical  vowel ;  the  participle  taking  the 
ending  et  or  t,  or  else  en  or  n.  According  to  these  dif- 
ferences, verbs  are  divided  into  two  conjugations  (see 
below,  246). 

2.  The  endings  of  tense  inflection  are 

first  pers.  singular,  e,  —  first  pers.  plural,  en,  n 

second  pers.   "         eft,  ft,  e,  —  second  pers.  "       et,  t 
third  pers.      "         et,  t,  e,  —    third  pers.     "       en,  n 

The  rules  for  their  use  are  as  follows : 

a.  The  first  persons  sing.  pres.  indicative  and  subjunctive 
are  the  same,  and  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  simple  root. 

Exceptions  are  only  bin  am,  f  ei  may  he,  and  the  pres.  indicative 
of  the  modal  auxiharies  (see  251.3),  and  toiffen  Imow  (260). 


237]  SIMPLE  FORMS  OP  THE  VERB.  105 

h.  The  first  (and  third)  pers.  singular  of  the  preterit  sub- 
junctive, and  of  the  preterit  indicative  except  in  verbs  of  the 
Old  or  strong  conjugation  (269.1.1),  also  end  in  e. 

3.  a.  The  third  pers.  sing.  pres.  indicative  has  the  ending  t  or 
ct  (our  th,  s  in  loveth,  laves) :  in  all  the  other  tenses,  the  third 
person  is  like  the  first. 

Exceptions :  without  the  ending  t  are  only  the  modal  auxiliaries 
(see  251.3),  and  a  few  other  verbs  (268.5). 

h.  The  ending  of  all  second  persons  singular  (except  in  the 
imperative)  is  ft  or  eft  (our  sHn  Invest);  of  all  first  and  third 
persons  plural  (excepting  only  finb  are),  en  or  n ;  of  all  second 
persons  plural  (with  the  single  exception  fetb  are)  et  or  t. 

c.  The  retention  or  rejection  of  the  vowel  e  of  the  endings  eft, 
et  (also  of  e  before  the  te  forming  the  preterit  of  one  conjuga- 
tion) depends  partly  on  euphony,  partly  on  arbitrary  choice. 
The  e  must  always  be  used  when  the  final  letter  of  the  root  is 
such  that  the  consonant  of  the  ending  would  not  otherwise  be 
distinctly  heard— thus,  we  may  say  liebeft  or  liebft,  but  only 
lief  eft  readest,  tangeft  dancest;  liebt  or  \kM,  but  only  bittet  begs, 
rebet  talks — also,  when  a  harsh  or  unpronounceable  combination 
of  consonants  would  otherwise  occur— thus,  only  at^meft  [atmeft], 
atfimet  [atmet]  hreathest,  breathes;  fe^neft,  fegnet  blessest,  blesses. 
In  other  cases,  the  writer  or  speaker  is  allowed  to  choose 
between  the  fuller  and  the  briefer  form ;  the  latter  being  more 
familiar  or  colloquial,  the  former  more  used  in  stately  and 
solemn  styles.  But  the  e  is  more  often  retained  in  the  sub- 
junctive, and  especially  when  the  distinction  of  subjunctive  and 
indicative  depends  upon  it. 

The  e  of  the  ending  en  of  the  first  and  third  persons  plural  is 
rarely  dropped  except  after  unaccented  er  or  el,  in  the  indicative. 

Special  rules  affecting  some  of  the  forms  of  the  Old  or  strong 
conjugation  will  be  given  below  (268-9). 

d.  The  final  imaccented  e  of  all  verbal  forms  (as  of  all  other 
words  in  the  language)  is  not  imfrequently  cut  off,  especially  in 
poetry,  and  in  colloquial  style.  An  apostrophe  should  always 
be  used,  to  show  the  omission  ;  but  this  is  sometimes  neglected. 

4  The  inflection  of  tlie  tenses  is  always  regular,  ex- 
cept in  the  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the 
pres.  indicative,  which  often  show  a  difference  of  vowel 
or  of  consonant,  or  both,  from  the  other  persons  of  the 


y 


106  VERBS.  [237- 

tense.     The  same  irregularities  appear  in  part  also  in 
the  imperative  singular  (see  268,  270). 

5.  The  imperative  singular  ends  in  e  in  nearly  all  verbs  (for 
exceptions,  see  270.2) ;  the  plural  is  the  same  with  the  second 
pers.  pi.  indie,  present.  Both  numbers  admit  of  use,  as  in  Eng- 
lish, either  with  or  without  a  subject  pronoun. 

For  the  filling  up  of  the  imperative  with  subjunctive  forms, 
see  243.1. 

6.  The  form  of  the  present  participle  may  always  be 
found  by  adding  b  to  the  infinitive. 

Only  t!)un  cto  and  fein  be  form  t^uenb,  (eienb. 

7.  The  past  participle  has  usually  the  prefix  j^e.  For 
exceptions,  see  243.3. 

8.  Notice  that  the  third  pers.  plural  of  all  verbal  forms  is  used 
also  in  the  sense  of  a  second  person,  singular  or  plural 
(see  153.4),  its  subject  fie  being  then  written  with  a  capital :  thus, 
<5ie  liebcn  you  love,  8ie  gab  en  you  gave. 

(Exercise  14.    Simple  Forms  of  the  Verb.) 

COMPOUND  FOKMS   OF  THE  VEKB. 

238.  As  in  the  case  of  the  English  verb,  again,  the 
scheme  of  German  conjugation  is  filled  up  with  a  large 
number  of  compound  forms,  made  by  the  aid  of 
auxiliary  verbs. 

239.  Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliaries  of  Tense. 

The  auxiliaries  used  in  the  formation  of  the  tenses 
of  ordinary  conjugation  are  three  :  namely,  Ijabcn  have, 
fein  he,  tDerben  become.  The  simple  forms  of  these  verbs 
are  as  follows  :    ^ 

1.    §aben : — principal  parts  t)aben,  l^atte,  gcljabt. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

SINGULAR.  SINGULAR. 

1  ic^  ^abe  I  ham  ic^  ^abe  I  may  have 

2  bu  ^aft  tlwu  ha4  bit  Ijabeft        thou  mayest  have 

3  er  ^ai  he  has  cr  \jciiK  he  may  have 


239] 


PLURAL 

2  \[)x  ])aht 

3  "    '  ' 


AUXILIARIES  OF  TENSE. 


107 


fie  ^aben 


we  have 
y[e  have 
they  have 


SINGULAR. 

1  id^  '^atte""  ^  ^  rhad 

2  bu  ^atteft  \Xj'^u  hadst 

3  er  f)aitt^)^   he  had 

PLURAL. 

I  tvxx  'fatten  s  ,  we  had 


i^r  ^attet 
fie  fatten 


ye  had 
they  had 


Present. 


tt)ir  Ijaben 
fie  ^aben 


PLURAL. 


we  may  have 
ye  may  have 
they  may  have 


iPreterit. 


SINGULAR. 


x6)  f)aii^ 
bu  ^atteft 
er  l^citte 


/  might  have 
thou  mightest  have 
he  might  have 


PLURAL. 

irtr  fatten  ive  might  have 
\f)X  f)dttet  ye  might  have 
fie  Ijdtten       they  might  have 


Imperative. 


SINGT 

f;abe        have  thou 


PLURAL. 

^abt        have  ye 


Infinitive. 
l^aben  to  have 


Participles. 
Present. 
l^abenb        having 


Past 
ge'^abt        had 


2.  (Sein  he: — principal  parts  fetn,  Voax,  cjeUjefcn. 


Indicative. 

singular. 

1  \6)  bin  I  am 

2  bu  bift  thou  art 

3  er  ift  he  is 

PLURAL. 

1  \mx  finb        we  are 

2  if)r  feib  ye  are 

3  fie  finb  they  are 


Present. 


Subjunctive. 


SINGULAR. 


td§  fet  I  may  be 

bu  feieft        thou  mayest  be 

er  fei  he  may  be 


PLURAL. 


tvxx  feien 
i^r  fcict 
fie  foicu 


we  may  be 
ye  maybe 
they  may  be 


108 


VEBBS. 


[239- 


SINGULAR. 

idf)  tvax         I  was 
bu  tuarft       thou  wast 
er  toax  he  was 

PLURAIi. 

tt)ir  tt)aren  we  were 
\i)x  tvaxtt  ye  were 
fie  tuaren      they  were 

SINGULAR. 

2  fei       be  thou 


Preterit, 

SINGULAR. 

id^  tDcire        /  mty/i^  be 

bu  hjareft      //iow  mightest  be 

er  tt)dre        /le  mi^Ti^  be 

PLURAL. 

iDtr  iDaren     ii?e  might  be 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


i^r  tuaret 
fie  tDciren 


ye  might  be 
they  might  be 


PLURAL. 

feib        be  ye 


fein 


to  be 


Participles. 
Present. 
fetenb  being  gettjefen  been 

3.  SSerben  becorm: — principal  parts  tuerben,  tvaxh  or 

ttjurbe,  getDorben. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

SINGULAR.  SINGULAR. 

1  i6)  ttjerbe      /  become  id^  lt)erbe      /  may  become 

2  bu  tDirft        ^/iow  becomest        bu  tr»erbeft    //loit  mayest  etc. 

3  er  tt)irb         Ae  becomes  cr  U)erbe       Ae  may  become 


PLURAL. 

1  tDir  tDerben  if^  become 

2  i()r  tDerbet    ye  become 

3  fie  tDerben     ^/iey  become 


PLURAL. 


iDir  tuerben  i^e  may  become 
\l)X  iDerbet  ye  may  become 
fie  trerbeu    they  may  become 


Preterit. 

SINGULAR.  SINGULAR. 

1  id^  UJarb,       I  became  id^  tt)iirbe      I  might  become 

iDurbe 

2  bu  marbft,     thou  becamest        bu  iDiirbeft    thou  mightest  etc. 

iDurbeft 

3  er  tDarb,        he  became  er  tDiirbe      he  might  become 

tpurbe 


239J  AUXnJARIES  OP  TENSE.  109 

PLUBAL.  PLURAL. 

1  Wiv  tDurben  loe  became  ttjir  iDiirben   loe  might  become 

2  i^r  tDurbet    ye  became  i^r  tDiirbet     ye  might  become 

3  fie  murben    they  became  fie  tDiirben     they  might  become 

Imperative, 
singular.  plural. 

2  njerbe        become  thou  tuerbet        become  ye 

Infinitive. 
IDerben        to  become 

Participles. 
Present.  Past. 

trerbenb        becoming  getnorben        become 

4.  Irregularities  in  the  Conjugation  of  these  Verbs. 

a.  §aben  is  analogous  in  its  conjugation  with  lieben,  above, 
but  the  frequency  of  its  use  has  led  to  abbreviation  of  a  few 
of  its  forms.  Thus,  {)aft  and  f^at  are  for  older  l^abft  and  l^abt, 
and  ^atte  for  l^abte.  The  modification  of  the  vowel  in  l^dtte, 
pret.  subj.,  is  against  the  prevailing  analogy  of  verbs  of  its  class 
(see  250.2). 

b.  ©ein  is  of  the  same  conjugation  with  gebcn,  above.  Its 
irregularity,  which  is  far  greater  than  that  of  any  other  verb  in 
the  language,  comes  mainly  from  its  being  made  up  of  forms 
derived  from  three  independent  roots  :  bin  and  bift  are  from  the 
same  root  as  our  be,  being,  been  (original  form  bhu;  Lat. /m, 
Greek  phuo) ;  the  rest  of  the  present  from  the  same  root  as  our 
pres.  indicative  am  etc.  (original  form  as;  Lat.  sum,  etc.,  Greek 
eimi);  while  the  preterit  wax  and  past  participle,  Qett)efen,  are 
from  the  root  of  our  was,  were  (original  form  vas,  dwell,  abide. 

Some  authors  still  retain  eij  for  ei  (see  19.3)  in  fein,  in  order  to 
distinguish  it  from  the  possessive  fein  (157). 

c.  SBerben  is  a  nearly  regular  verb  of  the  same  conjugation 
with  fleben.  For  its  persons  mirft  and  mxh,  see  below,  268.5.  In 
the  double  form  of  its  pret.  ind.  singular,  it  preserves  a  solitary 
relic'  of  a  condition  once  belonging  to  many  verbs  in  the  lan- 
guage, whose  preterits  had  a  different  vowel  in  the  singular  and 
plural.  SBarb  is  the  original  form,  and  n)urbe  is  a  quite- modern 
and  anomalous  fabrication,  made  after  the  analogy  of  the  plural 
wurben^ 


no  VEEBS.  [240- 

240.  Formation  of  the  Compound  Tenses. 

1.  From  ^akn  or  fetn,  with  tlie  past  participle  of  any 
verb,  are  formed  a  perfect  and  a  pluperfect  tense,  in- 
dicative and  subjunctive,  and  a  perfect  infinitive. 

a.  The  Perfect  tense,  indicative  and  subjunctive,  is  formed 
by  adding  the  past  participle  to  tlie  present  tense  of  l^aBen  or  of 
fein :  thus,  trf)  l)abe  oeliebt  I  have  loved,  or  I  maij  have  laved,  id) 
bin  gefommen  I  have  (dm)  come,  id)  fei  gefomtnen  I  may  have 
come. 

h.  The  Pluperfect  adds  the  participle  to  the  preterit  of  the 
auxiUary :  thus,  [^  ^atte  gelieBt  J  had  hved,  \^  ^^citte  gelieBt  I 
might  have  loved,  id)  tDar  gefommcn  I  had  (was)  come,  i^  waxt 
gefommen  I  might  have  come. 

c.  But  the  modal  auxiliaries  (251)  and  a  few  other  verbs 
(namely  laffcti,  I)ci^en,  I)elfen,  l^oren,  fe^^en,  le'^ren  and  lerncn— the 
last  two  not  uniformly),  when  construed  with  another  verb  in 
the  infinitive,  form  their  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses  by  adding 
the  infinitive  instead  of  the  participle  to  the  auxiliary  (see  261.4). 

d.  The  Perfect  Infinitive  prefixes  the  participle  to  the  sim- 
ple or  present  infinitive :  thus,  gelieBt  ^ahtn  to  have  loved,  ge^- 
fommen  fein  to  have  come. 

e.  "What  verbs  take  'tjdbm  and  what  take  fein  as  their  auxiUary, 
will  be  explained  below  (see  241).  Por  omission  of  the  auxiliary, 
see  439.3a. 

2.  From  ti:)erben,  with  the  infinitives,  present  and  past, 
of  the  verb,  are  formed  a  future  and  a  future  perfect 
tense,  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  a  conditional  and 
conditional  perfect. 

a.  The  Future  tense,  indicative  and  subjunctive,  is  formed  by 
prefixing  to  the  present  infinitive  the  present  tense,  indicative 
and  subjimctive,  of  tDcrben:  thus,  i^  merbe  lieben  or  fommen  I 
shall  love  or  come. 

h.  The  Future  Perfect  prefixes  the  same  tenses  to  the  per- 
fect infinitive:  thus,  i(^  tt)crbe  gelicbt  ^aben  I  shall  have  loved, 
id)  merbe  gefommen  fein  I  shall  have  come. 

c.  The  Conditional  and  Conditional  Perfect  are  formed  by 
prefixing  to  the  present  and  perfect  infinitive  the  preterit  sub- 
junctive of  iBerben :  thus,  \i^  n)iirbe  lieben  or  fommen  I  should  love 
or  come;  i(^  miirbe  geltebt  l^aben  I  should  have  loved,  \6)  miirbe 
gefommen  fein  IsJiould  have  come. 


241]  COMPOUND  TENSES.  Ill 

3.  The  uses  of  these  tenses  so  nearly  agree  with  those  of  the 
corresponding  English  phrases  with  which  they  are  translated 
that  they  need  no  explanation  here  :  for  details,  see  323  etc. 

4.  The  German  is  the  only  one  of  the  Germanic  languages  which,  in 
its  modern  extension  of  the  conjugational  system  by  composition,  has 
chosen  iDerben  as  its  auxiliary  for  forming  the  future  tenses.  3d)  tnerbe 
geben,  hterally  lam  becoming  io  give,  receives  a  future  meaning  through 
the  idea  of  I  am  coming  into  a  condition  of  giving,  i.  e.  I  am  going  to  give. 

a.  In  the  tenses  formed  with  l)al)en,  the  participle  is  originally  one 
qualifying  the  object  of  the  verb  in  the  manner  of  an  objective  predi- 
cate, or  expressing  the  condition  in  which  Ihae  (possess,  hold)  the 
object.  This,  as  being  the  constructive  result  of  a  previous  action,  is 
accepted  as  a  description  of  that  action,  and  ic^  ^abe  bie  ^ilrme  auggeftved t, 
for  example,  from  meaning  I  have  my  arms  stretched  out,  comes  to  signify 
J  have  stretched  out  my  arms. 

h.  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  tenses  formed  with  feiu,  the  participle  is 
originally  one  qualifying  the  subject  in  the  manner  of  a  direct  predicate, 
and  defining  a  state  or  condition  in  which  the  subject  exists.  This,  in 
English,  has  become  (by  a  process  quite  analogous  with  that  just  above 
described)  also  a  passive,  or  an  expression  for  the  enduring  of  the  action 
which  produced  that  condition.  But  the  German  uses  (see  below,  275) 
another  auxiliary  to  form  its  passives,  and,  in  its  combination  of  fein 
with  the  participle,  it  only  adds  to  the  assertion  of  condition  the  less 
violent  implication  that  the  action  leading  to  the  condition  is  a  past 
one :  ic^  bin  gefomnien  lam  here,  being  come :  i.  e.,  my  action  of  coming 
is  a  thing  of  the  past;  or,  I  have  come. 

c.  In  strictness,  then,  t)aben  should  form  the  past  tenses  only  of  trans- 
itive verbs,  and  when  they  take  an  object;  and  fein,  only  of  intransitives 
which  express  a  condition  of  their  subject.  But,  as  have  in  English  has 
extended  its  use  until  it  has  become  the  auxiliary  of  all  verbs  without 
exception,  so,  in  German,  l}aben  has  come  to  be  used  with  transitive 
verbs  even  when  tLey  do  not  take  an  object,  and  with  such  intransitives 
as  are  in  meaning  most  akin  with  these  ;  until  the  rules  for  the  employ- 
ment of  the  two  have  become  as  stated  in  the  next  paragraph. 

241.   Use  of  Ijahcn  or  fcin  as  Auxiliary  of  Tense, 
1.  Yerbs  which  take  Ijiibcn  as  auxiliary  are 

a.  All  transitive  verbs  (including  the  reflexives  and 
the  modal  auxiliaries). 

b.  Almost  all  intransitives  which  take  an  object  in  the 
genitive  (219.5)  or  the  dative  (222.II.la). 

_— jC— A^argcfnumber  of  other  intransitiv^.s,  especially 
such  as  denote  a  simple  activity,  a  lasting  condition,  or 


112  VERBS.  [241- 

a  mode  of  motion  (including  all  the  proper  impersonal 
verbs). 

2.  Verbs  wliicli  take  fetn  for  auxiliary,  as  exceptions 
under  the  above  classes,  are — 

a.  Especially,  many  intransitives  which  signify  a 
change  of  condition,  or  a  movement  of  transition,  from 
a  point  of  departure  or  toward  a  point  of  arrival. 

These  intransitives  are  partly  such  as  do  not  take  an  object — 
as,  tt)erben  become,  fommen  come,  f  aHen/aW,  finfen  sink,  trac^fen  grow, 
fterben  die,  berften  hurst,  erftarren  stiffen,  erlofd^en  become  extin- 
guished, einf(^Iafen  fall  asleep,  guriirftreten  retreat;— ^a.vt\j  such  as 
may  take  a  dative  object  in  virtue  of  the  meaning  given  them 
by  a  prefix:  as,  entlaufen  run  away  from,  tt)iberfaftren  happen  to, 
cntQCQenQe'^en  go  to  meet,  auffaHen  strike  the  attention  of. 

b.  A  few  others,  without  reference  to  their  meaning :  namely, 
of  verbs  that  take  an  objective  dative,  begefitten  meet,  folgen 
follow,  tceiij^en  give  way,  gelingen  and  gliiden  turn  out  success- 
fully (with  their  opposites,  mi^IinQen  and  mi^glurfen) :  also  jein 
be,  Heiben  remain,  gc'^en  go. 

3.  A  small  number  of  verbs  may  take  either  auxiliary. 

a.  Some  that  are  used  with  different  meanings  :  as,  ber  ®edeb 
l&at  aufaeftanben  the  cover  has  stood  open,  mein  33ruber  ift  auf* 
ficftanben  my  brother  has  got  up. 

b.  About  twenty  verbs  of  motion,  which  take  ^aben  when  the 
act  of  motion  or  its  kind  are  had^'in  view  (as  in  answer  to  the 
questions  liow,  how  long,  when,  where  ?),  but  f ein  when  reference 
is  had  to  a  starting-point  or  an  end  of  motion  (as  in  answer  to 
the  questions  whence,  whither,  Jww  far?):  thus,  ber  ^nabe  ^at 
fiefpruttQcn  the  boy  has  jumped,  but  er  ift  t)Dm  33aume  gcfprungen 
he  has  jumped  from  the  tree;  fie  l^aben  t)iel  gereift  they  have 
travelled  muxih,  but  er  ift  na^  ©nglanb  gereift  he  has  gone  to 
England. 

c.  ©te^en  stand,  liegen  lie,  fifeen  sit  (especially  the  first),  are 
sometimes  conjugated  with  fetn,  but  properly  take  ^aben  under 
all  circumstances. 

242.     Oth^er  verbal  Auxiliaries. 

Besides  the  three  heretofore  spoken  of,  there  are  a  number 
of  verbs,  generally  or  often  used  with  other  verbs,  to  impress 
upon  them  modifications  of  meaning  more  or  less  analogous 


243]  AUXILIARIES.  113 

with  those  expressed  by  the  forms  of  conjugation  of  some  lan- 
guages.   Such  are 

1.  The  MODAL  AUXILIARIES,  of  wMch  there  are  six :  fonnen  can, 
moQm  may,  hixx^m  he  permitted,  mn\\^n  must,  ]oUtr\  shall,  tDoIIen 
will.  They  have,  however,  a  much  more  independent  value  and 
use  in  German  than  in  English,  and  are  not  to  be  treated  as 
bearing  any  part  in  the  ordinary  verbal  conjugation.  Their 
peculiarities  of  inflection  and  construction  will  be  explained 
below  (251  etc.). 

2.  The  CAUSATIVE  auxiliaey,  laffen,  which  (as  one  among  many 
uses)  is  often  employed  in  a  causal  sense  with  the  infinitive  of 
another  verb :  as,  einen  ^od  mad)cn  to  make  a  coat,  einen  D^orf 
macf)en  lafjen  to  have  a  coat  made  (cause  to  make  it) :  see  343.1.5. 

3.  ^"^un  do  (267-5),  which  we  employ  freely  as  auxihary  in 
Enghsh,  is  not  used  as  such  in  German.  Some  of  the  German 
dialects,  indeed,  make  an  auxiliary  of  it ;  and  it  is  now  and  then 
found  having  that  value  even  in  the  literary  language :  thus, 
unb  tl^  u'  nid)t  me^r  in  SSorten  framen  and  do  no  longer  peddle  out 
words. 

243.  Other  points  in  general  conjugation,  affecting  the  Impera- 
tive, Infinitive,  and  Past  Participle. 

1.  The  third  pers.  singular,  and  the  first  and  third  pers. 
plural,  of  the  present  subjunctive  are  very  commonly  used  in  an 
imperative  sense  (see  331),  and  may  be  regarded  as  filling  up 
the  defective  declension  of  that  mood.  Thus,  for  the  two  verbs 
first  given, 

Imperative. 

Singular,  Plural. 

1  licben  U)ir  let  u^  love 

2  lieBc,  liebe  bu  love  liebet,  liebt  xijt     love 

3  liebc  cr  let  him  love        lieBen  fie  let  them  love 

1  Qebett  tt)ir  let  us  give 

2  Qxtb,  gib  bu     give  gebt,  Qebet  iftr      give 

3  gebe  er  let  him  give        geben  fie  let  them  give 

Of  these  forms,  the  third  plural  is  in  especially  frequent  use 
as  substitute  for  the  second  person  of  either  number  (153.4) : 
thus,  gcben  ©ie  mir  ba§  33u(^  give  me  the  hook. 

Other  imperative  phrases — as,  er  foil  (jeben  he  shall  give,  Ia§ 
un§  fleben,  la^t  un§  geben,  laffen  6ie  un§  geben  let  us  give-^-avQ 
more  or  less  employed,  but  need  no  special  remark. 


114  VERBS.  [243- 

2.  The  infinitive,  as  in  English  (though  not  so  commonly),  takes 
often  the  preposition  gu  to  as  its  sign ;  this  is  always  placed 
next  before  the  simple  infinitive  form :  thus,  gu  QeBen,  gegeben  gu 

For  details  respecting  the  use  of  p,  see  341  etc. 

3.  The  past  participle  of  nearly  all  verbs  has  the  prefix  ge. 
Exceptions  are 

a.  Verbs  that  begin  with  an  unaccented  syllable,  especially 
1.  Those  ending  in  the  infinitive  in  iren  or  ieren  (being  verbs  de- 
rived from  the  French  or  Latin,  or  others  formed  after  their 
model) :  as  marfd^iren  [mar((^ieren]  march,  part,  rtiarfc^irt  [=fd)icrt] ; 
ftubiren  [ftubieren]  study,  part,  flubirt  [=biert].  2.  Those  com- 
pounded with  an  inseparable,  and  therefore  unaccented,  prefix : 
as,  t)ergeben  forgive,  part.  jjerQeben.  3.  A  few  others,  such  as 
prop^^eaeien  prophesy,  Irompeten  trumpet. 

b.  SSerben,  when  used  as  passive  auxiliary,  forms  U)  orb  en 
instead  of  getoorben  (see  276.1aj. 

c.  The  syllable  ge  was  not  originally  an  element  of  verbal  inflection, 
but  is  one  of  the  class  of  inseparable  prefixes  (see  307.5).  It  was 
formerly  used  or  omitted  as  special  prefix  to  the  participle  without 
any  traceable  rule,  and  has  only  in  modem  times  become  fixed  as  its 
nearly  invariable  accompaniment.  Hence,  in  archaic  style  and  in 
poetry,  it  is  still  now  and  then  irregularly  dropped. 

\^^^Synopsls  of  the  complete  conjugation  o/^aBen  and  jein. 

The  synopsis  of  iDerben  will  be  given  later,  in  connection  with 
that  of  the  passive  voice  of  the  verb  (277). 

Indicative. 
Present,  I  have  etc,  /am  etc, 

s.  I  tjobt  Bin 

Peeteeit,  I  had  etc.  I  was  etc. 

s.  I  ^latte  tDor 

Pebfect,  I  have  had  etc.  I  have  been  etc. 

s.  I  l^aBe  ge^abt  Bin  gettjefen 

Plupeefect,  I  had  had  etc.  I  had  been  etc. 

s.  I  ^atk  Qti)aU  \oax  getoefen 

FuTUEE,  I  shaU  have  etc.  I  shall  he  etc. 

s.  I  U)erbe  %aBen  n)erbe  fein 

FuTUEE  Peefect,  I  sholl  have  had  etc.  I  shall  have  been  etc. 

s.  I  merbe  ge^aBt  l^aBen  merbe  gemejen  fein 


245]  AUXILIARIES.  115 

SUBJTJNPTIVE. 

Pbesent,  I  may  have  etc.  Immj  he  etc. 

s.  I  ftaBe  fei 

Peetekit,  I  might  have  etc.  I  might  he  etc. 

s.  I  \aiit  tt)dre 

Peefect,  I  may  have  had  etc.  I  may  hxive  heen  etc. 

s.  I  l^aBc  %t))aU  jei  fletDcjcn 

PiiUPEEFECT,  I  might  have  had  etc.  I  might  have  heen  etc. 

s.  I  fjcitte  ge!)abt  iDare  Qewefen 

FuTUEE,  J  s^aZ/  Aaue  etc.  /  shall  he  etc. 

s.  I  merbe  ftaBen  tuerbe  fein 

FuTUEE  Peefect,  I  shall  have  had  etc.  I  shall  have  heen  etc. 

s.  I  tDerbe  gel^abt  ^aben  merbe  flemefen  jein 

Conditional. 
Conditional,  I  should  have  etc.  I  should  he  etc. 

s.  I  miirbe  ^^aben  tt)urbe  fein 

Cond'l  Peefect,  I  should  have  had  etc.         I  should  have  heen  etc, 

s.  I  tDiirbe  ge^abt  ijaUn  miirbe  getuejeu  fein 

Impeeative. 
have  etc.  6e  etc. 

s.  2  :f)abe  fei 

*  Infinitives. 
Peesent,  to  have  to  he 

l^aben  fein 

Peefect,  to  have  had  to  have  heen 

gel^abt  l^aben  getDefen  fein 

Participles. 
Peesent,  having  heing 

l^abenb  feienb 

Past,  had  heen 

gel^abt  fleniefen 

[Exercise  15.   Simple  and  Compound  Forms  of  the  Auxiliaries.] 

CONJUGATIONS  OF    VERBS. 

245.  Yerbs  are  inflected  in  two  modes,  called  respect- 
ively the  Old  or  Strong,  and  the  New  or  Weak  conju- 
gations. 


116  VEEBS.  [246- 

246.  1.  Verbs  of  the  Old  or  Strong  conjugation  form 
tlieir  preterit  by  a  change  of  the  vowel  of  the  root,  with- 
out any  added  ending,  and  their  past  participle  by  the 
ending  en :  thus,  geben,  (\ab,  gec^eben ;  fingen,  fang,  gefnngen. 

2.  Verbs  of  the  New  or  Weak  conjugation  form  their 
preterit  by  adding  te  or  ete  to  the  root,  and  their  par- 
ticiple by  the  ending  et  or  t:  thus,  (ieben,  liebte,  geltebt; 
reben,  rebete,  gerebet. 

3.  The  Old  and  New  Conjugations  correspond  to  what  have  been 
generally  called  in  English  the  "Irregular"  and  *'Eegular "  verbs.  The 
former,  as  the  name  implies,  is  the  more  primitive  method  of  inflection ; 
its  preterit  was  originally  a  reduplicated  tense,  like  the  Greek  and  Latin 
perfects  (as  dedoka,  tetigi) ;  and,  in  the  oldest  Germanic  languages,  many 
verbs  have  retained  the  reduplication  (as  I)ai^atb  held,  from  l^atban  hold: 
jaiflep  slept,  from  ftepatt  sleep).  By  phonetic  corruption  and  abbrevia- 
tion, however,  this  reduplication  led  to  an  alteration  of  the  radical 
vowel,  and  then  was  itself  dropped,  in  the  great  majority  of  verbs  ;  pro- 
ducing phenomena  of  conjugation  so  various  that  there  was  left  no 
prevailing  and  guiding  analogy  by  which  to  inflect  the  new  derivative 
verbs,  that  were  brought  in  as  needed,  to  supplement  the  old  resources 
of  expression.  Hence  the  need  of  a  new  method  of  conjugation  ;  which 
was  obtained  by  adding  the  preterit  of  the  verb  do  (did)  to  the  theme 
of  conjugation.  The  preterit-ending  te  of  the  New  conjugation  is  the  reUc 
of  this  auxiliary  (as,  in  English,  I  loved  stands  for  an  original  I  love-did). 

The  Old  conjugation  therefore  includes  the  more  primitive  verbs  of 
the  language  ;  the  New,  all  those  of  later  origin.  Only,  as  the  latter  have 
become  the  larger  class,  and  their  mode  of  conjugation  the  prevailing 
one,  some  of  the  old  verbs  (although  to  by  no  means  such  an  extent  as 
in  English)  have  been  changed,  in  part  or  altogether,  to  conform  to  it. 
See  below,  272.  ^ 

The  wholly  fanciful  names  "Strong"  and  "Weak,"  now  generally 
adopted,  are  the  invention  of  Jacob  Grimm  (compare  73,  132). 

We  shall  take  up  first  the  New  conjugation,  as  being  simpler 
in  its  forms,  and  easiest  to  learn. 


NEW  OE  WEAK  CONJUGATION. 

247.  The  characteristics  of  the  New  or  Weak  con- 
jugation are  that  its  preterit  ends  in  te,  and  its  participle 
in  t. 


NEW  OB  WEAK  CONJUGATION. 


117 


248,    Examples :  reben  tolh,  manbern  wander. 
Principal  Parts. 
reben,  rebete,  gerebet  wonbern,  wanberte,  Qewanbert 

Indicative. 


Peesent,  IMk  etc. 

I  wander  etc. 

s.  I  rebe 

2  rebeft 

3  rebet 

tt)onbere,  tt)anbre 

tt)anberft 

ttjanbert 

P.I  reben 

2  rebet 

3  reben 

tt)anbern 
tt)anbert 
wanbern 

Peetekit,  I  talked  etc. 

I  wandered  QUi. 

s.  I  rebete 

2  rebeteft 

3  rebete 

tDanberte 

tt)anberteft 

n)anberte 

P.I  rebeten 

2  rebetet 

3  rebeten 

tt)anberten 
n)anbertet 
tt)anberten 

Perfect,  I  have  talked  etc. 

I  have  wandered  etc. 

s.  I  ^aht  Qerebet 

2  5aft  Qerebet 

3  i)ai  Qerebet 

bin  getranbert 
bift  gemanbert 
ift  geiDanbert 

p.  I  ftaben  Qerebet 

2  ^abt  Qerebet 

3  ^aben  Qerebet 

ftnb  gen)anbert 
feib  getDanbert 
finb  gett)anbert 

Plijpeefect,  I  had  talked  etc. 

IhM  wandered  etc. 

s.  I  5atte  gerebet 

2  l^atteft  gerebet 

3  ftatte  gerebet 

tt)ar  QetDanbert 
XocLX\i  gett)anbert 
xoax  getDanbert 

p.  I  fatten  gerebet 

2  ^attet  gerebet 

3  fatten  gerebet 

tt)aren  getronbert 
Xoaxi  getoanbert 
U)aren  gen)anbert 

FuTUEB,  I  shall  talk  etc. 

IsMl  wander  etc. 

s.  I  merbe  reben 

2  tnlrft  reben 

3  tuirb  reben 

tt)erbe  n)anbern 
tt)irft  ttjanbern 
iDirb  tuanbern 

118 


VERBS. 


[248^ 


P.  I  toerbctt  rcbctt 

tDerben  tDanbern 

2  tt)erbet  reben 

merbet  manbern 

3  merben  reben 

tDerben  raanbern 

FuTTJEB  Peefect,  I  shttll  have  talked  etc. 

/  sTiall  have  wandered  etc. 

s.  I  merbc  gerebet  tjobm 

toerbe  getoanbert  fein 

2  h)trft  fierebet  l^aben 

mx\t  gett)anbert  fein 

3  tDirb  gerebet  \)ahm 

mxh  gemanbert  fein 

P.  I  n)erben  oerebet  ^aUn 

njerben  getranbert  fein 

2  merbet  gerebet  ftaben 

mxhzt  geraanbert  fein 

3  toerben  Qerebet  l^aBen 

n)erben  gemanbert  fein 

Subjunctive. 

Peesent,  I  may  talk  etc. 

I  may  wander  etc. 

s.  I  rebc 

tt)anbere,  njanbre 

2  rebeft 

tt)anbereft,  n)anbreft 

3  rebe 

wanbere,  iuanbre 

P.I  rebcn 

tt)anberen,  tranbren 

2  rebet 

tt)Qnberet,  nianbret 

3  reben 

toanberen,  manbren 

Pbeteeit,  I  might  talk  etc. 

I  might  wander  etc. 

s.  I  rebete 

n)anbertc 

2  rebeteft 

tt)anberteft 

3  rebete 

tt)anberte 

p.  I  rebeten 

tDanberten; 

2  rebetet 

toanbertet 

3  rebeten 

tt)anberten 

Peefect,  Im^y  have  talked  etc. 

I  may  have  wandered  etc. 

s.  I  ^aU  gerebet 

fei  gemanbert 

2  l^abefl  Qerebet 

feiefl  geraanbert 

3  ftabe  Qerebet 

fei  gemanbert 

p.  I  fiaben  gerebet 

feien  gemanbert 

2  ^aM  oerebet 

feiet  getuanbert 

3  Ibaben  gerebet 

feien  genianbert 

Plupeefect,  I  might  have  talked  etc. 

I  might  have  wandered  etc. 

s.  I  ptte  gerebet 

n)are  gemanbert 

2  ptteft  gerebet 

tt)dreft  gett)anbert 

3  ^citte  gerebet 

njdre  gemanbert 

p.  I  !)dtten  gerebet 

n)dren  gen)anbert 

2  i\aM  gerebet 

iDciret  getuanbert 

3  Mtten  gerebet 

tt)dren  gemanbert 

248] 


NEW  OB  WEAK  CONJUGATION. 


119 


FuTUEE,  Ishcdl  talk  etc. 

s.  I  iDcrbe  reben 

2  merbeft  reben 

3  tDerbe  reben 

p.  I  n)erben  reben 

2  tt)erbet  reben 

3  ttjerben  reben 

FuTUEE  Perfect,  I  shall  hxjLve  talked  etc. 

s.  I  tt)erbe  gerebet  ^aben 

2  merbeft  gerebet  ^dbtn 

3  mxht  Qerebet  ^dbm 

p.  I  merben  Qerebet  ^aben 

2  trerbet  flerebet  ftaben 

3  toerben  gerebet  'iiobtn 


I  shall  wander  etc, 

tt)erbe  toanbern 
werbeft  n^anbern 
IDerbe  tcanbern 

toerben  manbcm 
tt)erbet  tt)anbern 
irerben  nianbern 

I  shall  have  wandered  etc. 

tDerbe  gemanbert  fein 
n)erbeft  Gett)anbert  jein 
tt)erbe  getoanbert  fein 

werben  gemanbert  fein 
toerbet  gett)anbert  fein 
merbcn  getDanbert  fein 


Conditional. 


Conditional,  I  should  talk  etc. 

s.  I  iriirbe  reben 

2  tt)iirbeft  reben 

3  tDiirbe  reben 

p.  I  miirben  reben 

2  miirbet  reben 

3  tt)iirben  reben 

CoND.  Peef.,  I  should  have  talked  etc. 

s.  I  n)iirbe  gerebet  l^aben 

2  miirbefl  gerebet  l^aben 

3  tt)iirbe  gerebet  ^aben 

p.  I  tt)iirben  gerebet  ftaben 

2  iDiirbet  gerebet  baben 

3  miirben  gerebet  l^aben 


I  should  wander  etc. 

n)iirbe  n)anbern 
Wiirbeft  njanbern 
Wiirbe  njanbern 

h)iirben  n)anbern  ♦ 

tDiirbet  manbern 
tDiirben  tt)anbern 

I  should  have  wandered  etc. 

tt)iirbe  gettjanbert  fein 
tDitrbeft  gett)anbcrt  fein 
tt)iirbe  gett)anbert  fein 

tt)iirben  geiDanbert  fein 
njiirbet  gett)anbert  fein 
miirben  gewanbert  fein 


Imperative. 


talk  etc. 

s.  2  rebe,  rebe  bn 
3  rebe  er,  er  rebe 

p.  I  reben  tt)ir 

2  rebet,  rebet  I'^r 

3  reben  fie 


loandfer  etc. 

n)anbere,  toanbere  bu 
tDanbere  er,  er  tt)anbrc 

tt)anbern  tt)ir 
ttJanbert,  tt)anbert  if)r 
wanbern  jle 


120 


YEEBS. 


£248- 


Infinitive. 
Present,  to  talk  to  vender 

reben,  gu  rebcn  toonbern,  gu  manbern 

Pbefect,  to  have  talked  .  to  have  wandered 

gerebet  l^aben,  gcrebet  3u  l^obcn    Qetuanbcrt  jetn,  Qcmanbcrt  gu  jetn 


Pbesent,  talking 
rcbenb 

Pabticiples. 

wandmng 
tDanbernb 

Past,  talked 
gerebet 

^^         wandered 
gewanbert 

Bemarks.  The  conjugation  of  reben  exemplifies  the  necessity 
of  retention  of  c  of  the  endings  et,  ete  after  a  consonant  with 
which  t  would  be  confounded  in  pronunciation.  SGSanbern  is  one 
of  the  verbs  which  (241.36)  take  sometimes  !^aben  and  some- 
times |ein  as  auxiliary.  It  exemplifies  the  loss  of  e  of  the  ending 
en,  and  other  peculiarities  of  the  combination  of  endings  with 
verbal  roots  in  el  and  er. 

Irregularities  of  the  New  Conjugation. 

249.  A  few  verbs,  all  of  which  have  roots  ending  in  nn  or  nb, 
change  the  radical  vowel  e  to  a  in  the  preterit  indicative  (not  the 
^^bjunctive  also)  and  in  t^e  past  participle.    Thus : 

Participle. 

gebrannt 

gefannt 

genannt 

gerannt  ^ 

gefanbt 

gemanbt 

a.  The  last  two,  fenben  and  n)enben,  may  also  form  the  pret. 

indicative  and  the  participle  regularly:  thus,  jenbete,  gefenbet; 

ttjenbete,  gemenbet. 

250.  1.  Two  verbs,  Brtngen  hring  and  benfen  think,  are  still 
more  irregular,  and  agree  closely  in  their  forms  with  the  corr 
responding  EngUsh  verbs.    Thus : 

Infinitive.  Preterit.  Participle. 

indicative.  subjunctive. 

brlngen      hring  bra(f)te  brdc^te  gebrad)t 

benfen       think  ba(i)te  Va^ii  gebacC)! 


InfinUive. 

brennen     hum 
fennen       krww 

Preterit. 
indicative.           subjunctive. 

brannte          brennte 
fannte            fennte 

nennen 

name 

nannte           nenntc 

rennen 
fenben 
tt)enben 

run 
send 
turn 

rannte            renntc 
fanbte            fenbete 
tDanbte           wenbete 

251] 


MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


121 


2.  The  irregularities  of  ^aBen  have  been  given  in  full  above 
(239.4:a) ;  bringen,  benfen,  and  fjobtn,  with  some  of  the  modal 
auxiliaries,  are  the  only  verbs  of  the  New  or  weak  conjugation 
which  modify  in  the  preterit  suhj.  the  vowel  of  the  indicative, 
like  the  verbs  of  the  Old  or  strong  conjugation  (269.11). 


V 


[Exercise  16.    Yerbs  of  the  New  or  Weak  Conjugation.] 

251.     Modal  Auxiliaries. 

1.  These  are  (as  already-noticed) 

biirfen  be  allowed  miiffen  must 

jjonnen  can 


jollen  shall 
tDolIen  will 


tnoQen  may 

2.  While  the  corresponding  verbs  in  English  are  both 
defective  and  irregular,  these  have  in  German  a  com- 
plete conjugation  (only  lacking,  except  in  tuoUen,  the 
imperative),  but  with  the  following  irregularities  : 

a.  For  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative  are 
substituted  forms  which  properly  belong  to  a  preterit 
of  the  Old  conjugation. 

These  are,  in  fact,  relics  of  an  ancient  preterit  used  in  the  sense  of  a, 
present— thus,  fann  can  is  literally  I  have  learned  how,  foE  shallis  I  have 
owed,  mag  may  is  I  have  gained  the  power  ^ — and  the  rest  of  their  conjuga- 
tion is  of  more  modern  origin. 

h.  Those  which  have  a  modified  vowel  in  the  infinitive 
reject  the  modification  in  the  preterit  indicative  and  the 
past  participle. 

c.  All  the  rest  of  their  inflection  is  regular,  according 
to  the  rules  of  the  New  conjugation  (except  that  ntogen 
changes  its  c\iod)  before  t  in  the  preterit  and  participle). 

3.  Thus,  the  simple  forms  are — 
Indicative  Peesent. 


S.I  barf 

!ann 

mag 

mufe 

foil 

tt)ill 

2  borfft 

fannft 

tnagft 

mu^t 

fonft 

miflft 

3  barf 

!ann 

mag 

mu| 

foH 

tt)ill 

P.  I  biirfen 

fonnen 

mogen 

miiffen 

follen 

moEen 

2  biirft 

fonnt 

mogt 

mii^t 

foEt 

tDOEt 

3  biirfen 

fonnen 

mogen 

miiffen 

foHen 

moHen 

122 


YERBS. 


[261- 


Indicative  Peeteeit. 


S.I  burfte 

etc. 

fonnte 

etc. 

mo(5^te 

etc. 

mu^te 

etc. 

foEte 

etc. 

n)oflte 

etc 

Subjunctive  Peesbnt. 

S.I  biirfe 

etc. 

fonne 

etc. 

moge 

etc. 

miiffe 

etc. 

fone 

etc. 

ttJoKe 

etc. 

Subjunctive  Peeteeit. 

, 

S.I  biirfte 

etc. 

fonnte 

etc. 

mo(?^tc 

etc. 

miifete 

etc. 

foUtC 
etc. 

tDoUte 

etc. 

Impeeative. 

S.2 

moUe 

P.  2 

tt)om 

Paeticiples. 

Pres.  biirfenb 
Past  geburft 

fonnenb 
gefonnt 

mbgenb 
gemo(i)t 

miiffenb 
gemu^t 

foHenb 
QefoEt 

mollenb 
QetDoEt 

Infinitive. 

biirfen 

fonnen 

mogen 

miiffen 

foHen 

njoflen 

4.  The  compound  tenses  are  formed  in  the  same 
manner  as  those  of  other  verbs — with  one  important 
exception,  namely — 

*  a.  When  used  in  connection  with  another  verb  (infin- 
itive), the  infinitive  is  substituted  for  the  participle  in 
the  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses. 

Thus,  er  l^at  e§  nt(f)t  g  e !  o  n  n  t ,  but  er  ftat  e§  nic^t  tl)un  f  o  n  n  e  n 
lie  has  not  been  able  to  do  it;  toa^^abi\i)X  g  e  tt)  o  U  t  what  have  you 
wished?,  but  \^t  !)abt  m6)  fprei^en  tDolIen  you  have  wanted  to 
speak  to  me;  xm  ftaben  n)arten  miif  f  en  ^^6  have  been  compelled  to 
wait. 

5.  The  compound  tenses  are,  then,  as  follows  : 
Peefect  (first  person  the  same  in  both  modes). 

s.  I  l^abe  geburft,  gefonnt,  2C. 
or  l^abe  biirfen,  fonnen,  :c. 

Indicative  Plupeefect. 

s.  I  5atte  geburft,  gefonnt,  :c. 
or  5atte  biirfen,  fonnen,  :c. 

Subjunctive  Plupeefect. 

s.  I  5citte  geburft,  gefonnt,  2C. 
or  :f)dtte  biirfen,  fonnen,  it. 


253]  MODAL  AUXnJAEIES.  123 

FunmB  (first  person  the  same  in  both  modes), 
s.  I  tt)erbe  biirfcn,  fonnen,  :c. 

FuTUBE  Pebfect  (first  person  the  same  in  both  modes). 

s.  I  tDcrbc  Qeburft  5aBen,  gefonnt  l^aben,  :c. 

CoNDinONAIj. 

s.  I  toiirbe  biirfen,  fonnen,  2C. . 

CONDinONAIi  PEEFECT. 

s.  I  mxht  geburft  ^dbtn,  Qefonnt  f^aUn,  :c. 

Inflnitive  Peefect. 

Qcburft  ^aben,  gefonnt  ijobm,  k. 

6.  a.  The  absence  of  a  complete  conjugation  of  the  correspond- 
ing auxiliaries  in  English  makes  it  necessary  for  us  often  to 
render  the  German  verb  by  a  paraphrase:  substituting,  for 
example,  he  able  for  caii  (fbnnen) ;  be  compelled,  have  to,  for  must 
(miijfen) ;  he  willing,  wish,  desire,  for  will  (tDoIIen),  and  so  on : 
compare  below,  253-9. 

6.  The  same  absence  has  led  to  the  use  of  certain  idiomatic 
and  not  strictly  logical  constructions  in  English,  in  which  the 
auxiliary  of  past  time,  have,  is  combined  with  the  principal  verb 
in  the  participle,  instead  of  with  the  modal  auxiliary ;  while  the 
Germa^,  more  correctly,  combines  it  with  the  latter.  Thus,  he 
would  not  have  done  it  is  not,  in  German,  er  tDoHte  e§  nid)t  Qd^an 
]&aben,  unless  it  signifies  he  was  not  willing  to  have  done  it;  if,  as 
usual,  it  means  he  ivould  not  have  been  willing  to  do  it,  it  is  er  ^attc 
e§  ntd)t  tl)un  mo  Hen.  Thus  also,  he  might  have  come  (that  is,  he 
would  have  been  able  to  come)  is  er  ftdtte  fommen  fonnen,  not  er 
fonnte  gefommen  fetn.  The  logical  sense  of  the  sentence  may  be 
tested,  and  the  proper  German  expression  found,  by  putting  the 
corresponding  verbal  phrase  in  place  of  the  simple  auxiliary  ui 
the  EngUsh. 

USES  OF  THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 

252.  Although  the  exposition  of  the  meanmg  of  these  auxilia- 
ries belongs  rather  to  the  dictionary  than  to  the  grammar, 
yet  such  is  the  frequency  of  their  use,  and  the  intimacy  of  their 
relation  to  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  combined,  that  it  is 
desirable  to  give  here  some  account  of  their  chief  uses. 

253.  ^iirfen. — 1.  This  represents  two  separate  verbs  of  the 
older  language,  the  one  meaning  need,  require^  the  other  dare, 


124  VEEBS.  [253^ 

venture,  trust  one^s  self.  The  former  sense  is  nearly  lost,  appear- 
ing only  occasionally  with  ttur  and  faum,  and  in  a  few  other 
phrases :  thus,  er  barf  nur  befe^len  he  needs  only  to  command.  The 
other  has  been  in  modern  use  modified  into  be  authorized, 
permitted,  and,  even  where  it  approaches  nearest  to  dare,  means 
properly  rather /eeZ  authorized,  allow  one's  self.  Thus,  Dliemanb 
barf  |)Iunbern  no  one  is  permitted  to  plunder,  barf  ic|  Bitten  may  I 
ask?  einem  ^aifer  barf  bie  9Jitlbe  nte  fe:^Ien  an  emperor  may  never 
lack  clemency,  er  burfte  i^n  tn§  ^ngefiiit  ^retfen  he  was  allmued  to 
praise  him  to  his  face. 

2.  The  preterit  subjunctive  biirfte  signifies,  by  a  quite  special 
use,  a  probable  contingency:  as,  ba§  biirfte  todt^x  ]tin  that  is 
likely  to  be  true. 

254.  ^bnnen. — The  original  meaning  of  fonnen,  as  of  our  can, 
is  to  know  how ;  but  both  have  alike  acquired  the  sense  of  be 
able,  and  signify  ability  or  possibility  in  the  most  general  way, 
whether  natural,  conceded,  or  logical.  Thus,  icf)  !ann  lefen,  I 
can  read,  meinetmegen  !antt  er  ge^en  he  can  (may)  go,  for  all  me, 
iene  ^age  !i)nnen  mieber  fommen  tlwse  days  may  return  (their 
return  is  possible),  er  !ann  f(^on  gefommen  fein  he  may  possibly 
have  already  arrived. 

265.  9Jlogen. — This  verb  meant  originally  to  have  power,  but 
its  use  in  that  sense  is  now  antiquated  and  quite  rare :  thus, 
tDenn  feiner  fie  ergriinben  mag  though  none  is  able  to  fathom  them. 
At  present,  it  has  two  leading  significations : 

1.  That  of  power  or  capability  as  the  result  of  concession  on 
the  part  of  the  speaker ;  and  that,  either  a  real  permission — as 
er  mag  t^n  Beftalten  he  may  keep  it — or  as  a  logical  concession  or 
allowance,  as  \)a^  mag  mo^t  3U  '^ixitu  fommen  that  may  happen  at 
times. 

2.  That  of  choice,  liking,  desire :  thus,  maS  fie  bir  ni(f)t  offen* 
Baren  mag  what  she  does  not  choose  to  reveal  to  thee,  ba§  m  o  d^  t  e 
er  gar  nt(^t  ^bren  Jie  did  not  like  to  hear  that  at  all.  This  meaning 
is  most  frequent  with  the  preterit  subjunctive :  thus,  e§  m  b  (^  tc 
!ein  §unb  fo  Idnger  leBen  no  dog  would  care  to  live  longer  thus, 
au(i)  t(f)  m  0  d)  t^  mit  bir  fterBen  I  too  would  like  to  die  with  thee. 

a.  WoQtn  has  other  uses  (akin  with  the  above,  but  of  less 
definite  character),  in  which  it  approaches  very  near  to  equiva- 
lence with  the  subjunctive  tenses :  thus,  in  expressing  a  wish, 
mi3ge  nie  ber  ^ag  erf(i)etnen  may  the  day  never  appear,  mo^k  bie 
gauge  SBelt  un§  f)oren  would  that  the  whole  world  might  hear  us; 


251]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  125 

also,  in  clauses  expressing  design  or  purpose :  as,  bamit  fie  nii^t 
ou^Gleiten  mogen  that  they  may  not  slip;  or  after  an  indefinite 
pronoun :  as,  tx)a§  er  au(^  t^un  mag  (or  ll^iie)  whatever  he  may  do. 

256.  9Jlufjen. — This,  like  ntogen,  has  wandered  far  from  its 
primitive  meaning,  which  was  find  room  or  opportunity,  and  now 
designates  a  general  and  indefinite  necessity  (as  fbnnen  a 
correspondingly  indefinite  possibiUty),  either  physical,  moral,  or 
logical.  It  is  rendered  by  our  he  compelled  to,  he  ohliged  to,  have 
to,  cannot  hut,  and  the  like.  Thus,  alle  5[Rcnfd)en  miifjcn  fterben 
all  men  must  die,  luir  miifjen  trcu  jctu  we  must  be  faithful,  e§  mu^ 
in  biefer  SBcife  (icjc[)e^en  fein  it  must  have  taken  place  m  this  way, 
toir  mu^ten  umtDenben  we  had  to  turn  hack,  :^eute  mu^  bie  ^(otfe 
IDerben  to-day  the  hell  has  to  came  into  existence,  man  mu^te  olau= 
ben  07ie  could  not  hut  suppose,  i(f)  mn^te  iiber  bie  Seute  lad^en  I  could 
not  help  laughing  at  the  people. 

a.  As  mu^t  in  English  is  present  only,  such  phrases  as  those 
above  given  should  always  be  used  in  translating  the  other 
tenses  of  miifjen. 

257.  (SoKen. — Its  proper  sense  is  originally  that  of  duty  or 
ohligation,  and  in  the  past  tenses,  especially  the  preterit,  it  is 
often  still  used  in  that  sense :  thus,  e§  foHle  fo,  unb  ni^t  anber§ 
fein  it  ought  to  he  thus,  and  not  otherwise,  er  l^dtte  fommen  foKen 
he  ought  to  have  come. 

But  to  this  meaning  has  now  become  added,  in  prevailing  use, 
the  distinct  implication  of  a  personal  authority,  other  than 
that  of  the  subject,  as  creating  or  enforcing  the  obligation : 
thus : 

1.  Proceeding  from  the  speaker  ;  in  which  case  the  auxiliary 
intimates  a  command,  a  promise,  a  threat,  or  the  like :  as,  bn 
follft  (^ott  lieBen  thou  shalt  love  God,  meine  io(^ter  foGen  bic^  n)ar= 
ten  my  daughters  shall  wait  on  thee,  man  brol^t,  biefer  ober  iener 
^onig  fofle  geflen  xtju  gie'^en  it  is  threatened  that  this  or  that  king 
shall  take  the  field  against  him. 

2.  Recognized  by  the  speaker,  but  not  proceeding  from  him  ; 
in  which  case  foUen  is  to  be  rendered  by  to  he  to,  to  he  intended 
or  destined  to,  or  other  like  expressions :  as,  menn  man  gule^t 
Jjalten  fofi,  mill  man  lieber  ftier  bleiben  if  one  is  finally  to  stop,  one 
will  rather  stay  here,  ma§  ]oU  Qt]d:)ti}tn  what  is  to  happen?  man 
smeif  elte  metc^en  2Bea  man  einf  (^lagcn  f  oHe  they  douhted  which  road 
they  were  to  take,  ma§  mog  \(i)  T^ier  moftl  l^oren  foKen  what  can  I 


126  VERBS.  [257- 

be  meant  to  hear  here?  bariiBer  foUtc  er  bitter  enttauf(i)t  tuerben  he 
was  destined  to  be  bitterly  undeceived  upon  that  point. 

3.  A  special  form  of  this  use  of  follen  is  its  employment  to 
report  something  that  rests  on  the  authority  of  others,  is 
asserted  by  them :  thus,  35erBred)en,  bie  er  Begangen  l^aben  foE 
cjimes  which  he  is  claimed  to  have  committed,  t)iele  follen  an  biefem 
%aQt  umgefommen  fein  many  are  said  to  have  lost  their  lives  on 
tJiat  day. 

4.  In  conditional  and  hypothetical  clauses,  joKte  is  sometimes 
used  like  our  should,  nearly  coinciding  in  meaning  with  the 
proper  conditional  tenses :  thus,  follf  er  auc^  ftriiudjeln  iiBerall  even 
should  he  everijwhere  stumble ;  so,  elliptically,  in  interrogation : 
foEte  ba§  tDaJr  fein  \is  it  possible  that]  that  should  be  true? 

258.  StBoHen. — This  signifies  will,  intent,  choice,  on  the  part 
of  the  subject  of  the  verb :  thus,  \d)  mU  h'x&i  gleic^fall^  Begleiten 
I  will  accompany  thee  likewise,  feiner  WxH  ben  53e(^er  geiDinnen  no 
one  wants  to  win  the  goblet,  n)a§  er  3terUrf)e§  aup^ren  mti  what- 
ever he  intends  to  bring  forward  that  is  pretty,  id)  tooUk  i^n  mit 
(Sd^d^en  Belaben  I  would  load  him  with  treasures. 

a.  Occasionally  it  indicates  a  claim  or  assertion  (compare  the 
correlative  use  of  follen  above,  257-3) :  thus,  er  mil  bid)  gefe^en 
]j)aBen  he  claims  to  have  seen  you  (will  have  it  that  he  has  done  so). 

b.  Not  infrequently  it  implies  the  exhibition  of  intent,  or 
impending  action,  and  is  to  be  rendered  by  be  on  the  point  of 
and  the  like;  thus,  er  tr)iE  Q^l)tn  he  is  on  the  pohit  of  going,  t'm 
SBaner,  tDeld^er  fterBen  tDoIIte  a  peasant  who  was  about  to  die,  33ra- 
ten  \mU  t)erbrennen  the  roast  is  on  the  brink  of  burning. 

259.  The  Modal  Auxiliaries  witJwut  accompanying  Verb. 

All  these  auxiliaries  are  sometimes  met  with  unaccompanied 
by  an  infinitive  dependent  upon  them.    Thus  : 

1.  When  an  infinitive  is  directly  suggested  by  the  context, 
and  to  be  supplied  in  idea :  thus,  baB  jeber  fo  toE  jein  biirfe  al§ 
er  moEe  that  every  one  may  be  as  wild  as  he  will  (be),  id)  t^ue,  tt)a§ 
i(^  !ann  I  do  what  I  can  (do). 

2.  Very  often,  an  adverb  of  direction  with  the  auxiliary  takes 
the  place  of  an  omitted  verb  of  motion :  thus,  tt)ir  miif jen  oud) 
baran  we  mujst  also  [set]  about  it,  fie  ffinnen  nid)t  t)Dn  ber  6teEe 
they  cannot  [stir]  from  the  place,  n)ol)in  f  oEen  bie  whither  are  they 
to  [go],  ber  immer  bat)on  wolik  who  all  the  time  wanted  [to  get] 


262]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  127 

away,  er  barf  nt(i)t  toeit  genug  l^inau§  he  may  rwt  venture  [to  go] 
far  enough  out. 

3.  Other  ellipses,  of  verbs  familiarly  used  with  these,  or 
naturally  suggested  by  the  context,  are  not  infrequent :  thus, 
tua^  foH  id)  what  am  I  to  [do]  ?  U)a§  foE  biefe  Utebe  what  is  this  talk 
intended  to  [signify]  ?  bie  fal((^en  Sftinge  merben  ba§  ntd)t  fonnen 
the  false  7nngs  will  not  be  able  [to  accomplish]  that,  tiic^t  S5er= 
goIbuHQ  tDtll  man  mel^r  one  will  no  longer  [have]  gilding. 

4.  The  auxiliary  is  thus  often  left  with  an  apparent  direct 
object,  really  dependent  on  the  omitted  verb.  In  other  cases 
the  object  may  represent  the  omitted  verb — as,  ^atte  id)  nuc^  ge- 
freut,  al§  id)  e§  nod)  ionnk  had  I  enjotjed  myself  when  I  was  still 
able  to  do  so — or  be  otherwise  more  really  dependent  on  the 
auxiliary.  SBolIen  is  most  often  used  thus  as  a  proper  tran- 
sitive :  thus,  Tii(^t  er  mU  euren  Untergang  not  he  wishes  your  ruin, 
tt)a§  ®ott  getDoflt  what  God  has  willed — also,  mogen  in  the  sense 
of  like:  as,  i^  mag  i()n  nic^t  I  do  not  like  him — and  fbnnen  in  the 
sense  of  know  (a  language):  as,  fonnen  ©ie  2)cut](^  do  you  know 
German  ? 

260.  SBiffen  know,  knmu  how,  has  a  conjugation  nearly  akin 
with  that  of  the  modal  auxiliaries :  namely — 

lYes.  InMc.  meiB,  tuei^t,  \m\^,  miffcn,  tDi^t,  iDtffen. 

Pres.  Subj.  miffe,  etc. 

Pret.  Indie.  wn^k,  etc.  Pret  Subj.      toix^k,  etc. 

Past  Partic.  gett)n^t. 

[Exercise  17.    Modal  Auxiliaries.] 

OLD  OR  STRONG  CONJUGATION. 

261.  The  characteristics  of  the  Old  or  strong  con- 
jugation are  :  the  change  of  radical  vowel  in  the  pre- 
terit, and  often  in  the  past  participle  also ;  and  the 
ending  of  the  past  participle  in  en. 

With  these  are  combined  other  peculiarities  of  inflection,  of 
less  consequence,  which  will  be  found  stated  in  detail  below. 
For  the  reason  of  the  name  *'01d"  conjugation,  see  above,  246.3. 

Change  of  Badical  Vowel. 

262.  The  changes  of  radical  vowel  in  verbs  of 
the  Old  or  strong  conjugation  are,  in  general,  as  fol- 
lows : 


128  VERBS.  [262- 

1.  The  vowel  of  the  infinitive  and  that  of  the  present 
tense  (indicative  and  subjunctive)  are  always  the  same. 

But  the  vowel  of  the  present  is  sometimes  altered  in  the 
second  and  third  persons  singular  indicative :  see  below,  268. 

2.  The  vowel  of  the  preterit  is  always  different  from 
that  of  the  infinitive  and  present. 

3.  The  vowel  of  the  past  participle  is  sometimes  the 
same  with  that  of  the  infinitive  and  present,  sometimes 
the  same  with  that  of  the  preterit,  and  sometimes 
different  from  either. 

263.  According  to  the  varieties  of  this  change,  the  verbs 
are  divided  into  three  principal  classes,  each  with  several  sub- 
divisions. 

Class  I.  Verbs  whose  infinitive,  preterit,  and  participle  have 
each  a  different  vowel. 

Class  II.  Verbs  in  which  the  vowel  of  the  participle  is  the 
same  with  that  of  the  present. 

Class  III.  Verbs  in  which  the  vowel  of  the  participle  is  the 
same  with  that  of  the  preterit. 

a.  This  is  merely  a  classification  of  conyenience,  founded  upon  the 
facts  of  the  modem  language.  The  latter  have  undergone  too  great 
and  too  various  alteration  to  allow  of  our  adopting,  with  practical 
advantage,  a  more  thorough  classification,  founded  on  the  character  of 
the  original  radical  vowel,  and  the  nature  of  the  changes  it  has  suffered, 

264.  First  Class.  Verbs  whose  infinitive,  preterit,  and  par* 
ticiple  have  each  a  different  vowel. 

I.   1.   Verbs  having  the  vowels  t  —  a  —  u  in  the  three  f orm« 
specified. 
Example :  jingen  —  fang  —  Qefunaen  (sing,  sang,  sung). 
To  this  subdivision  belong  16  verbs,  all  of  them  having  roots 
ending  in  ng,  n!,  or  nb. 

2.  Vowels  i  —  a  —  o.    6  verbs :  root  ending  in  tin  or  mm. 
Example ;  fpinnen— jpann— gefponnen  (spin,  span,  spun). 

3.  Vowels  e — a — o.    22  verbs. 

Example :    bre(^en  —  brac^  —  gcbrD(f)en   (break,  brake, 
broken). 
One  verb,  Qcbarcn,  has  irregularly  d  for  e  in  the  infinitive. 


266]  OLD  OK  STRONG  CONJUGATION.  129 

4.  Vowels  i  or  te  —  a  —  e.    3  verbs. 

Examples :  fi^en  —  f a^  —  Gefeffen  (sit,  sat,  sat). 
Hepen  —  lag  —  gelegen  (lie,  lay,  lain). 

These  are  properly  verbs  belonging  to  the  first  division  of  the 
next  class,  II.  1,  but  have  their  vowel  irregularly  varied  in  the 
infinitive. 

265.  Second  Class.  Verbs  having  the  same  vowel  in  the  in- 
finitive and  participle. 

II.  1.  Vowels  c  —  a  —  e.    10  verbs. 

Example :  fe^en  —  \ai}  —  gefe^en  (see,  saw,  seen). 

Three  verbs  properly  belonging  to  this  division  have  changed 
their  vowel  to  t  or  te  in  the  infinitive,  and  thus  become  a  fourth 
division  of  the  first  class  (see  above). 

2.  Vowels  a  —  u  —  a.    10  verbs. 

Example :  jc^Iaflcn— f(^Iug— Qef (^laQcn  (slay,  slew,  slain), 

3.  Vowels  a  —  te  or  t  —  a.    16  verbs. 

Examples :  fallen  —  fiel  —  gef alien  (fall,  fell,  fallen). 

Sangen  —  l^ing  —  ge^angen    (hang,  hung, 
hung). 

4.  Vowels  an,  u,  or  o  —  te  —  an,  u,  or  o.    4  verbs. 
Examples :  laufen  —  lief  —  gelaufen  (leap)  run, 

rufen  —  rief  —  gerufen  cry. 
fto^en  —  ftie§  —  gefto^en  thrust. 

266.  Third  Class.  Verbs  having  the  same  vowel  in  the 
preterit  and  participle. 

m.  1.  Vowels  ei  —  t  —  i.    22  verbs. 

Example :  bet^en  —  bi^  —  geBifjen  (bite,  bit,  bitten). 

2.  Vowels  ei  —  te  —  te.    16  verbs. 

Example :  treiben — trieB  ^ getrieBen  (drive,  drove,  driven). 
These  two  divisions  differ  only  in  the  length  of  the  vowel  of 
the  preterit  and  participle.    One  verb,  I)et^en,  has  the  participle 
gel&ei^en  (below,  267). 

3.  Vowels  te  or  ii  —  o  —  o.    24  verbs  (only  3  with  u). 
Examples :  fliegen  —  flog  —  geflogen  (fly,  flew,  fkmn). 

liigen  —  log  —  gelogen  lie  (speak  falsely). 

4.  Vowels  au  —  o  —  o.    4  verbs. 
Example :  f augen  —  fog  —  gef ogen  suck. 


130  VEBBS.  [266- 

5.  Vowels,  t,  e,  d,  b,  or  a  —  o  —  o.    20  verbs. 
Examples :  fUmmen  —  flomm  —  geflommen  climb. 

tt)eben — toob  — geiDoben  (weave,wove,woven). 

lodgen  —  mog  —  geiDOfien  weigh. 

f(S^tr)bren  —  ](^tt)or— Qefi^tDoren  (swear,  swore, 

sworn). 
jc^allen  —  f(^oE  —  gej(i)oEen  sound. 

All  the  verbs  in  this  division  are  stragglers,  irregularly  altered 
from  other  modes  of  conjugation.  Of  those  having  e  in  the  in- 
finitive (Uke  tueben)  there  are  eleven ;  of  the  other  forms,  only- 
one,  two,  or  three  each. 

6.  Vowels  t  —  u  —  u.    2  verbs. 

Example :  f ^inben  —  f (^unb  —  gefdjunben  flay. 
These,  also,  are  stragglers,  from  I.l. 

267.  Verbs  with  irregular  change  of  vowel. 

1.  fommen  —  !am  —  gefommen  (come,  came,  come): 
an  exception  under  1.3,  the  original  vowel  of  the  infinitive  being  e. 

2.  1)i\^t\i  —  l)ie^  —  ge^et^en  he  called: 
an  exception  under  III.2,  as  noted  above. 

3.  geften  —  ging  —  gegangen  go : 

an  exception  under  II.3,  the  original  infinitive  being  gangan. 

4.  fte^en  —  ftanb  —  geftanben  stand: 

in  Old  High-German,  belonging  to  II. 2  (ftantan  —  ftuont— ftantan). 

6.  tl^un  —  tftat  —  gef^an  (do,  did,  done). 
FORMATION  AND  INFLECTION  OF  THE  SIMPLE  VERBAL  FORMS. 

268.  Present  Tense, 

The  first  person  singular  and  all  the  plural  persons 
of  the  present  indicative,  together  with  the  whole  of 
the  present  subjunctive,  are,  without  exception,  reg- 
ularly formed  (see  237),  and  need  no  remark.  But  the 
second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  indicative  are 
subject  to  various  irregularities.    -  2-"*^ 

^  Verbs  having  c  as  radical  vowel  in  the  first  person  change 
it  to  ie  or  t  in  the  second  and  third — short  e  becoming  i,  and 
long  e  becoming  te  (that  is,  long  i:  see  18) :  thus,  ^elfe,  l)tlfft,  l)i(ft; 
fte^Ie,  ftieWft,  ftiel)lt;  effen,  iffeft,  i^t;  feften,  fietift,  jiebt.    But^ 


OLD  OR  STRONG  CONJUGATION.  131 

d.  A  few  verbs  leave  the  e  unchanged :  namely,  ge^en,  [tel^en, 
l^eben,  meBen,  pfleaen,  betDegen,  melfen,  genefen  — besides  a  few 
which  here,  as  in  others  of  their  forms,  follow  the  New  or 
weak  conjugation. 

h.  Two  or  three  verbs  that  have  long  e  in  the  first  person 
shorten  it  to  i  in  the  second  and  third:  namely,  ne^men,  nimmft, 
nimmt;  treten,  trittft,  tritt.  @eben  makes  either  cicbfl,  gicBt,  or 
gibft,  gibt. 

r2r)Verbs  having  a  as  radical  vowel  in  the  first  person  modify 
it  (to  d)  in  the  second  and  third  :  thus,  trage,  trcigft,  trdgt ;  laffe, 
Id^eft,  Idfet.    But— 

a.  The  a  remains  unchanged  in  f(f)affen  and  fd)aflcn,  and  in 
other  verbs  which  substitute  in  part  the  forms  of  the  New  or 
weak  conjugation. 

3.  Saufen,  f  aufen,  and  fto^en  also  modify  the  vowel  in  the  same 
persons ;  fommen  does  so  sometimes,  but  not  according  to  the 
best  usage ;  Iof(i)en  forms  Ii](i)eft,  \\\^t 

4.  gliegen  and  about  a  dozen  other  verbs  of  its  class  (III.3) 
have  a  second  and  third  person  in  eu — as  flicge,  flcugft,  fleugt; 
liige,  leugft,  leugt — which  are  now  antiquated,  and  only  met  with 
in  archaic  and  poetic  style.  One  or  two  that  have  roots  ending 
in  ))  change  this  letter  to  cC)  after  eu. 

5.  The  tendency  to  reject  the  e  of  the  endings  eft  and  et  is 
stronger  in  these  persons  with  altered  vowel  than  anywhere  else 
in  conjugation.  The  e  of  eft  is  rarely  retained  except  after  a 
sibilant— as  in  eriifrfjcft,  Id^eft,  given  above.  The  e  of  et  is  always 
omitted,  even  when  preceded  by  t,  i^,  b ;  hence,  after  these 
letters,  the  t,  being  no  longer  audible,  is  also  dropped  in  writing. 

The  verbs  which  thus  lose  the  ending  of  the  third  pers.  sing, 
pres.  indicative  are  fed)ten,  fid)t;  berften,  birft;  flerf)ten,  flid)t; 
gelten,  gilt;  fc^eltcn,  fd)ilt;  it)crben,  toirb  ;  l^ilten,  I)dlt;  ratten  [raten], 
rdtt)  [rdt] ;  braten,  brdt ;  bieten,  beul.    Only  laben  forms  Idbt. 

^265>.    Preterit  Tense. 

I.  1.  The  preterit  indicative  is  formed  by  the  change 
of  radical  vowel  alone,  wdthout  an  added  termination, 
and  therefore  ends  in  the  final  letter  of  the  root,  what- 
ever that  may  be.     But — 

a.  A  few  roots,  ending  in  the  infinitive  with  a  double  con- 
sonant, and  lengthening  their  vowel  in  the  preterit,  reduce  the 


132  VEEBS.  [269- 

double  consonant  to  a  single  one :  namely,  f d)reden,  f (i)ra! ;  treffen, 
traf;  Bitten,  Bat;  Barfen,  But;  fd^affen,  f(^uf ;  faEen,  ftel;  fommen, 
!am. 

h.  A  few  others  (fifteen),  on  the  contrary,  shortening  their 
vowel  in  the  preterit,  double  the  following  consonant ;  and  three 
of  them,  ending  in  b,  change  it  to  tt :  namely,  kiben,  Utt ;  f (^ttei= 
ben,  f (^nitt ;  fieben,  f  ott. 

All  of  these  save  three  (triefen  and  fieben,  111.3 ;  and  faufen, 
111,4)  are  of  division  IILl :  e.  g.,  teiten,  ritt,  Qeritten  {ride,  rode, 
ridden). 

c.  More  isolated  cases  are  gie'&en,  gOQ ;  fta^en,  l^ieB  ;  ji^en,  fa^. 
For  Qel^en,  aing ;  fteften,  ftanb ;  tt)un,  t:^at,  see  267. 

2.  The  second  person  singular  strongly  inclines  to  the  abbrevi- 
ated form  of  the  ending,  [t  instead  of  eft,  and  in  ordinary  use 
rejects  the  e  except  after  a  sibilant  or  in  order  to  avoid  a  very 
harsh  combination  of  consonants. 

3.  Traces  of  an  ending  e  in  the  first  and  third  persons  are, 
very  rarely,  met  with  :  especially  f a^e,  for  f a^  saw ;  also  Bielte. 
Tor  tDurbe,  from  n)erben,  see  239.4c. 

4.  A  few  verbs  have  a  double  form  in  the  preterit,  of  which 
one  is  in  more  common  use,  the  other  archaic  or  provincial. 

But  fc^tt)or  and  f(^n)ur  are  of  nearly  equal  authority :  of  the 
others,  those  most  often  met  with  are  :^uB,  for  ;^oB  (!)eBen,  111.5), 
and  ftunb,  for  ftanb  (ftelf)en). 

This  double  form  (as  in  like  cases  in  English  :  e.  g. ,  hegan  or  'begun)  is 
due  to  the  fact  that  in  the  ancient  language  many  verbs  had  different 
vowels  in  the  singular  and  plural  of  the  preterit  indicative,  both  of 
which,  in  the  later  usage,  appear  in  either  number  of  a  few  verbs.  The 
vowel  of  the  subjunctive  preterit  agreed  with  that  of  the  indicative  plu- 
ral, not  the  singular :  whence  the  double  forms  of  the  subjunctive,  noted 
below. 

n.  {1^  The  preterit  subjunctive  is  regularly  formed 
from  tne  indicative  by  adding  e  (in  the  first  person), 
and  modifying  the  vowel,  if  the  latter  be  capable  of 
modification:  thus,  jang,  ftingc;  \a\),  fdt)e;  fdjlug,  fdjliige; 
fiel,  fiele;  flog,  floge;  fd}tt)or  or  fdj^itr,  f(^ti:)ore  or  fc^tDiire; 
t^at,  tl)ate.    But— 

a.  Some  verbs  have  a  double  form  of  the  subjunctive,  of 
which  one  differs  in  vowel  from  the  indicative :  thus,  all  in  divis- 
ion 1.2  have  a  second  in  d— e.  g.,  fpann,  fpdnne  or  fpbnne— which 


271]  OLD  OE   STEONG  CONJUGATION.  133 

is  as  common  as  that  in  a,  or  more  so  ;  and  others  (especially 
in  1.3)  have  second  forms  in  5  or  ii :  e.  g.,  gait,  Qdlte  or  golte,  \Daxh, 
tt)arbe  or  rvixxht ;  the  latter  being  the  preferred  one,  probably  as 
better  distinguished  from  the  present  gelte,  tDerBc,  etc.  All  that 
have  two  indicative  forms  have  the  two  corresponding  sub- 
junctives :  thus,  ftcinbe  and  pnbe,  pBe  and  pbe. 

270.  Imperative. 

1.  The  imperative  singular  regularly  ends  in  e,  the  plural  in  et 
or  t,  adding  those  endings  respectively  to  the  root  of  the  verb 
as  shown  in  the  infinitive :  thus,  fingen,  fittGC ;  f(f)Iagen,  ](!)IaGe ; 
rufcn,  rufe ;  fommen,  fomme ;  Qcften,  ge^e.    But— 

2.  Verbs  which  in  the  second  pers.  sing,  of  the  pres.  indicative 
change  e  to  i  or  ie  (268.1)  take  the  latter  also  in  the  imperative 
singular  (not  in  the  plural) — at  the  same  time  rejecting  the  e  of 
the  ending. 

Thus,  l^elfen,  l^ilf ;  fte^len,  ftiel)l;  effen,  i^;  fe^en,  fie"^. 

a.  So,  also,  verbs  that  have  an  archaic  second  person  in  eu 
(268.4)  have  a  corresponding  archaic  imperative :  thus,  fliegen, 
fliege  or  fleug.  (Jrlojc|en  (268.3)  forms  erUf(^.  But  verbs  that 
modify  a,  an,  o  to  d,  du,  o  (268.2,3)  retain  in  the  imperative  the 
unchanged  vowel  and  the  ending:  thus,  tragen,  Irage;  laufeti, 
laufc ;  fto^en,  fto^e. 

6.  Exceptions  are:  mxhtn  (tuirft)  has  iDerbe;  feT^en  (fte!)ft)  has 
either  jie!)e  or  fie:^. 

3.  The  e  of  the  singular  ending  is  dropped  much  more  freely 
in  the  other  verbs  of  this  than  in  those  of  the  New  conjugation, 
and  in  some — as  fomm,  la^ — is  almost  never  used. 

271.  Past  Participle. 

1.  The  ending  of  the  participle  is  en. 

The  e  of  the  ending  is  ordinarily  retained  in  all  cases,  but  may 
be  occasionally  dropped,  especially  after  a  vowel  or  )):  thus, 
gefet)en  or  geje^^n.  When,  however,  the  participle  is  used  as  an 
adjective  and  declined,  it  is  subject  to  the  same  abbreviation  as 
other  adjectives  ending  in  en  (120.3) :  thus,  t)crgangner  ^age  of 
past  days,  t)erf  (!)tt)unbncr  ^rac^t  of  vanished  splendor. 

2.  A  number  of  participles  share  in  the  irregular  changes  of 
a  final  radical  consonant  exhibited  by  the  preterit :  namely — 

a.  All  those  that  shorten  in  the  preterit  the  vowel  of  the  infin- 
itive (269.1.15):  thus,  reiten,  ritt,  gerittenj  leiben,  lilt,  gelitten  j 
faufen,  foff,  gefoffen. 


134  YEKBS.  [271- 

6.  Of  those  that  lengthen  the  vowel  (269.1.1a),  only  one, 
namely  Bitten,  hat,  Qebeten ;— but  treffen,  traf,  Qetroffen ;  f aflen,  fiel, 
QcfaHen,  etc. 

c.  Also,  gteften  (gog),  gegocen;  ji^en  (fa^),  oefeffen;  ge^en  (ginQ), 
Qegangen;  fte^^en  (ftanb),  geftanben;  iftun  (t^at),  gctftan. 

3.  (Jffen  eat  has  the  prefix  twice :  thus,  Qegeffen  (geffen  from 
Qe=effen,  and  gc  again  prefixed). 

272.    Mixed  Conjugation. 

The  same  tendency  which  has  converted  a  large  number  of 
the  "irregular"  verbs  in  English  into  "regular"  has  been  active, 
though  to  a  much  less  degree,  in  German  also.  Besides  those 
verbs  which  have  entirely  changed  their  mode  of  infiection,  and 
therefore  no  longer  require  to  be  made  any  account  of  under 
the  Old  or  strong  conjugation,  there  are  others  which  form  a 
part  of  their  inflection  by  the  one  method  and  a  part  by  the 
other,  or  which  have  equivalent  forms  of  either  conjugation. 
Thus, 

1.  Some  have  a  double  series  of  forms  through  the  whole  or 
nearly  the  whole  conjugation :  the  forms  of  the  Old  conjugation 
being  then  either  poetic  and  unusual  (as  in  xa^m),.or  else 
belonging  to  the  verb  in  certain  special  meanings  (as  in  tDtegen) 
or  in  its  transitive  use  (as  in  bleirf)en). 

2.  Some  have  certain  forms  of  either  conjugation — especially 
the  second  and  third  pers.  ind.  present  and  second  sing, 
imperative,  with  differences  of  use  as  above  stated  ;  most  often 
with  intransitive  meaning  for  the  Old  forms :  such  are  jc^rerfeit/ 
Dcrberben,  fieben,  lofd)en,  fd^mclgen,  fdjtrenen,  and  others. 

3.  Some  have  retained  only  a  participle  of  the  Old  conju- 
gation; and  even  that  in  special  uses  or  connections.  The 
participle  is  in  general  the  form  that  has  maintained  itself  most 
persistently. 

These  irregularities,  as  well  as  those  which  are  explained  in 
more  detail  above,  are  exhibited  in  a  table  of  irregulak  verbs, 
given  on  pp.  278-284 

^^73))  Examples  of  Verbs  of  the  Old  or  Strong  Conjuga- 
tion. 

S3inbcn  (1.1).  ^ommen  (267.1). 

Principal  Parts. 

Mrtbcn,  banb,  geBunben,  fpmmen,  !am,  gefommen, 


273] 


OLD  OR  STEONG  CONJUGATION. 


135 


Indicativk  *^ 

Peesent,  I  bind  etc. 

I  come  etc. 

s.  I  buibe 

fomme 

2  binbeft 

3  binbet 

tommft 
fommt 

p.  I  binben 

fommen 

2  binbet 

fommt 

3  btnben 

fommen 

Pbeteutt,  I  hound  eta. 

I  came  etc. 

s.  I  banb 

fam^ 

2  banbft 

3  banb 

famft 
fam 

p.  I  banben 

famen 

2  banbet 

famt 

3  banben 

famen 

Peefect,  J/iave6oMndetc. 

I  have  c(yme  etc. 

s.  I  fiaU  gebnnben 

etc. 

bin  gefommen 

etc. 

Plupeefect,  I  had  hound  etc. 

I  had  come  etc. 

s.  I  5atte  Qebunben 

etc. 

mar  gefommen ' 

etc. 

Futuee,  I  shall  bind  etc. 

I  shall  come  etc. 

s.  I  tt)erbe  binben 

merbe  fommen 

etc. 

etc. 

FxjT.  Peef.,  I  shall  have  bound  etc. 

I  shall  have  come  etc. 

s.  I  mxht  gebunben  ftaben 

etc. 

merbe  gefommen  fein 

etc. 

Subjunctive. 

Peesent,  I  may  bind  etc. 

I  may  come  etc 

s.  I  binbe 

fomme 

2  binbeft 

3  binbe 

fommeft 
fomme 

p.  I  binben 

fommen 

2  binbet 

fommet 

3  binben 

fommen 

136 


YERBS. 


[273- 


Peeteeit,  I  might  bind  etc. 

I  might  come  etc. 

s.  I  banbe 

!dme 

2  bdnbeft 

3  bdnbe 

fdmeft 
fame 

p.  I  bdnben 

fdmen 

2  bdnbet 

fdmet 

3  bdnben 

fdmen 

Peefect,  I  may  have  b<mnd  etc. 

I  may  have  come  etc. 

s.  I  l^abe  gebunben 

etc. 

fei  gefommen 

etc. 

Plupeef.,  I  might  have  hound  etc. 

I  might  have  come  etc 

s.  I  l^dtte  Qebunben 

etc. 

tDdre  gefommen 

etc. 

FuTiJEE,  I  shall  bind  etc.] 

I  shall  come  etc. 

s.  I  tperbe  btnben 

toerbe  fommen 

etc. 

etc. 

FxjT.  Peef.,  I  shall  have  hound  etc. 

I  shall  Imve  come  etc. 

s.  I  tuerbe  Qebunben  l^aben 

etc 

merbe  gefommen  fein 

etc. 

Conditional. 

Conditional,  1  should  bind  etc. 

I  should  come  etc. 

s.  I  tt)urbe  binben 

tt)urbe  fommen 

etc. 

etc. 

CoND.  Peef.  I  should  have  hound  etc. 

I  should  have  come  e\ 

s.  I  ttjiirbe  gebunben  l^aben 

etc. 

tDiirbe  gefommen  fein 

etc. 

Imperativk 

bind  etc. 

come  etc. 

s.  2  binbc 

fomme,  fomm 

3  binbe  er 

fomme  er 

p.  I  binben  tt)tr 

fommen  ton 

2  btnbet 

fommt 

3  binben  fie 

fommen  fie 

276]  PASSIVE.  137 

Inhnitive. 
Present,  io  hind  to  come 

binben  fommcn 

Peefect,  to  have  hound  io  have  come 

flcbunbcn  \jabtn  Qefommen  fein 

Pabticiples. 
Pbesent,  hinding  coming 

Binbenb  fommcnb 

Past,  hound  come 

oebunbcn  gcfommcn 

[Exercise  18.    Yekbs  of  the  Old  or  Strong  Conjugation.] 
PASSIVE  VEKBS. 

274.  The  passive  voice  is  a  derivative  conjugation  of 
a  transitive  verb,  in  which  that  person  or  thing  which 
in  the  simple  conjugation  is  the  object  of  the  transitive 
action  becomes  a  subject  of  the  suffering  of  that  action : 
thus,  active,  ber  §unb  bi§  ben  Snaben  the  dog  bit  the  hoy  ; 
passive,  ber  Slnabe  tDurbe  Horn  §nnbe  gebtffen  the  boy  was 
bitten  by  the  dog. 

a.  That  a  kind  of  passive  is  also  formed  from  some  intran- 
sitive verbs  is  pointed  out  below  (279.2,3). 

b.  The  passive  is  mainly  a  grammatical  device  for  directing 
the  principal  attention  to  the  recipient  of  the  action,  and  the 
action  as  affecting  him,  and  putting  the  actor  in  a  subordinate 
position. 

275.  The  German  passive,  like  the  English,  is 
formed  by  the  aid  of  an  auxiliary  verb — but  by  a 
different  one,  namely  the  verb  tDer ben  become. 

276.  1.  To  form  the  passive  of  any  verb,  its  past  participle 
is  combined  with  iDerben,  throughout  the  whole  conjugation  of 
the  latter.    In  this  combination — 

a.  The  past  participle  of  the  auxihary,  wherever  it  occurs,  is 
abbreviated  from  getoorben  to  worbcn. 

h.  The  participle  of  the  main  verb  is  put  after  the  proper 
verbal  forms  (simple  tenses)  of  the  auxiUary,  but  before  its  in- 
finitives or  participles. 


138 


VERBS. 


[276- 


This  is  in  accordance  with  the  general  rule  for  the  position 
of  any  word  limiting  an  infinitive  or  participle:  see  below, 
348.2,  358. 

2.  Hence,  to  produce  any  given  person,  tense,  and 
mode  of  the  passive  of  a  verb,  combine  its  past  parti- 
ciple with  the  corresponding  person,  tense,  and  mode  of 
tperben. 

277.  Synopsis  of  the  Forms  of  tuerben  and  of  a  Pas- 
sive Verb, 

Indicative. 


Peesent,  I  become  etc. 
s.  I  merbe 

Peetebit,  I  became  etc. 
s.  I  tt)arb,  iDurbe 

Peepect,  I  have  become  etc. 
s.  I  Bin  getDorben 

Plupeefect,  Ihad  become  etc. 
s.  I  \oax  Qeraorben 

FuT¥EE,  IshaU  become  etc. 
s.  I  tDcrbe  tuerben 

Fur.  Peef.,  I  shall  have  become  etc. 
s.  I  tDcrbe  Qemorben  fein 


I  am  loved  eto, 
tt)crbe  fleltebt 
I  loas  loved  eto. 

ttjarb,  tDurbe  gelicBt 

I  have  been  loved  etc. 
Bin  geliebt  iDorben 

IJiad  been  loved  etc. 
xoax  gelieBt  morben 

I  shall  be  loved  etc. 
tt)erbe  geliebt  merben 

I  shall  have  been  loved  etc. 
iDcrbe  geliebt  ttjorben  fcin 


Subjunctive. 


Peesent,  Imay  become  etc. 
s.  I  merbe 


Peeteeit,  I  migM  become  eiXi. 
s.  I  wiirbe 

Pbefect,  Iwxiy  have  become  etc. 
s.  I  fei  gett)orben 

Plupeefect,  I  might  have  become  etc. 

s.  I  mare  gen)orben 

FuTUEE,  I  shall  become  etc. 
s.  I  merbe  merben 
FuT.  Peef.,  IshaU  have  become  etc. 

s.  I  tperbe  geiDorben  fein 


I  mxiy  be  loved  etc. 
tt)erbe  geliebt 

I  might  be  loved  etc. 
njiirbe  geliebt 

I  may  have  been  loved  etc. 
fei  geliebt  tt)orben 

I  might  have  been  loved  etc. 
tt)are  geliebt  ttiorben 

I  shall  be  loved  etc. 
tt)erbe  geliebt  ii^erben 

I  shall  have  been  loved  etc. 

tt)erbc  geliebt  toorben  fein 


279]  PASSIVE.  139 

Conditional. 
CoNDiTioNAii,  I  should  hecome  etc.  I  should  be  loved  etc. 

s.  I  miirbe  trerben  miirbe  Gdiebt  iDerben 

CoND.  Peef.,  I  should  have  hecome  etc.  I  should  have  been  loved  etc. 

s.  I  tDiirbe  fletDorben  jein  njiirbc  geliebt  toorben  fein 

Imperative. 
become  etc.  be  loved  etc. 

s.  2  tDcrbe  toerbe  gelieBt 

Infinitives. 
Peesent,  to  become  to  be  loved 

tuerben  geUeBt  tDerben 

Peefect,  to  have  become  to  have  been  loved 

QctDorben  fein  geliebt  tDorben  jein 

Participles. 
Peesent,  becoming  being  loved 

trerbenb  geliebt  tDerbenb 

Past,  become  been  loved 

getDorbcn  Gcltebt  toorben 

Bemark :  geliebt  tt)orben  is  used  only  in  formiag  the  compound 
tenses,  since  the  past  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  has  by  itself 
a  passive  value. 

278.  The  passive  voice  of  a  transitive  verb  has  one  peculiar 
form,  a  kind  ot  future  passive  participle,  formed  from  the  pres- 
ent active  participle,  by  putting  ju  before  it:  thus,  gu  lieBenb. 
It  implies  a  possibility  or  a  necessity:  thus,  ein  gu  Iie6enbe§  ^inb 
a  child  to  be  loved — i.  e.,  which  may  or  should  he  loved.  It  can 
only  be  used  as  an  attributive  adjective,  and  therefore  hardly 
deserves  to  be  called  a  participle. 

a.  It  is  in  reality  a  quite  modern  and  anomalous  derivative 
from  an  infinitive,  answering  attributively  to  the  infinitive  with 
3U  taken  predicatively  (343.in.l&) :  as,  ba§  ^inb  ift  gu  Ueben  tJw 
child  is  to  he  loved — i.  e.,  may  or  should  be  loved. 

279.  1.  Transitive  verbs,  with  hardly  an  exception,  may  form 
a  passive  voice,  with  a  complete  scheme  of  conjugation,  as  given 
above. 

§aben  have  is  not  used  in  the  passive. 


140  VERBS.  [279- 

2.  Many  intransitives  (especially  such  as  denote  a  mode  of 
action  by  a  person)  may  form  an  impersonal  passive — that  is,  a 
passive  third  person  singular,  with  indefinite  subject  e§,  or  with 
omitted  subject  (291). 

Thus,  e§  tDurbc  geia(^t  utib  gefunfien  there  was  laughing  and 
singing,  urn  ^ntttjort  tt)irb  Qcbeten  an  answer  is  requested. 

a.  These  passives  do  not  represent  any  subject  as  suffering 
an  action,  but  simply  represent  the  action,  without  reference  to 
an  actor. 

3.  Those  intransitives  which,  by  a  pregnant  construction 
(227.2?>),  govern  an  accusative  along  with  a  factitive  predicate, 
are  also  convertible  into  passives  in  corresponding  phrases: 
thus,  fie  tDerben  aw^  bem  <5(i)lafe  gejc^rieen  they  are  screamed  out 
of  sleep,  er  tDurbe  frei  Qcfpro^en  he  was  acquitted  (declared  free). 

280.  1.  Verbs  which  govern  two  accusatives  (227.3),  except 
le^retl,  take  in  the  passive  the  second  accusative,  either  as  ob- 
ject (fragen,  etc.),  or  as  predicate  nominative  (nennen,  etc.). 

2.  Transitive  verbs  which,  in  addition  to  their  direct  object, 
govern  a  genitive  (219.2)  or  a  dative  (222.1.1),  retain  the  latter 
along  with  the  passive :  thus,  ber  Wiener  tDurbe  be§  2)ieBfta^I§ 
anQcflaflt  the  servant  was  accused  of  robbery,  afle§  tt)irb  einem 
greunbc  erIauBt  everything  is  permitted  to  a  friend. 

3.  Of  the  intransitives  that  form  an  impersonal  passive,  such 
as  govern  a  genitive  or  dative  take  the  same  case  in  the  pas- 
sive :  thus,  e§  tDirb  melner  gefc^ont  lam  spared,  i^m  tt)urbe  gejolfen 
lie  was  helped. 

281.  The  passive  is  veiy  much  less  frequently  used  in 
German  than  in  English,  being  replaced  by  other  modes  of 
speech.  Sometimes  a  full  active  expression,  with  subject  and 
object,  is  employed  instead.  Most  often,  the  intent  of  the  pas- 
sive form  of  speech  is  attained  by  using  an  active  verb  with  the 
indefinite  subject  man  one,  etc.  (185.) :  thus,  man  fagt  it  is  said, 
ein  ^efe^,  tDcltfie^  man  erlie^  a  laic  which  was  passed.  Not  infre- 
quently, a  reflexive  phrase  is  substituted,  the  return  of  the 
action  upon  the  subject  being  accepted  as  signifying  the  latter's 
endurance  of  the  action :  thus,  e§  f ragt  fi(f)  it  is  questioned  (asks 
itself),  ber  ©diliifjel  fiat  fic^  gefunben  the  key  has  been  found. 

282.  1.  By  its  use  of  tuerben  become  instead  of  fctn  he  as  auxiliary 
forming  the  passive,  the  German  is  able  clearly  to  distinguish  between 
the  actual  endurance  of  an  action,  and  existence  in  a  state  wtiieh  is  the 


283]  EEFLEXIVES.  141 

result  of  such  action.  Thus,  alle  genfter  tt)erben  nadj  unb  na(^  mit 
jteppid^en  be^cingt  all  windows  are  hy  degrees  hung  with  tapestry,  and  rt)ie 
atte  ^enftei*  mit  Xeppic^en  bepugt  finb  as  all  the  windows  are  hung  with 
tapestry;  elugelaben  wiirben  fie  they  were  invited,  and  eingetaben  fmbfieatt' 
they  are  all  invited— the  latter  phrases,  in  either  pair,  signifying  the  con- 
dition to  which  the  act  described  by  the  former  led.  As  we  use  the  same 
verb,  he,  in  both  senses,  of  copula  and  of  passive  auxiliary  (accepting 
the  simple  statement  of  the  resulting  condition  as  sufficiently  implying 
the  suffering  of  the  action),  our  expression  is  liable  to  ambiguity— an 
ambiguity  which  we  are  sometimes  forced  into  removing  by  the  use  of 
the  phrase  he  heing:  thus  distinguishing  it  is  being  cleaned  (eg  n)irb 
gereinigt)  from  it  is  cleaned  (eg  ift  gereinigt).  And  our  sense  of  the 
distinction  is  so  obscured  that  the  English  pupil  finds  it  one  of  his 
greatest  difficulties  to  know  when  to  translate  to  he  before  a  participle  by 
fein,  and  when  by  luerben.  Only  assiduous  practice  in  noting  the  distinc- 
tion as  made  in  German  will  remove  this  difficulty.  A  practical  rule 
which  will  answer  in  a  great  number  of  cases  is  this  :  if,  on  turning  the 
expression  into  an  active  form,  the  sam;e  tense  (pres.  or  pret.)  is  required, 
it  was  passive  and  requires  iuevbeit ;  if  the  tense  has  to  be  changed  to  a 
perfect  (perf.  or  plup.),  fein  is  the  proper  word.  Thus  they  were  invited 
is  fie  ttjurben  eingelaben  when  it  means  /  invited  them,  but  fie  njaren  ein= 
getaben  when  it  means  I  had  invited  them;  and  fmb  is  used  in  eingelaben 
finb  fie  aWf  because  it  means  I  have  invited  them. 

2.  The  German  itself  sometimes  loosely  accepts  the  statement  of  con- 
dition, with  the  pres.  or  pret.  of  fein,  in  Meu  of  the  full  passive  ex- 
pression in  perf.  or  pluperfect.  Thus,  ber  ^ifc&  Wax  gefangen  the  fish  had 
heen  caught  (for  wax  gefangen  morben),  fie  ift  ermorbet  auf  ber  £onbner 
©tra^e  she  has  heen  murdered,  in  London  street. 

REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

283.  A  reflexive  verb  is  one  that  represents  the 
action  as  exerted  by  the  subject  upon  itself. 

1.  Such  verbs  are  formally  transitive,  since  they  take  an 
object  in  the  accusative;  they  all,  then,  take  l^aBen  as  their 
auxiliary. 

2.  Logically,  or  according  to  their  real  meaning,  they  are 
rather  to  be  regarded  as  intransitive,  since  they  do  not  signify 
an  action  exerted  by  the  subject  upon  any  object  outside  of 
itself :  thus,  \^  f iirc^te  mic^  (literally  I  frighten  myself)  I  am 
afraid  is  in  idea  as  much  intransitive  as  i(^  gittere  I  tremble. 
And,  as  noticed  above  (281),  a  reflexive  verb  is  often  used  even 
in  a  passive  sense,  the  idea  of  the  endurance  of  the  action  on 
the  part  of  the  subject  being  more  conspicuous  to  the  mind 
than  that  of  its  exertion  of  the  action. 


142 


VERBS. 


[284- 


284.  Such  a  verb,  therefore,  takes  as  its  object  a  re- 
flexive pronoun,  of  the  same  person  and  number  with 
its  subject. 

1.  The  reflexive  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are 
the  same  as  the  personal ;  that  of  the  third  person  is  fi(^,  in 
both  numbers  (155). 

2.  The  reflexive  pronoun  is  placed  where  any  other  pronoun 
would  be  placed  as  object  of  the  verb  :  namely,  after  the  verb 
In  the  simple  tenses,  but  before  the  infinitives  and  participles. 

285.  Conjugation  of  a  Reflexive  Verb. 

©td^  freuen  to  rejoice  (rejoice  or  gladden  one's  self). 

Principal  Parts. 
©ic^  freuen,  freute  fic^,  gefreut. 


Indicative. 


s.  I  \^  frcuc  mi(^ 

2  bu  freueft  hi^ 

3  er  freut  \\^ 

p.  I  h)ir  freuen  un§ 

2  i:^r  freut  eu(^ 

3  fie  freuen  fief) 


s.  I  t^  freute  m\^ 

etc. 


Peesent. 


S.  I 


x6)  5a'6e  mtc^  fiefreut 
bu  ^aft  bt(^  gefreut 
er  ):jat  fie!)  gefreut 
tt)ir  ftaben  un§  gefreut 
iftr  !)abt  eu(^  gefreut 
fie  l^oben  \x^  gefreut 


s.  I  \6)  l^attc  mi(^  gefreut 

etc. 

s.  I  x$)  merbc  m\^  freuen 

2  bu  iDirft  bi(^  freuen 

3  er  tt)irb  \\(i)  freuen 


Peeteeit. 


Peefect. 


PliUPEEFECT. 


Subjunctive. 

i(^  freue  mid^ 
bu  freueft  h\^ 
er  freue  fid^ 
n)ir  freuen  un§ 
i'^r  freuet  eud^ 
fie  freuen  fid^ 

id^  freute  mid^ 

etc. 

x^  l)aht  mx^  gefreut 
bu  ^abeft  bid^  gefreut 
er  ):jahz  fic^  gefreut 
tt)ir  l^aben  un§  gefreut 
i^r  fjobtt  eud^  gefreut 
fie  IjaUn  fid)  gefreut 

x^  ^dtte  mid^  gefreut 

etc. 


FUTUEE. 


id^  tt)erbe  mid^  freuen 
bu  tt)erbeft  btd^  freuen 
er  ttjerbe  fid^  freuen 


286]  EEFLEXIYES.  143 

P.  I  njtr  tuerben  un§  freuen  ton  tDcrben  un§  freuen 

2  i^r  merbet  eu(f)  freuen  \t\x  tuerbet  eu(!)  freuen 

3  fie  n)erben  fid)  freuen  fie  tt)erben  fi^  freuen 

FUTUEE  PeEFECT. 

s.  I  \6)  merbe  mic^  gefreut  ftaben  td^  tDerbc  mid)  gefreut  5aBen 

etc.  etc. 

'    Conditional. 
CoNDinoNAii.  CoNDinoNAii  Peefect, 

s.  I  ic^  n)iirbe  mi(f)  freuen  id)  tDiirbe  mid)  gefreut  :^aben 

etc.  etc. 

Imperative. 

SiNQTJIiAR.  PLUEAIi, 

1  freuen  mx  un§ 

2  freue  bi^,  freue  bu  hx^  freut  eud^,  freut  \^x  tu(i) 

3  freue  er  \x^  freuen  fie  fid) 

Infinitive. 
Present.  Peefect. 

fi^  freuen  fn^  gefreut  5aBcn 

Participles. 
Peesent.  Past. 

fi(^  freuenb  fic^  gefreut 

Bemarks.  1.  The  reflexive  pronoun  is  not  given  with  the 
participle  in  the  principal  parts,  since,  that  participle  being  in 
transitive  verbs  of  a  passive  character,  it  can  take  no  object 
except  as  used  with  an  auxiliary  in  forming  the  compound 
tenses. 

2.  The  fid)  given  with  the  infinitives  and  participles  is,  of 
course,  only  representative  of  the  whole  body  of  reflexive 
pronouns,  with  all  of  which  those  forms,  not  being  restricted 
to  any  one  person  or  number,  may  be  construed. 

286.  Any  transitive  verb  in  the  language  may  be 
used  refiexively,  or  take  a  reflexive  pronoun  as  object ; 
but  none  are  properly  regarded  as  reflexive  verbs 
except — 

1.  Those  which  are  only  used  with  a  reflexive  object:  as, 
fi(^  f(^dmen  be  ashamed,  \\6)  fe'^nen  long,  fief)  vrjiherfefeen  resist. 


144  VERBS.  [286- 

2.  Those  which  are  usually  or  often  used  reflexively,  and 
have  a  special  meaning  in  that  use,  the  object  not  maintaining 
its  independence,  but  combining  with  the  verb  to  form  a  single 
conception,  the  equivalent  of  an  intransitive  verb  :  as,  |i(^  l^iiten 
beware  (i)uten  guard),  fid^  fteEen  make  believe,  pretend  (fteHen 
plme),  fid^  uerlaffen  rely  (t)erlaffen  quit). 

287.  1.  A  reflexive  verb  is  thus  often  related  to  the  simple 
verb  as  a  corresponding  intransitive  to  a  transitive — thus, 
freuen  give  pleasure  to,  \x^  ^xzutn  feel  pleasure,  fiir^ten  fear,  \i^ 
furd)tcn  be  afraid.    But — 

2.  A  few  are  intransitive,  and  of  nearly  the  same  meaning,  both 
as  simple  verbs  and  as  reflexives  :  thus,  irren  and  fi(^  irren  be 
mistaken,  nal^en  and  fid)  na^en  draw  nigh,  ganfen  and  \\^  janfen 
quarrel. 

288.  1.  An  intransitive  verb  is  much  more  often  used  tran- 
sitively (227.26)  with  a  reflexive  object  than  with  one  of  another 
character :  thus,  er  arbeitet  unb  Iduft  fid^  tobt  [tot]  he  works  and  runs 
himself  to  death,  bu  follft  bid^  einmal  fait  effen  thou  shalt  eat  thyself 
full  fUt.  satisfied)  for  once. 

2.  An  intransitive  reflexive  is  sometimes  used  impersonally 
instead  of  an  intransitive  passive  (279.2),  especially  with  adverbs 
of  manner,  to  express  the  action  itself,  without  reference  to  a 
subject :  thus,  e§  tangt  fic^  Vxtx  gut  it  is  good  dancing  here,  lebl&aft 
Irdumt  fici^'»  unter  biefem  ^aum  it  is  lively  dreaming  under  this 
tree,  e§  ficl^t  fi(^  gar  artig  in  hk  Rni!\6)tn  t)\ntm  it  is  very  pretty 
looking  into  the  carriages. 

289.  1.  A  considerable  number  of  reflexive  verbs  take  an 
additional  remoter  object  (not  personal)  in  the  genitive  (219.3). 

a.  The  construction  of  a  reflexive  verb  with  the  genitive  is 
notably  easier  than  of  the  same  verb  used  otherwise  than 
reflexively— thus,  id)  erinnere  m\^  meineS  S5erge!^en§  I  remember 
(remind  myself  of  )  my  fault,  but  \^  erinnere  \i)n  an  fein  SSergel^en 
I  remind  him  of  his  fault — ^yet  many  of  these  also  frequently 
make  their  construction  by  the  aid  of  a  preposition,  and  many 
others  admit  only  a  prepositional  construction :  thus,  \^  jjer* 
laffe  mi(^  auf  il^n  I  rely  on  him. 

2.  Only  two  or  three  reflexives  take  a  remoter  object  in  the 
dative :  such  are  \\^  nafjtn  approach,  fid)  toiberfefeen  oppose,  fic^ 
bequemen  submit. 


292j  IMPERSONALS.  145 

290.  A  small  number  of  verbs  are  used  with  a  reflexive  ob- 
ject in  the  dative,  in  a  manner  quite  analogous  with  the  true 
reflexive  verbs,  and  therefore  form  a  class  of  improper  reflex- 
ives. 

a.  Most  of  these  require  in  addition  a  direct  object  in  the  ac- 
cusative :  thus,  \6)  ma^e  mir  fein  Utirec^t  an  /  make  no  unjust 
claim,  \^  bilbc  miu  ba§  nic^t  ein  I(3U)  not  imagine  that,  bu  getraueft 
^ir  t)iel  thou  darest  much.  But  ]i^  fd^meic^eln  flatter  one's  self 
is  intransitive. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

291.  1.  An  impersonal  verb,  or  a  verb  used  imperson- 
ally, is  one  by  means  of  whicli  the  action  implied  in  the 
verb  is  represented  as  exerted,  without  reference  to  a 
subject  or  actor. 

2.  Such  a  verb  stands  always  in  the  third  person 
singular,  and  either  without  a  subject,  or,  more  usually, 
with  the  indefinite  subject  e^  it. 

Thus,  e§  reflnet  it  rains,  i.  e.  there  is  rain  falling;  e§  flopft  it 
knocks,  i.  e.  there  is  a  knocking;  am  ^angeg  buftet'^  unb  Ieu(i)tef  § 
on  the  Ganges  are  sweet  odors  and  shining  sights;  mict)  biiuft  me 
seems,  I  e.  it  seems  to  me;  \t)n  ^ungerte  him  hungered,  i.  e.  he  was 
hungry  (227.2c). 

292.  No  verbs  in  German  are  absolutely  and  ex- 
clusively impersonal :  verbs  impersonally  used  may  be 
classified  as  follows : 

1.  Verbs  describing  the  phenomena  of  nature,  which  are 
almost  invariably  impersonal  in  virtue  of  their  meaning :  thus, 
e§  ftaQelt  it  hails,  e§  ^ai  aef c^neit  it  has  snowed,  es  tt)irb  bonnern  unb 
Bli^en  it  will  thunder  and  lighten. 

2.  Certain  verbs  which  by  the  idiom  of  the  language  are  ordi- 
narily used  in  an  impersonal  form:  as,  biinfen  and  bdud^ten 
[beui^ten]  seem,  geliiften  desire,  Qelingen  v^ove  successful;  and  a 
number  of  verbs  signifying  personal  conditions  and  feelings,  as 
l^ungern  hunger,  biirflen  thirst,  frieren  freeze,  fd^minbeln  be  giddy, 
Qrauen  he  horror-struck,  etc. 

a.  All  this  class  of  impersonals  take  an  object  designating  the 
person  affected  by  their  action,  or  the  subject  of  the  feeling  or 
condition  they  describe:  some  take  an  accusative,  others  a 
dative,  others  either  an  accusative  or  dative  (222.n.le ;  227.2c) ; 


146  VERBS.  [292- 

thus,  mid)  oeliiftete  md)t  nac^  bem  t^euren  [teuren]  So'^n  I  should 
not  long  for  the  costly  prize,  biirftet  beinen  Seinb,  fo  trdnfe  iftn  if 
thine  enemy  is  thirsty,  give  him  to  drink,  mir  Qrauet  t)or  ber  (Spotter 
5fleibe  I  dread  the  envy  of  the  gods,  e§  biinft  mir  or  mid)  it  seems 
to  me.    ' 

3.  Almost  any  verb,  transitive  or  intransitive,  is  liable  to  oc- 
cur in  impersonal  use — if  transitive,  along  with  its  ordinary 
object. 

Thus,  mie  fteftfg  mit  ben  ^ottern  Jiow  fares  it  with  the  gods? 
crQe!)f^  eu(^  tt)olf)(  if  it  goes  well  with  you,  eg  fetjlte  an  C)oIa  there 
was  lack  of  wood,  pibfeltd)  regt  eg  fic^  im  Utofire  suddenly  there  is  a 
stir  in  the  reeds,  eg  treibt  il^n  ben  ^reig  gu  eriDerben  he  is  impelled 
to  gain  the  prize,  eg  erf  orbert  eine  ^re^ung  it  requires  a  turning, 
eg  bebarf  ber  ^nna^me  nic^t  it  needs  not  the  assumption. 

a.  The  very  common  use  of  eg  giebt  it  gives  (i.  e.  there  are  given 
or  furnished),  in  the  sense  of  there  is  or  are,  with  following  ac- 
cusative, requires  special  notice :  thus,  'ta  Qdb  eg  ©c^aufelflii^Ic 
there  were  rocking-chairs  there,  eg  giebt  t)iele,  bie  alter  finb,  there 
are  many  who  are  older,  "iid)^  eg  meniger  S()riften  gdbe  alg  6aracenen 
that  there  were  fewer  Cliristians  than  Saracens. 

4.  Impersonal  phrases  formed  with  the  verbs  jein  and  merben 
along  with  adverbial  of  adjective  adjuncts,  describing  personal 
conditions  or  states  of  feeling,  and  always  accompanied  by  a 
dative  designating  the  person  to  whom  such  conditions  belong, 
are  very  frequent. 

Thus,  mir  ift  gang  anberg  i\\  ^O^ufft  [^ut]  I  feel  quite  otherwise 
(it  is  to  me  quite  otherwise  in  mind),  il^m  Xoai  jo  bange  he  was  so 
apprehensive,  mie  mir  tt)ol^I  ift  how  well  I  feel!  mie  ift  mir  benn 
Iww  is  it  with  me  then  ? — nun  tt)irb  mir  immer  bdnger  now  I  grow 
more  and  more  anxious,  mie  n)e^  tDirb  mir  how  I  am  beginning  to 
suffer !  je  falter  eg  ift,  befto  l^ei^er  tt)irb  mir  the  colder  it  is,  the  Jwtter 
I  become,  [{^m.  iff  g,  alg  ob'g  ^n  l^iniiberrief  he  feels  as  if  he  were 
invited  across. 

5.  Impersonal  expressions  are  often  made  from  intransitive 
verbs  in  a  passive  or  reflexive  form  (see  279.2,  288.2). 

Thus,  l)eute  ^benb  tt)irb  getanat  n)erben  there  will  be  dancing  this 
evening,  eg  fifet  fi(^  fd)Ie(^t  l^ier  it  is  disagreeable  sitting  here. 

293.  The  impersonal  subject  eg  is  (as  is  abundantly  shown 
by  the  examples  already  given)  very  often  omitted — not,  how- 
ever, with  the  impersonals  describing  the  phenomena  of  nature  ; 
nor,  generally,  with  verbs  which  are  not  of  common  use  in  im- 


297]  IMPEBSONALS.  147 

personal  form ;  but,  as  a  rule,  with  verbs  which  are  of  common 
impersonal  use,  whenever  the  e§  would,  by  the  rules  for  the 
arrangement  of  the  sentence,  come  elsewhere  than  in  its  natural 
place  next  before  the  verb. 

a.  That  is,  especially  in  the  cases  mentioned  in  sections  2,  4, 
and  5  of  the  last  paragraph,  whenever  the  object  of  the  im- 
personal verb,  or  an  adjunct  qualifying  the  verb,  is  placed  before 
it — and  the  putting  of  the  object  first,  with  consequent  omission 
of  e§,  is  the  more  usual  construction. 

294.  Since  the  impersonal  verb  represents  the  simple  action 
without  reference  to  an  acting  subject,  such  impersonals  as 
take  an  object,  direct  or  indirect,  representing  the  person  or 
thing  affected  by  the  action  or  condition,  are  virtually  equivalent 
to  passives  or  intransitives,  having  that  person  or  thing  as  their 
subject — and  they  often  may  or  must  be  so  rendered  in  English. 

a.  Many  of  the  examples  given  above  have  been  so  rendered, 
and  those  with  jein  or  it)erben  hardly  admit  of  being  treated 
otherwise :  thus,  further,  e§  erforbert  eine  ^re^ung  a  turning  is 
required,  e§  bebarf  ber  ^nnabme  nic^t  the  assumption  is  not  needed. 

295.  A  verb  having  the  indefinite  subject  e§  it  is  not  always 
to  be  regarded  as  impersonal ;  the  ey  sometimes  represents  in- 
definitely a  subject  which  is  contemplated  by  the  mind,  and  ad- 
mits of  being  definitely  stated ;  yet  more  often  (154.4),  e§  is  a 
grammatical  subject  only,  standing  for  a  logical  subject  which 
is  to  be  statetl  later,  whether  a  substantive  clause,  an  infinitive 
clause,  or  a  simple  substantive :  thus,  e§  freut  un§,  ha^  (Sie  ^ier 
finb  it  rejoices  us  that  you  are  here,  e§  freut  ini§,  <Sie  bu  fe'^en  it  re- 
joices Its  to  see  you,  eg  freut  un§  biefe  9lad)rid}t  this  news  rejoices  us. 

[Exercise  20.    Passive,  Eeflexive,  and  Impersonal  Yerbs.] 

COMPOUND  VERBS. 

296.  Verbs  in  German  admit  of  composition  with  various 
other  parts  of  speech— with  nouns,  adjectives,  and  adverbs. 
The  importance  and  frequent  use  of  certain  classes  of  these 
compounds  render  it  necessary  that  they  be  treated  here,  rather 
than  later,  under  the  general  subject  of  the  composition  of 
words. 

297.  Yerbs  are  compounded  especially  with  a  class 
of  elements  called  prefixes.     These  are  all  of  kindred 


148  VERBS.  [297- 

derivation,  being  originally  adverbs,  words  signifying 
place  or  direction ;  but  they  bave  become  divided  in 
modern  use  into  two  well-marked  classes : 

1.  Prefixes  whicb  are  also  employed  as  independent 
parts  of  speech,  adverbs  or  prepositions.  These  form 
a  less  intimate  union  with  the  verb,  being  separable 
from  it  in  many  of  its  forms  ;  they  are  therefore  called 
SEPAEABLE  PREFIXES,  and  a  verb  in  combination  with  them 
is  said  to  be  separably  compounded. 

2.  Prefixes  which,  in  their  present  form,  occur  only 
in  combination  with  verbs,  and  never  admit  of  separa- 
tion from  verbal  forms  (or  verbal  derivatives) ;  they 
are  called  inseparable  prefixes,  and  the  verb  with 
them  is  said  to  be  inseparably  compounded.     But — 

3.  A  few  independent  prefixes  sometimes  form  with 
verbs  combinations  after  the  manner  of  the  inseparable 
prefixes,  and  therefore  require  to  be  treated  as  a  class 
by  themselves. 

verbs  separably  compounded. 

298.  The  class  of  separable  prefixes  is  divided  into  two  sub- 
classes, simple  and  compound. 

1.  The  simple  separable  prefixes  (including  those  sometimes 
also  used  as  inseparable — see  308  etc.)  are : 

db  off,  down  ^oxt  forth,  away  oB  over,  on 

an  on,  at  geoen  afgainst  -^  iiber  over 

auf  up,  upon  —  in  in.  -  urn  around 

an^  out,  from  I)eim  home  ^unter  under 

Bei  hy,  beside,  with    ^er  toward  one  ^  Dor  before 

^^  ^^    !•   there  at     -'^^^  -^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^  ^^   i  ^9^^'^^  or 

bar       )  '  Winter  behind  tt)icber      j  again 

burc^  through  mit  with  mq  away 

ein  in,  into  nad)  after  gu  to 

empor  up,  aloft  nteber  down  guriid  back 

entamei  in  two,  apart  gufommen  together 

2.  The  compound  separable  prefixes  are — 

a.  Combinations  of  many  of  the  above  with  one  another, 
especially  with  the  words  of  more  general  direction  or  place 
l)n,  I)in,  ia  or  bar,  tjor:  as  :^eran,  I}inan,  baran,  t)oran. 


299]  SEPAEABLE  COMPOUNDS.  149 

6.  One  or  two  combinations  of  the  above  with  preceding  in- 
separable prefixes  :  namely,  beiDor  before,  entgeflen  against  (this, 
however,  is  really  derived  from  in^gegen). 

c.  .%a^\m\6)Z\\  between  (gtrtfc^en  by  itself  is  not  used  as  a 
prefix),  and  l^intan  behind  (contracted  from  l^inten  an). 

d.  Note  that,  of  those  given  in  the  list  above,  several  are 
really  compound  adverbs  (empor,  entgtt)ei,  guriicE,  sufammen), 
although  not  made  up  of  two  different  prefixes. 

299.  Conjugation  of  Verbs  compounded  tvith  Separable 
Prefixes. 

The  conjugation  of  a  compound  verb  is  in  general 
the  same  with  that  of  the  simple  verb  :  only  one  or  two 
matters  regarding  the  treatment  of  the  prefix  require 
notice  : 

1.  The  prefix  stands  before  the  verb  in  the  infinitive 
and  both  participles,  but  after  it  in  all  the  other  simple 
forms. 

a.  In  the  former  case,  the  prefix  is  written  with  the  verb  as  a 
single  word  ;  in  the  latter  case  it  is,  of  course,  separated  from 
it;  and,  if  the  verb  be  followed  by  other  adjuncts — as  objects, 
adverbs,  etc. — the  prefix  usually  and  regularly  stands  last,  at 
the  end  of  the  whole  clause  :  thus,  from  anfangen  begin,  \^ 
\a\w  a\[Ibegin,\^  fing  bicfen  DJlorgen  friil)  gu  ftubircn  [ftubie^^ 
ren]  an  I  began  early  this  morning  to  study. 

b.  But  if,  by  the  rules  for  the  arrangement  of  the  sentence 
(434),  the  verb  is  transposed,  or  removed  to  the  end,  it  comes, 
even  in  the  simple  forms,  to  stand  after  its  prefix,  and  is  then 
written  as  one  word  with  it :  thus,  al§  i(^  biefen  9!)Zorgen  frii:^  gu 
ftubiren  [ftubieren]  anfing  as  J  began  to  study  early  this 
morning. 

2.  The  ordinary  sign  of  the  past  participle,  (^c,  is 
inserted  between  the  separable  prefix  and  the  root; 
also  the  sign  of  the  infinitive,  ^^u,  whenever  used. 

Thus,  angefangen  begun,  an^ufangen  to  begin:  in  the  latter 
case,  as  the  example  shows,  the  verb  is  written  along  with  its 
infinitive  sign  and  prefix,  as  one  word. 

3.  The  prefix  has  the  principal  accent. 


150 


VEEBS. 


[300- 


300.    Examples:    anfanj^en   begin    (II.3),  I)erQnnaf)en 
draw  nigh. 

Principal  Parts. 

anf angen,  fing  an,  angef atigen  ]^erannal^en,  natjk  Ijerati,  ^erangcnaftt 

Indicative. 


Peesent,  I  begin  etc. 
s.  I  fange  an 

2  fangll  an 

3  fangt  an 
p.  I  fangen  an 

2  fangt  an 

3  fangen  an 

Pbeteeit,  I  began  etc. 
s.  I  fing  an 

Peefect,  I  have  begun  etc. 
s.  I  ]^aBe  angefangen 

Plupeefect,  I  had  begun  etc. 

s.  I  l^atte  angefangen 

FuTTJEE,  I  shall  begin  etc. 

s.  I  werbe  anfangen 
Fur.  Peef.,  I  shall  have  begun  etc. 

s.  I  n)erbe  angefangen  ^aben 


I  draw  nigh  etc. 
na^e  Beran 
nal^fl  Ijeran 
naftt  l^eran 
na^en  5eran 
naT^t  T^eran 
naften  l^eran 

I  drew  nigh  etc. 
na!)te  fteran 

I  have  drawn  nigh  etc. 
bin  fterangenal^t 

I  had  drawn  nigh  etc. 
xoax  fterangenaftt 

I  shall  draw  nigh  etc. 
tDerbe  ^erannaften 

I  shall  have  draicnnigh  etc. 

tDerbe  Ijerangena^t  fein 


Subjunctive. 


Peesent,  I  may  begin  etc. 

s.  I  fange  an 

etc.,  etc. 


I  may  draw  nigh  etc. 
nafte  ^eran 


etc.,  etc. 


Conditional. 
CoNDiTioNAii,  I  should  begin  etc.  I  should  draw  nigh  etc. 

s.  I  mxht  anfangen  ttiiirbe  ^eranna^en 

etc.,  etc.  etc.,  etc. 


Imperative. 


begin  etc. 
s.  2  fange  an,  fange  bu  an 
3  fange  er  an 


etc. 


draw  nigh  etc. 

nafte  ^eran,  na^e  bu  ^eran 
na^e  er  l^eran 

etc. 


303]  INSEPARABLE  COMPOUNDS.  151 

Infinitive. 
Peesent,  to  begin  to  draw  nigh 

anfanaen,  ansufangen  l&eranna:^en,  l^eranguna^en 

Peefect,  to  have  begun  to  have  drawn  nigh 

angefangen  l^aben  ^^rangenaT^t  fein 

Paeticiples. 
Peesent,  beginning  drawing  nigh 

anfangenb  l^erannal^enb 

Past,  begun  drawn  nigh 

angefangen  l&crangena^t 

301.  1-  The  meaning  of  the  simple  verb  is  often  greatly- 
altered  by  its  composition  with  a  prefix,  as  in  anfangen  begin, 
literally  take  hold  on:  in  other  cases,  each  member  of  the 
compomid  retains  its  independent  meaning  nearly  unchanged. 

2.  When  the  combination  is  of  the  latter  character,  no  ab- 
solute line  is  to  be  established  dividing  the  employment  of  the 
prefix  as  prefix  from  its  use  as  independent  adverb  ;  and  there 
are  many  instances  in  which  the  prefix  (especially  a  compound 
one)  is  treated  in  both  ways  indifferently,  and  either  written 
with  the  verb  or  separated  from  it ;  thus,  tDO  man  mager  ^tnein 
geftt  unb  fett  fterau§  fomnit  (or,  l^ineinge^t,  ^eraugfommt)  where  one 
goes  in  lean  and  comes  out  fat. 

[Exercise  21.    Verbs  Separably  Compounded.] 
VERBS  INSEPARABLY  COMPOUNDED. 

302.  The  inseparable  prefixes  are  be,  ent  (or  emp), 
cr,  Q^c,  i)er,  and  ^er. 

a.  These  prefixes  are,  most  of  them,  traceably  descended 
from  those  of  the  other  class :  their  original  form  and  present 
office  will  be  explained  below  (307). 

303.  They  remain  in  close  combination  with  the 
verb  to  which  they  are  attached,  through  its  whole 
conjugation,  forming  with  it,  as  their  name  denotes,  an 
inseparable  combination,  of  which  the  radical  syllable, 
and  not  the  prefix,  receives  the  accent.     Hoijcq — • 


152  VERBS.  [303- 

1.  The  sign  of  the  infinitive,  ^u,  is  put  before  the 
combination  (and  separated  in  writing  from  it),  as  if  it 
were  a  simple  verb. 

2.  The  sign  of  the  participle,  ge,  is  omitted  altogether. 
a.  Since,  as  was  pointed  out  above  (243.3a),  this  is  never 

prefixed  to  an  unaccented  syllable.  Moreover,  the  ge  is  itself 
an  inseparable  prefix,  and  no  verbal  form  is  ever  allowed  to 
have  two  inseparable  prefixes. 

304.  Examples :  beginnen  hegin  (1.2),  Derretfen  jour- 
ney  away. 

Principal  Parts. 

beginnen,  begann,  begonnen  toerreifen,  t)erreifte,  berreift 

JjfDICATr^K 


begtnnc 

begann 

);)a^t  begonnen 

l^atte  begonnen 

tt)erbe  beginnen 

tt)erbe  begonnen  l&aben 

fterrelfe 
berreifte 
bin  t)erreift 
war  t)erreift 
merbe  Derreijen 
ttjerbe  derreift  fein 

Subjunctive.  • 

bcginne 

beganne  or  begfinne 

etc.,  etc. 

terreife 
t)erreifete 

etc.,  etc. 

Conditional. 

tt)urbe  beginnen 

etc.,  etc. 

n)urbe  t)errelfen 

etc.,  etc. 

Imperative. 

begtnnc 

berrelfc 

Infinitives. 

beginnen,  gu  beginnen 
begonnen  ^aben 

toerrelfen,  gn  berrclfcn 
Derreift  jein 

Participles. 

beglnnenb 
begonnen 

toerrelfenb 
tterreift 

307]  INSEPAEABLE  PEEFIXES.  153 

305.  A  few  inseparably  compounded  verbs  are  further  com- 
pounded with  a  separable  prefix.  Such  combine  the  peculiar- 
ities of  both  modes  of  conjugation,  taking  no  ge  in  the 
participle,  and  interposing  gu  of  the  infinitive  between  the  two 
prefixes :  thus,  anerfennen  recognize,  anjuerfennen,  erfanntc  an, 
anerfannt. 

a.  Some  of  these,  however— as  anbetreffen,  auferfte^en,  au§- 
erlcfen,  einberleiBen,  Dorentftalten— are  never  used  except  in  such 
verbal  forms,  or  in  such  arrangements  of  the  sentence,  as  re- 
quire the  separable  prefix  to  stand  before  the  verb  :  thus,  al§ 
(^6rifhi§  auferftanb  when  Christ  arose;  but  not  gl^riftuS  erftanb  auf 
Christ  arose. 

306.  No  verb  separably  compounded  is  ever  further  com- 
pounded with  an  inseparable  prefix. 

a.  The  words  sometimes  given  as  examples  of  such  compo- 
sition are  really  derivatives  from  nouns :  thus,  tieraBfd^eueit 
regard  with  horror  is  not  from  a  verb  a6fd)euen,  but  from  the 
noun  ^Ibj^eu  horror ;  beauftragen  commission,  in  Uke  manner,  is 
from  ^uftrag  an  errand,  charge;  benad^ri(^tigen  inform  from 
9^a(^rid)t  news,  information,  and  so  on. 

307.  Derivation  and  Uses  of  the  Inseparable  Prefixes, 

1.  The  inseparable  prefixes  are  elements  which  have  become 
greatly  changed,  both  in  form  and  in  meaning,  from  their 
originals,  and  have  acquired  such  importance  in  the  system  of 
word-formation  as  to  call  for  special  notice  in  the  grammar. 

a.  While  they  have  in  part  a  distinct  and  clearly  definable 
force  in  the  compounds  they  form,  they  in  part  also  modify  in 
a  very  general  and  indefinite  way  the  meaning  of  the  verbs  to 
which  they  are  attached ;  and  their  spheres  of  use  variously 
approach,  and  even  sometimes  overlap,  one  another.  Only 
their  leading  applications  will  be  stated  below. 

h.  These  prefixes  are  also  freely  used  in  forming  derivative 
verbs  from  other  parts  of  speech  (see  405.III) ;  such  derivatives 
are  conjugated  in  the  same  manner  as  the  inseparably  com- 
pounded verbs. 

2.  ^e  is  the  same  with  our  own  prefix  he,  and  of  kindred 
force  with  the  latter ;  it  comes  ultimately  from  the  separable 
prefix  and  independent  preposition  bet  hy. 

a.  Prefixed  to  an  intransitive,  it  adds  the  meaning  of  ux>on, 
about,  or  the  like,  converting  the  intransitive  into  a  transitive : 


154  VERBS.  [307- 

thus,  flagcn  moan,  beflagcn  bemoan,   firtfien  sing,  Bcfinflcn  sing 
about,  besing. 

b.  Prefixed  to  a  transitive,  it  changes  the  direction  of  the 
verbal  action,  converting  into  a  direct  object  what  was  only  in- 
directly or  remotely  the  object  of  the  simple  verb :  thus,  malen 
paint  a  picture,  bemalen  paint  over  (as  a  wall),  rauben  steal 
(something  from  some  one),  berauben  rob  (some  one  of  something). 

c.  Rarely,  it  only  slightly  modifies  the  meaning  of  a  verb, 
usually  in  the  way  of  a  strengthening  or  extension  of  its  action : 
thus,  berfen  and  bebeden  cover ;  brcingen  and  bebrdngen  crowd, 
oppress;  l^arren  and  bel^arren  wait,  persist;  fle^en  and  befteben 
stand,  subsist 

d.  Some  of  its  compounds  are  restricted  to  a  reflexive  use : 
thus,  \\^  befinben^ncJ  one's  self,  be;  fid)  bctragen  bear  one's  self, 
behave. 

3.  ©nt  was  earlier  ant,  in  which  form  it  appears  in  ^nttDort 
answer  and  ^ntli^  countenance;  it  is  by  origin  an  adverb  mean- 
ing against,  related  to  our  and  and  the  prefix  of  aiwwer  (and- 
swarian),  etc.  In  combination  with  three  verbs  beginning  with 
f,  it  has  taken,  by  assimilation,  the  form  tmp :  thus,  empf angen, 
empfe^len,  empfinben. 

a.  Its  primitive  meaning  appears  in  a  few  compounds,  as  cnt- 
fpre(f)en  correspond,  answer;  empfangen  receive. 

b.  Its  leading  idea  is  now  that  of  out;  it  denotes  removal, 
separation,  deprivation,  sometimes  even  negation:  thus,  ent- 
geben,  entfommen,  entflieben  escape;  entgieben  take  aicaij;  entlaffen 
let  off,  release;  entfagen  renounce;  entttjeiben  desecrate. 

c.  It  sometimes  indicates  transition  into  a  condition :  as,  cnt* 
brennen  take  fire,  entfteben  come  into  being. 

4.  ©r  is  the  same  word  with  the  prefix  ur  forming  nouns  (411.4), 
and  means  by  origin  forth,  out,  being  related  to  au§  out,  and 
probably  ultimately  identical  with  it. 

a.  It  has  most  nearly  its  primitive  force  in  such  verbs  as 
ergieben  educate,  bring  up,  erri^ten  erect,  erfd^retfen  startle. 

b.  It  often  signifies  a  passing  into  a  condition,  a  becoming, 
the  beginning  of  an  action :  as,  erfd)einen  (shine  forth)  appear, 
ertbnen  sound  forth,  tx^ittnn  fall  a  trembling. 

c.  It  strengthens  the  verbal  idea,  often  adding  an  implication 
of  accomplishment  or  attainment :  as,  erf(i)o|)fen  exhaust,  ertrogen 
endure,  erleben  experience,  er]u(J)en  request,  erfinben  invent. 


i 


307]  INSEPARABLE  PREFIXES.  155 

d.  Hence  (its  prevailing  office  in  the  production  of  new  com- 
pounds), it  signifies  an  acquisition  by  means  of  the  action  ex- 
pressed by  the  simple  verb:  thus,  erjafien  obtain  by  hunting^ 
ertrofeen  get  by  defiance,  ertangen  bring  on  by  dancing. 

5.  (55e  is  believed  to  have  had  at  first  the  sense  of  with,  together, 
which  sense  appears,  somewhat  dimly,  in  a  few  of  the  com- 
pounds it  forms :  as,  tjcfrieren  become  solidified  by  cold,  gerinnen 
coagulate,  gefaflen  (fall  in  with)  please,  gefteften  (stand  by)  confess. 
But  this  sense  has  become  so  generalized  and  effaced,  and  its 
applications  are  so  various  and  indistinct,  that  it  would  be  in 
vain  to  attempt  to  classify  them. 

a.  The  adoption  of  this  prefix  as  regular  characteristic  of  past 
participles  has  been  already  referred  to  (243.3c)  as  comparatively 
modern,  and  hardly  admitting  of  explanation. 

6.  a.  35er  is  historically  the  same  word  as  bor  forward,  forth, 
and  its  leading  idea  is  that  of  forth,  away :  as  in  Derbrdttgen 
crowd  out,  toeriagen  chase  away,  t)er!aufen  bargain  away,  sell,  t)er* 
reifen  journey  off,  t)erfpielen  lose  at  play. 

b.  Hence,  as  intimating  removal  through  the  action  of  the 
verb  to  which  it  is  attached,  it  comes  further  to  imply  loss, 
detriment,  destruction :  as  in  uerbrauc^en  wear  out,  uerberben 
ruin; — or  a  removal  from  what  should  be,  the  production  of  an 
untoward  effect:  as  in  ticrfii^ren  lead  astray,  VitxxMznput  out  of 
place; — or  the  commission  of  error :  as  in  t)erre(^nen  misreckoyi, 
berfennen  mistake; — or  a  reversal  of  action :  as  in  berbieten  forbid, 
t)erad)teti  despise. 

c.  On  the  other  hand,  it  signifies  a  complete  working-out  of 
the  action  of  the  verb :  as  in  berBluten  bleed  to  death,  DerBrenuen 
bum  up; — which  may  imply  a  cessation  of  the  action,  as  in 
berBIii^en  blossom  out,  fade,  wither;  or,  more  usually,  a  strength- 
ening of  the  action,  as  in  t)er]infen  sink  away,  Dertilgen  blot  out, 
toerfdjlie^en  shut  up,  uerBinben  unite; — and  this  intensive  force  in 
a  few  cases  makes  transitive,  as  t)erla(f)cn  deride,  berfc'^Ien  miss, 
fail  of. 

7.  3er  represents  an  older  bi§,  which  is  related  to  the  Latin 
dis,  and  means,  like  the  latter,  apart,  asunder. 

a.  Accordingly,  it  either  intensifies  the  meaning  of  verbs 
which  contain  the  idea  of  dissolution,  of  going  to  pieces  or  re- 
ducing to  pieces,  or  it  adds  that  idea:  thus,  gerbrecf)en  break 
asunder,  aerjprengen  bJm)  to  pieces,  $erf alien  fall  apart,  jerrinncn 
become  dissolved. 


156  VERBS.  [308- 

PREFIXES  SEPARABLE  OR  INSEPARABLE. 

308.  A  few  prefixes,  belonging  properly  to  the 
separable  class  (being  all  of  tliem  in  nse  also  as  inde- 
pendent parts  of  speech),  nevertheless  sometimes  form 
compounds  after  the  manner  of  inseparables. 

309.  These  prefixes  are — 

burd}  through  iiber  over  unter  under 

t)tnter  behind  um  about  tDiber    )    against 


trteber  )    a^ain 

a.  SBiber  and  tt)tcber  are  the  same  word,  but  differently  spelt, 
to  indicate  a  difference  of  meaning.  All  verbs  compounded  with 
tuiber  are  inseparable;  all  but  one  or  two  compounded  with 
ttjieber  are  separable. 

310.  In  verbs  separably  compounded  with  these  prefixes, 
both  members  of  the  compound  have  their  own  full  meaning, 
hardly  modified  by  the  combination;  the  inseparable  com- 
pounds often  take  an  altered  or  figurative  sense. 

a.  Thus,  as  separable  compounds,  burc^bringen  crowd  through, 
"^interge'^en  go  behind,  iikrfe^en  set  across,  umcje^en  go  around, 
revolve,  untermerfen  throw  under,  tt)ieber!)oIen/e/c7i6acfc;— but,  as 
inseparable  compounds,  \)\xx6)^x\x[0,iX[  penetrate, permeate,  I)inter= 
geften  deceive,  u6er|e^en  translate,  umQeI)en  evade,  unteriDerfen  ^6- 
jugate,  mieberftolen  repeat.  Yet  the  difference  is  not  often  so 
marked  as  in  these  examples,  and  in  a  host  of  cases  the  two 
classes  of  compounds  are  distinguished  by  only  a  slight  shade 
of  meaning,  if  at  all. 

311.  The  compounds,  of  either  class,  are  accented 
and  conjugated  according  to  the  rules  already  given. 
That  is  to  say — 

1.  The  separable  compounds  are  accented  on  the  prefix ;  they 
put  the  prefix  before  the  verbal  form  in  the  infinitive  and  par- 
ticiples, but  after  it  in  other  cases;  they  take  the  signs  of 
participle  and  infinitive  between  the  prefix  and  the  root. 

Thus,  from  burcf)'bnngen  crowd  through  come  burd^'gubrinaen, 
bringe  burc^,  brang  burd),  bin  burc^^'gebrungen,  merbe  burd)'bringen, 
burd)'gebrungen. 


313]  COMPOUND  VERBS.  '  157 

2.  The  inseparable  compounds  are  accented  on  the  radical 
syllable,  reject  the  ge  of  the  participle,  and  put  gu  of  the  infin- 
itive before  the  whole  combination. 

Thus,  from  bur^brin'fien  penetrate  come  gu  burc^brtn'Gen,  bur(f)= 
brin'ge,  burrfibrang',  ^obe  burdjbrun'gcn,  tocrbe  bur(i)brin'gen,  burc^^* 
brun'gen. 

OTHER  COMPOUND  YERBS. 

312.  Yerbs  compounded  with  other  adverbs  than  those  al- 
ready mentioned,  or  with  nouns  or  adjectives,  fall  into  two 
classes : 

1.  True  or  close  compounds,  in  which  the  first  member  has 
become  an  integral  part  of  the  combination,  and  the  whole  is 
treated  as  a  simple  verb. 

Thus,  l^anb'^aBen  handle,  manage,  gu  ftanb^aben,  ^onblfiaBte,  Qt^ 
l^anbftabt;  todjt]aQtn  prophesy,  gu  ma^rfagen,  tDa^rfagte,  gema^r* 
fagt;  liebfojen  caress,  gu  Uebfofeti,  licbfofte,  geUebfoft. 

2.  Loose  or  false  compounds,  phrases,  written  together  as  one 
word,  in  which  the  first  member  is  treated  as  any  such  word 
limiting  the  verb  would  be,  and  the  combination  is  conjugated 
like  a  verb  separably  compounded. 

Thus,  ftattfinben  take  place,  ftattgufinben,  f  anb  ftatt,  ftattgefunben ; 
ttJO^It^un  benefit,  tt)ot)lgutftun,  t))at  tDol^l,  iroftlget^an ;  feftlj(^lagen 
miscarry,  f eftlgufdjlagen,  f dfilug  fel^I,  fel^Igef d)Iagen ;  lo^fpreiien  ab- 
solve, Io§gufpred)en,  fprac^  lo§,  lo§gefprD(^en. 

a.  If  a  verb  of  the  former  class  has  not  the  accent  on  its  first 
syllable,  it  loses  (243.3a)  the  ge  of  the  past  participle:  thus, 
fro^Iod'en,  frol)locft. 

b.  From  the  same  class  are  to  be  carefully  distinguished 
certain  verbs  which  have  the  aspect  of  compounds,  but  are  in 
fact  derivatives  from  compound  nouns :  such  are  frii^ftiiden  to 
breakfast  (from  gruftftiid  breakfast),  rat^|d)Iagen  [ratj(i)Iagen] 
consult  (from  9ftatftf(i)Iag  [9tatfcf)lag]  consultation). 

313.  W\^  and  doH  are  treated  in  part  as  proper  prefixes,  and 
form  both  separable  and  inseparable  compounds,  which  are 
accented  and  conjugated  like  those  made  with  bur(^,  etc. 
(308-11). 

But  mi^  is  very  rarely  treated  as  a  separable,  and  only  by  the 
insertion  of  ^u  and  ge  in  the  infinitive  and  participle :  thus,  m\^= 
gut)erftet)en,  mi^gegangen,  but  not  irf)  t)erftel^e  mig,  etc. ;  and  some 
verbs  take  a  prefixed  ge  in  the  participle:  thus,  gemi^brau(^t^ 


158  VEEBS.  [313- 

gemi^^tinbelt,  etc.  35oII  forms  five  or  six  inseparable  compounds, 
as  t)oIIbrin9en  accomplish,  uoflsie'^en  execute,  and  a  number  of 
loose  separables,  as  t^oUQXZ^tn  pour  full. 

[Exercise  22.    Verbs  Inseparably  Compounded,  Eia] 

ADJUNCTS   OF  THE  VEKB. 

314.  A  verb,  in  a  proper  verbal  form  (that  is  to  say,  exclud- 
ing the  infinitives  and  participles :  see  339,  349),  always  stands 
as  the  bare  predicate  of  a  sentence ;  and  all  that  constitutes  the 
complete  predicate  is  brought  in  in  the  way  of  modifying  ad- 
juncts to  the  verb,  variously  limiting  and  qualifying  its  action. 

a.  The  proper  verbal  forms,  those  possessing  the  char- 
acteristic of  person,  are  often  called  its  "  finite  "  forms :  they  are 
better  called  its  personal  forms,  and  this  expression  will  be  used 
here. 

h.  Even  in  the  compound  tenses  of  the  verb  itself,  the  rank  of 
verb  belongs  in  strictness  only  to  the  personal  auxiliary,  the 
other  parts  being  adjuncts  of  the  latter:  thus,  in  id)  l^abe  i{)n  Qe= 
!ran!t  I  have  pained  him,  ^dbt  is  the  bare  predicate,  and  ge- 
frdnft  is  an  attribute  of  the  object,  as  much  as  finbe  and  franf, 
respectively,  in  id)  finbe  i^n  !ran!  I  find  Jam  sick;  x^  merbe  gefrcintt 
I  am  pained,  \^  bin  gegangen  I  am  (have)  gone  are  analogous, 
in  like  manner,  with  \^  merbe  !ran!  I  become  sick,  [^  bin  tt)eg  I 
am  away;  and  \^  tcerbe  gefrdnft  tt)orben  fein  I  shall  have  been 
pained  is  made  up  by  the  addition  of  successive  modifying  ad- 
juncts to  merbe,  each  adjunct  after  the  first  being  (see  348.2) 
regularly  prefixed  to  the  one  which  it  further  limits ;  the  phrase 
means  literally  I  am  entering  (merbe)  into  a  state  of  having  (fein) 
become  (morben)  pained  (gefrdnft).  That  the  auxiliaries  have 
more  or  less  completely  the  inferior  value  of  copulas,  connecting 
the  subject  with  the  chiefly  significant  part  of  the  predicate, 
does  not  alter  their  formal  or  grammatical  character. 

c.  No  personal  form  of  a  verb  has  the  value  of  adjunct  to 
another  pers-^nal  form  ;  there  are  as  many  separate  sentences 
as  there  are  separate  verbs.  All  the  other  parts  of  speech  (ex- 
cepting the  conjunctions :  see  382. a)  may  enter,  by  connection 
with  the  verb  as  its  adjuncts,  into  the  relation  of  parts  of  the 
predicate  of  a  sentence. 

315.  Object  of  a  Verb.  Most  verbs  may  take  an  object — that 
is  to  say,  may  be  followed  by  a  noun  (or  its  equivalent)  in  an 


316]  VERBAL  ADJUNCTS.  159 

oblique  case,  designating  the  person  or  tiling  upon  which,  or  as 
affecting  which,  the  action  which  it  describes  is  exerted  by  the 
subject. 

1.  A  "transitive"  verb  takes  its  object  in  the  accusative  case ; 
and  such  is  called  a  direct  object:  thus,  er  1:jat  ein  en  §ut,  unb 
trdgt  il&  n  he  has  a  hat,  and  wears  it:  see  227. 

a.  A  few  transitive  verbs  are  followed  by  two  accusatives : 
see  227.3. 

2.  Many  "intransitive"  verbs  take  an  indirect  object  in  the 
genitive  or  dative  case:  thus,  ic^  frf)one  meine^  Setnbe§  I 
spare  my  enemy,  er  folgt  mir  he'follows  me:  see  219,  222.11. 

3.  Many  verbs,  besides  their  direct  object,  take  a  remoter 
object  in  the  dative  or  genitive,  indicating  the  person  or  thing 
affected  less  immediately  by  the  action  of  the  subject  upon  the 
object,  or  further  defining  that  action :  thus,  [^  rauBe  b  i  e  f  e  m 
50^anne  ba§  ^elb  I  steal  the  money  from  this  man,  i^  berauBc 
tl^n  f  ein  e  §  ®elbe§  I  rob  him  of  his  money:  see  219,  222.1. 

316.  Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective.  A  noun  or  adjective  is 
called  predicate,  if  it  is  brought  by  the  verb  into  connection 
with  a  noun  or  its  equivalent  (either  the  subject  or  the  direct 
object  of  the  verb),  as  limiting  or  qualifying  that  noun. 

1.  a.  A  predicate  noun  stands  in  the  nominative,  relating  to 
and  qualifying  the  subject  of  the  verb,  after  jein  be,  tDerben 
become,  bleiben  continue,  fc^etnen,  biinfen,  and  bduc^ten  [beuc^^ten] 
seem,  and  !)ei^en  be  called;  also,  with  the  passive  of  the  verbs 
that  take  a  noun  in  the  accusative  as  objective  predicate:  see 
213. 

These  are  verbs  of  incomplete  predication,  requiring  a 
complement.  Especially  fein  be  is  the  ordinary  simple  con- 
nective of  a  subject  with  its  predicated  quality,  and  is  therefore 
called  the  copula. 

b.  After  a  few  verbs — of  calling,  regarding,  and  the  like — a 
predicate  noun  stands  in  the  accusative,  brought  by  the  verb 
into  relation  with  its  object:  this  is  called  an  objective  predicate: 
thus,  er  nannte  m\^  feinen  greunb  he  called  me  his  friend:  see 
227.3&,c. 

2.  a.  A  predicate  adjective  is  used  after  the  same  verbs  as  a 
predicate  noun :  thus,  er  t[t  unb  Wxbi  mir  treu,  unb  tt)irb  nte  un=' 
treu  tt)erben  he  is  and  continues  faithful  to  me,  and  will  never  be* 
come  unfaithful. 


160  VEKBS.  [316- 

&.  With  verbs  of  more  complete  predication,  or  of  full  pred- 
ixjative  forpe,  an  adjective  is  often  used  in  a  manner  which  it  is 
convenient  to  distinguish  as  adverbial  predicate  (116.1b) :  thus, 
bie  ^inber  ftanben  ft  u  m  m  the  children  stood  silent,  bie  Stimme 
ftromte  l^immlijc^  1^  elle  \)oxthe  voice  poured  forth  hearenly  clear, 
tDtrb^S  au^  f  d)  o  n  gu  %aq,t  fommen  will  it  also  come  forth  beauti- 
ful? 

G.  Some  verbs  are  followed  by  an  adjective  as  objective  pred- 
icate (116.1c),  relating  to  and  qualifying  their  object :  thus,  jic 
ringen  bie  §dnbe  ft)unb  they  wring  their  hands  sore,  bie  \^  gerne 
b  r  e  i  f  a  (i)  biete  which  I  gladly  offer  threefold,  fie  ftellt  fid)  ii  b  c  r  ^ 
r  a  f  (^  t  she  feigns  herself  surprised,  id)  f iiftle  meine  ^raf te  1^  o  1^  e  r 
I  feel  my  powers  higher,  er  ftdit  \\)Xi  It)  a  rm  he  Jiolds  him  warm. 

This  predicative  construction  is  much  more  common  with 
adjectives  than  with  nouns,  which  generally  require  al§  as,  fiir 
for,  gu  to,  or  the  like,  before  them :  compare  227. Sc. 

317.  Adverb.  The  verbal  idea  is  limited  by  an  adverb,  or 
by  more  than  one,  in  the  most  various  manner,  in  respect  to 
time,  place,  occasion,  manner,  end,  and  so  on.  See  Adverbs, 
361  etc. 

Thus,  x6)  gel)e  je^t  /am  goiiig  now,  er  too^nt  file  r  he  lives  here, 
fie  fprec^en  q  u  t  they  speak  well,  bu  bift  l^eute  morgen  fe^r  fpcit  er* 
tt)a(J^t  you  woke  very  late  this  morning. 

318.  Prepositional  Phrase.  A  phrase  composed  of  a  prepo- 
sition along  with  the  word  (generally  a  noun,  with  or  without 
adjuncts)  which  it  governs,  and  the  nature  ol'  whose  relation  to 
the  verbal  action  it  defines,  is  a  very  frequent  adjunct  to  the 
verb,  taking  the  place  of  object,  predicate,  or  adverb. 

a.  As  direct  object  in  place  of  an  accusative,  such  a  phrase 
can  hardly  stand :  but  it  may  be  used  for  a  genitive  object — as, 
t(^  tDarte  auf  iftn,  for  id)  tuarte  feiner  limit  for  him;  for  a  dative 
object— as,  er  folgt  mir,  or  er  folgt  auf  mid)  he  follows  me;  yet 
more  freely  for  a  remoter  obje  t  along  with  a  direct  object — as, 
i^  freue  tnid)  iiber  bteje§,  for  id)  freue  mid)  befjen  I  rejoice  at  this, 
id)  f  c^retbe  einen  33nef  an  i^n,  for  \d)  f  d^reibe  iftm  einen  Srief  I  write 
a  letter  to  him. 

b.  Examples  of  prepositional  phrases  with  predicate  value 
are  e§  tDar  t)on  entfc^eibenbcr  2Bid}tifl!eit  it  was  of  decisive  im- 
portance, bie  ^ranten  blieben  in  ber  Witk  the  sick  remained  in  the 
midst,  fie  ertpd^Iten  tl)n  gum  l^aifer  they  chose  him  emperor,  bte§ 
tDXxh  gum  ^uSbrud  ber  ©eele  this  becomes  an  expression  of  the  soul. 


319]  VERBAL  ADJUNCTS.  161 

c.  Adverbial  prepositional  phrases  are  ber  SSogel  fpielt  im 
SauBe  the  bird  plays  in  the  foliage,  mt  betQcn  ben  Samen  in  ber 
@rbe  ©(i)oo&  we  hide  tJie  seed  in  th£  earth's  bosom,  er  rief  mit  lauter 
Sttmme  he  cried  with  a  Imtd  voice. 

319.     Order  of  the  verbal  adjuncts. 

1.  In  the  normal  or  regular  arrangement  of  the  sentence,  all 
the  adjuncts  of  a  personal  verb  are  placed  after  it. 

a.  For  the  inverted  order  of  arrangement,  in  which  one  of  the 
adjuncts  is  frequently  placed  before  the  verb  it  modifies,  and 
for  the  transposed  order,  in  which  the  personal  verb  is  placpd 
after  all  its  adjuncts,  see  the  rules  given  for  the  order  of 
the  sentence,  below,  431,  434. 

2.  When  the  verb  is  modified  by  two  or  more  adjuncts,  the 
general  rule  is,  that  one  which  is  more  closely  combined  in  idea 
with  the  verb,  and  more  essentially  modifies  its  predicative 
meaning,  is  placed  further  from  it  than  one  of  a  more  external 
and  accessory  character.    Hence — 

a.  The  infinitive  or  participle,  in  a  compound  verbal  form, 
stands  at  the  end  of  the  sentence :  thus,  jie  ft  a  1 1  e  iftre  3<iftne 
f(ftarf  in  feine  ginger  Q  e  f  e  fe  t  she  had  sunk  her  teeth  sharply  into 
his  fingers,  it)r  merbct  eucft  fo  Hutig  enter  Tla^^i  nicftt  liber- 
ie b  c  n  you  will  not  presume  so  cruelly  upon  your  power. 

b.  An  infinitive  dependent  upon  any  verb,  modal  or  causative 
auxil  ary  or  other,  stands  in  like  manner  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence:  thus,  [^  n)in  t)or  iftr  mic^  niebernjerfen  I  wilt 
humble  myself  before  her. 

c.  A  separable  prefix  belonging  to  the  verb  takes  the  same 
place:  thus,  fie  f  aft  babei  re(ftt  finfter  nnb  nnmiHig  au§  she  looked 
at  the  same  time  right  gloomy  and  out  of  humor. 

d.  Any  part  of  speech  compounded  with  a  verb  after  the 
manner  of  a  separable  prefix,  or  forming  with  it  a  verbal  phrase 
analogous  with  such  a  compound,  takes  the  same  place :  thus, 
i(ft  naftm  ni(ftt§  meftr  t)on  ber  ftinler  mir  liegenben  ©bene  maftr 
I  no  longer  saw  anything  of  the  plain  that  lay  behind  me. 

e.  Of  two  cases  governed  by  the  same  verb,  the  second  ac- 
cusative (227.3)  is  placed  after  that  which  is  the  more  immediate 
object  of  the  verb ;  the  genitive  (219.2,3)  follows  the  accusative ; 
the  dative  (222.1.1)  usually  precedes  the  accusative  (except 
when  this  is  a  pronoun  or  emphatic). 

/.  Of  more  than  one  adverb  qualifying  the  same  verb,  an  ad- 
verb of  time  ordinarily  precedes  one  of  place,  and  both  are 


162  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OP  CONJUGATION.  [319- 

placed  before  one  of  manner  or  degree :  thus,  er  arBeitet  immer 
flei^ig  he  always  works  industrioiisUj,  bu  mol^nft  ^ier  fel)r  beqiiem 
you  live  here  very  comfortably.  Hence,  also,  the  adverb  of  nega- 
tion, ni(i)t,  if  it  modifies  the  general  assertion  of  the  sentence, 
stands  last ;  but  if  its  negative  force  applies  to  some  particular 
adjunct  of  the  verb,  it  is  placed  next  before  that  adjunct. 

3.  The  rules  as  above  stated  are  subject  to  various  modifica- 
tion under  the  influence  of  accent  or  emphasis,  or  of  euphony. 

a.  Any  adjunct  of  the  verb  may  be  transferred  to  a  position 
other  than  its  proper  one  (usually  later),  for  the  purpose  of 
being  made  more  prominent. 

h.  Since  a  pronoun  is,  in  general,  a  less  significant  and  em- 
phatic word  than  a  noun,  usage  has  established  the  rule  that — 

A  pronoun  immediately  dependent  on  the  verb  (not  governed 
by  a  preposition),  whether  as  direct  or  indirect  object,  comes 
first  among  the  verbal  adjuncts. 

Among  the  pronouns,  a  personal  pronoun  comes  before  a  de- 
monstrative, the  briefer  personal  pronouns,  especially  e§  it,  be- 
fore the  longer,  and  the  reflexives  first  of  all. 

4  Prepositional  phrases  take,  in  general,  the  position  belong- 
ing to  the  part  of  speech  whose  equivalent  they  are ;  but  they 
are  more  hable  than  single  words  to  change  place  for  euphonic 
reasons. 

5.  The  natural  connections  of  the  different  verbal  adjuncts 
are  regarded  in  the  arrangement  of  the  sentence ;  those  which 
affect  one  another,  and  exert  a  combined  influence  upon  the 
verbal  action,  being  put  together. 

6.  The  above  are  only  the  leading  principles  of  the  arrange- 
ment of  words  in  a  sentence.  To  follow  out  their  application  in 
detail,  and  illustrate  their  joint  and  mutual  action,  and  the  more 
or  less  irregular  and  arbitrary  modifications  which  they  admit, 
cannot  here  be  attempted. 

USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF   CONJUG-ATION. 

PERSON  AND  NUMBER. 

320.  In  general,  the  verb  is  of  the  same  person  and  number 
as  its  subject. 

a.  Being,  of  course,  of  the  first  or  second  person  only  when 
its  subject  is  a  personal  pronoun  of  those  persons  respectively, 
since  all  other  words  are  of  the  third  person. 


322]  PERSON  AND  NUMBER.  *  163 

321.  Special  Rules  respecting  Person. 

1.  When  the  same  verb  has  subjects  of  more  than  one  person, 
it  is  of  the  first  person  (plural)  if  either  of  its  subjects  is  of  the 
first  person ;  otherwise,  of  the  second :  thus,  i^  unb  bu  f  in  b  "^ter 
land  thou  are  here,  bu  unb  er  glaubt  e§  beibe  nid)t  \^ou  and  he 
both  disbelieve  it. 

2.  After  a  relative  (ber)  referring  to  an  antecedent  of  the  first 
or  second  person,  the  verb  is  in  the  third,  unless  the  personal 
pronoun  is  repeated  after  the  relative  (compare  181) :  thus,  bu, 
ber  bem  33a]ili^!  ben  DJ^orbblic!  gab  tlwu  wlw  gavest  to  the  basilisk 
his  deadly  glance  (but  bu,  ber  bu Q(i^]i). 

322.  Special  Bules  respecting  Number. 

1.  A  verb  having  for  its  subject  more  than  one  singularnoun 
is  put  in  the  plural. 

a.  To  this  rule  there  are  frequent  exceptions — either  as  the 
several  subjects  are  regarded  as  combined  into  a  single  idea ; 
or  as,  when  preceding  or  following  an  enumeration  of  single 
subjects,  the  verb,  by  a  familiar  license  of  speech,  is  suffered  to 
agree  with  the  one  nearest  it  alone ;  or  as  the  verb  is  in  fact 
understood  with  other  than  the  one  subject  with  which  it 
agrees:  thus,  Winter  mir  lie  fit  nur  Summer  unb  ®Ienb  behind  me 
lies  only  sorrow  and  misery,  5el§  unb  Wtn  tt)irb  fortcieriffen  rock 
and  sea  are  hurried  onward,  e§  begleite  burc^  ^eben  unb  ©terben 
un§  Sieb  unb  :^iebe  unb  SBein  may  song  and  love  and  wine  ac- 
company us  through  life  and  death,  Siiiien,  93lorben,  ©tel)len  unb 
^^ebredien  tjat  iiber^anb  genommen  hjing,  murder,  theft,  and 
adultery  have  become  prevalent. 

2.  A  collective  noun  in  the  singular  takes  a  verb  in  the  singular 
much  more  strictly  than  in  English. 

a.  Exceptions  are  only  such  expressions  as  ein  ^aar  two  or 
three,  eine  5Jlencje  a  number,  ein  '^ufeenb  a  dozen,  which  are  fre- 
quently used  with  plural  nouns  (ordinarily  construed  apposition- 
ally  with  them  :  see  216.5a),  and  have  gained  a  plural  value  by 
association:  thus,  in  tr)eld)em  ein  $aar  SSbgel  \)m  unb  mieber 
l^iipf  en  in  which  a  couple  of  birds  hop  back  and  forth,  im  C>ofe 
jpielten  ein  $aar  ber  munteren  ^inber  in  the  yard  were  playing 
two  or  three  of  the  merry  children,  ein  $aar  ]inb  getuoftnlic^  t)or= 
au§  a  couple  are  generally  in  front. 

3.  After  the  impersonal  and  indefinite  subjects  e§,  bie§,  ba§, 
toa§,  tt)eld^e§,  etc.,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural  if  a  following 


t64  trSES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [322- 

predicate  noun  is  plural :  thus,  c§  f  i  n  b  unfer  gtDei  there  are  two 
of  us,  ba§  finb  meine  greunbe  tJiose  are  my  friends.— ^o  also 
occasionally  in  a  case  like  bie  grud^t  biefe§  33aumeg  finb  fleine 
'Beeren  the  fruit  of  this  tree  is  small  berries. 

4.  Out  of  exaggerated  respectfulness,  the  plural  verb  is  some- 
times (the  usage  is  happily  going  out  of  vogue)  construed  with 
a  singular  title,  or  name  and  title :  as,  b  e  H  e  b  e  n  bcr  ^err  biefen 
©etfel  gu  erproben  may  the  gentleman  he  pleased  to  try  this  purse, 
6etne  9]laieftdt  ber  ^omq  l^aben  gerubt  his  majesty  the  king  has 

been  gracwusly  pleased  to ,  §err  doctor  tDurben  ha  tak6)'\\ixt 

the  d/yitor  was  put  through  his  catechism  there. 

MODE  AND  TENSE. 

Indicative. 

323.  The  use  of  the  indicative  mode,  in  its  various  tenses, 
corresponds  upon  the  whole  pretty  closely  in  German  and  in 
English.  The  principal  points  of  difference  will  be  stated  below. 

324.  Indicative  Present.  1.  The  German  present — e.  g.  \^ 
Hebe — answers  to  the  three  English  forms  of  the  present  I  love, 
I  do  love,  and  I  am  loving:  the  shades  of  difference  among  these 
different  values  are  either  left  to  be  inferred  from  the  context, 
or  are  expressed  or  intimated' by  adjuncts  to  the  verb  or  by 
verbal  phrases. 

2.  In  German,  as  in  English  and  French,  the  present  is  often 
substituted  for  the  preterit  in  lively  narration :  thus,  id)  bielt 
ftiHe,  unb  fal^  mic^  wa&j  bem  ©tanbe  ber  (Sonne  urn.  3nbem  ic^  nun 
|o  e  m  p  0  r  b  H  cE  e,  j  e  b  e  \^  iz.  I  stopped,  therefore,  and  looked 
about  me  for  the  position  of  the  suji.  While,  now,  lam  thus  look- 
ing upward,  I  see  etc. 

3.  In  expressing  a  past  action  or  state  which  is  continued  so 
as  to  be  present  also  (or  in  signifying  what  has  been  and  still 
is),  the  German,  like  the  French,  indicates  the  present  part  and 
leaves  the  past  to  be  inferred,  while  the  English  does  the 
contrary :  thus,  j  i  n  b  <Ste  f c^on  lange  bier  have  you  been  (are  you) 
here  already  a  hng  time  ?  er  f  (^  I  d  f  t  feit  fiinf  S^bten  nnter  bem 
(5(^nee  he  has  been  (is)  sleeping  for  five  years  beneath  the  snow. 

4.  The  German  present,  much  more  often  than  the  English, 
is  used  in  the  sense  of  a  future :  thus,  n)ie  fan  g^  \df§  an  ?  id^ 
breb'  mt(b  urn,  fo  x\V§  getban  how  shall  I  set  about  it?  I  will 
turn  myself  about;  that  will  fetch  it;  bie  ^iiter,  bie  cr  bereinft  erbt 
the  property  which  he  will  one  day  inherit. 


326]  mDICATIVE  TENSES.  165 

This  future  use  of  the  present  is  a  direct  inlieritance  from  a 
former  condition  of  Germanic  language  (as  represented  to  us  by 
the  oldest  Germanic  dialects),  in  which  the  present  and  future 
meanings  were  both  habitually  expressed  by  the  present  tense, 
the  later  auxiliary  futures,  as  I  shall  or  will  hve  \^  toerbe  lieBcn, 
not  having  been  yet  brought  into  use. 

325.  Indicative  Preterit.  1.  The  preterit  answers  to  our 
own  simple  past  tense,  in  its  three  forms  I  loved,  I  did  love,  I 
was  loving — all  expressed,  without  distinction,  by  [^  lieBte. 

2.  As  the  present  for  the  perfect  (324.3),  so  the  preterit  is 
sometimes  used  for  our  pluperfect,  to  express  what,  at  a  given 
time,  had  been  and  was  still:  thus,  ft)  a  ten  ©ie  f(^on  lange  ha 
had  you  been  (were  you)  there  long  already  ? 

3.  The  distribution  of  the  expression  of  past  time  between 
the  preterit  and  perfect  is  not  precisely  the  same  in  German  as 
in  English.  As  (326.2)  the  German  perfect  often  stands  where 
we  should  use  the  preterit,  so  the  contrary  is  also  sometimes 
the  case:  thus,  i:^r  ^brtet,  ml6)  f$rerflt(f)e§  ©eric^t  be§  C>errn 
iiber  3eru{alem  e  r  g  i  n  g  you  have  heard  what  a  terrible  judgment 
of  the  Lord  has  corne  upon  Jerusalem. 

326.  Indicative  Perfect.  1.  The  perfect  answers  in  the  main 
to  our  perfect,  expressing  completed  action,  or  action  in  the  past 
with  implied  reference  to  the  present,  as  no  longer  continuing : 
thus,  x^  !^a6e  geliebt  I  have  loved,  or  Mve  been  loving. 

2.  But  the  perfect  is  not  infrequently  used  where  we  employ 
the  preterit ;  the  perfect  is  rather  the  tense  by  which  something 
is  simply  asserted  as  true,  while  the  preterit  implies  a  connec- 
tion with  other  past  events  in  continuous  narration,  or  a 
personal  participation  of  the  speaker,  as  spectator  or  joint 
actor. 

Thus,  ©ott  ftat  bieJlBelt  erfc^affcn  God  created  the  world  (it  was 
God  lohoetG.),  ic^  bin  geftcrn  in  ber  J!trd^e  geiDcfen  I  was  at  church 
yesterday,  un(er  Sreunb  ift  neiilt(^  geftorben  our  friend  died  lately; 
—but  (S^ott  erfd)uf  bie  SSelt  in  fcc^§  5:agen,  unb  tul^te  am  ficbentcn 
God  created  the  world  in  six  days,  and  rested  on  the  seventh,  ic^ 
tt)ar  in  ber  ^irc^c,  mo  §err  9L  cine  t)ortreff(i(^e  ^rebigt  I)idt  I  was 
at  church,  where  Mr.  JSf.  preached  an  admirable  sermon,  unjer 
SSater  flarb  gcftern  our  father  died  yesterday  (in  our  presence). 

a.  Something  of  the  same  distinction  ai>pears  also  in  English 
usage,  and  it  is  impossible  to  explain  fully  the  difference  in 
idiom  betweeri  the  two   languages   without  a  great  deal  of 


166  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [326- 

detailed  illustration.  Moreover,  there  are  many  cases  in  either 
tongue  where  both  tenses  might  be  employed  with  equal 
propriety. 

3.  For  the  present  in  place  of  our  perfect,  see  324.3 ;  for  the 
perfect  in  place  of  the  future,  see  328.36. 

327.  Indicative  Pluperfect.  The  pluperfect  in  German,  as  in 
English,  expresses  action  already  finished  at  a  time  in  the  past 
either  defined  or  contemplated  by  the  speaker :  thus,  id)  i}aik 
Qellebt  I  had  loved  or  been  loving. 

328.  Indicative  Future  and  Future  Perfect.  1.  These  tenses 
ordinarily  agree  in  use  with  their  English  correspondents: 
thus,  i(^  tt)erbe  lieben  I  shall  hve  or  be  loving,  [^  merbe  QcUcbt 
l^aben  I  shall  have  loved  or  been  loving. 

a.  They  express  simple  futurity,  that  which  is  going  to  be ; 
and  are  carefully  to  be  distinguished  from  the  modal  auxiliary 
forms  composed  of  the  infinitive  with  tuoHen  and  foUen  (267-8), 
which  more  or  less  distinctly  imply  an  assent  or  intent,  and  a 
propriety  or  obligation. 

2.  The  futures  are  sometimes  used  to  indicate  a  claimed 
probability,  or  to  express  a  conjecture  :  thus,  ba§  tDirb  tco^I  Sft^ 
33ruber  fein  that  is  ijour  brother,  is  it  not?  er  tt)irb  tud)t  lange  bort 
(^eblieben  jetn  I  presume  he  did  not  stay  there  long. 

3.  a.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  perfect  is  often  employed 
where  the  future  perfect  would  be  logically  more  correct,  the 
implication  of  futurity  being  sufficiently  made  by  the  context : 
thus,  icf)  raerbe  fommcn,  fobalb  id)  ntcincn  33rief  G^ft^n^ben  babe  I 
shall  come  as  soon  as  I  have  written  my  letter  (not  gefd)riebcn  l^aben 
tDerbe  shall  have  written). 

b.  A  present  or  perfect  is  occasionally  substituted  for  a  future, 
by  a  figure  of  speech,  to  indicate  the  certainty  of  what  is  to  take 
place:  thus,  jene  tjai  cjelebt,  ttienn  \^  bte^33Iatt  an§  meinen  §dnben 
Qcbc  she  has  ceased  to  live,  if  I  let  this  paper  go  out  of  my  hands, 
ftel^',  ober  bu  bift  be§  Xohz^  stand,  or  thou  art  a  dead  man! 

c.  For  the  frequent  use  of  a  present  nst  ad  of  a  future  tense, 
see  324.4. 

[ExEECisE  27.    Use  of  the  Tenses  of  the  Indicative.] 

Subjunctive. 

329.  The  subjunctive  mode,  which  has  almost  passed  out  of 
U^e  in  Enghsh,  still  continue^  in  full  currency  in  German, 


331]  SUBJUNCTIVE.  167 

having,  if  the  two  "  conditional "  tenses  be  included  with  it  (as 
they  are  in  fact  subjunctive,  both  in  form  and  character),  more 
than  a  corresponding  tense  for  every  tense  of  the  indicative. 
In  some  of  its  offices  (the  oj  tative,  potential,  conditicnal)  it 
answers  to  what  is  left  of  our  own  subjunctive,  and  to  the 
compounded  tenses  (with  the  auxiliaries  may,  might,  would,  and 
should)  by  whicli  we  have  in  part  supplied  the  place  of  the  latter ; 
in  other  offices  (especially  in  indirect  statement,  333)  there  is  in 
EngUsh  hardly  anything  analogous,  though  the  classical  tongues 
present  similar  constructions  in  abundance. 

330.  The  subjunctive  is  the  mode  of  possibility,  contingency, 
subjectivity,  in  contradistinction  to  the  indicative  as  the 
mode  of  actuality,  direct  assertion,  objectiveness. 

a.  The  subjunctive  of  the  Germanic  languages  is  by  origin  an  optative, 
or  mode  expressing  wish  or  desire,  and  there  was  another  mode  more 
properly  known  as  subjunctive.  In  the  Greek,  both  still  subsist  to- 
gether ;  but  in  German,  as  in  Latin,  the  two  have  become  one,  which 
combines,  with  various  modifications  and  restrictions,  their  several  offices. 

h.  Not  every  statement  of  a  hypothetical  or  contingent  char- 
acter requires  the  subjunctive:  that  character  is  often  suffi- 
ciently intimated  by  the  radical  meaning  of  the  verb  used,  or  of 
the  adverbs  or  conjunctions  employed  with  it;  the  cases  in 
which  this  mood  is  availed  of  are  those  to  be  explained  below. 

c.  Even  in  the  cases  detailed,  there  is  considerable  freedom 
of  choice  between  a  subjunctive  and  an  indicative  expression, 
depending  on  the  degree  of  contingency  or  reality  of  the  imphed 
conception,  the  difference  being  sometimes  so  slight  as  to  be 
hardly  definable ;  and  an  indicative  is  occasionally  used  where 
analogy  would  lead  us  to  expect  a  subjunctive,  as  if,  by  a  figure 
of  speech,  to  give  a  character  of  actuality  to  what  is  in  itself 
properly  contingent.  It  is  not  possible  to  say,  as  in  some  other 
languages,  that  certain  grammatical  constructions,  or  certain 
particles,  require  or  "govern"  the  subjunctive. 

d.  In  the  subjunctive,  the  distinctions  of  tense  are  of  only 
subordinate  value,  and  are  even  to  some  extent  effaced.  The 
tenses  do  not,  therefore,  require  to  be  separately  treated. 

331.    The  Subjunctive  as  Optative. 

1.  The  present  subjunctive  is  frequently  used  in  an  optative 
sense,  as  expressing  a  wish,  request^  or  direction  on  the  part  of 
the  speaker. 


168  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  CP  CONJUGATION.  [331 

Thus,  flcfeanet  fei  er  aUc  S^xi  blessed  he  he  ever,  lang  leBe  ber 
^onifi,  e§  freue  fi(5^,  tuer  ba  .  .  . .  long  live  the  king!  let  him  rejoice 
who  . . . . ,  brdutlid^e§  Seinen  legen  mx  bem  Xftor  an  let  us  dress 
Thor  in  bridal  vestments,  gefte^^  i(f)  e§  nur  only  let  me  confess  it. 

a.  This  use  is  Umited  to  the  first  and  third  persons  of  both 
numbers :  for  the  second  persons,  the  imperative  is  used ;  in 
the  first  singular,  mbge  may  is  common  as  auxiliary ;  and  the 
same  auxiliary  may  also  be  employed  in  the  other  persons. 

b.  The  subject  is  put  after  the  verb,  except  in  the  third  pers. 
singular,  where  it  may  have  either  position,  and  more  usually 
stands  before. 

c.  The  optative  subjunctive  is  used,  as  already  noticed  (243.1), 
to  fill  out  the  declension,  of  the  imperative,  and  is  practically, 
in  the  third  pers.  plural,  the  most  common  imperative  form, 
since  the  use  of  the  second  person  in  ordinary  address  is  no 
longer  approved  (153.4:). 

d.  This  subjunctive  sometimes  becomes,  in  appUcation,  con- 
cessive, or  expresses  a  supposition  or  assumption :  thus,  man 
begegne  3emanbcn  im  §au§;  e§  fei  eine  ^efefljrf)aft  beifammen  let 
one  meet  anybody  in  the  house ;  let  a  company  be  assembled  (i.  e. 
supposing  such  to  be  the  case);  er  tl^ue,  tt)a§  er  tDofle  let  him  do  what 
he  please  (i.  e.  tliough  he  do). 

e.  Hence,  with  benn,  it  becomes,  by  an  elliptical  construction, 
equivalent  to  unless;  thus,  er  fitftre  benn  gretia  3ur  33raut  mir 
l^eim  unless  he  bring  me  home  Freya  as  bride  (i.  e.  [if  he 
would  gain  what  he  wishes]  then  let  him  bring,  etc.),  i^r  mit^tet 
ttiir  gur  ©telle  benn  t)erf))red^en  unless  you  promise  me  on  the  spot. 

2.  The  preterit  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  also  employed  in  a 
kind  of  optative  sense,  but  only  by  elliptical  construction,  in  ab- 
breviated conditional  and  indirect  phrases  where  the  wishes 
expressed  are  implied  to  be  contrary  to  fact,  or  impossible  of 
attainment. 

Thus,  tt)are  e§  bo(^  ^Benb  if  it  were  only  evening!  ^dtte  x^  mx^ 
bod^  gefreut  had  I  only  enjoyed  myself  (while  it  was  still  in  my 
power  to  dx)  so)!  ad),  ha^  meine  ^ugen  ^l)rdnenqueEen  wdrcn 
0  that  my  eyes  were  fountains  of  tears  ! 

332.     The  Subjunctive  as  Conditional  and  Potential. 

The  conditional  and  potential  uses  of  the  subjunctive  so  pass 
Into  one  another  that  they  can  hardly  be  treated  separately. 
We  commence,  for  convenience,  with  the  hypothetical  period. 


332]  CONDITIONAL  SUBJUNCTIVE.  169 

1.  The  hypothetical  period  consists  of  two  parts  or  clauses,  the 
one  (the  apodosis)  expressing  a  conclusion  or  result  which  would 
follow,  if  the  condition  were  true  which  is  expressed  by  the 
other  (the  protasis) — it  being  at  the  same  time  implied  that  the 
condition  is  not  realized,  and,  generally,  that  the  result  is  there- 
fore also  untrue.  This,  in  its  complete  form,  requires  a  past 
tense  (preterit  or  pluperfect)  of  the  subjunctive  in  each  clause. 

Thus,  regtcrte  3lled)t,  fo  laget  iftr  t)Dr  mir  im  6tauBe  if  right 
prevailed,  you  would  lie  in  the  xlust  before  rue,  it)enn'§  Idiiger  Qe= 
bauert  l^dtte,  mxt  ic^  im  groft  erftarrt  if  it  had  lasted  longer,  I 
should  have  been  stiffened  with  frost,  gliidlic^er  tt)drc  an^:)  i(^,  tt)enn 
\6)  \\a6)  ^fien  gegogen  tDdre  I  too  should  be  happier,  if  I  had 
marched  to  Asia. 

a.  Either  of  the  two  clauses  may  stand  first,  and  the  idea  of 
if  in  the  clause  of  condition  (protasis)  may  be  expressed  either 
by  a  conjunction  (tuenn)  or  by  the  inverted  arrangement  (433) — 
as  the  examples  show. 

b.  In  the  result  or  conclusion  (apodosis),  the  conditional  tenses 
may  be  used  instead  of  the  proper  subjunctive :  see  below,  335. 

c.  The  implication  as  to  the  result  is  liable  to  modification  by 
various  causes  :  for  example,  by  its  being  put  into  the  form  of 
a  question— as,  tt)a§  tDdre  au§  mir  gemorben,  l^dttet  xt\x  mid)  iu(^t 
aufgenommen  what  would  have  become  of  me,  if  you  had  not 
received  me  ? — or  by  an  even  involved  in  the  condition  :  as,  unb 
tt)dren  t)on  (^olb  fie,  \6)  gdbe  fie  bir  even  were  they  of  gold,  I  would 
give  them  to  thee. 

d.  If  the  condition  be  regarded  as  doubtful  merely,  and  not 
contrary  to  reality,  the  verbs  are  put  in  the  indicative  mode : 
thus,  alw^ays  when  the  tense  is  present  or  perfect — as,  tcenn  er 
fommt,  gel^e  ic^  fort  if  he  comes,  I  shall  go  away,  wtnn  er  gefommen 
ift  mill  id)  il)n  fel^en  if  he  be  arrived,  I  wish  to  see  him;  and  often 
when  the  tense  is  past:  thus,  menn  er  fi^on  gefommen  mar,  mu§ 
er  ung  gefe'^en  l^aben  if  he  had  already  come,  he  cannot  have  failed 
to  see  v^. 

e.  Rarely,  a  pret.  indie,  is  used,  for  emphasis  (compare  328.36), 
in  the  clause  of  result,  and  even  in  that  of  condition :  thus,  'tn 
marft  Derloren,  l^'dik  er  ni^t  fiir  bic^  geft)rD(^en  thou  wast  lost,  had 
lie  not  spoken  for  thee,  mar  id)  ... .  ber  SBerrdtijer  [33errdtcr],  i(^ 
ptte  mir  ben  guten  (Sd)etn  gef|)art  had  I  been  the  traitor^  I  might 
have  spared  myself  the  fair  show. 


170  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [332- 

2.  In  the  incomplete  hypotJietical  period,  either  the  condition 
or  the  conclusion  is  unexpressed,  but  is  more  or  less  distinctly 
intimated  or  implied. 

a.  The  conclusion  is  wanting  altogether,  and  the  condition 
has  the  value  of  a  wish  or  prayer  (see  331.2).  In  this  case  a  bod) 
or  nut  is  more  often  introduced  to  help  the  optative  expression, 
but  is  not  indispensable :  thus,  mdren  mx  nur  ben  53er\i  t)orI'.ei 
[Jiow  happy  1  should  be]  if  we  were  only  past  the  hill!  fonnf  i(^ 
tnit  if  I  coidd  hut  go  along  with  you  I 

b.  The  conclusion  may  be  intimated  by  al§  as,  and  the  con- 
ditionality  of  the  other  clause  expressed  either  by  a  conjunction, 
ob  or  tt)enn,  or  (more  commonly)  by  the  inverted  arrangement 
(4336)  of  the  clause  after  al§ : 

Thus,  i^r  etlet  [a,  al§  tDcnn  i'^r  ^^Imd  I)dttet  you  are  hurrying  as 
[you  would  do]  if  you  had  wings,  er  tDiII  bie  2SaI)rI}ett  fo,  al§  ob  )ic 
5D^unge  tt)dre  he  demands  truth  in  this  way  as  [he  would  demand  it] 
if  it  were  cash,  ber  ^oben  flafft  auf,  aU  tt)dre  er  Don  ©rbfto^en  er= 
fcfliittert  the  soil  cleaves  open,  as  [it  would  do]  if  it  were  shaken 
by  earthquakes. 

c.  The  analogy  of  this  construction  calls  always  for  a  past 
tense,  but  a  present  is  sometimes  met  with,  as  if  the  phrase 
were  one  of  indirect  statement  (333)  instead  of  conditional :  thus, 
ha  voaxh  e§  mir  qI§  fbnne  id)  burd^  ben  3Boben  fel^en,  al§  fei  er  Qriine^ 
©Ia§  then  it  seemed  to  me  as  if  I  could  see  through  the  ground  as 
though  it  were  green  glass.  Occasionally,  it  really  represents  an 
indirect  phrase:  thus,  ic^  bad)te  qI§  fei  e§  .  .  .,  for  tc^  bad)te,  eg 
f ei .  .  .  -f  thought  as  if  it  were,  for  I  thought  it  was,  so  and  so. 

d.  The  conclusion  is  expressed  by  some  other  and  virtually 
equivalent  means:  thus,  \^  oebac^te,  bafern  ic^  !ein  ^Ibenteuer 
fdnbe,  ben  §eimn)eg  gu  fudjen  I  intended,  in  case  I  should  meet  with 
no  further  adventure,  to  seek  the  way  homeward. 

e.  On  the  other  hand,  the  conclusion  may  be  fully  expressed 
and  the  condition  intimated  by  some  word  or  phrase  which 
more  or  less  distinctly  implies  it : 

Thus,  D  mdre  id)  ein  Qro^er  33aum!  bann  fonnte  t^  meinc 
3tt)et(\e  au§brelten  0  that  I  were  a  big  tree !  then  [if  I  were  so] 
I  might  spread  out  my  branches,  man(^e§  bdtf  ic^  oetban;  a  lie  in 
toer  fc^eutnidjt  bie  .^often  Iwoidd  have  done  much— only,  who  does 
not  fear  the  cost?  [if  Iliad  not  feared  the  cost]^  fonft  n)dr'  er  ge=? 
|aKen  otherwise  [if  thi^  were  not  so]  he  would  have  fallen. 


332]  CONDITIONAL  SUBJUNCTIVE.  171 

f  3.f  A  yet  less  explicit  implication  of  a  condition  makes  of  the 
past  subjunctive  a. -proper  potential,  expressing  what  in  general, 
under  the  circumstances,  might,  could,  or  would  be : 

Thus,  ha^  ginge  no(^  tliat  might  answer  yet,  e§  ^tk  fic!)^§  fetner 
t)ertt)OGen  no  one  would  have  presumed  to  do  so,  e^  fonnte  mi(^ 
retten  it  might  be  able  to  rescue  me,  iiinun  \l)x  jeben  ©tadjcl,  ber 
t)ertt)unbcn  fonnte  take  from  it  (222.1.3)  everij  sting  that  should  be 
able  to  wound. 

a.  The  potential  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  in  place  of  an 
indicative,  when  it  is  desired  to  soften  the  positiveness  of  an 
assertion:  thus,  [i^  bdc^te  I  should  think,  for  I  think,  id)  niod)te 
I  should  like  (255.2),  ic^  mdre  faft  Qegen  ^^aumftdmme  angerannt^ 
I  came  near  r^unning  against  trunks  of  trees. 

4.  Analogous,  on  the  other  hand,  with  the  clause  expressing 
the  condition  in  the  hypothetical  period,  are  occasional  phrases 
like  e§  n3irb  nadjgea'^mt,  tt)are  e§  nur  mtt  eintQen  ,^utfd)en  it  is 
imitated,  were  it  only  with  a  few  carriages,  BefonbcrS,  iDcnn  er  ]\^ 
t)er)c^o))en  ^aben  lollte  especially  if  he  should  chance  to  have  ex^ 
hausted  his  ammunition. 

5.  Akin  with  the  potential  and  hypothetical  uses  of  the  sub- 
junctive are  the  following  more  special  cases : 

a.  The  subjunctive  present  is  used  in  a  clause  involving  an 
indefinite  relative  pronoun  or  conjunction  {whoever,  however, 
etc.):  thus,  tDie  and)  ber  menidjlid)e  manfe  however  human  (will) 
may  waver,  jo  flein  fie  auc^  fei  however  small  it  be,  auf  melc^e  ^rt 
e§  jci  in  whatever  way  it  may  be. 

b.  The  subjunctive,  present  or  past,  is  used  after  ba^,  auf  ha%, 
bamtt  in  order  that,  to  express  the  end  had  in  view,  or  sought  to 
be  attained:  thus,  loft  mir  ha^  ^zx^  '^ci^  ic^  "^ci^  cure  riil^re  relieve 
my  heart,  that  I  may  move  yours,  er  tuunfd}te  gu  regieren,  nur  bamit 
ber  (S^ute  ungel)tnbert  gut  fein  moc^te  he  desired  to  rule  only  in  order 
that  the  good  might  be  able  to  be  good  without  hindrance. 

The  tense  is  governed  by  the  requirements  of  the  sense,  gen- 
erally according  with  that  of  the  preceding  verb. 

c.  In  these,  as  in  other  constructions,  the  indicative  is  also 
met  with,  especially  after  bamtt:  thus,  U)a§  au(^  bie  ©innlic^feit 
gu  t^un  gebrdngt  ift  whatever  our  sensuousness  is  impelled  to  do, 
bamit  man  bicje  ©tabt  einne!)men  !ann  that  the  city  may  be  (where- 
with it  is  able  to  be)  captured,  baj^  icber  Quell  Oerfiegt  that  every 
fountain  may  dry  up  (so  that  every  fount  sliall  d^y  up). 


172  USES  OP  THE  FORMS  OP  CONJUGATION.  [332- 

d.  A  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  dependent  substantive  clause 
(generally  after  tia^  that)  to  denote  something  that  is  provided 
for  or  looked  forward  to,  regarded  as  of  probable,  desirable,  or 
suitable  occurrence :  thus,  er  mu^te  bleiben  bi§  (or  big  ba^)  bie 
glut^en  [gluten]  \\^  Derltefen  he  had  to  remain  till  the  floods  should 
subside,  e§  lag  i^m  baran,  ba^  ber  Sriebe  ni(^t  unterbroc^en  tt)erbe 
he  was  anxious  that  the  peace  should  not  be  broken,  e§  gel^ort  ftc^, 
t)a^  bag  ^eburfnip  [^ebiirfnig]  befriebigt  tDerbe  it  is  proper  that  the 
want  be  satisfied. 

In  some  of  its  forms,  this  construction  passes  over  into  that 
of  the  subjunctive  of  indirect  statement  (see  the  next  paragraph), 
after  verbs  of  wishing,  anticipating,  and  the  like. 

[Exercise   28.     Subjunctive    as    Optative,   Conditional,    and 

Potential.] 

333.    The  Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Statement. 

1.  By  a  construction  which  has  only  partial  analogies  in  Eng- 
lish, the  German  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  express  a  thought 
indirectly,  as  reported,  recognized,  or  contemplated  by  some 
one. 

Thus,  er  antmortcte,  er  a^tt  5rtebri(6  unb  miinjc^e  ben  grie= 
ben  he  answered  that  he  esteemed  Frederick  and  desired  peace, 
\mx  miff  en  !aum,  mag  ju  tftun  ]i\  we  hardly  know  what  is  to  be 
done,  benft  man  er  ge^e  meg  if  one  thinks  he  is  going  away,  man 
fieftt  glelcf),  me^  ©inneg  ber  ©err  f  ei  one  sees  at  once  of  what  mind 
the  master  is. 

2.  Such  a  subjunctive  stands  always  in  a  (logically)  dependent 
substantive  clause.  The  use  of  this  mode  more  fully  sub- 
ordinates the  clause  to  the  action  of  the  verb  in  the  other  clause, 
upon  which  it  depends,  relieving  the  speaker  from  responsibility 
for  it  or  concern  with  it. 

3.  Verbs  most  often  followed  by  the  subjunctive  of  indirect 
statement  are  especially — 

a.  Verbs  that  signify  imparting,  in  every  form,  as  statement, 
report,  assertion,  confession,  reminding,  and  the  like. 

b.  Verbs  that  signify  apprehension,  as  perceiving,  knowing, 
feeling,  calling  to  mind,  imagining,  concluding,  and  the  Hke. 

c.  Verbs  that  signify  contemplation  with  feelings  of  various 
kinds,  as  belief,  doubt,  dread,  wonder,  joy,  sorrow,  wish,  hope. 


333]  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  mDIEECT  STATEMENT.  173 

Some  of  these  verbs  complicate  the  idea  of  indirectness  with 
that  of  desire,  doubt,  or  conditionality,  as  expressed  by  the 
subjunctive  in  its  other  uses. 

d.  The  verb  upon  which  the  clause  of  indirect  statement 
depends  is  sometimes  unexpressed,  being  inferred  from  the 
connection:  thus,  bie  ;^ateinec murben  ftart  derfolGt,  tDcil  jener  fie  gu 
fel^r  Begiinftigt  ^aht  the  Latins  were  severely  persecuted,  because 
(it  was  claimed  that)  he  had  favored  them  too  much. 

e.  Or,  the  clause  is  dependent  on  a  noun  of  kindred  meaning 
with  the  verbs  above  mentioned :  thus,  au§  33ef  orgntB  [^^ef  orfltti^], 
ba6  er  Unruften  erregen  tDcrbe  out  of  apprehension  that  he  would 
stir  up  disorders,  unter  bem  SSormanb,  cr  {)  a  b  e  friifter  befd)tr)oren 
aHe§  angugeigen  under  the  pretext  that  he  had  earlier  taken  oath  to 
denounce  everything,  bie  ^ad)ri(^t,  ha^  er  fie  in§  ©efdngni^  [(55e=' 
fcingniS]  getDorfen  ^abe  the  news  that  he  had  thrown  them  into 
prison. 

4.  a.  Eegularly  and  ordinarily,  the  verb  in  the  indirect  state- 
ment has  the  same  tense  as  it  would  have  if  the  statement  were 
made  directly,  by  the  person  and  under  the  circumstances  con- 
templated. 

Thus,  fie  glaubten,  ha^  e§  voaf^t  f  ei  they  believed  that  it  was  true 
(since  they  would  have  said  ''we  believe  that  it  is  true'');  er  ttnt== 
tuortete,  er  f  ei  nic^t  gefommen,  (Sftriften  feinblid)  angugreifen,  fonbern 
tt)erbe  nur  (SJetDalt  mil  (S^etDdt  guriidheiben  he  answered,  he  was 
not  ("I  am  not'')  come  to  attack  Christians,  but  would  only  (''I 
shall  only")  repel  violence  with  violence;  balb  fragte  man  nidjt 
me'^r,  mx  mitgebe,  fonbern  n^er  guriidbleibe  soon  it  was  no  longer 
asked  w1k>  was  going  along  ("  who  is  going  ?  "),  but  who  was  stay- 
ing (''who  is  staying?")  behind;  ic^  I)abe  gen:)iinfd^t,er  f  olle  fid)  auf 
Sleifen  begeben  I  have  wished  that  he  should  betake  himself  to 
journeying. 

b.  Hence,  the  use  of  the  present,  perfect,  and  future  sub- 
junctive in  indirect  statement  is  much  more  frequent  than  that 
of  the  preterit  and  pluperfect  and  of  the  conditional.    But — 

c.  The  past  tenses  are  used,  when  they  would  have  been  used 
(either  as  indicative  or  as  subjunctive)  in  the  corresponding 
statement  made  directly  :  thus,  cr  uninfd)te,  bag  er  auf  bem  33oben 
geblieben  mdre  he  wished  he  had  remained  in  the  garret,  mcr  fann 
n)tffen,  n)a§  ntd)t  3<^iTiiinb  glaublid)  fdube  who  can  tell  what  some- 
body might  not  think  credible?  be§  (Sjefiible^,  baJ5  nid)t§  im  Sebcn 
rec^t  gefd)dbe  luenn  e§  bloji  gefc^dbe  of  the  feeling  that  nothing  in 
life  would  be  done  rightly  if  it  should  be  simply  done. 


174  tsEs  01*  a^HE  eorms  o^  ooNJuaAHOi?.        [333* 

Barely,  on  the  other  hand,  a  subjunctive  of  indirect  statement 
is  forced  out  of  the  past  tense  which  it  should  have  into  the 
present,  as  the  more  usual:  tense  belonging  to  the  indirect 
construction. 

d.  Moreover,  in  a  clause  dependent  on  a  verb  of  past  tense, 
the  subjunctive  is  quite  often  put  in  the  past  (as  it  always  is  in 
English),  contrary  to  strict  rule:  thus,  fieglaubteu  e§  tDdrc  (for 
fei)  C>ci^nen^ef rfjrei  they  thought  it  was  the  crowing  of  cocks,  jte  frag- 
ten  o6  fie  re(^t  mii^te  (for  tutfje)  mx  i^r  Wann  tucirc  (for  fei) 
tliey  asked  whether  she  really  knew  who  her  husband  was,  ging  bei 
mir  3u  Silat^  [9tat],  oB  ic^  fie  medte  (for  merfe)  t^k  counsel  with 
myself,  whether  I  should  wake  her. 

e.  This  assimilation  of  the  subjunctive  in  tense  to  the  verb  on 
which  it  depends  is,  in  general,  much  more  common  in  the 
more  careless  and  less  dignified  styles  of  writing,  and  in  col- 
loquial discourse,  than  in  higher  styles.  But  it  is  occasionally 
met  with  in  every  style,  sometimes  without  special  assignable 
cause,  sometimes  where  a  present  subjunctive  form  would  not 
be  distinguishable  from  an  indicative,  or  where  a  clause  is 
dependent  on  another  dependent  clause,  and  needs  to  be 
distinguished  from  the  latter  in  construction:  thus,  er  Bot  burc^ 
©efanbte  an,  bie  giirften  moc^ten  (for  mogen,  which  would  be  in^ 
dicative  as  well)  felbft  entfc^eiben,  tr)a§  er  red)tmd§ig  befd^e  he 
offered  through  embassadors  that  the  princes  might  themselves 
decide  what  he  rightfully  possessed. 

5.  The  indicative  may  also  be  used  in  phrases  similar  to  those 
above  cited,  mostly  with  an  impUcation  of  actuality,  as  recog- 
nized by  the  speaker  also :  thus,  roer  toei^,  lt)0  bir  beln  (^\Mt 
Blii^t  who  knows  where  thy  fortune  is  blooming  for  thee  (as it 
surely  is  blooming  somewhere)?  man  mu^te  glauben,  ha^  er  DoHig 
t)ergeffen  toar  one  could  not  but  believe  that  he  was  wholly  for- 
gotten, er  t)ertt)etlte,  bi§  er  fi(^  iibergeugt  IjatU,  ha^  !eincr  Don  ben 
f einen  j  u r ii  tf  b  It  e b  he  delayed  till  he  was  persuaded  that  none  of 
his  men  was  left  behind. 

But  the  difference  of  implication  is  often  very  indistinct,  and 
the  choice  between  the  two  modes  depends  in  part  upon  the 
style  used :  too  nice  a  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  easy  or  col- 
loquial discourse  would  be  thought  finical  and  pedantic. 

6.  The  elliptical  use  of  the  subjunctive  of  indirect  statement 
with  optative  meaning,  or  to  express  a  wish,  has  been  referred 
to  above  (331.2):  thus,  o  bafj  fie  emtg  griinen  bliebe  0  that  it 


335]  OONDITIONAL.  175 

might  ever  continue  to  flourish !   [i.  e.  id)  mb(f)te,  ba^  . , . ,  I  should 
wish  that . . .). 

7.  A  past  subjunctive  tense  is  sometimes  used  interrogatively, 
by  way  of  questioning  or  disputing  something  supposed  to  have 
been  asserted:  thus,  hn  l^dtteft  e§  Qefagt?  bu  l^aft  mir  ni(^t§  Qefafit 
[is  it  claimed  tJiat]  you  have  said  so  ?  you  have  said  yiothing  to  me, 
gaftfreunblid)  ftdtte  ^nglanb  m^  empfangen?  that  England  had 
received  me  Jiospltably  ? 

[Exercise  29.    Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Statement.] 

Conditional. 

334.  The  conditional  tenses  are,  in  form,  subjunctive 
preterits  corresponding  to  the  future  as  a  present:  thus,  er 
tt)irb  Ueben  he  is  about  to  love,  er  irerbe  lieben  he  may  he  about  to 
love,  er  tDiirbe  Ueben  he  might  oy  would  be  about  to  love. 

Their  proper  significance,  then,  is  that  of  contingent  futurity, 
such  a  potentiality  as  may  be  signified  by  a  tense  past  in  form. 
In  this  they  coincide  (as  appears  from  the  rules  and  examples 
given  above,  332)  with  the  past  subjunctive  tenses,  preterit  and 
pluperfect.    In  fact — 

335.  1.  The  conditional  corresponds  in  meaning  with  the 
preterit  and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  being  an  admissible  sub- 
stitute for  these  tenses  in  some  of  their  uses. 

a.  Especially,  in  the  conclusion  (apodosis)  of  a  complete 
hypothetical  period  (332.1):  thus,  lebteft  hn  noc^,  \^  tDiirbe  bi(^ 
It  e  b  e  n  t)on  biefer  Sett  wert  thou  yet  alive,  I  should  love  thee  hence- 
forth, !cine§  toiirbe  lenfjam  oenuQ  jein,  menu  tDU'  blo^  fein^afein 
in  ber  §anb  ncn)a^r  n)urben  none  would  be  manageable  enough,  if 
we  were  mei^ely  aware  of  its  presence  in  the  hand. 

b.  In  a  conclusion  with  condition  only  intimated  (332.2e) : 
thus,  bie  35ogel  tDiirben  bann  defter  in  meinen  S^Jeigen  bauen  in 
that  case  (if  this  were  so)  the  birds  would  build  nests  in  my 
branches,  prob'  e§  lieber  nic^t,  benn  bu  njiirbej't  gerfi^ellt  ttjerben 
rather,  do  not  try  it;  for  (if  thou  didst  try  it)  thou  wouldst  be 
dashed  in  pieces. 

c.  In  a  more  strictly  potential  construction  (332.3) :  thus,  \x^ 
crnftUc^  5U  me^ren  ttiiirbe  ]d)x  Getdt)rlid)  fein  to  defend  one's 
self  seriously  woidd  be  very  dangerous,  ba§  tDiirbe  un§  gu  tDeit 
f  ii  1^  r  e  n  that  would  lead  us  too  far. 

2.  The  use  of  the  conditional  is  much  less  frequent  than  that 
of  the  past  subjunctive  tenses  in  the  constructions  above  ex- 


176  USES  OF  THE  FOEMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [335- 

plained.  While  the  two  are  so  nearly  equivalent  that  the  sub- 
junctive may  usually  be  put  in  place  of  the  conditional,  they  are 
not  absolutely  identical  in  sense ;  the  conditional  may  some- 
times be  preferred  where  the  idea  of  futurity  is  prominent  (as 
in  the  first  example  above,  under  a) — as  also  for  formal  reasons, 
where  the  subjunctive  verb  would  not  be  plainly  distinguished 
from  an  indicative  (as  in  the  first  example  under  b). 

336.  The  conditional  is  sometimes  employed  in  indirect 
statement  in  place  of  the  future  subjunctive,  in  the  same  manner 
as  a  preterit  subjunctive  for  a  present  (333.4:C?)— that  is  to  say, 
with  the  value  of  a  past  subjunctive  to  the  future:  thus,  er 
tDu^te,  ba§  biefe  ^nerbietungen  ben  touggug  nic^t  aufl)alten 
U)  ii  r  b  e  n  (for  tuerben,  which  would  not  be  distinguishable  from 
an  indicative)  he  knew  that  these  offers  would  not  detain  the 
crusade. 

Imperative. 

337.  The  use  of  the  imperative  requires  no  explanation, 
being  the  same  in  German  as  in  English. 

a.  With  the  proper  imperative  persons  (the  second  persons 
singular  and  plural)  the  subject  pronouns,  bu  and  \t)x,  may  be 
either  expressed  or  omitted  :  if  expressed,  they  follow  the  verb. 

&.  For  the  use  of  the  present  subjunctive  as  imperative  in  the 
third  persons  singular  and  plural  and  the  first  plural,  see  331.1c. 

338.  Besides  the  phrases  mentioned  at  243.1  as  employed 
imperatively,  the  present,  indicative,  or  the  future  indicative, 
sometimes  intimates  a  peremptory  order,  as  if  from  one  whose 
simple  word  is  equivalent  to  a  command  ;  the  past  participle 
has,  elliptically  (see  359.3),  a  similar  force  ;  and  the  infinitive  is 
used,  dialectically  or  colloquially,  with  the  same  meaning  (347.2). 

Infinitive. 

339.  The  infinitive  is  properly  the  verbal  noun,  and  all  its 
uses  grow  out  of  its  value  as  such. 

340.  1.  Any  infinitive  is  capable  of  use  directly  as  a  noun, 
either  with  or  without  an  article  or  other  limiting  words.  Such 
a  noun  is  always  of  the  neuter  gender  (61.3c),  and  declined  ac- 
cording to  the  first  declension,  first  class  (76) ;  and,  having  the 
value  of  an  abstract,  it  very  seldom  forms  a  plural. 

Thus,  ©otteSldftern,  Siiaen,  ^Jiorben  unb  ©te^leti  ftat  iiber^anb 
Qenommen  blasphemy,  lying,  murdering,  and  stealing  have  become 


343]  mPiNiTiVE.  177 

prevalent,  ml^  ein  %ppti\i  gum  ©d)maufen  what  an  appetite  for 
feasting !  er  fing  tuieber  mit  feinem  Mfeli*^  ^oflidjen  ©ru^en  an  he 
began  again  with  his  odiously  polite  greeting. 

2.  As  the  examples  show,  such  a  noun  is  more  usually  to  be 
rendered  by  our  verbal  noun  in  ing  (which  we  often  call  "  par- 
ticipial infinitive,"  although  in  truth  it  is  quite  another  word 
than  the  present  participle);  but  also,  not  rarely,  by  other 
verbal  derivatives. 

3.  There  are  some  nouns,  originally  infinitives,  which  are  in 
such  constant  use  as  to  have  won  an  independent  value  as 
nouns :  such  are  SeBen  Ufe,  ©ntfe^en  horror,  ^^nbenfen  memorial, 
and  so  on. 

341.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  preposition  gu  to,  which 
was  originally  used  only  in  its  proper  prepositional  sense  with 
the  infinitive,  governing  the  latter  as  it  would  govern  any  other 
noun  under  similar  circumstances,  has  now  become  attached  as 
a  kind  of  fixed  accompaniment,  or  sign,  to  the  infinitive  in  a 
great  part  of  its  uses  ;  and  therefore,  in  describing  the  different 
infinitive  constructions,  it  becomes  necessary  to  distinguish 
between  the  cases  in  which  gu  is  employed  and  those  in  which 
it  is  omitted. 

342.  T/ie  Infinitive  as  subject  of  a  verb. 

The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  gu,  is  often  employed  as 
the  subject  of  a  verb. 

Thus,  mad^jen,  groS  unb  alt  merben,  ba§  ifl  ba§  eingig  ©(^one  to 
grow,  to  become  big  and  old — that  is  the  only  fine  thing,  xoo  getaufc^t 
gu  tDcrben  ung  '^eilfamer  tt)ar  where  to  be  deceived  was  more  ad- 
vantageous for  lis,  mitjolc^en  tft  nicf)t  gut  in  ber^Jd^e  tdmp^ixi  fight- 
ing at  close  quarters  with  such  men  is  not  good,  gefd^rlici)  i]T§  ben 
Sen  gu  toerfen  it  is  dangerous  to  wake  the  lion. 

a.  The  infinitive  as  subject  is  in  the  great  majority  of  cases 
accompanied  by  gu. 

b.  More  usually  (as  the  examples  show),  the  infinitive  stands 
as  logical  subject,  the  verb  taking  in  addition  e§  it  or  ba§  that, 
or  the  like  (especially  the  first),  as  impersonal  or  indefinite 
grammatical  subject  (compare  295). 

343.  The  Infinitive  as  object,  or  dependent  on  another  verb. 
I.  The  infinitive  without  gu  is  directly  dependent  on — 

1.  The  various  auxiliaries:  as,  merben,  the  auxiliary  of  the 
future  and  conditional  tenses  (240.2) ;  I)al)en,  the  auxiliary  of 


178  USES  OP  THE  FORMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  343- 

the  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses,  in  the  cases  where  the  infin- 
itive is  used  instead  of  the  past  participle  in  forming  those 
tenses  (240.1c) ;  the  auxiliaries  of  mode  (242.1) ;  if)\in,  when  used 
as  auxiliary  in  the  sense  of  our  do  (242.3) ;  laffen,  as  causative 
auxiUary  (242.2) :  see  below,  5. 

2.  §aBen  have,  in  certain  phrases,  with  an  adjective:  thus,  bu 
l}a\i  gut  reben  that  is  easy  to  say  (i.  e.  thou  hast  talking  good,  makest 
an  easy  thing  of  talking). 

3.  2!^un,  and  a  few  other  verbs,  followed  by  ni(f)t§  al§  nothing 
[else]  than,  nothing  but:  thus,  er  t^at  m6)i§  al§  fie  anfrf)auen  he 
did  nothing  hut  look  at  her,  e§  foftet  m^\^  al§  bie  ©emeinc  fein  fiir 
aUc  it  costs  nothing  but  being  the  common  one  for  all 

4.  Semen  learn:  thus,  er  ftatte  ha^  ©utc  toiirbiflen  gelernt  he  had 
learned  to  value  what  was  good. 

5.  A  number  of  verbs  admit  an  infinitive  in  the  manner  of  a 
second  object,  along  with  their  ordinary  object :  these  are  tjei^en 
call,  bid,  nennen  call,  lel^ren  teach,  !)elfen  help,  madden  make,  lajfen 
allow,  cause,  and  a  few  that  denote  perception  by  the  senses, 
namely  f eften  (and  rarely  f d)auen)  see,  ^oren  hear,  \ixijkn  feel,  and 
finben  find. 

Thus,  er  l^et^t  i^n  tueber  Soften  noc^  9Jlul)e  fparen  he  bids  him 
spare  neither  expense  nor  labor,  toag  man  fo  erfennen  l^eifet  (nennt) 
what  people  call  knowing,  ba§  lel^rt  un§  beurtfteilen  [beurteilen] 
ob  . . .  that  teaches  us  to  judge  whether  . . . ,  mx  miifjen  il^m  ftelfen 
^iiten  we  must  help  him  tend  his  herd,  bie  greifteit  mad^t  end) 
[(J^njdrmen  this  freedom  makes  you  rave,  ber  ©ott,  ber  ©if  en  tcac^fen 
iie^  tlie  God  who  made  iron  grow,  er  fiel^t  fie  erbletd^en  unb  finfen 
Jin  he  sees  her  turn  pale  arid  sink  down,  \^  finbe  fie  auf  bem 
(5o|)I)a  Itegen  I  find  her  lying  on  the  sofa. 

a.  With  most  of  the  verbs  under  this  head,  the  object  taken 
along  with  the  infinitive  has  the  logical  value  of  a  subject-ac- 
cusative to  the  infinitive — which  is  the  nearest  approach  made  in 
German  to  that  construction,  familiar  in  the  classical  tongues, 
especially  in  the  Latin:  thus,  id)  ]^ore  \ia^  (^ra§  n)a(^fen  I  hear 
the  grass  grow  signifies  that  the  grass  grows,  and  that  I  per- 
ceive it  so  doing. 

This  construction,  especially  with  fejen,  l^oren,  and  laffen  (and 
by  far  oftenest  with  the  last),  is  followed  out  into  a  variety  of 
other  forms,  some  of  them  of  a  pecuhar  and  idiomatic  character : 
thus — 

b.  The  proper  object  of  the  governing  verb  is  frequently 
omitted,  and  the  infinitive  then  designates  its  action  without 


343]  INFINITIVE.  179 

reference  to  any  definite  actor :  tlius,  ic^  pre  flopfen  I  hear 
[scymeone]  knock  (hear  a  knocking),  la^t  flingeln  cause  to  ring  (let 
the  hell  he  rung),  (ag  iiberall  fiir  ba§  ^^reugfteer  in  ben  ^trc^en  beten 
cause  to  pray  for  the  C7'usading  army  everywhere  in  the  churches 
(let  it  he  prayed  for). 

c.  If,  tlien,  tlie  infinitive  itself  talies  an  object,  the  construc- 
tion is  equivalent  to  one  in  which  that  object  is  directly  de- 
pendent upon  the  governing  verb,  and  is  the  subject-accusative 
of  the  infinitive  taken  as  an  infinitive  passive ;  and  it  is  gener- 
ally best  so  rendered :  thus,  i^  :^i3re  eu(^  ieben  %aQ  ^reifen  I  hear 
you  to  he  praised  evay  day  (hear  [them]  praise  you),  er  lie^  bie 
brei  Ulinge  fiir  einen  mad)en  he  caused  the  three  rings  to  he  made  in 
place  of  one  (caused  to  make  them). 

d.  That  the  construction  has  in  fact,  in  the  apprehension  of 
those  who  use  the  language,  been  virtually  converted  into  a 
passive  one,  and  the  real  object  of  the  infinitive  transferred  to 
the  governing  verb,  is  shown  by  the  circumstance  that  that 
object,  when  designating  the  same  person  or  thing  with  the 
subject  of  the  verb,  is  expressed  by  the  reflexive  instead  of  the 
personal  pronoun :  thus,  er  moflte  fid)  nid)t  ^alten  (affen  he  would 
not  let  himself  he  held  (instead  of  would  not  allow  [any  5ne]  to 
hold  him),  \ia^  Id^t  f  i  ^  '^oren  that  lets  itself  he  heard  (i.  e.  is  worth 
hearing),  al§  er  fid)  eltca^  t)DrIcfen  Ue§  as  he  was  having  some- 
thing read  aloud,  to  himself,  er  la^t  oft  Don  fid)  Ijoren  he  lets  himself 
he  often  heard  from,  (lets  [ms*]  often  hear  from  him).  Occasionally, 
the  logical  object  of  laffen  is  even  added  in  the  form  of  a 
prepositional  adjunct :  thus,  fie  lie^en  fid)  b  u  r  d)  bie  '^a&^t 
nid)t  abl)alten  they  did  not  suffer  themselves  to  he  restrained  hy  the 
gwards— instead  of  fie  lie^en  bie  "^a^z  fie  nid)t  abl^alten  they  did 
not  suffer  the  guards  to  restrain  them. 

6.  Special  and  more  anomalous  cases  are — an  infinitive 
in  the  sense  of  a  present  participle  after  bleiben  remain:  thus, 
fie  biieben  im  Staffer  fteden  they  remained  sticking  in  the  water; 
and  after  ^aben  with  a  direct  object :  thus,  er  ftat  SBeiii  im  teller 
Itegen  he  has  wine  lying  in  his  cellar : — an  infinitive  of  purpose 
(below,  III.l)  without  gu  in  a  few  phrases :  as,  la^  fie  betteln  gebn 
let  them  go  hegging !  er  legt  fic^  fd)Iafen  he  lays  himself  down  to 
sleep; — andfpajieren  to  he  out  for  pleasure  or  exercise  (expatiate) 
after  a  verb  expressing  the  kind  of  motion :  as,  ic^  reitc,  faftre, 
ge^e  f])a3ieren  I  ride,  drive,  or  walk  out  for  pleasure. 


180  USES  OF  THE  EOKMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [343- 

II.  The  infinitive  with  311  is  often  construed  as  a  direct  object : 

1.  As  the  sole  object  of  a  considerable  number  of  verbs,  es- 
pecially of  verbs  whose  action  points  forward  to  something  as 
to  be  attained  or  done :  for  example,  such  as  signify  begin,  un- 
dertake, endeavor,  venture,  plan,  hope,  desire,  promise,  refrain  ; 
and  some  others. 

2.  Along  with  an  indirect  personal  object,  with  verbs  signify- 
ing command,  permit,  impute,  forbid,  and  the  like. 

Thus,  er  fieBot  mir  gii  fi^njeigen  he  commanded  me  to  remain 
silent,  bie  2Bad)e  eriaubt  31iemanben  tjorsutreten  the  guard  allows 
no  one  to  step  forward. 

III.  The  infinitive  with  gu  is  construed  in  the  manner  of  an 
indirect  object : 

1.  To  express  the  purpose  or  design  of  an  action :  thus,  t(J) 
bin  md}t  ha  3ftdt:^fel  [3^dtfel]  gu  Ii3fen  lam  not  here  to  solve  riddles, 
bie  D[Reere  311  Befreien,  foflten  aHe  Scinber  eroBert  ttjerben  to  free  the 
seas,  all  lands  were  to  he  subdued. 

a.  This  comes  nearest  to  the  original  and  proper  purpose  of 
an  infinitive  with  ju  to,  in  order  to,  for  to.  The  same  meaning  is 
conveyed  more  explicitly  by  prefixing  um  (see  below,  346.1). 

h.  "feie  infinitive  stands  thus  often  after  fetn  to  he  and  ftet)en 
stand,  with  the  logical  value  of  an  infinitive  passive :  thus,  ba 
tuar  fo  t)iele»  311  fe'^cn  there  was  so  much  there  to  he  seen  (so  much 
for  seeing,  as  object  for  sight). 

This  construction  in  itself  evidently  admits  of  either  an  active 
or  a  passive  interpretation,  according  as  the  thing  mentioned  is 
put  forward  as  subject  or  object  of  the  verbal  action  conveyed 
by  the  infinitive.  German  usage  merely  adopts  the  latter 
alternative. 

c.  §aBen,  with  a  following  infinitive  and  gu,  also  sometimes 
forms  a  phrase  in  which  what  is  properly  the  object  of  ^abzn  is 
regarded  and  treated  as  if  dependent  on  the  other  verb  :  thus, 
n)ir  5aBen  ben  (^^orfo  gu  Befc^reiben  we  have  to  describe  the  Corso 
(have  Che  Corso  for  describing,  or  as  theme  for  description); — the 
object  may  even  be  omitted,  or  an  intransitive  infinitive  em- 
ployed, leaving  to  !^aben  simply  the  idea  of  necessity :  thus,  er 
^at  ntd^t  me^r  gu  fiirc^ten  he  no  longer  has  [aught]  to  fear. 

2.  In  other  relations  such  as  are  ordinarily  expressed  by  a 
remoter  object,  or  a  prepositional  phrase  having  the  value  of 
such  an  object,  after  verbs  intransitive  or  transitive :  thus,  al^ 


345]  INFINITIVE.  181 

er  iam  gu  fterBen  when  he  came  to  die  (to  dying),  ha  treiBf  §  i!)n,  ben 
^rei§  gu  ermerBen  then  he  feels  impelled  to  gain  thepii-ze,  man  9e= 
lt)oI)nt  e§  ftill  5U  fte'^en  ^^  is  trained  to  stand  still,  m^t  barf  x^  bir  au 
Qleic^en  mi(^  t)ermefien  /ma?/  not  presume  to  be  like  thee,  tDirfreucn 
un§,  ba§  gu  Wren  w;e  rejoice  at  hearing  that,  er  rul^t  iiic^t  bie  ©tabt 
SU  t)ersieren  he  ceases  (rests)  not  to  adorn  the  city,  ba§  (^ebrdnge 
flinbert  i^n  gu  flie^cn  the  crowd  forbids  (hinders)  him  to  fly. 

As  the  examples  show,  the  infinitive  in  this  construction, 
though  it  often  has  the  value  of  a  dative,  which  its  governing 
preposition  gu  to  best  fits  it  to  fill,  is  also  sometimes  used  in 
the  manner  of  a  genitive,  or  of  an  "ablative"  (expressing  the 
from  relation). 

[Exercise  30.    The  Infinitive  as  Subject  and  Object.] 

344.     The  Infinitive  as  adjunct  to  an  Adjective. 

1.  The  infinitive,  always  with  its  sign  gu,  is  used  as  limiting 
adjunct  especially  to  adjectives  denoting  possibility,  ease  or 
difficulty,  obligation,  desire,  readiness,  and  the  like — to  such,  in 
general,  as  point  forward,  to  something  to  be  attained  or  done. 

Thus,  bereit  ben  ^fetl)er  gn  burc^bringen  ready  to  penetrate  the 
ether,  leic^t  gu  frf)affen  easy  to  obtain,  bange,  feinen  ©(^mud  gu  t)er* 
lieren  afraid  of  losing  his  adornment. 

2.  Many  adjectives  when  qualified  by  gu  too  or  genug,  etc. 
enough,  sufficiently,  become  capable  of  taking  an  infinitive  as 
adjunct :  thus,  mdrf)ttg  genug,  bie  grogtcn  ^l)iere  [^tere]  gu  tobten 
[tbten]  poiuerful  enough  to  kill  the  largest  animals,  gu  flein  ben 
3ftaum  gu  fiiden  too  small  to  fill  the  space. 

But  after  gu  and  an  adjective,  the  infinitive  governed  by  um 
(346.1),  or  an  awkward  and  illogical  construction  with  al^  ha^ 
than  that  is  more  frequent. 

Compare  the  power  to  govern  a  dative  given  to  an  adjective 
by  the  same  quahfying  words  (223.5) ;  the  cases  are  plainly 
analogous,  the  gu  in  such  infinitive  combinations  having  its 
proper  prepositional  force. 

345.     The  Infinitive  as  adjunct  to  a  Noun. 

The  infinitive,  always  accompanied  by  gu,  is  often  dependent 
upon  a  noun. 

The  cases  of  such  infinitives  may  be  classified  under  three 
heads : 


182  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [345- 

1.  The  governing  noun  is  one  related  in  meaning  to  the  verbs 
and  adjectives  already  specified  as  admitting  a  dependent  in- 
finitive :  thus,  (Jrlaubni^  [@rlaubnt§]  ben  53aum  gu  |)Iunbern  ver- 
misswn  to  plunder  the  tree,  o^nc  ^offnung  aufgufte^en  without  hope 
to  rise  again  (of  rising),  bie  33eaierbe,  fie  gu  tt)ec!en  the  desire  to 
awaken  her,  ben  33orjd)Iag,  feine  ©fil^ne  aBgufenben  the  proposal  to 
send  off  his  sons. 

2.  The  preposition  gu  has  nearly  its  proper  meaning  as  con- 
necting the  infinitive  with  the  noun:  thus,  3eit,  fic^  gu  ergo^en 
time  to  please  one's  self  (for  pleasing),  Wntl)  [DJ^ut],  mi(^  in  bie 
SBelt  gu  tnagen  courage  for  venturing  into  the  world,  ber  ^ugenblid 
gu  reben  the  moment  for  talking. 

3.  The  infinitive  represents  a  genitive,  most  often  a  genitive 
of  equivalence  (216.2e),  or  has  the  logical  value  of  an  added  ex- 
planation of  the  governing  noun :  thus,  bie  (5(^lt)a(^^eit,  jebem  gu 
Derfpred^en  the  weakness  of  promising  to  each  one,  ein  ©efii^I  be§ 
58erbtenfte§,  biefe  gauge  ^'o^z  au^gufiillen  a  feeling  of  the  merit  of 
filling  out  this  whole  height. 

These  classes,  however,  variously  cross  and  pass  into  each 
other. 

346.    The  Infinitive  governed  by  a  Preposition. 

1.  Only  three  prepositions— namely,  um  in  order,  o^ne  without, 
ftatt  or  anftatt  i'nstead — are  allowed  in  German  directly  to  govern 
the  infinitive  (preceded  by  its  sign  gu). 

They  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  infinitive  clause,  pre- 
ceding all  the  words  dependent  on  or  limiting  the  infinitive, 
which  stands  last,  always  with  gu  next  before  it,  and  which  is 
ordinarily  to  be  rendered  (except  after  um)  by  our  infinitive  in 
ing:  thus,  iebermann  fommt,  um  gu  |e!)en  ober  gefe^en  gu  merben 
every  one  comes  in  order  to  see  or  to  he  seen,  o^ne  euc^  ft^mer  gu 
t)er!Iagen  without  accusing  you  sorely,  anftatt  aber  bie  I)ieburd) 
ergeugte  giinftige  ©timmung  gu  benu^en  instead,  however,  of  im- 
proving the  favorable  state  of  mind  thus  brought  about. 

2.  With  other  prepositions,  when  a  similar  expression  is  re- 
quired, the  infinitive  clause  is  represented  beforehand  by  a  ba 
or  bar  in  composition  with  the  preposition,  and  then  itself  fol- 
lows, as  if  in  apposition  with  this  ba. 

Thus,  fie  maren  nabe  b ar an,  auf  ibn  gu  treten  tlwy  luere  near  to 
treading  on  him  (near  to  this — viz.  to  tread  on  him),  htVda1i)xit  m\6) 
b  a  t)  0  r,  bie  Matter  an  ben  ^ufen  fetbft  gu  legen  saved  me  from 


348]  INFINITIVE.  183 

laying  the  adder  to  my  own  bosom  (from  this— viz.  to  lay  etc.),  fie 
brangen  barauf,  \\6)  red^t§  gu  wenben  they  insisted  on  turning 
to  the  right. 

a.  Such  a  phrase  as  they  insisted  on  his  turning  to  the  rights 
where  the  subject  of  the  action  signified  by  the  participial  infin- 
itive is  different  from  that  of  the  verb  with  which  this  is  con- 
nected by  the  preposition,  cannot  be  expressed  in  German  by  an 
infinitive:  for  the  infinitive  clause  is  substituted  a  complete 
substantive  clause  (436.3cZ),  with  a  personal  verb  and  its  subject : 
thus,  fie  brangcn  barauf,  ^a^  er  fi(^  re(i)tg  tDenben  follte  they  insisted 
on  this — that  he  should  turn  to  the  right. 

347.  The  Infinitive  in  Absolute  Constructions. 

1.  In  various  elliptical  constructions,  chiefly  analogous  with 
such  as  are  usual  in  English  also,  the  infinitive  stands  without 
being  dependent  on  any  other  word :  thus,  tt)arum  mid)  mdtn  why 
awaken  me?  a^\  auf  ha^  mut^icje  [mutige]  3fto§  mic^  gu  fd)tt)ingen 
oh,  to  leap  upon  a  spirited  horse !  o  f  (^one§  33ilb,  gu  f  el^en  . .  .oh 
beautiful  picture!  to  see  ... ,  anbercr  3ret)el  nid)t  gu  gebenfen  not 
to  mention  other  outrages :  and  so  on. 

2.  By  a  usage  not  authorized  in  good  German  style,  an  in- 
finitive is  colloquially  used  with  an  imperative  meaning :  thus, 
ha  bleiBen  stay  there! 

348.  Infinitive  Clauses. 

1.  The  infinitive  used  directly  as  a  noun  (340)  has  the  con- 
struction of  an  ordinary  noun.  But  in  its  proper  use  as  infinitive  it 
shares  in  the  construction  of  the  verb  of  which  it  forms  a  part, 
taking  the  same  adjuncts — whether  predicate,  object,  adverb,  or 
prepositional  phrase — as  the  personal  forms  of  the  verb ;  thus 
forming  often  extended  and  intricate  infinitive  clam^es,  which 
have  the  logical  value  of  full  substantive  clauses,  and  are  ex- 
changeable with  such. 

Thus,  man  ift  befi^aftigt,  ba§  fd)one  ^flafter,  tt)o  e^  abgutt)et(5^en 
fd)eint,  mieber  neu  in  ©tanb  gu  fe^en  people  are  occupied  with  set- 
ting the  nice  pavement  newly  in  order  again,  ivJierever  it  seems 

to  be  giving  way,  or  man  ift  bamit  bef^dftigt,  ba^  man in 

©tanb  fefet. 

2.  As  a  rule,  the  infinitive  stands  last  in  such  a  clause  ;  and, 
in  general,  whatever  is  dependent  on  ^a  infinitive  is  placed 
before  it. 


184  USES  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [348- 

a.  See  the  examples  already  given.  When  two  or  three  in- 
finitives come  to  stand  together,  each  precedes  the  one  it 
depends  on,  in  the  reverse  of  the  EngUsh  order :  thus,  i^r  ^abt 
mt(^  ermorben  laffen  tt)oEen  you  have  wanted  to  cause  to  murder 
me  (have  me  murdered).  But  an  infinitive  used  as  participle 
(240.1c)  allows  nothing  to  follow  it,  and  an  auxiliary  infinitive 
must  be  placed  before  it:  thus,  \^i  tuerbet  m6)  t}ab  en  ermorben 
laffen  iDoIIen  you  will  have  wanted  etc.    Compare  439.2. 

[Exercise  31.    Infinitive  as  Adjunct  and  with  Preposition.] 

Partidxiles. 

349.  The  participles  are  properly  verbal  adjectives,  and  all 
their  uses  and  constructions  are  those  of  adjectives. 

350.  The  present  participle  has  active  force,  representing  in 
adjective  form  the  exerting  of  an  action,  or  the  continuing  of  a 
state  or  condition,  in  the  same  way  as  this  is  represented  by 
the  present  tense  of  the  verb. 

Thus,  ber  reifenbe  ^aler  the  travelling  painter  (i.  e.  the  painter 
who  travels),  eine  lieBenbe  50^utter  a  loving  motlier. 

a.  In  rare  cases,  and  by  a  license  which  is  not  approved,  a 
present  participle  is  used  passively :  thus,  eine  melfenbe  ^nt^  (eine 
^u'^  tt)el(^e  gemelft  trtrb)  a  milking  cow  (a  cow  that  is  milked),  bie 
Doriabenbe  3fieife  (bie  9leife  bie  man  l^or^at)  the  intended  journey 
(the  journey  which  one  has  before  him),  ber  betreffenbe  $un!t  the 
point  concerned. 

351.  1.  The  past  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  has  passive 
meaning,  without  any  distinct  implication  of  past  time. 

Thus,  ba§  geliebte  ^inb  the  beloved  child,  i.  e.  the  child  whom 
one  has  loved,  or  loves,  or  will  love,  according  to  the  connection 
in  which  the  term  is  used. 

a.  But  such  a  participle,  from  a  verb  denoting  a  single  act 
rather  than  a  continuous  action,  may  sometimes  be  used  with 
a  past  meaning:  thus,  ba§  gefloftlene  ^ferb  the  stolen  horse,  ber 
fletrunfene  SBein  the  imbibed  wine. 

2.  The  past  participle  of  an  intransitive  verb  has  active  mean- 
ing, and  is  for  the  most  part  employed  only  in  the  formation  of 
the  compound  tenses  of  the  verb.    But — 

a.  The  past  participle  of  a  verb  taking  fein  as  its  auxiliary 
(241.2)  may  be  used  adjectively,  with  a  distinctly  past  meaning : 


354]  PAKTICIPLES.  185 

thus,  ber  GefdHcnc  6(f)nee  (ber  (^(^nee,  H)el(^cr  Qef  alien  tft)  the  fallen 
snow. 

3.  Many  words  have  the  form  of  past  participles,  but  the 
value  of  independent  adjectives,  either  as  having  a  meaning 
which  would  not  belong  to  them  as  participles,  or  as  being  di- 
vorced from  verbs  both  in  form  and  meaning,  or  as  derived 
from  verbs  which  are  no  longer  in  use  as  verbs,  or  as  seeming 
to  imply  verbs  which  have  never  been  in  use. 

Thus,  gclet)rt  learned,  befannt  hiwwn,  t)erbroffen  listless i—tx^a- 
Ben  lofty  (erftoben  raised),  gebiefienp^^re,  sterling  (aebte^en  thriven); 
—)dzx\io\)\in  furtive,  t)erjd)ieben  different;— <^t\\xmi  starry,  beial^rt 
aged. 

a.  Such  past  participles  have  not  rarely  assumed  the  value 
of  present  participles :  thus,  Derfd^mteQen  silent,  t)erbient  deserving, 
beforgt  anxious,  |)fli(^tt)ergeffen  duty-forgetting. 

352.  The  future  passive  participle,  as  has  been  already  no- 
ticed (278),  is  formed  only  from  transitive  verbs,  and  is  not  used 
otherwise  than  attributively. 

Thus,  bie  9tDlIe  einer  auf  feme  SBeife  gu  Beru!)t(^enben  ^^xau  the 
part  of  a  woman  wJio  was  in  no  way  to  be  pacified,  bte  gleic^geittg 
angutretenben  ^ilgerfa'^rten  the  pilgrimages  to  be  entered  upon  at 
the  same  time— hut  bie  grau  ift  auf  feine  2Bei)e  gu  Beru^igen  the 
woman  is  in  no  way  to  be  pacified  (343.III.16). 

353.  The  present  participle  is  used  freely  as  an  attributive, 
and  hence  also,  like  other  attributive  adjectives,  as  a  sub- 
stantive ;  but  it  is  rarely  employed  as  a  predicate. 

Thus,  bie  jpielenben  Siiftc^en  the  sporting  breezes,  er  tt)e(fte  ben 
©c^lummernben  he  awoke  the  sleeper  (slumbering  one),  ha§  triis 
genbe  35ilb  lebenber  gutte  the  deceiving  show  of  living  f^dness,  in 
ber  §anb  be§  ©(^reibenben  ober  3Jlalenben  in  the  hand  of  the  writer 
or  painter. 

a.  But  there  are  a  number  of  present  participles  which  have 
assumed  the  value  and  character  of  adjectives,  and  admit  of 
predicative  use :  for  example,  reigenb  charming,  ■^inrei^enb  ravish- 
ing, Bebeutenb  important. 

b.  Such  constructions  as  our  he  is  loving,  they  were  going, 
though  not  unknown  in  ancient  German,  are  no  longer  in  use. 

354.  The  past  participle  (except  of  an  intransitive  having 
I)aben  as  auxiliary :  see  351.2)  is  commonly  employed  both  attrib- 


186  USES  OF  THE  FOKMS  OF  CONJUGATION.  [354- 

utively  and  predicatively,  and  may  be  used  as  a  substantive, 
like  any  other  adjective. 

Thus,  bic  berlorene  ^txi  the  hst  time,  in  mxQ  tDieberftolter  ©eftalt 
in  ever  repeated  form,  gcbt  ben  ^efangenen  lebig  set  free  tlw 
prisoner  (imprisoned  one). 

355.  Both  participles  admit  of  comparison,  or  form  a  com- 
parative and  superlative  degree,  only  so  far  as  they  lay  aside 
the  special  character  of  participles,  and  become  adjectives. 

Thus,  bebeutenbcrc  ©nmmen  more  important  sums,  t)a^  erl^abenfte 
S3ilb  the  most  majestic  image. 

356.  As  adverbs  they  are  used  rather  sparingly,  except  those 
which  have  assumed  the  value  of  adjectives. 

Thus,  au§ge3et(^net  gelel^rt  exceedingly  learned,  fiebenb  fieife 
boiling  hot,  entgudenb  oft  ravishingly  often,  i'^re  gefenft  jc!)Iummerns 
ben  35Iatter  their  droopedly  slumbering  leaves. 

357.  Both  participles  are,  especially  in  higher  styles  of  com- 
position, very  commonly  used  appositively  (110.1&),  either  alone, 
or  with  limiting  adjuncts  such  as  are  taken  by  the  personal 
forms  of  the  verb. 

Thus,  ber  TOe  fa^  !opffcf)uttelnb  nieber  the  old  man  looked  dmvn, 
shaking  his  head;  f(^lafenb  ^atte  jte  mir  fo  gef alien  she  had  so 
pleased  me  sleeping;  l^errlid^e  ^aben  befd)erenb  erfd)etnen  fie  bestow- 
ing splendid  gifts,  they  appear;  bem  33ei]'ptele  folgcnb,  empfingen 
biefe  iefet  ba§  ^reug  following  the  example,  these  now  took  the  cross; 
't)a^  §eer  t)atte,  buri^  fruc^tbare  ©egenben  t)orau§3te!)enb,  unb  reid)Ud^ 
mit  SebenSmitteln  Jjerforgt,  bie  ^rau  erreid)t  the  army,  moving  on 
through  fruitful  regions  and  abundantly  supplied  with  provmons, 
had  reached  the  Drave;  \^  bin  ctn  Sreunb  uon  (SJefc^ic^ten,  gut  er= 
Sdlblt  I  cirii  fond  of  stories,  well  told;  x\o^  lefen  uniflort  bie  ^lugen 
bie  ;3nf^rift  nic^t  my  eyes,  dimmed  with  grief,  do  not  yet  read  the 
inscription;  ic^  fntete  nieber,  t)on  SieV  unb  ^nbac^t  gang  burd)ftra^Iet 
I  kneeled  down,  quite  irradiated  with  love  and  devotion;  t)om 
^O^ei^el  befeelt,  rebet  ber  fii^lenbe  ©tein  animated  by  the  chisel,  the 
feeling  stone  speaks;  icf)  berlie^  fie  tDeinenb  Ileft  her  weeping. 

a.  Such  a  participle  or  participial  phrase  is  used  only  in  the 
sense  of  an  adjective  clause,  and  expresses  ordinarily  an  ac- 
companying circumstance,  or  describes  a  state  or  condition  ;  it 
may  not  be  used,  as  in  English,  to  signify  a  determining  cause, 
or  otherwise  adverbially :  in  such  phrases  as  not  finding  him,  I 
went  away,  walking  uprightly,  we  walk  surely^   having  saluted 


360]  PABTICIPLES.  187 

him,  we  retired,  full  adverbial  clauses  must  be  substituted  for 
the  participial  phrases:  thus,  ha  t^  x^n  ni(!)t  fanb;— tuenn  toir 
aufric^tig  tcanbeln  j  — nad^bem  mt  iftn  begrii^t  fatten. 

b.  Rarely,  however,  the  participle  approaches  a  causative 
force:  thus,  bte§  befur(i)tenb,  tbhkk  Ltotete]  er  ben  ^Beauftragten 
fearing  this,  he  slew  the  messenger.    Compare  also  431.d 

358.  The  participial  clause  follows  the  same  rule  of  arrange- 
ment as  the  infinitive  clause  (348.2) :  namely,  the  participle 
regularly  and  usually  stands  last,  being  preceded  by  all  that 
limits  it  or  is  dependent  on  it. 

a.  This  rule  is  without  exception,  when  the  participle  is  used 
attributively  (compare  147.2);  in  the  appositive  clause,  the 
participle  not  very  rarely  stands  first :  thus,  ber  britte,  mit  ben 
frofteften  ©offnunoen  beaonnene,  mit  feltener  0ufi6eit  gefii^rtc 
^reuggug  the  third  criisade,  begun  with  the  gladdest  hopes,  con- 
ducted with  rare  prudence;  in  ben  Sbeen  ber  franjofifi^en  Um- 
tt)dlgung  ern)ad)]en,  rein  ge^alten  t)on  il)ren  35erbre(5^en,  begabt  mit 
ber  ®etfte§fldrfe .  .  .  grown  up  in  the  ideas  of  the  French  revolution, 
kept  free  from  its  crimes,  gifted  with  the  strength  of  mind  . . . 

359.  Special  Uses  of  Participles.  1.  The  past  participle  is 
used  in  the  sense  of  a  present  participle,  after  one  or  two  verbs 
of  motion,  to  express  the  mode  of  motion :  thus,  f o  fam  ^^dufig 
ein  Oafe  angefprnngen  a  hare  often  came  jumping  along,  :^eulenb 
fommt  ber  ©turm  gefloQen  the  howling  storm  comes  flying. 

2.  After  a  verb  of  calling,  a  past  participle  is  occasionally 
used  in  an  infinitive  sense :  thus,  ba§  ftei^t  auc^  fiir  bie  Su'^unft 
Qeforgt  that  I  call  (is  called)  caring  for  the  future  also. 

3.  By  an  elliptical  construction,  a  past  participle  has  some- 
times the  value  of  an  imperative :  thus,  ins  x^dh,  in  bie  ^retl^ett 
QCjogen  march  forth  (let  tliere  be  marching)  into  the  field,  to  free- 
dom! ben  UlajDpen  gegdumt  [have]  the  steed  bridled!    See  230.  3c. 

[ExEBCisE  32.    Participles.] 

INDECLINABLES. 

•  360.  There  are  three  classes  of  words  not  admitting  inflec- 
tion, or  grammatical  variation  of  form  indicating  change  of 
relation  to  other  words,  and  which  are  therefore  called  indeclin- 
ables,  or  particles,    These  three  are  adverbs,  prepositions,  and 


188  INDECUNABLES.  [360- 

cjoNJUNcnoNS.  They  pass  over  into  one  another,  to  some  extent, 
the  same  word  having  often  more  than  one  oflSce. 

fit-  3a  yes  and  min  no  are  particles  which  fall  properly  into 
no  one  of  the  classes  mentioned,  each  being  by  itself  a  complete 
(abbreviated)  expression,  affirming  or  denying  a  thought  as  al- 
ready expressed  by  another. 

ADVERBS. 

361.  Adverbs  are  words  qualifying  verbs  and  adjectives,  as 
also  other  adverbs,  and  defining  some  mode  or  circumstance  of 
the 'action  or  quality  signified  by  those  parts  of  speech. 

In  certain  exceptional  cases,  adverbs  qualify  prepositions 
also :  see  369.1. 

362.  Adverbs  may  be  classified  according  to  their 
meaning  as — 

1.  Adverbs  of  manner  and  quaUty:  as,  bUnbling^  blindly, 
trcult(^  faithfully,  t)oflenb§  completely,  anber^  otherwise,  alf o  thus. 

2.  Adverbs  of  measure  and  degree :  as,  beina^c  almost,  gdnglic^ 
wholly,  faum  scarcely,  gu  too,  fel)r  very. 

3.  Adverbs  of  place  and  motion:  as,  I)ier  here,  hoxt  yonder, 
fjn  hither,  ^in  hence,  em|)or  up,  red)t§  to  the  right,  m^  away. 

4.  Adverbs  of  time :  as,  bann  then,  einft  once,  oft  often,  jd^on 
already,  tnhW^  finally,  nie  iiever,  ^eute  to-day. 

5.  Adverbs  of  modality,  or  such  as  Umit  not  so  much  the 
thought  itself  as  its  relation  to  the  speaker,  or  show  the  logical 
relation  between  one  thought  and  another :  thus,  affirmative, 
^iixwaijX  assuredly,  aIIerbtnQ§  by  all  means ; —negative,  nii^t  not, 
!enie§tt)efl§  by  no  meaiw ; —potential,  \)kM^t perhaps,  tt)a^r}(i)em- 
\\^  probably; — causal,  ba^er  therefore,  xoaxnm.  for  what  reason. 

a.  This  last  is  a  transition  class  between  adverbs  and  conjunc- 
tions :  see  385. 

h.  These  leading  divisions  may  be  very  variously  subdivided, 
nor  are  their  own  limits  precise  or  absolute.  The  relations  ex- 
pressed by  adverbs  are  almost  as  indefinitely  various  as  those 
expressed  by  adjectives,  and  are  in  like  manner  incapable  of 
distinct  and  exhaustive  classification.  Hence  it  is  of  equal  or 
greater  importance  to  note  their  various  derivation,  to  which 
we  next  pass. 


363]  ADVERBS.  189 

363.     Adverbs  from  Adjectives, 

1.  Almost  all  adjectives  in  German  admit  of  use  also 
as  adverbs,  in  their  nninflected  or  thematic  form  (see 
130). 

a.  Exceptions  are :  the  articles  and  pronominal  and  numeral 
adjectives  (except  erft) ;  further,  most  participles  having  their 
proper  participial  meaning  (356);  and  a  few  others,  as  arm, 
gram,  todtjx,  from  which  derivative  adverbs  have  been  formed 
by  means  of  endings  (below,  3). 

h.  In  an  earlier  condition  of  the  language,  the  adjective  when 
used  as  adverb  had  an  ending  of  inflection.  A  relic  of  this 
ending  is  the  e  of  lange  long  (adj.  lang  long),  and  that  of  gerne, 
feme,  ja(^te,  flille,  and  a  few  others,  which  are  now  more  com- 
monly used  without  e. 

2.  Adjectives  are  thus  used  as  adverbs  both  in  the 
positive  and  the  comparative  degree ;  but  only  rarely 
in  the  superlative. 

a.  Superlatives  that  are  employed  as  adverbs  in  their  simple 
form  are  meift,  Idngft,  iiingft,  tta(f)ft,  ^o^ft/  ciu^erft,  mogli^ft, 
innigft,  frcunbli^ft,  ^^erjlii^ft,  fliitigft,  gefafligft,  and  a  few  others. 

b.  Instead  of  the  simple  adjective,  is  commonly  used  in  the 
superlative  an  adverbial  phrase,  composed  of  the  adjective  with 
preceding  definite  article  and  governed  by  a  preposition,  an  or 
auf ;  more  rarely,  in  or  ^u  (compare  the  similar  treatment  of  the 
superlative  as  predicate,  140.2b). 

Thus,  tt)a§  am  meiften  in  bte  ^lugen  fiel  what  most  struck  the  eye, 
ba§  ^t^rb,  ha^:)  fic^  geftern  am  fcf)Ie(^teften  geftalten  the  horse  that 
behaved  worst  yesterday;  man  mu^  fie  auf§  befte  ergte^en  one 
must  bring  them  up  in  the  best  possible  manner,  er  bot  burc^  ^e= 
fanbte  auf§  I)ofIicf)fte  an  he  offered  most  courteously  through  ambas- 
sadors; §erren  nic^t  im  minb'ften  eitel  gentlemen  not  in  the  least 
vain;  ha  tra}  er  sum  erften  %^xt)m  then  he  smote  Tlirym  first  (for 
the  first). 

c.  Of  the  phrases  formed  with  am  and  auf§,  respectively,  the 
former  are  used  when  there  is  direct  comparison  made,  and 
eminence  of  degree  above  others  is  signified  (superlative  rela- 
tive) ;  the  latter,  when  general  eminence  of  degree,  without 
comparison,  is  intended  (superlative  absolute :  compare  142.1) ; 
im  and  gum  are  used  with  certain  adjectives,  in  special  phrases. 


100  mDECLINABLES.  [363- 

d.  Many  superlatives  form  a  derivative  adverb  with  the  end- 
ing en§ :  see  below,  3c. 

3.  A  comparatively  small  number  of  adverbs  are 
formed  from  adjectives  by  means  of  derivative  endings : 

a.  2t(^  (our  ly,  originally  the  same  word  with  like)  forms  a 
number  of  derivative  adjectives  from  adjectives,  nouns,  and 
participles  ;  and  of  these  a  few  (fifteen  or  twenty)  nre  used  only 
with  adverbial  meaning :  examples  are  fretltc^,  neultcf),  fd^U)erIt(i), 
fid)erli(^,  Ireulicf),  tDa^rlid^,  foIfiUc^,  l^offentIi(^. 

h.  Six  or  eight  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  (or  nouns) 
by  the  ending  ItnG§ :  thus,  BIinbltncj§  blindly,  f (^rtttltnQg  step  by 
step.    The  §  of  this  suffix  is  originally  a  genitive  ending. 

c.  The  suffix  en§  forms  adverbs  from  many  superlatives,  and 
from  all  the  ordinal  adjectives  :  thus,  beften§  in  the  best  manner, 
tx\kn§  firstly,  geftntenS  tenthly;  also  from  iibrig,  uBrigen§  more- 
over. 

The  en  of  this  suffix  is  an  ending  of  adjective  declension,  to 
which  a  genitive  §  has  become  farther  attached,  irregularly. 

d.  The  simple  genitive  ending  §  forms  adverbs  from  a  small 
number  of  adjectives  and  participles :  thus,  Iinf§  o?i  tJie  left, 
16crett§  already,  anberg  otherwise,  eilenb§  hastily,  iDcrgebeng  vainly, 
3ufel)enb§  visibly;  t)oIIenb§  completely  is  a  corruption  of  boKenS. 

e.  A  few  other  derivatives  are  too  irregular  and  isolated  to 
require  notice  here. 

364.  Adverbs  from  Nouns. 

1.  Besides  the  few  adverbs  formed  from  nouns  by  the  suffixes 
It(i)  and  ling?  (above,  363.3a,&),  there  is  also  a  small  number 
formed  by  the  simple  genitive  ending  § ;  as,  anf  ang§  in  the  begin- 
ning, flug§  in  haste,  tftetig  [teil§]  in  part,  nad)t§  in  the  night. 

With  these  are  to  be  compared  the  adverbial  genitives  of 
nouns,  either  without  or  with  a  limiting  word,  noticed  at  220.1. 

2.  A  considerable  number  of  adverbs  of  direction  are  formed 
from  nouns  and  prepositions  by  the  suffix  n)drt§  (by  origin,  the 
genitive  case  of  an  adjective  tt)drt  turned,  directed):  thus,  auf= 
tt)art§  upward,  oftmdrta  eastward,  l^immelmartS  heavenward. 

365.  Adverbs  by  combination. 

1.  Combinations  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  word  (article,  ad- 
jective, pronominal  adjective — even  adverb),  which,  from  being 
adverbial  phrases,  have  become  fused  together  into  one  word. 


367]  ADVEKBS.  191 

a.  Such  are  of  every  oblique  case,  most  often  genitives,  least 
often  datives,  but  not  infrequently  with  irregular  endings  or 
inserted  letters. 

Examples  are  grofetentl^eil§  [gro^tenteilg]  mostly,  !elne§tt)eg§  in 
no  wise,  bergeftalt  in  such  wise,  aHent^alBen  everywhere,  aKeseit 
always,  jebenfaflS  in  any  event,  einmal  once,  m\mal§  often,  abtx^' 
mal§  again. 

h.  Certain  nouns  are  thus  used  with  especial  frequency,  form- 
ing classes  of  compound  adverbs :  such  are  ®ing,  5^^/  &(il^^/ 
9J^aI,  Wa%  6eite,  %\)t\\  [2eil],  2BeQ,  SBeile,  2©eifc. 

2.  Combinations  of  a  preposition  with  a  following  or  preceding 
noun,  or  with  a  following  adjective.  These  are  also  fused  ad- 
verbial phrases. 

Examples  are  untertDcg^  on  the  way,  ab^anben  out  of  reach,  gu- 
tDeilen  sometimes,  iiBer^au^jt  in  general,  tnbeficu  meanwhile; 
bergab  dx)wn  hill,  ftromauf  np  stream;  guerft  at  first,  \mvoa\)i 
verily, 

3.  Combinations  of  adverbs  with  adverbs  or  prepositions^ 
more  proper  compounds.  These  are  very  numerous,  and  various 
in  kind ;  one  or  two  classes  require  to  be  especially  noticed  : 

a.  Combinations  with  the  words  of  general  direction  or  mo- 
tion, such  as  are  also  used  as  compound  prefixes  to  verbs; 
see  298.2. 

h.  Combinations  of  prepositions  with  the  adverbs  ba  or  bar, 
tt)0  or  tDor,  and  Ine  or  I)i:r,  used  commonly  as  equivalents  for 
the  cases  of  pronouns  governed  by  those  j  repositions  (see 
154.2,3 ;  166.4 ;  173.2 ;  180),  with  a  demonstrative,  an  interrog- 
ative, or  a  relative  value. 

366.  Adverbs  of  obscure  derivation. 

Many  adverbs  which  appear  like  simple  words  are  traceable 
to  combinations  analogous  with  those  explained  above. 

Examples  are  jmar  to  be  sure  (^\  tcare  in  truth),  nur  only  (ni 
n)are  were  it  not),  fonft  else  (\o  ne  \\i  so  it  be  not),  );)t\xit  to-day 
rtiu  tagu  on  this  day),  nie  never  (m  ie  not  ever),  nimmer  never 
(ntc  me"^r  never  more),  ni(^t  not  fne-mil^t  no  aught). 

367.  Original  Adverbs. 

Besides  the  classes  already  treated  of,  there  remain  a  number 
of  adverbs  which,  though  in  part  demonstrably  forms  of  inflec- 
tion of  pronominal  and  other  words,  may  be  practically  regarded 
as  original.    The  most  important  classes  of  these  are— 


192  INDECLINABLES.  [367- 

1.  The  simple  adverbs  of  place  or  directi  n,  ab,  an,  auf,  aua, 
Bei,  burc^,  in  or  ein,  oB,  urn,  t)or,  juj— these  are  all  of  them  com- 
monly employed  as  prepositions,  but  retain  their  adverbial 
value  especially  as  prefixes  to  verbs  (298.1). 

2.  Derivatives  from  pronominal  roots  :  thus — 

a.  from  the  demonstrative  root  (in  ber)— ba,  bar,  banti,  benn, 
bort,  beflo,  bo(i). 

b.  from  the  interrogative  root  (in  tt)er)  — tt)te,  tPO,  tDcnti,  tt)ann. 

c.  from  an  obsolete  demonstrative  root  hi — ]^ie,  ^m,  l)er,  I)tn, 
l^inter. 

3.  Farther  derivatives  from  these  classes,  with  adverbial  or 
prepositional  meaning :  thus,  from  in,  inne  and  tnnen ;  from  oB, 
ober  and  oBen,  iiber  and  iiBen ;  from  bann,  \oann,  and  l)in,  bannen, 
tt)annen,  and  pitmen ;  and  so  on. 

a.  In  several  cases,  forms  in  er  and  en  stand  related  to  one 
another  as  corresponding  preposition  and  adverb :  thus,  iiBer 
and  iiBen,  Winter  and  l^inten,  au^er  and  au^en,  unter  and  unten. 

368.  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

Adverbs,  as  such,  do  not  generally  admit  of  comparison: 
comparative  and  superlative  adverbs,  so-called,  are  for  the  most 
part  comparative  and  superlative  adjectives  used  adverbially. 

a.  Only  oft  often  forms  ofter  and  i3fteft;  and  e^e  (itself  used 
only  as  conjunction,  ere,  or  in  a  few  compounds,  as  e^ebem,  with 
prepositional  force)  forms  efter  and  om  e^eften. 

b.  A  few  words  now  used  only  as  adverbs  have  corresponding 
forms  of  comparison  from  other  words,  adjectives  :  for  example, 
Qcrn  willingly  has  lieBer,  am  IteBften,  from  HeB  dear. 

c.  Adverbs  whose  meaning  calls  for  such  treatment  may, 
rarely,  form  a  kind  of  degrees  of  comparison  with  meBr  more 
and  am  meij'ten  most,  or  other  qualifying  adverbs  of  similar 
meaning :  thus,  mel^r  red)t§  mxrre  to  the  right,  am  meiften  DoriDartg 
farthest  forward. 

369.  Certain  special  uses  of  Adverbs. 

1.  Some  adverbs  qualify  prepositions — or,  rather,  preposi- 
tional phrases  of  adverbial  meaning :  thus,  mitten  um  ben  i3eiB 
midway  about  the  body,  baB  er  Beftdnbe  Bi§  auf0  ^lut,  B  i§  in  ben 
^ob  bte  t^e^be  that  he  might  maintain  his  quarrel  even  to  blood, 
even  unto  dedth. 


371]  ADYERBS.  19S 

2.  Adverbs  are  not  seldom  governed  by  prepositions:  see 
below,  378. 

3.  Adverbs  are  used  elliptically  with  the  value  of  adjectives : 
thus,  biefer  50^ann  l^ier  this  man  here,  (SJraber  unb  bie  ^t)preffen 
bran  graves  and  the  cypresses  thereon ; — or,  in  predicative  rela- 
tions, nun  tt)ar  ber  ^benb  t)orbet  now  the  evening  was  past,  btc 
3al^re  finb  no(^  nidjt  urn  the  years  are  not  yet  over,  a(le§  foil 
anberg  fein  unb  Qejc^marfDoII  everything  is  to  he  otherwise,  and 
tasty,  \\i  fein  5D^orber  mel^r  untertt)ege§  is  there  no  longer  a 
murderer  on  the  way  ?  aller  SCSetteif er  tt)trb  ijergeben^aZi  emula- 
tion becomes  futile,  id)  f a^  D^ebel  todi  u  m !)  e  r  I  saw  mist  far 
about. 

4.  An  adverb  is  often  added  after  a  preposition  and  its  object, 
to  complete  or  to  make  more  distinct  the  relation  expressed  by 
the  preposition :  see  below,  379. 

370.  Place  of  Adverbs, 

1.  An  adverb  precedes  the  adjective  or  adverb  wliicli 
it  qualifies. 

a.  Except  genUQ  enough,  which,  as  in  English,  follows  the 
word  it  Umits. 

2.  An  adverb  qualifying  a  personal  verb  is  put  after  it  in  the 
regular  arrangement  of  the  sentence  ;  one  qualifying  an  infin- 
itive or  participle  is  placed  before  it. 

As  to  the  place  of  the  adverb  in  relation  to  other  adjuncts  of 
the  verb,  see  319 ;  as  to  certain  adverbial  words  which  have  ex- 
ceptional freedom  of  position,  see  385.4. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

371.  A  preposition  is  a  word  used  to  define  the  relation  be- 
tween some  person  or  thing  and  an  action,  a  quahty,  or  another 
person  or  thing  with  which  it  stands  connected. 

a.  The  distinctive  characteristic  of  a  preposition  is  that  it 
governs  an  oblique  ca^e  of  a  noun  (or  of  the  equivalent  of  a 
noun) ;  and  by  this  it  is  separated  from  an  adverb  :  it  is  a  kind 
of  transitive  adverb,  requiring  an  object  in  order  to  the  comple- 
tion of  the  idea  which  it  signifies.  Many  words  are  either  ad- 
verbs or  prepositions,  according  as  they  are  used  without  or 
with  such  object. 


194  INDECLINABLES.  [371- 

b.  Many  of  the  German  prepositions  are  of  late  formation 
from  nouns  or  adjectives,  or  from  adverbial  phrases  containing 
such.    Some  examples  of  these  will  be  noted  below. 

372.  Prepositions  are  most  conveniently  classified 
according  to  the  case  they  govern,  as  the  genitive,  the 
dative,  the  accusative,  and  the  dative  or  accusative. 

a.  A  few  govern  either  the  dative  or  genitive,  but  their  dif- 
ference of  use  in  this  respect  is  not  of  consequence  enough  to 
found  a  class  upon. 

373.  Prepositions  governing  the  genitive  are  anftatt  or  ftatt 
instead  of,  f)aI6er  or  :^al6en  for  the  sake  o/— with  the  compounds 
of  l^alb,  namely  au^erl)al6  without,  outside,  inner^alb  within,  oBcr= 
"ijoib  above,  unter^alb  below— txa^i  in  virtue  of,  Idngg  along,  laut 
according  to,  trofe  in  spite  of,  urn  . .  .  trillen  on  account  of,  unge- 
a^ki  (or  oI)nGea(^tet)  notwitJistanding,  unfern  and  unmeit  7iot  far 
from,  mxikk  or  mittelft  or  t)ermittel[t  by  means  of,  t)ermofie  by  dint 
of,  xoa\)xtnh  during,  m^^m  on  account  of,  guf  olfle  in  consequence  of, 
and  the  compounds  of  jeit,  biefjeit  or  bicffeit^  on  this  side  of,  and 
jenfeit  or  jenfeitS  on  the  further  side  of,  beyond  (cf.  also  152.2). 

Thus,  ftatt  ber  golbnen  Sieber  instead  of  the  golden  songs,  um 
biefer  fremben  S^ugen  l^illen  on  account  of  these  stranger  witnesses, 
^enugt:^uung  megen  ber  getobteten  [getoteten]  S^rifteu  satisfaction 
on  account  of  the  slain  Christians,  jenfeit  be§  gorfteS  beyond  the 
forest. 

a.  Of  these  prepositions,  ldng§,  tro^,  and  gufolge  also  not  in- 
frequently govern  the  dative  ;  some  others  do  so  occasionally. 

b.  §al6en  or  '^alber  always  follows  the  noun  it  governs  ;  um  .  .  . 
tDilIen  takes  the  noun  between  its  two  parts  ;  ungeQ(f)tet,  tnegen, 
and  pfolge  may  either  precede  or  follow  (gufolge  precedes  a  gen- 
itive, but  follows  a  dative). 

c.  These  prepositions  are  of  recent  use  as  such,  and  all  evi- 
dently derived  from  other  parts  of  speech.  §alb  is  a  noun 
meaning  originally  side;  megen  was  formerly  Don  tDcgen,  which 
is  still  in  occasional  use. 

d.  The  adverbial  genitives  ^Ingefi(%t§  -in  presence  and  ^e()uf§ 
in  behalf,  the  adverbs  tnmitten  in  the  midst,  aBfctt§  aside,  and 
some  of  those  formed  with  vo'dxt^,  as  (eittx)drt§  sideways,  noxhmxi^ 
northwards,  also  entlang  along,  and  a  few  others,  antiquated  or 
of  rare  occurrence,  are  sometimes  used  prepositionally  with  a 
genitive. 


375]  PEEPOSITIONS.  195 

374.  The  prepositions  governing  the  dative  are,  of  more  an- 
cient and  original  words,  au§  out,  bet  by,  mit  with,  oh  above,  for, 
t)on  of,  guto;  of  recent  and  derivative  or  compound  words, 
nad)  after,  to,  feit  siiwe,  gleid)  like,  fammt  and  neb[t  along  with, 
ndif)ft  next,  binnen  within,  aujser  outside,  entgegen  against,  gegen* 
iiber  opposite,  gemdB  wi  accordance  with,  gutDiber  contrary  to. 

a.  For  prepositions  wliich  more  regularly  and  usually  govern 
the  genitive,  but  are  sometimes  construed  with  a  dative,  see 
above,  373a.  Of  those  here  mentioned,  ob  (which  is  now  anti- 
quated), when  meaning  07i  account  of,  is  occasionally  used  with 
a  genitive  ;  au^er  governs  a  genitive  in  the  single  phrase  au^er 
£anbe§  out  of  the  country. 

h.  dla^,  oleirf),  and  gemd^  either  precede  or  follow  the  governed 
noun :  thus,  nad)  ber  (^taht  to  the  city,  ber  ^ainx  nad)  according 
to  nature;  gemd^  ben  Urgefc^id)ten  according  to  the  old  stories,  ber 
3eit  unb  ben  Umftdnben  gemd^  in  ax^cordance  with  the  time  and  the 
circumstances;  jie  gte^t  fid^  gleic^  einem  2}leere§arme  ^in  it  stretches 
along,  after  the  manner  of  an  arm  of  the  sea,  jie  flog,  etner  ©ijlp^ibe 
glei(^  she  flew  like  a  sylph,  ^ntgegen,  gegeniiber,  and  gumiber  fol- 
low the  noun ;  but  gegeniiber  is  sometimes  (by  a  usage  no  longer 
approved)  divided,  and  takes  the  noun  between  its  two  parts : 
thus,  gmei  tauten  fi^en  gegen  einanber  iiber  two  ladies  sit  opposite 
one  another. 

c.  Occasionally,  by  a  bold  construction,  a  word  which  is 
properly  adverb  only  is  construed  as  if  preposition :  thus,  Doran 
ben  filftnen  Slet^en  in  front  of  the  brave  ranks:  compare  373c?. 

375.  The  prepositions  governing  the  accusative  only 
are  bur(^  through,  fiir/or,  (]egGn  or  gen  against,  otjite  tvith- 
out,  um  about,  tDiber  against;  also  fonber  without,  big 
unto,  tiU. 

a.  ^en  is  now  nearly  out  of  use,  except  in  certain  phrases, 
like  gen  ^immel  toward  heaven,  gen  SBeften  toward  the  west. 
©onber  is  hardly  employed  except  in  a  phrase  or  two,  as  fonber 
glei(^en  without  equal.  53iy  usually  stands  adverbially  before  a 
preposition  (see  369.1),  but  also  governs  directly  specifications 
of  place  and  time  :  thus,  biy  'i}lntiod)ien  as  far  as  Antioch,  trarte 
nur  bi3  morgen  only  wait  till  tomorrow. 

b.  Um  is  very  often  followed  by  ber  after  the  noun :  see  379a. 

c.  From  the  case  of  an  accusative  governed  by  a  preposition 
requires  to  be  distinguished  that  of  an  absolute  accusative  of 


196  mDECLlNABLES.  [375- 

place  followed  by  an  adverb  of  direction,  as  ben  QBerg  ^inauf  up 
the  mountain  (see  230.1&).  This  construction  is  interesting  as 
illustrating  an  intermediate  step  in  the  process  of  conversion  of 
adverbs  into  prepositions. 

376.  Nine  prepositions  govern  sometimes  the  dative 
and  sometimes  the  accusative— the  dative,  when  they 
indicate  locality  or  situation  merely,  or  answer  the 
question  "where?"  the  accusative,  when  they  imply 
motion  or  tendency  toward,  or  answer  the  question 
**  whither  ?  "  They  are  an  on,  at,  auf  upon,  I^inter  behind, 
in  in,  into,  neben  beside,  iiber  above,  across,  unter  under, 
Dor  be/ore,  jiDifd^eit  between. 

Thus,  t(^  "ijoik  an  ben  ©c^ranfen,  unb  retc^e  ben  C>^Int  an  einen 
^nappen  ^mnd  I  stop  at  the  bari-ier,  and  hand  hack  my  helmet  to 
a  squire;  er  tag  auf  ber  ^.rbe,  unb  ^aik  ha^  Oftr  auf  ben  3fta(en  9e= 
legt  he  lay  on  the  ground,  and  had  his  ear  laid  on  the  turf;  fie 
Briiten  !)inter  bem  Dfen  they  brood  behind  the  stove,  er  legte  \i^ 
Vinkx  eine  2abad§bofc  he  laid  himself  behind  a  snuff-box;  er  ging 
tn§  ^an^,  unb  blieb  lange  in  bemfelben  he  went  into  the  house,  and 
staid  a  long  time  in  it;  bott  liegt  er  neben  einem  Stein  there  it  lies 
beside  a  stone,  fie  fe^ten  fic^  neben  ben  33aum  they  seated  themselves 
beside  the  tree;  ber  3flad)en  f(^Ue^t  fid)  itber  bem  ©d^mimmer  the 
abyss  closes  over  the  swimmer,  iiber  biefen  ©trom  bin  x^  einmal 
gefabren  I  once  crossed  over  this  stream;  ber  ^abn  trieb  unter  eine 
^riide,  unter  btefer  33ru(fe  n)Dbnte  eine  9latte  tlie  boat  drove  under- 
neath a  bridge,  under  this  bridge  lived  a  rat;  im^^ugenblid  iDaren 
fie  t)Dr  bem  gelfen  in  a  moment  they  were  before  the  rock,  er  trat 
t)or  bie  ^onigtn  he  came  before  the  queen;  ha^  ©eftrirfe  rubte 
3tDif(^en  ibren  §tinben  the  knitting-work  lay  between  her  Itands,  fie 
f^blupften  aroij^en  feine  Stueige  they  slipped  in  among  its  branches. 

a.  The  difference  of  meaning  determining  the  use  of  the 
dative  or  accusative  after  these  prepositions  is  not  always  an 
obvious  one  ;  sometimes  a  peculiar  liveliness  is  given  to  an  ex- 
pression by  the  employment  of  the  accusative :  thus,  er  mad^te 
eine  Deffnung  in  bie  ^rbe  he  made  a  hole  in  (into)  the  ground,  unb 
fii^te  fie  an  ben  5}lunb  and  kissed  her  on  the  mouth  (impressed  a 
kiss),  iiber  ben  9lanb  ber  Xiefe  gebogen  arched  over  (thrown  as 
arch  across)  the  edge  of  the  abyss;  or,  the  accusative  implies  a 
verb  of  motion  which  is  not  expressed:  thus,  er  fticg  in  ein 
2[Birtb§baug  [SBirt^bauS]  ab  he  got  dmn  (and  entered)  into  an  inn, 


378]  PEEPOSITIONS.  197 

cr  rettctc  fi(f)  In  bte  35urg  he  saved  himself  (betook  himself  for 
safety)  into  the  castle,  fie  fteften  in  bie  ^bfte  they  stand  up  (rise  to 
a  standing  posture) ;  or,  the  action  is  a  figurative  one  :  thus,  an 
t^n  benfen  think  of  him  (turn  one's  thoughts  on  him),  er  fa^  auf  aH 
bic  $rad)t  he  looked  upon  all  the  beauty,  fie  freueten  ]\^  iiber  bie 
fd^onenSpfel  they  were  delighted  with  the  beautiful  apples;  or 
there  are  phrases,  the  imphcation  of  which  seems  arbitrarily 
determined:  thus,  auf  bie  befte  SBeife  in  the  best  manner,  iiber 
taufenb  Sa^re  after  a  tliousand  years. 

b.  It  is  only  by  its  use  of  in  and  into  (as  also,  in  colloquial 
phrase,  of  on  and  onto),  that  the  English  makes  a  corresponding 
distinction  ;  and  even  this  does  not  agree  in  all  particulars  with 
the  German  distinction  of  in  with  the  dative  and  with  the  ac- 
cusative. Hence  the  ground  of  the  difference  of  case  is  the  less 
easily  appreciated  by  us,  and  needs  to  be  carefully  noted  at 
every  instance  that  occurs. 

c.  The  accusative  and  dative  with  these  prepositions  have 
each  its  own  proper  value,  the  one  as  the  case  of  directest  ac- 
tion, the  other  as  representing  the  ancient  locative  (or  case  de- 
noting the  in  relation). 

377.  1.  Some  prepositions  govern  a  substantive  clause,  in- 
troduced usually  by  ba^,  rarely  by  a  compound  relative  (179) : 
such  are  auf,  au^er,  bi§,  o^ne,  ftatt  or  anftatt,  urn,  ungeacfitet,  h)dl)= 
renb :  thus,  auf  ba^  e§  bir  tuofti  (^e^e  in  order  that  it  may  go  well 
with  thee,  au^er  mx  feine  ^Jlitfc^uIbiQen  feien  except  who  were  his 
accomplices. 

a.  This  is  closely  akin  with  the  office  of  conjunction ;  and  bi§, 
ungeadjtet,  and  tt)df)renb  may  be  used  without  ba6,  as  proper  con- 
junctions: thus,  n)dt)renb  ton  ha  blieben  while  we  continued  there 
(compare  439.6c). 

2.  The  prepositions  um,  oftne,  and  ftatt  or  anftatt  may  govern 
an  infinitive  and  its  adjuncts,  as  equivalent  of  a  complete  clause 
(compare  346.1). 

378.  An  adverb  not  infrequently  takes  the  place  of  a  noun 
as  object  of  a  preposition.    Thus — 

a.  Many  adverbs  of  time  and  place :  as,  na^  oben  upward 
(toward  above),  auf  immer  for  ever,  fiir  ie^t  for  now,  t)on  fern 
from  afar,  in  tt)te  fern  /low  far. 

b.  The  adverbs  b a  or  b ar,  to o  or  tr  ar,  and  T^ier  or  l^ie,  as  substitutes 
for  the  oblic[ue  cases  of  pronouns.  These  ^re  compoundeci  wjtti 


198  INDECLINABLES.  [378- 

the  governing  preposition,  forming  a  kind  of  compound  adverb 

(see  365.3&). 

379.  1.  After  the  noun  governed  by  a  preposition  is  often 
added  an  adverb,  to  emphasize,  or  to  define  more  nearly,  the 
relation  expressed  by  the  preposition.    Thus — 

a.  The  general  adverbs  of  direction,  \)m  and  l^er :  as,  um  un§ 
fier,  um  \\)X[  l^er  round  about  us  or  him,  Winter  xtjm  l^er  along  after 
Mm,  na^  eiuer  9tic^tun(^  fjin  in  a  single  directwn,  iiber  bag  9)leer 
l^in  across  the  sea,  Don  alien  ©eiten  ^er/rom  all  sides. 

In  these  combinations,  the  distinctive  meaning  of  the  adverb, 
as  denoting  motion  from  and  toward,  is  apt  to  be  effaced.  Um . . . 
l^er  is  the  commonest  case,  and  a  stereotyped  expression  for 
round  about. 

b.  The  same  adverbs,  in  combination  with  the  preposition  it- 
self repeated :  thus,  um  mi(^  lucrum  rowid  about  me,  in  ben  Sorft 
l^inein  into  the  forest,  an^  bem  SBalbe  l^inaug  out  of  the  wood,  an^ 
ber  33ruft  ^erau§  forth  from  the  breast,  hm6)  ®efal)ren  l^inburd^ 
through  dangers. 

c.  Other  adverbs  of  direction,  simple  or  compound,  often  ad- 
ding an  essential  complement  to  the  meaning  of  the  preposi- 
tion: thus,  t)on  nun  an  from  now  on,  t)on  bort  an§  forth  from 
there,  Don  Sugtnb  a\i\  from  youth  up,  wad)  hnWxik^n  toward  the 
middle,  fie  flingen  auf  i^n  gu  they  fell  upon  him,  er  I)i3rt  bie  Seinbe 
l^inter  fi(^  brein  he  hears  the  enemy  (coming  on)  after  him,  l^inter 
58dumen  \\tx'oox  forth  from  behind  trees,  gur  hammer  T^inein  into  the 
room,  gum  ^l^ore  I)inau§  out  of  the  gate. 

2.  It  may  sometimes  be  made  a  question  whether  the  adverb 
of  direction  belongs  to  the  prepositional  phrase,  or,  rather,  to 
the  verb  of  the  clause,  as  its  ^prefix :  the  two  cases  pass  into  one 
another, 

380.  To  what  members  of  the  sentence  a  prepositional  phrase 
forms  an  adjunct  has  been  pointed  out  already :  namely — 

1.  To  a  verb,  with  very  various  value :  see  318. 

2.  To  a  noun :  see  112. 

3.  To  an  adjective:  see  146. 

4.  Hence,  also,  to  an  adverb,  when  an  adjective  is  used  as 
such. 

381.  1.  The  rules  for  the  position  of  a  preposition,  whether 
before  or  after  the  noun  that  it  governs,  have  been  given  above, 
io  Qoiinectioii  with  the  rules  for  ^overnraeot, 


383]  CONJUNCTIONS.  199 

2.  Between  the  preposition  and  its  following  governed  noun 
may  intervene  the  various  limiting  words  which  are  wont  to 
stand  before  a  noun — as  articles,  adjective  pronouns,  adjectives 
and  participles,  with  their  adjuncts — often  to  an  extent  dis- 
cordant with  English  usage :  thus,  an§  fleincn,  t)ieredig  3ugcl&au= 
enen,  steniUd)  Qleid)en  ^afaltftiiden  of  small,  squarely  hewn,  tolerably 
equal  pieces  of  basalt;  fiir  bent  ^ranfen  Qeletflete  ^ni\t  for  help 
rendered  to  the  sick  man. 

Respecting  the  combination  of  the  preposition  with  a  following 
definite  article  into  a  single  word,  see  65. 

[Exercise  33.    Adverbs  and  Prepositions.] 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

382.  Conjunctions  are  words  which  connect  the  clauses  or 
sentences  composing  a  period  or  paragraph,  and  show  their 
relation  to  one  another. 

a.  We  have  hitherto  had  to  do  only  with  the  elements  which 
enter  into  the  structure  of  individual  clauses,  and  among  which 
conjunctions  play  no  part.  "When,  however,  clauses  themselves 
are  to  be  put  in  connection  with  one  another,  conjunctions  are 
required. 

h.  If  certain  conjunctions — especially  those  meaning  and  and 
or — appear  to  connect  words  as  well  as  clauses,  it  is  as  such 
words  represent  clauses,  and  may  be  expanded  into  them  :  thus, 
er  unb  ic^  tt)aren  ha  —  er  Wax  ba,  unb  tcf)  ioar  ha  he  was  there  and  1 
was  there,  er  ift  mdcf)tiger  al§  ic^  (bin)  he  is  mightier  than  I  (am). 

c.  Conjunctions,  as  a  class,  are  the  words  of  latest  develop- 
ment in  the  history  of  language,  coming  from  other  parts  of 
speech,  mainly  through  the  medium  of  adverbial  use.  A  word 
ceases  to  be  an  adverb  and  becomes  a  conjunction,  when  its 
qualifying  influence  extends  over  a  whole  clause  instead  of  be- 
ing limited  to  a  particular  word  in  it.  Almost  all  conjunctions 
in  German  are  also  adverbs  (or  prepositions),  and  their  uses  as 
the  one  or  the  other  part  of  speech  shade  off  into  one  another, 

383.  Conjunctions  are  most  conveniently  classified 
according  to  the  character  of  the  relations  they  indicate, 
and  their  effect  upon  the  arrangeinent  of  the  clauses 
ihej  introduce,  as—- 


200  INDECLINABLES.  [383- 

1.  General  connectives,  which  do  not  alter  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  clause. 

2.  Adverbial  conjunctions,  causing  the  inversion  of  a 
clause  (that  is  to  say,  causing  its  subject  to  follow,  in- 
stead of  preceding,  the  verb). 

3.  Subordinating  conjunctions,  which  make  the  clause 
dependent,  and  give  it  the  transposed  order  (removing 
the  verb  to  the  end). 

4.  The  first  two  classes,  in  contradistinction  from  the  third, 
may  be  called  co-ordinating  conjunctions. 

384.  The  general  connectives  are  those  signifying 
and,  but,  for,  and  or  and  either. 

Namely  unb  and;—dbtx,  aEein,  jonbern  (and  sometimes  bodf)) 
hut;— htnn  for;— tnimhn  either  and  ober  or, 

a.  Of  the  words  meaning  but,  fonbern  is  more  strongly  ad- 
versative than  abet,  being  used  only  after  a  negative,  and  intro- 
ducing some  word  which  has  a  Uke  construction  with  the  one  on 
which  the  force  of  the  negation  falls,  and  which  is  placed  in 
direct  antithesis  with  it:  thus,  tcetl  nic^t  eigne  9}^a(!)t,  fonbern 
(^ott,  bte  ^onige  errettet  because  not  their  own  might,  but  God, 
saves  kings;  er  geno§  nt(!)t  lange  fetne§  9iu!)m§,  fonbern  tnarb  be= 
gn)ungen  he  did  not  long  enjoy  his  fame,  but  he  was  subdu£d;  mein 
IRetter  xcax  fein  3}Jann,  fonbern  ein  33a(i)  my  preserver  was  no  man, 
but  a  brook ;~the  combination  ni(^t  nur  (or  blo^) .  .  .  fonbern  an^ 
not  only  . . .  but  also  is  likewise  common :  thus,  nic^t  blo^  jenc 
fiinbigten,  fonbern  an^  n)ir  not  they  alone  sinned,  but  also  we. 
%iit\n  means  hterally  only,  and  is  often  best  so  rendered,  being 
more  restricted  than  aber  to  the  introduction  of  a  definite  ob- 
jection.   For  bod^  as  but,  see  below,  385.5c. 

b.  These  connectives  stand  always  at  the  head  of  the  clause 
whose  connection  they  indicate  :  except  aber,  which  has  great 
freedom  of  position,  and  may  be  introduced  at  any  later  point 
— without  any  notable  difference  of  meaning,  although  often  to 
be  conveniently  rendered  by  however. 

385.  1.  The  adverbial  conjunctions  are  originally 
and  strictly  adverbs,  qualifying  the  verb  of  the  clause 
which  they  introduce ;  and,  like  any  other  of  the  ad- 


385]  CONJUNCTIONS.  201 

juncts  of  the  verb  (431),  when  placed  at  the  head  of  the 
clause,  they  give  it  the  inverted  order,  putting  the  sub- 
ject after  the  verb. 

2.  No  distinct  boundary  separates  the  conjunctional  use  of 
these  words  from  their  adverbial  use :  they  are  conjunctions 
when  their  effect  is  to  determine  the  relations  of  clauses  to  one 
another,  rather  than  to  limit  the  action  of  a  verb — and  these 
two  offices  pass  insensibly  into  each  other. 

3.  They  may  be  simply  classified  as — 

a.  Copulative  (related  to  the  general  connective  and\  uniting 
different  phrases  with  no  other  implication  than  that  of  con- 
tinuation, order,  or  division :  as,  aud)  also,  aufeerbem  besides,  bann 
then,  ferner  further,  erften§,  3tt)eitcn§,  britteny,  firstly,  secondly, 
thirdly,  and  so  on,  f c^lie^Iid)  finally,  meber . . .  nod)  7ieither . . .  nor, 

M\^  [tetl§] tftetlS  [k'M  partly partly,   Balb Balb 

now  ....  now. 

h.  Adversative  (related  to  but),  implying  more  or  less  distinctly 
an  opposition  of  idea,  a  denial  or  restriction  :  as,  bod),  ieboc^,  ben* 
nD(5^  yet,  though,  gleidjtDoI)!,  befjenunaeac^tet  nevertheless;  bagegcn, 
l^ingegen  on  the  contrary,  tnbeffen  however,  t)ielme!)r  rather,  gnjar 
to  be  sure,  tDol^l  indeed. 

c.  Causative  (related  to  for),  implying  a  groxmd,  reason,  or  oc- 
casion :  as,  hat}tx,  begmegen,  be§l()a(6  therefore,  alfo  accordingly, 
folglid),  mitl^in  consequently. 

d.  Adverbs  of  place  and  time,  particularly  the  latter,  some- 
times assume  a  conjunctional  value  :  as,  nnterbcffen  meanwhile, 
t)OX^zt  previously,  barauf  thereupon. 

4.  Although  these  words  in  their  conjunctional  office  tend 
toward  the  head  of  the  clause,  they  do  not  always  take  that 
place ;  nor  are  they  always  conjunctions  rather  than  adverbs 
when  they  introduce  the  clause.  Especially  ndmli(^  namely,  and 
some  of  the  adversative  and  causative  conjuncti  ns — as  ho^, 
iebo(^,  inbefjen,  gwar,  n)O^I,  alfo— have  a  freedom  of  position  like 
that  of  aber  (3846). 

5.  The  clause  sometimes  maintains  its  normal  order,  instead 
of  being  inverted,  after  conjunctions  of  this  class :  especially — 

a.  When  the  emphasis  of  the  clause,  or  of  the  antithesis  in 
two  correlative  clauses,  rests  on  the  subject,  so  that  the  con- 
junction becomes  a  kind  of  adjunct  of  thtj  subject :  thus,  an^ 


202  INDECLINABLES.  [385- 

bein  55ruber  ^at  e§  Qetriinf^t  thy  brother  also  has  wished  it,  tcebcr 
er,  nod)  tc^  tDaren  ba  neither  he  nor  I  were  there. 

h.  When  the  conjunction  represents  a  clause  which  is  not  fully 
expressed,  or  is  thrown  in  as  it  were  parenthetically.  Conjunc- 
tions most  often  so  treated  are  gmar,  iiberbiefe,  folQli^,  gubem, 
I)inge9en,  and  ordinals,  as  erften§,  gmeiten^. 

c.  ^0(f)  sometimes  has  its  adversative  force  weakened  to  a 
mere  "but,  and  leaves  the  order  of  the  clause  imchanged,  like  the 
other  words  that  have  that  meaning  (384). 

386.  1.  The  subordinating  conjunctions  are  such  as 
give  to  the  clause  which  they  introduce  a  dependent 
(subordinate,  accessory)  value,  making  it  enter,  in  the 
relation  of  substantive,  adjective,  or  adverb,  into  the 
structure  of  some  other  clause  (435).  Such  a  dependent 
clause  assumes  the  transposed  order — that  is  to  say,  its 
personal  verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the  clause  (see 
434  etc.). 

2.  The  conjunctions  that  introduce  a  substantive  dependent 
clause  are  ba^  that,  ob  whether,  and  those  that  have  a  compound 
relative  value,  namely  iDte  how,  toann  when,  tDO  where,  and  the 
compounds  of  too,  whether  with  adverbs  of  direction,  as  iDo^in 
whither,  iDo'^er  whence,  or  with  prepositions,  as  representing 
cases  of  the  compound  relative  pronoun  tDer  (180),  as  h)Dt)on 
whereof,  tDomit  wherewith. 

Thus,  id)  iDeiB,  ba^  er  I)ler  Moax]  ob  cr  nocf)  Vxzx  bleibt,  tft  mir  un= 
befannt;  fragen  8tc  nur  narf),  tDo'^in  er  jid)  begeben  babe  I  know 
that  he  was  here ;  whether  he  still  remains  here  is  unknown  to  me ; 
only  inquire  whither  he  has  betaken  himself. 

3.  The  conjunctions  that  introduce  an  adjective  dependent 
clause  are  chiefly  those  made  up  of  prepositions  with  the  ad- 
verbs ba  and  tr)0,  representing  cases  of  the  simple  relative  pro- 
nouns ber  and  tt)eld)er  (180),  or  of  words  of  direction  with  the 
same  adverbs.  The  simple  conjunctions  tt)o,  tt)enn,  XDann,  ha, 
al§,  tt)ie,  following  specifications  of  place,  time,  or  manner,  also 
sometimes  perform  the  same  office. 

Thus,  ha^  33ett,  toorauf  er  lag  the  bed  on  which  he  laij;  tbr 
OueEen,  babin  bte  tcelfe  33ruft  fic^  brdngt  ye  fountains  toward 
which  the  drooping  breast  presses ;  ba§  Sanb,  tDO  bie  ©ihonen  bliibn 
the  land  where  the  lemons  blossom ;  bte  ^xi,  tDte  man  ben  ^rieg  fiibvt 
the  way  in  which  the  war  is  carried  on. 


387]  CONJUNCTIONS.  203 

4.  The  conjunctions  that  introduce  an  adverbial  dependent 
clause  are  >  f  very  various  derivation,  character,  and  meaning, 
namely — 

a.  Conjunctions  indicating  'place :  as,  tt)o,  ha  where. 

b.  Time:  as,  ha,  al^,  tt)enn,  mie,  tt)o  when,  tnbem,  tnbeffen  or 
inbe^,  tDeil,  radljrenb  while,  nac^bem  after,  feitbem  since,  bi§  until, 
t^t,  bet)or  6e/ore. 

c.  Manner:  as,  toie  as. 

d  Caitse;  as,  tr)eil,  biemeil  because,  ha  since,  nun  noit?  that,  ha^ 
that. 

e.  Purpose:  as,  bamit,  ha%  uuf  ba^,  urn  bo§  in  or(^er  i/iai. 

/.  Condition:  as,  menu  i/,  jo,  tt)o,  rt)ofern,  bafern,  fafl§  m  case, 
inbem  while;  and,  with  implication  of  objection,  unGcad)tet,  ob= 
glei(^,  obiDo^I,  ob)(5^on,  ob  gmar,  ob  auc^,  tDeimQleid),  mennfc^on, 
tt)enn  and),  tt)iett)o^l  although. 

The  compounds  of  ob  and  menn  with  filei(^,  tt)O^I,  and  [(^on, 
meaning  although,  are  often  separated  by  intervening  words. 

g.  Degree:  as,  tDte  as,  Je  according  as,  al§,  benn  ^/i'an. 

/i.  Besides  these,  there  are  numerous  conjunctional  phrases, 
of  kindred  value,  composed  of  conjunctions  and  other  particles : 
as,  aU  ob  as  if,  in  tt)ie  fern  so  far  a%  je  na(i)bem  according  as, 
fo  balb  as  soon  as,  fo  lawQ  so  long  as,  etc. 

i.  (Bo,  especially,  with  following  adverb,  forms  (as  in  the  last 
two  examples)  a  great  number  of  conjunctional  phrases  or  com- 
pounds, after  which  the  conjunction  al§  as  is  sometimes  ex- 
pressed, but  more  often  implied  :  thus,  )o  lang  al§  e§  nur  mbQlid^ 
ift,  or  fo  lang  e§  nur  mogUc^  ift  so  long  as  it  is  in  any  way  possible 
(compare  438.3d). 

5.  Few  of  these  words  are  exclusively  conjunctions :  many 
are  adverbs  also,  or  prepositions,  or  both ;  some,  as  tudl^renb, 
ungeac^tet,  are  participial  forms ;  some,  as  fafl§,  toni,  are  cases 
of  nouns  ;  many  are  combined  phrases  composed  of  a  i  reposi- 
tion and  a  governed  case ;  as  inbem,  nai^bem,  feitbem. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

387.  The  interjections  have  a  character  of  their  own,  sepa- 
rate from  the  other  parts  of  speech,  in  that  they  do  not  enter 
as  elements  into  the  structure  of  sentences  or  periods,  but  are 
independent  outbursts  of  feeling,  or  intimations  of  will,  the  ut- 
tered ec^uivalents  of  a  tone,  a  grimace,  or  a  gesture, 


204  INBECLINABLES.  [388- 

388.  Nevertheless,  they  are  not  purely  natural  exclamations, 
but  utterances  akin  with  such,  which  are  now  assigned  by  usage 
to  the  expression  of  certain  states  of  mind  or  will. 

389.  The  interjections  most  commonly  used  are — 

1.  Of  those  expressing  feeUng — o  or  ol&,  used  in  a  great 
variety  of  meanings ;  ad),  tr)el),  expressing  painful  or  disagreeable 
surprise  or  grief;  p^m,  fi,  bal),  expressmg  disgust  or  contempt; 
ei,  joyful  surprise ;  ija,  a^,  wonder,  pleasure,  and  the  like ;  l^eifa, 
iud^^e,  exultation ;  ^em,  ^)m,  doubt,  hesitation ;  :^u,  horror,  shud- 
dering. 

2.  Of  those  intimating  will  or  desire — ))t,  Ifieba,  fjoUa,  to  call 
attention  ;  |)ft,  the  same,  or  to  command  silence  ;  ljii]d),  to  indi- 
cate quick  movement ;  topp,  to  signify  the  closing  of  a  bargain. 

3.  Here  may  be  best  classed,  also,  the  various  imitations  of  the 
cries  of  animals  and  other  natural  sounds,  directions  and  c^ll- 
words  for  animals,  and  the  more  or  less  artificially  composed 
and  unintelligent  words  which  are  used  as  burdens  of  songs  and 
the  like :  as,  ftopfafa,  t)it)aGera,  tumtebum. 

390.  As,  on  the  one  hand,  the  interjections  are  employed 
with  a  degree  of  conventionality,  like  the  other  constituents  of 
language,  so,  on  the  other  hand,  many  words  that  are  proper 
parts  of  speech  are  very  commonly  used  in  an  exclamatory 
way,  quite  as  if  they  were  interjections.  Such  are  :^ei(  hail!  gott= 
loh  praise  God!  beit)al)r  Godforhia!  fort,  tt)eg  away!  fie^  beJwld! 
brat)  well  done!  etc.;  and  the  whole  series  of  oaths  and  ad- 
jurations. 

a.  The  ordinary  equivalent  of  our  alas,  leiber,  is  an  abbrevia- 
tion of  the  phrase  n)a§  tnir  nod)  leiber  ift  what  is  yet  more  pain- 
ful to  me  (or  something  equivalent  to  this),  and  is  capable  of 
being  introduced,  parenthetically,  at  almost  any  point  in  the 
phrase — even,  when  put  first,  sometimes  causing  inversion,  like 
an  adverb. 

391.  The  exclamatory  or  inter jectional  mode  of  expression 
prevails  to  no  small  extent  in  the  practical  use  of  language, 
when  emotion  or  eagerness  causes  that  usual  set  framework  of 
the  sentence,  the  verb  and  its  subject,  to  be  thrown  aside,  and 
only  the  emphatic  elements  to  be  presented  at  all. 

Thus,  eud)  gur  ©rbin  erfldren!  ber  t)errdt^ertfc^e  [t)errdterif(^e] 
gfatlftridt  declare  you  my  heiress!  the  treacherous  snare!  pie^M 


393]  INTERJECTIONS.  205 

auf!  5tnou§  m§  toeite  Sanb!  flee!  up!  out  into  the  wide  country! 
id)  derfteV  bii^;  tDciter!  I  understand  ijou :  further! 

The  grammatical  forms  most  frequently  thus  used  are  the 
nominative  of  address  (or  "vocative : "  214),  and  the  imperative. 

392.  Some  of  the  interjections  are  also  brought  into  a  kind 
of  connection  with  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  being  followed 
by  cases,  or  phrases,  such  as  would  suit  a  more  complete  ex- 
pression of  the  feehng  they  intimate. 

Thus,  0,  a^,  pfui  may  stand  before  a  genitive  expressing  the 
occasion  of  the  exclamation :  as  in  o  be§  Sftoren !  pfui  ber  6c^anbe ! 
oh  the  fool !  fie  on  the  shame ! — some  may  take  a  prepositional 
phrase  or  a  substantive  clause  after  them :  as,  ad^  ba^  bu  ba 
liegft  alas  that  thou  liest  there !  pfut  iiber  ben  S^ifl^n  fie  on  the 
coward! — and  nouns  used  inter jectionally  often  admit  a  dative 
object,  signifying  that  toward  which  the  feeling  is  directed; 
thus,  §eil,  0  grueling,  beinem  ©(^ein  hail  to  thy  brilliancy,  O 
Spring!  mel&  mir,  '^a^  id)  bir  Jjertraut  woe  tome,  that  I  have  trusted 
thee! 

[Exercise  34.    Conjunctions  and  Interjections.] 

WORD-FORMATION,   DERIVATION. 

Introductory  Explanations, 

393.  The  etymological  part  of  grammar,  as  thus  far  treated, 
deals  with  the  character  and  uses  of  the  parts  of  speech,  and  of 
their  grammatical  or  inflectional  forms,  which  are  made  from 
simple  roots  or  from  stems,  chiefly  by  inflectional  endings,  but 
in  part  also  by  internal  change. 

a.  Such  grammatical  forms  (along  with  the  indeclinable 
particles,  which  are  ultimately  of  the  same  character  with  them) 
constitute  the  most  essential  part  of  the  grammatical  apparatus 
of  a  language,  its  instrumentality  for  the  expression  of  relations 
of  ideas,  the  means  by  which  its  names  of  beings,  qualities,  acts, 
etc.,  are  placed  in  connection  with  one  another,  in  order  to  ex- 
press the  thoughts  of  the  speaker. 

h.  Boot  is  the  name  given  to  an  ultimate  significant  element, 
itself  containing  nothing  that  is  recognizably  formative.  From 
roots,  by  the  ordinary  means  of  derivation,  are  made  stems  (or 
themes,  or  bases),  from  which  come  inflectional  forms,  and  also 
other  stems. 


206  DEETVATION.  [394- 

394.  Another  and  only  less  important  part  of  the  same 
grammatical  apparatus  is  the  array  of  means  by  which  stems 
of  declension  and  conjugation  are  formed  from  roots  and  from 
each  other.  These  means  are  of  the  same  character  with  those 
already  described,  consisting  chiefly  of  suffixes,  along  with  a 
few  prefixes,  and  supplemented  by  methods  of  internal  change. 

395.  There  is  no  fundamental  diversity  between  the  two  in- 
strumentalities. The  suffixes  and  prefixes  of  inflection  and  of 
derivation  are  equally,  by  origin,  independent  words,  which 
were  first  uttered  in  connection  with  other  words,  then 
combined  with  the  latter,  and  finally  made  to  lose  their 
independence  and  converted  into  subordinate  elements,  des- 
ignating the  relations  of  other  more  substantial  and  significant 
elements. 

a.  The  working-out  of  grammatical  apparatus,  by  the  reduc- 
tion of  words  once  independent  to  the  condition  of  endings  of  in- 
flection or  derivation,  has  been  a  part  of  the  history  of  inflective 
languages,  from  their  beginning  down  to  modern  times.  Of 
many  of  the  affixes  formed  in  this  way,  as  well  as  of  some  that 
are  much  more  ancient,  the  origin  can  still  be  distinctly  traced ; 
but  their  history  is  to  a  great  extent  obscured  by  the  effects  of 
linguistic  change  and  corruption.  Compare  what  is  said  above 
of  the  derivation  of  the  ending  tc,  forming  the  preterits  of  the 
New  conjugation  (246.3),  and  of  the  suffixes  lic^,  irdrt^,  etc.  (363-4). 

h.  The  difference  between  the  two  classes  of  endings  lies  in 
their  mode  of  application,  and  in  the  frequency  and  regularity 
of  their  use.  Certain  suffixes  of  derivation  are  so  regularly  ap- 
plied to  whole  classes  of  themes,  and  produce  derivatives  so 
analogous  with  forms  of  inflection,  that  they  are  conveniently 
and  properly  treated  along  with  the  subject  of  inflection.  Such 
are  the  endings  er  and  eft  of  comparatives  and  superlatives 
(133  etc.),  and  those  which  form  the  infinitive  and  participles  of 
verbs. 

396.  Among  modem  languages  commonly  studied,  the 
German  is  the  one  which  most  fully  and  clearly  illustrates  the 
processes  of  word-formation ;  and  the  subject  ought;  therefore 
to  receive  the  attention  of  every  advanced  German  scholar. 

397.  But  no  known  language  (not  even  such  exceptional 
ones  as  the  Sanskrit)  has  preserved  so  much  of  its  primitive 
structure  that  we  can  carry  back  the  analysis  of  its  vocabulary 
to  the  actual  beginning.     By  the  help,  especially,  of  a  careful 


400]  PEINCIPLES.  207 

and  searching  comparison  of  related  languages,  the  processes  of 
word-combination  can  be  traced  up  until  we  discover  of  what 
sort  are  the  ultimate  elements  of  speech,  although  we  are  by 
no  means  certain  of  being  able  to  point  them  out  in  their  very- 
form  and  substance. 

Principles, 

398.  The  words  of  German,  as  of  other  related  languages, 
are  traceably  derived,  in  good  part,  from  roots. 

399.  The  means  of  derivation,  through  the  whole  history 
of  development,  have  been  chiefly  suffixes  or  derivational 
endings — with  some  aid  from  prefixes. 

a.  The  almost  exclusive  use  of  suffixes  rather  than  prefixes, 
as  means  both  of  inflection  and  of  derivation,  is  a  characteristic 
feature  of  the  family  of  languages  to  which  the  German  (with 
our  own)  belongs.  The  few  prefixes  employed  have  retained 
much  more  distinctly  the  character  of  independent  words,  form- 
ing proper  compounds  with  those  to  which  they  are  attached ; 
that  character  has  been  lost  only  by  the  inseparable  prefixes 
(307)  and  one  or  two  others  (see  below,  411.11).  The  negative 
un  is  the  only  German  prefix  of  really  ancient  character  and 
obscure  derivation. 

400.  Besides  this,  there  have  come  to  be  in  German  two 
other  specific  auxiliary  methods  of  internal  change,  affecting 
the  vowel  of  the  root  or  primitive  word.    These  are — 

1.  The  modification  of  vowel  (14),  or  change  of  o,  o,  u,  an  into 
a,  0,  ii,  au,  respectively:  thus,  9Jlann,  9JJanner  man,  men;  %n^, 
Sii&e  foot,  feet;  9)^au§,  Tlm)^  mouse,  mice;  alt,  alter,  dlteft  old, 
elder,  eldest;  ^orn,  l^ornlein  corn,  kernel;  {)anoe,l)dnQt  I  hang,  he 
hangs;  floQ,  ftoQe  I  flew,  I  might  fly;  xotl)  [rot],  rotften  [roten]  red, 
redden.  This  modification  is  by  the  Germans  called  Umlaut 
change  of  sound. 

a.  This  is  a  euphonic  change,  coming  from  the  assimilation  of 
a  hard  or  guttural  vowel  to  a  soft  or  palatal  one  (e,  i)  closely 
following  it — although  finally  applied  by  analogy,  in  many  single 
cases,  where  no  such  cause  had  been  present.  It  is  of  compar- 
atively recent  introduction,  although,  as  the  examples  show, 
shared  in  part  by  the  English.  It  is  quite  unknown  in  one 
branch  of  Germanic  speech,  the  Moeso-Gothic ;  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  most  highly  developed  in  the  Scandinavian  tongues. 


208  DEEIVATION.  [400- 

b.  In  the  present  condition  of  the  language,  the  cause  of  the 
modification  is  generally  no  longer  to  be  seen,  the  assimilating 
vowel  having  been  lost. 

c.  Some  derivative  words  having  vowels  which  are  really  the 
effect  of  modification  are  now,  usually  or  always,  written  with 
the  simple  vowels  e  (for  d  or  o)  or  t  (for  u).  Again,  some  words 
show  a  modified  vowel  as  the  mere  result  of  an  irregular  varia- 
tion of  utterance,  without  etymological  reason. 

2.  The  variation  or  gradation  of  radical  vowel :  as  in  fingen, 
fang,gefungen  sing,  sang,  sung;  merbe,  n)irb,tt)arb,  n)urben,gett)orbett, 
from  merben  become;  Breeze,  Bri(!)t,  Brad),  geBrod)en,  33rud),  from 
Bred^en  break.  This  variation  is  by  the  Germans  called  Ablaut 
divergence  of  sound. 

a.  This  second  mode  of  vowel  change  is  also,  like  the  other, 
originally  of  euphonic  character,  one  of  the  accidents  attending 
the  phonetic  development  of  language,  under  the  combined  in- 
fluences of  quantity,  accent,  combination,  addition  of  suffixes, 
and  the  like.  But  it  is  much  more  ancient,  being  one  of  the 
characteristic  peculiarities  of  all  the  Germanic  languages  ;  and 
its  specific  causes  and  mode  of  evolution  are  in  part  obscure. 

b.  The  sphere  of  action  of  the  gradation  of  radical  vowel  is  in 
the  inflection  of  the  older  verbs  of  the  language,  and  the  forma- 
tion of  their  earliest  derivatives. 

401.  The  modes  of  consonantal  change  which  accompany 
the  processes  of  word-formation  are  too  various  and  irregular 
to  be  systematically  set  forth  here.  Some  of  them  will  be 
noticed  belowj  in  connection  with  the  derivatives  whose  forma- 
tion especially  calls  them  out. 

402.  To  carry  back  the  historical  analysis  of  German  words 
to  the  farthest  point  attained  by  the  aid  of  the  languages  kin- 
dred with  the  German,  would  take  the  pupil  into  regions  where 
he  is  a  stranger,  and  would  be  unprofitable.  Such  study  requires 
a  knowledge  of  the  older  dialects,  and  belongs  to  a  higher  stage 
of  progress.  Only  the  processes  of  derivation  whose  results 
are  traceable  in  the  existing  language  will  be  set  forth ;  and 
those  words  will  be  treated  as  "primitive"  which  have  no 
German  etymons,  or  more  original  words  whence  they  are 
derived,  even  though  evidence  from  other  languages  may  not 
only  show  them  to  be  derivatives,  but  also  exhibit  the  earlier 
forms  from  which  they  came. 


404]  DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  209 

DERIVATION  OP  VERBS. 

403.  Primitive  Verbs.  Verbs  to  be  regarded  as  primitive 
are— 

1.  The  verbs  of  the  Old  or  strong  conjugation,  nearly  two 
Aundred  in  number  (264-7),  which  constitute  the  most  important 
body  of  primitive  roots  in  the  language. 

a.  Several  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  however,  are  demon- 
strably derivative :  thus,  {rf)reiben  (111.2)  write,  from  Latin  scribo; 
|)reifen  (ni.2)  praise,  from  ^rei§  value  (which  comes  from  Lat. 
pretium),  etc.  Others  are  doubtless  of  the  same  character; 
since,  down  to  that  period  in  the  history  of  the  language  at 
which  the  mode  of  inflection  of  the  New  conjugation  was  in- 
troduced, all  verbs,  whether  recent  or  older,  were  inflected  ac- 
cording to  the  Old  conjugation. 

2.  Many  verbs  of  the  New  or  weak  conjugation:  as,  "^aBctt 
Jiave,  fagen  say,  reben  talk,  Ueben  love,  leben  live. 

a.  A  number  of  the  verbs  of  the  New  conjugation  formerly 
be?^nged  to  the  Old,  having  changed  their  mode  of  inflection 
under  the  influence  of  the  tendency  to  extend  a  prevailing 
analogy  and  reduce  more  irregular  to  more  regular  forms. 
Others,  if  originally  derivative,  have  lost  the  evidence  of  it.  To 
the  root  of  some  there  is  a  corresponding  noun,  and  it  may  ad- 
mit of  question  which  is  the  more  original,  verb  or  noun. 

b.  All  verbs  whose  root,  or  conjugation-stem,  is  of  nore  than 
one  syllable  are  to  be  classed  as  derivative :  even  though,  as  in 
the  case  of  f^meic^eln  flatter,  flettern  climb,  the  original  from 
which  they  come  is  no  longer  to  be  traced. 

404.     Verbs  derived  from  Verbs. 

I.  By  internal  change  of  the  root  itself : 

1.  By  change  (generally,  modification  or  Umlaut)  of  the  root 
vowel,  a  class  of  causative  verbs  are  formed,  taking  as  their 
direct  object  what  was  the  subject  of  the  simple  verb:  thus, 
^aUzn  fall,  YdUtn  cause  to  fall,  fell ;  ixinUn  drink,  trdnfen  cause  to 
drink,  drench;  fi^en  sit,  je^en  set;  Ueoen  lie,  legen  lay;  faugen  suck, 
jdugen  suckle;  faftren  go,  fii^ren  lead. 

a.  As  some  of  the  examples  show,  this  class  of  derivatives 
has  its  representatives  in  English  also,  but  they  are  much  more 
numerous  in  German. 


210  BEBIVATION.  [404- 

5.  By  change  of  the  final  consonant,  with  or  without  accompa- 
nying change  of  vowel,  a  few  verbs  are  made,  with  various 
modification  of  the  meaning  of  the  simple  verb :  thus,  T^angcn 
hang,  "^enfen  execute  hy  hanging;  Biegen  hend,  biiden  how;  netgen 
incline,  nirfen  nod;  tt)a(^en  wake,  watch,  metfen  awaken,  arouse; 
efjen  eat,  d^en  corrode,  etch. 

n.  By  additions  to  the  root : 

1.  The  suffix  el  forms  a  few  diminutives,  as  Ia(^en  laugh,  Id(^eln 
smile;  lieben  hve,  Uebeln  dally,  flirt;  franfen  he  sick,  frdnfeln  he 
sickly  or  ailing. 

a.  But  most  of  the  diminutive  verbs  in  eln  are  derived  from 
nouns  and  adjectives  :  see  below,  405.11.1. 

2.  The  suffix  er  forms  a  few  iterative,  desiderative,  or  caus- 
ative verbs,  as  Happen  flap,  flappern  rattle;  lad^en  lau^h,  Idcfjern 
make  inclined  to  laugh;  f olgen /oWoiw,  folgern  infer,  conclude. 

a.  But  most  verbs  in  ern,  as  in  eln,  come  from  nouns  and  ad- 
jectives ;  and  those  which  appear  to  come  from  verbs  are  rather 
to  be  regarded  as  formed  in  imitation  of  such,  or  after  their 
analogy. 

3.  The  addition  of  ^  gives  in  a  few  cases  intensive  force :  as 
in^bren  hear,  ]^or(^en  hearken;  fd^narren  rattle,  fc^nari^en  snore, 
snort. 

4.  3r  or  ter.  This  is  properly  a  French  ending,  representing 
the  er  or  ir  of  the  infinitive  of  French  verbs ;  and  it  forms 
German  verbs  from  French  or  Latin  roots :  thus,  ftubiren  [flu= 
bieren]  study,  max]^mn  [marfd^ieren]  march,  fpagieren  expatiate, 
go  abroad  for  pleasure  or  exercise,  regteren  rule. 

a.  But  a  few  verbs  in  iren  [ieren]  are  formed,  in  imitation  of 
these,  from  German  nouns  :  as  buc^ftabiren  [bn(^ftaBteren]  spell, 
(from  33ud)ftaBe  letter),  fc^attiren  [f(f)attteren]  shade  (from  ©(flatten 
shadow). 

b.  At  a  certain  period,  about  the  middle  of  the  last  century, 
the  German  language  was  well-nigh  swamped  by  the  introduc- 
tion of  a  multitude  of  such  foreign  verbs  in  iren.  The  greater 
part  of  them  have  been  cast  out  from  dignified  and  literary  use, 
but  they  are  still  rife  in  low  colloquial  and  humorous  styles. 

c.  The  syllable  ir  or  ter  of  these  verbs  receives  the  accent ; 
and  they  therefore  admit  no  prefix  ge  in  the  participle:  see 
243.3a. 


405]  DERIVATIYE  VEEBS.  211 

in.  By  prefixes  to  the  root : 

1.  By  the  inseparable  prefixes  Be,  ent  or  em^,  cr,  QC,  t)cr,  and  gcr. 
For  the  derivative  (or  compound)  verbs  formed  by  means  of 

these  prefixes,  see  above,  302  etc. 

2.  By  separable  prefixes. 

Verbs  formed  by  means  of  such  prefixes  have  no  real  right 
to  be  regarded  as  derivative :  they  are  compounds,  rather :  see 
296  etc. 

Bemark. — Derivative  verbs  in  German  coming  from  other 
verbs  directly  are  quite  rare  ;  and,  of  those  usually  regarded  as 
so  derived,  some  admit  of  explanation  as  denominatives,  or  as 
coming  from  nouns  and  adjectives. 

405.     Verbs  derived  from  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

Verbs  from  nouns  and  adjectives  are  commonly  called  denam- 
inatives.  They  constitute  in  German,  as  in  the  other  related 
languages,  the  great  mass  of  derivative  verbs.  The  relation  of 
the  verbal  idea  to  the  meaning  of  the  primitive  word  is  of  the 
most  varied  character.  Verbs  from  adjectives  usually  signify 
either,  as  intransitives,  to  be  in  or  to  pass  into  the  condition 
denoted  by  the  adjective,  or  else,  as  transitives,  to  reduce  some- 
thing to  that  condition.  Verbs  from  nouns  signify  either  to 
supply  with  that  which  the  noun  denotes,  or  to  deprive  of  it,  or 
to  use  or  apply  it,  or  to  treat  with  it,  or  to  be  like  it,  and  so  on : 
for  examples,  see  below. 

I.  By  the  simple  addition  of  the  endings  of  conjugation : 

1.  From  nouns,  more  usually  without  modification  of  the 
vowel  of  the  primitive  word :  as,  fu^en  set  foot,  Jliid  footing  (f^uB 
foot);  :^aufen  Iwuse,  dwell  {^an^  house);  graicn  graze  ((S5ra§  grass); 
altern  grow  old,  age  (^^Uter  age);  buttern  make  or  turn  to  butter 
(53utter  butter);  prunfen  make  a  show  (^ruiif  show);  arbeiten  work 
(%xb^\t  labor):  sometimes  with  modification  of  the  vowel:  as, 
p^ixQtn plough  {''^^nc^ plough) ;  bammern  hammer {^ammtx hammer); 
ftiirgen  fall  or  hurl  headlong  ((^turg  fall). 

a.  Karely,  a  verb  is  formed  from  a  noun  in  the  plural :  as, 
bldttern  turn  over  the  leaves  of,  etc.  (53Idtter  leaves,  from  53Iatt). 

b.  Nouns  (and  adjectives)  ending  in  the  unaccented  syllable 
en  reject  the  e  of  that  syllable  in  the  derivative  verb :  thus, 
reanen  rain  (^legen  rain),  fiffncn  open  (offen  open). 

2.  From  adjectives,  usually  with  modification  of  the  vowel : 
thus,  rotten   [roten]  redden  (rot§  [rotj  red),  [tdcfen  strengthen 


212  DERIVATION.  [405- 

(ftar!  strong),  tbbten  [toten]  Mil  (tobt  [tot]  dead),  Qeniiaen  suffice 
(Qcnug  enough),  cinbern  alter  (anber  other),  du^ern  utter  (au^er 
out) ;  rarely,  without  modification :  as,  na^en  draw  nigh  (naft 
nigf/i),  alien  grow  old  (alt  oZ(Z). 

a.  A  number  of  derivative  verbs  are  formed  from  adjectives 
in  the  comparative  degree:  thus,  nd()ern  conie  nearer  (ndl^er 
nearer,  from  xiQi%  mtnbern  diminish  (minber  less). 

n.  By  derivative  endings,  forming  stems  of  conjugation : 

1.  The  ending  el  forms  from  both  nouns  and  adjectives  (with 
modification  of  their  vowel)  verbs  whicli  have  a  diminutive,  dis- 
paraging, or  reproachful  meaning:  thus,  fiinfteln  treat  in  an 
artificial  or  affected  manner  (^unft  art);  altertl^iimeln  [altertiimeln] 
he  foolishly  or  affectedly  fond  of  antiquity  (^Itertl^um  [^Itertum] 
antiquity);  fliigeln  subtilize,  he  over-critical  (flug  knowing);  from» 
meln  affect  piety,  cant  (\xomm  pious). 

a.  Compare  derivatives  formed  from  verbs  by  the  same 
ending,  404.II.1. 

2.  The  endings  jc^,  g,  and  eng  form  a  few  verbs  :  f  d)  forms  only 
l^errfe^en  rule  (.£)err  master)  and  f eilf d)en  chaffer  (fell  cheap) ;  g  forms 
bugen  to  thee  and  thou  (bu  thou),  and  one  or  two  others  ;  eng  forms 
faulengen  play  the  sluggard  (f aul  lazy),  etc. 

3.  The  ending  ig  is  properly  one  forming  adjectives  (below, 
415.9) ;  but  it  is  sometimes  attached  both  to  adjectives  and  to 
nouns  in  order  to  the  formation  of  a  special  theme  of  conjuga- 
tion, by  analogy  with  the  numerous  verbs  derived  from  adjec- 
tives ending  in  ig  :  thus,  reinigen  purify  [xnn  pure);  enbigen  end, 
terminate  (@nbe  end). 

4  The  ending  ir  or  ier  forms  a  few  verbs  from  German  nouns : 
see  404.II.4a. 

m.  By  prefixes  (either  with  or  without  derivative  endings) : 
1.  The  inseparable  prefixes  (except  ge)  form  a  very  large 
number  of  denominative  verbs,  generally  without  any  ac- 
companying derivative  ending,  but  occasionally  along  with 
such.  In  these  denominatives,  the  prefixes  have  a  force  anal- 
ogous to  that  which  belongs  to  them  in  composition  (see  307) : 
thus — 

a.  33e  forms  transitives,  denoting  especially  a  furnishing, 
making,  or  treating:  thus,  befeelen  endow  with  a  soul  ((geele 
soul);  begetftern  inspirit  (©eifter  spirits,  from  ^eift)j  befreien /ree. 


406]  DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  213 

liberate  {]xd  free);  hm\6)ttn  enrich  {xd^tx  richer,  f rom  reicE)) ;  Be* 
f d^onigen  beautify  (fd^on  beautiful) ;  Benac^ric^ttflen  inform  [ila^^ 
xi^t  news). 

b.  @nt  forms  especially  verbs  signifying  removal,  deprivation, 
and  the  like:  thus,  tni^txmn withdraw  (fern  far);  entblo^en  strip 
(Uo^bare);  zni1)anpkn  behead  {i0an)i)i  head);  entfrdften  enervate 
(^raft  power);  ent^^eUtgen  desecrate  fteiliQ  holy);  enttDaffnen  dis- 
arm (2Baffen  weapon). 

c.  (^x  forms  transitives,  intransitives,  and  reflexives,  chiefly 
from  adjectives,  and  signifying  a  passing  into,  or  a  reduction 
to,  the  state  signified  by  the  adjective :  thus,  er{)arten  grow  hard, 
er!)drten  make  hard  (^art  hard);  ermatten  tire  (matt  weary);  er= 
gdn^en  complete  (ganj  entire);  erniebrigen  humble  (niebrtg  low); 
eriofen  release  (lo^  loose);  ertoeitern  extend  (roeiter  wider,  from 
iDeit);  erfldren  explain  (flat  clear); — but  sometimes  with  more 
irregular  meaning,  from  adjectives  or  nouns :  thus,  eroBern 
conquer  (ober  superior) ;  erinnem  remind  (inner  interior);  erQrun=» 
ben  fathom,  explore  ((S^runb  bottom). 

d.  3Ser  has  nearly  the  same  value  and  office  as  er,  but  is  more 
prevailingly  transitive  in  effect:  thus,  t)erdnbern  alter  (anber 
other);  Dereiteln  frustrate  (eitcl  vain);  t)ergnuGen  gratify  (gcnug 
enough);  uxlamtxw  lengthen  (Idnger  longer,  from  lang);  t)erglafen 
vitrify,  glaze  ((Sla§  glass);  t)erfilbern  plate  with  silver  (©ilber 
silver) ;  tjeratten  become  antiquated  (alt  old). 

e.  3er  forms  a  very  few  derivatives:  as,  jerffeifd^en  lacerate 
(Sleif^  flesh) ;  gergliebern  dismember  ((S^Iteber  limbs,  from  ®Ueb). 

2.  A  small  number  of  denominatives  are  formed  with  the 
separable  prefixes  :  such  are  abbad^en  unroof  {^a^  roof);  au§- 
fernen  remove  the  stone  or  kernel  of  (£ern  kernel);  ein!er!ern 
imprison  (,^erfer  prison);  umarmen  embrace  (%xm  arm);  an]- 
muntern  cheer  up  (munter  cheerful);  auSmeiten  widen  {mxtwide). 

406.     Verbs  derived  from  Particles. 

A  few  verbs  are  derived  from  other  parts  of  speech  by  the 
same  means  as  from  nouns  and  adjectives. 

Such  are  emporen  excite,  arouse  {tmpox  ahft) ;  begegnen  meei 
(gegen  afifains^);  ern)iebern  an8ii;er  (mkhn  again) ;  t)erntd)ten,  jer- 
nid)ten  annihilate  (nic^t  not);  t)erneinen  deny  (nein  no);  bejaften 
affirm  Qa  yes);  dd)sen  groan  (ad)  ah!);  jaiK^jen  exult  (Jud^,  iud)T^c 
hurrah!). 


214  DERIVATION.  [407- 

DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 

407.  Primitive  Nouns. 

1.  Primitive  nouns  are  in  part  monosyllabic  words  which 
contain  no  evident  sign  of  their  really  derivative  nature,  and  of 
which  the  original  roots  are  no  longer  traceable  in  German. 

Such  are  gjJann  man,  ^au§  house,  ^aum  tree,  ^inb  child,  35ol! 
people,  ^vi!^foot. 

2.  In  part  they  are  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  the 
evident  products  of  composition  or  derivation,  containing 
elements  more  or  less  closely  analogous  with  those  by  which 
other  recognizable  derivatives  are  formed,  but  coming  from 
roots  of  which  they  are  the  only  remaining  representatives. 

Such  are  DfJame  name,  ^naBe  hoy,  ^lufle  eye,  ®rbe  earth,  SSater 
father,  ^oii^ter  daughter,  Staffer  water,  ^ogel  bird,  ^Jabel  needle, 
(Segel  sail 

a.  Some  of  the  words  in  both  these  classes  are  traceable  by 
comparison  of  the  kindred  languages  to  earlier  roots  from 
which  they  are  descended:  thus,  5!J?ann  is  usually  (though 
doubtfully)  referred  to  a  root  man  think  (the  same  with  meinen 
think,  mean);  ^inb  comes  from  the  root  gan  generate;  gu^  is 
identical  with  Latin  pes,  Greek  pous,  coming  from  pad  walk; 
5^ame  goes  back  to  gna  Ajtiou?  ;  ^o(!)ter  to  duh  draw  the  breast, 
milk,  and  so  on. 

408.  Nouns  derived  from  Verbs. 

I.  By  variation  or  gradation  of  vowel  (^Blaut :  see  400.2)  alone, 
without  added  ending. 

Thus,  33anb  volume,  33unb  bond,  from  Binben  bind;  ©i^  seat, 
©a^  sediment,  @a^  settler,  from  fi^en  sit;  3u(i  draft,  from  jie'^en 
draw;  %x\ii  step,  from  treten  tread;  ©|)rud}  speech,  from  jprec^cn 
speak;  ©prung  spring,  from  fpnnoen  spring. 

a.  All  these  words  originally  had  endings  of  derivation,  which 
have  become  lost  by  phonetic  corruption.  They  are  prevailingly 
masculine. 

b.  In  words  thus  derived  appear  sometimes  irregular  altera- 
tions of  the  root,  especially  of  its  final  consonant,  as  the 
examples  in  part  show. 

c.  The  relation  cf  meaning  of  such  derivatives  to  the  idea  of 
action,  state,  or  quality  expressed  by  the  verbal  root  is  very 
various ;  but  they  signify  in  general  either  the  act  or  quaUty 


408]  DERIVATIV.E  NOUNS.  215 

itself,  or  the  result  of  the  action,  or  the  person  or  thing  that 
acts,  or  to  which  the  state  or  quality  belongs. 

II.  By  brief  and  obscure  endings,  relics  of  earlier  fuller  forms, 
and  no  longer  producing  distinct  classes  of  derivatives  with 
definable  modifications  of  the  radical  meaning.  Such  endings 
are — 

1.  %t,  be,  t  (ft,  ft),  b:  thus,  35urbe  burden,  from  Bciren  hear; 
8(^arte  notch,  from  jc^cren  shear;  ^d^xt passage,  from  fal^ren  go; 
<Sd)rift  document,  from  fd}reiben  write;  ^rac^t  dress,  from  tragen 
ivear;  33runft  heat,  from  Brennen  burn;  ^unft  art,  from  fennen 
know;  ^unft  coming,  from  fommen  come;  33ranb  combustion,  from 
brennen  burn. 

2.  ^,  which  forms  a  very  large  number  of  derivatives :  thus, 
^inbe  tie,  from  binben  bind;  Sprac^e  language,  from  f^re(i)en 
speak;  (SJabe  gift,  from  geben  give;  gllefle^!/,  from  ftiegenj^i/. 

a.  The  derivatives  of  this  class  also  share  in  the  gradation  of 
radical  vowel,  and  the  irregular  alterations  of  the  final  con- 
sonant of  the  root,  which  characterize  the  older  words  of  the 
language.  They  are  of  as  various  meaning  as  those  of  the 
preceding  class.  Their  gender  is  prevailingly  feminine — ex- 
ceptions being  appellations  of  males  (persons  and  animals),  and 
a  few  that  are  of  anomalous  character. 

III.  By  endings  of  more  distinct  form,  and  more  uniform  and 
definable  meaning. 

The  most  important  of  these  we  will  take  up  in  alphabetical 
order,  for  the  sake  of  more  convenient  reference. 

1.  (^i.  This  suffix  is  of  foreign  origin,  being  derived  from  the 
Latin  and  French  ia,  ie.  It  was  used  originally  only  to  form 
derivatives  from  nouns  (see  below,  410.2),  but  has  come  also  to 
form  from  verbs  ending  in  eln  and  em  abstract  nouns  of  action, 
often  with  a  disparaging  or  contemptuous  implication:  thus, 
©c^meic^elei  flattery,  from  fd)metc^eln  flatter;  2:dnbelet  trifling, 
from  tdnbeln  trifle;  ^lauberei  chit-chat,  from  plantittnl  chatter ; 
3auberei  witchcraft,  from  ^anbtxn  practise  magic. 

a.  Words  formed  with  ei  are  feminine,  and  take  the  accent 
vipon  this  syllable,  as  is  required  by  the  derivation  of  the  suffix. 

2.  ©I.  This  suffix  forms  a  considerable  class  of  masculine 
derivatives,  denoting  generally  an  instrument,  quite  rarely  an 
actor:  thus,  §ebel  lever,  from  i)c1)tn  raise ;  '^tdd  cover,  from 
beden  cover;  8(^ldoel  mallet,  from  f(f)Iagen  beat;  6(^IiiffeI  key, 
from  f(f)lte§en  lock;  gliigel  wing,  from  ^mtnfly.'' 


216  DEEIVATION.  [408- 

a.  But  a  great  many  nouns  in  the  language  ending  in  el  are 
from  lost  or  unknown  roots,  and  therefore  have  the  value  of 
primitive  words  (407.2) ;  some  of  these  are  feminine  or  neuter : 
as  are  also  some  others,  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their 
signification. 

3.  ®n.    Besides  forming  the  infinitives  of  all  verbs  (237.1a), 
which,  when  used  as  ordinary  nouns,  are  neuter  (340),  en  is  the 
suffix  of  derivation  of  a  considerable  class  of  masculine  nouns, 
as  35iffen  bit,  from  bei^en  Ute;  (^xdbm  ditch,  from  Qxdbtn  dig ; . 
©d)aben  harm,  from  f(!)aben  injure. 

a.  Of  the  numerous  words  of  obscure  etymology  in  eti,  a  few 
are  neuter,  but  none  are  feminine. 

4.  ®r.  This  suffix  forms  numerous  masculine  nouns  denoting 
an  actor;  thus,  Steiter  ri^der,  from  reiten  ride;  Tlakx painter, 
from  malen  paint;  Xanjer  dancer,  from  tanjen  dance;  33d(!er 
baker,  from  baden  bake.  With  these  are  closely  akin  a  few 
names  of  instruments,  as  33o^rer  auger,  from  bol^ren  bore;  gel* 
ger  pointer,  from  geigen  point. 

a.  Of  the  older  words  ending  in  er,  and  requiring  to  be 
reckoned  as  primitives  (407-2),  many  are  feminine  or  neuter. 

b.  J®r  also  forms  classes  of  derivative  nouns  from  nouns : 
see  410.3. 

5.  Sing  forms  from  verbs  chiefly  masculine  nouns  denoting 
the  recipient  of  the  verbal  action :  thus,  i^mhlim^  foundling,  from 
^nhm  find;  2t^xlinQ pupil,  from  Itl^xm  teach ;  (BmQiinQ  suckling, 
from  f  dug  en  suckle. 

a.  For  the  derivatives  in  ling  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  see 
409.II.4,  410.6. 

6.  9^i§  [ni§].  This  suffix  is  chiefly  used  in  German  to  form 
abstract  nouns  from  verbs ;  much  less  often,  like  the  cor- 
responding English  ness,  to  produce  similar  derivatives  from 
adjectives  (see  409.11.5).  Such  abstracts  come  especially  from 
derivative  verbs  and  those  compounded  with  inseparable 
prefixes,  as  be,  er,  t)er ;  sometimes  seeming  to  be  formed  from 
the  participle  rather  than  the  simple  verbal  root.  Like  all 
abstract  nouns,  they  may  admit  of  use  also  as  concretes,  or 
pass  wholly  over  into  such.  Examples  are  gcugni^  testimony, 
from  geugen  testify;  §inberni^  hindrance,  from  l^inbern  hinder; 
S3egrdbni|  burial,  frombegraben  bury;  @retgnt§  occurrence, from 
ereignen  occur;  33erl^dltni^  relation,  from  t)er6allen  stand  related; 


408]  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  217 

(^t^ianhm^  confession,  from  gefte^en  (geftanben)  confess;  (SJefattQ* 
ni6  prison,  from  gefangen  imprisoned. 

a.  The  greater  number  of  nouns  in  nt^  [nt»]  are  neuter,  but 
a  score  or  more  of  them  are  feminine,  especially  such  as  have 
retained  more  fully  their  abstract  meaning.  A  few,  as  @rf|)arni^, 
(Jrfenntrti^,  are  feminine  when  used  abstractly,  but  neuter  as 
concretes. 

7.  (Sal,  fel.  These  are  two  different  forms  of  the  same 
original  sufBx,  which  at  first  and  more  properly  formed  nouns 
from  nouns,  but  whose  existing  derivatives  are  to  be  referred 
almost  exclusively  to  verbal  roots,  and  are  akin  in  meaning 
with  those  in  rii|.  ©el  is  only  used  in  concretes.  Thus,  (B^id- 
fal  fate,  from  f^ttfen  send;  ^xx']ai  error,  from  trren  wander; 
Ueberbleibfel  remnant,  from  iiBerbleiben  remain  over;  iRcit^fel 
[Sldtfel]  riddle,  from  ratten  [raten]  guess. 

a.  Derivatives  in  |al  and  jel  are  neuter,  excepting  two  or  three 
in  fal  (^rangfal,  9J^uI)fal,  iriibfal),  which  may  also  be  used  as 
feminine  ;  and  bet  ©topfel  stopper. 

8.  Ung.  This  suffix  is  nearly  equivalent  in  meaning  and  ap- 
plication with  our  ing  forming  verbal  nouns  (infinitives  in  ing), 
but  is  peculiar  in  that  it  is  hardly  used  except  with  derivative 
and  transitive  verbs.  The  nouns  it  forms  admit  an  object  (ob- 
jective genitive :  216.27i)  nearly  as  regularly  as  the  verbs  from 
which  they  come.  Many  of  the  nouns  in  ung,  hke  other 
abstracts,  pass  over  into  concrete  use ;  and  such  as  come  from 
reflexive  verbs  have  an  intransitive  force.  Examples  are  giil^rung 
leading,  conduct,  33elel)rung  instruction,  (Srfinbung  invention,  35er= 
gebung  forgiveness,  3Bcmer!ung  remark,  33ebeutung  meaning,  ^e= 
megung  mx)tion,  ^eigimg  affection— from  fii^ren  lead,  bele^ren 
instruct,  and  so  on. 

a.  The  derivatives  in  ung  are  feminine  without  exception. 

9.  Besides  the  suffixes  above  detailed,  there  are  a  few  of  in- 
frequent use :  such  are  anb  (properly  the  old  participal  ending), 
in  §eilanb  Savior,  from  !)eilen  heal;  — id)t,  in  ^el)rtd}t  sweepings, 
from  !e!)ren  sweep,  etc. ;— at^^  [at],  in  Sierat^  [3istat]  ornament, 
from  gieren  decorate;  — enb,  in  ^ugenb  virtue,  from  taugeu  be  of 
value ; — and  one  or  two  others,  of  too  little  consequence  to  -be 
worth  noting,  ©cftaft  (410.7)  and  t{)um  [turn]  (410.8)  also  form 
from  verbal  roots  two  or  three  derivatives,  as  2Bauber](^aft, 
25^adi3tl)um  [2Ba^glum], 


218  DERIVATION.  [409- 

409.    Nouns  derived  from  Adjectives. 

1.  1.  That  the  adjective,  of  either  number  and  of  any  gender, 
is'  capable  of  use  directly  as  a  noun,  still  retaining  its  adjective 
declension,  was  pointed  out  above  (at  129),  and  needs  no  further 
notice. 

2.  A  few  nouns  are  derived  from  adjectives  without  a  suffix, 
being  identical  with  the  adjective  theme,  but  being  declined  as 
independent  (neuter)  substantives:  such  are  SfJotl)  [3tDt]  red, 
©riin  green,  9ie(i)t  right,  (S)ut  property,  goods, 

n.  Nouns  derived  by  the  aid  of  suffixes. 

1.  ^.  The  suffix  e  forms  feminine  abstracts  (convertible  into 
concretes)  from  primitive  adjectives,  the  vowel  of  which  is 
always  modified  if  capable  of  it.  Thus,  ®ro§e  greatness,  ^iitc 
goodness,  Streue  truth,  ^ief e  depth ;  from  gro^  great,  etc. 

2.  §cit.  This  suffix  is  ^he  same  with  our  head  and  hood  (in 
Godhead,  manhood,  etc.),  and  forms  feminine  abstracts  both 
from  nouns  (see  below,  410.5)  and  from  adjectives.  Thus,  grei* 
):\t[i  freedom,  ^Blinb'^eit  blindness,  ^ibtxntjdi  stupidity ;  from  frei 
free  etc. 

3.  ^eit  is  originally  the  same  suffix  with  l^eit,  taking  the  place 
of  the  latter  after  most  primitive  adjectives  ending  in  el  and  er, 
and  after  all  those  formed  by  the  suffixes  Imr,  ig,  1x6)  and  jam. 
Thus,  (Jitelfcit  vanity,  33itter!eit  Utterness,  ^an!6ar!eit  gratitude, 
^xUiqUM  cheapness,  §ofIi(i)!eit  courtesy,  ©^arfamfcit  economy; 
from  eitcl  vain,  etc.  To  many  adjectives,  the  additional  ad- 
jective suffix  tg  (415.9)  is  added,  with  fcit  after  it,  instead  of,  or 
along  with,  fcit  alone:  thus,  from  ficin  small  we  have  both 
0einl^eit  and  ^leintgfett;  from  juJ3  sweet,  ©ii^igfeit;  from  ftanb= 
);)a\i  steadfast,  6tanbl^afttgfeit;  from  ixt\x[Q^  faithless,  2:reuIo{ig!eit. 

4.  Sing  forms  a  few  masculine  personal  nouns  from  adjectives : 
thus,  grcmbling  stranger,  Siingling  youth;  from  fremb  strange, 
iung  young.  For  derivatives  with  ling  from  verbs  and  nouns, 
see  408.111.5,  410.6. 

5.  5^t^  [ni§]  (see  408.III.6)  forms  only  four  nouns  from  ad- 
jectives ;  namely,  ginfltintB  darkness,  (Bc^eintnijj  secrecy,  SBilb* 
nt^  wilderness,  (SleicC)nife  likeness. 

6.  ©^aft  is  chiefly  employed  in  forming  nouns  from  noims 
(see  410.7);  only  a  few  adjectives  admit  it,  as  ^emetnf(f)aft 
community,  (5Jcf angenjcf)af t  imprisonment,  ©igenfd^aft  pecuKarif?/; 
from  gemetn  common,  etc.  For  the  derivation  etc,  of  fc^aft  see 
below,  410.7. 


410]  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  219 

7.  %t[^  from  %f)t\l  [%t\X]  part,  forms  fractional  numerals  from 
ordinals ;  see  207.2. 

8.  ^l^um  [turn].,  like  fd)aft,  is  a  suffix  applied  chiefly  to  nouns; 
see  below  410.8.  A  few  adjectives  take  it,  as  9teid)t'5um  wealth, 
(^XQtni^nm  property ;  from  reic^  rich,  eigen  oivn. 

9.  Yet  rarer  suffixes  are  uncj  (compare  408.III.8,  410.9)  in 
x^t\tnr\Q  fortress,  from  feft  strong;  — ic^t,  in  ®idi(^t  thicket,  from 
bid  thick;  — ut^  [ut]  in  ^(rmut^  poverty,  from  arm  poor;  — enb  in 
Sugetib  youth,  from  jung  young. 

410.    Nouns  derived  from  Nouns. 

1.  (J^en,  lein.  These  are  equivalent  suffixes,  forming  from 
nouns  (always  with  modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  latter,  if  it 
be  one  admitting  modification)  neuter  diminutives  :  thus,  ^m§^ 
rfien  little  Iwuse,  Wdnn^tn  little  man,  mannikin,  ^nciblein  little  hoy, 
58u(^Iein  little  hook. 

a.  These  suffixes  correspond  to  the  English  diminutive  end- 
ings kin  and  ling  (in  gosling,  duckling,  etc.).  (S^l)en  belongs  more 
to  the  northern  dialects  of  German,  lein  (often  shortened  in 
popular  use  to  el  or  le)  to  the  southern  ;  but  in  the  literary  lang- 
uage their  respective  use  is  mainly  determined  by  considera- 
tions of  euphony,  and  many  words  admit  the  addition  of  either. 

h.  The  words  formed  by  these  suffixes  often  add  to  their 
meaning  as  diminutives,  or  substitute  for  it,  an  implication  of 
intimacy  or  tenderness.  Some  of  them  have  a  well-established 
value  as  independent  words  :  such  are  grdulein  young  lady,  Miss, 
Wdh^tn  girl,  Wdnn^tn  and  2BeiB(^en  'male  and  female  of  an 
animal  species. 

2.  @t.  The  foreign  origin  of  the  suffix  et  was  explained  above 
(408.III.1).  As  added  to  nouns,  it  indicates  especially  the  state, 
condition,  or  occupation  of  a  person  ;  also  sometimes  the  place 
where  an  occupation  is  carried  on :  thus,  3dgerei  sportsmanship, 
from  3dger  hunter;  ^xndtxdprinting-estahUsliment,  from  Cruder 
printer.  In  a  few  words  it  has  a  collective  force  :  thus,  3leiterei 
cavalry,  from  9teiter  rider. 

a.  As  it  is  itself  accented,  this  suffix  was  added  most  easily  to 
unaccented  terminational  syllables,  as  el  and  er ;  and  there  are 
but  few  words — as  ^btet  ahhacy,  35ocitei  hailiwick — in  which  it  is 
appended  to  radical  syllables.  Being  oftenest  used  after  er,  it 
has  come  to  assume  er  in  many  c'&s  s  as  a  prefix  to  itself,  form- 
ing a  kind  of  compound  suffix  erci,  which  is  freely  used  with 


220  DERIVATION.  [410- 

words  accented  on  the  final:  thus,  ©fladerei  slavery^  ^inberci 
childishness,  S^elmerei  roguery;  from  ©flat)  slave,  etc. 

6.  Especially  in  its  recent  derivatives,  ei  is  apt  to  convey  a 
disparaging  impUcation :  for  example,  3urt[teret  lawyer's  doings, 
as  compared  with  3uri§))rubeng  jurisprudence. 

3.  @r.  a.  Besides  the  numerous  derivatives  which  it  forms 
from  verbs  (408.111.4),  cr  makes  many  names  of  a  personal 
agent  from  nouns  expressing  the  thing  dealt  with  or  acted  upon : 
as,  (BariQn singer,  from  6anQ  song;  ©deafer  shepherd,  from  6d)af 
sheep ;  Partner  gardener,  from  ©arten  garden. 

h.  It  is  also  added  to  names  of  countries  and  towns,  to  indicate 
a  native  or  inhabitant  of  the  same :  thus,  ©d^tDeijer  Switzer, 
33erUner  inhabitant  of  Berlin,  geipgiger  man  from  Leipzig. 

These  nouns  are  then  frequently  employed  as  uninflected  ad- 
jectives: see  415.5. 

c.  For  the  same  purpose,  it  is  sometimes  combined  with  Latin 
endings,  forming  compound  suffixes,  as  aner  and  enjer :  thus, 
^merifaner  America?!,  ^tl^enien}er  Athenian. 

d.  After  nouns,  as  after  verbs,  it  is  in  a  few  cases  irregularly 
converted  into  net:  thus,  ©locEner  hell-ringer,  from  ^lodfe  hell; 
^arfner  harper,  from  §arfe  harp. 

e.  It  forms  a  small  number  of  mascuhnes  answering  to  fem- 
inmes  in  e :  thus,  2Bitttt)er  [2Bittt)er]  widower,  from  SBittlDe  [SGSittDe] 
widow;  dauber  cock-pigeon,  from  Xaxxhz  dove. 

4.  3n  (sometimes  spelt  inn).  This  sufiBx  forms  feminine  from 
masculine  appellations:  thus,  ^irtin  shepherdess,  from  §irt 
shepherd;  ^ijniflin  queen,  from  ^onifi  king;  greunbin  fcTiiale 
friend,  ^bc^in  female  cook,  fiotDin  lioness,  grangbfin  French 
woman,  33erlinertn  woman  of  Berlin.  It  is  also  added  to  titles 
to  signify  the  wife  of  the  person  to  whom  the  title  belongs :  as, 
$f arrerin  pastor's  wife,  ^rofeff orin  Mrs.  Professor. 

3n  usually  requires  modification  of  the  radical  vowel,  but 
there  are  (as  the  examples  show)  numerous  exceptions. 

5.  §cit,  like  our  head  and  hood,  forms  abstracts,  and  a  few 
collectives,  from  nouns  as  well  as  from  adjectives  (409.11.2): 
thus,  (Siott^eit  Godhead,  ^mhtitxt  childhood,  %))ox1cint  folly,  9)^enfd^= 
l^eit  humanity,  @etftli^!eit  clergy. 

6.  StnQ  forms  a  few  masculine  personal  names  from  nouns,  as 
from  verbs  (408.III.5)  and  adjectives  (409.11.4) :  such  are  ^dl^r* 
ling  yearling,  giiid^tling  fugitive,  ©unftUng  favorite. 


411]  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  221 

7.  a.  ^^aft  is  the  same  with  our  ship  (in  lordship,  worship, 
etc.),  and  is  derived  from  ]^a^tr\  shape,  create;  it  signifies  pri- 
marily the  shape  or  make  of  anything,  then  its  character,  office, 
rank,  and  the  like:  thus,  ^xtnnh\d)a^i friendship,  ^efanntfc^aft 
acquaintance,  55ormimbf(^aft  guardianship.  All  its  derivatives 
are  of  the  feminine  gender. 

b.  It  forms  also  a  number  of  collectives:  as,  ^riefterj(^aft 
priesthood,  ®tenerf(^aft  body  of  servants,  (SJefeII](i)aft  company, 
Sanbf(^aft  landscape. 

8.  ^!^um  [turn],  our  dom  (in  kingdom,  wisdom,  etc),  is  also  a 
noun,  of  obscure  derivation,  but  of  meaning  and  application  as 
a  suffix  nearly  akin  with  those  of  fc^aft  (above,  7).  Its  deriv- 
atives are  neuter,  with  only  two  or  three  exceptions  (namely 
3rrtl)um,  9letc[)t^um,  and,  according  to  the  usage  of  some,  33e* 
tDet§tl)um  and  2[Bad)§t^um),  which  are  masculine.  It  forms  nouns 
signifying  character,  rank,  or  authority,  which  then,  in  a  few 
cases,  come  to  mean  that  over  which  authority  is  exerted :  thus, 
3f?tttertftum  chivalry,  ^apftt^^um  papacy,  g^rtflentftum  Christendom, 
^oniotl^um  kingdom,  giirftent^um  principality. 

9.  Suffixes  forming  a  few  isolated  words  are  x\^  in  ®dnf erid^ 
gander,  from  ^an§  goose;  ga^nrid)  ensign,  from  gal^ne  banner, 
etc. ;  UHQ  in  one  or  two  collective  words  like  SBalbuttQ  woodland, 
from  2SaIb  forest;  atft  [at]  in  §eimat^  Iwme,  from  ^eim  home. 
5^tB  [ni§]  (408.III.6)  appears  to  form  a  derivative  or  two  from 
nouns,  as  in  33unbnt&  covenant,  from  33unb  tie;  also  jal  (408.111.7), 
as  in  9Jlu^fal  distress,  from  5Jlii^e  toil. 

411.    Nouns  formed  by  means  of  prefixes. 

I.  A  very  large  number  of  nouns  contain  as  their  initial 
elements  the  verbal  prefixes,  both  separable  and  inseparable 
(297).  For  the  most  part,  however,  they  are  not  formed  as 
nouns  by  means  of  those  prefixes,  but  are  derivatives,  accord- 
ing to  the  methods  explained  above  (408),  from  verbs  com- 
pounded separably  or  inseparably.  The  only  exceptions  are,  a 
considerable  class  formed  by  Qt  (below,  II.l),  and  an  occasional 
anomalous  case  like  ^Inp'^e  rising  ground,  from  ^b1)t  height. 

n.  The  proper  prefixes  forming  noims  are  very  few  in 
number,  namely  as  follows : 

1.  ®e.  T^is  common  prefix  forms  a  large  number  of  deriv- 
ative nouns,  both  from  nouns  and  from  verbs,  having  in  general 
a  collective  or  frequentative  character.    Thus — 


222  DERIVATION.  [411- 

a.  Collectives  from  nouns,  generally  with  modification  of 
vowel,  sometimes  with  other  more  irregular  vowel  changes : 
such  are  ^eftrau(?^  shrubbery,  from  ©traud)  shrub ;  ®etr)ol!  cloud- 
mass,  from  2BoIfe  cloud;  (^ebtrg  or  ®ebir(^e  mountain-range,  from 
SBerg  mountain;  (^z^zhn  plumage,  from  ^ttm  feather. 

b.  A  few  collective  or  associative  personal  appellatives,  from 
nouns  or  verbs,  in  which  (je  has  nearly  its  original  meaning 
(307-5)  of  with;  thus,  ^efpiele  playfellow,  from  ipielen  play ; 
^efd^rte  companion,  from  \d\)xtn  go;  ©eliatter  godfather,  from 
SSater  father;  (Sef(f)n)i[ter  brothers  and  sisters,  from  (5(f)tt)efter 
sister. 

c.  From  verbs,  nouns  signifying  either  the  means  or  the  effect 
of  the  verbal  action :  thus,  (S^e^or  sense  of  hearing,  from  l^oren 
hear;  (^txot1:\t  weapon,  from  tt)el)rcn  defend;  ^ebet  prayer,  from 
bitten  ^fc;  ^zmalht  painting,  from  ma\zu  paint. 

d.  From  verbs,  frequentative  or  intensive  abstracts,  or  nouns 
significant  of  the  verbal  action :  thus,  (^ejprdd^  conversation, 
from  fprec^^en  speak;  ©efpott  mockery,  from  fpotten  mock;  (^e= 
iprdnge  pageantry,  from  prangen  make  a  show;  (SJetofe  din,  from 
tofen  roar. 

Eemarks.  e.  These  are  the  leading  uses  of  the  prefix  ge ;  but 
in  not  a  few  of  the  derivatives  it  forms,  its  effect  is  too  indistinct 
or  various  to  be  brought  under  any  classification. 

f.  As  the  examples  show,  the  words  formed  with  ge  exhibit 
the  gradation  as  well  as  the  modification  of  vowel,  and  are 
either  without  suffix,  or  take  one  of  the  simpler  suffixes  (408.11.), 
especially  e.  In  many  words,  this  e  may  be  either  added  or 
omitted. 

g.  Excepting  the  class  under  b,  above,  which  are  masculine, 
the  nouns  formed  with  ge  are  nearly  all  neuter.  Masculine  are 
only  about  a  dozen  (©ebrauc^,  ^ebanfe,  ©efafleti,  ©e'^alt,  (^enit^, 
®eru(^,  (^efang,  ©efc^marf,  ^eftan!,  ©etrinn,  ^eminnft  [@ett)inft]); 
feminine,  the  same  number  ((SJeberbe,  ^ebiibr,  ^eburt,  (^ebulb, 
(i^efaftr,  ^emetnbe,  ^eniige,  ^ej(f)t(^te,  CS5ef(^tt)ul]t,  (S5eftalt,  ©emalt, 
^etDdbr). 

7i.  Afew  nouns,  as  ^IM  luck,  happiness,  ^laube  belief,  contain 
the  prefix  ge  abbreviated  to  a  simple  g. 

2.  Wi^.  This  prefix  is  the  same  with  the  English  mis,  and 
has  a  similar  office.  Its  value  is  rather  that  of  a  compounded 
element  than  of  a  prefix.  It  takes  always  the  principal  accent, 
and  does  not  affect  the  gender  of  the  nouns  to  which  it  is 


414]  DEEIVATIYE  NOUNS.  223 

prefixed.    Thus,  ^Jli^Qriff  mistake,  5)Ziffetl^at  mwdeed,  ^Jli^Qunft 
disfavor,  ^J^tpeT^agen  discomfort. 

3.  Un  is,  as  iu  English,  the  negative  prefix.  It  is  used  with 
nouns  more  often  than  in  our  language,  always  taking  the  ac- 
cent, without  affecting  the  gender ;  it  either  signifies  actual 
negation,  or  impUes  something  unnatural,  repugnant,  or  inju- 
rious. Thus,  Unre(^t  wrong,  Unbanf  ingratititde,  Ungliid  mis- 
fortune, Unfutn  nonsense;  Unmenfc^  unnatural  monster,  Ungeftalt 
misshapen  form,  Unt^at  misdeed. 

4.  Ur.  This  is,  as  has  been  already  pointed  out  (307.4:),  the 
same  word  originally  with  the  inseparable  prefix  er,  and  ulti- 
mately identical  with  au§  out.  In  a  few  words  it  still  has  a  mean- 
ing akin  with  that  of  er :  thus,  Urtfteil  [Urteil]  judgment  (ert^eilen 
[erteilen]  assign),  Urlaub  leave  (txiavihiw permit),  Urfunbe  document, 
Urfprung  origin,  and  so  on.  But  in  most  of  the  derivatives  which 
it  forms  it  has  an  intensive  force,  with  the  distinct  implication 
of  originality  or  primitiveness :  thus,  Urfa(f)e  cause  (original  or 
fundamental  thing),  UriDelt  primitive  world,  UrBilb  archetype, 
Hrflrojiuater  greatgrandfather. 

a.  Ur  always  takes  the  accent,  and  it  leaves  unchanged  the 
gender  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  prefixed. 

5.  ^rg  is  identical  in  derivation  and  meaning  with  our  prefix 
arch,  and  denotes  what  is  eminent  or  superior  in  its  kind.  In 
respect  to  accent  and  gender,  it  is  like  the  three  prefixes  last 
treated  of.  Thus,  ©raenQcl  arc/t  angel,  ©rgl^ersoG  arch  duke,  ^rgbieb 
arch-thief. 

6.  %\\\,  originally  the  same  with  the  inseparable  prefix  ent 
(307.3),  appears  in  the  present  language  only  in  5lnttD0rt  answer 
(from  SSort  word)  and  ^ntli^  countenance. 

412.  From  other  parts  of  speech  than  those  treated  above, 
nouns  are  only  with  the  greatest  rarity  formed  directly,  or 
otherwise  than  through  the  medium  of  derivative  adjectives  or 
verbs.  Such  words  as  D^iebenmfl  lowland,  from  nieber  (adverb) 
down,  and  ^nnung  guild,  from  in  in,  are  anomalies  in  the 
German  system  of  word-derivation. 

DEEIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

413.  Primitive  Adjectives. 

Primitive  adjectives,  Uke  primitive  nouns  (407),  may  be 
divided  into  two  classes : 


224  DEKIVATION.  [414- 

1.  Simple  monosyllabic  adjectives,  the  evidences  of  whose 
originally  derivative  character  are  effaced :  thus,  gut  goodf  lang 
hng,  arm  poor,  l^art  hard,  Qxm  green. 

2.  Adjectives  containing  an  evident  element  of  derivation,  and 
analogous  with  those  derived  from  known  primitives,  but  com- 
ing from  roots  which  are  now  lost :  thus,  Irage  lazy,  tjdkx  cheer- 
ful, eben  even,  bunfel  dark. 

a.  Some  of  these,  as  of  the  "primitive"  nouns  (407.2a),  admit 
of  being  traced  to  more  primitive  roots  by  the  researches  of 
comparative  philology. 

414.  Adjectives  derived  without  Suffix  or  Prefix. 

Adjectives  coming  from  verbal  roots  by  simple  gradation  of 
the  radical  vowel  (Ablaut),  without  a  suffix  (hke  nouns  :  see 
408.1.)>  ^^^  very  few  in  German :  examples  are  brac^  fallow,  from 
Bred^en  breakup;  glatt  smooth,  from  Qkiknslip;  hid  thick,  from 
the  root  of  gebeil^eti  thrive;  ^M  fledged,  from  fliegcn  fly. 

415.  Adjectives  derived  by  Sivffix. 

As  the  various  endings  forming  adjectives  are,  almost  without 
exception,  used  in  derivation  from  different  parts  of  speech,  it 
will  be  more  convenient  to  treat  all  the  uses  of  each  one  to- 
gether, taking  the  suffixes  up  in  their  alphabetical  order. 

1.  33ar.  This  suffix  is  regarded  as  a  derivative  from  the  verb 
bdren  bear,  carry.  It  was  of  infrequent  use  in  ancient  German, 
and  only  as  attached  to  nouns. 

a.  Examples  of  its  use  with  nouns  are  btenftbar  serviceable 
(servwe-bringing),  \x\x^ihax  fruitful  (fruit-bearir\^),  \\xx^i^ax  ter- 
rible, Qangbar  current,  fid^tbar  visible. 

b.  In  modern  usage,  it  forms  a  large  class  of  derivatives  from 
verbs  (almost  always  transitive),  having  the  meaning  of  our  ad- 
jectives in  able,  or  indi?ating  capability  to  endure  the  action  of 
the  verb :  thus,  e^ar  eatable,  gente^bar  enjoyable,  f^eilbar  [tetlbarj 
divisible,  unbett)o^)nbar  uninhabitable,  unfe^lbar  incapable  of 
failing. 

c.  Very  rarely,  it  is  added  to  an  adjective:  thus,  offcnBar 
evident,  from  offen  open. 

2.  @n,  ern.  The  suffix  en  forms  (from  nouns)  adjectives  de- 
noting material  or  kind:  thus,  golben  golden,  tooUtn  woolen,  trben 
earthen,  eid|en  oaken.  To  words  ending  in  er,  only  n  is  added : 
thus,  fupfern  of  copper,  filbern  of  silver,  lebern  leathern.    Out  of 


415]  DERIVATIVE  ADJECTIVES.  225 

the  frequency  of  this  combination  has  grown  in  recent  use  the 
form  erit,  which  was  perhaps  at  first  applied  only  to  nouns  form- 
ing a  plural  in  er:  thus,  plgern  wooden,  from  ,§ol3  (pi.  ©biger) 
wood — but  is  now  used  indiscriminately,  requiring  modification 
of  the  vowel  of  its  primitive :  thus,  Bleiern  leaden,  tpnern  of  clay 
CXfjon),  ftd!)Iern  of  steel  (©tat)!). 

3.  @n,  enb.  These  endings,  forming  respectively  the  past 
participle  of  verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation,  and  the  present  par- 
ticiple of  all  verbs,  are  proper  adjective  sufiixes,  but  need  only 
be  mentioned  here,  as  their  uses  form  a  part  of  the  subject  of 
verbal  conjugation,  and  have  been  already  explained  (see  349 
etc.). 

4.  %t,  eft.  These  are  the  endings  by  which  are  formed,  from 
simple  adjectives,  adjective  themes  of  the  comparative  and 
superlative  degree  (see  133  etc.) :  also,  ft  forms  ordinal  numerals 
from  cardinals  (see  203). 

5.  (Jr.  The  patronymic  nouns  formed  by  the  suffix  er  from 
names  of  countries  or  towns  (410.36)  are  very  commonly  used 
also  with  the  value  of  adjectives.  When  so  used,  they  are  not 
subject  to  declension,  but  are  treated  as  if  they  were  com- 
pounded with  the  noun  which  they  qualify.  Thus,  33erliner  33Iau 
Berlin  blue,  \iCi^  ©tra^burfier  ^Jliinfter  tlie  Strasburg  catJiedral,  ber 
Seipstger  3}leffe  of  the  Leipsiofair. 

6.  (5t  forms  the  past  participle  of  verbs  of  the  New  or  weak 
conjugation :  see  246,  349  etc. 

7.  §aft.  This  suffix  is  regarded  as  derived  from  ^aben  have, 
or  ^aften  cling,  indicating  primarily  the  possession  or  adhesion 
of  the  quality  designated  by  the  words  to  which  it  is  attached. 

a.  It  forms  derivative  adjectives  especially  from  nouns  sig- 
nifying quality:  thus,tugenbl)att  virtuous,  funbl)aft  sinful,  (c^rerfl^aft 
frightful,  ftanbl)aft  steadfast;  but  also,  not  infrequently,  from 
names  of  persons  and  things :  thus,  mannl^aft  manful,  meifterl^af t 
masterly,  letb^aft  bodily. 

b.  It  is  added  to  only  a  few  verbal  roots :  as  in  tt)of)nl^aft 
resident,  fc^ma^ftaft  loquacious. 

c.  Only  three  adjectives  admit  it:  namely,  bo^l^aft  malicious, 
franfftaft  six^khj,  n)at)rf)aft  true. 

d.  To  '^aft  is  sometimes  added  the  further  ending  tg,  as  in 
Ietb!)aftig,  tt)af)rt)aftiG ;  and  this  addition  is  always  made  before 
the  suffix  !eit,  forming  abstract  nouns  (409.11.3) :  thus,  ^ugenb* 
"^aftlgtext  virtuovsness. 


226  DERIVATION.  [415- 

8.  3^t  forms  adjectives  only  from  concrete  nouns,  especially 
such  as  denote  material:  thus,  fteintcf)t  stony,  bornitf)t  thorny^ 
f aljid^t  salty.  Its  office  is  hardly  distinguishable  from  that  of  i(| 
(below,  9) ;  and,  in  present  use,  its  derivatives  are  almost  super- 
seded by  those  in  ig,  and  are  but  seldom  met  with.  Only  t^ort(^t 
foolish  is  in  familiar  use,  and  is  also  peculiar  in  exhibiting  the 
modification  of  vowel,  and  in  being  formed  from  a  personal  ap- 
pellation (%):}0x  fool). 

9.  39-  This  suffix  is  the  same  with  our  y  (in  stony,  holy,  easy, 
etc.),  and  forms,  from  every  part  of  speech,  a  very  large  number 
of  German  adjectives,  which  are  constantly  increasing  by  new 
derivatives.    Thus — 

a.  From  nouns,  of  every  class :  thus,  md(i)tio  mighty,  giinftig 
favorable,  fc^ulbtfl  guilty,  burftig  thirsty,  blutig  bloody,  mdfferig 
watery,  hxdtbpfiQ  thickheaded,  langarmig  longarmed. 

h.  From  verbs :  thus,  fdumig  dilatory,  nac^giebig  yielding,  ge= 
fallig  obliging. 

c.  From  adjectives,  in  a  few  cases  only:  thus,  giitig  kind,  Doflig 
complete;  and  from  the  possessive  and  other  pronominal  ad- 
jectives, as  meirtig  mine,  etc.  (159.5),  jelbig  self-same  (169.3),  jenig 
yon  (168),  einig  only,  some  (189). 

d.  From  indeclinable  words,  namely  prepositions,  adverbs, 
and  adverbial  conjunctions  of  various  kinds  :  thus,  uorig  former, 
from  t)or  before;  iibrig  remaining,  from  iiber  over;  jefeig  present, 
from  \t^t  now;  :^eutig  of  to-day,  from  ^eute  to-day;  bortig  of  that 
place,  from  bort  there;  abermalig  repeated,  from  abermal^  again; 
be^faHftg  relating  to  the  case  in  hand,  from  be^faES  in  that  case. 

e.  The  addition  of  tg  to  other  adjective  endings  before  the 
suffix  fett  has  been  noticed  above  (409.II.3) ;  also  to  f)aft  in  form- 
ing adjectives  (above,  Id) ;  to  adjectives  and  nouns  in  forming 
derivative  verbs  (405.11. 3) ;  and  to  certain  nouns  in  forming 
derivative  adjectives  (below,  15e,/). 

/.  3g  added  to  the  suffix  jal  of  certain  nouns  (408.III.7),  along 
with  modification  of  the  vowel  (written  e  instead  of  d),  forms  a 
combination  having  the  aspect  of  a  separate  suffix,  felig  ;  thus, 
tniiftjeUg  painful,  from  ^Jlii^fal  distress ;  triibf dig  afflictive,  from 
Sriibfal  affliction.  And  the  combination  is  in  fact  treated  as  an 
independent  suffix,  by  being  added  to  words  which  do  not  form 
derivatives  in  ]  al :  thus,  gliitff dig  blissful,  from  ^liicf  happiness ; 
feinbfdtg  inimical,  from  feinb  hostile;  rebfdig  talkative,  from  reben 
talk. 


415]  DERIVATIVE  ADJECTIVES.  22? 

g.  A  number  of  adjectives  in  ig  are  from  lost  roots,  and  so 
have  in  the  present  language  the  value  of  primitive  words: 
thus,  jelig  happy,  u|)))ig  luxuriant. 

10.  3jrf).  This  is  the  same  with  our  English  suffix  ishi  and  is 
used  in  much  the  same  way. 

a.  It  forms  adjectives  from  noims  of  different  classes :  thus, 
especially  from  proper  names  of  persons,  places,  and  peoples : 
as,  lutftertfc^  Lutheran,  preu^ifd^  Primsian,  baierijd)  Bavari^an, 
jpanijc^  Spanish;— ivom  appellations  of  places,  persons,  and 
animals :  as,  :^immli]c^  heavenly,  \iah\\\6)  townish,  finbif c^  childish, 
biebij^  thievish,  bicl)teri)(^  poetical,  l^ixnhx]^)  doggish;— and  from  a 
few  abstracts  or  verbal  nouns:  as,  aBergldubijcf)  superstitious, 
argtDO^nifd)  suspicious,  neibijc^  envious. 

b.  It  often  takes,  in  adjectives  derived  from  the  classical 
languages,  the  place  of  our  endings  ic,  ical,  al,  ian,  etc. :  as, 
ftiftorifd)  historic  or  historical,  !ritif(^  critical,  logifi^  logical,  inbiji^ 
Indian. 

c.  In  a  few  words,  ijd)  has  a  somewhat  disparaging  sense  as 
compared  with  Wd),  much  as  in  the  corresponding  Eniilish  ad- 
jectives: thus,  finbifd)  childish  and  ttnblid)  childlike,  tDcibijc^ 
womanish  and  tt)eibUd)  feminine. 

d.  The  use  of  ifc^  with  proper  names  of  places  and  with 
foreign  words  is  attended  with  some  irregularities  of  detail,  in 
respect  to  the  form  of  the  theme  to  which  the  suffix  is  appended : 
these  cannot  be  dwelt  upon  here. 

11.  2ei  forms  indeclinable  adjectives  from  numerals  and 
words  related  with  numerals,  which,  before  it,  take  the  ending 
er:  thus,  einerlei  of  one  sort,  mam^txkx  of  many  sorts,  aflerlei  ofaU 
sorts. 

The  lei  is  by  origin  the  genitive  of  a  feminine  noun,  meaning 
sort,  and  the  preceding  er  is  the  proper  ending  of  the  adjective 
qualifying  it:  hence  the  treatment  of  its  derivatives  as  in- 
declinable words. 

12.  Sid).  This  suffix  corresponds  with  our  like,  ly  (in  godlike, 
godly,  etc.),  and,  like  these,  forms  a  very  large  number  of 
deriv  itives.  It  is  historically  the  same  word  with  the  adjective 
like  (German  gleid)) :  compare  363.3a. 

Sic^tis  also  added  to  adjectives,  perhaps  as  a  mere  variation 

of  lilf). 

a.  It  is  added  to  nouns  of  various  classes  (usually  with  mod- 
ification of  their  vowel) :  thus,  mannlid)  manly,  Ddterlic^  fatherly. 


228  BEEIVATION.  [415^ 

fiinftli^  artful,  ^tx^M)  hearty,  qIMIx^  happy,  id^rlid)  yearly,  qeift.- 
U(^  spiritual. 

h.  It  forms  from  other  adjectives  (always  with  modified 
vowel)  adjectives  that  have  in  general  a  diminutive  meaning : 
thus,  rotftlic^  [xbiM}]  reddish,  jduerlii^  somewhat  sour,  Idnglid; 
longish.  But  some  of  its  derivatives  are  free  from  the  diminutive 
implication ;  and  a  considerable  number  (363.3a)  are  used  only 
in  an  adverbial  sense,  the  ending  having  the  same  value  as  the 
English  ly  in  similar  derivatives  from  adjectives. 

In  a  few  words— as  fold),  tueld),  our  such,  which— it  is  greatly 
corrupted. 

c.  It  is  appended  to  many  verbal  roots ;  and  either  in  an 
active  sense  (especially  with  intransitive  verbs) — thus,  fc^dblirf) 
harmful,  hztiaxxlid)  persistent,  fterblic^  mortal,  erfreuUci^  agreeable 
— or,  yet  more  often,  in  a  passive  sense:  as  QlaubUd^  to  be 
believed,  credible,  t)erdc^tlt(f)  contemptible,  begreifli(|  comprehen- 
sible, unfdglid)  unspeakable.  Of  this  class  of  passive  derivatives, 
many  are  in  use  only  with  the  prefix  un :  e.  g.  there  is  no  f  dglic^ 
speakable.  2\d},  as  thus  used,  is  closely  equivalent  with  bar 
(above,  lb),  and  it  is  in  part  a  matter  of  arbitrary  custom,  or 
determined  only  by  euphony,  which  suffix  shall  be  employed ; 
in  other  cases,  derivatives  are  formed  with  both,  with  a  more  or 
less  distinct  difference  of  meaning. 

13.  ©am  is  our  some  (in  wholesome,  noisome,  etc.),  and  is  sup- 
posed to  be  ultimately  the  adjective  same  (now  lost  in  German). 
It  forms  derivatives — 

a.  From  nouns,  mostly  of  an  abstract  character :  thus,  furd)t= 
\am  fearful,  gemaltfam  violent,  miiftfam  laborious. 

b.  From  verbal  roots :  thus,  aufmerffam  attentive,  folfifam 
docile,  lenffam  manageable. 

c.  From  a  few  adjectives ;  thus,  einfatn  lonely,  Qemeinfam  com- 
mon, langfam  slow. 

14  %,  besides  one  or  two  isolated  adjectives,  like  bid)t  thick, 
close,  from  the  root  of  Qebeil)en  thrive,  forms  the  class  of  ordinal 
adjectives  from  numerals  below  twenty  (203). 

15.  There  are  certain  words  forming  classes  of  derivative 
adjectives  which  have  not  yet  (like  Bar,  ltd),  jam,  above)  lost 
their  independence  of  form  and  meaning  sufficiently  to  be 
reckoned  as  adjective-suffixes,  although  approaching  very  near 
in  value  to  such.    The  most  noticeable  of  them  are — 


416]  DEEIVATIVE  ADJECTIVES.  229 

a.  2d§  loose,  our  less,  forming  numerous  adjectives  of  depriva- 
tion :  thus,  enblog  endless,  "^erslo^  heartless,  treuIo§  faithless. 

These  adjectives,  like  those  ending  in  l^aft,  always  add  ig 
before  feit:  thus,  %x^nio\\Q,hii  faithlessness. 

b.  35oII  fidl,  our  ful,  in  thankful,  fearful,  etc. :  examples  are 
Ietbt)oII  sorrowful,  gebanfentioE  thoughtful. 

c.  9teid)  rich:  examples  are  Uebretd)  gracious  {2khthve),  Qt\\U 
rei(i)  witty,  full  of  esprit. 

d.  %a^  compartment,  division,  forms  multiplicatives  with 
numeral  words,  cardinal  or  indefinite  (204) :  examples  are  ge^n- 
fad)  tenfold,  Dielfac^  manifold. 

e.  gait  fold  is  used  in  the  same  manner  with  fac^.  But 
multiplicatives  with  fait  simply  are  antiquated  and  unusual; 
they  now  regularly  take  the  additional  adjective  ending  ig 
(above,  9),  before  which  the  vowel  of  fait  (except  in  two  or  three 
words,  as  mannlfifalttj)  is  modified :  thus,  geI)nfaItiQ  ten-fold,  t)iel- 
fdltig  manifold. 

f.  ^rtig  is,  like  fdlticj,  an  extension  of  a  noun,  %xim,anner,  kind, 
by  the  adjective  suffix  ig,  and  forms  a  considerable  class  of 
derivatives  denoting  sort  or  manner :  thus,  nebelartig  cloudlike, 
frembartig  of  strange  fashion.  Other  similar  formations  are 
f ormig,  from  the  foreign  noun  gorm  form  (Lat.  forma) :  thus, 
infelformig  island-shaped;  — miitftig  [miitig]  from  g}^ut^  [9Jlut] 
mood,  disposition :  as,  fnebmutl)ig  [friebmiitig]  disposed  to  peace ; 
—md^ig,  from  ^a^  measure:  as,  rec^^tmd^ig  lawful;  etc. 

416.    Adjectives  derived  by  Prefix. 

The  prefixes  forming  adjectives  are,  in  general,  the  same  with 
those  forming  nouns  (411),  namely  ge,  mife,  un,  ur,  erg,  together 
with  Be. 

1.  35e  forms  a  very  few  adjectives,  as  Berett  ready,  Bequem 
convenient. 

2.  a.  (S5e  aids  to  form  past  participles  (243.3) ;  and  sometimes 
from  nouns  which  do  not  furnish  any  other  of  the  parts  of  a 
derivative  verb:  thus,  geftiefelt  booted  (provided  with  boots), 
geljfirnt  horned,  gefittet  mannered,  geftirnt  starred. 

b.  It  also  forms,  either  without  suffix  or  with  ig,  a  class  of 
adjectives  from  verbs:  thus,  gene'^m  acceptable  (nel)men  take), 
geml^  certain  (roiffen  know),  geldufig  current  (laufen  run),  ^etpdrtig 
expectant  (tpavten  wait). 


230  DERIVATION.  [416- 

c.  (S)c  is  prefixed  to  a  few  simple  adjectives  without  note- 
worthy change  of  their  meaning :  thus,  f|ere(^t  righteous,  (^etreu 
faithful,  geflretiQ  severe.  ®Ieid)  like  contains  the  same  prefix  ab- 
breviated. 

The  other  prefixes  have  the  same  value  in  adjectives  as  in 
nouns:  thus — 

3.  Wx^  forms  such  adjectives  as  mt^Qiinftig  grudging,  m\^= 
trautjd)  distrustful. 

4.  Un  forms  negative  adjectives,  as  un!lar  unclear,  ungliicfUd^ 
unhappy, 

a.  That  some  of  the  adjectives  formed  with  un  have  no  cor- 
responding positives  has  been  noticed  above  (415.12c). 

h.  According  to  some  authorities,  the  words  formed  with  un 
always  have  the  principal  accent  on  that  prefix :  others  except 
compounds  of  participles,  as  unbeloftnt  unrewarded,  and  of 
verbal  derivatives  with  the  suffixes  bar,  Ii(^,  fam,  as  unbenf'bar 
inconceivable,  unenblid)  unending,  unbulb'fam  intolerant. 

5.  Ur  forms  directly  only  a  very  small  number  of  adjectives, 
from  other  adjectives,  adding  to  the  latter  an  intensive  mean- 
ing, or  an  implication  of  primitiveness :  thus,  urplo^licf)  very 
sudden,  uralt  of  primitive  antiquity. 

6.  ^rj  is  prefixed,  in  a  half -humorous  way,  to  a  few  adjectives, 
with  intensive  force:  thus,  ergbumm  excessively  stupid,  ergfaul 
very  lazy. 

Derivation  of  the  other  Parts  of  Speech. 

417.  Of  the  remaining  parts  of  speech,  the  adverbs  are  the 
only  ones  which  are  to  any  extent  formed  in  classes,  by  means 
analogous  with  those  above  explained ;  and  they  have  been  al- 
ready sufficiently  treated  (363  etc.)  under  Adverbs. 

The  derivation  of  the  rest,  so  far  as  it  is  capable  of  being 
shown,  is  a  matter  for  the  lexicon  to  deal  with,  under  each 
separate  word. 

WORD-COMBINATION,    COMPOSITION. 

418.  A  compound  word  is  one  that  is  made  up  ot  two 
(or  more)  independent  words,  each  of  which  maintains 
in  tlie  composition  its  separate  form  and  meaning.  It 
is  ijaade  one  word  hj  constanej^  of  combination  in  prac- 


419]  COMPOUND  WOEDS.  231 

tical  use,  by  the  absence  of  inflection  except  in  the  last 
member,  and  by  being  placed  under  the  dominion  of  a 
single  principal  accent. 

a.  Thus,  SuttQfrau  is  distinguished  from  junge  grau  young 
woman  by  the  adjective  j;ung  being  made  indeclinable  and 
receiving  a  marked  accent.  By  this  means  a  unity  of  form  is 
given  to  the  word,  to  which  a  unity  of  idea  is  then  further  added 
by  attribution  of  the  meaning  virgin,  which  naturally  grows  out 
of  the  other,  but  yet  is  not  the  same  with  it. 

b.  As  will  appear  hereafter  (422.26  etc.),  other  members  of  a 
compound  than  the  final  one  sometimes  take  an  ending  of  de- 
clension, but  irregularly  and  superfluously,  and  without  liability 
to  further  variation  in  the  inflection  of  the  compound.  There 
are  also  a  few  words  which  are  arbitrarily  written  together  as 
if  compounds,  while  both  their  parts  are  declined  in  full,  and 
they  are  not  in  fact  of  a  different  character  from  many  colloca- 
tions of  words  which  the  language  writes  separately :  such  are 
berfelBe  and  berienige  (168,  169),  ^ol^erpriefter  high-priest,  etc. 
(422.1a). 

c.  All  derivation  and  inflection  begin  with  composition.  The  com- 
pound becomes  in  practical  use  an  integral  representative  of  the  idea 
signified  by  it,  its  origin  is  more  and  more  lost  sight  of,  and  it  becomes 
liable  to  such  alterations  of  form  as  more  or  less  disguise  its  derivation : 
thus,  3ungfrau  has  been  in  popular  use  abbreviated  to  3ungfer;  and 
3ungl)err  (iunger  ^err  young  sir),  in  like  manner,  to  3uufer.  And  if  the 
final  member  of  the  compound  happens  to  be  one  that  in  practice  is  ad- 
ded to  a  large  number  of  words,  forming  a  considerable  class  of  com- 
posite words,  it  may  be  turned  into  an  ending,  of  derivation  or  inflection. 
Thus,  britter  jl^eit  [Xdi]  became  the  compound  2)vittt^ett  [2)rittei(] 
third  part,  and  this  was  contracted  into  S)ritte( ;  and,  the  same  being 
done  with  the  other  ordinal  numerals,  tel  became  a  "suffix,"  forming 
fractionals  from  ordinals  (207.2).  The  conjugational  ending  ten,  in 
iDir  l^otten  we  had,  represents  in  like  manner  an  originally  independent 
conjugational  form,  taiumis  (yet  older  dadamasi)  we  did,  which  has  gone 
through  a  like  process  of  abbreviation.  Composition  therefore  forms, 
in  the  grammatical  treatment  of  a  language,  an  appropriate  transitional 
subject  between  inflection  and  derivation  on  the  one  side,  and  colloca- 
tion or  arrangement  on  the  other. 

419.  Compounds  are  very  much  more  numerous  in  German 
than  in  English,  and  the  liberty  of  forming  new  ones,  after  the 
model  of  those  already  in  use,  is  much  more  freely  conceded 
than  with  us.    In  making  practical  acquaintance  with  the  Ian- 


232  COMPOSITION.  [419- 

guage,  therefore,  we  are  constantly  meeting  with  them,  of  every 
class — from  those  in  which  the  final  member  has  almost  ac- 
quired the  value  of  a  suffix  (see  above,  415.15),  or  in  which  the 
fact  of  composition  is  otherwise  disguised  (as  in  ^utigfer  and 
3un!er ;  or  in  f olci)  and  m\^,  see  above,  415.12),  to  the  chance 
combinations  which  each  speaker  or  writer  forms  as  occasion 
arises,  and  which  are  not  to  be  found  explained  in  any  dic- 
tionary, however  complete. 

a.  Compounds  are  often  also  formed  in  German  of  a  length 
and  complexity  unknown  in  English :  thus,  5euert)erji(i)erunQ§= 
fief ellfc^ aft  fire  insurance  company,  5^Drbfeef(^ifffa^rt  North  Sea 
navigation,  Suftrbftrenfd}tt)inbfu(^t  bronchial  consumption,  9{eid)§= 
Dberpoftamt^geitunfigf  d)reiber  editor  of  the  imperial  general  postoffice 
journal.  Such,  however,  are  for  the  most  part  met  with  only 
in  technical  and  official  language. 

6.  The  parts  of  a  compound — especially  if  it  be  a  long  and 
cumbrous  one,  or  Uable  to  an  incorrect  division — are  sometimes 
separated  by  hyphens:  thus,  Seuert)erft(^erunfi§=gefeflf(f)aft,  or 
8euer=t)erfi(^erimQ§=9efeIIf(^aft.  No  rules  are  to  be  definitely  laid 
down  respecting  this  division,  it  being  mainly  left  to  the  taste 
and  choice  of  individual  writers.  Usage  is  also  much  at  variance 
as  regards  the  employment  of  capital  letters  for  the  separated 
parts  of  a  compound  noun — some  writing,  for  example,  geuer* 
58erft(^erung§=®efeUf(f)aft.  The  preferable  method  is  to  avoid  as 
much  as  possible  the  multiplication  of  capitals. 

c.  Where  two  or  more  compound  words  having  the  same 
final  member  would  follow  one  another,  it  is  the  usage  in 
German  often  to  omit  that  member  except  in  the  last  word, 
noting  the  omission  in  the  other  cases  by  a  hyphen  appended 
to  the  former  member :  thus,  alle  ©Dnn=  unb  Sefttage  eine§  Sciftre^ 
on  all  the  Sundays  and  holidays  of  a  year,  in  biefer  baum=  imb 
queHenleeren  @inobe  in  this  treeless  and  waterless  desert,  t)on  ber 
fonn=  unb  fefttagiflen  ©pagierfafirt  of  the  promenade  usual  on  Sun- 
days and  holidays.  A  similar  liberty  is  even  taken  with  words 
of  foreign  origin :  thus,  al§  Df=  unb  ^efenfit)tt)affe  as  offensive 
and  defensive  weapon ;  but  it  is  not  to  be  approved  or  imitated. 

Composition  of  Verbs. 

420.  The  importance  of  compound  verbs  in  the  general 
grammatical  system  of  German  has  rendered  necessary  their 
treatment  under  the  head  of  verbal  conjugation  (296-313). 


421]  COMPOUND  NOUNS.  233 

Only  a  brief  recapitulation  of  the  different  classes,  therefore,  is 
called  for  here. 

1.  Verbs  are  compounded  with  the  inseparable 
prefixes  be,  ent  or  emp,  er,  (;e,  \)cv,  ^er ;  being  conjugated, 
in  general,  in  the  same  manner  as  when  simple,  but 
losing  the  prefix  ge  of  the  past  participle;  retaining, 
also,  their  proper  accent.     See  302-7. 

2.  Verbs  are  compounded  with  a  considerable  number 
of  separable  prefixes,  simple  and  compound — which 
prefixes,  however,  stand  before  the  verbal  form,  and 
are  written  with  it  as  one  word,  only  in  the  infinitive 
and  participles :  or  in  the  personal  forms  of  the  verb 
also,  when  the  sentence  has  the  transposed  arrangement. 
The  prefix  always  has  the  principal  accent.  See 
298-301. 

a.  A  few  of  the  separable  prefixes,  however — namely,  burc^, 
l^inter,  iiBer,  urn,  unter,  and  miber  or  mieber— form  with  some  verbs 
inseparable  compounds.    See  308-11. 

3.  Verbs  are  compounded  with  nouns,  adjectives,  and 
adverbs ;  either  closely,  forming  compound  stems  which 
are  conjugated  like  simple  roots,  or  loosely,  forming 
stems  which  are  conjugated  after  the  manner  of  verbs 
with  separable  prefixes.     See  312-313. 

a.  There  is  no  fixed  line  separating  compounds  of  the  latter 
character  from  verbal  phrases,  and  some  combinations  are 
treated  indifferently  as  the  one  or  the  other :  thus,  ^an!  fagen 
or  banffaQen  express  gratitude,  ©talt  finben  or  ftattfinben  take 
place. 

Composition  of  Nouns. 

421.  With  few  exceptions  (422.6&  etc.),  compound 
nouns  are  made  up  of  a  noun  with  a  preceding  limiting 
word.  The  final  noun  determines  the  gender  and  mode 
of  declension  of  the  compound ;  the  preceding  member 
of  the  compound  has  the  accent. 


234  COMPOSITION.  [421- 

1.  Exceptions  as  regards  gender  are — 

a.  Names  of  towns,  which  are  neuter  (61.2c),  even  when  they 
are  compounds  whose  final  member  is  masculine  or  feminine : 
thus,  ba§  SSittenberg  (ber  ^Berg),  ba§  aJlagbeBurG  (bte  33urg). 

h.  Many  compounds  of  ber  9Jlutl^  ^wi]  mood,  spirit,  which 
are  feminine :  for  example,  bic  ^nmutft  [^^iimutl  grace,  bte  ^e= 
muti)  [^ernut]  humility,  bie  SSe^mul!^  [SSeftmut]  sadness. 

These  are,  by  origin,  feminine  abstracts  from  compound  ad- 
jectives, which  have  lost  their  suffix  of  derivation. 

c.  A  few  special  words :  thus,  bic  ^nttDort  aiiswer  (ba§  SBort 
word),  ber  ^itttt)Ocf)  Wednesday  (literally  mid-week,  from  bie 
2Bo(i)e  week),  which  has  taken  the  gender  of  the  other  names  of 
week-days  (61.2a) ;  bie  D^eunauge  lamper-eel  (Uterally  nine-eyes, 
from  ba§  ^uge  eye) ;  and  ^bfc^eu  horror  is  masculine,  and  ®egen= 
tf)eil  [(^egenteil]  opposite  is  neuter,  while  6d)eu  fear  and  2:l)eil 
[^eil]  part  are  now  respectively  used  in  general  as  feminine  and 
masculine. 

422.    The  varieties  of  compoimd  nouns  are — 

1.  Nouns  made  up  of  a  noun  and  a  preceding  qualifying  ad- 
jective: thus,  S3ot(monb /u?Z  moon,  ^\iz\\km precious  stone,  ^od)- 
gett  wedding  (lit.  high  time),  ^urgtDeiie  pastime  (Ut.  short  while). 

a.  A  very  few  nouns  are  written  as  compounds  of  this  class, 
although  the  adjective  is  declined  as  an  independent  word: 
thus,  .^ol)erprtefter  high-priest,  gangetoeile  tedium,  ©el^eimerratft 
[(^i1:itmzxxai]privy -counsellor  (alBo  :^aiigtDetle,(S5e^etmrat]^  [©e^eim* 
rat],  as  proper  compounds). 

2.  Nouns  made  up  of  a  noun  and  a  preceding  limiting  noun : 
thus,  53u(!)brurfer  bookprinter,  @e((i)td^tf(^rei6er  historian  (ht. 
history -writer),  ©c^ufle'^rer  school-teacher,  ^onbfc^uJ)  glove  (lit. 
hand-shoe),  2BetngIa§  wine-glass,  33aumtt)Dne  cotton  (lit.  tree-wool), 
Sagbleben  life  by  hunting,  (Jic^Baum  oak-tree. 

a.  The  relation  of  the  first  noun  to  the  second  is  oftenest  that 
of  a  genitive  dependent  on  it ;  but  it  may  stand  in  various  other 
relations,  often  such  as  could  not  be  expressed  by  any  simple 
case,  without  the  use  of  words  of  relation  ;  or,  the  two  words 
may  be  in  apposition  with  one  another. 

b.  Often  the  first  noun  is  put  formally  in  the  genitive  case  : 
thus,  ^bmQf)o):}n  king's  son,  2ar\h^mann  countryman,  3[Birtl)§^au§ 
CIBirt§l^au§]  inn  (Ut.  host's  house). 


422]  COMPOUND  NOUNS.  235 

c.  And  even,  by  irregular  imitation  of  such  forms,  the  first 
noun  takes  an  §  or  e§  which  does  not  properly  belong  to  it  as 
an  independent  word:  thus,  (^eburtStag  birthday,  ;^ieBe§Brief 
hveletter. 

d.  The  first  noun  sometimes  takes  a  plural  ending :  thus, 
S3Uber6u(^  picture-book  (lit.  pictures-book),  SSorterbud)  dictionary 
(lit.  words-book),  ^Iciber)d)ranf  clothes-press,  SSaifen^au§  orphan 
asylum  (lit.  orphans'  house),  ^ageBucE)  journal  (lit.  days-book). 

e.  These  endings  of  declension  are  introduced  in  part  for  their 
meaning,  in  part  for  euphonic  reasons;  and  insertions  of  a 
similar  kind  are  occasionally  made  quite  arbitrarily :  as,  ^](?^er= 
mittmorf)  Ash- Wednesday,  §)etbelbeere  heath-berry. 

3.  Nouns  made  up  of  a  noun  and  a  preceding  verbal  root 
having  the  value  of  a  qualifying  noun  or  adjective :  thus,  (5ing= 
t)OGel  singing-bird,  ^-Brennglag  burning-glass,  ©djreibfeber  writing- 
pen,  ©tubirsimmer  [Stubtergimmer]  study-room,^(il\vi^i  covetous- 
ness  (lit.  desire  of  having). 

4.  Nouns  made  up  of  a  noun  and  a  preceding  particle,  with 
qualifying  force :  thus,  ^u^enfeite  outside,  3nlanb  inland,  ^u§= 
lani  final  sound  (of  a  word),  Wximm]^  fellow-creature,  SSorfteil 
[^Sorteil]  advantage  (lit.  excelling  part). 

5.  Nouns  made  up  of  an  infinitive  and  words  dependent  upon 
it:  thus,  ha§  ^nx\\(i)']dn  the  being  by  one's  self,  ba§  Sujpdtfommen 
the  coming  too  late.  These  are  unusual  cases,  and  not  employed 
in  dignified  style. 

6.  Compounds  of  a  different  and  peculiar  character,  which 
designate  an  object  by  describing  some  peculiarity  belonging 
to  it,  and  which  may  be  called  possessive  or  characterizing 
compounds.    Such  are — 

a.  A  noun  with  preceding  limiting  word :  as,  ^al^Ifopf  bald- 
head  (a  person  or  thing  having  a  bald  head),  33lauftruTnpf  blue- 
stocking (person  wearing  such),  ©c^reiftal^  bawler  (lit.  scream- 
neck),  33ierecf  square  (lit.  four-comers). 

b.  An  adjective  with  preceding  qualifying  word:  as,  ber 
Dlimmerf  att  the  greedy-gut  (Ut.  never  satiated),  ha§  Smmergriiu  the 
evergreen. 

c.  A  verb  with  a  following  object,  or  other  limiting  word  or 
phrase:  as,  Xaugenic^tg  good-for-nothing,  ©torenfrieb  kill-joy 
(lit.  disturb-peace),  (^tellbidiein  rendezvous  (lit,  make  thine  ap- 


236  COMPOSITION.  [422- 

pearance),  (5))rtngtit§felb  romp  (lit.  jump  into  the  field),  ^eT^raug 
closing  dance  (lit.  turn-out). 

d.  One  or  two  more  anomalous  cases  :  as,  (SJarau^  end  (lit.  all 
over). 

Composition  of  Adjectives. 

423.  Compound  adjectives  are  always  made  up  of  an 
adjective  with  a  preceding  limiting  or  qualifying  word. 
Their  treatment,  as  regards  declension,  use  as  adverbs, 
and  the  like,  is  the  same  with  that  of  simple  adjectives. 
The  first  member  of  the  compound  takes  the  accent. 

424.  The  varieties  of  compound  adjectives  are — 

1.  Adjectives  made  up  of  two  adjectives,  of  which  the  former 
either  is  co-ordinate  with  the  latter— as  in  taubftumm  deaf  and 
dumb,  !aiferIic^=!ontglt(ij  imperial-royal — or,  much  more  often, 
limits  it  in  the  manner  of  an  adverb :  as,  l^ellblau  bright-blue, 
tobtfran!  [totfranf]  deadly  sick. 

2.  Adjectives  made  up  of  an  adjective  (usually  a  participle)  and 
a  preceding  adverb :  as,  tBO'^lebel  right-noble,  worshipful,  tt)o'f)I= 
meinenb  well-meaning,  jogenannt  so-called,  meitaugfe^enb  far- 
looking. 

3.  Adjectives  made  up  of  an  adjective  and  a  preceding 
limiting  noun :  as,  f (^neetDei^  snow-white,  troftbebiirfttG  needing 
consolation,  ei§!alt  ice-cold. 

a.  A  very  frequent  form  of  this  compound  is  made  up  of  a 
participle  and  its  dependent  noun :  as,  !^cilbrtngenb  salutary  (lit, 
health-bringing),  |)fli(^tt)ergef(en  duty-forgetting,  gottergeben  god- 
devoted. 

b.  The  noun  in  such  compounds,  as  in  compounds  with  a  noun 
(422.26-e),  often  takes  the  form  of  a  genitive  or  a  plural :  thus, 
leben^fatt  tired  of  life,  loBen^lDurbig  praiseworthy,  ^offnung§t)Dll 
hopeful,  riefengro^  gigantic  (lit.  giant-great),  !inberlo§  childless 
(lit.  children-less). 

4.  Adjectives  made  up  of  an  adjective  and  a  preceding  verbal 
root,  having  the  value  of  a  dependent  noun :  thus,  merf tDiirbtg 
remarkable  (lit.  worthy  of  noticing). 

This  form  of  compound  is  rare  and  exceptional,  the  infinitive 
being  generally  used,  instead  of  the  simple  verbal  root, 


425]  COMPOUND  ADJECTIVES.  237 

5.  Adjectives  formed  by  appending  a  suffix  of  derivation,  es- 
pecially ig  (415.9),  to  the  combination  of  a  noun  with  a  preceding 
limiting  word  (which  combination  is  not  itself  in  use  as  a  com- 
pound noun) :  thus,  t)ierfu§ig  four-footed,  Qro^l)er3ig  great-hearted, 
Soc^naftQ  supercilious  (lit.  high-nosed). 


Compositimi  of  Particles. 

425.  1.  The  modes  of  formation  of  compound  particles  have 
been  already  sufficiently  explained  and  illustrated,  under  the 
head  of  the  different  kinds  of  particles  (see  especially  365). 
Such  particles  are,  in  part,  cases  of  compound  words,  analogous 
with  those  just  treated  of  ;  in  part,  phrases  composed  of  inde- 
pendent and  fully  inflected  words,  which  have  simply  run  to- 
gether into  one  by  frequent  usage ;  in  part,  they  are  combina- 
tions of  particles. 

2.  a.  Compound  particles  of  the  last  class,  and  those  of  the 
second  which  are  made  up  of  a  governing  preposition  and  its 
governed  case,  are  accented  on  the  final  member:  thus,  t) Driver' 
previously,  l^ertior'  forth,  gubem'  besides,  uberl)aupt'  in  general, 
Bcrgab'  down  hill. 

h.  Such,  on  the  other  hand,  as  are  originally  cases  of  com- 
pound words,  or  phrases  composed  of  a  noun  and  a  preceding 
limiting  word,  are  accented  on  the  first  member :  thus,  l)tm'mcl= 
tt)drt§  heavenwards,  t)ie('mal§  often,  fet'neSmeQg  in  no  wise,  bcr'- 
geftalt  in  such  wise. 

c.  A  few  are  accented  on  either  the  first  or  second  member  ; 
and  either  indifferently,  or  according  to  a  difference  of  meaning  : 
thus,  alfo'  or  arfo  accordingly^  c\'\Da  or  d\v a'  perchance ;  ciii'mal, 
when  ein  means  distinctly  one,  rather  than  a;  bar'um,  tDar'iim, 
l^ier'mit,  when  the  emphasis  rests  on  the  pronominal  element — 
and  so  on. 

d.  There  are  occasional  irregular  exceptions  to  these  rules  of 
accentuation,  which  may  be  left  to  the  dictionary  to  point  out. 


238         'CONSTRUCTION  OP  SENTENCES.         [42& 

CONSTRUCTION  OF   SENTENCES. 
Introductory  Explanations. 

426.  1.  A  SENTENCE  is  a  combination  of  words  having 
completeness  in  itself  as  the  expression  of  a  thought. 

2.  It  is  composed  of  a  subject,  designating  that  of 
which  something  is  asserted  (inquired,  desired),  and  a 
PREDICATE,  expressing  that  which  is  asserted  (inquired, 
desired)  of  the  subject. 

a.  That  a  thought  cannot  be  signified  or  communicated  without  the 
combination  of  a  subject  and  a  predicate  is  not  claimed  (compare  391) ; 
but  only  that  this  combination  is  its  full  and  regular  mode  of  expression, 
the  norm  to  which  all  expressed  thoughts  may  be  reduced,  or  of  which 
they  are  to  be  regarded  as  variations. 

h.  The  further  division  of  the  predicate,  as  above  defined,  into  predicate 
and  copula  (the  latter  being  always  a  person  of  jcin  he:  compare  316.1a, 
remark) — for  example,  of  er  Uebt  he  loves  into  er  ift  liebenb  he  is  loving— 
though  of  value  in  the  logical  analysis  of  expression,  is  unimportant  in 
grammatical  analysis,  and  has  no  bearing  upon  the  construction  of  the 
sentence.  All  verbs  except  feiit  he  (and  even  that,  in  some  of  its  uses) 
contain  the  copula  combined  with  a  more  or  less  complete  predication 
of  some  action,  state,  or  quaUty ;  some  require  more  than  others  a 
complement,  to  fill  out  their  idea  and  make  a  significant  predication  :  a 
few  (316.1),  so  especially  as  to  be  called  "verbs  of  incomplete  predica- 
tion;" a  transitive  verb  is  in  itself  less  complete  than  an  intransitive, 
and  so  on. 

c.  The  completeness  of  a  sentence  composed  of  subject  and  predicate 
is  a  relative  one — namely,  as  compared  with  a  word,  or  a  phrase  not 
containing  those  two  elements.  A  noun  by  itself  suggests  an  object  of 
thought ;  a  noun  with  qualifying  adjuncts  implies  certain  things  as 
standing  in  certain  relations  to  one  another,  an  object  as  invested  with 
quaUties  :  so  also  a  verb  by  itself,  or  with  adjuncts,  calls  up  an  intel- 
ligent conception  in  the  mind ;  and  either,  in  certain  circumstances,  has 
all  the  value  of  a  complete  expression,  because  the  mind  of  the  hearer 
or  reader  understands,  or  intelligently  supplies,  whatever  is  wanting.  But 
we  do  not  feel  that  anything  is  really  said  until  a  verb  and  its  subject 
are  combined,  until  something  is  predicated  of  something. 

d.  A  sentence  may  signify  only  a  small  part  of  the  thought  which  is 
in  the  mind  of  the  speaker,  and  which  he  sets  out  to  express ;  it  may 
require  to  be  set  in  connection  with  other  sentences  in  order  to  perform 


427]  SENTENCES.  •  239 

its  full  office,  as  much  as  a  word  witli  other  words  to  form  a  sentence. 
And,  in  the  development  of  language,  a  means  is  found  by  which  in- 
dividual sentences  are  so  combined  as  to  form  a  higher  unity— by  which, 
instead  of  being  merely  set  side  by  side,  they  are  twined  together  into  a 
complex  sentence  or  period.  This  means  is  the  conversion  of  independent 
sentences  into  dependent  clauses,  having  the  formal  as  well  as  logical 
value  of  parts  of  a  sentence  (see  below,  435  etc.).  For  the  simple  sen- 
tence still  remains  the  norm  and  unit  of  complete  expression :  the  de- 
pendent clauses  have  value  only  as  they  enter  into  the  structure  of  such 
a  sentence,  in  the  quality  of  adjuncts  either  to  its  subject  or  to  its  pred- 
icate. They  themselves,  then,  though  containing  a  subject  and  a 
predicate,  are  incomplete,  because  they  distinctly  imply  a  relation  to 
something  else,  which  requires  to  be  also  expressed. 

427.     Sentences  are  of  three  fundamental  kinds,  as- 
sertive, interrogative,  and  optative  (or  imperative). 

Thus,  assertive,  bu  Itel)ft  mi(^  thou  lav  est  me ; — interrogative, 
Uebft  bu  mid)  lovestthoume? — optative,  Itebe  bu  mi(^  love  thou  me! 

a.  Of  only  the  first  of  these  can  it  be  truly  said  that  it  in- 
volves the  predication  of  something  of  a  subject.  The  relations 
of  the  three  to  one  another  are  best  developed  by  reducing 
them  to  the  common  form  of  dependent  clauses,  expressing 
what  is  affirmed,  inquired,  or  desired  by  some  defined  speaker. 
Thus,  we  say  of  another,  er  be'^auptet,  bafj  bu  il)n  Hebft  he  asserts 
that  thou  lovest  him;  er  fraflt  (mill  tDtffen),  oh  bu  i^n  IteBeft  he  asks 
(wants  to  know)  whether  thou  lovest  him;  er  tjerlangt,  ha^  bu  il^n 
iiebeft  he  requires  that  thou  love  him.  "When,  now,  we  come  to 
speak  in  our  own  persons,  we  change  id)  be^aupte,  'tia^  bu  mid) 
Iiel)ft  Imaintain  that  thou  lovest meinto  bu  lieBft  mid)  tlwu  lovest  me, 
the  assertion  of  the  assertion  being  usually  a  quite  unnecessary 
formality ;  id)  mid  mijfen,  oB  bu  mid)  liebcft  I  wish  to  know  whether 
thou  lovest  me  becomes  liebft  bu  mid)  lovest  thou  me  ?  the  wish  to 
know  being  intimated  by  arrangement  and  tone ;  and  id)  t)er= 
lauQe,  ha%  bu  mic^  liebeft  I  require  that  thou  love  me  is  changed 
into  lieBe  bu  mid)  love  thou  me !  the  desire  or  demand  being  ex- 
pressed by  arrangement,  tone,  and  appropriate  verbal  form. 
That  is  to  say,  the  usage  of  language  has  established  modes  of 
expression  by  which  the  speaker  can  signify  his  desire  to  know, 
or  his  request  or  command,  directly,  without  putting  it 
necessarily,  as  he  may  do  optionally,  into  the  form  of  an  asser- 
tion. 

6.  All  these  kinds  of  sentence  alike  consist  of  a  subject  and  a 
predicate  (save  that  the  subject  of  the  imperative  sentence  is 


240  CONSTEUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [427- 

often  omitted  as  superfluous,  when  of  the  second  person,  or 
representing  the  individual  to  whom  the  request  or  command 
is  directly  addressed).  And  the  assertive  sentence  is  properly- 
assumed  as  the  norm  or  standard,  of  which  the  other  two  may 
be  treated  and  explained  as  variations. 

c.  The  formal  construction  and  logical  office  of  the  three 
kinds  of  sentence  do  not  always  correspond.  A  variety  of 
modes  of  expression  (338)  may  be  used  as  intimations  of  a  com- 
mand ;  a  question  may  be  expressed  (432.16)  in  the  form  of  an 
assertive  sentence ;  and  an  assertion  may  be  implied  in  the 
asking  of  a  question. 

d.  The  direct  assertive  force  of  an  assertive  sentence  may  be 
variously  and  greatly  modified,  either  by  the  mode  and  tense 
of  the  verb  or  by  adjuncts,  so  that  the  statement  is  made  un- 
certain or  hypothetical  to  any  degree — yet  without  affecting 
the  grammatical  character  of  the  sentence.  A  negative  sentence 
is  only  one  variety  of  the  assertive,  in  which,  of  two  opposite 
and  mutually  exclusive  things,  one  is  affirmed  by  the  denial  of 
the  other. 

428.  1.  The  subject  of  a  sentence  is  always  a  sub- 
stantive word — that  is  to  say,  either  a  noun,  or  one  of 
the  equivalents  of  a  noun  (113) — along  with  such  ad- 
juncts (109  etc.)  as  may  be  attached  to  it  for  its  limita- 
tion and  qualification. 

2.  The  bare  predicate  of  a  sentence  is  always  a 
personal  form  of  a  verb,  since  this  alone  has  predicative 
force  (232,  314) ;  it  may  be  accompanied  by  the  various 
modifying  adjuncts  (314  etc.)  which  it  is  capable  of 
taking. 

429.  The  arrangement  of  the  sentence,  as  thus  con- 
stituted, is  subject  to  stricter  and  more  intricate  rules 
in  German  than  in  English :  which  rules  will  now  be  set 
forth. 

a.  The  differences  in  construction  be'.ween  the  two  languages 
are  in  good  part  of  comparatively  modern  growth  ;  some  of  the 
peculiar  rules  which  now  domineer  German  sentences  were 
only  tendencies  and  preferences  a  few  centuries  ago. 

h.  Hence,  in  archaic  style,  as  well  as  in  poetry,  the  rules  are 
much  less  strictly  observed  than  in  ordinary  prose. 


430]  EBGULAR  ORDEE,  241 

Begular  or  Normal  order  of  the  sentence. 

430.  1.  In  its  ordinary  and  normal  arrangement,  tlie 
German  sentence,  like  the  English,  requires  the  sub- 
ject to  be  stated  first,  and  to  be  followed  by  the  pred- 
icate. 

a.  This  rule  has  reference  to  the  simple  assertive  sentence  ; 
such  a  sentence,  as  explained  above  (427.&),  being  taken  as  the 
standard  from  which  the  other  forms  are  deduced.  For  the 
arrangement  of  the  interrogative  and  optative  sentences,  see 
below,  432. 

6.  Taken  in  connection  with  the  rules  already  given  as  to  the 
order  in  which  the  adjuncts  of  a  noun  and  verb  are  respectively 
arranged  (110-12,  319),  this  rule  determines  the  whole  order  of 
the  normal  sentence ;  but  it  is  desirable  to  call  especial  attention 
to  the  peculiarities  which  distinguish  the  German  order. 

2.  No  one  of  the  adjuncts  of  the  predicate  verb  is 
ever  allowed  to  stand  between  it  and  the  subject. 

Thus,  for  English  he  truly  loves  justice,  and  never  willingly 
commits  a  wrong,  the  German  must  say  er  Uebt  treulid)  ha§  ^t^i 
unb  beae!)t  nie  tDilUg  ein  Unred)t. 

a.  Earely,  a  word  or  phrase  is  found  inserted  between  the 
subject  and  the  verb.  Such  a  one,  however,  is  never  an  adjunct 
of  the  predicate,  but  one  of  the  conjunctions  having  exceptional 
freedom  of  position  (385.4,5),  or  an  asseverative  particle,  or  a 
phrase  of  parenthetical  force.  The  words  oftenest  met  with 
in  this  position  are  abcr,  ndmltd),  alfo,  tnbeffen,  and  jeboift. 

3.  Since  the  infinitive  (348.2)  and  the  participle  (368) 
are  regularly  preceded  by  whatever  limits  them,  and 
since  (319.2)  the  word  most  closely  combined  in  idea 
with  the  verb  as  sharing  in  its  predicative  quality  is 
put  farthest  from  it,  it  results  that  in  sentences  contain- 
ing a  compound  tense,  or  a  simple  form  of  a  separably 
compounded  verb,  the  non-personal  part  of  the  verb 
(prefix,  participle,  or  infinitive)  stands  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence ;  and  the  same  place  is  taken  by  an  infinitive 
dependent  on  the  verb  of  the  sentence,  or  by  a  word, 
other  than  a  prefix,  separably  compounded  with  it,  or 
forming  with  it  a  verbal  phrase. 


242  CONSTRUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [430- 

Thus,  ct  Blttfte  mit  SBol^lgef alien  auf  ben  em^orf^auenben 
©ol^n  ber  ^rbe  l^ernieber  he  looked  down  with  complacency 
upon  the  upgazlng  son  of  earth,  bu  1^  aft  gtoar  ni(!)t  !IuQ,  aber  bod) 
natiirlic^  unb  na^  tinblic^er  SOSeife  gei)  ati  b  e  It  thou  hast  acted,  not 
wisely,  indeed,  but  yet  naturally,  and  in  childish  fashion,  \tjx 
tt)  e r  b  e  t  euc^  fo  Blutig  eurer  ^lad)i  ntd)t  iib  e rl^  e  b  e  n  you  will  not 
presume  so  cruelly  upon  your  power,  id)  tDtll  mein  Seben  al§  ein 
^efd)en!  au§  curer  §anb  e  m|)  f  an  g  en  I  will  receive  my  life  as  a 
gift  from  your  hand,  [^  naf)m  ni(^t§  mel^r  t)on  ber  l^tnter  mtr  lies' 
genben  Sbene  n)  a  I)  r  I  perceived  nothing  more  of  the  plain  that 
lay  behind  me. 

a.  Where  there  is  more  than  one  non-personal  part  of  the 
verb  in  the  sentence,  the  prefix  stands  before  the  participle,  or 
the  infinitive,  or  the  participle  and  infinitive  ;  and  the  participle 
stands  before  the  infinitive :  thus,  [^  gebe  e§  auf,  i^  ^abt  e§  auf* 
gegeben,  ic^  njerbe  e§  aufgeben,  \6)  merbe  e§  aufgegeben  l&aben,  c§ 
tt)trb  aufgegeben  tuorben  fein — since  each  element  is  prefixed  to 
that  to  which  it  is  added  as  a  limitation  (314&). 

b.  In  the  greater  nimiber  of  sentences,  therefore,  the  two 
parts  of  the  verb,  the  personal  and  non-personal,  form  as  it 
were  a  frame  within  which  are  set  all  the  verbal  adjuncts,  ac- 
cording to  rules  of  arrangement  (319)  which  are  (except  the  one 
requiring  the  personal  pronoun  to  come  first)  on  the  whole 
somewhat  loosely  observed,  and  liable  to  manifold  variation. 
The  three  fixed  points  in  the  normal  order  of  the  sentence  are 
the  subject,  the  personal  verb,  and  the  non-personal  part  of  the 
verb  (if  there  be  one  present). 

Inverted  order  of  the  sentence, 

431.  To  arrange  all  sentences  in  tlie  manner  above 
described  would  result  in  an  intolerable  monotony.  The 
German  enjoys  the  same  privilege  as  tlie  English,  and 
with  even  greater  freedom,  of  putting  at  the  head  of  the 
sentence  any  other  member  of  it  than  the  subject — for 
the  general  purpose  of  attaining  a  euphonious  variety ; 
or,  more  often,  in  order  to  lay  an  emphatic  stress  upon 
the  member  thus  removed  from  its  proper  place.  But, 
when  any  part  of  the  predicate  is  thus  put  in  the  place 
of  the  subject,  the  latter  is  no  longer  allowed  to  stand 


431]  INVEETED  ORDER.  243 

before  the  verb,  but  is  put  next  after  it  instead.     This 
is  called  the  inversion  of  the  sentence. 

Thus,  in  normal  order,  ein  Sanbmanu  brac^te  fcincn  ^inbern  an§ 
ber  Slabt  fiinf  $firfid)e  a  countryman  brought  his  children  from 
the  citij  five  peaches : — inverted,  with  no  other  change  of  mean- 
ing than  as  regards  emphasis,  fiinf  gjfirfii^e  Brac^te  ein  Sanbmann 
f einen  ^inbern  au^  ber  ©tabt ;  or,  again,  au§  ber  6tabt  brac^te  ein 
Sanbmann  feinen  ^inbern  fiinf  ^firfid)e ;  or,  feinen  ^inbern  bra(i)te 
ein  Sanbmann  au§  ber  ©tabt  fiinf  ^firfic^e. 

a.  This  arrangement  is  styled  inverted,  because,  when  the 
sentence  consists  of  only  three  members,  its  effect  is  completely 
to  invert  their  regular  order :  thus,  er  liebt  mid)  he  loves  me  : 
inverted,  mi(^  liebt  er ;  er  ift  gut  he  is  good :  inverted,  gut  ift  er. 
In  all  cases,  too,  the  term  is  appropriate  as  denoting  an  inver- 
sion of  the  natural  order  of  the  two  essential  elements  of  the 
sentence,  the  personal  verb  and  its  subject. 

h.  The  same  inverted  order,  as  occasioned  by  the  same  cause,  is  in 
English  sentences  also  more  or  less  usual,  only  not  imperative,  except 
in  certain  special  phrases  :  thus,  we  say  always  "hardly  had  he  gone, 
when.  .  .,"  but  either  "thus  was  it,"  or  "thus  it  was  ;"  and  "slowly 
and  sadly  we  laid  him  down,"  but  "few  and  short  were  the  prayers  we 
said."  In  such  phrases  as  "said  I,"  "replied  he,"  " added  they, "  in- 
terjected in  the  midst  of  a  quotation  of  some  one's  words,  the  inversion 
(made  aUke  in  English,  German,  and  French)  is  best  explained  as  falling 
under  the  principle  here  stated,  since  the  part  of  the  words  already 
quoted  is  logically  the  object  of  the  verb  in  the  interjected  phrase. 

c.  The  only  words  (other  than  the  subject)  which  are  allowed 
to  stand  at  the  head  of  the  sentence  without  causing  its  inver- 
sion are  the  general  connectives  (384),  meaning  and,  hut,  for,  and 
eitJier  or  or.  Even  the  co-ordinating  adverbial  conjuncticms 
(385)  invert  the  sentence  in  their  conjunctional  use,  as  when 
proper  adverbs. 

d.  As  will  appear  below  (438.3/),  an  adverbial  clause,  if 
placed  at  the  head  of  the  sentence  of  which  it  forms  a  part,  has 
the  same  inverting  force  as  a  simple  adverb. 

Even  an  adjective  phrase  belonging  appositively  to  the  sub- 
ject, if  placed  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  inverts  it,  being 
treated  as  if  it  were  an  adverbial  adjunct  of  the  predicate  (as  it 
often  logically  is  so) :  thus,  etnfttDetlen  Berubiflt,  309  tiun  bag  ^nx 
5^i!o|)oli§  t)Drit6er  being  for  the  time  tranquillized  (i.  e.  since  it  was 
so),  the  army  now  marched  past  Nikopolis;  gart  unb  ebcl  ent= 
fproffen,  tt)ud)§  bie  toniolic^e  ^lume  l^eruor  the  royal  flower ,  having 


244  CONSTEUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [431- 

tenderly  and  nobly  sprung  forth,  continued  to  grow  (I  e.  after 
spmnglng  fortli). 

e.  It  is  not  usual,  nor  in  good  style,  to  remove  to  the  head  of 
the  sentence  more  than  a  single  connected  member  of  the  pred- 
icate :  which  may,  however,  consist  of  any  number  of  words : 
thus,  not  feinen  ^inbern  au§  ber  ©tabt  hxa^)it  em  fianbmann  fiint 
$fir]ld)e ;  —but  bort,  !)inter  biefen  genftern,  dertrdumf  \^  ben  erften 
^raum  yonder,  behind  those  windows,  I  dreamed  my  first  dream; 
iefet  (c^nell,  el)'  bie  ^ranbuttfi  tt)ieberfel}rt,  Befie!)It  ber  SiiuQling  jic!) 
(S^ott  now  quickly,  ere  the  surge  returns,  the  youth  commits  himself 
to  God. 

f.  The  members  of  the  predicate  most  often  placed  at  the 
head  of  the  sentence  for  emphasis,  with  consequent  inversion, 
are  the  object  (direct,  indirect,  or  remote),  and  the  various  ad- 
verbial adjuncts  ;  less  often  a  predicate  noun  or  adjective  (316) ; 
least  often  one  of  the  non-personal  parts  of  the  verb.  No  part 
of  the  predicate,  however,  is  exempt  from  such  treatment,  and 
even — 

g.  The  personal  verb  itself  is  sometimes  placed  first  in  the 
sentence  by  inversion,  with  the  effect  of  emphasizing  the  pred- 
ication— that  is  to  say,  of  strengthening  or  impressing  the 
general  force  of  the  assertion  made.  In  such  an  inversion,  the 
verb  is  usually  followed  by  boc^  though;  much  less  often  by  \a 
surely :  but  neither  of  these  particles  is  absolutely  necessary. 

Thus,  jinb  boc^  ein  tDunberlid)  35oI!  bie  2Bet6er  surely  women  are 
a  strange  race  of  beings!  'tiab'  id)  bi(^  boc^  mein'  ^age  m^i  gefelien 
surely  I  never  saw  you  in  my  life!  ^a,  fo  finb  jie!  fc^redt  fie  alleg 
gleic^,  tt)a§  eine  Xiefe  !^at !  Yes,  that  is  the  way  with  them!  every- 
thing that  Jias  any  depth  straightway  terrifies  them. 

h.  In  general,  the  inversion  of  the  sentence  affects  the  ar- 
rangement only  of  the  personal  verb  and  its  subject.  If,  how- 
ever, the  subject  be  a  noun,  and  there  be  a  personal  pronoun  in 
the  sentence  as  object  of  the  verb,  the  pronoun  generally 
remains  next  the  verb,  and  is  put  between  it  and  the  subject. 

Thus,  ha  t)erlie§  mid)  ber  OJiann  (S5otte§  in  tiefem  ©taunen  then 
the  man  of  God  left  me  in  deep  astonishment,  banad)  fd)IanG  fid) 
ber  Sange  urn  fie  bcibe  in  einen  ^'rei§  after  that,  the  tall  fellow 
twined  himself  round  about  both  of  them. 

The  same  thing  is  customary  in  the  interrogative  and^  the 
optative  sentence  (432) :  thus,  mt  ))abtn  eu(^  bie  fd)onen  Spfel 
gefc^medt  how  did  the  beautiful  apples  taste  to  you?  i)ett)al)re  bid) 
ber  §immel  may  Heaven  preserve  thee! 


432]  INYEETED  ORDER.  245 

A  similar  transfer  of  the  pronoun  from  its  proper  place  is 
usual  also  in  transposed  clauses :  see  439.1. 

i.  When,  of  two  co-ordinate  clauses  following  one  another, 
the  first  is  inverted,  the  second  usually  retains  its  normal  order, 
even  though  the  word  or  phrase  which  caused  the  inversion  of 
the  one  logically  forms  a  part  of  the  other  also  :  thus,  barauf 
blieb  er  fi^en,  unb  id)  Qing  fort  thereupon  he  remained  sitting  and 
I  went  away. 

432.  Interrogative  and  Optative  sentences. 

1.  In  German,  as  in  English,  an  interrogative  sen- 
tence is  ordinarily  arranged  in  the  inverted  order,  or 
with  the  subject  after  the  verb.  In  a  direct  question 
(one  requiring  "yes"  or  "no"  as  an  answer),  the  verb 
conies  first  of  all ;  in  an  indirect  question,  the  inter- 
rogative word  (pronoun,  pronominal  adjective,  or  parti- 
cle), or  phrase  involving  such  a  word,  comes  first. 

Thus,  mirb  bie  junQe  ©d)opfuncj  aufprcn  will  the  ijoimg  creation 
cease  ?  I)dlt  fie  mirf)  nti^t  mc^r  does  it  not  longer  confine  me  ? — voo 
\\i  er  where  is  he?  voa^  fud)t  K)r  lohat  seek  ye  ?  tt)el(^e§  58ud)  ^at  er 
Qelefen  lohat  hook  has  he  read  ?  mit  tt)effen  @elb  "ijat  er  e§  gefauft 
with  whose  money  has  lie  bought  it  ? 

a.  When  the  interrogative  word  or  phrase  is  itself  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb,  the  sentence  necessarily  retains  its  normal 
order:  thus,  tDcr  l)ai  mir  ba§  Gctl)au  who  has  done  that  to  me  ? 
tDcfjen  ^ud)  Ue^t  l^ier  whose  hook  lies  here? 

h.  Often,  however  (also  as  in  English),  a  sentence  is  made 
interrogative  by  the  tone  with  which  it  is  uttered,  while  it  has 
the  construction  of  an  assertive  sentence:  thus,  ii)x  f^tueiot?  bie 
Dlinae  IDtrlen  nur  guriid?  tjou  are  silent?  the  rings  only  work 
backward?  ba§  foH  bie  ^Intmort  fein  auf  metne  S^age?  that  is  to 
he  the  answer  to  my  question  ? 

Often  or  usually,  an  interrogative  sentence  so  constructed 
has  a  somewhat  different  force,  implying  "is  it  possible 
that . . . !"  or  "do  you  mean  that .  .  .?"  or  the  like. 

c.  An  exclamatory  sentence  sometimes^  has  the  interrogative 
form :  thus,  tt)ie  ]d)6u  ift  ber  ^JZorgeu !  tt)te  fdjetnt  bie  Sonne  fo 
waxm  nnb  milb  1  how  heautifid  the  morning  is!  how  warmly  and 
gently  the  sun  shines  t 


246  CONSTEUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [432- 

2.  The  optative  or  imperative  sentence  takes,  as  in 
English,  the  inverted  arrangement:  that  is  to  say,  in 
the  second  persons,  singular  and  plural,  of  the  im- 
perative, and  in  the  various  persons  of  the  subjunctive 
used  optatively  or  imperatively,  the  subject  follows  the 
verb,  instead  of  preceding  it. 

Thus,  ]pnd)  h\i,  unb  lt)lr  "^oren  do  thou  speak,  and  we  hear,  jud^' 
^r  ben  reblidien  ©eminn  seek  tJiou  (lit.  let  him  seek:  153.3)  for 
honest  gain !  moQC  nic  ber  Stag  erf ^einen  ynay  tlmt  day  never  ap- 
pear !  tt)dre  e§  ^m  nur  nic^t  jo  bunfel  would  that  it  only  were  not 
so  dark  here!  moc^f  aud)  bod)  bie  ganje  2BeIt  un§  !)oren  would  tlmt 
even  the  whole  world  might  hear  us!  o  U)dr^  i(^  nie  QeBoren  0  that 
I  had  never  been  born !    Compare  243.1,  331. 

a.  But  in  the  third  person  singular  of  the  present  subjunctive 
(as  already  pointed  out :  331.1&),  the  subject  may  also  stand 
before  the  verb,  and  more  frequently  does  so :  thus,  Jeber  fommc 
tt)lc  er  ift  let  each  one  come  as  he  is, 

433.   Conditional  dauses. 

A  clause  of  a  sentence  is  very  often  inverted  in 
German  to  express  the  conditionality  of  a  statement — 
that  is,  to  add  the  meaning  of  if. 

Thus,  :^atte  er  oerufen,  fo  fatten  jie  iftn  gefunben  luid  he  cried  out 
(if  he  had  cried  out),  they  would  have  found  him,  !^ at  t) on  eu(^ 
ieber  fetnen  9ling  t)on  fetnem  35ater  if  each  of  you  has  his  ring 
from  his  father,  er^ebet  ein  Sloift  fid)  if  a  quarrel  arises,  l^at  ber 
^egrabene  fic^  fi^on  erl^obcn  if  the  buried  one  hath  already  arisen, 
Iicj3  er  un§  ^ier  ^uriid  if  he  left  us  behind  here. 

a.  This  mode  of  signifying  the  conditionality  of  a  sentence  is 
(as  the  first  example  shows)  not  unusual  also  in  English,  in  the 
past  subjunctive  tenses  had  and  were,  in  the  conditional  clause 
(protasis)  of  a  complete  hypothetical  period  (332.1) ;  and  it  is 
not  wholly  unknown  under  other  circumstances :  but  in  German 
the  construction  is  a  very  common  one,  with  all  the  different 
tenses  of  verbs  of  every  -class. 

b.  The  same  construction  is  frequent  in  the  conditional  clause 

(protasis)  of  an  incomplete  hypothetical  period,  after  an  al§ 
representing  the  omitted  conclusion  (apodosis:  see  332.26):  thus, 
er  Be^anbelte  fie,  al§  tuaren  fie  fetne  Untertl)anen  he  treated  them  as 


435]  TRANSrOSED  ORDER.  247 

[he  would  treat  tlwm]  if  they  wliere  his  own  subjects;  cr  nidfte  mit 
bem  ^Dpfe,  ttl§  tDoUe  er  fagen :  6d|on  red^t  he  nodded  his  head,  as 
if  he  meant  to  say  "  quite  right ! " 

c.  E-arely,  of  two  succeeding  conditional  clauses,  only  the  first 
is  inverted :  thus,  voax  e§  bann  SBinter,  unb  ber  ©rf)nee  lag  rings 
um^^er  if  then  it  was  winter,  and  the  snow  lay  about :  compare 
431i 

_       [ExEECiSE  23.    Normal  and  Inverted  Sentences.] 

Transposed  order  of  the  sentence. 

434.  The  two  modes  of  arrangement  heretofore  ex- 
plained belong  to  independent  or  principal  sentences 
or  clauses  (excepting  only  the  inverted  conditional 
clauses,  treated  in  the  last  paragraph).  The  German 
construction,  however,  is  most  peculiar  in  that  it  has  a 
special  mode  of  arrangement  for  dependent  (sometimes 
also  called  subordinate  or  accessory)  clauses.  In  these, 
namely,  while  the  other  members  of  the  sentence  remain 
in  their  normal  order,  the  personal  verb  is  removed 
from  its  proper  place  to  the  end  of  the  clause.  This 
removal  is  called  transposit'on,  and  the  resulting  ar- 
rangement is  styled  the  transposed. 

Thus,  in  normal  order,  ber  2ag  neigt  ji(^  gufetnem  Snbe;  but, 
transposed, mir  fefteii, bafe ber  ^ag  jld)  gu feinem  ^nbe  wnc^iwe see 
that  the  day  is  drawing  to  its  close;  —  bie  ^dmmcrung  Ucrljiillt 
tt)ie  ein  buftiger  ©(^leier  bie  §H)en  unb  ^ftdler;  but,  bie  ^dmme= 
rung,  mUjt  trie  ein  buftiger  ©d)Icier  bie  C)i3^en  unb  Sadler  Der- 
IjixUt  the  twilight  which  envelopes  like  a  misty  vail  the  heights 
and  valleijs ; —hk  ©onne  ftatte  il)re  33a5n  boHenbet;  but,  al§  bie 
©onne  i^re  S3al)n  boKenbet  1:jattt  when  the  sun  had  finished  its 
course. 

a.  The  name  "  transposed  order  or  arrangement"  is  abbrevi- 
ated, for  the  salie  of  convenience,  from  "arrangement  with 
transposed  verb,"  which  would  be  more  fully  and  truly 
descriptive. 

435.  Dependent  clauses, 

•  1.  A  dependent  clause  is  one  which  enters,  with  the 
value  of  a  substantive,  an  adjective,  or  an  adverb,  into 
the  structure  of  some  other  clause* 


248  CONSTEUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [435^ 

2.  Dependent  clauses  are  of  three  kinds,  according 
to  tlie  parts  of  speech  wliicli  they  represent — namely, 
substantive  clauses,  adjective  clauses,  and  adverb 
clauses. 

436.  1.  A  svhstantive  dependent  clause  is  one  wliicli 
has  the  value  and  construction  of  a  noun. 

2.  Such  a  clause  is  introduced  by  ho!^  that,  oB  whether, 
the  compound  relative  pronouns  and  pronominal  ad- 
jective trer,  tra^,  and  Xod6)vc  (179),  or  the  compound 
relative  conjunctions  (386.2)  iDie,  toantt,  tDO  and  its 
compounds,  etc. 

3.  A  substantive  clause  stands  in  various  constructions: 
thus — 

a.  As  subject  of  a  verb :  as,  b  a  ^  cr  bic  ^cf anbten  befreite,  ift 
IXoax  Qiit  that  lie  has  released  the  ambassadors  is,  to-be  sure,  well; 
iDann  btefe  ®rfcf)cinung  jicf)  jutrug,  tDelc^e  ^raft  ben  ©InBrud) 
beftxmmtc,  ift  tief  in  ba§  i)un!cl  bcr  SSorgcit  oe^iillt  wheii  this  event 
happened,  what  power  determined  the  inroad,  is  deeply  hidden  in 
the  darkness  of  antiquity. 

b.  As  object  of  a  verb :  thus,  fie  fragten,  o  b  fie  rcc^t  toii^te,  tt)  c  t 
i^r  9Jlann  U)dre  they  asked  whether  she  really  knew  who  her 
husband  was;  i(f)  tt)ill  fe^en,  tDO  e§  licgt  I  will  see  where  it  lies; 
ni(^t§  !ann  iftm  mieber  erfc^cn,  tt)a§  er  terloren  ))at  nothing  ean 
make  up  to  him  what  he  has  lost. 

c.  In  apposition  with  a  noun  or  its  equivalent :  thus,  mit  ber 
gntfdjulbigung,  ba^  er  gum  ^riege  Berebet  tDorben  fei  with  the  ex- 
cuse, that  he  had  been  persuaded  into  the  war;  be§  (^eful^Ic§,  b  a^ 
ni(^t§  im  SeBen  rc(J)t  gefc^dl^e,  tDcnn  c§  6IoB  gefdidbe  of  the  feeling 
that  nothing  in  life  was  d^ne properly  if  it  was  simply  done; — 
after  e§,  as  preceding  indefinite  subject  (154.4) :  thus,  gwcifeHjaft 
Hieb  e§  je^t,  tt)  eleven  2[Beg  man  einf  c^Iagcn.  f  oKe  it  remained  dx)ubt- 
ful  now,  which  road  one  was  to  take; — after  other  neuter  indefin- 
ites, pronominal  and  adjective  (see  179.5):  thus,  allcm,  ma§  ba 
blul)t  to  everything  that  blossoms; — explaining  a  preceding  ba 
that  represents  a  demonstrative  pronoun-case  governed  by  a 
preposition:  thus,  bie§  trug  o^ne  3tt)etfel  (b  a  gu)  bei,  b  a  ^  nur  bil* 
ligea  t)cvlangt  murbe  this  doubtless  contributed  to  the  i^esult  that 
nothing  um^easonable  ivas  demanded ;  fiebai^tenur  barauf,  mie 


437]  ADJECTIVE  CLAUSE.  243 

fic  bie  9J^enfd^en  in§  35erberben  locfen  fonnte  she  thought  only  of  how 
she  could  entice  men  to  destruction :  see  below,  d. 

d.  As  governed  by  a  preposition :  thus,  o^nc  ha^  er  em  ^Ia§ 
not^ig  ftatte  without  needing  a  glass;  l)arret  t^r,  bt§  ha^  ber  red)te 
3i\nQ  ben  SJlunb  eroffne  are  you  waiting  till  [the  time  that]  the  righh 
ring  shall  open  its  mouth  ?  aufecr  toer  f cine  9Jlitf cf)ulbtgen  f eten  ex- 
cept whoever  were  his  accomplices. 

Only  a  few  prepositions  thus  govern  a  substantive  clause 
directly,  and  s  ^me  of  these  (377.1),  the  ba^  being  omitted,  have 
assumed  the  character  of  conjunctions:  thus,  bt§  bie  Slutl^en 
[gluten]  fid)  Derliefen  till  the  floods  should  subside;— in  general,  if 
such  a  clause  is  to  be  placed  under  the  government  of  a  prepo- 
sition, it  is  anticipated  by  a  t)  a  in  combination  with  the  prep- 
osition, and  itself  follows,  as  if  in  apposition  with  the  ba :  see 
just  above,  c;  and  compare  346.2a. 

e.  As  dependent  on  a  noun:  thus,  bie§  Waren  bie  ^anpt=' 
urjac^en,  h  a^  fie  nirgcnbg  greunbe  fal)cn  obcr  oeiDannen  these 
were  the  chief  reasons  [for  the  fact]  that  they  nowhere  found  or 
made  friends. 

f.  A  substantive  clause  not  infrequently  stands  in  dependence 
upon  a  noun  or  a  verb,  by  a  pregnant  construction,  where  a 
simple  substantive  could  not  stand  without  a  preposition,  or 
even  sometimes  more  than  that,  to  explain  its  relation  to  the 
noun  or  verb  :  thus,  er  erlag  bem  ©d)mcr3e,  ha^  foli^  Ungliirf  in 
feinen  Sagen  eintrdtc  he  broke  down  under  his  grief  [at  the  fact] 
that  such  a  misfortune  should  occur  in  his  time;  [^  banfe  (^ott, 
ha^  id)  meine  ©ofine  miebergefunben  ftabe  I  thank  God  that  I  have 
found  my  sons  again;  forgt,  ha^  fie  nid)t  an§  meiner  hammer 
fommt  take  care  that  she  does  not  leave  my  room. 

g.  A  conditional  clause  after  al§  (compare  4336)  is  sometimes 
used  with  the  value  of  a  substantive  clause  :  thus,  bie  anmut^ige 
[anmutige]  3:dufd)unG,  al§  fei  e§  bie  eigene  feifteng,  bie  in  alien 
biefen  ^n'^dngen  mitfc^tt)eBt  the  pleasing  illusion  that  (lit.  as  if)  it  is 
our  own  personality  which  fl/)ats  in  all  these  appendages. 

[Exercise  24.    Transposed  Order.    Substantive  Clauses.] 

437.  1.  An  adjective  dependent  clause  is  one  which 
belongs  to  and  qualifies  a  noun  (or  its  equivalent :  113). 

2.  Such  a  clause  is  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun, 
ber  or  ipeld^cr  (or  a  prepositional  phrase  containing  such), 


250  CONSTEUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [437- 

or  bj  a  relative  conjunction — namely,  the  compounds  of 
ha  and  tDO  with  prepositions  or  with  adverbs  of  direc- 
tion, and  the  simple  conjunctions  Wo,  tvtnn,  tvann,  ha,  aU, 
iuie  (compare  386.3). 

Thus,  ein  SSunf^,  ben  au(^  \d)  in  meinen  Siinglinfl^iafiren  l^atte 
a  wwh  which  I  also  had  in  the  years  of  my  youth;  bag  etnaige 
3JZd6rc^en,  n)eld^e§  er  geprt  l^atte  unb  gu  ergd^Ien  \m)^k  the  only 
story  which  he  Jiad  heard  and  knew  haw  to  tell;  ben  9)lenf(^en,  fiir 
beffen  SSertfjeibigung  [S^erteibigung]  ifire  6tammDater  fampften 
the  man  in  whose  defense  their  ancestors  fought ;  ij^r  Ouellen 
haijxn  bte  welfe  33rul"t  fic^  brdngt  ye  fountains  toward  which  tJie 
drooping  breast  presses;  einen  SSertrag,  ID  o  n  a  ^  bie  ©nec^en  einen 
frieblic^en  ^urc^gug  eriaubten  a  treaty  by  which  the  Greeks  oer- 
mitted  a  peaceable  transit;  ha^  9anh,  tt)o  ber  58runnquelf  beg 
^laubcng  entjprang  the  land  where  the  fountain  of  faith  first 
sprang  up ;  tn  ber  ^legenseit,  tt)  e  n  n  bag  ^elta  iiberfc^toemmt  ift  in 
the  rainy  season,  when  the  delta  is  inundated. 

a.  Any  simple  qualifying  adjective  may  be  converted  by 
means  of  a  relative  pronoun  into  an  adjective  clause :  thus,  ber 
gute  9Jlann  the  good  man  into  ber  SJZann,  ml^a  gut  ift  the  man 
wlio  is  good; — and,  on  the  other  hand,  the  German  often  puts 
into  the  form  of  an  attributive  adjective  (especially  a  participle), 
with  modifying  adjuncts,  what  we  more  naturally  express  in 
English  by  an  adjective  clause :  thus,  er  befiegte  bie  gu  unt)orfi(^tig 
unb  in  eingclnen  ^btl^eilungen  [^^Ibteilungen]  borbringenben  !Ror= 
mannen  he  vanquished  the  Normans,  who  were  pressing  on  too 
incautiously  and  in  isolated  divisions. 

The  order  of  the  parts  of  such  a  compound  adjective  is  the 
same  with  that  of  an  adjective  clause :  thus,  bie  S^ormannen, 
ml^^  gu  unt)or]i(^tig  unb  in  eingelnen  ^bt^eilungen  [^Ibteilungen] 
borbrangen. 

b.  The  German  not  infrequently  uses  an  independent  clause, 
introduced  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  where  our  idiom  re- 
quires an  adjective  clause,  with  a  relative:  thus,  ba  ift  einer, 
ber  !ann  tncl^r  alg  \^  there  is  one — he  can  do  more  than  I  (for  ber 
mcl)r  alg  id)  !ann  tvho  can  do  more  than  I).  The  difference  of  ar- 
rangement shows  1  lainly  enough  what  such  a  clause  Uterally 
means. 

c.  An  adjective  clause  is  often  employed,  as  in  English,  not  so 
much  to  describe  or  qualify  a  noun,  as  to  add  to  the  sentence, 
in  a  more  intimate  way  than  by  a  simple  connective,  something 


438]  ADVEKBIAL  CLAUSE.  251 

relating  to  a  noun :  thus,  bie  nationale  Seibenfd)aft  tt)affnete  \\^ 
oegen  t^n;  ber  er  unterlag,  nac^bem  . . .,  the  national  passwn 
armed  itself  against  him ;  to  which  he  succumbed,  after  . . . — in- 
stead of  unb  biefer  unterlag  er  and  to  this  he  succumbed.  Or,  what 
has  logically  a  different  value,  as  of  a  ground  or  reason,  is  cast 
into  the  shape  of  a  descriptive  clause :  thus,  be^l^alb  BefdjloB  ber 
^aifer,  bem  baran  lag,  fc^neU  su  jetnem  ©o'^ne  gu  fommen  accord- 
ingly the  emperor,  who  was  desirous  of  getting  quickly  to  his  son, 
resolved  . . . — ^instead  of  ba  e§  iftm  baran  lag  since  he  was  desirous. 

[Exercise  25.    Transposed  Order.    Adjective  Clauses.] 

438.  1.  An  adverbial  dependent  dause  is  one  which 
performs  the  part  of  an  adverb,  by  qualifying  a  verb, 
an  adjective,  or  another  adverb. 

2.  It  is  introduced  by  one  of  the  subordinating  con- 
junctions mentioned  and  classified  above,  under  Con- 
junctions (386.4). 

3.  a.  An  adverbial  clause,  in  most  cases,  qualifies  a  verb. 

Thus,  as  adverb  of  place,  tt)  o  in  ber  2Stlbntg  alleS  f (^tt)teg,  t)er^ 
na^m  ic^  ha%  ©eldute  tuieber  where  in  the  wilderness  all  was  silent, 
I  heard  the  pealing  again ;—ot  TIME,  al§  nun  bie  5}^orgenbdmme^ 
rung  begann,  bcru()rte  (Sloaft  ben  Sc^Iummernben  when  now  the 
morning  twilight  began,  Eloah  touched  the  slumberer ;  t))'  e§  giDOlf 
fc^lug,  jaBen  [ie  \mt  Dorljcr  before  it  struck  twelve,  they  sat  as  &e- 
/ore;— of  MANNER,  bu  magft  allc§  fdjauen,  tx)ie  id)  bir  gcfagt  l^abe 
thoumayest  belwld  everything  as  I  have  told  it  thee;  e§  rajdjelt  mit 
ben  Sften,  'tia^  mcin  ^aul  tod  tcirb  it  rustles  with  the  branches  in 
siwh  wise  that  my  liorse  becomes  frantic; — of  cause,  id)  Blieb  urn 
fie,  tueil  fie  freunblid)  gcgen  mid)  xoax  I  hung  about  her,  because 
she  was  friendlij  towaixl  me; — of  purpose,  ber  mu§  mitgeften, 
bam  it  xo'xx  ben  Self  en  megfd)affen  he  must  go  along,  in  order  that 
ive  may  get  the  rock  out  of  the  way; — of  condition,  menu  hn  mir 
bienen  millft,  fo  !omm  mit  if  you  would  like  to  serve  me,  then  come 
along;  obglcid^  fie  il)m  na^e  maren,  tonnten  fie  i^n  bod)  m^i  er= 
bliden  although  tJiey  were  near  him,  they  yet  could  not  espy  him; 
—of  DEGREE,  j  e  l^eifeer  e§  ift,  befto  me!)r  frier'  id)  the  hotter  it  is  (in 
proportion  as  it  is  hotter),  so  much  the  colder  am  I. 

h.  An  adverbial  clause  qualifying  an  adjective  is  usually  one 
of  degree  or  manner,  introduced  by  mie  or  al§,  as  or  than,  or  by 


252  CONSTRUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [438- 

fo  ba^:  thus,  foI(i)e  33ebinGimgen,  tt)te  er  fie  t)or3uf(^lagen  getDagt 
^at  such  conditions  as  he  has  dared  to  propose;  ein  ©tab,  leic^t  urn* 
fa^t,  jo  ba§  feme  ^Bemeciungen  einigen  ©ptelraum  ^aben  a  staff 
lightly  grasped,  so  that  its  movements  have  some  play;  icf)  "^abe  fo 
l^elle  ^lugen  ba§  tc^  burc^  bte  gange  SBelt  fe{)en  !ann  //lai^e  so  dear 
eyes  that  lean  see  through  the  whole  world;  ba§  ifl  beffer,  al§  \d) 
t)on  i^m  ertoartet  I)atte  that  is  better  than  I  had  expected  of  him. 

Where  a  fo  is  present,  it  strictly  qualifies  the  adjective  as  an 
adverb,  and  is  itself  qualifi  'd  by  the  adverbial  clause. 

c.  An  adverbial  clause  qualifying  an  adverb  is  for  the  most 
part  either  introduced  by  ba^  as  correlative  to  fo,  or  it  follows 
a  demonstrative  adverb  of  the  same  kind  with  that  by  which  it 
is  itself  introduced,  and  correlative  to  the  latter  :  thus,  fie  !^ob 
ha§  eine  ^ctu  fo  ))o^  empor,  ba§  er  eg  burc^aug  ni(^t  ftnbcn  fonntc 
she  lifted  one  leg  so  high  up  that  he  could  not  find  it  at  all;  cr 
fonnte  f(^on  b a,  mo  bie  33rurfe  aufftorte,  ben  T^cEen  %aQ  erbliden  he 
could  already  see  the  bright  day  at  the  point  where  the  bridge 
ended;  tiur  barum,  tucil  eine  ©eele  t)or^anben  ift  only  for  the 
reason  that  a  soul  is  present;  er  fpottete  ber  3bee  ii  b  e  r  a  11,  it)  o 
fie  nx^t  feineg  (5inne§  mar  he  mocked  at  ideas  in  all  cases  in  which 
they  were  not  of  his  way  of  thijiking;  \^  fann  fie  erft  bann 
fteEen,  m  e  n  n  bie  ©riec^en  anbere  an^Uefern  /  can  only  furnish 
them  at  the  time  when  the  Greeks  deliver  up  others. 

In  the  1  itter  class  of  cases,  the  preceding  adverb  is  often 
superfluous,  and  the  adverbial  clause  logically  qualifies  the 
rer( 

d.  Out  of  the  frequent  use  of  fo  with  a  following  adverb  in 
the  principal  clause,  and  limited  by  a  succeeding  adverbial 
clause  introduced  by  al§ — for  example,  er  ifl  f  o  b  a  1  b  gefommen, 
al§  i^  iftn  rief  he  came  as  soon  as  I  called  him — has  grown  a 
very  common  construction  in  which  the  adverbial  clause  is  it- 
self introduced  by  fo  and  the  adverb  (often  combined  into  one 
word),  and  the  al§  is  usually  omitted  (compare  386.4i) :  thus, 
in  ^frifa,  f  o  m  e  i  t  mir  e§  fennen  in  Africa,  so  far  as  we  know  it; 
fob  alb  ber  DJlenfc^  fid)  bem  ^rucfe  ber  au^erften  ^ot:^  plot]  ent* 
munben  \^CLi  as  soon  as  man  has  relieved  himself  of  the  pressure 
of  extreme  need;  fo  lang^  ein  51ug'  noc^  meinen,  ein  ^zxiv.0^ 
brec^en  fann,  fo  lange  mallt  auf  @rben  bte  (S^ottin  ^oefie  so  long 
as  an  eye  can  yet  weep,  a  heart  yet  break — so  long  walks  upon 
earth  the  goddess  Poetry. 

e.  A  similar  construction  is  sometimes  made  with  an  adjective, 
predicative  or  attributive :  thus,  aber  f  o  g  r  o  ^  e  n  D^tu^m  bicfcr 


"^     d. 


438]  ADVEBBIAL  CLAUSE.  253 

6icg  an^  ben  ^itgcrn  bxa^k  hut,  great  as  was  the  fame  this 
victory  brought  to  the  pilgriins,  or  however  great  fame  this  victory 
brought,  etc. — literally,  .so  great  fame  as  it  even  brought. 

In  both  these  classes  of  cases,  the  imphcation  of  the  omitted 
al§  is  clearly  shown  by  the  transposed  arrangement  of  the 
clause ;  and  they  are  thus  readily  distinguished  from  the  cases 
where  job  alb,  fo  lange,  etc.,  have  simply  their  literal  meaning. 

/.  If  an  adverbial  clause,  or  an  inverted  conditional  clause 
(4336),  be  put  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  the  principal  clause 
takes  the  inverted  arrangement,  just  as  after  a  simple  adverb 
(431)":  thus,  tt)  ie  er  ha^  ^orte,  ftanb  er  auf  when  he  heard  that,  he 
arose;  lue n n  bie  (^raSbcrfe  in  ©taub  gerfallen  ift,  flafft  ber  erpr= 
tete  33oben  auf  when  the  covering  of  grass  has  fallen  into  dust,  the 
hardened  earth  cleaves  open;  e^e  jie  gur  5^atur  guriidfeftrt,  !ommt 
fie  gur  ^lanier  before  it  returns  to  nature,  it  becomes  mannerism; 
tuell  mir  bie§  febr  miBbebaGte,  banfte  ic^  i^m  gang  furg  as  this  was 
very  disagreeable  to  me,  I  thanked  him  quite  curtly. 

g.  After  a  prefixed  adverbial  clause,  the  principal  clause  is 
very  often  introduced  by  a  particle — fo,  ba,  or  the  like; 
especially  fo — correlative  to  the  conjunction  of  the  former,  and 
rendering  easier  the  inversion :  thus,  tt)  e  n  n  ba§  ift,  f  o  fann  \^ 
bid)  brauc^ett  if  that  is  the  case,  (then)  I  can  make  use  of  you; 
al§  er  bie  ^anh  guriitf^oG,  ba  ftob  fid)  bie  ©(^o(le  when  he  with- 
drew his  hand,  (then)  the  clod  rose. — A  f  o  stands  in  like  manner 
as  correlative  to  the  imphed  tt)enit  if  of  an  inverted  conditional 
clause:  thus,  faitn  eud)  ba§  tiiifeen,  f  o  tuiH  ic^  eud)  gem  bieneiyf*-..^^ 
tlmt  can  help  you,  (then)  I  will  gladly  serve  you.  /^ 

And  the  inversion  of  the  principal  clause  comes  so  to  depend 
in  appearance  upon  the  correlative  particle,  that,  when  the 
particle  is  omitted,  the  clause  not  very  infrequently  retains  its 
normal  order:  thus,  ^^dtte  er  ben  grieben  getDiinfc^t,  e§  iDtire  feinetn 
9lei(^e  t)ort^cil'^aft  [t)ortctII)aft]  getrefen  (for  todre  e§,  or  fo  tt)dre  e§) 
had  he  wished  peace,  it  would  have  been  advantageous  to  his 
realm. 

h.  An  independent  clause  is  often  employed  in  German  where 
our  usage  requires  a  dependent  adverbial  clause.  Thus,  for 
example,  usually  in  a  clause  after  one  containing  fautti  hardly : 
as,  faiittt  tear  ber  35ater  tobt  [bt],  fo  fomttit  ein  ieber  ttiit  feiuem 
Sting  hardly  was  tlie  father  dead,  when  ("lit.  then)  each  one  comes 
with  his  ring. 

i.  An  adverbial  clause,  like  an  adjective  clause  (437c),  is 
sometimes  made  use  of  to  add  something  to  the  sentence — 


254  CONSTKUCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [438- 

thus,  bo^  ^liinberten  diUQC  an§  llbermutl)  [Ubermut] ;  n)c§l&alb 
bic  3iifiiftr  aufprte  uub  ^Jlangel  entftanb  yet  some,  out  of  wanton- 
ness, committed  pillage :  on  which  account  the  supply  ceased  and 
want  arose — or  to  make  an  antithesis — or  for  other  purposes 
not  wholly  accordant  with  the  office  of  a  simple  adverb, 

[Exercise  26.    Transposed  Order,  Adverbial  Clause.] 

439.    Additional  rules  respecting  dependent  clauses  in  general. 

1.  In  the  transposed,  as  in  the  inverted  (431/0  order  of  the 
sentence,  a  personal  pronoun  as  object  of  the  verb  not  in- 
frequently stands  before  the  subject:  thus,  bafiir,  ba^  tl^nen 
bie  ^riftlic^en  ^ird)en  in  ^alaftina  etngerdumt  tuerben  ioKten  on 
condition  that  the  Christian  churches  in  Palestine  should  be  placed 
in  their  possession;  eln  Sanb,  too  ft  (^  alleg  in  SiiCe  borfinbet  a  land 
where  everything  is  found  in  abundance;  ai§  iDenn  fie  i  !^  m  ber 
^ob  Qcraubt  ti'dtk  than  if  death  had  snatched  Iter  from  him. 

2.  When  a  clause  ends  with  two  or  n;ore  infinitives,  of  which 
the  last  is  used  in  place  of  a  participle  (240.1c),  the  transposed 
verb  is  put  next  before  instead  of  after  them :  thus,  tt)etl  id)  nic^t 
5ab  e  gc'^en  fonnen  because  I  have  not  been  able  to  go;  benn  iftr 
mi^t,  ba^  \i)X  mid)  l^aht  ermorben  laffen  moHen  for  ijou  knmu  that 
you  Imve  wanted  to  have  me  murdered.    Compare  348.2a. 

By  imitation  of  this  construction,  the  transposed  verb  is  also 
sometimes  placed  before  a  participle  and  infinitive,  or  two 
participles. 

3.  a.  In  a  dependent  clause,  the  transposed  auxiliary  (^aBen 
or  f ein)  of  a  perfect  or  pluperfect  tense  is  very  frequently  omit- 
ted, and  has  to  be  inferred  from  the  connection :  thus,  frii!^cr 
al§  i^r  fiebac^t  (^attet)  earlier  than  you  had  thought,  ha^  T^ie  unb 
ba  ein  ^(urflid)er  gemefen  (ift)  that  here  and  there  has  been  one 
happy  man,  inbem  er  glt)ei  ntd)t  (!)at)  briiden  mogen  as  he  had  not 
wished  to  do  injustice  to  two,  n)a§  5cuer§  SSut^  [SBut]  tftm  au(^ 
geraubt  (ftaBe)  whatever  the  fire's  fury  may  have  taken  from  him. 

b.  Much  more  rarely,  the  transposed  copula  (a  form  of  fein 
be)  is  in  Uke  manner  omitted  :  thus,  ba^  mir  e§  iinmer  uncrfldrt 
(ifl)  that  it  is  ever  unaccountable  to  me,  n)enn  be§  f^ragenS  t()r  nic^t 
miib'  (fetb)  if  ye  are  not  weanj  of  asking,  bie  2Bege,  auf  n)eld)en  ha^ 
S3efte  gn  '^aben  (ift)  the  ways  in  widch  the  best  is  to  be  had. 

4  a.  An  exclamation  often  has  the  arrangement  of  a 
dependent  clause :  thus,  n)er  mit  cud)  ttJanberte  if  one  could  but  go 


439]  DEl>Em)ENT  CLATTSES.  2l55 

with  you!  (lit.  [how  happy  he]  who  should  etc.) ;  xok  er  \\^  tt)inbet 
Jww  he  twists  himself! 

b.  A  question  may  be  asked  in  the  same  manner :  thus,  oB  fie 
hJD^l  ^orcf)t  [I wonder]  whether  she  is  perhaps  listening? 

5.  Whether  a  dependent  clause  shall  be  placed  within  the 
framework  of  the  one  upon  which  it  depends,  or  outside  that 
framework,  is  determined  mainly  by  rhetorical  or  euphonic 
considerations ;  but  it  is  much  more  usually  placed  outside : 
thus,  ha^  allererfte,  tt)a§  ]ie  in  biefer  2BeIt  Morten,  al§  ber  ^ecfel  t)ott 
ber  ©c^ad^tel  genommen  murbe,  in  bei*  jie  lagen,  \oai  ba§  2Bort: 
„3innfolbaten!"  the  very  first  thing  that  they  heard  in  this  wo7'ld, 
when  the  cover  was  taken  from  the  box  in  which  they  lay,  was  the 
word  "  tin  soldiers !  "—not  waS  fie  in  biefer  SSelt,  ala  ber  i)e(fel  t)on 
ber  ^^a^kl,  in  ber  fie  lagen,  Qenommen  tDurbe,  ftorten,  which  would 
be  excessively  awkward.  But,  as  the  example  shows,  clauses 
qualifying  the  subject  of  a  sentence  have  to  be  brought  in 
before  the  predicate — unless,  indeed,  as  is  often  done,  the  prin- 
cipal clause  is  inverted. 

6.  In  general,  no  sentence  in  Germin  takes  the  transposed  ar- 
rangement, as  a  dependent  clause,  unless  it  be  grammatically  as 
well  as  logically  dependent — that  is  to  say,  unless  it  be  introduced 
by  a  word  (conjunction  or  relative  pronoun)  which  gives  it  dis- 
tinctly and  formally  a  dependent  character.  Many  a  clause  is 
logically  dependent  (especially  as  a  substantive  clause)  without 
being  so  formally :  thus,  id)  bd(5^te,  e§  tDdre  urn  befto  QottUc^er  (or, 
ha^  e§  urn  befto  flottIid)er  rodre)  I  should  think  it  was  so  muck 
the  more  divine  (or,  that  it  was  etc.). 

Exceptions  are — 

a.  A  clause  following  another  dependent  clause,  and  implying 
the  same  subordinating  word  by  which  the  former  was  intro- 
duced :  thus,  {)iegu  !am,  b  a  ^  bie  ^TonxQt  t)on  Sictlien  mil  C>ofrdn!en 
fdm^fen  marten,  ber  Dlorben  gu  fern  lag,  unb  ©panien  fic^  !aum  ber 
nd^eren  f^etnbe  ertDe'^ren  fonnte  to  this  was  added,  that  the  kings  of 
Sicily  had  to  contend  with  court  intrigues,  [that]  tJie  north  lay  too 
far  away,  and  [tJiat]  Spain  coidd  hardly  defend  herself  against 
nearer  enemies. 

b.  The  cases  explained  above  (438.3c?,e),  where  al§  is  omitted 
after  fo  followed  by  an  adverb  or  adjective. 

c.  A  number  of  words  (adverbs,  prepositions,  and  so  on)  which 
were  formerly  construed  with  substantive  clauses  introduced 
by  ba^  tJmt — or,  in  part,  are  sometimes  still  so  construed — have 


^5Q  CONSTEUCTION  OP  SENTENCES.  [439^ 

now  won  the  character  of  conjunctions  (compare  382c),  and 
themselves  introduce  a  dependent  clause  directly,  the  t^a^  being 
omitted :  thus,  bi§  until  (for  6i§  ba§  as  far  as  the  time  that), 
ungeac^tet  although  (for  ungeac^tet  ha^  it  being  disregarded  that), 
nun  now  (for  nun  ba^  now  that),  and  others :  compare  377.1. 

d.  It  may  be  remarked  here  that  an  inverted  conditional 
clause  (433)  is  really  an  adverbial  dependent  clause,  both  logic- 
ally and  formally — as  much  so  as  if  it  were  introduced  by  mnn 
if,  and  had  the  transposed  order  of  arrangement ;  only  its  de- 
pendence is  shown  in  another  and  pecuhar  manner. 

Summary  of  the  Bales  of  Arrangement. 

44.0.  For  the  convenience  of  both  teacher  and  learner,  the 
leading  rules  respecting  the  arrangement  of  clauses,  those 
which  it  is  most  important  to  commit  to  memory  and  keep  con- 
stantly ready  for  application,  are  presented  below  in  summary. 
Eeferences  to  the  fuller  statements  above  are  added. 

441.  1.  There  are  tliree  modes  of  arranging  the 
sentence  in  German  : 

a.  The  normal,  or  regvlar  (430) ; 

b.  The  inverted  (431-3) ; 

c.  The  transposed  (434:-9). 

2.  The  first  two  belong  to  independent  clauses,  the 
third  to  dependent  (434). 

3.  Their  character  is  determined  by  the  position  of 
the  bare  predicate,  or  the  personal  verb  : 

a.  In  the  normal  arrangement,  the  personal  verb  im- 
mediately follows  the  subject ; 

h.  In  the  inverted  arrangement,  it  precedes  the  sub- 
ject ; 

c.  In  the  transposed  arrangement,  it  is  at  the  end  of 
the  clause. 

442.  The  order  of  the  normal  sentence  is— 

1.  The  subject; 

2.  The  bare  predicate,  or  personal  verb ; 


443]  EULES  OF  AKRANGEMENT.  257 

3.  The  various  modifying  adjuncts  of  the  predicate, 
as  objects,  adverbs,  predicate  noun  or  adjective ; 

4.  Finally,  the  non-personal  part  of  the  verb  (if  there 
be  one) — namely,  prefix,  participle,  or  infinitive  :  and, 
if  more  than  one  be  present,  they  follow  one  another  in 
their  order  as  here  mentioned. 

Among  the  modifying  adjuncts  of  the  predicate,  stand- 
ing after  the  personal  verb,  or  between  it  and  the  non- 
personal  part  of  the  verb — 

a.  A  personal  pronoun  directly  dependent  on  the  verb 
regularly  comes  first ; 

h.  An  accusative  object  precedes  a  genitive,  and  more 
usually  follows  a  dative ; 

c.  An  adverb  of  time  ordinarily  comes  before  one  of 
place,  and  both  before  one  of  manner  ; 

d.  A  predicate  noun  or  adjective,  especially  an  ob- 
jective predicate,  usually  comes  last. 

More  special  rules  would  be  too  liable  to  exceptions  to  be 
worth  giving. 
Examples  of  a  normally  arranged  sentence : 

1.      2.  3.  4. 

cr  fd^irft; 

er  \&i\di  ha^  ^u(^ ; 

er  \)Cii     mir  'txx^  33u^  Qcfi^tcft ; 

mcin  Sreunb  tDtrb  mir  'ba^  33uc^  balb nac^  §aiife  gunicfgefcfiirft ^aBcn : 
that  is,  he  aends;  he  sends  the  hook;  he  has  sent  me  tlie  hook; 
my  friend  will  soon  have  sent  the  hook  hack  home  to  me. 

443.  The  order  of  the  inverted  sentence  is  the  same 
with  that  of  the  normal  sentence,  except  that  the  sub- 
ject comes  next  after  the  personal  verb,  instead  of  next 
before. 

The  inverted  order  is  followed — 

1.  When  any  adjunct  of  the  predicate  verb  is  put  in 
the  place  of  the  subject,  at  the  head  of  the  sentence 
(431ay); 


258  CONSTRUCTION  OP  SENTENCES.  [443- 

2.  Rarely,  for  impressiveness ;  with  the  personal  verb 
first,  and  usually  with  boc^  or  [a  surely,  somewhere  after 
it  (431^); 

3.  In  interrogative  sentences,  or  when  a  question  is 
asked  (432.1); 

4  In  optative  or  imperative  sentences — that  is,  when 
a  command  or  desire  is  expressed  (432.2) ; 

5.  Often  in  conditional  sentences,  or  to  give  the  mean- 
ing of  if  (433). 

Special  rules,  a.  The  general  connectives,  meaning 
and,  but,  for,  or  or  (384),  are  the  only  words  which,  save 
in  rare  and  exceptional  cases,  are  allowed  to  precede 
the  subject  without  inverting  the  sentence. 

h.  In  an  inverted  sentence,  a  personal  pronoun  as  ob- 
ject is  often  put  before  the  subject  (431A). 

Examples  of  inverted  sentences : 

1»  tnir  ftat  er  ba§  35ud)  flef(^irft ; 

ha^  ^ud)  l)at  er  mir  Qefc^lrft ; 

QejcE)i(!t  ^at  er  mir  ba§  33uc^ : 
that  is,  he  has  sent  me  the  book— with  varying  emphasis,  first  on 
me,  then  on  the  hook,  last  on  sent. 

2.  Ijat  er  mir  bocf)  ba§  33u(^  gefdiicft: 
that  is,  surely  he  has  sent  me  the  hook. 

3.  'i)at  er  mir  ha^  33u(^  flefd^icft  ? 
tt)a§  ^ai  er  mir  gef^idt  ? 

ttjem  ^t  er  ha^  33ud)  gej^icft  ? 
that  is,  has  he  sent  me  the  hook?  what  has  he  sent  me?  to  whom 
has  he  sent  the  book  ? 

4.  jd^ide  er  mir  ba§  33u^ ! 
that  is,  let  him  send  m£  the  book! 

5.  fd^idt  er  mir  ba§  35ud),  jo  Iftut  er  mo^l : 
that  is,  if  he  sends  me  the  book,  he  does  well. 

h.  5at  mir  mein  greunb  ha§  33ud)  gefdiidt? 
that  is,  has  my  friend  sent  me  the  book  ? 


444]  RULES  OF  ARRANGEMENT.  259 

444.  The  order  of  the  transposed  clause  is  the  same 
with  that  of  the  normal  sentence,  except  that  the  per- 
sonal verb  is  removed  from  its  proper  place  to  the  very 
end  of  the  clause. 

The  transposed  order  is  followed  in  dependent  dauses — 
that  is  to  say,  in  such  as,  being  introduced  by  a  sub- 
ordinating word  (relative  pronoun  or  conjunction),  are 
made  to  enter  as  members  into  the  structure  of  some 
other  clause  (435). 

Such  a  clause  has  the  value  either  of  a  noun,  an  ad- 
jective, or  an  adverb,  and  is  accordingly  reckoned*  as 
a  substantive,  adjective,  or  adverbial  dependent  clause 
(436-8). 

1.  A  substantive  dependent  clause  (436)  is  either  the 
subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  or  in  apposition  with  or  de- 
pendent upon  a  noun,  or  governed  by  a  preposition. 

It  is  introduced  by  \io!^  that,  ob  whether,  or  a  compound 
relative  pronoun  or  particle  (386.2). 
Example  of  a  substantive  dependent  clause  (objective) : 

t(^  tt)eiJ3,  baf3  er  mir  ba§  33u(^  gefc^idt  ftat : 
that  is,  I  know  that  he  has  sent  me  the  hook. 

2.  An  adjective  dependent  clause  (437)  belongs  to  and 
qualifies  a  noun. 

It  is  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun  or  a  relative 
particle  (386.3). 

Example  of  an  adjective  dependent  clause : 

'tiOi^  33u(^,  n)e((^e§  er  mir  gefdjicft  %ai : 
that  is,  the  book  which  he  has  sent  to  me. 

3.  An  adverbial  dependent  clause  (438)  qualifies  usually 
a  verb,  sometimes  an  adjective  or  an  adverb. 

It  is  introduced  by  a  subordinating  conjunction  of 
place,  time,  manner,  cause,  purpose,  condition,  or  degree 
(386.4). 


260  CONSTRtJCTION  OF  SENTENCES.  [444r 

Examples  of  an  adverbial  dependent  clause : 

aU  er  mir  ba§  33u^  fc^ldte ; 
U)enn  er  mir  ha^  ^gud)  Gcjd)icEt  l^at : 
that  is,  when  he  sent  me  the  hook;  if  he  lias  sent  me  the  hook, 

Sjoedal  rules,  a.  In  a  transposed  sentence,  a  personal 
pronoun  as  object  is  sometimes  put  before  the  subject, 
if  the  latter  be  a  noun  (439.1). 

h.  If  the  sentence  ends  with  more  than  one  infinitive, 
the  transposed  verb  is  put  next  before  instead  of  after 
theiji  (439.2). 

Examples : 

a.  oB  mir  mctn  Sreunb  ha^  33ucE)  gef(^ic!t  ^at; 

h.  mW  er  mir  ba§  33u(^  nii^t  \)Cii  \6)\dtx[  tDoUen: 
that  is,  whether  my  friend  has  sent  me  the  hook;  hecause  he  has 
not  wanted  to  send  me  the  hook. 


Concluding  Bemarks, 

445.  It  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  rules  of  arrangement, 
as  drawn  out  in  the  preceding  pages,  are  always  and  every- 
where strictly  observed,  even  in  prose.  The  demands  of  eu- 
phony, the  suggestions  of  style,  even  sometimes  the  arbitrary 
and  unexplainable  choice  of  a  writer,  lead  to  their  not  infrequent 
violation.  A  few  cases  of  such  violation,  of  sufficiently  prevalent 
occurrence  to  constitute  exceptional  classes,  have  been  pointed 
out  above ;  but  to  show  in  detail  the  different  degree  of  obli- 
gatory force  belonging  to  the  different  rules,  and  how  and 
under  what  circumstances  their  neglect  is  permitted,  would  re- 
quire a  treatise. 

446.  The  construction  of  sentences  has  been  taken  up  and 
treated  here  only  on  its  grammatical  side.  To  treat  it  on  its 
rhetorical  or  stylistic  side — to  explain  how  and  to  what  extent 
clauses  may  be  put  together  so  as  to  form  admissible  or  har- 
monious sentences  and  periods — is  not  the  duty  of  a  grammar. 
There  is,  in  theory,  no  limitation  to  the  expansion  of  a  simple 
sentence ;  for  both  its  subject  and  predicate  may  involve  a 
variety  of  modifying  adjuncts  in  the  shape  of  words,  phrases, 


447]  RHETOKICAL  CONSTRUCTION.  261 

and  clauses  ;  and  each  part  of  these  clauses  may  take  on  further 
clauses  as  adjuncts — and  so  on,  ad  infinitum.  The  usages  of 
the  language,  gradually  established  under  the  influence  of  a 
regard  for  euphony  and  for  convenient  intelligibility,  practi- 
cally set  bounds  to  this  indeflnite  expansion.  But  the  bounds 
are  very  differently  drawn  in  different  styles  of  composition,  in 
every  language,  and  the  variety  in  German  is  notably  greater 
than  in  most  other  languages.  Between  the  style  of  simple  nar- 
ration and  that  excessive  involution  and  intricacy  in  which 
many  German  writers  love  to  indulge,  there  is  an  immense  in- 
terval. It  is  because  poetry  is  intolerant  of  involved  periods 
that  German  poetry  is,  upon  the  whole,  decidedly  easier  to  the 
learner  than  German  prose.  No  one,  of  course,  can  put  together 
German  periods  which  shall  be  tolerable — much  less,  elegant — 
after  study  of  the  rules  of  construction  in  a  grammar ;  familiar- 
ity with  the  language  as  spoken  and  written,  the  acquisition  of 
what  seems  an  instinctive  feeling  for  the  harmony  of  construc- 
tion, but  is  in  fact  an  educated  habit,  the  product  of  much  read- 
ing and  hearing,  can  alone  enable  one  to  compose  such  sentences 
as  Germans  compose. 


RELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH. 

447.  1.  A  part,  and  the  most  essential  part,  of  our 
English  language — namely,  that  derived  from  the  Anglo- 
Saxon — ^is  of  near  kindred  with  the  German. 

a.  That  other  and  very'  important  part  of  our  language  which 
is  more  directly  akin  with  the  French  and  Latin  was  brought  in 
and  grafted  upon  the  Anglo-Saxon  in  consequence  of  the  con- 
quest of  England  by  the  Normans,  in  the  11th  century.  The 
Normans  were  of  Germanic  (Scandinavian)  race,  though  they 
had  been  settled  in  France  long  enough  to  have  substituted  the 
French  language  for  their  own.  Thus  our  Germanic  blood  is 
purer  from  intermixture  than  our  Germanic  speech. 

2.  This  part  akin  with  German  includes,  along  with  the  most 
frequently  used  and  familiar  words  in  our  vocabulary,  nearly 
the  whole  of  the  grammatical  apparatus  of  English— that  is  to 
say,  all  its  endings  of  inflection  (393),  most  of  its  endings  of  der- 
ivation, its  suffixes  and  prefixes  (394-5),  and  the  larger  part  of 
it^  indeclinable  particles,  or  w^ords  of  relation, 


262  EELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH.  [448- 

448.  Kindred  in  language,  as  elsewhere,  implies 
descent  from  a  common  ancestor :  the  English  and 
German  are  modern  dialects  of  one  original  language. 

a.  That  is  to  say,  there  was  a  time  when  the  forefathers  of 
the  English-speakers  and  those  of  the  German-speakers  formed 
together  a  single  community,  of  uniform  speech.  By  its  division, 
under  historical  causes,  into  separate  and  independent  com- 
munities, and  by  the  consequently  discordant  changes  which 
these  communities  have  wrought  each  upon  its  own  speech,  the 
various  dialects  now  spoken  have  gradually  come  to  exhibit  the 
differences  which  characterize  them. 

6.  Thus,  the  Englishman  and  the  German  both  use  the  words 
sinQj  sang  (jing',  fang)  in  the  same  sense,  because  each  has 
received  them  with  this  sense  by  uninterrupted  tradition — 
going  down  from  father  to  son  just  as  language  goes  nowadays 
— from  ancestors  who  lived  together  and  differed  in  their  talk 
no  more  than  we  ourselves  and  our  immediate  neighbors.  Thus, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  one  says  slay,  slew,  and  the  other  fd)laG^ 
fc^Iug  (strike,  struck) — ^words  originally  identical  in  pronuncia- 
tion and  meaning,  though  now  different  in  both — because  these 
words  have,  in  the  course  of  their  tradition,  become  differently 
altered  in  the  on^  and  the  other  line,  in  the  same  manner  as 
words  ar&  altered  nowadays. 

449.  The  English  and  German  are  joint  members  of 
a  group  or  sub-fam  ly  of  dialects  called  the  Germanic 
(often  also  "Teutonic");  which,  again,  is  a  member  of 
a  larger  family,  called  the  indo-european  (also  "  Indo- 
Germanic,"  or  "Aryan"). 

450.  The  Indo-European  family  includes  most  of 
the  languages  of  Europe  and  southwestern  Asia.  Its 
divisions  are — 

1.  The  Germanic  (4:51) ; 

2.  The  Slavic  (Eussian,  Polish,  Bohemian,  Servian, 
Bulgarian,  etc.)  and  Lithuanic; 

3.  The  Celtic  (Welsh,  Irish,  Gaelic,  etc.) ; 


451]       GEEMANIC  BRANCH  OF  INDO-EUROPEAN  FAMILY.        263 

4.  The  Italic  (Latin,  etc. ;  and,  as  modern  represen- 
tatives of  the  Latin,  the  Italian,  French,  Spanish,  etc.) ; 

5.  The  Greek  (ancient  and  modern) ; 

6.  The  Persian  (Zend,  Modern  Persian,  etc.) ; 

7.  The  Indian  (ancient  Sanskrit,  Pali,  Prakrit; 
modern  Hindi,  Bengali,  Marathi,  etc.). 

a.  The  resemblances  and  differences  of  these  languages  are 
of  the  same  kind  with  those  of  the  English  and  German,  and 
due  to  the  same  causes.  If,  where  we  say  six  and  the  German 
fed^§,  the  ancient  Koman  said  sex,  the  ancient  Greek  hex,  the 
Hindu  sliash,  and  so  on,  it  is  all  for  the  same  reason  for  which 
both  the  Germans  and  we  say  sing  and  sang  (above,  448&). 
Only,  in  this  wider  family,  of  races  whose  separation  is  much 
more  ancient,  the  remaining  correspondences  are  proportionally 
fewer  and  less  conspicuous,  the  discordances  more  numerous 
and  deeper. 

6.  Although  relationships  for  the  languages  here  named  have 
been  surmised,  and  are  often  claimed,  on  a  yet  wider  scale  (for 
example,  with  the  Hebrew  and  the  other  "Semitic"  languages), 
they  have  not  been  demonstrated. 

451.  The  divisions  of  the  Germanic  branch  of  this 
great  family  are  as  follows ; 

1.  The  Low- German,  occupying  the  lowlands  of  northern 
Germany.  To  this  division  belong — the  English,  as  modern 
representative  of  the  Anglo-Saxon,  which  was  carried  into 
England,  and  made  to  displace  the  Celtic,  by  the  invading 
tribes  from  the  northern  shores  of  Germany,  in  the  fifth 
century ;  the  Dutch,  or  literary  language  of  the  Netherlands ; 
the  ancient  Saxon  and  Frisian,  no  longer  cultivated  ;  and  the 
various  dialects  now  spoken  among  the  people  in  northern 
Germany,  whose  literary  language  is  the  cultivated  High- 
German,  or  "  German." 

2.  The  ITigh  -  German,  occupying  central  and  southern 
Germany.  The  only  existing  cultivated  dialect  of  this  division 
is  the  one  which  we  know  as  "the  German"  language;  its 
history  will  be  given  with  a  little  more  fulness  farther  on 
(462  etc.). 

3.  The  Scandinavian,  occupying  the  peninsulas  of  Denmark 
and  Sweden  and  Norway,  with  the  island  of  Iceland  (colonized 


264  BELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH.  [45L 

from  Norway  in  the  ninth  century).  Its  languages  are  the 
ancient  Icelandic  or  Old  Norse,  and  the  Norwegian,  Swedish^ 
and  Danish. 

These  are  all  the  divisions  represented  by  existing  languages. 
Besides  them,  however,  is  to  be  noticed — 

4.  The  Gothic,  represented  by  parts  of  a  Gothic  version  of 
the  Bible  made  in  the  fourth  century  of  our  era  in  the  dialect 
of  the  Goths  of  Moesia  (generally  called,  therefore,  the  Moeso- 
Gothic),  by  their  bishop  Ulfilas.  Of  all  the  extant  monuments 
of  Germanic  language,  this  is  by  two  or  three  centuries  the 
oldest,  and  therefore  of  the  highest  value  in  all  inquiries  into 
the  history  of  the  whole  Germanic  family  of  languages. 

452.  1.  The  more  immediate  connection  of  English 
is  with  the  Low-German  languages ;  but  its  relation  to 
the  German  is  very  near^  as  compared  with  that  to  the 
other  European  tongues,  and  the  correspondences  of 
word,  grammatical  form,  and  meaning,  between  the 
two  are  numerous  and  striking. 

2.  These  correspondences — besides  their  intrinsic 
interest,  and  their  value  as  historical  evidences  bearing 
upon  the  development  of  both  languages,  the  relations 
of  the  races  speaking  them,  and  the  growth  of  ideas 
and  institutions  among  those  races — have  also  a  prac- 
tical value,  as  a  help  to  the  scholar  to  whose  attention 
they  are  brought  in  retaining  the  meaning  of  the  Ger- 
man words  he  is  endeavoring  to  learn. 

3.  It  is  the  proper  duty  of  a  German-English  dictionary  to 
point  out  in  detail  the  English  words  which  are  to  be  regarded 
as  identical,  or  of  kindred  elements,  with  German  words  (a  duty 
sought  to  be  fulfilled  in  the  vocabulary  to  the  author's  German 
Reader).  But  no  small  part  of  the  correspondences  are  readily 
to  be  discovered  by  the  scholar  himself,  especially  if  his 
researches  are  guided  at  first  by  a  judicious  and  enlightened 
teacher. 

4  The  varieties  of  difference,  both  of  form  and  meaning, 
which  distinguish  German  words  from  their  English  correspond- 
ents, are  much  too  great  to  allow  of  their  being  set  forth  here. 
To  exhibit  with  fulness  even  the  more  important  among  them, 


454]  PROGEESSION  OF  MUTES.  265 

and  explain  their  reasons  (so  far  as  these  admit  of  explanation), 
would  be  the  work  of  a  professed  comparative  grammar  of  the 
Germanic  languages.  There  is,  however,  one  set  of  differences 
which  are  so  regular  in  their  occurrence,  and  which  are  of  such 
prime  importance  for  one  who  undertakes  to  compare  German 
words  with  EngUsh,  that  they  may  not  be  passed  without 
notice. 

TJie  Law  vf  Progression  of  Mutes. 

453.  In  regard  to  their  mutes,  the  Germanic  lan- 
guages show  a  very  peculiar  set  of  changes  as  compared 
with  the  other  branches  of  the  family ;  and  a  part  of 
the  Germanic  languages  themselves  show,  as  compared 
with  the  rest,  another  and  similar,  though  less  complete, 
set  of  changes.  These  changes  were  first  clearly  es- 
tablished and  illustrated  by  the  great  German  gram- 
marian, Jacob  Grimm ;  and  their  statement  is  generally 
called,  after  him,  Grimm's  Law — or  also  the  law  of  pro- 
gression or  rotation  of  mutes  (in  German,  the  £aut* 
t)erj(^tebimg  pushing  of  sounds  out  of  place), 

454.  The  original  mute  letters  of  the  Indo-European 
languages  are  nine  in  number,  and  of  three  classes — 
lingual  or  ^-mutes,  palatal  or  A:-mutes,  and  labial  or 
p-mutes :  each  class  containing  a  surd  mute  (t,  k,  p),  an 
aspirate  (th,  kh,pJi — more  originally  dh,  gh,  hh),  and  a 
sonant  (dy  g,  b).     Thus — 

surd. 

lingual  mutes  t 

palatal  mutes  k 

labial  mutes  p 

a.  These  aspirates  are  to  be  understood  as  uttered  in  the  way 
they  are  written— that  is  to  say,  with  an  h  or  aspiration  audibly 
following  the  mute  letter  which  begins  them :  and  not,  for  in- 
stance, as  we  are  accustomed  to  pronounce  our  th  and  ph.  These 
last  are  not  aspirated  mutes,  but  spirants,  simple  continuable 
sounds,  which  have  grown  out  of  the  aspirates,  but  are  phonet- 
ically of  quite  another  character.  Any  aspirate  in  the  Germanic 
languages  which  had  become  a  spirant  was  no  longer  liable  to 
the  law  of  progression, 


aspirate. 

sonant. 

dh  or  th 

d 

gh  or  kh 

9 

hh  or  ph 

b 

266  RELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH.  [455- 

455.  It  is  found  now  that,  as  a  general  rule,  in  tlie 
great  body  of  the  Germanic  languages  (Gothic,  Scan- 
dinavian, Low-German),  each  of  these  mutes  has  been 
pushed  forward  one  step  in  its  own  class,  the  surds  hav- 
ing become  aspirates,  the  aspirates  sonants,  and  the 
sonants  surds;  while,  in  the  High-German  languages 
(including  the  "German"),  each  has  been  pushed  for- 
ward two  steps,  the  surds  having  become  sonants,  the 
aspirates  surds,  and  the  sonants  aspirates. 

456.  1.  This  rule  would  in  strictness  require  an 

lingual  labial  palatal 

original  t,    th,  d       p,   ph,  b       k,    kJiy  g  to  have  become 
English  thj  d,  t        ph,  b,  p       kh,  g,   k    and 
German  d,  t,    ih      b,    p,  ph      g,    k,    kh; 
but  to  the  regularity  of  this  result  there  are  many  ex- 
ceptions : 

a.  Original  p  and  k,  in  whole  classes  of  words,  at  their  first 
change  were  converted  into  the  spirants  /  and  h,  instead  of 
the  aspirated  mutes  ph  and  kh,  and  so  remained  unaltered  by 
the  second  change. 

6.  The  High-German  dialects  in  general  took  the  second  step 
of  progression  less  completely  and  less  strictly  in  the  labial  and 
palatal  than  in  the  lingual  series.  In  the  two  former  classes, 
some  dialects,  at  a  certain  period,  were  more  faithful  to  the 
requirements  of  the  rule  than  were  others ;  but,  in  the  modern 
German,  the  authority  of  these  other  dialects  has  prevailed. 
Thus,  for  Bin  he  the  older  monuments  give  pirn  [p  for  h) — and 
so  in  a  great  number  of  other  cases. 

c.  In  the  lingual  series,  the  German  has  converted  the  aspirate 
th,  regularly  required  as  the  correspondent  of  English  t,  into  a 
sibilant,  f  or  3. 

2.  Hence,  the  actual  correspondence  between  Eng- 
lish and  German,  so  far  as  concerns  the  law  of  progres- 
sion, is  in  general  as  follows  : 

lingual  labial  palatal 

to  English     th,  d,  t       /,  by  p        h,  g,  k    correspond 
German    b,    t,  f,,^     h,\  h,  f,p      Ij,  g,  I 


459]  CORRESPONDENCES  OF  LETTERS.  .267 

Even  these  correspondences,  however,  do  not  hold  strictly  in 
all  cases :  thus — 

a.  A  mute  is  often  protected  from  alteration  by  combination 
with  another  letter:  thus,  d  by  n  or  I:  as  in  ganb  land,  tt)anbern 
wander,  ©olb  gold;—t  by  s,  h  (ch,  gh),f:  as  in  6teln  stone,  §aft 
haste,  ^Jlad)i  night,  ^xa\i  craft. 

h.  Even  the  oldest  English  and  German  (the  Anglo-Saxon  and 
the  old  High-German)  have  their  irregular  exceptions  to  the 
rules  of  correspondence;  and  these  exceptions  have  become 
much  more  numerous  in  later  times,  as  each  language,  in  the 
course  of  its  history,  has  suffered  anomalous  changes  in  some 
of  its  words  and  letters. 

457.  Below  are  given  examples  of  the  more  important  cor- 
respondences between  German  and  English  consonants — those 
which  result  from  the  law  of  progression,  and  a  few  others. 

458.  Lingual  series. 

1.  ^  in  German  answers  regularly  to  English  th:  thus,  ba§ 
that,  benfen  think,  hid  thick,  bod)  though,  ^ur[l  thirst,  brei  three, 
S3ab  hath,  ^ruber  brother,  (Jrbe  earth. 

a.  The  most  important  exception  is  that  of  a  b  after  n  or  I,  as 
noticed  above  (456.2a). 

2.  %  (or  t^^ :  see  37)  in  German  answers  regularly  to  English  d: 
thus,  ^ag  day,  tief  deep,  %dh  death,  i:^un  do,  Ilebte  loved,  ©ott^eit 
godhead,  felten  seldom,  2Bort  word,  unter  under. 

a.  Excepted  especially  is  a  t  after  f,  ^,  \,  which  (as  noticed 
above,  456.2a)  usually  corresponds  to  an  English  t. 

3.  The  lingual  sibilants  in  German,  §,  \\,  §,  g,  often  correspond 
to  English  t:  thus,  h(x^,  ba^  that,  l)eife  hot,  e§  it,  au§  out,  Befjer 
letter,  gu^/oo«,  ix^dtwo,  gu  to,  '^txitide,  '^al)\  tale,  3oIl  to??. 

a.  But  the  sibilants  are  also  in  numberless  cases  the  represen- 
tatives of  original  sibilants,  and  are  therefore  found  alike,  or 
with  but  slight  variations,  in  German  and  English :  thus,  fing 
sing,  jo  so,  bte§  this,  (Stein  stone,  (5d)am  shame,  Sdjnee  snow, 
f(5^elten  scold. 

459.  Labial  series. 

1.  a.  33,  in  German,  when  initial,  regularly  answers  to  English 
J):  thus,  $gab  bath,  ^ruber  brother,  ^lut  blood,  ^]ebovcn  born. 


268  RELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH.  [459- 

6.  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  or  as  final,  it  is  usually  represen- 
ted in  EngUsh  by  f  orv:  thus,  ab  off,  of,  l)arb  half,  taub  deaf, 
2Bei6  wife,  lieb  lief;—%aubt  dove,  fterben  starve,  jieben  seven 
^nabt  knave,  iiBer  over,  ^^khn  fever. 

2.  ^  in  German  answers,  with  very  few  exceptions,  to  English 
p:  thus,  \)a\\tn pass,  ^i^  pitch,  "^laQt plague,  ©pie^spi^,  jpringen 
spring. 

3.  a.  5,  like  5,  agrees  with  English  /  when  initial :  thus,  f  aHett 
fall,  5i]c^^7i,  ^n^foot,  fUegenyfi/,  \vdfree. 

b.  Elsewhere  in  a  word,  it  usually  corresponds  to  English  p : 
thus,  tief  deep,  ©d)Iaf  sleep,  auf  up,  reif  ripe,  frf)affen  s/iape,  l^elfen 
help,  merfen  i^arp,  offen  open. 

4.  ^f  is  a  peculiar  German  combination,  occurring  with  great 
frequency  in  words  anciently  derived  from  the  Latin,  as  rep- 
resenting a  Latin  p :  thus,  ^flanjc  plant  (Lat.  planta),  $f orte 
dx)or  (Lat.  porta),  ^feil  arrow  (Lat.  pilum),  ^feffer  pepper  (Lat. 
piper),  ^funb  pound  (Lat.  pondus).  But  it  is  also  found  in  a 
good  many  words  of  Germanic  origin :  thus,  ^pfel  appZe,  ^f(i(^t 
i)Zigf7i<,  ©(S^nepfe  snipe,  ppfen  /top,  $fro|)f  prop. 

460.    Palatal  series. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  letters  of  this  series — ^namely,  q,  f,  5/ 
also  n!  and  ng — are  the  same  in  German  and  English :  thus, 
©ott  god,  \)tm\]tn  forget,  griin  green,  ^aQtn  wagon ;— Mi  cold, 
bid  f/iic/c,  tntrfen  work,  flax  clear,  ^nabc  knave;— ^aat  hair,  §cr§ 
Tieari;— jinfen  ^nfc,  fingen  sing. 

Exceptions,  however,  of  a  more  irregular  kind,  are  very 
numerous.    Thus — 

a.  English  ch  is  found  not  infrequently  where  the  German 
has  !:  thus,  ^inn  chin,  ©trerfe  stretch. 

b.  German  ^  is  variously  represented  in  English,  by  k,  gh, 
tch,  etc. :  thus,  33u(f|  book,  ho^  though,  leic^t  light,  ^ec^  pitch. 

c.  An  original  g,  which  the  German  has  retained,  has  very 
often  undergone  manifold  corruption  or  loss  in  Enghsh :  thus, 
2:ag  day,  liege,  liigc  lie,  mag  may,  2Beg  way;—Qnqtl  hill,  Siegel 
tile,  S5ogeI/oii;Z;— folgcn/oZtow,  33alg  bellows,  <BoxQt  sorrow,  borgen 
borrow; — and  so  on. 

d.  §,  as  has  been  pointed  out,  is  in  German  very  often  a  mere 
orthographical  device  for  signifying  the  long  quantity  of  the 
neighboring  vowel.  Of  course,  where  it  has  this  character, 
uothinsr  corresponding  with  it  in  English  i^  to  be  Jool^e^  for. 


462]  mSTOEY  OF  GEKMAN.  269 

461.  Into  the  discussion  of  the  general  tendencies  and  the 
special  causes  which  have  led  to  the  harmonies  and  dis- 
crepancies of  German  and  English  words,  and  have  produced 
either  classes  of  correspondences  or  single  and  apparently- 
anomalous  cases  of  difference,  we  cannot  here  enter :  such  sub- 
jects would  be  in  place  in  a  historical  grammar  of  German,  or 
a  comparative  grammar  of  the  Germanic  languages  in  general. 


BRIEF  HISTORY  OF  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 

462.  The  German  language  is,  as  has  been  seen,  one 
of  the  dialects  of  the  High-German  sub-division  of  the 
Germanic  division  or  branch  of  the  Indo-European 
family  of  languages. 

a.  Every  cultivated  or  literary  language  is,  in  the  same  way, 
by  origin  one  of  a  group  of  more  or  less  discordant  dialects — 
one  to  which  external  circumstances  have  given  prominence 
above  the  rest. 

h.  Since  unity  of  speech  cannot  be  maintained  over  a  wide 
extent  of  country,  or  through  a  numerous  community,  except 
by  aid  of  the  unifying  influences  of  high  civihzation  and  lit- 
erature, it  is  only  a  matter  of  course  that  Germany,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  historical  era,  was  filled  with  a  variety  of 
dialects — many  of  which  are  yet  far  from  being  extinct. 

c.  Germany  was  first  brought  to  the  knowledge  of  the  rest  of 
the  world  by  the  Eomans,  whose  attempts  to  conquer  the 
country,  as  they  had  conquered  Gaul  (France),  proved  in  vain, 
partly  owing  to  the  stubborn  resistance  of  the  German  tribes, 
partly  because  of  the  remoteness  of  the  country,  and  the  decay 
of  the  aggressive  force  of  the  Roman  empire.  Later,  nearly  all 
the  European  provinces  of  the  empire  were  overwhelmed,  one 
after  another,  by  roving  hordes  of  Germans  ;  but  these  nowhere 
estabhshed  themselves  in  sufficient  numbers  to  maintain  their 
own  speech.  Thus  the  dialects  of  the  Goths,  the  Vandals,  and 
other  noted  German  races,  became  extinct,  by  the  absorption  of 
those  races  into  the  communities  of  other  speech  among  whom 
they  settled. 

d.  The  introduction  of  Roman  Christianity,  civilization,  and 
letters  into  Germany  (beginning  in  the  fifth  century),  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  Prankish  empire  under  Chlodowig  over  nearly 


270  EELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH.  [462- 

all  the  German  tribes  (about  the  end  of  that  century),  and  its 
yet  more  brilliant  renewal  under  Charlemagne,  three  centuries 
later  (A.  D.  742-814),  produced  in  the  country  a  state  of  things 
favorable  to  a  unity  of  customs,  institutions,  and  language.  It 
remained  then  for  circumstances  to  determine  which  of  the 
many  existing  dialects  should  win  such  importance  in  the  eyes 
of  all  the  German  peoples  as  to  be  accepted  by  them  as  their 
literary  language. 

463.  The  history  of  tlie  Higli-German  dialects  falls 
into  three  periods: 

1.  The  Old  High'  German  period  (5I(t^0(^beutf(^),  down 
to  the  twelfth  century ; 

2.  The  Middle  High- German  period  (3J?itte(I)od^beutf(i)), 
covering  four  centuries,  from  the  beginning  of  the 
twelfth  to  the  time  of  Luther ; 

3.  The  New  High-German  period  (S^eu^odjbeutfd^), 
from  the  Reformation  down  to  our  own  days. 

464.  1.  The  Old  High-German  period  commences 
with  the  eighth  century;  from  which,  however,  only 
fragments  have  come  down  to  us. 

a.  As  the  oldest  of  these  is  regarded  the  Hildbrandslied,  a 
pre-Christian  poem,  in  the  alliterative  verse  which  appears  to 
have  been  the  original  form  of  poetic  expression  of  the  whole 
Germanic  race. 

2.  The  literature  of  this  period  is  chiefly  Christian, 
and  consists  of  versions  from  the  Latin,  collections  of 
words  or  glosses,  paraphrases  and  comments  of  Scrip- 
ture, and  the  like. 

a.  The  most  noteworthy  productions  of  this  class  are  Otfried's 
Krist  (A.  D.  868),  a  harmony  of  the  four  Gospels,  in  the  first 
rhymed  verse;  a  prose  version  of  Tatian's  harmony  of  the 
Gospels,  of  about  the  same  period;  the  works  of  the  monk 
Notker  (about  A.  D.  1000)  and  his  school,  especially  his  prose 
version  and  explanation  of  the  Psalms ;  Williram's  (about  A.  D. 
1075)  prose  paraphrase  and  explanation  of  Solomon's  Song. 


465]  HISTOEY  OF  GERMAN.  271 

6.  Besides  these,  there  are  a  few  songs,  forms  of  imprecation, 
and  other  like  remnants  of  a  more  popular  and  native  class  of 
productions. 

3.  The  leading  Old  High-German  dialect  was  the 
Frankish,  as  being  the  language  of  the  ruling  race  and 
dynasty;  but  there  was  no  prevailing  literary  dialect 
accepted  through  the  whole  country ;  each  writer  used 
his  own  native  idiom. 

a.  Other  dialects  represented  in  this  period  are  the  Aleman- 
nic  and  Swabian,  and  the  Bavarian  and  Austrian. 

465.  1.  In  the  Middle  High-German  period,  tlie 
literary  dialect  was  the  Swabian. 

a.  Because  it  was  the  court-language  of  the  empire  under  the 
Swabian  emperors,  Conrad  and  Frederick  Barbarossa  and  their 
successors  (A.  D.  1138-1268). 

h.  The  grand  difference  distinguishing  the  language  of  the 
Middle  period  from  that  of  the  Old,  is  the  reduction  of  the 
former  full  and  distinct  vowels  of  the  endings  of  words  to 
the  indifferent  and  monotonous  e.  Thus,  gebe  I  give  was  in  the 
first  period  gihii,  geben  to  give  was  geban,  gijc^en  to  fishes  was 
viscum,  blinbe^  blind  (neut.  sing.)  was  hlindaz,  blinben  (gen.  pi.) 
was  blindono,  and  so  on.  In  this  respect  the  Middle  and  New 
High-German  stand  nearly  upon  the  same  level. 

2.  The  literature  is  abundant  and  various,  and  of  a 
very  high  order  of  merit. 

It  may  be  divided  into — 

a.  The  works  of  the  Mlnnesdnger  (love-singers)^  of  whom  more 
than  three  hundred  are  more  or  less  known.  Some  of  the 
most  eminent  among  them  were  Hartmann  von  Aue,  Wolfram 
von  Eschenbach,  Heinrich  von  Ofterdingen,  Walther  von  der 
Vogelweide,  and  Gottfried  von  Strassburg.  They  wrote  songs 
of  love  and  chivalry,  epics  (chiefly  founded  on  French  and 
Provengal  subjects),  didactic  poems,  fables — almost  everything 
excepting  dramas. 

b.  The  popular  legendary  epics,  new  workings-up  of  stories — 
half-mythical,  half-historical — which  had  long  been  current 
among  the  German  races,  and  even  in  part  belonged  to  the 
whole  Germanic  race.     Their  authors  are  unknown.     Chief 


272  RELATION  OF  GERMAN  TO  ENGLISH.  [465- 

among  them  is  the  Lay  of  the  Nibelungen  (^^ibelungenlieb),  a 
magnificent  poem ;  others  are  (SJubrun,  and  the  lesser  tales 
which  make  up  the  §elbenbu(f)  (Book  of  Heroes). 

c.  The  works  of  the  2}leifterfdn9er  (master-singers).  These 
were  poets  by  trade,  organized  into  guilds,  and  carrying  on  their 
handicraft  in  a  very  regular  and  very  uninteresting  manner,  in 
the  fourteenth  and  fifteenth  centuries  (and  later),  after  the 
decay  of  the  national  literature  which  had  flourished  under  the 
Swabian  emperors.  Their  productions  have  mostly  gone  into 
merited  oblivion. 

466.  During  the  time  of  literary  depression  which  occupied 
the  last  century  or  two  of  the  Middle  period,  the  foundations 
were  laying  for  the  New.  The  wearing-out  of  the  feudal  system ; 
the  rise  of  the  cities  to  importance  and  wealth  ;  the  awakened 
sense  for  Art,  both  in  architecture  and  in  painting  ;  the  estab- 
lishment of  universities  ;  the  impulse  given  to  classical  learning 
through  Europe  in  consequence  of  the  capture  of  Constantinople 
by  the  Turks ;  the  invention  of  printing,  which  put  literature 
within  the  reach  of  a  vastly  increased  class — all  these  circum- 
Btances  prepared  the  way  for  a  national  culture  which  should  be 
as  much  wider  and  deeper-reaching  than  that  of  the  preceding 
period,  as  this  than  that  of  the  first.  And  whereas  in  the  Old 
period  literature  had  been  the  property  chiefly  of  the  church 
and  the  priests,  with  complete  diversity  of  dialects  ;  and,  in  the 
Middle,  the  property  of  courts  and  the  great,  with  acknowledged 
pre-eminence  of  the  court-dialect ;  so  now  it  was  to  be  shared 
in  by  the  great  body  of  the  people,  and  to  possess  for  its  use 
something  like  a  true  national  language. 

467.  Tlie  New  High-German  period  begins  with  the 
grand  national  movement  of  the  Reformation,  and  es- 
pecially with  the  writings  of  Luther. 

a.  The  dialect  which  Luther  used  was  not  a  continuation  of 
the  Swabian,  which  had  long  since  sunk  into  insignificance, 
while  each  author  had  again  begun  to  write  in  his  own  idiom  ; 
nor  was  it  the  precise  spoken  language  of  any  part  of  the 
country :  it  was,  as  he  himself  states,  the  language  of  public 
affairs  in  Saxony,  and  used  by  the  various  courts  throughout 
Germany.  It  had  grown  up  in  -  measure  on  paper,  in  learned 
and  literary  use,  and  united  in  itself  some  discordant  dialectic 
elements. 


469)  HISTORY  OF  GERMAN.  273 

6.  It  was  the  nationality  of  Germany  that  created  the  pos- 
sibility of  a  national  language ;  it  was  the  excited  and  receptive 
state  of  the  national  mind  at  the  time  of  the  Reformation,  the 
inherent  force  and  vigor  of  style  in  the  writings  of  Luther  and 
his  coadjutors,  the  immense  and  immediate  circulation  which 
they  won  among  all  classes  of  the  people,  and  the  adoption  of 
his  version  of  the  Bible  as  a  household  bock  through  nearly 
the  whole  country,  that  gave  to  the  particular  form  of  speech 
used  by  him  an  impulse  toward  universality  which  nothing  has 
since  been  able  to  check  or  interfere  with.  It  has  become  more 
and  more  exclusively  the  language  of  education  and  learning,  of 
the  courts,  the  pulpit,  the  lecture-room,  the  school,  the  press : 
and  in  the  large  towns  and  cities  it  has  to  some  extent  extir- 
pated or  deeply  affected  the  old  popular  dialects,  which  are 
now  hardly  met  in  purity  except  among  the  rude  country 
population.    Thus — 

468.  The  language  of  Luther,  not  a  little  modified 
in  spelling,  utterance,  and  construction,  and  greatly 
enriched  by  new  formations  and  additions,  is  now  the 
speech  of  the  educated  in  all  Germany  (both  High- 
Germany  and  Low-Germany),  and  therefore  entitled  to 
be  called  the  German  language. 

a.  To  illustrate  the  alteration  which  it  has  undergone  during 
the  three  centuries  and  a  half  of  its  existence,  is  here  added 
Luther's  version  of  the  Lord's  Prayer,  as  given  in  his  first 
edition  of  the  German  New  Testament  (1522) :  Vnstx  l^ater  stin 
tiem  ?l^imel,  IBtin  IXamt  ^tjo  f^t^liQ;  IBt^n  3ancD  feomej  ©egn 
^ilU  gescfjefje  auff  JSvUtti  toie  gnit  irem  IB^s^ntl  j  Unstx  UQlicf) 
SSrott  Qtb  unnslieuttj  santrberflifi  uns  uttsere  Sci[jullre,  totetoMt 
unsrrnn  Scfjullrifiern  betBeben ;  mnnti  fure  uns  nitt  mn  Vtx^ 
sucJUTtfi;  Sonlrern  triose  uns  bon  Iretn  Ufiel ;  3ienit  tregti  ist  tras 
Hegcj^j  ttittr  trie  IS^rafft,  unntr  trie  J^erUcfeest  in  IStoicfeest.  ^mzn* 

b.  The  former  dialects  not  only  still  subsist  in  Germany 
among  the  uneducated,  but  their  influence  more  or  less  affects 
the  Uterary  speech,  especially  as  regards  its  pronunciation  ;  so 
that  the  educated  even,  from  different  parts  of  the  country,  do 
not  speak  precisely  alike. 

469.  To  give  any  history  of  the  language,  its  cultivation,  and 
its  literature,    during   this  its  modern  period,    will    not   be 


274  HISTORY  OF  GERMAN.  [459- 

attempted  here :  even  to  mention  the  names  of  the  principal 
writers  who  have  distinguished  themselves  by  their  contribu- 
tions in  German  to  literature  and  science  would  require  pages. 
Such  are  their  merits  that  to  possess  no  knowledge  of  German 
is  to  be  cut  off  from  one  of  the  most  important  sources  of 
knowledge  and  culture  within  our  reach. 


GERMAN  WRITTEN  CHARACTER. 


275 


GERMAN  WRITTEN  CHARACTER. 
The  German  written  letters  are  as  follows : 


Cap. 

a 

Bmall.     equiv't. 

<^         a 

Cap. 

Bmall. 

equiv't. 

i 

Cap. 

small,     eqniy't. 

^ 

/ 

h 

^ 

J 

k 

^ 

/ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

c 

^ 

/ 

I 

^/ 

M 

/^P 

J' 

d 

m 

#^ 

m 

^ 

It? 

V 

/ 

tf- 

€ 

^ 

^ 

n 

^ 

^^ 

W 

^ 

/ 

f 

^ 

<* 

0 

^ 

^ 

X 

/ 

/ 

9 

F 

/ 

P 

/ 

r 

y 

r 

/ 

h 

/ 

/ 

? 

/ 

/ 

z 

^ 

/ 

i 

^ 

?r 

r 

Z' 

sz 

The  general  peculiarity  reqmring  especial  notice  in  this  char- 
acter is  the  prevalence  of  angular  instead  of  rounded  strokes 
among  the  small  letters.  Owing  to  this,  i  is  distinguished  from 
c  only  by  its  dot ;  also  u  from  n  only  by  the  round  stroke  above 
the  former  (which  stroke,  however,  is  omitted  as  unnecessary 
when  the  u  is  modified).  Further,  e  is  distinguished  from  n 
only  by  the  strokes  being  made  much  closer  together.  For  the 
same  reason,  the  a,  g,  o,  q  are  not  entirely  closed  at  the  top. 

The  use  of  the  forms  of  small  s  corresponds  precisely  with 
that  of  the  two  forms  of  the  same  letter  in  printed  text :  the 
first  is  to  be  everywhere  written  for  j,  and  the  other  for  §. 

For  S2  is  written  a  peculiar  character  (as  shown  in  the  table), 
instead  of  a  combination  of  those  for  s  and  z.  Special  forms  of 
combination  of  ss  and  si  are  also  sometimes  made. 


276  GERMAN  WRITTEN  CHARACTEB. 

Examples : 


'X^^^<p^. 


t^f!t^ 


^^^^ff^» 


^ 


»*^ 


7- 


'^/^*. 


1^5- 


^^^^^^^ii^e^. 


^'^         .^/^^^         t^^<f^t^-ff^/^-V^^ 


■e^***       'V^^^^^^j 


-CHi^-a^-^f^^i^^^i/       ^^^        ^ 


^*^*^ 


«f  c^i5^^^^  ^^f^i^f^^f^        ^i^tX^H^y. 


-tz-n^-v-^ 


7 


^^^ii'^ff 


'^■V^      ^; 


^y/ 


^^^^^^y**^^i/% 


GERMAN  WRITTEN  CHARACTER.  277 


^^^^*j 


/7J^       ^^^       *1t>/ff^         Hf*'^^^         e>^>k^ 


/M  -6  ^       et>^       <A^     ^^^    *^*    Jj^^*^ 
^*       -^^^^^       ^^^^    -A^ff^P^j       ^^^^  ^x;-^^ 


^eine. 


^S«^^      ttJ.'^S^^      ^^W^^       c-^*^     ^^^^* 

a*  «Jd.^  M^/j^ 

—    ^^i^ff^  Jif^ 

^^St*-^^^    #^i^#^    i^^^^^ 

/iS*» 

AA^-a^ff^^^     ^^^iht2^ff-^f^^      /pp*      <^^^^^*^y 

^^^^  .^, 

-^iX^^Jf^ 

^T^^^i^^    t/iif     t*^^ 

Ooet^e. 


278 


IIST  OF  IRBEGULAR  VERBS. 


ALPHABETICAL  LIST  OF  IRREGULAR  YERBS, 

Including  all  the  Verbs  of  the  Old  or  Strong  Conjugation. 

Explanations. — In  the  following  table  are  given  the  principal 
parts  of  all  the  verbs  of  the  Old  or  strong  conjugation,  together 
with  the  preterit  subjunctive  ;  also  the  second  and  third  singu- 
lar indicative  present  and  the  second  singular  imperative, 
whenever  these  are  otherwise  formed  than  they  would  be  in 
the  New  or  weak  conjugation.  Forms  given  in  full-faced  type 
(thus,  geBiff en)  are  those  which  are  alone  in  use ;  for  those  in 
ordinary  type  (thus,  bdrfft,  bddt)  the  more  regular  forms,  or 
those  made  after  the  manner  of  the  New  or  weak  conjugation, 
are  also  allowed  ;  forms  enclosed  in  parenthesis  are  especially 
unusual,  poetical,  or  dialectic  ;  where  two  forms  are  given,  the 
one  placed  first  (above  the  other)  is  the  more  usual  or  approved 
one ;  a  subjoined  remark  gives  additional  explanation,  if  any 
is  needed. 

The  forms  of  the  modal  auxiliaries,  as  well  as  of  the  other 
irregular  verbs  of  the  New  conjugation,  are  included  in  the 
List.  They  are  distinguished  by  being  put  in  ordinary  type 
throughout. 

No  verb  is  given  in  the  list  as  a  compound.  If  it  is  used  only 
in  composition,  hyphens  are  prefixed  to  all  its  forms,  and  an 
added  note  gives  its  compounds. 


Infinitive. 

pres't  indie,  sing. 

pret.  indie. 

pret.  subj. 

Imper. 

past  part. 

f&aaen  hake             Ue.%  Udi             Inif                 Bfttc 
usually  of  New  conj.,  especially  when  transitive. 



geftatfcn 

sl^ftten                      Mn\i,  =6iert 

only  in  gcbircn  hear,  bring  forth 

sftat            sftftte 

',  (formerly  gcBcren). 

=ttcr 

sBoven 

»elfeett  hiu 

Mft 

blfTe 

fieibiffen 

Serflcn  hide 

Mteft,  ^itfit 

ibatfi 

l&atfle 

h\t^ 

ge^orgett 

JBetftcn  hurst 

fcirftcft,  btrft 

Barfl 
borft 

Borftc 
&&rftc 

Blrfl 

gcfcorftcn 

93ie<)en  hend 

l>0d 

f>Hc 



^tbo^m 

JBlcten  offer 

(Bcutft,  bcut) 

iboi 

f>Mc 

(Bcut) 

^ihf>Un 

»lttt)ett  hind 



}>ata> 

^(int>e 

^chwti^m 

JBltten  heg 



hai 

ibftte 



geibeten 

S^lafen  hlow 

aia(fe)ft,  ftlftft 

dlied 

Ibliefe 



geblafen 

JBlciften  remain 

UU1> 

U\tU 

^tbiUhtn 

SBleidjen  hleadh        

as  intransitive,  of  either  conj. ; 

61t(^              bltd)c           

;  as  transitive,  of  New  only. 

gcblt(!^en 

LIST  OF  lEREGULAR  VERBS. 


279 


imper.  pait  part. 

—  ^et>taten 

gcbrannt 

—  Meftctt 

—  gcbac^t 
sblrB  sbor^en 

only  in  wcibcrBcn  perish  ;  which  as  transitive,  destroy,  is  usually  of  New  conj., 


Infinitive. 

pre«'t  indie,  sing.        pret.  indie. 

pret.  subj. 

SBtaten  roast 

Britft,  brat             brlct 

Bricte 

fBteihcn  break 

branntc 

btftcOe 

SBvenncn  burn 

brenntc 

S3rtnctcn  brin.g 

except  in  gcbci^cn  thrive. 

brac^tc 

obsolete. 

'Mef)c 

iJcnfen  think 

ba(^tc 

bac^tc 

s'bcthcn 

=birbjt,  =blrbt        =bar6 

'.iiivhe 

^ingcn  engage 
^ve^^cn  thresh 


brifc^cft,  brifc^t 


slujiefictt  (;breu^t) 

only  in  tjerbrle|cn  vex, 

^ringen  press         —   — 

<Dilrfen  be  permitted  barf,  barfft,  barf 

men  eat  iffeft,  Iftt 

l^aJjwtt  go  fal)tft,  fft^ti 


$e(f)ten  ^i?A< 


fi(^it)ft  fi^t 


bang 
(bung) 

brofd^ 
brafc^ 

burfte 
aft 

Cneng 


(bungc) 

brofc^c 
brif(^c 

barftc 

ful)te 
flelc 

Hcttge) 
fd(f)te 


brlfc^ 
(;breu^) 


wanting 

16 


gcbungen 
gcbrof(i)en 
sbYotfen 

OeMrunoen 

geburft 

gefal)tcn 
OefaUen 
ecHmen 


defo<f)ten 


forms  of  New  conj.  occasionally  occur, 

only  in  bcfet)Icn  command,  cmpfe^Ien  comm,end;  fe{)len/ai7  is  another  word, 

^in^en  find  —    —  fan^         fanbe        defunt>en 

^Ud\im  twine        fll*(t)ft,  flidjt         ft0<f)t        n<»**e       flic^t  flcftoditett 

^ieihm  apply         —    —- fllft  ftiffe         dcftiffen 


antiquated  excopt  in  fic^  beflei^cn  exerf  one's  self. 


'^lieQcn  fiy 
%lic^m  flee 
%lU^tn  flov 
gragcn  ask 


(fleugft,  fteitv30 
(flcuc^ft,  fleu^t) 
(flcu^eft,  fle4t) 


frug 


frftgft,  fragt 
properly  a  verb  of  the  New  conj.  only. 

f^rrcffett  devour        fviffeft,  ftlfet  ftrafe 

f^tletm /ree^e  ftrot 

©ftteit /ermen^  gor 

also  spelt  gi^ren  etc.,  with  ^, 

®j]feinfl^t>e  fllcftft,  aieftt  Qah 

fllbft,  Q\bt 

®eficn  go  —   —  ging 

ISeUm  be  worth        flUtft,  flUt  gttlt 

only  in  Bcrgeffcn/or^re/. 

^gcu^cfl,  geu^O  fidft 


®ie6en 

cginnen  —  - 

only  in  bcglnnen  begin. 


tQdnn 


noae 

frftgc 
ftafee 

gore 

flittfle 

gaite 
golte 

sgdnne 
soiinne 


Cflcug) 
(fleu^) 
(fleu^) 

fHft 


g«t 

(geu^) 


0efl0l)en 
geftoffen 

gefragt 

flcfrouctt 
QCQehen 
gegdlten 

flegoffcn 
sQonnen 


280 


LIST  OF  IRKEGULAB  VERBS. 


Infinitive.  pres't  indie,  sing.         pret.  indie.        pret.  mbj. 

Qleidten  resembU     flli*  gti(i^e 

usually  of  New  conj.  when  transitive,  make  similar. 


imp«r. 


(Bleiten  glide 
®limmen  gleam 
®tahcn  dig 
©tclfcn  gripe 
iggfeen  have 
J^oltcn  ho'd 
^amcn  hang 


giitt 
gtomm 
gtttb 
fltlff 

^atte 


glttte 
glomme 

Httc 


lllno         ftlttge        


put  part. 

gegtt(^cn 

gcglittcn 
gcglommctt 
degraben 
geotiffen 

ge:^a6t 


sometimes  confounded  in  its  forms  with  ^ingcn  hang  (trans.).  New  conj. 


^<iuen  h,ew 
j^eben  raise 

_  ^eiften  call 

^eifen  chide 
Bennett  know 


I^Ufft,  ftllft 


^tc6 
l|ob 

liff 

fanntc 

ttomm 


I)dbe 
f)ube 

Jjttlfe 
l)a(fe 

fiffe 

fcnntc 

flommc 


^ilf 


forms  of  Old  conj.  very  rare  except  from  feeflcmmcn  oppress. 

SilUhtn  cleave  fIo6  flobc  

^litnmen  climb        flomnt       flommc        — 


j^Ungen  sound 


Hang 


IlSngc 
nangc 
rarely  of  New  conj.,  especially  when  transitive. 


gc^aucn 
0el^0ben 

gcfiffen 
gefannt 
gcftommen 

gcfloBen 

geftommen 

getlungctt 


^neifen  pinch 
^nei^en  pinch 
.^dttttttCtt  com£, 
^ornien  can 
SttUMn  creep 
S^hxtn  choose 
S^a'btn  load 
gdffCtt  let 
gttttfctt  >«»i 

Seil)en  Zend 
gefCtt  read 
ISiegett  lU 


(fSmmjl,  !6mmt) 
fann,  fanntl,  fann 
(frcuii^ft,  freu^t) 

I&bfi,  labt 


liefelt,  Heft 


only  in  wcrltcren  lose. 


fniff 

fnlpp 

fatn 

fonnte 

1X0^ 

for 

luD 

Heft 

Hef 

nti 

la» 
lag 

tl0X 


fniffc 

fnippc 

f&me 

fonnte 

fore 

mbc 

Hefte 

Hefe 

Wiit 

Hel^e 

Iftfe 

sldre 


gcfniffen 

gcfntppctt 

-  defommett 

wanting  gefonnt 

geforen 

delal»m 

-  0e(affen 

-  gclattfen 

fleHUm 

-  geHe^en 
gelefen 
delegen 
sloven 


Hed 


sHttden 


slang      siftnge       — 


sinngen 


only  found  in  gclingcn  succeed,  mi^IingenyatZ ;  used  in  third  person  only, 

j^dftfien  extinguish     Ilf(^cft,  lifc^t  lofc^  lofcf^c  lif^  gelofc^cn 

the  forms  of  New  conj.  preferably  limited  to  transitive  meaning. 


SiiA^tn  lie 


(leugfl,  Icugt) 


Idge 


(Icug) 


log 

SFIalflen  grlnb  mai^ffl,  maf>It         muM        mfl^tc  

the  forms  of  Old  conj.  now  in  use  only  in  the  participle. 

avieiben  shun  ntleJ>       ntieJ>e        

SRelfen  milk  (mllfll,  mllft)         molf         molfc  (mtif) 


gelogen 
gema^len 

gemiet»en 

gemolfen 


LIST  OF  IKREGULAR  VERBS. 


281 


Infinltire. 

pres't  indie,  sing. 

pret.  indie. 

pret.  subj. 

imper. 

past  part. 

aReffen  measure 

tnlffcft,  mlfet 

maft 

mft^e 

mlfe 

^etneffen 

ajtogen  may 

mag,  magft,  mag 

mo(^tc 

moiijte 

wanting  gcmo^t 

ajJuffen  must 

mu^,  mu^,  mu& 

mu^tc 

mu|tc 

wanting  gemu^t 

"^Iclintcn  take 

ttimmft,  nimmt 

ttal^m 

nftl)me 

nlmm 

Qcnommin 

^Wcnnen  nam^ 

nanntc 

nenntc 



genannt 

only  in  genefcn  recover,  get  weU. 

sna» 

=nafc 

— • 

snefen 

sntefeen 

obsolete,  exc 

jept  in  gcnie^en  enjoy 

snofi 

-.noffe 

(sncu^) 

sn0ffen 

q^fcifCtt  whistle 

^fiff 

»»fiffe 



flc^flffen 

qUHeflen  cherish 



Pfjog 
Bflaa 

Pflogc 



gcpflogcn 

forms  of  the  New  conj.  are  occasionally  met  with. 

QcptUUn 

SlucUcn  gus'i           qutflft,  qutttt             quoQ 

usually  of  New  conj  when  transitive,  swell. 

quoffe 
soak. 

quiU 

gequoUcn 

m&atm  avenge 

forms  of  Old 

(rD(i))           (rcitc) 

L  conj.  very  rare,  except  the  participle. 

gcro^ctt 

maiden  advise          ratf)ft,  xm                ttet^            rlet^c        

New  conj.  forms  mostly  limited  to  the  sense  h^ld  council. 

gcrat^cn 

fHeihcn  rub 

tUh 

tUhc 

aetUhcn 

fHeifiCn  tear 



m 

tm 

gerifTen 

mclten  ride 

titt 

tUie 



Qetitten 

9fienncn  run 

—— 

rannte 
(renntc) 

renntc 

gerannt 
(gerennt) 

{RlccDctt  smell 

(rcu(^fl,  rcui^t) 

t0d| 

td<!)e 

(reuc^) 

0evod)en 

fHittQcn  wring 

tang 
tttttfl 

v&nQC 
tume 

—— 

geruttden 

aiinnen  run 

—   

ttttttt 

v&nm 
v^nne 

gevomten 

atufen  ca'l 

very  rarely  ( 

Df  New  conj. 

tlcf 

ticfc 

oetttfett 

SttUfen  drink 

f&um,  fauft 

foff 

faife 



flefoffen 

^amm  suck 

fog 

foge 



gcfogen 

forms  of  New  conj.  occasional:  sometimes  confounded  with  fSugen  su<:kle. 

Sdftaffen  create         ft^uf  fd)iife         gcjciiaffen 

generally  of  New  conj.  when  meaning  be  bufsy,  or  procure. 

<^^aUcn  sound         fc^oE  fd^otte         geic^otten 

8f(^el)en sfdjlcljt  .=T<ftoI>       sfdjftije    sfdie^en 


only  in  gef;^c^en  happen: 


'Bdiei'^en  part  ^c^ieb 

of  New  conj.  when  transitive,  disjoin. 


used  in  third  person  alone, 
jc^icbc 


gefcf^ieben 


<S(f)einen  appear 

®cl)elten  scold 

@(^eren  s'lear 
<S(f)ic{>en  shcve 

ed)int>en  fay 

^(fllagcn  strike 


f(S^lerft,  fct)lert 

(f(i^cu|efl,  ^(^cu^t) 

fdjlftfff,  fd)l.ift 
f<Dlaort.  fcDliiflt 


frfjictt 
fdialt 

fdjotr 

frfjllcf 
f<ftJtt9 


fd)iene     — 


|cf)dltc 

fdidbe 
fdjoffe 
f(f)  unte 
fcf)(iefe 
f<<)ltt9e 


f(^ilt 
f(J)ter 


0efd)olten 
gefdfoven 

Oefdioffen 

0cfd)unden 

Ocf(f)(afcn 


282 


LIST  OF  lEREGULAR  VERBS. 


Infinitive.               prcs't  indie,  sing. 

pret.  indie. 

pret.  8ubj.      imper. 

past  pwt. 

@(^Iei(i)ett  sneak      

miiti 

\m^^  — 

deftfiUdien 

e<ftleifen  whet        fc^Iiff         fc^iiffc       

in  other  senses  than  whet,  sharpen,  properly  of  New  conj. 

gcfc^Iiffen 

&<Hleifi€n  siu 

^miH 

mm   — 

fiefcftUffen 

©dlUefen  «?tp 

f<IJloff 

fcDldffe    — 

gefdiloffen 

©djlleften  shut        (jc^Icufeejl;  \mm  fcDlofe 

tdjloffe    (f(^Icu^)  gcfd)(0ffen 

Si^Uneen  sling       

|(f)lanfl 

fcDlftttflc  

flcf<J)aingctt 

edjtnei^en  smite — 

fcftmlfe 

frfjmiffe   — 

flcfdimlffen 

^^mclitn  melt        f(^mtls(cf)t,  fc^miljt  fd^mclj         f^moljc      fci^mtl 
usually  and  properly  of  New  conj.  when  transitive. 

a  gcfc^mcljcn 

&d\nau1>ett  snort      

(®(»)ttlcben) 

fc^nob 

fc^nSbc       

gefc^nofccn 

©djncibcn  cut         

fc^nitt 

fdjttltte    — 

0ef<f)ttittett 

^dttauJ)en  screw     

f(i^rob 

fd^robc       

gcfc^roben 

r     @<f)rctfctt  be  afraid  fi^rtcfft,  f(^rictt        \^tat 
'   "g* —  of  New  conj.  as  transitive,  ^pAfew. 

ft^rSfe        florid 

gefc^rodcn 

@cl)teilben  wnTe       —   — 

jOttUh 

fdjtlcbe    

eemtieUn 

@(f)teien  cry            

frfiric 

fdjHec      

Oefd)tieen 

ecDteiten  «<ncte       

f«titt 

fcDHttc     — 

ficfdnrlttm 

@cl))t)ftten  suppurate  (fc^retcrfl,  f(^tt)iert] 

1  fdltt»dr 

fdltodire    

TdittJttte 

oef(()tt>o«en 

regularly  of  New  conj.  as  transitive,  silena 

|<Dtt»ie8C  

flef<fttolcfiett 

^ai\»eUen  swell       f(^wiafl,  f(i>njiat 
of  New  conj.  as  transitive. 

fc^TOOtt 

fcbaollc      fdjwia  gcf^aollen 

@d|kt>immen  swim  

fdtlvatnttt  fd)tt>dmtne  — 

0efd)kt>ommen 

®(l)to>inbm  vanish    

fdjttiftnbe 

f(()kputtt)e 

fief(()tt)un^en 

@(4tt)in0en  swing    fdltvano    fd)U>anoe 

\S)W\nQen  furnish  with  wings  is  of  the  New  conj. 

0efd)tt>un0en 

@d)ltidtett  «wear      

fdjIVOY 

fdltvute   

0ef(l)t«0ven 

ge^cn  «e«               nenft,  ffcHt 

frt^ 

fft^e        fie^ 

oefe^cn 

^n  6e                  Mn,  Mft,  ift  k. 

tvav 

te»fttr«        fcl 

gelDcfen 

©cnbcn  «cnd              

fanbtc 
fenbetc 

fenbete      

gefanbt 
gefenbet 

®lebm6oi7 

fott 

ficbetc       

gefotten 

gingcn  «tnf7 

fattfl 

fftttge      — 

flefMttflen 

©infCtt  stnfc 

fant 

fftnfe      — 

gefunfett 

^innm  think 

fann 

fonnc        

fannc 

fafee       — 

gcfonnen 

_gj^ett*« 

f«ft 

flcfeffm 

©oaen  shall               foU,  foH^  foff 

foUte 

folttc       wanting  gefollt 

rarely  of  the  New  conj. 

fplc 

fplec          

gefpiecn 

^pinnen  spin         — 

Spann 

\ponne    — 
ip&nnt 

eef»»0ntteit 

^iifUi^cn  split        —   

fpUB 

fpUfie         

gefpltffen 

^^pV^Oim  speak         f^tld)ft,  fM*l 

f^rad) 

\pv&aif    f|>ti<^  ^e^ptoOtcn 

LIST  OF  IKREGULAR  VERBS. 


283 


Infinitive. 

pres't  indie,  sing. 

pret.  indie. 

pret  suiij. 

imper. 

past  part. 

^pxitfitn  sprout 

(fpreuleft,  fpreu^t)  ^ptofi 

T^tdfTe 

(fprcu^) 

flcl^tDfTcn 

e^tringen  spring 



f>>tan0 

f^Jtranee 

6e\pvunQcn 

<Stccf)cn  prick 

f«<D(4,  fU*t 

ftdd) 

ftftcfie 

ftlcf) 

geft0<l)cn 

BUden  stick            fttcffl,  fticft              jlaf                ftafc 
usually  of  New  conj.,  especially  when  transitive. 

Pit! 

gcftorfcn 

gt^hen  stand 



ftattb 
ftttttb 

ftattbe 
Itunbe 



fiefttttt^eti 

eUfflcn  steal 

fticDlft,  fUel^U 

W 

ftdrne 
ftadie 

ftieDl 

0eft0l)len 

gteigen  ascend 



ftleg 

mcfle 

deftiegen 

^Utifen  die 

mvm,  ^itht 

ftata 

fttttbe 
ftat^e 

ftltl^ 

fleftotaen 

<SiUf>en  disperse 

ftob 

ftd^e 

fleftoOm 

@«ttfCtt  stink 

ffanf 
Cftunf 

ftftnfe 
ftitnfe) 

geftunten 

^t0ficn  pmh 

fid6(ef3t,  fidfet 

ftiefi 

fticfee 

geftofeett 

®ttei(f)en  stroke 

itvim 

fttljfte 

oefttidjen 

Strcttcn  stHve 

fitltt 

fttltte 

gefttlttctt 

2;i)uit  do               —  — 

— >  the  pret.-  indie.  tt)at  is  common 

tl)at             t^ate 

L  in  dialectic  German,  < 

3specially  as  auxiliary. 

%ta^m  carry 

traflit,  tv&qi 

ttUQ 

tuttfle 



octragen 

Xtt^cn  hit 

tm%  um 

ttaf 

it&U 

tHff 

gettoffcn 

2:veil>cn  drive 

ttUb 

tviebe 

Qcitiehen 

3:tcten  tread 

ttiitSt,  itiit 

itat 

it&U 

mtt 

gettetm 

atlcfen  dHp 

mm,  tteuft) 

troff 

ttoffc 

(trcuf) 

gctroffen 

^tinUn  drink 

—  — 

itant 
Cttttttf 

tirftttfe 
ituttfe) 

gcttunfen 

Z^tuaen  deceive 

iV0e 

Itdflc 



g^itogen 

SSI(i(()fen  grow 

n)ic^(fc)fl,  wii^fl 

t»nm 

to)u*fe 

gett)ad)fen 

aSSftden  wngh            TOog 

sometimes  of  New  conj.  ;  compare  ^wegcn 
word. 

njcgc 
and  ttjicgcn 

;,  which 

gemogen 
are  the  same 

SSafdien  wash 

ruMc^lOfl,  ttjifc^t 

ttJUfdl 

wttfdie 

gekt>af(f)en 

aS^eticn  weare 

mob 

mobc 



gcmotcn 

smegen  =n?og  :^icoge         swogcn 

only  in  feeiuegen,  which  is  of  New  conj.,  except  in  the  sense  induce. 


SSeidien  yield         luid^  lutd^e 

of  New  conj.  when  meaning  so/?en  (as  trans,  or  intrans.) 


Sfteifen  show 
SJBcnfccn  turn 

S&cthm  sue 

SESet)>en  become 
Fcr^cn  throw 

SSiegen  weigh 


—  tolled 

ttjanbte 

itjcnbctc 


tpavb  etc. 
tt>atf 


ttJlcfe 

wcnbetc 

tttuvbe 
lv(i¥lie 

tDutfe 
tviivfe 

luogc 


lt>i«ft 


tt»itf 


gcwtc^en 

getviefen 

gewanbt 
gewcnbct 

geuiovlben 

getDOV^en 
getttotrfen 


the  same  word  with  toftgcn  and  swegen :  wlegen  rock  is  of  New  conj. 


gcwogcn 


S&itt^cn  wind  


toant) 


toantt      — -        gclpun^en 


284 


LIST  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


Infinitive. 

pres't  Indic.  sing. 

pret.  indie. 

pret.  Bubj. 

imper. 

past  part. 

st»innm                 —  

only  used  in  gewlnncn  win. 

t\o(tnu 

stvunne 

~ 

det90ttnen 

2Biffen  know 

wei^,  wti^t,  »cl^ 

wu|te 

v>mt 



gcnju^t 

^  "^oaen  will 

roiU,  iDittft,  Witt 

n^ottte 

rcotttc 

gewottt 

3eir)en  accuse 



Sie^ 

jicUc 



flejieftcn 

3i«Jjctt  ^'"O"' 

{m^%  Itn^t) 

300 

S^de 

(aeu(i^) 

flejdgeii 

3tDin0en  .force 



%t»am 

jtt»anfle 



OeslDuttden 

EXERCISES. 


FIRST  SERIES. 


EXERCISE  1. 


AKTICLES  AND  NOUNS  OF  1st  DECLENSION,  1st  CLASa 
[63-65  and  68-80.] 

Vocabulary. 


ber  iBater 

ihefaik&r 

ber  33rubcr 

the  brother 

bie  abutter 

the  mother 

bie  jtoc^ter 

the  daughter 

ber  ?e^rer 

the  teacher 

ber  @d)uler 

the  pupil 

ber  %m 

the  apple 

ber  SSoget 

the  bird 

ber  ©arten 

the  garden 

bag  3in^n^er 

the  romti 

bag  SO^effer 

the  knife 

ber  $?oP 

the  spoon 

bag  ^tofter 

the  cloister,  monastery  bag  ©ebciube 

the  building 

ber  (Sngtcinber 

the  Englishman 

bag  S5og(ein 

the  little  bird 

utib 

and 

bag  3«abc^en 

the  girl 

(Present  tense  of  the  verb 

{)aben  have,  see 

239.) 

1.  ^er  S3ruber  be§  ^aterg.  2.  ^ie  ^od^ter  ber  SD^iitter. 
3.  (Sinen  Server  beg  SOf^dbc^enS.  4.  ^ie  ^ebaube  be§  ^Hofter^. 
5.  ^lelBogtein  beg J^^idbc^eng.  6.  2)er  ^ater  ^t  bie  ^ipfel. 
1.  $at  ber  ©c^iiler  ein  SlReffer?  8.  SDer  Sel^rer  \(\i  bie  SO^effer 
ber  ©driller.  9.  ^er,Sel)rer  ^ai  ein  Bintmer.  10.  ^ag  ^lofter 
!^at  einen  Garten.  11.  ^ie  Wab6)txi  §aben  bie  Wz\\tx  unb  bie 
Soffet.  12.  ^er  S3ruber  ^at  ben  ^(pfel  be§  ©c^iilerg  unb  tia^ 
^effer  be§  ©nglduberg.  13.  S[)ie  SJiutter  :^at  einen  SSoget. 
14.  ^ie  Qimmer  unb  (Smarten  beg  S^lofterg.  15.  $aft  bu  eine 
^oc^ter?  16.  3c^  ^abe  einen  SBater  unb  eine  SJJutter.  It.  S)ie 
©ngldnber  ^aben  ©drten  unb  ©ebaube. 


286  IXERCISES. 

n. 

1.  A  father's  daughter.  2.  To  the  Englishman's  brother 
and  father.  3.  The  mother's  brother.  4  To  the  gardens  of 
the  monastery.  5.  Of  the  birds  of  the  garden.  6.  Of  the 
buildings  of  the  monasteries.  7.  The  knife  and  spoon  of 
the  teacher.  8.  The  little  bird  of  the  pupil.  9.  The  English- 
man's gardens  and  buildings.  10.  The  teachers  of  the  mon- 
astery have  pupils.  11.  I  have  a  brother  and  a  father. 
12.  Have  you  the  apple  ?  13.  The  pupil  has  the  apple  and 
the  Englishman's  knife.  14.  The  pupils  have  apples,  and 
the  teacher  has  the  knife.  15.  I  have  the  girl's  little  birds. 
16.  We  have  the  teacher's  room.  17.  The  monastery  has 
gardens  and  buildings.  18.  We  have  brothers,  mothers,  and 
fathers.  19.  Have  they  the  spoons  ?  20.  The  Englishmen 
have  the  spoons  and  they  have  the  knives. 

EXERCISE  2. 

KOUNS  OF  1st  declension,  2nd  CLASS. 

[81-86.] 

Vocabulary, 


ber  ®o^n 

the  son 

ber  f^reunb 

thefriend 

ber  ©aft 

the  guest 

bie  maQb 

the  maid 

bie  ^anb 

the  hand 

ber  ^u§ 

thefoot 

ber  ^rm 

the  arm 

ber  ®c^u^ 

the  shoe 

ber  S3aum 

the  tree 

bie  l^ruc^t 

thefruit 

U?>  %\)itx  [Zm'\ 

the  animal 

ber  2:{)eil  [^eit] 

the  part' 

ber  5Ro(f 

the  coat 

bie  @tobt 

the  city 

ber  9fJlng 

the  ring 

ber  O^rring 

the  earring 

aber 

hut 

in  (prep.  taMng  ( 

iative)  in 

(Present  tense  of  the  verb  fein  he^  see  239.) 
I. 

1.  ^ie  ^afte  finb  Sreunbe  ber  Wwiitx.  2.  ®er  So^n  ift  ber 
(^aft  beg  greunbeg.  3.  ^ie  greunbe  beg  Se^rerg  finb  ^riiber. 
4.  ®ie  SO^agb  ^at  bie  Siucfe  ber  greimbe.  5.  ®ie  ^f)iere  ^aben 
git^e,  aber  vo'xx  '^aben  §anbe,  5lrme  imb  gii^e.  6.  !^er  ©o^n 
be§  greunbeg  ^at  einen  ^()eil  be§  ^Ipfelg  in  ber*  §anb. 
7.  ^ie  greunbe  finb  in  ber  (Stabt.    8.  ^er  9iing  ift  in  bem  8im=* 

*  See  66.3. 


EXEKCISES. 


m 


mer  ber  SO^dgbe.  9.  SDie  O^rringe  finb  in  ben  §anben  ber  ^oc^* 
ter.  10.  ^er  Garten  beg  ^ater§  ift  in  ber  ©tabt.  11.  Qn  bent 
(Garten  finb  33dnme  nnb  griic^te.  12.  ©inb  bie  (Sc^ul;e  be§ 
@afte§  in  bent  dimmer?  13.  ^ie  Ttag^h  ^at  bie  ©c^n§e  nnb 
D^Dcfe  in  ber  §anb.  14.  ^ift  bn  ber  ©o^n  be§  greunbeg? 
15.  3c^  bin  bie  Wao^h  be§  2e§rer§.  11.  SSir  finb  grennbe  be§ 
^afte§  unb  n)ir  Ijaben  grennbe  in  ber  ©tabt. 

n. 

1.  The  fruits  of  the  trees.  2.  To  the  trees  in  the  gardens. 
3.  To  the  teacher's  friend.  4.  Of  the  shoes  of  the  maids. 
5.  The  animal's  feet.  6.  The  hands  ;  of  the  foot ;  the  arms 
and  the  hands.  7.  A  part  of  the  fruit.  8.  The  guest  of  the 
teacher  is  the  pupil's  friend.  9.  The  son's  friend  is  the 
father's  guest.  10.  The  guests  are  in  the  garden.  11.  In 
the  garden  (there)  are  animals  and  trees.  12.  I  am  a  friend 
of  the  guest.  13.  The  pupils'  coats  and  shoes  are  in  the 
maids'  hands.     14.  The  maids  have  the  daughter's  room. 

15.  The   daughter  has    the   maid's   rings   and   earrings. 

16.  Have  the  animals  hands  and  feet?  17.  The  birds  and 
the  animals  have  feet,  but  we  have  hands,  feet,  and  arms. 
18.  The  trees  are  in  the  city's  gardens.  19.  Art  thou  the 
son's  teacher  ?  20.  I  am  a  friend  of  the  father.  21.  Thou 
art  in  the  garden,  but  we  are  in  the  mother's  room.  22.  The 
pupil's  coat  is  in  the  teacher's  room. 

EXERCISE  3. 

NOUNS  OF  1st  declension,  3ed  CLASS. 

[87-90.] 

Vocabular'i/, 


ber  ^am 

the  man 

ha^  SSclb 

the  woman 

bag  tinb 

the  child 

bag  ^aii8 

the  house 

ha^  S3ud^ 

the  book 

ha^  S3Ub 

the  picture 

ta^  ^elb 

the  field 

tia^  %^ai 

the  valley 

ber  Salb 

iheforest 

ha^  mtih 

the  dress 

ha^  2)orf 

the  village 

bag  S)arf) 

the  roof 

ha^  ?anb 

the  land,  country 

ba^  @c^Io§ 

the  castle 

cin 

one 

gttjei 

two 

brei 

three 

t)ier 

four 

(Present  tense  of  the  verb  gebcn  give,  see  236.2.) 


288  EXERCISES. 


1.  5Da§  2Bet6  tft  bie  Tlntttx  hex  ^tnber.  2.  ^er  Wlam  gtBt 
bem  ^Hnbe*  ein  ^ud^.  3.  ^ie  ^D^dnner  ftnb  in  bent  getbe  unb  bie 
SSeiber  finb  in  ben  |)anfern.  4.  ^a§  §au§  be§  ^ater§  ift  in  bem 
SDorfe.  5.  ®a§  S3ilb  beg  .gaufe^  ift  in  bem  ^ud^e  be§  ^inbe§. 
6.  SDie  ^inber  beg  SDorfeS  finb  imf  SBalbe.  1.  ®eg  greunbeg  §aug 
ift  in  bem  X^ale,  aber  bag  ©d^tog  beg  $8aterg  ift  in  bem  SSalbe. 
8.  §aft  bu  bie  ^ilber  ber  ©c^Ioffer?  9.  Sf^  gebe  ben  ^inbern 
bie  ^ilber.  10.  ^at  ber  Wawn  ein  gelb?  11.  ^ie  brei  gelber 
ht^  SO^anneg  finb  in  bem  ^t)a(e.  12.  2Bir  geben  bem  tinbe  ha§> 
^leib  nnb  bie  (Sd^nt)e.  13.  ©ie  geben  ben  ^dnnern  ^uc^er  nnb 
SBilber.  14.  ^ag  SSeib  f)at  bie  griid^te.  15.  SDer  ^ann  §at  brci 
^inber,  gtDei  (So^ne  unb  eine  3:od^ter. 


n. 

1.  The  castles  and  villages  of  the  country.  2.  To  the 
roofs  of  the  houses  ;  of  the  man's  fields.  3.  Of  the  men's 
clothes.  4.  In  the  woods  and  to  the  valleys  of  the  country. 
5.  Are  the  men  in  the  village  ?  6.  The  women  and  children 
are  in  the  village,  but  the  men  are  in  the  fields.  7.  Are  the 
fields  in  the  valley  ?  8.  The  fields  are  in  the  valleys.  9.  I 
tave  three  houses  in  the  village  and  a  castle  in  the  forest. 
10.  Have  ye  a  picture  of  the  castle  ?  11.  I  have  a  picture 
of  the  village.  12.  Givest  thou  a  book  to  the  child  ?  13.  I 
give  the  children  books  and  pictures.  14.  The  man  gives 
the  women  a  picture  of  the  house  in  the  valley.  15.  We 
give  the  child  two  dresses  and  a  book.  16.  In  the  book  are 
pictures  of  the  castles  of  the  country.  17.  I  have  four 
children,  three  daughters  and  one  son.  18.  The  friend's 
house  is  in  the  city,  but  the  fields  are  in  the  village. 
19.  Art  thou  the  child  of  the  woman  ?  20.  I  am  the  friend 
of  the  woman.  21.  The  child's  dress  is  in  the  woman's 
room.  22.  The  woman  gives  the  child  the  dress  and  the 
shoes. 


222.1a.    t65. 


EXERCISES. 


289 


EXERCISE  4. 

NOUNS  OF  THE  2nd  DECLENSION. 

[91-95.] 

Vocabulary. 


ber  ^ilrfl 

<^e  prince 

bie  giirftin 

the  princess 

ber  @raf 

the  count 

ber  ^mht 

the  boy 

ber  @tubent 

the  student 

ber  Offisier^ 

the  officer 

ber  ©efeae 

the  comrade 

ber  ^reu^e 

the  Prussian 

ber  ^ranjoje 

the  Frenchman 

bie  ^ranjoftn 

the  Frenchwoman 

ber  ^err 

the  gentleman 

ber  ®atte 

the  husband 

bie  ^rau 

the  woman,  wife 

bie  @c^tt)efter 

the  sister 

bie  iBIume 

the  flower 

bie  Ut)r 

the  watch 

nic^t 

not 

(Possessive  pronouns  mein  mine,  bein  thine,  fein  his,  unfer  our,  euer  your, 
it)V  their  or  her,  declined  like  etn  :  see  159.2.) 


1.  ^te  Srau  ift  eine  granjoftn  unb  i^r  (Satte  ift  etn  ^reuge. 
2.  !5)ie  ©D^ne  ber  giirftinnen  finb  Offtgiere.  3.  ©tub  bie  ©tuben* 
ten  beine  greunbe?  4.  Qc^  bin  nid^t  ber  grennb  be§  (Stubenten, 
aber  er  ift  mein  (^efeUe.  5.  2)er  ^ater  be^  S^^naben  ift  ein  (^raf. 
6.  ^er  ^raf  gibt  feinem  (Sot)ne  eine  U§r.  t.  ^d)  gebe  meinen 
©(^n)eftern  jtrei  U^ren.  8.  §aben  bie  granen  Q3(nmen  in  i^ren 
§anben?  9.  ^c^  i)aht  eine  ^lume  in  meiner  §anb,  aber  bie 
granen  ^aben  bie  tinmen  ber  S^^naben.  10.  S<^  ^^^^  ^i^  ^ilber 
ber  giirften  nnb  ber  giirftinnen  be§  Sanbe§.  11.  ^er  SSater  be§ 
Solbaten  ift  Dffigier*.    12.  (Sr  ift  im  ©c^Ioffe  be§  giirften. 

13.  ^ie  gilrften  nnb  ^rafen  finb  feine  grennbe  nnb  ©efellen. 

14.  Tltim  ©o^ne  finb  bie  ©d)iiter  be§  granjofen.    15.  S)ie 
gran5ofen  finb  nid^t  bie  grennbe  ber  ^ren^en. 

^  n. 

1.  The  boy's  father  is  a  count  and  his  mother  is  a  prin- 
cess. 2.  My  companions  are  the  count's  sons.  3.  The 
students  are  Frenchmen,  and  their  companions  are  Prus- 
sians. 4.  My  mother  is  a  sister  of  the  princess.  5.  The 
gentleman's  son  is  an  ofl&cer*.    6.  He  is  a  Prussian,  but  his 

♦  See  66.8.     Offijier  is  1st  decl.,  2f1  p.l«i?s. 


290 


EXERCISES. 


wife  is  a  Frenchwoman.  7.  The  student  gives  his  sisters 
books  and  flowers.  8.  Has  he  your  watch  ?  9.  He  has  the 
officer's  watch.  10.  We  are  Frenchmen,  but  the  Prussians 
are  our  friends  and  companions.  11.  The  student's  friend  is 
the  officer's  son.  12.  The  gentlemen  are  friends  of  the  prince. 
13.  Are  the  women  in  your  house  ?  14  They  are  not  in  my 
house,  they  are  in  their  garden.  15.  Our  maids  are  French- 
women. 


/-^.^ 


/— ' 


EXERCISE  5, 


NOUNS  OP  MIXED  DECLENSION,  PKOPER  NAMES,  ETC. 
[96-108.] 

Vocabulary. 


hex  9^a(^Bar 

the  neighbor 

ber  ^Setter 

the  cousin 

bcr  25octor 

the  doctor 

ber  ^rofe[for 

the  professor 

ber  ''Rame 

the  name 

t>a^  ©tubiurn 

the  study 

bic  ®ef(f|id)te 

the  history 

S)eutjd^tanb 

Oenrmny 

©c^mibt 

Smith 

abutter 

Miller 

^riebrid^" 

Frederick 

Maxi 

Charles 

©o^{)ie 

Sophy 

and} 

also 

ja 

yes 

nein 

no 

ber  ^aufmann 

the  merchant 

bie  ^aufleutc 

the  merchants 

(Present  tense  of  the  verb  Ueben  Zove,  like,  see  236.) 


1.  SleBft  bu  beine  ^a^haxn?  2.  Qi^  Hebe  bie  ^inber  meineS 
S^ad^barS,  aber  \6)  liebe  mehien  D^ac^bar  nic^t.  3.  ^2)ie  ©tubenten 
lieben  i()ren  ^rofeffor,  aber  fie  lieben  i^re  Stubien  md)t.  4.  ^te 
2)octoren  finb  greunbe  beg  §errn  SJiiitter.  5.  ®er  9^ame  beg 
^imben  ift  griebric^.  6.  ^c^  ^^^^^^  ^^^  Seamen  griebricl^  nic^t. 
1.  ^er  ^ater  griebric^g  ift  ein  greuub  beg  ^octorg.  8.  "i^a^ 
^n^  ^arlg  ift  ehie  (Sefc^i^te  SDeutfc^Ianbg.  9.  $evrn 
ai^iiHerg  $aug  ift  in  ber  ©tabt.  10.  Wdm  ^ettern  finb  im 
§anfe  beg  §errn  (Sc^mibt.  11.  §aft  hn  bag  S3nc^  ©opl^ieng? 
12.  3«r  nnb  (Sophie  ^at  nteine  ^iid)er.  13.  Unfere  grennbe  finb 
ntc^t  ^anfknte,  fie  finb  ^rofefforen.  14.  SDie  Seamen  ber  ^ro= 
fefforen  finb  (Si^mibt  nnb  SJiiiCCer. 


EXEECISES. 


291 


n. 

1.  Are  your  cousins  merchants?  2.  No,  but  my  son  is  a 
merchant.  3.  Mr.  Miller's  son  has  Frederick's  book.  4. 
Frederick  is  in  Mr.  Smith's  house.  5.  Charles  gives  his 
brother  a  history  of  Germany.  6.  Charles  is  in  Germany 
with  the  professor's  brother.  7.  Does  Charles  love  his 
studies  ?  8.  He  loves  his  studies  and  his  professors.  9.  My 
neighbor's  name  is  Smith.  10.  Sophy's  father  is  my  cousin, 
and  Sophy  is  my  cousin's  daughter.  11.  The  doctor's  sons 
are  also  doctors.  12.  The  names  of  his  sons  are  Charles 
and  Frederick.  13.  Do  you  like  the  name  of  Charles  ?  14. 
I  love  Charles,  but  I  do  not  love  his  name. 


EXERCISE  6. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  1st  DECLENSION. 

[114-122.] 

Vocabulary, 

fc^on 

heauUful 

^  rot^  [rot] 

red 

bunt 

variegated,  gay                  flein 

little,  smaU 

frlfd^ 

fresh 

arm 

poor 

neu 

new 

liaBtirfi 

ugly 

gut 

good 

xoaxm 

warm 

fleipg 

industrious 

1                      Ueb 

dear 

grofe 

big 

gtiidUcfi 

happy 

griiu 

green 

bie  greube 

pleasure 

blau 

blue 

bie  (SItern 

the  parents 

bie  Wii6) 

the  milk 

bie  Seute 

the  people 

I 

1.  !5)er  Staufmann  ^at  fc^one  ^pfel  unb  bunte  S5Iumen.  2.  SDie 
^inber  liebeu  frifc^e  Wiii).  3.  SDer  Se!)rer  gibt  ben  ©c^iileru 
neue,  fc^one  ^iic^er.  4.  3n  hzn  ^iicl^ern  finb  fc^one,  bunte  ^itber. 
5.  ^ute  ^iuber  finb  bie  greube  \i)xc§>  £ef)rer§.  6.  ©inb  bie 
^iuber  if)reg  ©oljueg  tjiit  unb  fteigig  ?  1.  Qn  bent  Garten  finb 
gro^e,  griine  ^iiume  unb  blaue  unb  rot^e  [rote]  tinmen.  8.  ^d) 
I)abe  blaue  Q3(umen  unb  h\i  ^a]i  rotf)e  [rote].  9.  ^ie  §au[er  armer 
Seute  finb  !(ein  unb  fjcifttic^.  10.  ^ute  grauen  geben  avmen 
Stinbcrn  fcf)bne,  marme  ^(eibcr.  11.  ^ie  (Sttern  guter,  flei^igcr 
^naben  finb  gliic!iic^.  12.  2icbe§  ^inb,  bu  bift  arm,  aber  bu  bift 
gliicftic^.  13.  2)ie  ©tubenten  f)aben  rot^e  [rote]  unb  blaue  diode. 
14.  S)eutfc^laub  ^at  gro^e,  fc^bue  (Stable. 


292 


EXEKCISES. 


n. 

1.  Good,  industrious  children  are  the  joy  of  their  parents. 
2.  The  mother  gives  her  children  warm  fresh  milk.  3.  In 
the  garden  are  beautiful  red  apples  and  little  blue  flowers. 
4.  Poor  little  children  have  ugly  dresses.  5.  The  professor's 
sons  are  big  ugly  boys.  6.  The  child  is  good  and  industri- 
ous. 7.  My  garden  is  large  and  beautiful.  8.  I  have  blue 
and  red  flowers  and  big  apples.  9.  I  give  warm  clothes  and 
red  apples  to  poor  little  children.  10.  The  trees  of  my 
garden  are  large  and  green,  but  my  house  is  small  and 
ugly.  11.  In  the  town  are  beautiful  large  houses  and  green 
trees.  12.  The  teachers  of  industrious,  good  boys  are 
happy.  13.  Good  teachers  love  their  pupils  and  good 
pupils  have  happy  teachers.  14  The  merchants  have  gay 
new  ribbons.  15.  Dear  friend,  you  have  beautiful  good 
daughters.  16.  The  cities  of  Germany  are  large  and  hand- 
some. 17.  My  children  have  good  books  and  gay  pictures. 
18.  Have  you  fresh  milk  ?  19.  I  have  fresh  warm  milk.  20. 
Good  teachers  have  good  pupils. 

EXERCISE  7. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  2nd  DECLENSION. 

[118-128.] 

Vocabulary. 


^od) 

high 

niebrig 

low 

att 

old 

!ronf 

sick 

tt)ei§ 

white 

fcf|  tears 

black 

ebel 

noble 

reidi 

rich 

barm'^erijig 

charitable 

unartig 

naughty 

trage 

lazy 

-  Pbjrf) 

pretty 

gotben 

golden,  gold 

fttbcrn 

silver 

ha^  53rob 

the  bread 

ber  SBein  , 

the  wine 

bie  %a\\t 

the  cup 

felir       - 

very 

(S)iefer  this,  jcncr  that,  declined  like  ber,  see  165.) 


1.  liefer  ^aum  ift  fe^r  f)Ofi).    2.  ®er  ^o^e,  fc^line  33aum  ift 
in  bem  gro^en  Garten  meine§  rcicljcu  9Zac^bar§.    3.  SDiefe  guten, 


EXERCISES.  293 

ftei^igen  ^tnber  finb  bie  ©d^iiter  be§  atten  Sc^rer§,  4  ^d^  c3cbe 
biefem  alten,  franfen  SOhinne  guten,  rotten  $3ein  uiib  iDeigeg 
^rob.  5.  SSir  lieben  bag  luei^e  Q3rob,  aber  tt)ir  Ijaben  imr 
fc^marjeg.  6.  3ft  'i)a§>  IjiiOfd^e  ^inb  imartiG  ?  1.  ^iefeS  Ijubfdje 
93Zabc^eii  ift  unartig  uiib  trdge,  aber  jene  IjdfeUc^en  ^iiiber  finb  gut 
imb  Peifjig.  8.  S)er  (^raf  ift  eiu  ebler  3[Raun ;  er  ift  fet)r  reid)  uub 
l}at  fc^pne,  mj^igiijlDffer,  aber  er  ift  gut  uub  barmljer^ig.  9.  (Seine 
gute_gra3i^3^*b?n  armeu,  franfeu  ^inbern  gute§  ^rob  unb 
luarme  ^Hetbei?.  --i^-^yrc^  §au§  biefe§  alten  90^anne§  ift  eiu  nieb^ 
rige§,  !(eiue§  §au§  in  einer  grofsen,  fc^oueu  (Stabt.  11.  ©r  ift 
fet)r  arm,  aber  er  ^at  gtrtc;  flei^ige  ©ofjue.  12.  !J)iefer  gute  (So^n 
gibt  feiner  armeu  SO^utter  eiu  neu5§,  U)arme§  S^leib  uub  eine 
golbene  Uf)r.  13.  §aben  biefe  armeu  Seute  filberue  Sliffet? 
14.  9^ein,  fie  ijahcn  gute  Soffe(,aber  nic!^t  filberue.  15.  ®er  fleine 
(Sot)u  jeneg  reic^en  ©rafeu  ^at  feine  frifc^e  MM)  in  einer  filber:^ 
nen  ^affe. 


n. 

1.  I  love  these  pretty  little  children.  2.  The  old  father  of 
these  little  children  is  a  poor  sick  man.  3.  My  charitable 
mother  gives  the  poor  man  warm  clothes  and  good  black 
bread.  4.  Do  you  love  this  red  wine  ?  5.  No,  but  I  love  that 
good  fresh  milk.  6.  My  rich  cousin  has  a  very  pretty  house 
in  the  beautiful  valley.  7.  That  high  white  castle  is  the 
castle  of  his  noble  friend.  8.  We  have  a  little  low  house, 
but  our  trees  are  highland  beautiful  and  our  new  garden 
is  very  large.  9.  This  happy  man  has  very  good,  hand- 
some sons.     10.  These  pretty  little  girls  are  his  daughters. 

11.  My  rich  neighbor  has  silver  spoons  and  gold  watches, 
but  his  children  are  naughty  and  lazy  and  he  is  not  happy. 

12.  My  little  son  has  a  silver  cup  and  a  silver  spoon.  13. 
This  pretty  little  girl  gives  her  poor,  sick  brother  her  gay 
pictures  and  her  pretty  books.  14.  My  neighbor's  trees  are 
high  and  beautiful,  but  I  have  a  beautiful  high  tree  in  my 
little  garden.  15.  I  love  the  beautiful  green  forest  and  the 
gay  flowers  and  the  little  birds,  but  I  do  not  love  this  great 
ugly  city. 


294  EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  8. 
ADJECTIVES  USED  AS, SUBSTANTIVES  AND  AS  ADVERBS. 


( 

j;P?:i30.]  1 

V 

-Vocabulary. 

has,  5(ugc 

the  eye 

bo«  §aar 

the  hair 

bag  2)orf 

the  village 

bie  ^utte 

the  hut 

tie  ©d^leife 

the  bow 

fd)Ie(f|t 

bad 

etttjaS 

something 

tiid^tg 

nothing 

ijlel 

much,  many 

gans 

whole,  quite 

bunfel 

dark 

^ctt 

bright,  light 

Ui^« 

left 

rcddt 

right 

hh^ 

pale 

nur 

only 

(Preterit  tense  of  l^aben  have,  see  239.) 


1  '^er  5lrme  ift  ber  ^ruber  be§  Df^eid^en.  2.  ^ie  (^uten  (ieben 
Ott^ '  ^ute,  aber  bie  ©d^led^ten  lieben  nur  ba§  (Sc^Iec^te.  3.  5Die 
(Sd^l^ne  ^atte  eine  jcl^one  rot^e  B^ofe  in  ber  fc^i3nen  §anb.  4. 
§atteft  bu  ein  gan^eS  §au§  ?  5.  9^ein,  aber  ic^  l)atte  brei  gnn^ 
fd)i3ne  gintmer  im  $aufe  meine§  ^ater^.  6.  ®r  giOt  bemStleinen 
ettDii^  (S(i)one§,  aber  er  gibt  bem  ^(ten  nic^t^.  1.  2)iefe  ^nme  ^at 
bunfleg  §aar  unb  bunfelblaue  5tngen.  8.  §at  fie  ein  bunf(e§ 
ober  ein  ^eHeg  ^leib  ?  9.  (Sie  1)at  ein  bun!eIrot()e§  [rote§]  Meib 
mit  blaplauen  (Sd^Ieifen.  10.  ^a§  ^inb  '^atte  ein  ganj  !(eine§ 
SSogtein  in  ber  Sinfen.  11.  ^er  5(rme  ^at  nur  eine  gan^  nicb= 
rige  §iitte,  aber  ber  9^eic!^e  I)at  ein  fc^oneg  ©c^Iofi  unb  biele 
gelber  unb  2)orfer.  12.  SSir  fatten  tiiele*  bunfelrot^e  [rote] 
dlo\tn,  aber  fie  fatten  nur  irei^e. 

n- 

1.  The  rich  and  the  poor  are  brothers.  2.  I  love  good, 
but  they  love  evil.  3.  Has  your  little  brother  dark  eyes  ? 
4  No,  he  has  bright  blue  eyes  and  quite  golden  hair.  5. 
His  coat  is  dark  green,  but  mine  "j"  is  quite  black.  6.  This 
whole  great  building  is  a  monastery.  7.  Had  he  anything 
pretty  in  his  right  hand?  8.  He  had  nothing  new;  he  had 
only  a  pale  blue  flower.    9.  "We  had  many  dark  and  light 

*  See  192.    f  159.5. 


EXERCISES. 


295 


dresses,  but  this  pretty  girl  had  only  wholly  black  dresses. 
10.  The  beauty  has  black  hair  and  dark  blue  eyes.  11. 
The  little  one  is  pretty,  but  he  is  very  naughty.  12.  The 
whole  village  is  very  poor  and  ugly,  but  this  little  hut  is 
quite  pretty,     13.  We  love  the  good  and  the  beautiful. 

EXERCISlfjC) 
COMPAKATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

[133-142.]       \'^*)'\'^^'    \U^  ' 
Vocabulary. 


(Sttgtanb 

England 

(Suro|)a 

Europe 

gran!reid^ 

France 

bie  @(^tt)ei3 

Switzerland 

bic  ?iUe 

the  lUy 

bag  3Seitc^cu 

the  violet 

!tug 

clever 

ftotg 

proud 

alt 

old 

iwng 

young 

m 

sweet 

oft 

often 

nodf  (adv.) 

stm 

al6 

than 

^  1.  5Deine  ^(umen  ftnb  fd^on,  atier  meine  Dftofen  ftnb  nod§  fifjoner. 
2.  ®te  fi^onften  Otofett  finb  in  unferem  (Smarten.  3.  %tx  %xo\  i'ft 
reic^er  al§  ber  ^rofeffor,  aber  ber  ^^aufmann  ift  am  alterreic^ften. 
4.  ^ie  @o^ne  be§  ^rafen  ftnb  fcl^oner  uub  ftoljer  aB  meine 
©b^ne,  aber  meine  (So^ne  finb  nm  beften  unb  am  Hiiijften.  5.  ^Oii 
ber  ^raf  aucf)  jiingere  <Sb()ne  ?  6.  (Sv  I^at  nnr  brei  ©of)ne  ;  ber 
Slltefte  ift  Df filler,  ber  ^iingere  ift  ©tnbent,  aber  ber  Qiingfte  ift 
nocl^  jn  ,§anfe.  Y.  ^Die  3fiofe  ift  fc^oner  al»  bie  Sitie,  aber  \>^^  SSeit:= 
d^en  ift  bie  fd)onfte  ber  331nmen.  8.  ^ie  5lrmen  finb  oft  gliic!licf)er 
at§  bie  3^eic^en,  aber  bie  ^nten  finb  am  at(ergliic!licl)ften.  9.  ^^ie- 
fe§  ayjabc^en  ift  i^iet  btaffer  al§  i^re  ©c^mefter.  10.  3a,  fie  ift 
!ran!,  aber  bie  fleine  ift  noct)  !ran!er.  11.  ©iefer  ^nabe  ift  ^i)c^ft 
unartig,  er  ift  t)iel  fcl^lec'^ter  at§  feine  jiingeren  ^riiber.  12.  ^leine 
^naben  finb  oft  artiger  al§  ditere.  13.  Qd^  liebe  meine  gi^eunbe 
fe^r,  aber  irf)  liebe  am  meiften  *  meine  ^riiber  unb  meine 
©(tern.  14.  grantreic^  ift  !(einer  al§  ^eutfc^lanb,  aber  bie 
©c^meij  ift  \iQi^  !(emfte  Sanb  ($uropa'§.  15.  granfreid)  unb 
^eutfd^tanb  finb  gro^e  unb  reid^e  2dnber,  aber  ^ngtanb  ift  am 
allerreid^ften. 


*See  363.26. 


296  EXERCISES. 

n. 

1.  This  child  is  larger  than  his  brother,  but  Charles  is 
the  largest  2.  Charles  is  better  than  the  older  pupils,  but 
Frederick  is  the  most  industrious  of  the  boys.  3.  These 
younger  boys  are  cleverer  than  the  older  ones.  4  The 
reddest  apples  are  the  prettiest,  but  these  green  apples  are 
sweeter  than  the  red  ones.  5.  These  flowers  are  very  bright 
and  pretty.  6.  Yes;  but  the  pale  red  roses  are  prettier,  and 
these  blue  violets  are  the  prettiest  flowers  in  my  garden. 
7.  The  rose  is  the  most  beautiful  flower,  the  lily  is  the 
proudest;  but  the  violet  is  the  prettiest  of  all.  8.  England 
is  a  smaller  country  than  Germany,  but  the  Englishmen  are 
prouder  and  richer  than  the  Germans.  9.  Is  Switzerland 
larger  than  England?  10.  No;  Switzerland  is  still  smaller 
than  England.  11.  These  poor  children  are  sick  and  un- 
happy, but  the  smallest  one  is  the  most  unhappy.  12.  She 
is  poorer  and  sicker  than  her  brother,  and  she  is  also  the 
youngest.  13.  The  biggest  of  these  girls  is  ugly;  but 
the  younger  is  prettier,  and  the  youngest  is  the  prettiest. 
14.  She  is  quite  beautiful.  15.  We  love  our  friends  more 
than  our  teachers.  16.  I  love  the  rose  more  than  the  lily, 
but  I  love  the  violet  most. 

EXERCISEVIO/ 

PEKSONAL  PKONOUNS. 

[149-156.] 

Vocabulary. 

mlt  (prep,  with  dative)  with  Don  (prep,  with  dative)  of,  from 

bag  @tii(f  the  piece  tie  glajc^e  the  bottle 

(Preterit  tense  of  fein  6e,  239.2.) 

L 

1.  Stebt  btefcgraut^re^inber?  2.  ^a,  fie  liebt  ftc  unb  fie 
Itebett  fie.  3.  ©ie  lieben  S^re  ©o^ne,  ahtx  fie  lieben  ©ie  nid^t. 
4.  (^tbt  3!)nen  3^r  35ruber  bie§  ^u^  ?  5.  9^ein,  meine  ©c^trefter 
gi6t  e§  mir.  6.  §atte  er  bie  geber?  1.  ®r  ^atk  fie  in  ber 
§anb.  8.  SSarft  bu  im  Garten  ?  9.  ^^  wax  mit  i^m  im  (Garten. 

10.  §aben  (Sie  bie  ^ilber  Don  Q^ren  ^inbern  in  biefem  ^nc^c? 

11.  3^  ^abe  fie  barin.  12.  3d)  gebe  fie  Q^nen.  18.  Uaxl,  bu  bift 


EXEKCISES.  297 

ein  fci^tei^ter  ^nabe,  aber  ©opf)ie  unb  griebrid),  i^r  feib  gute 
^inber.  14.  2Bir  fiiib  (Sc^meftern  unb  tDir  lieben  un§.  15.  Sd^ 
gebe  euc^  biefe  gtpei  5ipfel  16.  ©inb  ©ie  fein  ^ruber  ? 
17.  3d)  Un  e§.  18.  $atteft  bu  ben  Soffel?  19.  3c^  ^atte 
xf)n  in  ber  recr)ten  §anb.  20.  ^ibt  er  bir  ein  ©tiicE  bon 
feinem  93robe?  21.  @r  gibt  mir  ein  ©tiic!  babon  nnb  and)  eine 
giafdje  3Sein*.  22.  ®a§  9[)^ab(^en  n)ar  mit  mir  in  ber  ©tabt, 
nnb  i^r  ^rnbcr  n^ar  anc^  mit  nn§.  23.  ®r  tnar  gliidlii^,  nnb 
Wix  rtjaren  e§  au(i).   24.  (S§  n)aren  t)iele  Sente  in  ber  ©tabt. 

n. 

1.  Dost  thou  love  me,  my  brother  ?  2.  I  love  thee  and 
thou  lovest  me.  3.  Does  his  sister  give  him  the  flowers  ? 
/-  4.  She  gives  them  to  him.  5.  Was  your  sister  in  the  garden 
'  too  ?  6.  She  was  with  me  in  the  garden.  7.  Children,  were 
you  good  and  industrious  ?  8.  We  were  so.  9.  I  have  a 
picture  of  you  in  my  book.  10.  No,  it  is  not  in  it;  it  is  in 
my  hand.  11.  This  picture  is  not  a  picture  of  me,  it  is  a 
picture  of  my  mother.  12.  There  were  many  pupils  in  the 
school.  13.  Were  you  a  pupil  of  the  old  man  ?  14.  I  was. 
15.  I  have  a  picture  of  the  Englishman  in  my  room.  16.  I 
was  in  your  room,  but  it  was  not  in  it.  17.  Have  you  the 
apple  ?  18.  I  have  it  and  a  piece  of  bread  also.  19.  Do 
you  love  her  or  me  ?  20.  I  love  her,  but  I  do  not  love  you. 
21.  Your  friends  love  you  and  you  love  them,  but  I  do  not 
love  you.  22.  I  have  your  pen  and  I  give  it  to  you.  23. 
Were  these  boys  with  you  in  the  monastery?  24.  They 
were  with  us,  but  we  do  not  love  them.  25.  Have  you  the 
bottle  of  wine  in  your  hand  ?  26.  I  have  it  in  it.  27.  That 
girl  has  my  ring.  28.  No,  she  hasn't  it ;  your  brother  has  it. 

EXERCISE  11. 
POSSESSIVE  AND  DEMONSTEATIVE  PEONOUNS. 

[157-171.] 

Vocabulary, 
hex  Ol^cim        Ihe  uncle  ber  S5ormunb        the  guardmn 

ble  Xantt         the  aunt  baS  jttjeater  the  theatre 

bag  ^ferb         ihe  horse  ber  ^unb  the  dog 

ber  S3rief         the  letter  ha^  ^piti  the  game 

*  2ie.5a. 


298 


1.  6tnb  bte  SDlcintier  Sreunbe  t)on  Q^nen?  2.  ®er  tft  mein 
Ofjeim,  unb  jener  ift  rnetn  ^ormunb.  3.  ©inb  biefe  jtuei  ^ferbe 
bie  feinigen  ?  4.  ®a§  ift  mein  ^ferb,  aber  jeneg  tft  ein  ^ferb  beg 
$errn  ©d)mibt.  5.  ©ein  ^ferb  ift  grofser  ai§>  ba§  meinige,  aber 
bag  3§rige  ift  am  grogten.  6.  SSaren  ©ie  in  ber  ©tabt  ?  1.  ^c^ 
tt)ar  in  Berlin  mit  bent  (S^rafen  unb  einent  greunbe  beffelben. 
8.  ©eine  greunbe  finb  nic^t  bie  nteinigen.  9.  SSir  maren  im 
^^eater  mit  feiner  ^ante  unb  beren  ^itbfc^er  ^^oi^ter.  10.  !5)a§ 
ift  ein  fc^bneg  ^^eater.  11.  Unfere  S^inber  unb  bie  unfereg  ^ad^^ 
barg  finb  ©(filler  ieneg  Tlanm^.  12.  Tldm  ^inber  finb  bie 
greunbe  ber  feinigen.  13.  (Sie  finb  in  berfelben  ©c^ute  unb  ^aOen 
immer  biefelben  ^iic^er  unb  biefelben  ©tnbien.  14.  Wnn  §unb 
unb  ber  meineg  D^eimg  raaren  mit  mir  im  SSalbe.  15.  SD^einer  tvav 
gan§  unartig,  aber  ber  feinige  ift  ein  ()iibfrf)er,  artiger  $unb. 
16.  ©inb  bie  ^tnei  ^riefe  bein  ?  17.  ^er  ift  mein,  aber  jener  ift 
ber  beinige.   18.  SDag^inb  bie  ^riefe  meineg  D^eimg. 


n. 

1.  Were  you  in  Berlin  with  your  brother  ?  2.  I  was  in 
BerHn  with  my  friends  and  those  of  my  brother.  3.  Our 
friends  are  always  the  same.  4.  I  love  his  and  he  loves 
mine.  5.  Is  this  your  dog  or  that  of  your  uncle  ?  6.  My 
uncle's  dog  is  much  handsomer  than  that.  7.  Had  you  your 
horses  or  your  guardian's  ?  8.  We  had  my  guardian's,  his  are 
much  better  than  ours.  9.  This  is  my  horse,  but  that  is  my 
brother's.  10.  This  boy  was  in  the  forest  with  our  neighbor 
and  his  son.  11.  He  (that  one)  is  a  pretty  little  boy.  12. 
Have  you  my  letter  or  my  aunt's?  13.  I  have  our  letter 
and  yours  and  hers.  14.  I  give  you  them.  15.  That  is  his, 
but  I  have  also  a  letter  from  my  mother.  16.  I  have  a  pic- 
ture of  her  (the  same).  17.  I  do  not  like  dogs.  18.  Yours 
are  bad,  but  your  uncle's  are  the  worst. 


^  It,!,  Yll 


J'^-O^ 


(oaJ-j^)  exeecises.  299 


EXERCISE  12. 
mrEEROGATIVE,  RELATIVE,  AND  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


/ 

[172-195.1\ 

Vocabulary, 

geftern 

ber  abater 
ber  ^aijer 
®ott 

yesterday 

now 

the  painter 

the  Emperor 

Ood 

^eute 

berii^mt 

bag  ®etb 

ha^  S^atl^auS  [9tat^aug] 

ta^  portrait* 

to-day 
famous 
the  money 
1  the  town-hall 
the  portrait 

1.  2Ber  ift  btefer  $0?ann?  2.  ©r  ift  berfetbe,t  ber  geftern  ^ter 
ttjar.  3.  SSem  gebeu  ©ie  ben  ^^rief ,  '^tw  ©ie  in  ber  §anb  IjaBen  ? 
4.  3c^  gebe  i^n  bemienigen,  ben  ic^  am  meiften  Hebe.  5.  SSer 
!ein  (S^elb  ^ai,  ift  gtiicflic^er  aB  berjenige,  ber  feine  greunbe  %at 
6.  SDer,  ber  mic^  nic^t  liebt,  ift  nic^t  mein  greunb.  T.  SSa§  fiir 
ein  Wamx  ift  fein  ®aft?  8.  (£r  ift  ein  jnnger  WoXtx,  beffen 
^ilber  fe^r  beriif)mt  finb.  9.  ©inb  feine  ^ilber  fdjbner  aB  bie 
be§  altcn  Waltx^,  ber  geftern  ^ier  xoax  ?  10.  2)er  ift  anc^  ein 
beriif)mter  Wa\tx,  aber  ber  fiingere  ift  am  beriif^mteften.  11. 
2BeIcf)e  ^ilber  finb  Don  Sfjrem  grennbe  ?  12.  ^a§  portrait  be§ 
^aifer§,  inelc^eg  im  9^atr)^au§  ift,  ift  Doni^m.  13.  SSelc^  ein 
fc[)one§  Q3ilb  !  14.  SSeffen  finb  biefe  ^ferbe  ?  15.  (5^  finb  bie 
^ferbe  be§  jnngen  Dffi^ier^,  ber  je^t  in  nnferem  §anfe  ift. 
16.  28er  foIcl}e  ^ferbe  f)at,  ift  ein  ^Uic!lic!)er.  IT.  SSer  gtbt  nn§ 
a((e§,  mag  \mx  \)(\im\  ?  18.  SE)er  gnte  ©ott  gibt  un§  a((e§,  n)a§  unr 
^aben.  19.  (Sibt  bcin  ^ormnnb  bir  ettna§(Sd)bne§?  20.  ©r  gibt 
mir  immer  tiiele  fdjone  (Sad[)en,  aber  er  gibt  mir  '^eute  nid^t^ 
9^eue§. 

n. 

1.  From  whom  is  this  letter  ?  2.  The  letter  which  you 
have  in  your  hand  is  from  my  sister  who  is  now  in 
Germany.  3.  In -which  city  is  she  ?  4.  She  is  in  the  same 
city  in  which  I  was.  5.  Whom  do  you  love?  6.  I  love 
those  who  love  me  and  who  are  my  friends.     7.  He  who 

*  Pronounced,  and  often  written,  ^^ortriit.    f  434.    437« 


300 


EXEKCISES. 


has  no  friends  is  unhappy.  8.  Whose  horses  have  you  ? 
9.  I  have  the  horses  of  my  uncle  who  is  now  sick.  10.  He 
is  at  the  house  of  the  doctor  whose  best  friend  he  is. 
11.  What  sort  of  pictures  have  you  in  your  book  ?  12.  That 
is  a  picture  of  the  painter  whose  portraits  are  so  famous, 
and  this  is  a  picture  of  our  good  Emperor  whom  we  love 
so  much.  13.  What  a  pretty  book!  14  Whoever  has 
money   gives  something  to  the  poor  who  have  nothing. 

15.  This  good  man  gives  all  he  has  to  the  poor  and  sick. 

16.  What  does  he  give  them?  17.  He  gives  them  warm 
clothes  which  rich  people  give  to  him.  18.  He  who  has  no 
friends  is  more  unhappy  than  he  who  has  no  money. 
19.  Those  who  do  not  love  me  are  not  my  friends.  20.  Whose 
children  are  we?  21.  We  are  the  children  of  God,  who 
loves  us  and  who  gives  us  all  we  have.  22.  Some  have 
much  money  and  some  have  no  money.  23.  Several  of  my 
friends  were  in  our  house  to-day.  24.  We  have  many  fine 
pictures  in  our  town-hall,  but  the  portrait  of  the  Emperor 
is  the  finest. 


EXERCISE  13. 

CAKDINAL  AND  OKDINAL  NUMEEALS. 

[196-203.] 

Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^ag  the  day 

ba§  3a^r  the  year 

bie  3JJinute  the  minute 

bic  SBod^e  the  week 

3anuar  January 

9Rar5  March 

9Jfai  May 

3uli  July 

(September  September 

9'Jot)ember  November 

bie  9Jiar!  warfc  (coin  worth  24  cts.) 


ber  Wonat 

the  month 

bie  @tunbe 

the  hour 

ber  @eburt«tag 

the  birthday 

bie  53ibUott|e! 

the  library 

?^ebruar 

February 

5tt)rit 

April 

3uni 

June 

STuguft 

August 

October 

October 

2)ecember 

December 

1.   §eute  tft  ber  fiinf  unb  ^mangigfte  Wcix^,  Ci^i^^f)n  ^unbett 
fteben  unb  ac^tjig.    2.  SDa§  Sn^r  ^nt  12  Womtt,  ieber  Womi 


EXERCISES.  301 

^ai  30  ober  81  ^age,  jeber  Xac^  Ijat  24  (Stunben,  itnb  jebe  (Shmbc 
i)at  60  ar^iuuten.  3.  Wdx^^  ift  ber  britte  monai  be§  3a[)re^. 
4,  ■  efterii  iDiir  ber  16te  3:at3  b,e§  9teii  9[)toiiat§  be§  25fteu  3al)re§ 
meineg  Sebeiig.  5.  9[)?ein  (^etuirt^tag  ift  ben  9teu  gebruar, 
ber  beine  ift  ben  29ften  ^^(ut3uft.  6.  SSie  uiele  ^iid)er  ^aben  ©ie 
in  ^i)XQX  ^ib(iot()e!  ?  7.  ^d)  ijahc  ungefdftr  2450  S^iic^er,  aber 
ntein  Oljeim  ^at  t)iele  3:anfenb  ^iicl^er  in  feiner  ^ibliot^e!. 
8.  SSir  finb  brei  ^riiber,  ^Boijut  eine§  ^ater§,  ber  erfte  ift  20 
Sa^re  alt,  ber  2te  ift  18  3al)re  nit,  ber  3te  ift  in  feinem  16ten 
3a^re.  9.  SSir  maren  ben  25ften  Quli  1878  mit  unferen  10  ^in^^ 
bern  in  Berlin.  10.  ^ie  brei  alteften  ber  Sl^inber  finb  ^naben, 
\)a§>  t)ierte  unb  fiinfte  finb  ^IRcibcl^en,  nnb  bie  fiinf  anberen  finb 
nnc^  ©o^ne.  11.  ®er  ^eic^e  ^at  1,000,000  maxl*  aber  fein 
armer  9^acf)bar  t)at  fein  (S^elb. 

n. 

1.  Yesterday  was  the  16th  of  July,  1887.  2.  Was  yester- 
day your  birthday?  3.  No,  my  birthday  is  the  19th  of 
November,  and  my  sister's  birthday  is  the  6th  of  February. 
4.  I  have  three  sisters,  the  first  is  25  years  old,  the  second 
is  22,  and  the  third  is  in  her  20th  year.  5.  June  is  the  6th 
month  of  the  year.  6.  The  year  has  12  months,  52  weeks, 
and  365  days.  7.  The  Emperor's  birthday  was  the  22nd  of 
March.  8.  He  is  90  years  old,  and  his  son  is  48.  9.  In  the 
city's  library  are  52,973  books.  10.  Have  you  much  money? 
I  had  many  thousand  marks,  but  now  I  have  only  57  marks. 

11.  My  guardian  is  very  rich  ;   he   has  5,787,320  marks. 

12.  Whose  are  these  seven  children?  13.  Two  are  my 
brother's  children,  and  the  other  five  are  mine.  14.  July  4th, 
1776.   15.  Oct.  17th,  1519. 

EXERCISE  14. 

SIMPLE  FORMS  OF  VERBS. 

[231-237.] 

Vocabulary, 
like  Uebcn  conjugate  :  like  geben  conjugate : 

njo^ncn  dwell,  live  fel^en  see 

malen  paint  lefcn  read 


*  211.2. 


3(^2  EXERCISES. 

faufcn  hay  fru^er        formerly 

njiinfcl^cn        vyish,  ward  ber  ^ut      the  hat 

toeit  (conj.),    becaiise  alS  (conj.),  when 
(See  386.46,  434.) 


1.  SSer  gab  gotten  ha^  SBuc^  ?  2.  Qdi  gab  e§  i^tn,  trett  id)  i^n 
liebte.  3.  SSo  tDoI)nen  3§re  greunbe  ?  4.  (Sie  mo^nten  frii^er  in 
ber  ©tabt,  aber  fie  tDo^nen  je^t  l^ier  im  SSalbe.  5.  2Ba§  fauftc 
bie  grau,  al§  ber  S^aufmann  ^ier  wax  ?  6.  ©ie  !aufte  9ftocfe  unb 
§iite  fiir  i^re  ^^inber.  1.  2Sa§  fiir  ein  S3uc^  lefen  ©ie  ?  8.  (Sr 
liegt  eine  ^efc^ic^te  Don  2)eutfd£)Ianb.  9.  ®ib  fie  mir,  icl^  lefe  fie 
aud^.  10.  2Sa§  fagte  er,  al§  (Sie  e§  i^m  gaben?  11.  (Sr  fagte 
nic^tg,  tueit  ic^  if)n  nic^t  fa§.  12.  2Sa§  fie^ft  bu,  ge(iebte§  ^nb? 
13.  3d§  fe^e  jtDei  fcljon  gemalte  ^ilber.  14.  2Ser  malte  ha§>  '^ox^ 
trait  Don  S^^^itt  Skater?  15.  !5)er  junge  93laler,  ber  in  nnferem 
§aufe  tvo^nt,  malte  e§.  16.  (Sage  mir  \va§^  bu  miinfi^eft,  unb  id^ 
gebe  e§  bir.  IT.  ^ib  mir  nid^t§,  id)  ^abe  aEe^  tva^  id^  tt)iinfrf)e. 
18.  SSa§  fur  ein  ^ilb  malten  ©ie  ?  19.  3d^  malte  ein  ^ilb  \)on 
bem  §aufe  ujorin  id^  Wo^m, 

n. 

1.  Love  me  because  I  love  you.  2.  Why  did  you  give  her 
your  picture  ?    3.   I  gave  it  to  her  because  she  loved  me. 

4.  What  did  you  say  to  the  merchant  when  you  saw  him  ? 

5.  We  bought  books  and  pictures.  6.  What  sort  of  books 
are  you  reading  ?  7.  I  am  reading  the  history  which  my 
uncle  gave  me.  8.  Eead  it  and  give  it  to  me.  9.  This 
painter  lived  seven  years  in  Berlin,  but  now  he  lives  in  our 
city.  10.  He  paints  very  beautiful  pictures.  11.  He  painted 
the  portrait  of  the  Emperor  which  you  saw  in  Berlin. 
12.  This  rich  man  bought  the  j^icture  which  I  saw.  13.  We 
saw  the  Emperor  the  15th  of  February  1879,  when  we  were 
in  Berlin.  14.  What  did  he  want  ?  15.  He  wanted  nothing 
more,  he  bought  all  he  wanted.  16.  I  am  cold  because  I 
have  no  hat.  17.  Buy  a  hat  while  the  merchant  is  here. 
18.  I  do  not  buy  a  hat  because  I  have  no  money.    19.  Give 


EXEKCISES. 


303 


me  money.  20.  I  have  three  loved  and  loving  daughters. 
21.  Thou  mayest  love,  he  may  live,  you  might  paint,  he 
might  see,  we  may  read,  give,  he  might  buy,  we  might 
see,  you  may  paint. 

EXERCISE  15. 
SIMPLE  AND  COMPOUND  POEMS  OP  THE  AUXILIAEIES. 


[238-244.] 
Vocabulary. 


ber  ©cnerat 

the  general 

ber  ®otbat 

the  soldier 

ber  ^ru^Ung 

the  spring 

ber  ^erbft 

autumn 

ber  @ommer 

summer 

ber  SBinter 

winter 

blc  3a^re§5eit 

the  season 

ha^  better 

the  weather 

fatt 

cold 

^eiB 

hot 

fu^t 

cool 

3ufrieben 

contented 

tobt  [tot] 

dead 

njenn,  conj. 

if,  when 

JU,  adv. 

too 

gu,prep.  (with  dative  or  inf 

1.  S)tefe  ^inber  ttiurben  fran!,  tnetl  fie  feine  tDarmen  f^Ieiber 
l^atten.  2.  (jDa§  SSetter  ttiirb  je^t  fii^tejJMub  bie  ^inber  merben 
gefunb.  3.  ^nt  @ommer  ift  ha§>  SSetter  fel^r  ^ei^,  aber  tm  Qtxh]t 
tDirb  e§  !uf)tcr,  imb  tm  SSinter  ift  e§  am  aderfalteften.  4.  ®er 
Srii^ting  ift  feljr  fc()on  gemefen,  aber  ber  ©ommer  ift  bie  fcl^onfte 
Sal^re^jeit.  5.  3Barum  ift  ber  alte  Tlann  fo  berut;mt  ?  6.  @r  ift 
berii'^mt,  iueit  er  ein  grower  (General  gelDefen  ift.  1.  ^d)  tv'dxt* 
and}  <SoIbnt  gelDorben,  iDeiuif  ic^  nic^t  !ranf  getrefeu  wave.  8.  ®er 
arme  Slnahc  Uiarb  immer  frdnfer,  imb  er  ift  je^t  tobt  [tot].  9.  ^d) 
ijahc  tiiele  grcimbe  geljabt,  ader  bu  bift  mein  befter  greunb,  10. 
!5)er  alte  d)laUv  I)at  biele  greunbe  iinb  33e!amite  gel^abt,  al§  er  reic§ 
imb  beriif)mt  mar.  11.  Sejjt  ^ai  er  feine  Sreunbe,  tt)ei(  er  arm 
geUHirbeii  ift.  12.  (£§  ift  gut  reid)  511  fein,  aber  e§  ift  beffer  gute 
greunbe  gu  ^aben.    13.  (Set  gut  unb  bu  tt)irft  gliidlic^  feiu. 

14.  !J)u  bift  !(eiu,  meiu  ^tiub,  aber  bu  mirft  jeben  ^ag  gri3ger. 

15.  ^er  S3ater  be§  ^uabeu  ift  eiu  reidjer  ^ann  getuefeu,  unb 
biefer  J  Uilrb  t)iel  ^elb  ijaimi,  ineuii  er  citter  ift.  16.  (5ie  ioer- 
hQU  morgeu  fec^^  5D^ouate  in  !ti3er  in  geiuefeu  feiu. 

*332.1.    t386.4/.    434.     tl66.1. 


304  EXEBCISES. 

n. 

1.  Tou  were,  they  became,  she  miglit  have,  we  had,  they 
might  become,  we  may  have  been,  had  you  had?  they  had 
become,  we  shall  be,  we  should  have  had,  you  shall  have 
been,  he  shall  be,  she  had  had,  I  have  been,  thou  mightest 
have  been,  we  may  have  had,  to  have  had,  to  have  been,  to 
have  become.  2.  Be  diligent,  become  good,  have  all  that  you 
want.  3.  It  becomes  warmer  in  the  spring.  4.  We  were  too 
hot  in  summer*  and  we  are  too  cold  in  winter.  5.  We  have 
had  beautiful  weather  to-day,  but  to-morrow  will  be  more 
beautiful.  6.  If  I  were  rich,  I  should  be  happy.  7.  Be  diligent 
ftnd  good,  and  you  will  become  rich  and  happy.  8.  I  have 
been  very  happy,  but  I  am  become  poor  and  old,  and  I  have 
no  friends.  9.  I  shall  have  been  happy  if  you  have  been 
my  friend.  10.  Why  did  this  man  become  so  rich  ?  11.  He 
has  been  a  poor  soldier,  but  he  became  a  famous  general. 

12.  His  sons  will  also  be  soldiers  when  they  are  older. 

13.  He  would  have  been  happier  if  he  had  had  a  son. 

14.  It  is  good  to  be  a  famous  general,  but  it  is  better  to  be 
a  good  man.  15.  It  is  good  to  have  money,  but  it  is  better 
to  have  good  friends.  16.  The  children  would  be  happy  if 
they  had  warm  clothes.  17.  The  weather  becomes  warmer 
every  day. 

.Ok  EXERCISE  lie. ) 

VERBS  OF  THE  NEW  CONJUGATION. 
[245-250.] 


y^^ 


le^ren     teach 

lerncn      learn 

fc^tdeti    send 

f^ielen      play 

reben      talk    U  a.  b  ^ 

i)oxtn        hear 

fagen      say,  tell 

lob  en       praise 

ieBen       live   ^s  ^- .  v. 

reifen       journey,  go  by  travelling 

arbeiten  toork 

geigeit       show 

foufen      buy 

bring  en    bring 

fennen     know  (be  acquainted  with) 

ntorgen    to-morrow 

bort        there,  yonder 

lange,  adv.  long 

*e6M. 


EXEBCISES.  305 

(L  §a6en  bte  ^tnber  gut  gearBettet?  2.  !5)er  Secret  to6t  fie, 
iSeu  fie  gut  arbeiteu.  3.  @r  ^at  fie  alle§  gete^rt  U)a§  fie  geterut 
fjabeu.  4.  ^(i)  lobe  \^n,  meil  er  bie  .^Tiuber  f o  bieleg  gele^rt  Ijat. 
5.  SDie  ^iuber  tnerbeu  im  (^arteu  fpieleu,  tvtnn  fie  jmei  ©tunbeu 
gearbeitet  ^abeu.  6.  ©age  mir,  tt)ag  bir  §err  (Sd)mibt  gefagt  ^at. 
t.  3c^  rebete  lauge  mit  it)m,  uub  er  lobte  meiueu  gutcu  ^Setter, 
ber  uacf)  5(meri!a  gereift  ift.  8.  S)er  reifte  uacl)  5(meri!a,  U)etl  er 
fo  arm  tuar,  aber  er  I}at  Diet  gearbeitet,  uub  er  ift  jet^t  reic^  ge= 
IDorben.  9.  @r  '^at  eiu  grofee^  $au§  gefauft  uub  iDirb  iu  5(meri!a 
leben.  10.  ®r  fjai  feiuem  better  eiu  ^ilb  baijou  gefc^ic!t,  luelc^eg 
er  mir  gejeigt  I)at.  11.  (Sr  Ijtitte  e§  bir  gejeigt,  iueuu  bu  bort 
gemefeu  mareft.  12.  §orteu  ©ie  ma§  ber  ^rofeffor  fagte? 
13.  kx  ^ai  bie  33ilber  gelobt,  bie  ic^  i§m  gejeigt  I)abe.  14.  @r 
liebt  auc^  bie  fc^oueu  ^ilbcr,  uub  I)at  t^iete  babou  gefauft,  at§  er 
uac^  $ari§  reifte.  15.  3eigcu  ©ie  i()m  auc^  meiue  ^iid)er,  uub 
fageu  ©ie  mir,  \m§>  er  baDou  beuft.  16.  ^r  ^itt  bie  ^43itc^cr 
gelobt,  tuenu  er  fie  getauut  I)atte.  17.  Qc^  feuue  beu  ^rofeffor 
uic^t.  18.  2Ba§  brad)te  er  bir  gefteru?  19.  (^t  ^at  mir  uicf)t§ 
gebrac^t,  aber  er  mirb  mir  morgeu  etma§  ©c^bueg  briugeu. 
20.  ^r  fauute  meiue  ©Iteru,  al§  fie  iu  ^erliu  lebten, 


n. 

1.  What  did  you  buy  when  you  were  in  the  city  ?  2.  I 
bought  books  and  sent  them  to  my  uncle.  3.  Have  you 
read  the  books  which  you  bought  ?  4.  I  had  read  many 
of  the  books,  and  I  shall  have  read  them  all.  5.  Did  the 
professor  teach  you  much  ?  6.  He  taught  me  all  that  I 
have  learned.  7.  Have  you  talked  with  him  ?  8,  No,  but  I 
heard  all  he  said.  9.  The  professor  had  travelled  much 
and  he  bought  many  books  and  pictures.  10.  He  has 
showed  me  his  whole  library,  and  he  told  me  where  he 
bought  the  books.  11.  He  would  not  have  journeyed  to 
Paris  if  he  had  not  been  rich.  12.  Did  you  hear  what  the  -^ 
children  said  when  they  where  playing  in  the  garden  ?/^ 
13.  They  had  played  in  the  garden,  but  they  were  working 
when  I  was  in  the  garden.     14.   Show  them  the  pictures 

i 


306  EXERCISES. 

which  your  brother  brought  you.  15.  When  they  have 
worked  two  hours  I  will  show  them  the  pictures.  16.  He 
talked  with  the  children,  and  showed  them  pictures  of  the 
country  in  which  she  had  lived.  17.  Tell  me  with  whom 
you  have  talked.  18.  We  were  talking  with  Mr.  Smith,  but 
he  said  nothing.  19.  I  know  him,  but  I  do  not  like  him. 
20.  It  is  better  to  work  than  to  talk.  21.  I  shall  bring  you 
a  new  book  to-morrow. 


EXERCISE  17. 

MODAL   AUXILIARIEa 

[251-260.] 

I. 

1.  SSittft  bu  na^  $ari§  ?  2.  ^^  ntoc^te  na^  ^ari§  retfen, 
aber  id^  fann  e§  nic^t.  3.  2Btr  fonnten  nic^t  nac^  ^arig,  tueil  tt)ir 
nacf)  33erlin  l)aben  reifen  miiffen.  4.  Qc^  mag  ni(i)t  a((em  reifen, 
aber  ic^  tperbe  e§  je^t  miiffen.  5.  2Ba§  !)at  er  bem  9}Zanne 
gefagt?  6.  (Sr  burfte  nic^t  mit  i^m  reben,  tueil  er  eiii  fc^Iecl^ter 
Mann  fein  foil.  Y.  3d)  foUte  mit  i^m  reben,  aber  id^  i)aht  e§ 
nid^t  getnollt.  8.  (5r  foil  noc^  fjkx  fein,  man  mill  i^n  gefe^en 
l^aben.  9.  S^onnen  bie  Slinber  2)entfc^  ?  10.  ^d)  l)abe  e§  il)nen 
geleljrt,  aber  fie  mogen  e§  nicl)t.  11.  (Sie  miiffen  arbeiten,  n^enn 
fie  lernen  mollen.  12.  Tlan  fann  alle§  \va^  man  mill.  13.  ^a§ 
9Jiabd^en  ^ai  nic^t  fpielen  !i3nnen,  meil  e§  l)at  arbeiten  miiffen. 
14.  SDie  ^inber  biirfen  nic^t  reben,  fie  follen  arbeiten.  15.  ^arf 
tc^  fpielen  ?  16.  dlt'm,  mein  ^inb,  bn  follft  jet^t  arbeiten,  aber 
bu  tt)irft  fpciter  fpielen  !i3nnen.  17.  ©r  Wu\^tt  nicljt  Wa§>  er  nn§ 
fagen  follte.  18.  ^c^  foil  ha§>  ^ud)  lefen  nub  id)  mag  e^nic^t. 
19.  SSir  mu^ten  bie  fc^onen  Spfel  faufen,  al^  ber  ^^aufmann  fie 
mir  geigte. 

n. 

1.  Why  do  you  go  toBerlin?__2.  I  am  obliged  to  go  to-^^^^^ 
Berlin,  but  I  should  like  to  goto  Paris.   3.  I  do  not  likeTo 
travel.     4.   These   poor   children   cannot  learn   anything, 
because  they  have  to  work.   5.  They  want  to  learn  German, 


EXERCISES. 


307 


but  they  cannot.  6.  We  should  like  to  give  them  some 
money.  7.  This  boy  is  said  to  be  very  lazy ;  he  is  not  to 
play  in  the  garden,  because  he  was  not  willing  to  work. 
8.  He  played  when  he  should  have  worked,  and  he  must 
now  work  when  he  might  have  played.  9.  Do  they  know 
what  he  said  ?  10.  They  do  not  know  it,  because  they  could 
not  hear  him.  11.  We  had  to  live  in  the  town,  but  we  shall 
now  be  able  to  live  here.  12.  I  am  to  show  you  the  book 
which  you  are  to  read.  13.  May  I  show  it  to  the  children? 
14.  No,  you  must  not  show  it  to  them,  because  they  ought 
not  to  see  it.  15.  I  wanted  to  show  it  to  him,  because  he 
knows  German.  16.  He  would  have  been  able  to  read  it. 
17.  You  ought  not  to  have  read  the  book.  18.  I  could  not 
but  read  it,  it  was  so  pretty.  19.  One  must  not  read  every- 
thing that  one  wishes.  20.  The  child  claims  to  have  read 
the  book,  but  she  could  not  (do  it).  21.  Do  you  know  what 
she  wanted  to  say  to  him  ?  22.  1  know  it,  but  I  may  not  say 
it  to  you.  23.  Children,  you  must  be  very  industrious. 
24.  You  do  not  like  to  learn,  but  you  will  be  obliged  (to 
do  it). 


EXERCISE  18. 

VEKBS  OF  THE  OLD  CONJUGATION. 

[261-273.] 

Vocabulary, 


laufen 

fommen 

fpred)cn 

brec^en 

triufen 

fingen 

geuug 

ber  %iVitx 


run 

come 

speak 

break 

drink 

sing 

enough 

the  plate 


foUcn 

get)en 

riifen 

binbcu 

finben 

beigcn 

tiie 

bag  Jieb 


1.  SSa§  fiir  Sieber  ^aljcn  Siei  ge 


faU 

go 

call 

bind 

find 

bite 

never 

the 


song 


mgen  ? 


2.   2Bir  fatigeu  bte 


gfs^ 


arum 


£ieber,  bie  vo'xx  in  bie[em  a  (ten  !iWc()^  gcfnnben  ()aben.    3. 
fingen  3^re  (Scf)mefternnid)t?   4.  ®t^-^"inb  nocf)  nic^t  gefommen, 
unb  fie  fonnen  nid^t  fingen.  5.  SBariQrUef  \>a^  £inb,  al^  xoxt  e^ 


308  EXERCISES. 

fallen?  6.  (S§  tft  gelaufen,  lueil  bcr  §unb  e§  gebtffen  '^at. 
T.  SSerben  <Sie  ben  §unb  nid^t  fc^lagen  ?  8.  9^em,  er  bi^  haa 
^'uxh,  meit  e§  i^n  jc^Iug.  9.  ©r  beifet  nur  bie  Stiuber, 
njeld^e  if;n  gefc^Iagen  ^aben.  10.  Sf^ufen  (Sie  ben  S^naben  nnb 
binben  ©ie  i^m  bie  §anb,  bie  ber  §mib  gebiffen  ^cit  11.  5DZein 
^inb,  iDa§  f)aft  bn  getr)an  ?  12.  Qcf)  ^abe  ben  teller  gebrod^en, 
ben  mir  bie  Sc^mefter  ^ah.  13.  SBie  f)a]t  bu  il)n  gebroc^en? 
14.  Qc^  ftel,  nnb  ber  better  brad^.  15.  !J)n  mcireft  nic^t  gef alien, 
inenn  bn  nic^t  gelanfen  i)attt\t  16.  SSarnm  famen  ©ie  nic^t,  nl§ 
id)  ©ic  rief  ?  17.  ^cl^  fprnd^  mit  meinem  better  nnb  fonnte  nic^t 
fommen.  18.  ®r  fommtnie,  menn  man  i^n  rnft.  19.  ganb  beine 
(Sc^tnefter  i[)re  ^ante,  al§  fie  nad^  Berlin  ging?  20.  ©ie  ift  ni^t 
nad)  Devlin  gegangen,  aber  bie  ^ante  tDirb  ^u  un§  fommen. 

n. 

1.  Have  you  called  the  dog  ?  2.  I  called  him,  but  he 
did  not  come.  3.  Why  do  you  call  him?  4.  I  shall 
strike  him,  because  he  has  bitten  the  little  girl.  5.  She  fell 
and  he  bit  her.  6.  Does  he  always  bite  the  children  ?  9.  Yes, 
he  is  a  bad  dog  ;  I  have  not  beaten  him  enough.  8.  The 
boys  fel^down  when  they  were,.goi»g  to  schooL*  9.  They 
fell  because  they  always  run.  10.  Children,  do  not  run.  j 
11.  Where  are  the  plates?  12.  The  maids  have  broken 
them.  13.  Plates  always  break  when  they  fall.  14.  Have 
you  found  your  knife  ?  15.  I  found  it  in  your  room,  but 
now  I  have  broken  it.  16.  The  little  boys  cannot  sing, 
because  they  cannot  find  their  books.  17.  Do  they  sing 
well?  18.  The  little  one  sings  very  beautifully.  19.  The 
teacher  gave  her  this  book  when  she  could  not  find  hers, 
and  she  sang  with  the  children.  20.  I  should  like  to  drink 
some  milk,  but  I  find  nothing.  21.  I  will  call  the  maid. 
22.  Sophy,  find  some  fresh  milk.  23.  The  children  have 
drunk  the  milk,  but  I  have  found  some  good  red  wine. 

24.  He  drank  the  wine,  but  he  ought  not  to  have  drunk  it. 

25.  Call  that  man  ;  I  want  to  speak  with  him.  26.  I  have 
spoken  with  him,  but  he  will  not  come.  27.  I  will  go  with 
you,  and  I  will  speak  with  him  when  you  have  found  him. 

♦66.5. 


EXEECISES. 


309 


fe^eit 

legen 

fd)reibcn 

ef[eu 

ber  33ocf) 

bcr  ^farrer 

ha^  3)Httag§e[feti 


EXEHCISE  19. 

PKEPOSITIONS 
[371-378.] 

Vocabulary, 

set 

lay 

write 

eat 

the  brook 


the  pastor 
the  dinner 


fifeen 
Uegen 
fpringen 
bie  ^riidc 
bie  birdie 
ber  9^ad^mlttag 


lie 

spring 
the  bridqe 
the  church 
the  afternoon 


1.  SSo  flnb  bie  ^iid^er,  ton  benen  trtr  fprad^en  ?  2.  (Sie  ticcjeit 
auf  bent  ^ifc^e  in  ntcinem  dimmer.  3.  (^e^en  (Sie  in  bag  3ininier, 
iinb  legen  <Sie  bie  33riefe  anf  ben  X\](i)  neben  bie  ^iid)er.  4.  SBir 
lagen  unter  ben  ^ciumen  in  nteinem  ©arten  nnb  fprac^en  Uon 
nnferen  greunben.  5.  ©ie  !amen  in  ben  (Garten,  aU  \mx  t)on 
i^^nen  fprac^en.  6.  ®ie  Wao^b  13racf)te  einen  ^ifcf)  in  ben  Garten 
nnb  fe^te  if)n  nnter  bie  33anme.  1.  ©ie  fel5te  nnfer  3[Rittag§effen 
baranf,  nnb  \mx  fafeen  urn  ben  3:ifc^  nnb  a^en  baUon.  8.  5)ie 
^aBen  liefen  bnrc^  h^n  SSalb  nnb  fprangen  iibe»  h^n  33acl^. 
9.  (S§  tt)ar  !eine  ^rilcfe  iiber  bent  33acf)e.  10.  Unmeit  bc§  33nc^e§ 
fte^t  eine  !(eine  §iitte.  11.  3c^  gclje  oft  nad)  ber  §iitte  nnb 
fringe  tnein  9l>iittag§efjen  ben  armen  Senten,  bie  bort  tno^nen. 
12.  5(n  tnen  fdjreibft  bn  ?  13.  3d)  fdjreibe  an  hen  ^^fnrrer,  ber 
in  ber  ©tabt  tnoljnt.  14.  2)n  foKft  ben  i^rief  in  bie  (Btaht  bringen, 
nnb  if)n  bent  ^farrer  geben.  15.  3So  moljnt  er  ?  16.  ©t  tnol)nt 
jcnfeitg  ber  Stabt,  ber  grogen  ^ird)e  gegeniiber.  1*7.  ^ir  finb 
geftcrn  trol^  be§  fjeifeen  Setter^  in  bie  Slirdje  gegangen.  18.  ®§ 
wax  fe()r  \)d%  ai§>  tr)ir  in  ber  S^ird^e  maren ;  aber  n)af)renb  bc§ 
a)Zittagg  ift  e0  !ul)t  gen^orben.  19.  9?acl^  bent  9??ittag§effen 
tt)erben  tnir  nac^  bent  SSalbe  anf^erljalb  ber  ^Btaht  ge^en. 
20.  2Bir  n>erben  binnen  einer  ©tnnbe  ge^en. 

n. 

1.  Come  into  the  wood  with  me.  2.  "Why  do  you  go  into 
the  wood?    3.  We  will  lie  under  the  trees,  and  I  will  read 


310 


EXERCISES. 


the  book  of  whicli  we  were  speaking.  4  The  pastor  left 
the  book  in  his  room.  5.  Go  into  his  house,  you  will  find 
it  on  the  table.  6.  I  stood  on  the  bridge  over  the  brook, 
and  the  children  played  around  me.  7.  The  hut  of  this 
poor  man  stood  outside  of  the  city,  not  far  from  the  bridge. 
8.  Do  you  often  go  to  church  ?  9.  I  go  to  church  every 
Sunday*,  but  during  the  summer  I  do  not  go.  10.  I  can- 
not go  on  account  of  the  hot  weather.  11.  Do  you  know 
the  Pastor  of  this  church  ?  12.  He  lives  opposite  to  me, 
and  he  will  come  after  dinner.  13.  Set  the  apples  on  the 
table,  and  lay  the  plates  and  the  knives  beside  me.  14. 
I  will  lay  an  apple  on  your  plate.  15.  Did  you  go  into  his 
room  ?  16.  Yes,  he  was  sitting  at  his  table  and  was  writing 
a  letter  to  his  mother.  17.  I  laid  the  books  beside  him 
and  went  out  of  the  room.  18-.  I  must  buy  a  warm  coat 
on  account  of  the  cold  weather.  19.  We  have  had  very  hot 
weather  during  this  week. 


EXERCISE  20. 

PASSIVE,  EEFLEXIVE,  AND  IMPEESONAL  VERBS. 

[274-295.] 

Vocabulary. 


jtd^  freuen  r^oice 

regnen  rain 

l^ungern  he  hungry 

fi^  jc^cimen  he  ashamed 

tabcitt  hlame 

bcr  9J?orgen  themorning 

bie  ^oft  the  post 

t)or,  prep,  before,  for,  on  account  cif 


fi(^  fiirc^ten  he  afraid 

bonnern  thunder 

biirften  thirst 
tobten  [totcn]  kill 

tragen  carry 

ber  3lbenb  th^  evening 

bie  5(ufg abe  the  task 

ber  !3)icncr  the  servant 


1.  SSarum  mirb  ber  ^naht  getobt  ?  2.  (Sr  tt)trb  getobt,  tt)eil 
feme  ^tuftjabe  fo  c^ut  gefc^rieben  ift.  3.  @eine  ^(ufgaben  trerben 
immer  gut  gefd^rieben,  aber  bie  ber  anberen  ^naben  tuerben 
gemo^ntii^  fe^r  fi^lec^t  gefi^rieben.    4.   ©te  fiird^teu  \x6)  t)OX 


*  230.2. 


EXEECISES.  311 

i^rem  Secret,  benn  fte  flnb  tmmer  t)on  t^m  gctabett  rt)orben. 
5.  3c^  mocf)te  hzn  ^rtef  lefen,  ben  bu  gefc^riebeu  Ijaft.  6.  (£r  tft 
fc^on  nad)  bcr  ^oft  getratjeii  morben.  1.  SSir  tDoKten  in  bie 
©tabt  tjeljen,  aber  eg  reguete  unb  bonnerte  ben  ganjen  9^ac^^ 
mittat3*.  8.  giirc^teri  Sie  fk^  Dor  bem  Conner  ?  9.  S^Jein,  aber 
id)  freue  mic^,  uieit  e»  uid)t  me^r  regnet.  10.  Widj  I)ungert  '§  ; 
Qib  mir  ehi  ©tiic!  53rob.  11.  Qd)  fc^dme  mid),  meil  id)  fein  guteg 
^rob  §abe.  12.  ©ibt  e§  feineu  SSeiu  im  §aufe  ?  13.  $ier  luirb 
nic^t  getrun!en.  14.  ©e^en  Sie  fic§  auf  biefen  @tu^t  man  wixb 
Q^nen  etmag  WiUf)  geben.  15.  9[)^ein  Keiner  $nnb  ift  t)on  einem 
fc^lec^ten  ^naben  getobtet  [getotet]  morben.  16.  3ft  er  bom  §unbe 
gebiffen  n)orben  ?  11.  9^ein,  aber  er  ^t  fic^  immer  t)or  h^n 
§nnben  gefiirc^tet.  18.  (Bx  \mxh  t)on  feinem  QSater  getabelt 
tt)erben,  ttieil  er  't>tn  $unb  getobtet  [getotet]  i)at  19.  ©eftern  niurbe 
in  ber  Sl'irc^e  gefnngen.  20.  SStireft  hn  bort  geuiefen,  hn  I)dtteft  ein 
neneg  Sieb  ge^ort,  tnelc^eS  t)on  atien  gelobt  JDorbcn  ift.  21.  9J^ir 
mar  nic^t  gan§  mol)!,  id)  burfte  mcf)t  in  bie  ^tircl^e  ge()en.  22.  @§ 
freut  micl^,  ©ie  ju  fe^en.  23.  2)iefer  33rief  ift  Don  il)m  gefc^rieben 
worben  unb  tuurbe  mir  bon  feinem  ^Dicner  gebra^t. 

n. 

1.  Has  the  letter  been  carried  to  the  post  ?  2.  It  has  not 
yet  been  written,  but  it  will  be  carried  into  the  city  this 
afternoon.  3.  The  servant  was  blamed  because  the  plates 
were  broken.  4  We  were  very  hungry,  but  nothing  was 
given  us.  5.  We  rejoiced  when  the  dinner  was  set  upon 
the  table  by  the  servant.  6.  Seat  yourself  and  eat.  7.  This 
boy  is  ashamed  because  he  has  eaten  so  much,  but  we  are 
very  glad.  8.  How  was  the  child  killed  ?  9.  He  was  bitten 
by  his  dog.  10.  I  was  very  much  afraid  when  I  saw  the 
big  dog  with  the  child.  11.  Are  you  not  well  ?  12.  I  always 
am  afraid  whenf  it  rains  and  thunders.  13.  It  rains  this 
evening, J  but  it  will  not  thunder.  14  We  could  not  come 
because  it  rained,  but  it  will  not  rain  any  more,  and  I  will 
come  to-morrow.  15.  I  want  to  see  the  pictures  which 
have  been  praised  by  every  one.    16,  They  were  praised  by 


*  230.1a.    t  tt)enn.    %  230.2. 


312 


EXERCISES. 


the  friends  of  the  painter.  17.  Are  there  no  fine  pictures 
in  this  city  ?  18.  There  are  many  beautiful  paintings  in 
the  library.  19.  Where  were  you  yesterday  when  you 
were  called?  20.  There  was  singing  and  dancing  here 
yesterday.  21.  We  should  have  rejoiced  if  you  had  been 
able  to  come.  22.  The  children  will  be  very  much  ashamed 
when  they  are  blamed  by  their  father.  23.  They  will  be 
blamed  because  the  exercises  which  were  written  by  them 
are  so  bad. 


EXERCISE  21. 

COMPOUND  VEEBS 

}.— SEPAEAELE. 

[296-301.] 

• 

Vocd)ulary, 

anfangcn 

begin 

aufl^oren 

stop^  cease 

auffte^en 

get  up 

jic^  an^ie^eit 

dress 

aufge^en 

rise  (the  sun) 

untergel)en 

go  under,  set 

^inausge^en 

go  out 

jurudfommcn 

come  hack 

^umadjen 

shut 

aufmacf)en 

open 

abreifen 

go  or  journey  away 

mitne^men 

take  along 

abf(f)rei6en 

copy 

bie  9?ad^t 

the  night 

bie  @onne 

the  sun 

ber  aJlonb 

the  moon 

bie  %\^nv 

the  door 

bo8  genfter 

the  window 

bie  eifenba^n 

the  railroad 

ba§3)flittag8cffen</ic  dinner 

balb 

soon 

fobalb,  conj. 

as  soon  as 

1.  SDie  Sonne  tft  untergegangen  unb  ber  Wlonb  ge^t  auf. 
2.  ^te  ^rbeiter,  bie  ben  ganjen  ^ag*  gearbeitet  ^aben,  fommen 
je^t  au§  bem  gelbe  priiS.  3.  93Zac^e  bie  ^^iir  anf,  ber  ^ater 
mirb  balb  5uriic!!ommen.  4.  ^<i)  max  ^inau^gegangen,  aB  er 
Snriidfam.  5.  5Sarum  ge^en  ©ie  je^t  ^tnau§?  6.  Qc^  n)erbe 
nid^t  ^inaugge^en,  ic^  mH  nur  bie  ^T^iire  unb  genfter  jnmad^en. 
1.  2Bir  miiffen  ntorgen  frii^  anffte^en,  n)ex(  tnir  unfere  5Iufgabe 
ni(^t  abgefc^rteben  l^aben.  8.  @r  \tanh  auf,  jog  fi^  an  unb  fd^riel) 
feine  ^ufgabe  ab.    9.  SSirb  bie  (Sonne  balb  aufge^en  ?    10.  Qd^ 


*  230.L 


EXERCISES.  313 

toetg  nt(^t,  e§  fdngt  an  gu  regnen,  unb  td^  ^abe  bte  genfter 
gugemac^t.    11.  3ft  beiii  ^ater  mit  ber  (Sifenbal)n  abgereift? 

12.  (Sr  reifte  geftern  ab,   aber  er  ift  f)eute  guriidgefommen. 

13.  SDie  5trbeiter  naljmeu  i§r  SJiittag^effen  mit,  al§  fie  in  bie 
getber  §iuau§gingen.  14.  SSarum  ^aben  ©ie  ^i)x^n  Wiener  ni(^t 
mitgenommen,  a(§  ©ie  abreiften?  15.  Qc^  miiufc^te  ii)n  mitju- 
ne^men,  aber  er  tuurbe  !ran!  unb  fonnte  nidjt  mitge^en.  16.  (Sr 
ift  nod^  nicl^t  aufgeftanben,  tneil  bie  (Sonne  nic^t  aufgegangen  ift. 
It.  @r  fcingt  an  §u  arbeiten,  tnenn  bie  (Sonne  aufgeljt,  unb  ^bxt 
auf,  Ujenn  fie  unterge^t.  18.  3Sir  fitrdfiteten  un§  fe^r,  aU  e§  ju 
bonnern  anfing,  aber  mv  fd^amen  un§  je^t,  meil  tt)ir  un§  ge^ 
fiird^tet  ^aben.  19.  3ct)  mac^te  bie  ^f)iiren  unb  genfter  auf, 
fobalb  ber  3^egen  auf^iirte.  20.  SSen  Ujerben  (Sie  mitnel^men, 
tt)enn  (Sie  in  bie  ©tabt  ge^en  ?  21.  Qd^  ttjerbe  eud^  mitne^men, 
^inber ;  fte^et  auf  unb  jie^et  eud^  ^iibfd^  an.  22.  SDarf  bie  ^(eine 
aud^  mitge^en  ?  23.  D^ein,  fie  barf  nic^t  mit  ;*  aber  tt)ir  merben 
i^^r  ttrva^  (Sd)onc»  gcben,  tucun  luiv  5uriicf!ommen. 

n. 

1.  When  do  the  workmen  come  back  ?  2.  They  come 
back  when  the  sun  sets.  3.  The  sun  has  already  set,  and 
they  will  soon  come  back.  4.  It  is  growing  cold;  shut  the 
doors  and  windows.  5.  The  moon  will  soon  rise;  do  you 
see  it?    6.  The  rain  has  begun,  and  we  cannot  go  out. 

7.  Have  you  copied  the  letters  which  you  had  begun? 

8.  Yes,  I  got  up  early  and  copied  them.  9.  Get  up  and 
dress  yourself;  we  must  go  away.  10.  Why  did  they  not 
take  the  child  along  when  they  went  away?  11.  They  did 
not  take  it  along,  because  it  had  not  dressed  itself.  12.  The 
servant  will  go  out  as  soon  as  it  ceases  to  rain.  13.  He  will 
go  into  the  city,  and  will  take  along  the  letters  which  we 
have  copied.  14.  He  did  not  shut  the  door  when  he  went 
out.  15.  Get  up  and  shut  it.  16.  My  aunt  will  not  go  away 
to-day,  because  it  has  begun  to  rain  and  she  is  afraid  of 
the  thunder.  17.  She  went  away  onf  the  railroad  as  soon  as 
it  stopped  thundering.   18.  The  night  has  come,  and  the 


« a59.a  t  mit 


314  EXEBCISES. 

moon  will  soon  rise.  19.  I  want  to  go  out.  20.  Go,  but 
come  back  soon.  21  I  began  to  work,  but  it  became  too 
hot  and  I  had  to  stop.  22.  Why  did  the  child  not  get  up  ? 
23.  It  was  not  allowed  to  get  up,  because  it  was  sick. 
24  They  went  out  into  the  forest,  and  took  the  books  with 
them  which  they  had  begun.  25.  They  will  come  back  as 
soon  as  the  sun  has  set.  26.  We  must  go  away  to-morrow, 
but  we  shall  soon  come  back.  p        ^  ^p^'  <^^  ^  ^  ^^^^^-^ 

EXERCISE  22. 

COMPOUND  VERBS.— n^SEPAEABLE. 
[302-313.] 

Vocabulary, 

ttergeffen  forget  Derfpred^en    promise 

Derfte^en  understart^-  em^jfaugen     receive 

Uerdubern  change  t)er[u(^en       try 

n)egne^mcn(sep.)tofce  away  Dertieren       lose 

iiberje^en  translate,  set  over  n)ieber^oIen  repeat,  bring  back 

beja^ten  ^^  Derfaufen      sell 

fic^  erinnern      -f^JJtemter  gef alien         please 

ha^^tx\pvt^tn  the  promise  bie  @ad^e      the  thing 

fran;5bftf(^  French  englifc^         English 

ber  !?aben  the  shop  ta^  ®tbidjt  the  poem 


1.  §aben  (Ste  fc^on  t)ergeffen,  \va§>  ©ie  niir  Derfproc^eu  I)a6en  ? 
2.  ^tin,  k^  erinnere  mtd^  metne§  ^erfprecl^eng*  unb  id)  iT)ieber:= 
l^ole  e^  3t)neu.  3.  3Sa§  ^at  S^iienf  biefer  ^aufmann  Derlauft  ? 
4.  (^x  ijerfaufte  mir  9loc!e  unb  Sd)u^e  fiir  meine  ^inber  unb  einen 
$ut  fiir  mtc^.  5.  3ft  alk§>  beja^tt  morben,  tva§>  er  Sfjiien  t)er' 
fauft  f)ai  ?  6.  (S§  ift  nod)  nic^t  be^ap  morben,  tDeil  ic^  meui 
^etb  t)ertoren  "^abe,  abcr  ic^  n)erbe  morgen  alle^|  be5al)len. 
1.  (befallen  3^nen  bie  ©ac^en,  bie  ©ie  in  fctnem  Saben  gefer)en 
l^aben  ?  8.  (£§  gefafft  mir  olIe§  gan^  gut,  aber  ic^  mug  ba§  ^(eib 
beranbern,  tt)eil  e§  ju  grog  ift.    9.  §at  l^arl  feine  franjoftfd^e 


*219.3.    t  222.1,16.    X  227.I&. 


EXERCISES.  315 

^ufgabe  uberfe^t  ?  10.  (Sr  ^at  fie  iu§  ^eutfc^e  unb  in!  (Snglifd^e 
iiberfelt.  11.  ^axl,  ^oU  mir  ba§  ^ucl)  tnicber  unb  tDieber^oIe 
mtr  betn  ^ebic^t.  12.  3*^  ^ei&  e§  nic^t  mefjr,  ic^  ^abe  e§  t)er^ 
geffen.  13.  ^ii  t?ergi^t  aKel  ma^  man  bic^  le^rt;  bu  gefaUft  mir 
gar  nid^t.  14.  3c!^  ttjerbe  t)erfucl^en,  jel^t  ffcifsiger  gu  tt)erben. 
15.  §aben  Sie  bie  ^iidjer  empfangen,  bie  er  ^ijncn  Derfproc^en 
5at?  16.  D^ein,  aber  ic^  luerbe  fie  empfangen,  fobalb  er  5urM:= 
!ommt.  11.  3c^  tjerftelje  gar  nic^t,  ma§  fie  mir  gefagt  '^at. 
18.  (Sr  r)at  fie  nic^t  t)erftanben,  meil  er  nidjt  ^eutfc^  fprecl^en 
!ann.  19."*3cl£)  ^aht  bzn  ^rief  nic^t  t)erfter)en  !i3nuen,  '!)tn  ic^ 
geftern  empfing,  ttieil  ic^  nic^t  5)eutfd)  lefen  !ann.  20.  SSir 
^aben  angefangen,  htn  ^rief  ju  ilberfe^en,  aber  wix  l)aimx  noc^ 
mct)t  angefangen,  i^n  ab^nfc^reiben.  21.  Qc^  iuerbe  bir*  ha§>  ^uc^ 
tDegne^men,  n)enn  bu  e§  njieber  Derlierft. 

n. 

1.  In  what  shop  did  they  selljjM  these  books?  2.  I 
forget  who  sold  them  to  me  ;  do  tll^Pplease  you  ?  3.  They 
please  me  quite  well.  4  You  cannot  buy  any,  because  they 
have  all  been  sold  already.  5.  I  do  not  want  to  buy  any, 
for  I  could  not  understand  them.  6.  l^j^^B  not  under- 
stand German  ?  7.  I  have  quite  f orgotti^Prerman,  but  I 
understand  French.  8.  Promise  me  to  learnf  German.  9.  I 
will  try  to  learn  it,  but  I  cannot  speak  it  at  all,  I  can  only 
translate  it.  10.  I  remember  a  German  book,  which  I  read 
when  I  was  in  Germany.  11.  It  pleased  me,  but  I  do  not 
remember  its  name.  12.  Why  did  I  not  receive  the  letter 
yesterday  ?  13.  You  did  not  receive  it  because  I  forgot  to 
copy  it,  but  you  will  receive  it  to-morrow.  14.  Did  the  child 
lose  his  book  ?  15.  The  teacher  took  it  away  from  him,  because 
he  was  lazy;  but  the  boy  repeated  his  promise,  and  the 
teacher  brought  him  back  the  book.  16.  The  merchant 
wanted  to  sell  me  many  pretty  things  when  I  was  in  his 
shop,  but  I  had  lost  my  money  and  could  buy  nothing. 
17.  He  will  lose  much  money  if  he  cannot  sell  these 
things.  18.  These  things  do  not  please  me;  I  will  not 
pay  for  them.      19.  My  cousin  is  much  changed,  and  hag 


*  222.1,3.        1 348.2. 


316 


EXEBCISES. 


quite  forgotten  me.  20.  Children  change  very  quicMy, 
and  easily  forget  their  friends.  21.  They  tried  to 
translate  the  poem  which  they  had  received,  but  they 
could  not  understand  it.  22.  I  received  a  German  letter, 
and  I  understood  it  quite  well.  23.  I  understand  all 
that  I  read,  but  I  can  not  translate  it  into  English. 

Note.  It  is  thought  best,  before  taking  up  the  special  uses  of  the 
moods,  tenses,  etc.,  to  give  the  pupil  some  exercise  in  the  formation 
of  the  German  sentence,  it  being  quite  impossible  to  introduce  the  sub- 
junctive, infinitive,  etc.,  without  making  use  of  longer  and  more  involved 
sentences  than  the  pupil  is  as  yet  prepared  for. 


EXERCISE  23. 

NORMAL  AND  INVERTED  SENTENCES. 

[430-433.1 

%mivita 

^^Vocabulary. 
.Mmca          ber  ^meri!ancr 

the  American 

bic  SSo^niing 

the  dwelling 

bte  9ieftauratton 

the  restaurant 

nieub(ireii*Im| 

juMieren]  to  furnish 

miet^en  [mieten] 

hire 

fru!)ftucfen 

^^^k    breakfast 

jpeifen 

eat 

tt)euer  [teuer] 

^^^P    dear 

bittig 

cheap 

bcr  ^ottig 

^^T      the  king 

blc  ^onigin 

the  queen 

mac^en 

make 

ber  ^^Jrdfibent 

the  president 

ber  §rembc 

the  stranger 

bie  (Srbe 

the  earth 

ber  ^rei0 

the  price 

eittmat,  snjeimat 

once,  twice,  etc 

lange,  adv. 

long 

tt)ot)t,  adv. 

loeK,  perhaps 

1.  ^er  grembe  milt  ftc§  eine  f(^one  SSo^nung  in  ber  ©tabt 
miet^en.  2.  (Sine  SBoljnung  ^at  er  fd^on  gefunbett,  alier  fie  ift 
i^mf  5U  tr)eiier.  3.  3c^  Ijaht  m  berj  Sriebrld^ftrage  eine  fcT^on 
menbtirte  SSoftnuiuj  ju  eiiient  fe^r  Ijiltigen  ^reife  gemict^et. 
4.  SSerben  (Sie  (angc  ^ier  WeiCen?  5.  ^en  ganjen  SBinter 
merbe  ic^  in  33ev(in  bfeiben,  aber  im  grii^Iing§  tuerbe  icf)  nad) 
$ari§  abreifen.  6.  SSerben  ©ie  S^re  gantilie  nac^  ^ari§  ntit^ 
ucljmen  ?  1.  ^eine  gran  unb  meinen  cilteften  (So^  n)erbe  ic^ 
tDo§l  mttne^men,  bie  anberen  aber  miiffen  in  Berlin  Meiben. 


*  Pronounced,  and  often  written,  mob-,  f  223.5.  %  66.46.    §  a6.4a. 


EXEECISES.  317 

8.  <S(^ott  ift  ^ertin  nic|t,  aber  eine  relc^c  unb  grole  ©tabt  tft  e§. 

9.  ^iermal  bin  tc^  na^  granfreic!)  gerelft,  ^tDetmat  ^a6e  ic^  ©ng^ 
laiib  gefe^eu,  unb  id)  6in  auc§  oft  in  5lmeri!a  gemefen.  10.  ^ath 
tnerbe  id^  eine  D^eife  nm  bie  (Srbe  madden.  11.  2)ie  (Entgtanber 
unb  bie  5lmeri!aner  reifen  fe^r  t)iet,  t)iet  Itjeniger  reifen  bie 
2)entfc^en,  nnb  am  attertrenigften  bie  granjofen.  12.  §aft 
bu  ben  ^^onig  gefel^en,  aU  bu  in  ^ari§  luarft?  13.  dnnen 
^rafibenten  l^abe  ic^  in  ^ari§  gefei)en,  nber  feinen  ."ftimtg. 
14.  ©inen  ^\iifer  ^aben  n)ir  in  ^eutfd)(nnb,  aOer  in  ©nglanb 
t)at  man  nnr  eine  Slonigin.  15.  Qm  let^ten  3al)rc,  al§»  wix  in 
^ari§  maren,  ^aben  tuir  in  einem  menblirten  ^intmer  geluo^nt. 
16.  Sir  ^ahtn  in  nnferem  3inimer  gefriifjftiicft,  nnb  jn  9[^ittag 
fpeiften  tnir  in  einer  S^eftanration.  17.  O,  mdre*  id)  in  $ari§ ! 
18.  SSarnm  finb  ©ie  nid)t  mit  nn§  gegangen  ?  19.  §atte  ic^ 
nnr  ^Uva^  ^e(b,  fo  ginge  id)  gemi^  nad)  |$ari§.  20.  §aft  bu 
noc^  nicl^t  gefrii()ftiicft,  fo  !omm'  mit  mir.^1.   Qn  biefer  9^eftau= 


ration  !ann  man  fe^r  gut  unb  5u  einem  bWgen  ^reife  frii^ftiicfen. 


iTmctei 


n. 

1.  Has  your  friend  hired  a  beautiful  dwell4Bf  2.  Beauti- 
ful it  is  not,  but  good  and  cheap  it  is  said^jp^fbe.  3.  Has 
your  brother  come  back  from  Paris?  ^kYesterday  he 
came  with  his  two  friends  and  his  servant.  5.  These 
three  Americans  have  come  from  France  to  Germany. 
6.  The  queen  of  England  they  have  already  seen,  and  they 
wish  to  see  the  Emperor  of  Germany  too.  7.  In  Berlin  they 
cannot  see  the  Emperor  now.  8.  He  went  away  last  month 
with  his  whole  family  to  Ems.  9.  Have  the  Americans 
never  had  a  king  in  their  country  ?  10 .  Formerly  the  king 
of  England  was  also  their  king,  but  now  there  is  no  king. 
11.  A  president  they  have,  but  no  king.  12.  Old  our 
Emperor  is,  but  strong  and  handsome  he  is  also.  13.  Where 
do  the  Americans  live?  14.  In  a  furnished  apartment  in 
Frederick  street  they  live.  15.  If  they  live  in  Freder- 
ick street  they  must  pay  a  good  deal.  16.  Such  a  dwel- 
ling one  cannot  find  for  a  cheap  price.     17.  Every  thing 


•  831.2.    t  foK,  257.a 


318  EXEBCISES. 

they  pay  for  very  dearly.  18.  In  tlie  dearest  restaurants 
they  eat,  and  they  buy  many  beautiful  things  in  the  shops. 
19.  Oh,  were  I  only  rich.  20.  Were  we  only  rich,  we  would 
buy  every  thing  we  want.  21.  Whom  do  you  wish  to  see  ? 
22.  No  one  do  I  wish  to  see,  only  I  want  the  book*  I  have 
lost.  23.  If  you  do  not  see  the  stranger,  he  is  not  here. 
24.  Last  Monday,  when  I  was  in  the  city,  I  breakfasted  in 
a  restaurant.  25.  In  Berlin  I  always  breakfast  in  a 
restaurant  in  Frederick  street.  26.  If  you  came  with  me, 
I  would  show  you  a  much  better  restaurant.  27.  Are  you 
living  in  a  furnished  room  ?  28.  A  room  I  have,  but  fur- 
nished it  is  not. 


EXERCISE  24.  \/^{Cdi   . 

TBANSPOSED  SENTENCES.— SUBSTANTIVE  CLAUSES. 
^     [434-436.] 

Vocabulary. 


cinlaben       ^IkvUe 

befud^en 

visU 

brudten          itlf^ 
txial)Un           tea,  relate 

Derberben 

spoil 

anne^men 

accept 

bev  35ei-faffcr    the  author 

ha^  SBerf 

the  work 

ha^^exQnuQtn  the  pleasure      .^ 

ha^  @et)eimmg 

the  secret 

ber  Sftomon      the  novel 

hex  ©ebanfc 

the  thought 

bie  ©inlabimg  the  invitation 

unbefannt 

unknown 

befannt           known 

einerlei,  adv. 

indifferent 

I 

1.  §n^en  (Ste  ben  ^f^ontan  gelefen,  bon  bent  \^  ^^nm  erjaf)!! 
I^abe  ?  2.  DZein,  irf)  fjcibe  i^n  nt(f)t  gelefen ;  fennen  ©te  ben  ^er^ 
faffer  beffetben?  3.  SSer  i^n  gefi^rieben  1i)at,  ift  nitr  unbefannt; 
ober  id^  tt)t\%,  ba^  er  in  biefer  ©tabt  gebrncft  n)Drben  ift.  4.  Qd^ 
Ijerfpred^e  S^^^^i  bnfs  Sic  ben  9^oman  ntorgen  erljalten  foEen. 

5.  ^iffen  ©le,  ob  ic^  bejaljlt  Ijabe,  Wa§>  ©ie  ntir  ber! auf t  f)aben  ? 

6.  Ob  @te  bejatjit  l)aben  ober  nicljt,  ift  mir  einerlei ;  id)  tueig,  ha^ 
©ie  oKeS  beja^len  merben.    t.  (S§  freut  mid^,  ba^  fie  mid^  ein=s 

*  183. 


0* 


EXERCISES.  319 

getaben  ^at ;  aber  fte  tt)eif3,  baf5  id)  ifjre  C^inlabung  ntrf)t  amtel)men 
fann.  8.  SSarum  bu  bie  (Sinlabuug  nic^t  annimmft,  ift  mir  un^ 
befannt  9.  Stiffen  8ie  ntc^t,  ha^  ic^  f)eute  mlt  ber  (SifeuOaljtx 
abreifen  merbe?  10.  ^er  ©ebanfe,  bafs  bu  nic^t  mitfommen 
fonuteft,  UerbarO  mir  ha§>  Qan^t  ^ergniitjen.  11.  ^^at  er  Sljiieu 
gefagt,  woljin  er  je^t  ge^t?  12.  gd^  tierfte^e  gar  nid)t,  tt)a§  er 
mir  gefagt  '^at.  13.  (£g  ift  eine  grage,  ob  fie  bic^  befu(i)eu  follte, 
obcr  bu  fie.  14.  2SiiJ3te  id)  uur,  tuo  fie  tDof)nt,  uub  tuo  id)  fie 
fiubeu  fiiuute,  fotuiirbe  ic^  fie  befuc^eu.  15.  ^^  ift  fein©e^eim= 
nife,  ha^  fie  morgen  abreifen  ixiiU. 

1.  Did  she  tell  you  that  he  had  gone  away  ?  2.  She  told 
me  that  he  had  gone  away,  but  she  did  not  tell  me  where 
he  had  gone.  3.  Had  he  not  visite^you  ?  4.  Whether  he 
visited  me,  I  do  not  know,  but  I  know  that  I  inyited  him. 
5.  Did  he  give  you  that  of  which  he  spoke  ?  6.  What  he 
sent  is  unknown  to  me,  but  he  knew  that  I  could  not 
accept  it.  7.  The  merchant  tells  me  tha^e  has  sold  all 
the  works  of  this  author.  8.  I  am  rejoiced  ^at  he  has  sold 
them  all ;  but  will  he  not  print  this  novel  again?  9.  Whether 
he  will  print  it  or  not  is  not  known.  10.  I  am  glad  that  I 
have  not  paid  for  these  books.  11.  You  told  me  where  you 
had  bought  them,  and  to  whom  you  had  given  them. 
12.  Whether  you  read  them  or  not  is  indifferent  to  me,  but 
you  know  that  you  must  pay  for  them.  13.  It  delights  me 
that  you  will  visit  me.  14.  Will  you  come  to-day  or  to- 
morrow? 15.  When  I  can  come  I  cannot  tell  you,  but  I 
will  come  soon.  16.  It  is  a  secret  who  has  written  this 
book,  but  it  has  been  read  by  every  one.  17.  The  thought 
that  you  are  certainly  coming  makes  me  quite  happy. 
18.  It  rejoices  me  that  I  can  accept  your  invitation.  19.  All 
that  we  have  made  is  now  spoilt. 


320 


EXEBOISES. 


EXERCISE  25. 

TRANSPOSED  SENTENCES.— ADJECTIVE  CLAUSES. 

[437.] 

Vocabulary. 


jlerBcn 

die 

leiben 

suffer 

betuelrtcn 

lament,  mourn 

aufgebcn 

give  up 

frag en 

ask 

jubringen 

pass  (time) 

ber  Srbc 

the  heir 

bie  ^ranf^eit 

sickness 

blc  ^offnung 

hope. 

bie  ^rembe 

foreign  lands 

elnfam 

lonely 

furc^tbar 

fearful 

barum 


therefore 


1.  ^er  grcmbe,  ber  g?ftern  in  unferer  (^taht  geftorben  ift,  tvax 
ein  (Snglcinber.  2.  (Bv  ftarb  an  einer  ^ran![)eit,  an  ber  er  fdfjon 
lange  gelitten  ^atte.  3.  ^er  ciltefte  (Sot)n  be§  (Sngldnber^, 
toelc^er  auc^  fein  (Srbe  ift,  lt)irb  r)ierf)er  !ommen.  4.  SSarnm 
belDetnen  ©ie  einen  SJJenfc^en,  ben  ©ie  gar  nid^t  gefannt  ^ben  ? 
5.  3c^  beltjeine  j^en,  ber  einfam  in  ber  grembe  (eiben  nnb  fterben 
mnJ3.  6.  Qn  ber  Qeit,  ha  ic^  anf  Dieifen  mar,  bin  id^  in  ©nglanb 
gemefen.  t.  Qn  Sonbon,  mo  ic^  einige  SSoc^en  ^nbrad^te,  bin  id^ 
!ran!  gertjorben.  8.  Sine  (Stabt,  morin  id^  fo  fe^r  gelitten  ^aht, 
merbe  id§  ijie  nergeffen  fonnen.  9.  ^er  Wann  ift  ein  Ungtiicflid^er; 
ber  ^at  t)tet  gelitten.  10.  SDer  ^itme__beffen,  bon  bem  id§  end^ 
erja^tt  ^abe,  ift  mir  nnbefannt.  11.  (Sr  fprid^t  bon  einem  il^m 
unbefannten  SD^anne.  12.  (£r  fragte  nac^  bem  9}?anne,  beffen 
^ater  fo  !ran!  ift.  13.  ^ie  ^ranf^eit,  on  ber  er  leibet,  ift  eine  fo 
furd^tbare,  ba^  man  alle  §offnnng  ^at  anfgeben  miiffen.  14.  !Da= 
rnm  ift  fein  <So^tr,  ber  ben  ^ater  nocl)  einmal  fe^en  mollte,  an§ 
$art§  5uriidfge!ommen. 


XL 

1.  The  gentleman  of  whom  he  was  telling  you  was  my 
Uncle.  2.  He  died  in  the  house  in  which  we  now  live. 
3.  He  was  a  noble  man  and  we  still  lament  him.  4.  Were 
you  not  the  heir  of  him  of  whom  we  are  speaking  ?  5.  Yes, 


EXERCISES.  321 

I  am  tlie  heir  of  his  name,  and  I  also  suffer  from  the  sick- 
ness of  which  he  died.  6.  He  was  asking  about  a  novel 
wtiich  he  wanted  to  read.  7.  It  is  a  book  of  which  I  have 
heard  much,  but  it  is  written  by  a  man  who  is  quite  un- 
known to  me.  8.  The  poor  stranger  who  died  here 
yesterday  was  the  author  of  the  novels  of  which  so  much 
has  been  said.  9.  He  died  in  a  city  where  he  was  quite 
unknown.  10.  In  the  time  when  he  was  still  rich  and 
happy  he  lived  in  Berlin,  but  when  he  became  poor  he 
went  into  a  foreign  land,  where  he  died.  11.  He  had  long 
suffered  from  a  fearful  sickness,  and  had  given  up  all  hope. 
12.  He  had  no  children  who  will  mourn  for  him.  13.  He  is 
an  unhappy  man,  who  must  live  and  die  so  lonely. 


EXERCISE  26. 

TRANSPOSED  SENTENCES.— ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES. 

[438-439.] 

Vocabulary, 


reltcn 

ride 

jagcn 

hunt 

tocrjammctn 

assemble 

begleitett 

accompany 

fortreiten 

ride  away 

fortfein 

be  away 

BetBunbern 

admire 

bie  3agb 

the  hunt 

ber  3lnfang 

the  beginning 

bag  (Snbe 

the  end 

bic  ®efeEf(^afl 

t  the  ccmpany 

gteicf) 

like 

j(f)nett 

quick 

mitbe 

tired 

t\)t 

ere,  before 

tt)ie 

how,  as 

ic....,bcfio 

the the 

jo  iangc 

as  long  as 

1.  5lt§  bie  ©otine  oufging,  rttten  fie  aHe  nac^  bem  SSatbe. 
2.  ^ie  ^a^h  mxh  anfangen,  f obalb  bie  ^efellfd)aft  firf)  t)erfammelt 
l^at.  3.  ^6)  tucrbc  ©ie  becjteiten,  bamit  id)  ha§>  ®nbe  ber  S^Qb 
fe^e.  4.  (Sf)e  fie  5uriic!!ommen,  tDirb  e§  gauj  biiuM  fein.  5.  SSenn 
©ie  miibe  fiub,  mcrbcu  mv  fot3leid)  wad)  ^^aufe  ^djzn.  6.  SDeu 
ganjen  S^ag  waxen  fie  im  SSalbe,  imb  ai§>  fie  nad)  §aufe  !amen, 
njaren  fie  fef)r  miibe.  Y.  2)iefe  ^ame  ift  iiicl^t  \d)on,  waxuni 
bettjunbern  ©ie  fie  ?  8.  ^d^  beirunbere  fie  nur  barum,  meil  fie  fo 


322  EXEECISES. 

fc^on  reitet  unb  etn  fo  fc^bneg  $ferb  '^at.  9.  SSotlen  @te  etrt)a§ 
fc^oneg  fe^en,  fo  fommen  ©ie  mit  mir.  10.  (So  Initge  er  fort  ift, 
fo  lange  mu^  id^  1)kx  bleiben,  aber  fobalb  er  §uruc!fommt,  barf 
i(^  fortge^en.  11.  ®§  ift  ^ter  fo  fd)on,  ba^  ic^  iiic^t  fortge^en 
mitt.    12.  'aSo  ic^  je^t  bin,  ha  tDerbe  icf)  ben  ganjeii  3:ag  bleibeu. 

13.  ;3c^  bin  fo  ntiibe,  ba^  icf)  nid)t  in  bie  (^efe((fd)aft  gefjen  !ann. 

14.  (Sriiebtfie  gar  nid^t,  \vk  tvh  fie  geliebt  l^aben;  er  bemunbert 
fie  nnr,  meil  fie  fo  fc^on  ift.  15.  Se  mel^r  mir  i^n  fennen,  befto 
meniger  lieben  mir  i^n.  16.  S^sft  bu  nic^t,  fo  merbe  id) 
nic^t  iagen.   17.  SSie  ber  5llte  reitet,  fo  moc^te  auc^  id^  reiten. 


n. 

1.  We  must  ride  to  the  forest  before  the  sun  rises.  2.  If 
you  want  to  hunt,  then  accompany  me.  3.  Where  the 
forest  begins,  there  the  company  assembled.  4.  They 
only  assembled  in  orderf  to  see  the  hunt.  5.  If  you 
want  to  see  the  hunt,  you  must  ride  fast.  6.  When  the 
hunt  was  at  an  end,  the  hunters  rode  home.  7.  Hardly 
had  he  come  home,  when  he  rode  away  again.  8.  Because 
he  is  old  he  hunts  no  more.  9.  The  older  I  am,  the 
more  I  hunt.  10.  The  lady  was  so  beautiful  that  we 
had  to*  admire  her.  11.  Although  she  is  the  wife  of  my 
friend,  I  have  never  seen  her:  12.  Where  she  now  is,  I  do 
not  know,  but  I  will  tell  you  how  you  can  see  her.  13.  As 
soon  as  she  came  home,  I  saw  her.  14.  She  is  beauti- 
ful ;  but  the  more  I  admire  her,  the  less  I  love  her. 
15.  The  company  is  larger  than  I  had  thought.  16.  As  long 
i*s  she  is  away  I  cannot  visit  you,  but  as  soon  as  she  comes 
back  we  will  come  to  you.  17.  Wlien  he  visited  us  we  were 
not  at  home,  but  we  shall  see  him  before  he  goes  away. 
18.  He  rides  so  fast  that  we  cannot  accompany  him.  19.  As 
he  lived,  so  he  died. 


muffen,  256.     f  332.55. 


EXEBCISES. 


323 


EXERCISE  27. 

USE  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

[323-328.] 

s 

Vocabulary. 

raecfen 

wake 

fc^Iafen 

sleep 

auftx)acl)en 

aijoake 

befinben 

be  (as  to  health,  etc.) 

brennen 

hum 

retten 

save 

iiberteben 

survive 

jufaninienftuqen 

fall  together 

ijerle^en 

injure 

ba§  53ett 

the  bed 

hie  ^lamme 

ihe  flame 

tobt  [tot] 

dead 

f(^n)er 

hard,  difficult 

pr6^ii6) 

suddenly 

untoo^l 

unwdl 

jeit,  prep. 

since 

1.  SSie  Befinben  (Sie  ftc^?  2.  ^c^  Befinbe  ntiif)  feit  geftern  fe^r 
nnnjol)!.  3.  (Sr^ci^len  ©ie  mir,  tt)ie  (Sie  jic^  t)erle^t  ^ben.  4.  ^cf) 
nmr  geftern  fe()r  mlibe  nnb  ging  friif)  ju  33ctt.  5.  $(o^(ic^  tvad^t 
id)  auf,  ic^  fel^e  glammen,  baS)  §au§  Brenut.  6.  S<^^  ftel;e  auf, 
n)ec!e  meine  gran  nnb  nteine  ^inber,  nnb  fie  lanfen  au^  bem 
§anfe.  1.  ^i§>  n)ir  aKe  branfeen  finb,  erinnere  id§  mic^,  ba§  ic^ 
bag  iiingfte  ^Hnb  bcrgeffen  Ijahc.  8.  Qd)  iPiK  jnruc!  lanfen  nnb 
e§  retten,  aber  ba§  $au§  ftilrjt  iiber  mir  5nfammen.  9.  9J^an 
'ijat  micl^  gerettet,  aber  id)  bin  fcl^mer  l^erletjt  nnb  icl^  iiberlebe  e§ 
getni^  nidjt.  10.  ^ein  53rnber  mivb  tnoljl  Derreift  fein?  11.  Qa, 
aber  er  !ommt  fc^on  morgen  5nriic!.  12.  ^]t  ha§>  ^inb  fd)on 
langefran!?  13.  ©»  ift  feit  einer  SS^od^e  tobt.  14.  ^efanb  ber 
Wamx  \\d)  \d)on  lange  in  53erlin,  aU  ©ie  il)n  fafjen?  15.  511^  ic^ 
in  Berlin  tnar,  fa^  id)  if)n  nid)t,  aber  fpdtcr  Ijabe  id)  if)n  gefel^en. 
16.  it'ommt  er  nic^t,  fo  gel)e  id)  gteid)  fort.  11.  (£t  fd)Iaft  feit 
brei  (Stnnben,  nnb  id)  !ann  if)n  nidjt  n^eden. 


n. 

1.  Have  you  seen  the  poor  man  ?  2.  I  saw  him  when  his 
house  was  burning.  8.  What  did  he  do  ?  4.  He  was  in  the 
town.  5.  Suddenly  they  tell  him  that  his  house  is  burning. 
6.  He  runs  back,  he  calls  his  wife  and  his  children.  7.  But 
they  are  asleep,  he  cannot  wake  them.     8.    He  wishes  to 


324 


EXEECISES. 


save  them,  but  the  house  falls  in.  9.  Was  no  one  saved? 
10.  One  child  was  saved,  but  it  is  much  injured.  11.  If  the 
child  dies,  he  will  die  too.  12.  Yes,  he  will  probably  not 
survive  his  family.  13.  Have  the  children  been  long  asleep? 
14.  They  have  been  sleeping  for  five  hours.  15.  They  will 
certainly  wake  up  soon.  16.  Were  you  in  the  church 
yesterday  ?  17.  When  you  were  in  the  church  I  was  also 
there.  18.  Had  he  been  long  unwell  when  he  died  ?  19.  He 
had  lain  in  bed  for  5  years.  20.  Now  he  has  been  dead  for 
two  years.  21.  I  am  going  into  the  city  to-morrow,  but  I 
am  coming  back  early.   22.  If  you  go,  I  shall  go  along. 


EXERCISE  28. 

SUBJUNC 

rrVTE  AS  OPTATIVE,  CONDITIONAL  AND  POTENTIAL. 

[329-332 

'■■] 

Vocabulary, 

anfe^ctt 

looked 

au«fe^cn 

look,  appear 

tattsen 

dance 

citen 

hurry 

mitfmgen 

si7ig  (at  the  same  time) 

anfommen 

airive 

tie  mvLfxt 

music 

bie  "Stimnic 

the  voice 

bcr  Siingting  the  youth 

blc  S)ame 

the  lady 

ntiibe 

tired 

tpst 

late 

gem 

wUlingly 

bod^,  (adv.) 

stiUf  nevertheless 

attein  (adv. 

and  conj.)  alone,  hut,  only 

fonft 

otherwise 

tc6  iSmtm^ 


1.  SBareftbunurgefteru  f)ier  getDefen!  2.  SBcire  ic^  aii^ 
Qetaben  tuorben,  jo  tt)are  ic^  hod)  tiic^t  gefommen.  3.  SSaren  8te 
gefommen,  fo  l)dtten  ©ie  Diel  fc^one  Tiu\xt  geI)Drt  unb  ba  ^'dtkn 
%ie  auc^  mitfingen  fbuneu.  4.  ©r  fpricl^t,  alg  fiinge  er  trie.  5.  @r 
f)at  eine  fel)r  fc^one  (Stimme,  fonft  ficitte  man  i^n  gar  nid^t  tm^ 
gelaben.  6.  ®er  Qungling  fte()t  an§,  al§  mare  er  fe^r  miibc 
Y.  (Sr  '^atte  gem  getanjt,  aftein  er  wax  ju  miibe.  8.  ©r  eilt  nur, 
bamtt  er  friif)  ()in!omme.  9.  ^omme  er,  ober  fomme  er  nic^t,  e§ 
ift  mtr  einertet.  10.  Unb  tDcire  e§  nocl^  fpdter,  ie()  fame  boc^  ju 
^^nen.  11.  S<^  niod)te  gern  biefe  33ilber  anfe^en,  aKein  ic^  ^aht 
!eine  Beit.  12.  (Site  er,  fo  t)ie(  er  !ann,  er  fomntt  boc^  ju  fpcit  an. 
13.  Dt),  tDciren  biefe  ^ilber  nur  bie  meinigen,  bann  fa^e  id)  fic 


EXEEOISES. 


325 


ben  gonjcn  5:Qg  an.  14.  ^er  Qungting  fte^t  bie  iungc  ^ame  an, 
aU  benjnnbere  er  fie.  15.  @ie  trirb  i^  nte  tieben,  fo  biel  er  ftc 
ond^  ben)unbert.  16.  SSir  moc^ten  fie  anii}  fe^en,  aber  fie  tft  nid^t 
l^ier. 

n. 

1.  Why  do  you  not  sing  with  us  ?   2.  I  would  gladly  sing 
too,  only  I  have  no  voice 
ought  not»to  have  come 

wise  I  should  not  have  .     _ . 

6.  Why  are  you  hurrying  so  mucnr  7.  I  am  hurrying  in 
order  thgjt  I  may  not^rrive  toa  late.  8.  If  you  arrive  too 
late,  youwittja?^  be^leto^an^T^  like  to 

dance,  butT  arn^too  tired/  iO.^Oh,  were  I  only^younef  acfain,  .   ^    , 
ft^^^tn^n  I  could  dance,   '^ll.  Look  at  this  lady;  she  looks  ^iS  if     .     '       ' 
she  had  danced  too  much.    12.  If  I  were  tired  I  wout3not  .C5M-A.^yxi 
dance  any  more.    13.  How  could  you  have  danced  if  she 
had  not  come.    14.  This  youth  is  hurrying  as  if  it  were 
very  late.     15.  He  is  only  hurrying  in  order  that  he  may 
hear  the  beautiful  music.    16.  Let  him  hurry  as  much  as 
he  will,  he  will  still  arrive  too  late.    17.  I  should  like  to  see 
the     beautiful     ladies,     but     they    are     already    gone.f 
18.  Had  you  only  hurried  yourself,  then  you  would  have 
seen  them  all. 


EXEHCISE  20. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  INDIKECT  STATEMENT. 

[333.] 

. 

Vocabulary, 

btc  Bettnitg 

the  newspaper 

ble  Sna^xxdjt 

the  news 

ber  5Ir5t 

the  doctor 

bev  @taube 

beliefJaUh 

bebauern 

pity 

ent^altcn 

contain 

^offen 

hope 

anttuorten 

answer 

ttJi^tlg 

important 

^cutlg 

of  to-day 

befcfiSftlgt 

busy 

gcfunb 

healthy 

traurig 

sad 

tt)at)r 

true 

ber  hunger 

hunger 

tfovt. 

ble  Sa^r^ett 

the  truth 

♦  foUen  251.6. 

326  EXERCISES. 


1.  ©abcn  (Sie  ble  "^eutige  S^itmig  getefen?  Tlan  fagt,  fte  enU 
l^atte  h)id^ttge  9Mc^ri^ten.  2.  3^  (jabe  gelefeit,  ha^  ber  Slaifer 
geftorbeu  fei,  aber  ic^  glaube  e§  nirf)t.  3.  Qcf)  fragte  meinen  ^ater, 
oh  er  biefeDlac^ric^t  glaube,  imb-er  mitmortete,  er  glaube  niemal^ 
\)a^,  toa§>  er  iu  ber  ^eitumj  tefe.  4.  (Sr  fragte  bie  ®ame,  ob  fie 
mitge^en  tvoiic,  aber  fie  antmortete,  fie  fei  fe^r  miibe  unb  biirfe 
nid^t  au§ger)en.  5.  (Sie  fc^reibt  uit§,  fie  fei  nic^t  ^u  un§  gefommen, 
lt)ei(  fie  geglaubt  fjabe,  baf^  iDir  abgereift  tDciren;  fie  bebaure  fe^r, 
ha^  fieuu§  nic^t  gefef)en  ^abe  unb  ^offe,  wix  trerbcn  balb  gu  i^r 
!ommen;  fie  fomte  m\§>  nic^t  tuieber  befuc^en,  tueil  fie  ^u  befc^df* 
tigt  fei.  6.  (Sr  glaubt,  bafj  fein  8o§n  !rau!  fei  unb  miinfc^t,  bag 
icl^  nac§  bent  ^(rjt  fcl^icfe.  1.  ^er  meint,  er  f)abe  ju  Diet  gearbeitet, 
barum  fei  er  !ran!  geiDorben.  8.  ^er  ^ebanfe,  ha^  er  nic^t  tnel^r 
arbeiten  !onne,  mac^t  \i)n  fe^r  traurig.  9.  2)er  ^Irjt  glaubt  ni(i)t, 
bag  er  mieber  gefunb  tuirb.  10.  SSir  gaben  i^r  ha§>  ^elb,  treit 
fie  un0  erja^lte,  ha^  \f)x  Tlann  geftorben  fei,  unb  bog  fie  fein 
G^elb  ^abe.  11.  (S^lauben  ©ie,  ha^  fie  bie  SSa^r^eit  fpric^t  ?  12.  Ob 
fie  bie  2BaI)rf)eit  fprid^t,  meig  id)  nic^t,  ic^  moUte  aber  nidjt,  bag 
fie  an  §nnger  ftiirbe. 

n. 

1.  Have  you  heard  the  great  news?  2.  They  say  the 
Emperor  is  coming  to-morrow.  3.  Do  you  believe  that  it  is 
true  ?  4.  My  mother  said  she  had  read  it  in  the  paper,  but 
she  did  not  believe  it.  5.  The  belief  that  he  is  coming 
makes  the  whole  city  glad.  6.  What  news  did  his  letter 
contain  ?  7.  He  wrote  he  was  still  in  Berlin  and  working 
as  usual;  he  was  sending  me  a  book  which  he  had  read, 
and  hoped  I  should  read  it  also ;  he  did  not  know  when 
he  was  coming  home,  but  he  hoped  he  could  come  soon. 
8.  I  came  back  in  the  belief  that  he  was  very  ill,  but  I  find 
him  quite  well.  9.  I  asked  him  whether  he  was  ill,  but  he 
was  only  tired  because  he  had  worked  too  much.  10.  I 
asked  the  young  man  who  he  was  and  where  he  was  going, 
but  he  only  answered  he  did  not  know  me  and  would  not 
tell  me.  11.  I  think  I  am  going  away  to-morrow,  but 
my  friend  wishes  that  I  remain  long^er.     12.  His  father 


EXERCISES.  327 

said  he  must  come  home  to-morrow;  but  he  says  he  cannot 
and  will  not  go  away  before  his  friend  has  arrived.  13.  The 
lady  said  she  was  very  sorry  that  he  was  so  sick,  and  hoped 
he  would  soon  be  better  again.  14.  The  doctor  thinks  he 
will  soon  die,  but  I  think  he  is  not  so  sick  as  they  believe. 
15.  The  story  that  he  is  busy  and  therefore  does  not  come 
I  do  not  believe. 

EXERCISE  30. 

INFINITIVE  AS  SUBJECT  OR  OBJECT. 

[339-343.] 

Vocabulary, 

raud^eii  sraoke  trinfcu  drink 

^ei^en  command,  call  taffen  allcm,  cause 

befe^ten  orcZer  jd^tDeigen  hesUent 

*Jor(ejen  read  aloud  (to  someone)  oerbieten  forbid 

fpasieven  gel^en      go  to  walk  f^ajieren  fa^ren       go  to  drive 

t>oi'fa{)ren  drive  up  fa{)ren  drive 

ber  SSogeu  the  carriage  ber  ^utfd^er  the  coachman 

gefci^rtid)  dangerous  gornig  c^ngry 

kidjt  easy  toeit  far,  distant 


1.  SDo§  Sefen  ^aBe  td^  geternt,  a6er  ha^  ©d^reiben  ift  mir  nod^ 
fd^tDer.  2.  (Srinnern  ©ie  fic^  feineg  (Sd^tDetgeiig,  al§  mir  i^ 
fa^en.  3.  ^§>  ift  fd)itier  ^u  fc()iDeigen,  tDenn  man  ^ornig  ift.  4.  ©§ 
ift  mir  nic^t  leic^t,  feine  (^efd)ic^te  511  glaubeu,  aber  ic^  tuerbc 
l)erfuct)en,  i[)m  gu  I)elfen.  5,  C^inem  folc^en  9)(enfc^eu  ^elb  ju 
geben,  ift  fef^r  gefci^rlic^,  aber  (Sffen  uiib  ^rinfen  barf  man  il;m 
geben.  6.  ^^  Ijore  fingeu.  1.  (Sie  ^oxtn  ben  {uiigen  "^Dlann 
fingeit,  h^n  3()r  ^ruber  mitgeOrac^t  ^at  8.  SSo  I)at  er  ben 
giingling  fenuen  gelernt  ?    9.  (Sr  (ernte  ir)n  in  53cr(in  fennen. 

10.  ®r  lieJ3  if)n  jeben  Xa^  5U  fict)  fommcn  nnb  leljrte  if)n  fingen. 

11.  (Sr  (;ie§  ben  fungen  93hnn  ^eute  fommen  unb  befall  if)m,* 
un§  etnjag  Dorjufingen.  12.  (Sr  Ici^t  fic^  bie  ^ebicr)te  Oortefen. 
13.  3c^  mottte  fpajieren  ge^en,  aber  er  blieO  im  Garten  fi^en  unb 

^  *  222.n,  la. 


328  EXERCISES, 

iDiinfcl^fe  ntc^t  Qu§§uget)en.  i4.  ^r  tft  ju  mnht,  fpajteren  ju 
ge§eu,  aber  er  tt)iil  gent  fpa^ieren  fasten.  15.  ^axi,  la^  beit 
^utfd^er  rufeu  unb  ben  SBagen  borfa^ren,  ttJir  iDoUen  nad^  ber 
©tabt  fa[)ren.  16.  3Sir  ()aben  ben  ^(r^tnoc^  ju  befud^en.  17.  S^n 
gu  befuc^en,  miiffeit  ©ie  fe^r  tt)eit  fa^^ren.  18.  2Bir  ^abeti  tt)eiter 
nid^t§  §u  fagen,  aber  er  l;ort  nicljt  auf,  un§  ju  rufen.  19.  ^rinfen 
unb  ^iauc^en  finb  im  ^^eater  ijerboten. 

n. 

1.  I  do  not  like  writing,  but  I  like  reading  very  mucli. 
2.  Why  do  you  not  smoke  ?  3.  The  doctor  has  forbidden* 
me  smoking.  4.  To  be  silent  is  better  than  to  talk  when 
one  is  angry.  5.  I  ordered  him  to  be  silent,  but  he 
wished  to  talk.  6.  To  tell  the  truth  is  impossible  to  him. 
7.  I  tried  to  help  him,  but  he  would  not  tell  the  truth, 
and  I  could  not  give  him  anything.  We  became  acquainted 
with  him  in  Paris.  8.  Will  you  go  to  drive  with  me  V  9.  I 
rejoice  to  go  with  you.  10.  I  will  have  the  coachman 
called.  11.  When  I  called  him  he  remained  standing  and 
did  not  come.  12.  Do  you  not  hear  talking  ?  13.  I  hear 
talking  and  singing.  14.  Have  you  heard  the  children 
sing  ?  15.  I  tried  to  hear  them  sing,  but  the  teacher  for- 
bade me  to  come  into  the  school.  16.  He  teaches  them  to 
sing  and  to  read  aloud.  17.  Let  Sophy  be  called;  I  see  her 
coming  and  I  want  to  ask  her  something.f  18.  I  had  her 
called,  but  she  was  reading  aloud  to  her  sister  and  could 
not  come.  19.  We  will  have  them  work  an  hour,  then  they 
can  go  to  drive  with  us.  20.  Have  the  carriage  come,  the 
children  want  to  go  to  drive,  but  I  shall  go  to  walk. 

EXERCISE  31. 

INFINITIVE  AS  ADJUNCT  AND  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 

[344-348.] 

Vocabulary, 

Benu^cn  use  lad^en  laugh . 

an^orcn  listen  to  fld^  jurflrfjlcjcn      withdraw 


*  222.1,1a.  1 227.3a. 


EXEBGISES.  329 


Bcrclt                ready 

ru^lg 

^ia 

furj                    short 

fd^ttjad^ 

weak 

bic  ©elegen^eit  the  opportunity 

bag  @d|aufpicl 

the  play 

ber  ©ete^rtc       the  scholar 

bie  Unitjerfitat 

the  university 

amufiren           amuse 

amiifant 

amusing 

1.  (Sr  fagte  mtr,  er  ^a6c  feme  (^etegen^ett  ge'^aBt,  mtt  g^nen 
ju  fprec^en.  2.  ^c^  bin  bereit,  i^m  alle§  ^u  er^d^Ien,  aber  er  ift 
5U  sornig,  mid^  an^oren  gu  tDoUen.  3.  ^ie§offnuug,  halb  trieber 
abreifen  gu  fbnnen,  mac^t  fie  fe^r  gliidtid).  4.  ©ie  fam  nac^ 
Berlin,  um  i()re  (Slteru  ju  befudien.  5.  ^uftatt  nac^  Berlin  511 
fommen,  mare  e§  if)r  leid)ter  geiuefen,  gleic^  nac^  §aufe  ju  ge^eii. 

6.  Qc^  iDerbe  biefe  ©elegen^eit  benugeu,  um  ing  3:^eater  ju 
ge^en.  7.  2Bir  mbc^ten  nic^t  ing  ^^eater  ge^en,  o^ne  ha^  @c§au^ 
fpiel  tjor^er  gelefeu  ju  ^abeu.  8.  2)ie  geit  ift  ju  !ur§,  alg  ha^ 
fie  bag  (5d)aufpiel  lefen  fonnen.  9.  (Sr  fpracl^  baUon,  iin§  nad) 
bem  3:f)eater  ju  begleiten,  aber  er  mu^te  nod^  arbeiten.  10.  ^c^ 
!ann  bag  Sieb  uic^t  fiugen  ^oren,  o^ne  §u  n^einen.  11.  5lnftatt 
ntit  feinen  greunben  'm§>  ^(jeater  gu  ge^eii,  ^at  er  fic^  juriidge^ 
gogeu,  um  in  feiuem  Qii^ttier  rul)ig  arbeiten  gu  fonnen.  12.  (Sr 
bentt  nur  baran,  ein  grower  (SJele^rter  gu  merben.  13.  (Sr  tDiinfd^t 
nad^  ber  Unitjerfitat  5U  ge^en,  unb  fein  ^ater  ift  reic^  genug,  if)m 
geit  unb  ©elegen^eit  ba5u  ju  geben.  14.  ^c^  ^abe  ben  Bfioman 
gelefen,  um  mic^  p  amiifiren.  aber  er  ift  gar  nid^t  amiifant. 
15.  5tnftatt  5u  tad^en,  ^be  ic^  i^n  nid^t  tefeu  fonnen,  o^ne  5U 
ttjeinen.  16.  Qd^  "^aU  i^n  tng  ^§eater  ge^en  laffen  ttJoEen,  aber 
er  ^at  nic^t  ge(;en  fonnen. 

n 

1.  Are  you  ready  to  go  with  us  to  tlie  theatre?  2.  I  have 
no  time  to  go  to  the  theatre.  3.  I  have  seen  this  play  too 
often  to  want  to  see  it  again.  4.  I  cannot  see  any  play 
without  haying  read  it  before.  5.  What  will  you  do  in 
order  to  amuse  yourself?  6.  Instead  of  staying  here,  I  shall 
go  to  the  university  in  order  to  see  the  learned  professor. 

7.  He.  thinks  only  of  seeing  learned  men  and  reading 
learned  books,  but  we  think  only  of  amusing  ourselves. 


330 


EXEECISES. 


8..  Why  did  lie  withdraw  instead  of  going  to  walk  with  us? 
9.  He  said  he  was  always  ready  to  go  to  walk  with  you, 
but  to-day  he  was  too  tired  to  be  able  to  go  out.  .10.  We 
came  in  the  hope  of  hearing  him  sing.  11.  I  cannot  go 
away  without  hearing  him  sing.  12.  I  have  no  time  to 
listen  to  him,  but  I  hope  to  hear  him  sing  later.  13.  You 
cannot  help  this  poor  man  without  giving  him  much 
money.  14.  I  let  him  tell  his  story  in  order  to  know 
whether  he  spoke  the  truth.  15.  I  have  no  hope  of  being 
able  to  help  him.  16.  Instead  of  listening  to  my  story  he 
forbade  me  to  speak.  17.  They  will  not  go  away  without 
having  spoken.  18.  We  have  used  every  opportunity  of 
helping  them,  but  they  are  bad  enough  to  be  dangerous. 
19.  This  novel  is  too  amusing  for  me  to  read  it  without 
laughing.  20.  I  had  wished  to  teach  him  to  read  aloud, 
but  he  had  too  weak  a  voice  to  be  able  to  read  aloud. 


EXJjJKCISE  32. 

PARTICIPLES. 

[349-359.] 

Vocabulary/. 

c^rcn 

honor 

t)oIIenbcn 

complete 

fii^rcn 

lead 

befprec^en 

talk  over 

mitt^cUcn 

communicate 

empfangen 

receive 

gcboren 

horn 

ertt»arten 

await 

fcrtig 

finished 

ciUg 

hasty 

bcr  3)om 

the  cathedral 

SfJom 

Borne 

^Oltt 

Cologne 

'  1.  SSer  rt)kb  bte  anfommenben  (^cifte  empfangen?  2.  SO^eine 
5D^utter  empfdngt  bie  §erau!ontmenben.  3.  §aft  ^u  ben  an- 
gefangenen  ^rief  bollenbet  ?  4.  (Sobalb  \v\x  i^n  fertig  l^aben, 
foKen  ©ie  ha§>  ^efdjriebene  lefen.  4.  ©nben  ©ie  ben  ©eftor- 
benen  gefannt  ?  6.  (Sr  tvav  mein  geliebter  greunb.  1.  @r  ging, 
ba§  ^hib  nn  ber  .$anb  fiiljrenb,  in  bie  .^ircl^e  ^inein.  8.  SSir 
gingen  and)  mit,  nm  bie  fc^on  gematten  ^ilber  jn  fe^en.  9.  §aben 


EXEECISES.  331 

Ste  frli^er  fo  botteubet  f c^buc  ^ilber  gefetien  ?  10.  ®r  fa^  fie. 
bciDuiiberub  an  uub  ging  fdjmeigenb  fort.  11.  5(((e  ^erfprec^ungeit 
tjcrcjeffeub  reifte  er  goftern  ah.  12.  3Sann  incrben  bie  D^eifenben 
juriicffommeit  ?  13.  (Sr  fan:  eiligft  [)ine3efaf}ven,  uni  ung  bie 
9^ac^rid)t  iiitt5utr)et(eu.  14.  Uii§  ben  empfangenen  ^rief  t)orIefenb 
unb  mit  nn§  bie  9lad)rid)t  [)efpred)enb,  blieb  er  lange  bei  nn§. 

15.  ©ie  aufge^enbe  (Sonne   fanb   i^n    noc^   im  ^ette  liegen. 

16.  ®er  im  3a^re  1248  angefangene  '5)om  ju  ^'oln  ift  erft  638 
Saf)re  fpdter  ijodenbet  tDorben.  17.  ^er  arme,  in  einer  niebrigen 
$iitte  geOorene  ^nabe,  ift  fpdter  ein  berii^mter  ^rofeffor  ge= 
iDorben.  18.  ^ie  tt)einenbe  gran  ift  bie  SJ^ntter  beg  geftern  an§  bem 
brennenben  §aufe  geretteten  ^inbeg.  loeld^eg  ^ente  geftorben  ift. 


H 

1.  Have  you  found  the  lost  book  ?  2.  They  have  brought 
it  back  to  me  quite  spoiled.  3.  AVhy  does  she  go  weeping 
into  the  church  ?  4.  Her  most  beloved  son  is  dead.  5.  I 
knew  the  dead,  he  was  a  beautiful  boy.  6.  The  child  came 
running  in  order  to  give  me  the  long  expected  letter. 
7.  Talking  over  with  me  the  news,  he  forgot  to  give  me  the 
paper.  8.  She  looked  admiringly  at  the  beautifully 
painted  pictures,  but  she  said  nothing.  9.  Do  you  know 
this  much  admired  lady  ?  10.  She  is  the  daughter  of  my 
beloved  uncle,  she  is  a  beautiful  woman.  11.  We 
remained  a  week  in  Kome  looking  at  the  great  churches 
and  admiring  the  beautiful  paintings.  12.  As  soon  as 
the  expected  newspaper  arrives,  I  will  communicate  to 
you  the  news  contained  in  it.  13.  Having  lost  my  paper 
I  shall  have  to  read  yours.  14.  I  have  found  your  lost 
paper.  15.  The  emperor  Napoleon  I.,  born  in  Corsica  in 
the  year  1769,  died  at  St.  Helena  in  1821.  16.  They  were 
not  able  to  save  those  sleeping  in  the  burning  house, 
because  they  could  not  wake  them.  17.  The  traveller 
arrived  too  late  to  see  the  dying  man.  18.  Arrived  in 
Cologne  I  went  at  once  to  their  house,  but  I  found  the 
house  shut  and  the  whole  family  away.  19.  She  went  away 
weepuig  without  having  seen  her  beloved  ones. 


33 

EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  33. 

ADVERBS  AND  PEEPOSITIONa 

[361-381.] 

Vocabulary/, 

ber  iBerg 

the  mountain           ba§  ©emitter 

the  thunder-storm 

ber  ^fab 

the  path                  bie  «anf 

the  bench 

bic  Sotfe 

the  cloud                bie  ©r^ie^ung 

the  education 

ta^  @efcl)aft 

business                  ber  ®ter« 

the  star 

fteigen 

cZim6                      blicfen 

look 

einjiel^cn 

move  in                  auS^ie^en 

move  out 

t)erfd)ttjinben 

disappear               bitten 

beg 

unterttJegg  (adv.)  on  the  way 


1.  9d^  bin  untermegg,  meine  gi^^uube  gu  6efu(^en,  bte  ber 
^trd^e  gegeniiber  tno^nen.  2.  grii^er  tDo^nten  fie  auf  bent 
Sanbe  jenfeit^  beg  gluffe§,  aber  fie  ftnb  megen  ber  (^gie^ung 
i^rer  ^inber  in  bie  ©tabt  gegogen  unb  mo^en  je^t  unn^eit  ber 
©c^ule.  3.  ^ro^  be§  ^eifeen  Setter^  bin  id}  :^eute  fammt  meinen 
^inbern  fpajieren  gegangen.  4.  SSir  gingen  tief  in  ben  SBalb 
l^inein,  \6)  feljte  mid^  unter  bie  ^dume  auf  eine  ^anf,  unb 
bie  ^inber  fpielten  urn  mic^  l^erum.  5.  ^lo^Iic^  tnurbe  e§  bunfel, 
td§  fa^  nad^  oben,  bie  Sonne  mar  Winter  ben  fd)tDar§en  SSoIfen 
berfc^ttjunben,  unb  binnen  furger  ^t\i  fing  e§  an  gu  regnen. 
6.  SSir  (iefen  eiligft  au§  bem  SSalbe  l)inau§.  *l.  SBalb  aber  tt)ar 
ber  ©turm  i)orbei,  unb  bie  ©onne  !am  mieber  ^inter  ben  SSoIfen 
l^ertior.  8.  Qc^  modte  auf  ben  33erg  ^inauf  fteigen,  urn  bie  unter^^ 
ge^enbe  Sonne  gu  fe§en,  aber  er  ttJlinfc^te,  long§  be§  gluffeg 
fpagieren  gu  ge^en.  9.  ^^6)  bat  i^n,  gu  mir  ^eriiber  gu  fommen, 
aber  er  mollte  e§  nic^t.  10.  SSir  ftanben  auf  bem  fleinen,  Icingg 
be§  S^uffe§  fii^renben  ^fabe  unb  fa^en  nac^  oben  ^inauf,  unb 
alte  Sterne  beg  §immelg  blicften  auf  ung  Ijernieber.  11.  ^^c^ 
faun  nict)t  an  i§rem  §aufe  Dorbeige^en,  o^ne  ^inein  gu  ge^en. 
12.  Sie  ^at  ntic^  oft  eingelaben,  ^erein  gu  fommen,  ober  id§ 
mu^te  beg  (Sefd^ciftg  megen  in  bie  Stabt  §inein. 


n. 

1.  Why  does  your  friend  now  live  outside  of  the  town? 
2.  He  has  a  sick  child,  and  for  its  sake  he  has  moved  out 


EXERCISES. 


333 


of  the  town.  3.  They  have  planted  trees  along  the  path  by 
the  river,  and  have  set  benches  under  the  trees.  4.  The 
horseman  who  rode  past  us  was  riding  on  a  very  beauti- 
ful horse,  and  two  dogs  were  running  round  about  him. 

5.  I  looked  long  after  him  as  he  rode  away  into  the  woods. 

6.  The  sun  has  come  out  from  behind  the  black  clouds,  and 
in  spite  of  the  storm  the  evening  will  be  fine.  7.  We  will 
climb  up  upon  the  mountain  and  look  down  upon  the 
city.  8.  When  the  sun  disappears  behind  the  mountains 
the  stars  will  look  down  upon  us  from  above.  9c  As  I  went 
by  his  house  he  was  looking  out  of  the  window.  10.  He 
called  me  over  to  him  and  invited  me  to  come  into  the 
house.  11.  He  said  he  could  not  (go)  out  of  the  house,  and 
wished  to  speak  to  me  concerning  business.  12.  I  went  in 
to  him  and  remained  with  him  during  two  whole  hours. 


EXERCISE  34. 

CONJUNCTIONS  AND  INTEKJECTIONS. 

[382-392.] 

Vocabulary, 

ber  ^affec 

the  coffee 

ber  Zljtt 

(he  tea 

ha^  ^tcifcf) 

the  meat 

ha^  ©entuje 

the  vegetable 

bic  ^artoffel 

the  potato 

bag  SBaffer 

the  water 

bag  ^mtv 

the  fire 

\ia^  mi 

the  wood 

!oc^en 

cook 

bacfen 

bake 

anpnben 

light 

DerBrennen 

hum 

f)oten 

fetch 

gubereiten 

prepare 

fic^  crfciUen 

catch  cold 

^)ftucfen 

pluck 

1.  S^  mod^te  \>(i^  grii^ftiic!  juberetten,  affein  man  ^t  \>a^ 
geuer  nocf)  nic^t  angejiinbet.  2.  ^ie  Wac(b  ift  ^inauggegnnc^en, 
enttueber  urn  §0(5  511  jiid^en  obcr  iim  (S^emiife  §u  pf(iic!en. 
3.  3ii«^ei^  ©tc  ici^  Seuer  an,  unterbeffen  tucrbe  irf)  SSaffer  ^oteu 
uitb  ben  ^affee  mac^en.  4.  ^u  trinfft  immer  JIaffee,  ic^  bagegen 
trinfe  nnr  ^^ce.  5.  ^(jo  mac^en  tt)ir  ni(f)t  nur  ^^affee,  fonbern 
and^  ^5ee.   6.  (Sobalb  ba§  SSaffer  !ocI)t,  t^un  ©ie  bie  ^artoffeln 


334  EXEKCISES. 

^\m\n.  1.  ^a^  Staffer  fod^t  ^Wax  fc^on,  aCtein  idj  ^abe  feitie 
^artoffeln,  beS^att)  merbe  ic^  in  ben  Garten  ge^en  miiffen.  8.  SSo 
@ie  bie  ^artoffeln  finben  merben,  tt)ei§  ic^  nic^t,  ahtv  inbem  ©ie 
fie  fuc^en,  merbe  ic^  ba§  Sleifc^  gubereiten.  9.  SSci^renb  id^  im 
(Garten  mar,  ift  bag  gleifcl^  '  berbrannt.  10.  D  Wtf),  ha^ 
e§  tierbrannt  ift,  je^t  tnerbe  ic^  nicl^t§  5U  effen  ^aUn. 
11.  Obgteic^  e0  Derbrannt  ift,  merbe  ic^  boci)  berfuc^en,  ein  ©tiic! 
bat) on  5U  effen.  12.  ^fui  be»  fc^Icc^ten  5(eifd)e§,  iDeg  mit  il^m. 
13.  SSeber  bn  noct)  ict)  n)erben  e§  effen  fbnnen,  aber  biefe  airmen 
merben  e§  gerne  effen.  14.  ©eitbem  fie  fic^  erlciltet  l^at,  ift  fie 
immer  Iran!  gemefen,  aber  beffen  nngeai^tet  arbeitet  fie  nad^ 
tt)ie  tjor  h^n  gan^en  XaQ.  15.  ^a  fie  arm  unb  fran!  ift,  n)ot(en 
n)ir  i()r  (^elb  geben,  fie  tviti  e§  aber  nic^t  ^aben,  fonbern  fagt,  fie 
tt)olIe  lieber  fterben,  aU  ha'^  fie  meine  §nlfe  anne^men  ttJoKte. 


n. 

1.  Alas  for  these  poor  people  !  2.  Although  the  weather 
is  so  cold,  they  have  no  warm  clothes.  3.  Not  only  have 
they  no  warm  clothes,  but  they  have  also  no  bread  and 
no  fire.  4.  I  should  like  to  give  them  something,  only  I  do 
not  i;now  whether  they  would  accept  it.  5.  They  would  to 
be  sure  accept  no  money;  nevertheless  you  can  help  them. 
6.  Either  you  can  give  them  potatoes,  or  you  can  look  for 
wood  and  make  a  fire.  7.  I  will  get  some  potatoes;  mean- 
time you  light  the  fire.  8.  Neither  you  nor  I  can  cook 
potatoes  without  burning  them.  9.  It  is  true,  I  can  not 
cook  potatoes;  on  the  other  hand  I  can  bake  meat  ven 
well.  10.  While  the  meat  is  cooking,  give  the  children  these 
vegetables,  in  order  that  they  may  have  something  to  eat 
at  once.  11.  Since  I  have  caught  cold  I  have  not  been  able 
to  eat  anything.  12.  Try  nevertheless  to  drink  this  coffee; 
besides  I  have  some  white  bread,  which  you  can  eat. 
13.  Alas  for  me,  that  I  cannot  work !  14.  Until  I  can  work 
again  the  children  will  have  nothing  to  eat.  15.  Although 
we  have  little  money,  we  will  nevertheless  help  you 
as  long  as  you  are  sick.  16.  Accordingly  I  will  take  the 
children  with  me,  as  I  promised  you. 


SECOND  SERIES. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    SENTENCES  I. 
USE  OF  THE  AKTICLES. 

(66.)  1.  SDa§  ^artenfpiel  ift  ein  ^rieg.  mmtj,  2.  SDte 
©eid)i^te  jott  feme  SoOrebuerin  fein.  ((Sd^.)  3.  ^te  ^DZenfc^en 
fiub  gefd^affen  fiir  bie  a^cnfc^eii.  (5c^.)  4.  5(m  ^aum  be§ 
©c^tDeigen^  ^dngt  feine  gruc^t,  ber  gviebe.  (®^r.)  5.  2)ie  9teU= 
gion,  biefe  ^oc^ter  be§  63inimeB,  ift  bie  getreue  ^efd^rtin  be§ 
a^enfc^eit.  Wf.)  6.  S)ie  Surest  be§  ^obe§  iftbeg  SeDen§  fc^arfe 
SSiirje.  (9lucf.)  T.  ^ie  93iutter  lag  auf  ben  S^nieen  Dor  bent  '^dtt 
unb  I)atte  ben  ^rm  um  if)r  ftofjiicube^  ^^inb  gefcl^Iagen.  (§ei).)  8. 
^^rdnen  ftanben  bem  atteii  Tlanm  in  ben  5Iugen.  (§aiiff.)  9. 
5((-3  nun  ber  SD^ai  fic^  ju  (Snbe  ncigte,  unb  ber  SBalb  iin  erften  (^riin 
ftanb,  !am  ein  53rief.  (^e^.)  10.  ^ie  (5Iegien  ()offe  id)  auf  htn 
©onnabenb  ju  fc^icfen,  unb  benfe  ben  ^J}^ontag  barauf  fetOft  5U 
fommen.  (@.)  11.  SSenn  id^  nur  im  SSinter  einige  3eit  6ei  3I)nen 
fein  !ann!  {(^,)  12.  Qn  bem  ^tamin  be»  un§  um^lOefannten 
(Sa(on§,  in  ber  ^^^einftra^e  ^0.  21,  brannte  ein  IjeKeg  geuer. 
(^et).)  13.  Tldn  ^ater  fc()ien  mit  ben  ^einigcn  in  ber  (SdjtDci^ 
nid)t.  im  beften  dnutierftdnbni^  [(Sinl)erftdnbni§]  5U  leben.  G^auff.) 
14.  ©ie  Uerlangen  if)ren  Oberft,  ben  Wa^c,  ^uriic!.  (@d^.)  15. 
Sidi  (efjnte  ba§  ^i(b  bc»  Drcfteg.  ha^  fie  eben  in  ber  §anb  l)ielt, 
ftidfd)tueigenb  an  bie  3Sanb.  M^ZarUtt.)  16.  !5)ie  !(eine  acf)tidl)rigc 
©den  ftanb  bla§  unb  ftumm  baOei.  (^etj.)  It.  2)a§  gtiidlic^e  alte 
^aar  tierbringt  bie  gtittermoc^en  abtnec^fefnb  im  btii^enben 
Stalien  unb  im  luftigen  ^ari».  (?euau.)  18.  (Sr  luanbelte,  in 
feinen  fc^mer5lic§en  (^ebanfen  uertieft,  iiOer  bie  9i()cinbrUc!e  htm 
alten  ©tragburg  5U.  (^ei).)  19.  !$)ie  ©tabt  (ag  bereit§  im  ©d^tafe, 
unb  and)  im  §anfe  be§  ^ommanbanten  tvav  fd)on  aik^  5ur  'knijt 
gegangen.  (SSerner.)    20.  ©anj  cbcnfo  ftanb  SQ^ic^elangelo  5mifc§en 

d35 


336  EXEBCISES. 

^ergangen'^eit  unb  gufunft.  (®.)  21.  ®a0  tvax  in  ber  ^^at 
(^otteS  ginger.  (@(^.)  22.  ^(^  mug  ^nnbert  t)on  biefen  neu 
brutfen  laffen.  (®(^.)  23.  3tnfang  Wdx^  gie^t  ber  ^aifer  norb= 
vo'dxt^,  tDQ^renb  Siemens  nad)  ^om  ^nrMfe^rt.  (^.  @r.)  24.  gur 
^orgefd^ic^te  biefe§  ^uffa^eg  ^ah^  id)  golgenbe§  gu  bemerfen. 
(tar^Iee.)'  25.  (^§  freut  mic^,  ha^  ©ie  je^t  toCftcinbig  gered^t^ 
fertigt  bafte^en,  fagte  er  gu  (Srflerem.  (Sinterfelb.)  26.  SDe§ 
a)iorgen§  ben!'  an  beinen  ©ott,  be§  5(benb§  ben!'  nn  beinen  ^ob. 
(S^r.)  27.  Siebe  ma^t  ben  ^liigften  gum  S^^arren.  (@)3r.)  28. 
a^ein  ^ater  beftimmte  ntic^,  aU  id)  20  Qa^re  alt  unb  gut  getrac^fen 
Wax,  5um  ©olbaten.  (^auff.)  29.  (Sr  tnar  48  Qa^re  alt,  at§  er 
e:arbinat  murbe.  (§.  ®r.)  30.  ^ie§  ift  IXrfad^e,  hci^  id)  ben 
aJ^eifterl"  fo  tange  be^ielt.  (@(^.)  31.  (Sr  iDar  jc^on  langft  SSitt- 
tner  [SSitmer]  gemorben.  (C^auff.)  32.  (Sie  finb  6oIbat  mie  id§, 
unb  ju  unferem  ^erufe  ge^ort  nun  einmal  bie  ©efa^r.  (Seruer.) 
(67.)  1.  Tlit  feftem  ©c^ritt  ging  er  tno^l  cine  ^albe  ©tunbe 
in  fetnem  Qelte  auf  unb  nieber.  ((Sber«.)  2.  ^c^  ^atte  nie*  gebad^t, 
hai  in  bem  ernften,  flillen  SJiann  ein  fold^er  Duett  \)on  §umor 
fpruble.f  (§e^.) 

1      THEME  L 

USE  OF  THE  AUTICLES. 

1.  Life  is  an  eternal  war,  and  only  death  brings  us  peace. 
2.  I  do  not  like  history,  for  it  tells  only  of  war  and  of 
death.  3.  Man  was  not  created  for  war,  but  for  peace 
and  for  happiness.  4.  The  old  woman  held  the  child  in 
her  arms,  while  I  was  reading  the  letter.  5.  Her  son 
wrote  the  letter  Wednesday  and  he  will  come  himself  Sun- 
day. 6.  He  went  away  in  February.  7.  In  summer  my 
friends  are  in  Switzerland,  but  in  winter  they  live  in 
Rhine  street.  8.  Have  you  seen  the  picture  of  little 
Henry?  9.  Old  Charles  sent  it  to  me,  when  I  was  in 
Southern  Germany.  10.  I  love  the  good  and  wise  books, 
and  I  am  now  reading  Goethe.  11.  When  I  was  in  Italy  I 
spent  several  weeksj  in  old  Rome  and  in  beautiful  Florence. 


^Wilhelm  Meister,  a  novel  by  Goethe. 
See  332.3.    f  333.36.    :|:230. 


EXERCISES.  337 

12.  Italy  is  tlie  most  beautiful  country  on  earth.  13.  The 
children  go  early  to  bed,  and  when  we  came  back,  they  al- 
ready lay  asleep.  14  We  have  at  least  a  hundred  of  his 
letters,  in  the  first  we  read  the  following.  15.  He  was  70 
years  old  when  the  death  of  his  wife  made  him  a  widower. 
16.  "VVe  visit  him  twice  a  week.  17.  We  always  find  him  at 
home  of  a  morning.  18.  He  is  the  brother  of  my  old  mas- 
ter, and  he  was  formerly  a  soldier.  19.  I  have  never 
known  so  good  a  man.  20.  He  has  been  very  ill,  but  such 
a  man  does  not  fear*  death.  21.  We  passed  half  the  win- 
ter in  Berlin. 

HiLUstbative  seistences  h. 
adjectives. 

(115.)  1.  5Iti  bemfelljen  5l6enb  fanb  nod^  em  ^Ibfd^teb  ftatt, 
ahcx  luir  ein  brieflic^er.  (^e^.)  2.  ^ie  ganje  alte  2BeIt  fe^t 
bie  miitterlic^e  Siebe  iiOer  bie  Udterlicl^e.  (3.  ^.  9^.) 

(116.)  1.  ®te  SSett  iDirb  alt  unb  \v\xh  tuieber  fimg,  bod^ 
Dcr  TltnU^  fjofft  immer  ^erbefferung.  (®(^.)  2.  ©bel  fel  ber 
9J^eufcf),  ^^iilfreid)  uub  gut.  (®.)  3.  Unermej^Hc^  unb  mieublld^, 
Hegft  bu  t)or  tntr  au^gelireitet,  alte§,  fjeilige^,  emige§  SD^eer. 
{%,  (3x,)  4.  3c^  wiii  mic^  frei  xtnb  gliicflid^  traumen.  (@(^.) 
5.  SDer  5tlte  iijar  fremb  in  biefer  ©tabt,  er  fiiljlte  ftc^  emfam. 
(§au[f.)  6.  5)ocr)  r;att'  tc^  cinen  ^ruber,  \>tn  ^ruber  fc^Iugt  Q^r 
tobt  [tot].  (®eiM.)  1.  (Bo  Utid)  ^attt  fie  ber  ^iiitftler  felten  ge* 
fe^en..  ((Sbers.)  8.  Qn  emem  ^^al,  bei  nrmen  §irtei!,  erfc^teu 
. . . .  em  3}iabcl)en,  fc^on  imb  ttjunberbar.  {@(^.)  9.  ^  fe^t  bie 
^rone  golben  if)r  in§  nupraune  §aar.  (U().) 

(121.)  1.  ©0  tDar  i{)nen  immer  gtuetfello0,  ha'^  er  eine 
geiftige  aRarf)t  erften  9^ange§  ....  fel.  (?aube.)  2.  §ilfe  ift  jebeS* 
mat  \)a^  ^inb  eifrigen  ^eftreben§.  (53en3et=®teruau.) 

(123.)  1.  ©in  folc()cr  bimfeKjaftcr  unb  uubaterlanbifd^er 
90?enfcl)  ^t  §o(^t)erratr}  [^rat]  begaugeu.  (^o^.)  2.  ®er  grembe 
erfunbigte  fi^  m6)  beu  ^efi^eru  \?er{c^iebener  gro^ett  ©ebftube. 


*ji(^  fftn^ten  t)cc 


338  EXERCISES. 

(124.)  1.  0,  fonnteft  bu  in  meinem  ^nnern  lefen,  trie  ttjentg 
SSater  uitb  ©o^ii  folc^  einc^  9flu^me§  \mxti)  gemefeu !  ((^.)  2. 
SSielgoIbene  33itbcr  fa^  ic!^  urn  mtc^  fc^trebeu.  (^%uer.)  3.  3BeIc^ 
anberer  ©c^ulb*  tierflagt  bicf)  bein  ©etDtffen  ?  (®cf).)  4.  (Sie  Der- 
lebten  ntanc^eu  faueren  ^ag.  (®d|.)  5.  SDu  ti:)Dtlteft  atten  biefen 
(^lan^  berlaffeti !  (@d^.) 

(125.)  1.  (Sr  tuar  beim  ^onig  5tDeit)otte  ©tunben.  (S(^.)  2. 
SDa  moc^t'  ic^  ^infinfen  auf  bie  ^iiiee  unb  rufen  :  bu  unenblii^er 
lieber  ^ater,  n)ie  ift  beine  SBelt  fo  fi^bu  !  (^ocfi.)  3.  G^i'mftig  ift 
biefe  Sage  fiir  un§  europdifc^en  ^tduber.  (Berber.)  4.  S)u  im  §im^ 
met,  ^ilf  mir  armeu,  fc^ir)ar5en  SO^anu!  (Staubius.)  5.  ^a,  unb 
bu  mirft  aud^  ntic^  armen  ^riippel  nidjt  gang  Dergeffen.  ((Sbers.) 

(l26.)  1.  @r  bringt  fein  treu  oltengli]^  §er5  ^uriicf.  (®c^.) 
2.  (S§  ift  ber  ^rieg  ein  ro^,  getDaltfam  ganbmer!.  {B(i).) 

(127.)  1.  2Bir  joHen  !eine  eigene  ^buige  me()r  ^aben, 
feinen  eingeborenen  §errn.  (<Sd^.)  2.  $8ie(e  raei^e  ©c^mdnc 
jd^trimmen  ftiU  auf  be§  (Surota§  SBogen.  {TlnUn.)  • 

(128.)  1.  (^eeubigt  nac^  langem,  berberblidjen  (Streit,  Wax 
bie  faiferlofe,  bie  fd)rec!(id)e  B^it-  (^c^^-)  2.  lieber  $l)rgo§  unb 
Saranba  ^atte  man  bie  ^Befi^ungen  be§  (^riftlic^  ornienifd^en 
giirften  £eo  erreic^t.  (Sflaumer.)  3.  ^a§  ift  ein  feltfam  number' 
bare§  B^ic^^i^  •  ®^  ^^^^^  ^iele,  bie  ha§>  nic^t  gefeljen.  (®d^.) 

(129.)  1.  Siebe  bie  ^uten  mit  treuem  muii)e  [SRute],  bann 
^aft  bu  ha§>  (^ute.  (§ammer.)  2.  3eber  ^^iinftler  ift  ein  ^riefter : 
bag  ^ei^t,  ein  ^erfiinbiger  be§  (^ottlic^en.  (33urott).)  3.  ^er 
SSeife  befommt  alk§  t)on  ficl^,  ber  J^or  olleS  tion  anberen.  (3.  ^. 
^.)  4.  Df^eic^er,  frage  nict)t  ben  5trmen,  tt)ie  er  arm  gen)orben  ift. 
(aJJiitter.)  5.  ^er  ^rieb  ber  (Selbfter^altung  erlnac^t,  ha  ic^  etmag 
^oftbareres  ju  er^alten  \)aht  aB  mid).  (?eff.)  6.  Sd)  bring'  bir  auc§ 
mag  §iibf^e§  mit  t)om  (S^ni.  (@c^.)  1.  6ie  treten  unter  bie  gen=^ 
fter,  unb  empfangen,  ftatt  5IImofen,  Budermer!,  ^iiffe  unb  m^ 
man  i'^nen  fonft  5trtige§  geben  mag.  (®.) 

(130.)  1.  9lun  trugen  un§  ^bie  SSeHen  ftid  unb  fanft 
^erunter.  (tomer.)  2.  ©§  ift  leii^t  ben  ^ag,  fd)tt)er  bie  Siebe,  am 
fdjtDerften  bie  ^(etd^giiltigfeit  ju  ertragen.  (Some.) 

(140.)    1.  SDer  ©liter  ^i3d)fte0  biirfen  voix  bert^eibigen  [Der^ 


*See219.  2. 


EXERCISES.  339 

teibigen]  gegen  (^sietualt.  (ad).)  2.  ^ItteS  (Sdjone  ift  fanft,  ba^cr 
fhib  bie  fc^bnften  golfer  bie  ruTjigften.  (3.  ^.  91.)  3.  SDer  gag 
§mifd)en  ^erfalleiicii  greiuibeii  ift  gemiifjiilid)  bcr  gvimmigfle  unb 
um^erfofjiilic^fte.  (®(^.)  4.  ^apfer  ift  ber  Somenfietjer,  tapfererift 
ber  SBeltOc^tuimjer,  bodj  am  tapferfteu  ift,  toer  fid)  felbft  ()e5mang. 
(Berber.)  5.  (Sin  ebter  §elb  ift,  ber  fiir§  SSaterlaub,  ein  eblerer, 
ber  fiir  be§  ^anbe§  3So^I,  ber  ebelfte,  ber  fiir  bie  SD^eufdj^eit 
fiimpft.  (Berber.)  6.  3u  ben  ^ropen  finb  bie  ©etucidjfe  Don 
frifc^erem  ^riin,  mit  (jriif^cren  unb  gidnjenberen  ^Icittcrn  gejiert, 
aU  in  h^n  nLirblid)crcn  (Srbftric^en.  (^um.)  1.  ®er  !(are  ^ac§ 
fc^eint  am  fc^onftcn  in  fcinem  ru^igen  Sauf,  ha^  tiefe  M^^v 
om  er[)aOenften  in  fcincr  ^etuegung.  (@(^.)  8.  ^c^  fterbe !  ha^ 
ift  balb  gefagt  unb  Otllbcr  noc^  get^an.  (®.)  9.  'Diefe  jungen 
SBdume,  unb  e§  iDaren  gerabe  bie  aIIerfct)onften,  be^ielten  immer 
aKe  i^re  3rt)eige.  (?lnberfon.)  10.  Sebe§  bcr  a}lenfd)^eit*  ermiefene 
Unred^t  rcic^et  auf»  fiird)terU(^fte  fid)  felOft.  (Berber.)  11.  5ltter^ 
liebft  fc^offen  bie  golbencn  (SDnnen(id)ter  burd)  ha§>  bid^te  ^^an* 
nengriin.  (C»ei.) 

(144.)  1.  3c^  bin  bod)  erfc^redlic^  neugierig  mie  fie  nur 
au§fe^en  mag.  (tomer.) 

(145.)  1.  Xcx  kronen  miirbig  fein,  ift  me[)r  al§  kronen 
trogen.  (^rouegf.)  2.  ^ie  Settler  finb  ben  gunben  feinb,  unb 
bie  gunbe  ben  ^ettlcrn.  {Bpx.)  3.  @§  ift  bem  Tltn\^tn  Ieid}ter 
unb  getaufigcr  5U  fd)meic^eln  al§  5U  loben.  (3.  ^.  9^.)  4.  ®en 
SSein  aber  tran!  cr  gleid)  au§  ben  gdffern,  of)ne  ba^  er  ein  ©Ia§ 
nott)ig  [notig]  r)atte.  (3.  ®r.) 

(146.)  i.  g(orcn§  ift  rcid)  an  feinen  2Ser!en.  (^.  ®r.)  2. 
(Sr  fii^Ite  fid)  nun  fo  arm  an  (^nabe,  an  (^iitern,  unb  fremb  in 
bem,  toa§  er  Uon  Sugenb  auf  aB  fein  (5igent()um  [©igentumj 
betradjten  fonntc.  (®.) 

(147.)  1.  (Sr  fannte  bie  D^amen  ber  auf  bem  SSege  nad) 
Valencia  licgenben  (Stdbte.  ((Sbcrg.)  2.  5(u^er  ben  Don  ©panien 
mitgebrad)tcn  (Solbaten,  I)atte  ^arl  bie  Oor  9[RaiIanb  fiegreid)en 
^ruppen  bei  fic^.  (^.  (3x.)  3.  '^^iefe  (Stabt  lag  auf  ber  am  norb^ 
lic^ften  in§  30^eer  I)ert)orragenben  ©pi^e  5lfri!a^,  ha,  wo  je^t  ^ 
^uni§  liegt.  (®rube.) 

*See  222.  Vk 


340  BXEBGISES. 

THEME  n. 

ADJECTIVES. 

1.  Who  does  not  love  old. friends  more  than  new  ones? 
2.  The  young  man  had  to*  leave  the  city  and  go  into  a 
strange  one.  3.  Never  had  his  home  appeared  to  him  so 
beautiful.  4.  Now  he  was  alone  among  strangers,  and  he 
felt  himself  sad  and  lonely.  5.  But  he  found  new  friends, 
good  and  helpful  (ones).  6.  He  had  often  dreamed  him- 
self rich  and  powerful ;  now  he  had  become  rich,  but  he 
was  also  old  and  unhappy.  7.  He  gave  us  a  glass  of  good 
beer  and  a  piece  of  black  bread.  8.  With  the  help  of  eager 
endeavor  he  became  a  very  learned  man.  9.  What  a  spiri- 
tual power  this  man  has  been.  10.  Has  he  truly  committed 
such  a  treason  ?  11.  Several  strange  men  have  asked  after 
the  owner  of  this  building.  12.  Such  beautiful  maidens 
appear  seldom  in  our  valley.  13.  Many  a  noble  man  have 
these  soldiers  struck  dead.  14.  O,  ye  poor  shepherds,  what 
a  happy  year  have  I  passed  in  your  valley.  15.  We  poor 
men  never  see  our  king.  16.  The  king  is  good  ;  he  will 
surely  help  thee,  poor  unhappy  man. 

17.  Forget  not  the  poor  and  unhappy.  18.  Only  the 
eternal,  the  unending,  is  godlike.  19.  The  true  artist  must 
only  love  the  eternally  beautiful.  20.  Have  you  brought 
me  anything  pretty?  21.  You  foolish  children  always 
want  to  have  something  new.  22.  The  fool  does  not  un- 
derstand anything,  whatever  wise  thing  one*  may  say 
to  him.  23.  The  most  costly  thing  which  I  have  to  pre- 
serve is  not  my  own  life. 

24.  The  two  enemies  look  at  each  f  other  grimly.  25. 
I  bear  more  easily  the  hatred  of  my  enemy  than  his  indif- 
ference. 26.  The  noblest  man  fights,  not  only  for  his 
fatherland,  but  for  humanity.  27.  The  brave  man  van- 
quishes his  enemies,  but  only  the  bravest  can  vanquish 
himself.  28.  In  the  more  northern  countries  the  plants 
are  smaller  p-nd  less  beautiful  than  in  the  tropics.    29.  The 


EXERCISES.  •  341 

most  terrible  movements  of  the  ocean  are  the  most  sub- 
lime. 20.  The  ocean  is  not  always  most  beautiful  when  it 
is  quietest.  31.  These  little  trees  which  have  kept  all  their 
twigs  are  charming.  32.  I  cannot  praise  a  man  quite  un- 
known to  me.  33.  The  brother,  by  three  years  younger,  is 
taller  than  the  older  one.  34  The  troops  victorious  at 
Tunis  now  had  to  go  to  the  city  lying  on  the  most  north- 
ern point  of  Africa. 


ILLUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES,  HL 
PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

(152.)  1.  SDer  $err  ^t  meiti  nod§  nie  bergeffen,  t^ergig, 
ntein  ^erj,  and)  feiner  nic^t.  (©ettert.)  2.  9Hc^t  metnet^atben, 
fonbern  mehtcr  8o§ne  megen,  feufjte  idf)  in  ber  finftcrcn  Dlac^t : 
§ei'r,  erf)a(te  un§  !  (M.) 

(154.)    1.  ^a  ift  ber  9^ing ©eOen  (Sieger,  fagte  id) 

(jaftig  unb  flecfte  if)n  in  ber  3erftrenung  an  ben  ginger,  orbentlic^ 
frof),  i^n  tDieber  5n  Ijaben.  (§et).)  2.  ®ie  9Zelfe  foil  man  nic^t 
t)cr)c^md()en,  fie  ift  be§  (partners  SSonne.  (®.)  3.  ^er  ^rief  htn 
hu  gefc()rieben,  er  mac^t  mid)  gar  nic^t  bang.  (§ei.)  4.  5lC(e§ 
ging  burd)  ein  gute§  $Beib,  melc^e^  nid}t  fern  iDofjnte.  {®.)  5. 
2)enn  mein  Siebc^en,  fie  fc^reibt  \va§>  id)  xijv  bic^tete.  {(B,)  6. 
^er  SSifle  ift  gut,  aber  3Sinb  nnb  SSetter  fdmpfen  bagcgen.  (@ci^.) 
T.  9JZand)er  ift  ein  33ofetr)ic^t  gemorben,  toeil  er  faf),  baf^  man  i^n 
bafiir  ^ielt.  ((lampe.)  8.  §ier  ein  (Sjemptar  be§  5l(manad§§. 
§umboIbt  fenbet  mir  beren  brei  au§  53ertin.  (@(^.)  9.  (Sriauben 
die  mir  eine  grage,  t3ie((eid)t  mai^t  bie  ^eantrt)ortung  berfelben 
^a^  Seitere  iiberftiiffig.  (®^iet.)  10.  (Sd^on  fangt  e§  an  ju  bdm= 
mern.  (®eibet.)  11.  (£^  regnet !  ©ott  fegnet  bie  (Srbe,  bie  fo 
burftigift.  ((Sn§Uu.)  12.  (S§  trarcn  einmal  fUnfunbjmanjig  3inn^ 
folbaten.  (^ubeiiou.)  13.  (£§  mar  aber  eine  5Irt  bon  ^ermirrnng 
iiber  bie  'Dieuerfctiaft  gefommen.  (?enjolb.)  14.  ®a  mar  e§  fait 
unb  finfter,  e§  fc^ricen  bie  9taben  Dom  ^ac§.  (abutter.)  15.  'i)ie 
Seute,  melcf)e  im  ^orfe  mDf)uten,  a^nten  gar  nic^tg  batjon  ;  benn 
eg  maren  gan^  gemo^nti^e  Seute.  (?eanber.)  16.  5)er  Qa^  ift 
parteiif(^,  aber  bie  S^iebe  ift  eg  noc^  me^v.  (^e(f.)    XT.  9?^it  meinen 


342  ^  EXERCISES. 

5lrBeiten  bartn  Inn  ic^  t)iel  beffer  gufrieben,  a(§  ic^  e§  mit  benen 
im  borigcn  3a!)re  bin.  (@d^.)  18.  ^anit  tt)dren  tt)ir  ©!Int)en, 
iinb  Uerbieutcii  e§  511  fcin.  (3c^.)  19.  3ft'§  jeuer  2^antn.tu§,  ben 
Supitcr  5u  9kt§  unb  ^afel  509  ?  (Sr  ift  e§.  (®.)  20.  SSer  ift 
ha?  fragte  er.  3c^  tun  e§,  antmortete  bie  Sitonigin.  (JBeauber.) 
(155.)  1.  m<^t^  2Sai:)re§  Idfst  *  fic^  Don  ber  3n!nnft  tDiffen. 
(®c^.)     2.  (£r  felbft  riicfte  fic^  ben  §tr»eiten  gautenil  Ijeran.  (®^iel.) 

3.  DZacI)  ber  3uU^9^e^oIution  crn)d[)Ite  er  fid)  ^ari§  ^nm  SSo^n^ 
orte.  (!^aube.)  4.  Unb  nnn  niiiffen  toir  nn§  trenneu.  SS>aiin  inir 
un§  mieberfeljen — trer  nieig  e^  ?  (®^iel)  5.  9}(an  miirbe  ein^ 
onber  beffcr  feuneit,  menn  fic^  ntcf}t  intnier  einer  bent  anberen 
gleicl)fte(len  moc^te.  (@.)  6.  Ste  f)ielten  fic()  lauQt  feft  aneinanber 
gebriich  nnb  fc()dmten  fic^  ifjrer  ^^fjrdnen  nicl)t.  (§ei).)  1.  ^erliere 
bic^  felbft  nnr  nid)t,  bann  Oleibft  bn  bet  jebem  53crlufte  reid^ 
genug.  (©ebaucr.)  8.  ^er  (^eijige  gonnt  fic^  fclber  bie  unfc^nlb- 
igften  ^ergniignngen  nic^t.  (trugge.) 

(156.)  1.  kBiegt  bie  mod'  mir  an§  ber  ©ruft  (@d^.)  2. 
SSer  berbnrb  mir  uneber  biefe§  S^apitel  ?  (toc^.)  3.  2)er  grembe 
irarf  bie  ©igarre  meg,  bie  i^m  Icingft  Qu^gegangen  Wax.  (^e^.) 

4.  9Zun  greift  mir  gn  nnb  feib  nic^t  faul.  (®.) 


THEME  nX 
PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

1.  If  you  have  the  ring,  do  not  forget  to  give  it  to  me. 
2.  I  gave  it  to  the  child  and  he  put  it  on  his  finger.  3.  I 
was  very  much  rejoiced  to  receive  your  letter  ;  if  it  was 
not  long,  it  was  very  well  written.  4.  The  young  girl 
wrote  it,  and  she  writes  me  many  letters.  5.  Give  it  to 
me.  I  want  to  read  what  is  f  in  it.  6.  You  may  read  it, 
but  you  must  not  speak  of  it.  7.  Is  not  this  man  a 
I  camp  ?  I  have  always  held  him  for  one.  8.  Allow  me  a 
question  about  it.  9.  Not  this  man,  but  a  brother  of  his  is 
the  scamp.  10.  I  know  his  history,  do  not  speak  to  me  of  it. 
11.  It  began  to  rain  and  it  became  so  cold  and  dark  that 
we  were  afraid.      12.    There  were   many  people   in   th^ 

*See343. 1.5d    f  fte^t. 


EXERCISES.  343 

house,  but  they  only  screamed  and  did  ^nothing,  for  they 
were  very  stupid  people.  13.  They  were  afraid,  and  I 
was  *  too,  but  I  said  nothing  of  it.  14.  He  is  not  contented 
with  his  work,  but  we  are.  15.  When  I  asked:  is  it  y(^u? 
he  answered  :  it  is  not  I,  it  is  we.  16.  If  you  are  un-. 
happy,  you  deserve  to  be  so.  17.  He  chose  himself  a 
friend  who  was  worthy  of  his  love.  18.  But  now  they 
have  parted,  and  they  are  ashamed  of  their  friendship. 
19.  They  hate  each  other  and  wish  never  to  see  each 
other  again.  20.  He  is  a  bad  man  ;  he  is  only  a  friend  to 
himself.  21.  When  one  loses  ones  self  one  has  lost  every 
thing.     22.  Don't  be  lazy  and  don't  spoil  my  work  for  me. 

ILLUSTRATIVE  SENTEIJ-CES  IV. 
POSSESSIVE  AND  DEMONSTEATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

(169.)  1.  ®ie§  grauenfc^irffal  ift  l^or  alien  mein§.  (®.) 
2.  ^f)ue  beiue  ^flic^t,  ic^  ttjerbe  meine  t^un.  (®.)  3.  dJldn  ^t^ 
f)eimniB  [-ni^]  !ann  eucl^  gar  nic^t^  nii^en,  tr>enn  ic^  nic^t  gubor 
t)C[§>  cure  ^abe.  (^e[[.)  4.  3c^  freue  mic^  meine§  Seben^  f  in  biefer 
^etjenb,  bie  fiir  folc^e  Seelen  cjefc^affen  ift,  wk  bie  mehte.  (®.) 

(160.)  1.  ©eitbem  ber  Honig  feinen  (So^n  bcrloren,  t^er- 
traut  ev  SSentgcnt  bcr  (Seiuen  ntefjr.  (®.)  2.  SSarum  foKtcn  luir 
nic^t  mimfrfjcn,  ncOcn  ben  Unfrigen  gn  ru^en  ?  {®.)  3.  ^a  bin 
ic^  tDieber !  ®a§  ift  meine  §iitte !  3c§  fte^e  iDieber  auf  bem 
SJ^einigen!  (@cf).) 

(161.)  1.  "^zx  (Srnft,  wd6)tv  i^m  anf  ber  ©tirn  lag  nnb  au§ 
ben  5(ngen  fc[)aute,  gaO  iljin  haS'  ^Infefjcn  eine§  ^OZanncS.  (^ber«.) 
2.  3:obt  [tot]  Iat3  er  ha  in  feinem  ^alafte,  i^m  jn  .^auptcu  § 
ftanb  ha§>  unnoUcnbete  (^emiilbe.  (^.  (Bv.)  3.  D^oc)^  jittert  i()r  ber 
©d)rec!  biirc^  {ebe  Dkrtie.  (^eff.)  4.  Sturj  t)orI)er  wax  cinein  in 
glorenj  ber  S^opf  al)i3efrf)(agen  tDorben.  (C).  ^v.) 

(166.)  1.  (eie  finb)  meine  Slinber  nnb  bie  meiner  lieben 
(Sd^inagerin,  antmortete  ber  ^eiftlic^e.  (^^rei.)  2.  !I)er  Xjat  ben 
©4ilb,  be§  ift  bie  ^ron',  ber  tt)irb  ha§>  Meinob  bringen  I  (U^ 

*t^ot  eg.    t  219.3.    X  222.11.    §  Antique  phrt^se  ;  at  his  head. 


344  £XE£€ISES. 

3.  ^ie  SBefc^eiben'^eit  ]oUtt  bte  ^ugenb  berer  fetn,  benen  btc 

Qitberen  fe^Ien.  (53vummer.)  4.  Xtx  ift'§,  \)a§>  ift  er !  5)er  rettete 
bie  Stonigin.  (@(^.)  6.  ^iele  ijermec^feln  gar  bie  9}iittel  imb  ben 
Q\v^d,  erfreuen  jid^  an  jenen.  .oI)ne  biefen  im  5luge  §u  befallen. 
(®f5  6.  9^ur  einjelnen  ©iinftlingen  t^eilte  [tettte]  er  ^teg  ober 
3ene§  gur  ^(nfic^t  mtt.  (^.  ®r.)  Y.  SSaren  ba§  bie  Sippen,*  bie  er 
fo  oft  gefii^t,*  bie§  bie  golbigen  $aare,  bie  er  fo  oft  urn  feine 
§anb  gemitfelt  ?  (Srenjel)  8.  S)ie  betDeine  md)t  me^r,  bie  fd)on 
5ur  S^u^e  gegangen,  bie  bett)eine,  bie  fiirc^ten  ben  f ommenben  ^ob. 
(Berber.)  9.  5)ie  in  feiner  ©trafje  tr»o^nten,  fannten  i^n  atte. 
(^e^.)  10.  ^a,  \)a^  roaren  bie  5lugen,  bie  treuen  flaren  5tugen, 
bie  er  t)orf;er  gefe^en.  (®piel.)  11.  ^a§  tDoUen  a((e  $eroeii  fein, 
unb  feiner  ift  $err  Don  fic§.  ((S.)  12.  ^auer:  „©nabige  §erren, 
einen  Q3iffen  nnb  ^rnn!."  ©olbat:  „©i,  ha^  mng  immer  fanfen 
nnb  frcffen."  (@d^.) 

(168-71.)  1.  ^emiemgen,  ber  t>a§>  (Sc^reiben  ber  S^tegier* 
ung  iiberbringt,  ftofet  er  feinen  ^olc!^  in  bie  ^ruft.  (^.  ®r.)  2. 
<Bk  (bie  ^teligion)  ift  tnie  ha§>  $DZeer,  }e  nie()r  man  baffelbe  beob* 
Oi^tet,  befto  imenblid^er  fc^eint  e§.  (33rummer.)  3.  5(m  meiften 
fc^abet  ber  bofe  1Rat§  [^at]  bemfelOen,  ber  i^n  gegeben  ^at. 
(@|)r.)  4.  D^lotanb  ritt  l^interm  ^ater  ^er,  tnit  beffen  ©peer  unb 
©d^ilbe.  (U^.)  5.  ^ie  Sugenb  iiberiDinbet  ben  (Sturm  ber 
Seibenfd^aften,  ^a^  fitter  unterliegt  bemfelben.  {<Bpx4 


THEME  IV. 

POSSESSIVE  AND  DEMONSTRATIVE  PEONOUNa 

1.  He  does  not  do  his  duty  and  I  will  not  do  mine.  2. 
The  secret  is  ours,  it  cannot  be  of  use  to  you,  and  it  will 
never  become  yours.  3.  I  rejoice  in  the  beauty  f  of  this 
country,  which  seems  to  be  created  for  me  and  mine.  4. 
Each  one  loves  his  own  (people),  his  own  (possession) 
best.  5.  We  travel  no  more,  we  live  quietly  among  our 
own  people.  6.  He  had  the  appearance  of  deep  earnest- 
ness, but  when  I  looked  into  his  eyes  I  saw  that  he  was 


« 439.30.  t^iaa. 


EXEKCISES.  345 

laugMng.  7.  My  hands  tremble,  fear  penetrates  every 
nerve,  I  cannot  look  liim  in  the  face.  8.  What  do  you 
fear ;  he  cannot  cut  off  your  head  ?  9.  The  fright  has 
spoiled  my  pleasure,  too.  10.  These  are  my  children,  the 
others  are  those  of  my  brother.  11.  This  (man)  has  all 
the  virtues,  to  this  one  they  are  all  lacking,  even  modesty, 
12.  He  is  always  promising  to  tell  us  this  or  that  thing, 
but  he  really  has  nothing  to  say  to  us.  13.  These  weep, 
because  they  fear  death,  those  because  they  are  not 
already  gone  to  rest.  14.  No,  those  are  not  my  true  friends, 
those  I  do  not  know.  15.  These  (fellows)  want  to  be  the 
friends  of  every  one,*  but  not  one  of  them  knows  what 
friendship  is.  16.  That  is  the  one  who  gave  the  bad  ad- 
vice to  the  government,  17.  He  is  the  same  who  brought 
us  the  writing.  18.  His  head  will  be  cut  ofL  19,  Youth 
rejoices  in  life,"!"  age  contemplates  it. 

HiIiUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  V. 
INTEKKOGATIVE  AND  KELATIVE  PEONOUNa 

(173.)  1.  28eg  ift  ber  ©rbenraum  ?  ^e§  gteigiGen.  SSe§ 
ift  bie  §errfc^aft  ?  ®e§  ^erftanbigen.  (Berber.)  2.  SSa§  Derfiirjt 
mir  bie  Qzxt  ?  ^()atig!eit.  2Ba^  macl)t  fte  unertraglic^  lang  ? 
TOlfeigsang.  ((^.)  3.  3^i5er  ift  eiti  unbraud)linrer  SQknn?  S)er 
nid^t  befe()ten  imb  nic^t  tjefjorc^en  fann.  (®.)  4.  SSoburd^  tDirb 
SBiirb'  unb  ©(iic!  er fallen  lange  3eit  ?  S<^  nmm  :  burc^  niii)t§ 
me^r  aU  burc!^  ^efc^eiben()eit.  (?ogau.) 

(174.)  1.  3SeIrf^e^3  ^(luje  \md)t  ilber  bie  ©d^irffate  ber  Wtn^ 
fc^en  ?  SSetc^e  gerccfjte  §anb  tl^eilt  [teilt]  bie  ©liter  be§  Selieng 
au§  ?  (©ngel.)  2.  3Setc^'  ein  ©efii^l  mu^t  bu,  o  grower  Tlann, 
6ei  ber  ^ere^rung  biefer  SJ^enge  ^aben.  (®.) 

(175.)  1.  3Sag  inccfen  nu§  bem  ©djtummer  mtc^  fiir  fiij^e 
flange  boc^  ?  {\X%)  2.  SSa^  fiir  ein  gottlicljer  Sllenfc^  miigte  ber 
nid^t  merben,  ber  fic^  entJcft(offc,J  immer  treu  511  fein  I  (3acobi.) 

(176.)  1.  ^ittft  bu,  mein  ©o^n,  frei  bleiben,  fo  lerne  voa^ 
3fie(f)te^ !  (®.)    2.  SSer  feine  ^lage  ^at,  ber  mad^t  fid^  ttJeld&c 

*  eltte«  Seben.    t  geiiitive  case.    :|:  332.3. 


34G  EXERCISES. 

(.^o^eBuc.)  3.  ®r  tt)trb  (^elb  tjon  tnir  borgett,  tuenn  er  fetbft 
tretc^eg  ju  tierlei^en  ^at  (Seff.)  4.  SSag  fi^t  S^r  ^ier  auf  bent 
naffen  ©teiti,  9J^utter  Sami^  ?  fragte  ic^.  (^e^.)  5.  2Ba§  tDeint 
i^r,SJlabc^eti?  223a§  flagt  t§r,  SSeikr?  (»uer.)  6.  0  e:iott,  tt)a§ 
iftba§.^%b  fc^on!  (§ei).)  t.  SSa§  bie{e§  9}Mbc^en  loemerHd^ 
tt)irb,  bad^te  fie.  (grei.) 

(178.)  1.  S^aQalie  t)atte  tierfc^iebene  S3(umen  bon  feltfamer 
(SJeftalt  gebroc^en,  bie  SSil^elmen  boKig  unbefannc  tDarett,  unb 
ttad^  beren  Sf^amen  er  fragte.  (®.)  2.  SDie  ^elbengro^e,  mit  ber  fie 
ftarben,  na^m  fiir  ben  (S^IanOen  ein,  fiir  meli^en  lie  ftarben.  (@c^.) 
3.  9^i(f)t  an  bie  (filter  §ange  bein  ^er^,  bie  ha§>  2ch^n  t)ergdnglic^ 
gieren !  (®(^.)  4.  Tlan  !annte  ben  geinb  t)ott!ommen,  bem  man 
je^t  gegeniiber  ftanb.  (Bdj.) 

(179.)  1.  SSer  aKgubiet  bege^rt,  ^at  o(te§  oft  tierloren. 
(Sici^tnjer.)  2.  ^ie  9}^enfcf)en  finb  nic^t  immer,  \va^  fie  fc^einen, 
(Seff.)  3.  SSa0  ic^  t)ermod)te,  '^ab^  t(^  gem  get^an.  (®.)  4. 
SBem  fie  erfd^eint,  loirb  au§  fic^  felbft  entriicft.  SSem  fie  ge^i3rte, 
tDarb  5n  ^ofi)  begliirft.  {(§>.)    5.  Sa§  t)or  oKen  ^ingen  bir  er^ciljlen 

xva§>  in  ^abt)lon  fiir  einen  fd^onen  ©toff  icl^  bir  gefouft. 

{?eff.)  6.  Sc^  tiebe,  n^er  mir  @nteg  t^nt.  i^d).)  1.  SSer  fie  (bie 
DZac^ric^t)  ^orte,  f(^reibt  ^Safari,  bem  begann  ber  53oben  nnter 
htn  gii^en  gu  manfen,  ber  tmrbe  bleic^  tDie  ber  ^ob.  (^.  @r.)  8. 
SSen  ba§  ©liic!  p  ftiirjen  benft,  ber  mirb  oft  erft  t)on  i^m  er^oben. 

($!ogau.)    9.  2Ser  nie  fein  ^rob  mit  3^f}rdnen  a^ ber  fennt 

euc^  nic^t,  if)r  ^immlifc^en  Wd6^t^  !  (@.)  10.  9^un,  licben  greunbe, 
luer  ratten  [raten]  !ann,  ber  rat^e  [rate],  (l^eifeiri^.)  11.  2Ba§ 
bem  ^erjen  gefallt,  ha§>  fnc^en  bie  5(ngcn.  (@^r.)  12.  SSeffen 
2^h^n  feinen  frent,  meffen  IXmgang  jeber  fc^eut,  ber  I)at  nic^t 
t)iel  fro^e  3eit.  {^\>v.)  13.  2Ser  mir  bringt  bie  Sfron^  er  foil  fie 
tragen.  (@c^.)  14.  3^  ber  ^iittefte^t  ein£el)nftul)(. . .  ber  bar:= 
onf  fi^t,  ber  ift  gtiicflic^.  (^ei.)  15.  !J)er  ift  ber  §err  ber  (^be, 
iDert^re  ^tefe  migt.  (9?ot)ati8.)  16.  SSer  itn§  bc^a^It,  ba^  ift  ber 
^aifer.  (^d^.)  11.  ^a  ftng  er  an  ^u  (anfen,  ma§  er  lanfen  fonnte. 
(?eanber.)  18.  SSa§  i^rer  aucl^  •maxkn  mag,  nnb  tro  t^r  fie  trieber 
fe'^en  roerbet,  i^r  merbet  fie  in  grieben  n)ieberfe^en.  (^e^.)  19. 
SSa§  tc^  au(^  in  biefem  ^a'^re  bertoren  '^abc,  meine  (Selbftad^t^ 
ung  ^abe  t^  nid^t  Derloren.  [%xel)    20.  SlSev  bu  an^  feift,*  idft 

*  332.5a. 


EXERCISES.  847 

njiinfc^c  ^etturtg  bir.  (@(^.)  21.  ®a§  ^efte,  nja§  bu  miffen 
faimft,  barfft  bu  bem  ^uben  boc^  nic^t  fagen.  (®.)  22.  ^Itteg  ift 
5u  ertrageu,*  \m§>  nur  eiuen  ^(ugenblicf  bauert.  (3.  ^.  9ft.)  23. 
2)n§  SSenige,  iua§  cr  fprac^,  murbe  mlt  einem  tDibrigen  3:on 
nu§gefto6en.  (^c^.)  24.  (S^  ift  nic^t  irbtfc^e  mu\\l  tt)a§  mic^  \o 
freubig  macljt.  (U(}.)    25.  (S§  ift  nur  ein§,  tDa§  un§  retten  fann. 

(180.)  1.  §ier  liegt  ntir  etmaS  auf  bem  ^erjen,  iroriiOer 
ic^  aufgeflart  gu  fein  triiinf^te.f  (<S.)  2.  SSer  n)ei^  ii?orau§  ba§ 
^riinnlein  quillt,  tt)orau§  W'xx  trinfeu  roerbeu.  (9leim.)  3.  Sf^ 
ftel;e  i30u  bem  <a\an!enbette  auf,  auf  ba§  micl^  ber  (Sc^mer^  iiber 
ben  ^erluft  meiue§  Wanm^  marf.  (?e[f.^  4.  Somit  eiuer  fiinbigt, 
bamit  mirb  er  gcftraft.  (a|3u.)  5.  ijod^mutl)  [^oc^mut]  ift'g,  \\)o^ 
burci§  bie  (Sucjel  fieleu,  morau  ber  |)oHettgeift  ben  SJlenfc^en  fagt. 

(®Cf).) 

(181.)  1.  SScirum  bin  ic^'§  adetu,  ber  uucjeliebt,  auf  eUJtg 
liebt  ?  (tlo^.)  2.  ©eib  mir  gegriiBt,  befreuubete  ©c^aaren,  bie 
mir  5ur  8ee  33et3leiter  maren !  (@c^.)  3.  S)u  ©c^o,  ^olbe 
(Stimme  biefe§  Zi)aU,  bie  oft  mir  "iJtutuiort  gab  auf  meine  Sieber, 
Qo^anna  ge^t !  {<Bd).)  3.  Uub  ©ie  felbft,  ber  ©ie  hen  Seiertag 
an  3^rem  ©c()reibtifc^  gu  ^eiligen  pf(egeu,  luie  ftetjt  e§  mit 
Q^rem  grof5en  SScrfe  ?  (§ei).) 

(182.)  CSiu  9ieiter,  fo  nur  ein  ^ferb  Ijat,  foK  nid)t  $afer 
ne^men  fiir  jniei.  (@pr.)  2.  §eilig  ift  ha§>  (^efe^,  fo  bem  Stiinftler 
©c^on^eit  gebietet.  (@d^.)  3.  SSer  ba  tabelt,  ber  fiit)It  fic^  bem^ 
jenigen  iiberlegen,  gegen  ben  er  fict)  auf  hen  9^icl)terftuf)l  fc^t. 
((Sberg.)  4.  Sebe  mol)t,  bu  ^eilige  (Sd)tt)elle,  too  ba  n^anbelt 
Siebc^en  traut.    (§ei.) 

THEME  V. 

INTERROGATIVE  AND  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

1.  Who  are  the  happy  ?  the  industrious.  2.  "What  are 
the  greatest  virtues?  Industry  and  modesty.  3.  For 
what  did  you  hold  him  ;  who  told  you  that  he  was  a  use- 
less man?    4.  Of  what  did  he  command  you  to  speak? 

*84ain.l&.    t  832.80. 


348  EXERCISES. 

5.  "What  sweet  tones  wake  me  from  my  slumber!  6. 
Whose  eye  watches  over  the  fates  of  men  ?  7.  What  a 
feeling  of  freedom  I  had,  when  I  came  out  of  the  crowd ! 
8.  What  kind  of  feelings  did  you  have  when  they  waked 
you  ?  9.  What  kind  of  a  man  will  this  boy  become,  if  he 
learns  nothing  right  ?  10.  What  can  he  learn  when  he 
has  no  books?  11.  Why  does  he  weep  and  complain?  It 
he  has  no  books  I  will  give  him  some.  12.  How  stupid 
he  is  becoming ;  he  will  never  learn  anything  right. 
13.  The  gentleman,  after  whose  name  you  ask,  is  quite 
unknown  to  me.  14.  All  those  whom  I  loved  and  with 
whom  I  have  lived,  h^e  died.  15.  The  people  among 
whom  I  now  live,  are  the  children  of  those  whom  I  knew 
formerly.  16.  He  who  has  lost  his  friends  is  unhappy  and 
lonely.  17.  What  I  have  bought  for  you  I  will  give  you. 
18.  I  love  those  who  love  me.  19.  I  will  tell  you  what  it 
is  and  to  whom  it  belongs.  20.  Tell  me  what  sort  of 
beautiful  things  you  saw  in  Babylon.  21.  What  I  have 
seen,  that  I  am  unable  to  tell  you.  22.  He  who  brings  me 
the  bad  news,  he  must  advise  me.  23.  What  he  advises, 
that  does  not  please  me.  24.  He  whom  fortune  has  never 
lifted  up,  he  will  never  be  cast  down.  25.  He  who  has 
lost  his  self-respect,  has  lost  everything,  26.  Whatever 
the  emperor  may  pay  me,  I  shall  be  contented.  27.  Who- 
ever may  have  come,*  I  wish  to  see  him.  28.  We  have 
lost  all  that  which  made  us  hapi3y.  29.  He  told  us 
nothing  we  did  not  know  already.  30.  There  is  only  one 
thing  which  is  not  to  be  borne.  31.  It  is  not  my  self- 
respect  which  I  have  lost  this  year.  32.  You  will  soon  see 
the  brook  of  which  you  have  heard,  and  from  which  you 
can  drink.  33.  The  arm-chair  in  which  I  was  sitting  stood 
beside  the  sick-bed  in  which  the  poor  woman  lay.  34.  It 
was  pride  through  which  she  sinned.  35.  I,  who  have 
lost  my  husband,  have  been  sufficiently  punished.  36. 
"WHiy  am  I  punished,  who  am  already  so  unhappy  ?  37. 
Happy  man,  who  hast  never  yet  lost  a  friend.     38.  Was 

•  832.5(1. 


EXEECISES.  349 

it  you,  who  gave  me  the  answer  to  my  questions.  39.  And 
you  yourself,  who  have  always  lived  in  this  valley,  why 
do  you  now  leave  it  ?  40.  You  I  blame  who  seat  yourself 
upon  a  judgment  seat. 

ILLUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  VL 
INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  AND  NUMERALS. 

(185.)  1.  Man  I)atte  if)n  getra^It,  ot}ne  re^t  ju  toiffen  tr)o§ 
man  tijat  {^.  (3v.)  2.  2Sa§  man  ni^t  m\%  t)a§'  eben  brand)t 
man,  unb  tva^  man  meife,  fann  man  nic^t  braucl^en.  (®.)  3. 
S)em  9^a(^ften  mu§  man  ^elfen.  (Sd).)  4.  (Sin  lieOer  SSeg  mirb 
einem  nid)t  lang  ;  gem  ge()t  man  gemoljnte  (Straj^en.  {Md.) 

(186.)  1.  9^iemanb  lebt  fo,  iDte  er  modjte,  jeber  lebt 
nur,  mie  er  !ann.  (Crtle^jp.)  2.  5((Ier  SSett  grennb  ift  9Hemanbe§ 
grennb.  (@^r.)  3.  ^erfc^toffener  SJiunb  unb  offene  ^ugen  ^aben 
noc^  Dliemanbem  gefc^abet.  (<Spr.) 

(188.)  1.  Sa,  bann  fommt  ^t\va^  ^effere§,  nod^  meit  ©(^one* 
re§!  (5luberfeu.)  2.  9?i^t§  SSa^reg  la^t  fic^  t)on  ber  Su^unft 
miffen.*  (ed).)    3.  3Ser  S^Jic^tg  au§  fic^  mad)t,  ift  Td6)t^.  (epr.) 

(189.)    1.  ©0  lebte  id)  etlid^e  glnrf(icf)e  3af)re.  (Stelanb.) 

(190.)  1.  ^r  (ber  (Solbat)  mu^  fic^  af(e§  nel)men,  man 
giebt  if)m  nid)t§ ;  unb  jeglic^emf  gegtDungen  ju  neljmen,  ift  er 
jeglid^em  ein  ®reue(.  {<B6).)  2.  ®a»  ift  ber  grofste  ^ort^eil  [^or= 
teil]  fiir  bie  ^[Renfc^^eit,  ha^  jeber  fiir  bie  anberen  alle§  tl;ue.j 
(@(^efer,) 

(191.)  1.  ^ann  mu§  id^  mein  Seben  laffen,  tc^  unb  mand^er 
^amerab.  (U^.)  2.  SSer  t)iete§  bringt,  iDirb  monc^em  cttva^ 
bringen.  (®.) 

(192.)  1.  3n  bunten  SBilbern  Ujenig  ^ar^eit,  t)iel  Strt^itm 
[Qrrtum]  unb  ein  Siinfc^en  SSa^r^eit,  fo  mirb  ber  befte  ^ran! 
gebraut.  (®.)  2.  ^iete§  miinfc^t  fic^  ber  9J?enfd),  unb  bo(^  be* 
barf  er  nur  menig.  (®.)  3.  Qd)  !i3nnte  \\)m  rcd)t  biel  SSofe^ 
bafiir  t^un.  {B^.)  4.  SJ^e^rere  neue  Xox\^x  famen  jum  fQox^ 
fc^ein.  1®.) 


*84ai.5d.    1 222.L3  and  857.    ;3d3.3a 


360  EXEECISES. 

(193.)  1.  5tu§  aii  ben  fvcmbeu  (Sttimmen . .  . .  finbcit  bic 
(Sc^tDt)feer  3J?anner  fid)  ()erau§.  (@d^.}  2.  Qc^  cjrub'^  mit  alien 
\)tn  SSiirjIem  nu».  (®.)'  3.  ©ie  fuunten  mir  mit  all  S^rem 
guten  SSideii  nic()t  Ijelfeit.  (^ei).)  4.  5l(Ie§  beugte  jtrf)  Dor  bent 
^ilbe  be§  (^elrenjicjten,  unb  and)  S5eit  iparf  ficl^  nieber.  (Corner.) 
5.  (^riifsen  ©ie  a((e§,  ipa§  ©ie  nnujiedt.  (@c^.)  6.  ©inb  ba§  ade 
enre  Stinber?  fragte  ber  .^^onig.  {^vel)  7.  ^ie  9^ac^t  ift  ein^ 
getreten,  nnb  ein  jeber  tt)nnfd}t  ficl^  5n  eigener  D^lnfje  ©IM.  (@.) 
8.  2Bir  ntiiffen  jel^t  alte  filnf  3^^^^^  umlernen,  tt^enn  W)\x  nic^t 
gan§  au§  ber  ^J^obe  fommen  ir)oI(en.  (®.) 

(194-195.)  1.  3Sa§  bent  einen  recl)t  ift,  ift  bent  anberen 
bidig.  (®cf).)  2,  ^i§  bag  ©ffen  fertig  Wixh,  n)onen  n)ir  ein§ 
trinfen.  (®.)  3.  JJrin!  an§  bent  befrdn^ten  ^ecl^er.  @o !  nod^ 
eing !  (tteift.)  4.  ®er  SSinter  ift  ein  biifterer  (^aft,  unb  enget 
einent  bag  §er5.  (®c^.)  5.  3c^  arOeite  gar  nici^tg,  unb- !ann 
!eine  fed^g  S^i^^^  ()intereinanber  fc^reiben.  (^ei.)  6.  SSenn  ic^ 
mix  felbft  !ein  ^eufet  tndr' !  (®.)  1.  ^ir  finb  in  !eine  f(^Iec^ten 
|)anbe  gefatten.  (®(f|.) 

THEME  VL 
INDEFINITE  PEONOUNS  AND  NUMERALS. 

1.  One  lives  as  one  can,  not  as  one  would  like  to.  2. 
People  do  not  always  say  what  they  think.  3.  What  we 
need,  we  never  have.  4.  They  have  chosen  no  one  yet, 
but  they  must  soon  choose  some  one.  5.  The  good  man  will 
always  help  one,  even  when  he  is  himself  unhappy.  6. 
This  man  helps  no  one,  he  has  injured  every  one.* 

7.  One  does  not  need  to  say  anything  true,  if  one  only 
can  say  something  interesting.  8.  Each  one  takes  what 
he  can  for  himself.  9.  We  have  lost  many  a  comrade  and 
this  day  will  again  bring  death  to  many  a  one.  10.  They  say 
much  evil  of  the  soldier,  but  the  soldier  needs  little  and 
is  contented  with  little.  11.  I  haVe  known  several 
soldiers  ;   they  were  all  good  men.     12.    Of  all  the  pic- 


*  einen  Sebeiu 


EXERCISES.  351 

tures  I  like  only  one.  13.  Every  one  admires  the  pictures, 
but  not  all  understand  them.  14.  I  buy  every  year  a  few- 
pictures.  15.  All  these  old  clothes  have  gone  quite  out  of 
style.  16.  I  love  this  little  village  with  all  its  old  houses. 
17.  We  have  drank  two  glasses  of  beer  already,  but  we  will 
drink  another.  18.  I  always  drink  another  beer.  19.  The 
one  drinks  too  much,  the  other  will  not  drink  at  all.  20.  I 
have  not  written  him  a  single  line  ;  I  am  no  friend  of  his. 


rLIiUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  VIL 
FORMS  OF  DECLENSION.     NUMBERS. 

(211.)  1.  SSeber  t)on  SU^afern  noc^  SSinbdlatterit  Ukh  \^ 
Derfc^ont.  (®.)  2.  sr)ie  9[)^iitter  erfd^tenen,  ben  <SaugHng  im 
^trme.  (®.)  3.  ®ret  Zao,  imb  brei  ^ad)t  ^at  bie  ©^^ac^t  ge^ 
!rac^t.  mM.)  4.  Sni  fiibinbifc^en  ^Irc^ipet  ^at  bie  ^liit^e  [^liite] 
ber  ^afflefia  faft  brei  gug  ^urc^meffeu  unb  tt)iegt  iitier  14  ^funb. 
(^um.)  5.  3m  ^Ipril  ftub  bie  10,000  mann  X^alatefta^g  auf  bie 
$a(fte  ^ufammengejc^moljen.  (§.  ®r.)  6.  Qn  ber  Wittt  UcM 
fiir  bie  SBagen  mir  ber  0taum  Uon  jmlilf  bi§  t)ier5et)n  ©c^ritten. 
(®.)  7.  SDiefe  ^ame  ^at  einen  Dfjrring  Don  imgefci^r  3,400 
^^der  SSertf)  Pert]  berloreit.  (^et).)  8.  ^ie  grofeeren  Simgen 
^atkn  beim  9ie!tor  Don  10  bi§  11,  unb  tt)ir  fleinen  t)on  11  bi^ 
12  Ufjr  ^riijatftnnbe.  (toc^.) 

ILIiUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  VIIL 
THE  NOMINATIVE. 

(212.)  1.  ^D^aria  (Stuart  mirb  aB  eiue  .^onigin  unb  ^etbttr 
fterben !  (@(^.)  2.  ©ie  jinb  \)a§>  §oc^fte,  Uia§  9[Rirf)eIangelo  aU 
S3i(b^auer  gefc^affen  ^at  (^.  ®r.)  3.  (Seine  5(bfi(^t  trar,  ha^ 
^Ittejanbro,  fein  ©otju  obcr  5^effe,  ^erjog  Uou  glorenj  iDiirbe.* 

(213.)  1 .  Scf)  '^ei^e  ber  reic^fte  5J?nnn  in  ber  getauften  SSelt. 
(®(^.)    2.  ^arto§  ift  gejonnen,  ber  Ungliicffeligfte  in  biefer  SSelt 

*  8d3.3e. 


852  EXERCISES. 

gu  6Iet6en.  {®d^.)  3.  S^  WdijU,  tt)a§  ha§>  ^cffere  m\d)  biinft. 
^<Sc^.)  4.  ©ie  ^att'*  e§  nie  t)on  i^m  erfatjren,  ha%  fie  eine  C£f)riftm 
geOoren  fei,  itnb  feine  Qiibin  ?  ($?eff.)  5.  9lic^t  ein  iUnh  bin  ic^ 
erfc^ienen.  (@.)  6.  ^a§  Seben  ift  !ein  ^raurn,  e§  mirb  mir  5um 
S^raume  burd^  bte  ©cfiulb  be§  S^lenfc^en.  (^eu(^ter§kben.)  7. 
S)ein  ^ater  ift  ^um  ©c^elm  an  mir  getnorben.  (@c^.)  8.  Qm 
5(c!erbau  ift  ber  SDZenfd^  511m  9D^enfc{)en  geiDorben.  (3JJaftno.) 

(214.)  1.  ©liicffeliger  SD^enfc^,  ber  ru^ig  an  ber  ©eite  be§ 
Sreunbeg  fd^Inmmert,  o^ne  5l^nung  t)on  33errat^er  [^errciter]. 
(^en3el=@ternau.)  2.  SSidfommen,  0  filberner  Sli^onb,  fc^bner, 
fliaet  ©efa^rte  ber  9^ad^t !  [mop.) 

THEME  Vn. 
NUMBEKS  AND  THE  NOMINATIVE. 

1.  The  small-pox  did  not  spare  me.  2.  These  blossoms 
are  several  feet  long  and  weigh  many  pounds.  3.  Mala- 
testa  left  Florence  with  10,000  men;  in  April  he  had  only 
5,000  men.  4  The  street  is  only  30  paces  broad  and  3  miles 
long.  5.  We  remained  in  the  wagon  from  2  to  3  o'clock. 
6.  Elizabeth,  queen  of  England  and  cousin  off  Mary 
Stuart,  was  her  bitterest  enemy.  7.  Carlos,  the  son  of  the 
king  of  Spain,  was  a  most  unhappy  prince.  8.  The  duke 
appears  to  be  a  great  hero.  9.  Michael  Angelo  was  born 
a  poor  boy,  but  he  became  the  most  famous  sculptor  of 
Italy.  10.  This  man  is  called  a  Christian,  but  he  will  al- 
ways remain  a  Jew.  11.  He  has  become  the  betrayer  of  his 
friend.  12.  Happy  man,  who  has  chosen  the  highest.  13. 
Beautiful,  unhappy  queen,  thou  didst  die  like  a  heroine 
and  a  Christian. 

ILIiUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  IX. 
THE  GENITIVE. 

(216.)    1.    S^e§  giirften   ©^a|  liegt  am   ftc^erften  tn  be0 
SBoIfeg  §anben.  (®.)    2.  SBet  (^ott  unb  9J?enf^en  finb  tjer^a^t 

*  88a7.  t  ee.4c 


EXEBCISES.  353 

be§  §O(:^mutt)0  [^oc^mut^]  3etcf)cn.  {md.)  3.  ^oUfommene^ 
mM  ift  nid)t  be§  aRenfdjen  £od§  [2o§].  (SSielanb.)  4.  ^ie 
(Sc^rift  ift  bie  jungere  @cl)tx)efter  ber  ©pradjc.  {S3en3et=@teruau.) 
5.  ©in  grower  Zijdi  [^eil]  unferer  gel)ler  Id^t  ftc^  tierbeffern 
utib  trteber  gut  madden.  (9ftetn^arb.)  6.  ®a§  Seben  ift  ber  ©liter 
l^oc^fteS  ni(^t,  ber  IXebet  gri3^te§  aber  ift  bie  6c§ulb.  (®c^.)  1. 
S)er  SSorte  finb  genug  getredjfelt.  (®.)  8.  Seonarbo  er^iett  ben 
^itet  eineg  30ZaIer§  Reiner  5lKer-d3riftIi(^fteti  a)kieftat.  (§.®r.) 
9.  5lnbrea  bel  ©arto*  fe^Ite  tuenig,  urn  eiti  (^enie  erften  9^ange§  5U 
l^eigen.  (^.  ®r.)  10.  9Zad)  ^rieg  unb  ^ranb  !ommt  (S^otteg 
(Segeti  ing  Sanb.  (®^r.)  11.  ©§  ift  an  bir,  ba§  3Ser!  talenti^oHer 
©c^iiter  ^u  beffern.  ((Sbers.)  12.  ®ie  (Srfenntni^  [(!^r!enntni§] 
be§  Srrt^unxg  [Srrtum§]  ift  ber  erfte  ©c^ritt  gur  SSa^rljeit. 
(^rummac^er.)  13.  SDa  finb  i^rer  Uiete,  gro^e  nnb  Heine,  rief  fie. 
(^rei.)  14.  (S§  traren  i§rer  fieben.  ((Sber«.)  15.  Sieber  ©ontt, 
trie  barf  unfer  einer  feinen  5(ngen  trauen?  (?eff.)  16.  SDie 
fd^onften  3::raume  t)on  greiljeit  iDerben  im  ^er!er  getraumt.  (@c^.) 
li.  OTe§  in  ber  SBelt  Id^t  fid)  ertragen,  nur  ni djt  eine  'iRtiijt  bon 
guten  ^agen.  {(§>.)  18.  D,  ha§>  ift  ein  greunb  bon  unferm  §errn 
9[)^a}or.  (!Be[f.)     19.  9^un  "^olt  mir  eine  ^anne  SBein.  (^reiltgrotf).) 

20.  ^effer  ein  Sotl)  [Sot]  grei^eit,  aU  5e^n  $funb  ©olb.  (@pr.) 

21.  Qc^  fet^te  nti(^  ju  ben  ^auern  unten  in  ber  ©dienfftube  nnb 
tran!  ntein  ©Ia§  ^ier.  {^e^.)  22.  ^a§>  ©tiic!  ^ap^i^  ift  eine 
eite  breit  unb  ^dlt  20  ©tten.  (®.)  23.  ®a  ic^  n).enig  ©lauben 
l^abe,  muJ3  ic^  barauf  fel)en,  mid^  mit  ein  bigc^en  guter  23:>er!e  in 
ben  ^immel  ^inein^ufc^minbeln.f  (^etj.)  24.  Qd|  gebe  jebem 
brei^ig  OTer  Sanbeg.  {^d).)  25.  Qd^  brac^tebie  3^*^}^^ -^^^^^ 
unb  ^iereg  ^erbor.  (®.)  26.  5lm  gtDangigften  £)!tober  fiel  Tla\U 
x\d)t  in  bie  §dnbe  ber  (Spanier.  ((Sberg.) 

(217.)  1.  (£t  ftanb  ba  trie  ein  S3erbred§er,  feine§  SSorteg 
mdc^tig.  i§ei).)  2.  SSenn  Qtjr  mid^  ©uere§  S5ertronen§  miirbig 
ad)tet,  fo  mi3get  3T}r  mir  mit  (Surer  ©efc^idjte  t)ergeltcn.  (^auff.) 
3.  !I)ie  (Sbelfte  bleibt  nidjt  ber  Seffeln  frei.  (®cume.)  4.  Q^r  feib 
unwiirbig  be§  :^o^en  ®enuffe§  ber  (SItcrnfreube,  bie  if;r  euren 
(Sltem  ftatt  greube  nur  Qammer  geboten.  (3l(^o«e.)  5.  Seber 
^ittenbe  ift  fetneg  S8eiftanbe§  Ijemig.  (Sbere.)    6.  ^te  ganje 

»  dative  case,    f  846.2. 


354  EXEECISES. 

SSeig^eit  bon  jungen  ^^^fen  ift  feinen  ^ag  (Srfa^rung  mcrt^ 
[tt)ert].  ("ipfeffel)     T.  ©a  fte^t  boit  fc^onen  ^(umen  bie   ganje 

(219.)  1.  2Bte  biete  SO^enf^en  !(agt  man  ber  ^oS^elt  an, 
inbe§  man  fie  nur  ber  ®nmm^eit  anflagen  follte.  (3acob«.)  2. 
SSeil  i^r  mtd^  meineg  Sebeng  f)abt  geftc^ert,  fo  mH  x6)  end)  bie 
SSafjr^eit  griinblic^  fagen.  [Bd).)  3.  Q^r  gmangt  bie  S^iitter,  ben 
(S(f)iilbigen  be§  5D^orbe§  to^jufpred^en.  (@(^.)  4  9^id§t§  !ann 
i^  feine§  (Sc§lDur§  entbinben.  (5Sielanb.)  5.  $D^an  not^igte 
[nbtigte]  if)n,  feine  Untert^anen  aller  ifjrer  ^^fUc^ten  ^u  enttaffen. 
((©c^.)  6.  Seben  8ie  recl^t  \vo%  freuen  ©ie  fic^  be§  2eben§  unb 
S5re§  3Ser!e§.  (@(^.)  7.  (2cine§  §anbmer!§  fott  ficl^  !einer  fd^amen. 
(@pr.)  8.  d'g  Tjabcn  bie  (^rofsen  biefer  SSelt  firf)  ber  ©rbe  be== 
mad^tigt.  (®.)  9.  2)er  ^erjog  !ann  fid§  be§  (^ebrange^  !anm 
enttebigen.  (@d^.)  10.  (Sr  freute  fid^  feiner  rafd^en  ^§at.  (@ber8.) 
11.  S<^  fd[}ame  mid^  ber  Unerfa^ren^eit  nnb  meiner  Qugenb 
nid^t.  {®.)  12.  ^arob  erbarmt'S  ben  $irten  be§  atten,  ^o'^en 
$errn.  (U^.)  13.  (^ott  erbarme  fic^  beg  Sanbe§ !  {8d^.)  14. 
©ie  bebiirfen  in  ber  ^§at  ber  '3iui)^.  (^iubauj  15.  (Sin  tugenb- 
l^after  9[l^ann  benft  nie  be§  ^obe§,  er  ben!t  be§  Sebeng.  d^M.) 
16.  ^ie  SBelt  fonnte  feiner  SSo^It^aten  genie^en,  nnb  be§  (S^eber^ 
tiergeffen  ?  (®.)  11.  2)ie  ^ienfte  ber  (^rofsen  finb  gefci^rlid^  nnb 
lo^en  ber  Tln^t,  be§  3rt)ange§,  ber  (Srniebrigung  nid)t,  bie  fie 
foften.  Wf.)  ^  18.  ^d^  meig,  ba§  (Sie  tm  (Srnft  fpred^en,  unb  bod^ 
ift  e§  mir  faft,  aU*  tDoIIten  ©ie  meiner  fpotten.  (@ptel.)  19.  Sag 
mid^  ber  neuen  grei^eit  geniegen.  (®(^.)  20.  @eben!  ber  Slrmen 
gu  ieber  grift.  (Slaubiug.)  21.  (Sr  ad^tete  nid^t  ber  tt)armen 
©onne  nnb  bet>  frif d^en  Suft.  (Hnberjon.)  22.  d'g  fd^ont  ber 
^rieg  and^  nid^t  ha§>  jarte  ^inblein  in  ber  SStege.  (®c^,)  23. 
SDe§  50?orgeng  ben!  an  beinen  @ott.  (@^r.) 

(220.)  1.  ^dC)  r)abe  biefer  Stage  hen  §omer  jnr  §anb  ge- 
nommen.  (®(^.)  2.  Seiber  itieig  ic^  nod^  nid^t,  ob  id^  $0?ontagg 
!ommen  !ann.  ((^.)  3.  ^er  ^rin^  §atte  eine§  ^age§  mit  feinem 
(Sefolge  bie  (^allerie  befnd^t.  (.^auff.)  4.  gtat)io  ftiir§te  l^inein 
in  fc^anber^after  ©eftatt,  bermorreneg  §aupte§,  jerfel^ten  ^lei* 
be§.  (®.)    6.  (Sr  tpili  eilenben  gngeg  boriiber  fUe^en.  (@c^.3    6. 

*  433.6. 


EXEECISES.  355 

S3ei  bent  ^farr^ofepffegteber  §err  {ebe§mat  anju^atten,  fo  oft  er 
beg  SSegeg  fu^r.  (grei.)  1.  Seic^ten  ^au\§>  ift  ber  9^ul)m  nid)t 
gu  '^aben.  (C^erbev.)  8.  ©ie^e  tDte  fc^mebenben  ©c^tDungg  im 
Zan^t  bie  ^atire  jic^  bre^en.  {Bd).)  9.  ^eine  ^Irbeiten  finb  meljr 
eineg  ^ilbl)auer§,  al§  eine§  ^olbfc^miebg.  (@.)  10.  C£'lifaOet^ 
ift  meine§  (Stammer,  meineg  ^efd)led^t§  unb  9^ange§.  (@c^.)  11. 
S(^  ijaht  il)n  au^gefd^Iagen,  unb  nun  ift  meine§  33(etben§  t)ier 
nic^t  Idnger.  (§et).)  12.  Wtt^zv  ^at  gefd^rieben  unb  ift  rec^t  guteg 
mnt\)^  [mui^],  m  13.  Sm  erften  5lugenblic!  mx  er  SSilteng 
ab^ufc^reiben.  (§ei).)  14.  ©ie  tranfen  be§  foftlic^en  SBif^ofg. 
(5SoB.)  15.  ©ebrauc^t  ber  3eit,  fie  flie^t  fo  f^nell  t)on  ^innen. 
C@d^.)  16.  ©in  fleifeiger  ^ann  ftirbt  niemalg  §unger§.  {(£taubiu6.) 
IT.  Seib  guten  mni^  Put^],  fprad^  ber  ©rei§,  3^r  tt)erbet 
mc^t  biefeg  Sager§  fterben.  (@ru6e.)  18.  SSir  t^un,  'wa§>  unfer§ 
5tmte§.  gort  ntit  i^nt !  (@c^.)  19.  5)iefe§  §au§  ift  nteine§  §errn, 
be§  ^aifer§.  ((©c^.)  20.  ^ofe  S^nge  unb  bofe  D^ren  finb  be§ 
!^eufef§.  (®pr.)  21.  ©buarbS  merb'  ic^  nie.  (®.)  22.  D  be§ 
(^Iiicf(i(^en,  bent  e§  tjergonnt  ift,  eine  Suft  mit  eud§  ju  at^men 
[atmen] !  (®d).)    23.  ^f"t  be§  ^ofemid^t^  !  (Berber.) 

THEME  VnX 

THE  GENITIVE. 

1.  The  prince's  life  lies  in  the  hand  of  God.  2.  Joy  and 
sorrow  are  the  companions  of  mankind  through  life.  3. 
Each  one  of  our  faults  is  hateful.  4.  Pride  is  the  greatest 
of  faults.  5.  The  name  of  the  greatest  painter  of  Italy  was 
Leonardo.  6.  He  was  a  painter  of  the  first  rank.  7.  Italy 
is  the  country  of  painters  and  of  sculptors.  8.  The 
greatest  part  of  his  work  is*  in  Paris.  9.  The  description 
of  these  paintings  is  very  interesting  to  me.  10.  There 
are  only  a  few  of  them  in  my  country.  11.  The  friends 
of  my  children  are  also  my  friends.  12.  The  young 
man's  dreams  were  dreams  of  freedom  and  of  happiness. 
13.  He  drank  several  glasses  of  beer  and  ate  two  pounds 
of  meat  as  he  sat  in  the  bar-room.     14  Get  me  a  bit  of 


befinbet  ft^ 


356  EXERCISES. 

bread.  15.  Each  one  had  twenty  acres  of  good  land.  16. 
The  first  of  February  he  went  to  Berlin.  17.  He  was 
unworthy  of  freedom.  18.  We  are  weary  of  this  man's 
stories.  19.  The  best  man  never  remains  free  from  faults. 
20.  Every  young  fool  is  sure  of  his  own  wisdom.  21.  He 
is  my  enemy,  for  he  robbed  me  of  hope.  22.  I  rejoice 
in  his  friendship  and  love.  23.  Why  did  you  release  him  from 
his  work.  24.  They  accused  him  of  murder,  but  the  prince 
has  secured  him  his  life.  25.  The  duke  gained  possession 
of  his  confidence  and  then  forced  him  to  tell  him  all. 
26.  He  is  not  ashamed  of  his  deeds.  27.  The  duke  took 
pity  on  his  youth  and  inexperience.  28.  He  needed  his 
kindnesses,  for  he  was  poor  and  ill.  29.  You  can  never 
quietly  enjoy  your  good  fortune,  unless  you  remember 
the  poor  and  wretched.  30.  He  heeded  not  the  words  of 
his  parents,  and  mocked  at  their  love.  31.  Our  happi- 
ness in  this  world  does  not  reward  (us)  the  trouble  which 
it  costs.  32.  The  young  man  rejoices  in  life  and  thinks 
not  of  death,  but  death  does  not  spare  even  the  youngest. 
33.  In  summer  we  can  travel,  but  in  winter  we  must 
stay  at  home.  34  We  went  one  day  to  see  the  old  man, 
but  we  did  not  find  him.  35.  With  fresh  courage  he  went 
on  his  way.  36.  Our  friends  are  not  all  of  the  same  age 
with  us.  37.  Your  words  are  more  an  enemy's  than  a 
friend's.     38.  This  lady  is  of  high  rank  and  noble  race. 

39.  They  were  of  good    courage    when  we  went   away. 

40.  I  do  not  believe  that  they  will  die  of  hunger.  41. 
Alas  for  the  friends  whom  I  have  lost !  42.  Alas  for  the 
happy  days  which  are  now  past.* 


rLLUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  X. 
THE  DATIVE. 

(222.)     1.  ^en  etgnen  ^(aukn  foUft  bu  btr  ntd^t  laffen 
rauben ;  attetn  au(^  rauben  foEtft  bu  feinem  fetnen  ^taubeii. 

♦  toorbel. 


EXEECISES.  357 

md.)  2.  ^onigitt  ©opljie  e;5ar(otte  ^aljlte  3t  ^a^x^,  aU  fie 
bcr  Xoh  1705  il)rem  fonigli^en  ®ema^(,  i^rem  eingtgen  (Bo^n 
raubte.  (^ofer.)  3.  ^em  grlebli(f)en  getra^rt  man  gem  ben 
grieben.  (@(^.)  4.  ^er  red^te  ^elbenfinn  reic^t  feft,  !u^n  unb 
rur)ig  ber  ^efa^r  bie  §anb.  (53euset=@ternau.)  5.  ®er  gute  ^ontg 
telnet  bent  SSetfen  gern  fein  D^r.  (^linger.)  6.  Qc^  tnoUte  t^r 
ben  ^ogcl  njieberbringen.  (§ei).)  1.  SSenn  bn  ha§>  tijnft,  fo  n^trb 
®ott  beinem  SJlanne  feine  ©iinben  t)ergeben.  (?eanber.)  8.  (^e^ 
fang  nnb  Siebe  in  fc^onem  herein,  fie  er^Iten  bem  Seben  htn 
^ugenbfc^ein.  (@(t).)  9.  ^iBer  miberfe^t  fic^  bem  ^efe^I  be§ 
^ogteg  ?  (@c^.)  10.  SSer  fic^  bem  ^otljtnenbigften  [DZottnen^ 
bigften]  inibmet,  gefjt  am  fid)erften  jnm  S'l^U.  (®.)  11.  ^n 
fannft  bir  jeben  geinb  t)erfo()nen  nnb  t»erbinben.  (Sifci^enung.) 
12.  ^lanbe  nur,  bn  Ipft  t)iel  getf^an,  menn  bir  (S^ebnlb  bn  ge= 
tno^neft  an.  (®.)  13.  Qd^  fjabe  mir'§  oft  t)orgenommen,  il)r  ^erj 
^n  reinigen.  (@d)tege(.)  14.  Saft  bir  eine  .^(einig!eit  nic^t  ndt)er 
treten,  aU  fie  tnert^  [mert]  ift.  Wf.)  15.  ®a  bn  ber  SSelt  nii^t 
fannft  entfagen,  erobere  fie  bir  mit  (^etualt.  (platen.)  16.  (Sr 
foil  mir  nid^t  lebenbig  gel)en.  (®.)  11.  2)iefe  gaftfreien  50Mnner 
'fatten  bem  jnngen  SO^anne  erianbt,  i^re  ^itber  fo  oft  ^u  befnc^en, 
alg  er  immer  toollte.  (§auff.)  18.  Scf)  entlie^  ben  grennb  nnb 
banfte  i[;m.  (^auff.)  19.  5ltte  ^^onige  (:^uropa§  T^ulbigten  bem 
fpanifc^en  Seamen.  {@(^.)  20.  Qc^  folge  gern  bem  eblen  ^eifpiet, 
ha§>  ber  jiingere  giebt.  (@(^.)  21.  2Ber  5l((en  gefallen  tt)i(l,  inirb 
ben  33effcrn  immer  miftfallcn.  (@(i^e(Itng.)  22.  Unfer  (^^efiil)!  fiir 
bie  D^atnr  gleidjt  ber  (Smpfinbnng  be§  .^ranfen  fiir  bie  (^efnnb^eit. 
im.)  23.  !J)a§  ©die!  I)ilft  benen,  bie  fid)  felbft  I)elfen.  ((Sngel.) 
24.  ^d)  (jordje  Uergebeiig  iljrer  ©timme  nnb  i()rem  fommenben 
gnfstritt.  (33o^.)  25.  ^f^  fef}e  bem  ^obe  rn!)ig,  ober  ijielme'^r 
mit  ftitlem  ^erlangen  entgcgen.  (Sietatib.)  26.  $DZid)eIangeIo§ 
gamitie  ge^iirte  bem  I)oI)en  5(bel  ber  ©tabt  nid)t  an.  (^.  @r.)  21. 
S^Jur  bnrd)  bie  bnnfle  ^forte  geljt  man  ber  §eimat()  [§eimatj 
5n.  (^oltt).)  28.  28er  bem  §en!er  entlcinft,  entlauft  barnm  bem 
3:enfel  nod^  nid^t.  {<Bpx.)  29.  SSertran  bem  gnten  ©eift  and^  in 
ber  fd^Ied^ten  ©tnnbe.  {md.)  30.  (Sine  innere  S^^ot^menbigfeit 
[^Zotmenbigfeit]  treibt  nn§,  in  attem  nad)  SSa^rl^eit  5n  ftreben, 
and)  menu  fie  unferen  S^eignngen  nnb  ^iinfc^en  entgegenfte^t. 


358  EXERCISES. 

(Sielanb.)  31.  SBeld^  grci^li^em  (Sntf^tuffe  gibft  bu  ^aum  ?  {®.) 
32.  Qd^  m)e  Q^nen  ubvigeng  nic^t  S^iebe  ju  fte^eit,  fonbern  ©ie 
mir.  (Sinterfelb.)  33.  ®ie  28a^rl)eit  ()at  ijon  je^er  nur  ben 
©c^urfen  \v^^  get^an.  O^laten.)  34  i)e§  Seben§  ungentifi^te 
greube  Waxh  feinem  Qrbifc^en  §u  3:^ei(.  (®(^.)  35.  SSer  ift  ein 
^ruber  mir  ?  SDer  in  ber  92ot[)  [9^otJ  mir  gn  §ilfe  fommt.  (Berber.) 
36.  ©rofeen  ©teinen  ge^t  jeberman  au§  bemSBege.  (§ippet.)  SI. 
IXnfer  fc^neKeg  (^Uic!  I)at  un§  bem  §a6  ber  SQ^enfc^en  b(o§geftettt. 
(@t^.)  38.  9^o(^  geftern  fiinbigt'  man  ben  ^ob  euc^  an,  unb  ^eute 
tt)irb  enc§  plo^Ud)  f old^e  grei^eit !  {@ci^.)  39.  ^em  ^ater  grau^^ 
fet'§,  er  reitet  gefc^minb.  (®.)  40.  (^nten  erge^t  e§  am  (£nbe  bod^ 
gut.  (@(^.)  41.  (S§  5iemt  bem  eblen  Tlann,  ber  grauen  SSort 
p  ad^ten.  (®.)  42.  SSie  ge^t  e§  bir  benn  ?  SSie  ge^t  e§  benn 
beinem  $errn  ^ater  unb  beiner  gran  SO^utter?  (?canber.)  43. 
Wxx  ift'g,  al§  t)orte  t(^  bie  Sinben  tior  bem  genfter  raufc^en. 
(Corner.)  44.  SSie  tvaxh  mir,  aU  ic^  in§  Qnnere  ber  ^irc^e  trat ! 
(@d£).)  45.  ^er  eine  fprad^,  tt)ie  n)e§  iDirb  mir!  (^ei.)  46.  3(^ 
T^abe  mir  im  ©tiden  getobt,  nur  meinen  (Srinnerungen  gu  leben, 
unb  meinem  ^inbe.  (§et).)  47.  (Sin  r)eilenb  S^raut  mad^ft  jeber 
SSunbe.  (9^ot)oU§.)  48.  ®em  SSerbrec^er  gtan^en,  mie  bem  ^eften, 
ber  9J^onb  unb  bie  ©onne.  (@.)  49.  (^aftfreunblid^  tout  bem 
SSanberer  im  frieblid^en  ^orfe  bie  ^benbgtocfe.  (^olbertin.)  50. 
9^un  aber  !amen  bem  ^apfte  gang  anbere  ^inge  5U  O^ren. 
(^.  ®i'.)  51.  3:^ranen  ftanben  bem  atten  Tlanm  in  'i)tn  5tugen, 
oB  er  mit  ^eftigen,  bro^nenben  ©c^ritten  bie  (^allerie  t)erlieg. 
(^auff.)  52.  5Im  24ften  gebruar  ujurbe  bem  ^aifer  bie  ^rone  auf'§ 
§aupt  gefe^t.  (^.  ®r.)  53.  (Seine  gii^e  trugen  i^n  tt)ie  ein 
n)atee§  ^ferb,  bem  ber  S^leiter  ben  Qng^ti  iiber  ben  §at§  ge^dngt 
^at  i^etj.)  54.  ^ie  9teife  nac^  9^om  hot  je^t  bie  ©elegen^eit, 
bem  neuen  §errn  au§  bem  SSege  5U  ge^en.  (^.  @r.)  55.  Seic^t 
fet  bir  ha§>  §er5 !  (@d§efer.)  56.  ©ie  miffen  nid^t,  mie  t)otl  mir 
ba§  §er5  ift.  (^et).)  5t.  (Sr  ftort  mid^,  n)ei(  id^  i^m  bie  5Ingft 
anfetje.  (tod^.)  58.  ^d^  jiiubete  if)m  fein  Sid^t  an,  unb  fteltte  e§ 
auf  ben  ^ifd^.  (^etj.)  59.  ©ei  mir  gegrugt,  bu  ett)ige§  SD^eer ! 
tt)ie  (Sprad^e  ber  §eimat^  [©cimat]  raufd^t  mir  bein  SSaffer. 
(§et.)  60.  (S§  fod  im  S^ieic^e  !eine  frembe  ^ac^t  mir  SSurjet 
faffen.  (@d^.) 


EXEBCISES.  359 

(223.)  1.  SSerfteKung  ift  ber  offenett  ©eete  fremb.  (®(^.) 
2.  SSa[)r^cit  ift  ber  ©eele  notr)lt)enbig  [notmenbig].  (^e[f.)  3. 
!5)em  iua()ren  SSeltaieijen  mu^  ber  Zoh  niemal§  fc^recfUc^  fetn. 
(aJZeubel^siol)!!.)  4.  ^ie  §of(i(^!eit  tuar  bent  ©blen,  bent  ^iirger  tpie 
bent  ^auer  gemein.  (®.)  5.  ^f}euer  [teuer]  ift  mir  ber  greunb, 
boc^  au6)  ben  geinb  fann  id^  nii^en.  (@(^.)  6.  (Sein  §er5  ift 
itidjt  bent  ^ol!e  geneigt ;  trarunt  ift  al(e  SSett  bent  (^rafen  (Sg- 
mont  fo  ^oih  ?  (®.)  1.  SSa§  i^n  eu(^  inibrig  tnac^t,  ntad)t  i^ 
mir  mertl)  [mert].  (@d).)  8.  2)ent  ntiiben  SSanber^mann  ift  bod) 
bie  S^ac^t  n)it(!ommen.  (9?ucf.)  9.  ®er  tpeltregierenben  SKadjt 
ift  !ein  eingtger  SD^ann  unerfe^Iid^.  (!i?e[f.)  10.  5lber  ba^  tc^  mit 
ber  3ett  i^nt  imentbe^rlid^  gen)orben  bin,  ift  itic^t  menig.  (^e^.) 
11.  Penned)  njurben  bent  Sf^eifenben  bie  9}?eilen  be§  SSegeg  ju 
lang.  (?5rei.)  12.  (S§  tDarb  mir  fc^mer,  mid^  Don  bem  SSeibe  Io§=s 
§umac]^en.  (®.)  13.  Unfer  §errgott  !ann'g  nid)t  alien  red^t 
mac^en.  (@pr.)  14.  SSie  fid^  ber  Sut^  enblic^  umfa^  in  ber  nieb:= 
rigen  SDJanfarbe,  marb'g  it)m  fd^mill  unb  fnrd^tbar,  tt)ie  in  einer 
3:obten!ammer  [^otenfammer.]  (^e^.)  15.  (Sinen  ^on  an§  ber 
^e^te  5U  bringen,  mar  mir  nnmoglic^.  (^eij.) 

(225.)  1.  5(c^,  mir  ^nm  glud^e  mirb  mein  Sle^en  er'^ort! 
(@d^.)  2.  Sr)iefer  Untftanb,  meldfjer  bie  SO^einigen  in  gro^e  9^ot^ 
\j!flot]  berfe^te,  geriet^  jebod^  meinen  9[Ritbitrgern  gum  ^ort^eit 
[^orteil].  m  3.  mix  gur  Suft  fi^uf  er  biefe  (S^egenb  gum 
^arabiefe.  (@(^.)  4.  §offnung  ift  Sabfal  bem  mnnbeften  ©erjen. 
((S^atis.)  5.  3c^  bin  ein  Wiener  bem  ®ebot  be§  altergro^ten 
Wanm^.  (@d^tegel.)  6.  ^er  loniglidje  (Sinnefjmer  blieb  bem 
SDoctor  ber  liebfte  unb  bertrautefte  Umgang.  (grei.)  1.  §ei(  htn 
utibefannten,  ^ot)eren  3Sefen,  bie  mir  a^nen !  (®.)  8. 3Sef)  bir, 
t)ertaffene§,  armes  (Sd^iff!  2Se^  alten  ^affagieren.  (©run.)  9. 
®an!  biefen  freunblid^  griinen  ^ciumen,  bie  meineg  ^er!er§ 
Tlamxn  mir  berfteden !  (@d^.) 

THEME  IX. 

THE  DATIVE. 

1.  Death  lias  robbed  the  king  of  all  his  children.  2. 
He  forgave  him  and  gave  him  his  hand.  3.  This  youth 
has  devoted  himself  to  the  service  of   God.      4.  He  op- 


360  EXEKCISES. ' 

posed  himself  to  the  commands  of  the  king,  and  now  the 
king  has  undertaken  to  punish  him.  5.  He  who  reconciles 
his  enemy  to  himself  has  done  much.  6.  I  shall  conquer 
the  world  for  myself,  or  I  shall  give  it  up  entirely.  7.  He 
who  opposes  my  commands  shall  not  go  from  me  alive. 
8.  He  thanked  me  because  I  allowed  him  to  see  the  pic- 
tures. 9.  In  vain  does  one  help  those  who  do  not  help 
themselves.  10.  Nothing  pleases  him,  and  none  can  help 
him.  11.  I  wish  to  be  like  this  noble  man,  and  I  will  fol- 
low his  example.  12.  One  cannot  run  away  from  death. 
13.  Trust  not  to  others,  but  help  yourself.  14.  America 
belonged  formerly  to  the  Spanish  kings.  15.  He  came  to 
your  help,  and  now  you  trust  him  no  longer.  16.  Health 
has  never  been  my  portion.  17.  It  does  not  beseem  a  noble 
man  to  explain  himself  to  such  a  scamp.  18.  I  feel  as 
if  I  were*  in  a  church.  19.  How  is  she  ?  20.  How  glad  I 
was  when  I  heard  of  her  happiness !  21.  Tears  stood  in 
his  eyes  as  he  fell  upon  my  neck.  22.  The  emperor's 
head  was  cut  off.  23.  We  hung  a  beautiful  necklace 
around  the  young  girl's  neck.  24.  Quite  other  things 
have  come  to  my  ears.  25.  My  heart  is  too  full,  I  cannot 
speak.  26.  She  lighted  the  old  man's  lamp  and  set  it  on 
the  table  for  him.  27.  This  man  is  quite  strange  to  me. 
28.  To  the  true  philosopher  no  one  is  indispensable,  al- 
though his  friends  are  dear  to  him.  29.  Politeness  is 
necessary  for  the  nobleman  as  for  the  peasant.  30.  The 
way  was  too  long  for  the  weary  wanderer,  and  it  was  hard 
for  him  to  reach  the  village.  31.  It  was  impossible  for 
him  to  get  away  from  the  boy.  32.  I  was  not  inclined  to 
him,  but  with  time  he  has  become  dear  to  me.  33.  It  was 
hard  for  him  to  see  about  in  the  low  mansard.  34.  For 
thy  honor  I  have  done  it.  35.  The  need  of  his  fellow- 
citizens  became  an  advantage  for  him.  36.  Alas  for  me, 
poor,  weary  wanderer !  37.  Thanks  to  my  friends,  who 
even  in  danger  remained  true  to  me. 


*  See  332. 


EXEKCISES.  861 

ILLUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  XI. 
THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

(227.)  1.  @r  t^at  eintge  frdftige  ©c^Idge  an  bte  feftgefugtc 
§oft()ur.  (§et).)  2.  ©ie  luoKten  mic^  auc^  attetn  fpred^en.  (@c^.) 
3.  St  ftirbt  ben  tangen  9[fiartertob.  (Sietanb.)  4.  Unb  fo  5tef)et 
^inaug,  t^r  ^iingtinge,  imb  fcimpfet  einen  guten  ^antpf  nut  gnten 
SSaffen.  (§et).)  5.  ^fjrcinen  filler  ©eljnfnc^t  mirft  bu  tneinen, 
(@(f).)  6.  (Er  f^ldft  ben  ©(^laf  be§  (^ererf)ten.  (@pr.)  t.  3a, 
bu  fonneft  nocf)  ben  ©rant  au§  ber  (Seele  mir.  (9lu(!.)  8.  (Sr^ebet 
(^ott,  ifjr  ar^eere!  ^rauft  fein  Sob!  S^r  giii^e,  rauf^et  e§ ! 
(^leift.)  9.  ©ie  ntcfte  i^m  fii^I  einen  ®ru^  ^u,  unb  fat)  mieber 
bon  i^m  meg.  (^et).)  10.  (Sin  §a^n  frci^t  ben  9[Rorgen  n)ad§. 
(9^u(!.)  11.  ^^  mdfjnte  nttd^  berlaffen  t)on  atler  SSelt  (6d^.) 
12.  ^u  fd^iltft  bic^  felbft,  menu  bu  bein  ^inb  f(^t(tft  ungejogen. 
(9lucf.)  13.  (Sr  rief  mit  tecl^jenber  3i»^9e*  ^ater,  mic^  biirftet! 
(^\op.)  14.  (Sie  fontmt  Don  i^rem  ^faffen,  er  fprac^  fie  aHer 
(Siinben  frei.  (®.)  15.  ®en  SSotf  getiiftete  nac^  bem  fetten 
^iffen.  (®.)  16.  Wif^  trunbert,  ha'^  ic^  babei  nid}t  nod§  trdger 
unb  eitler  gemorben  bin.  (^eij.)  1*7.  ®§  biinft  i^n,  aU  lag  er 
tm  gieber.  (®.)  18.  2)iefer  ^ag  biinfte  i^m  ber  glorrei^fte 
feineS  Seben§.  (®.)  19.  (Sag  an,  mein  ^flitter  niertf)  [niertj,  tt)er 
^at  bic^  folc^e  ©treic^e  gelefjrt?  (Uf).)  20.  ©leic^mo^I  beto^te 
^eter  biefen  99^ann,  ttjeil  er  i^n  eine  ^unft  lefjrte,  metcf}e  x^m 
t)iet  ^ergniigen  ma(f)te.  ((Sngclien.)  21.  ©ie  fonnen  benfen,  n>tc 
i(^  iiberrafc^t  tdax,  aU  er  mir  eine  altlid^e  SDame  t)orfteEte,  unb 
fie  feine  ©ema^Hn  nannte.  (^aiiff.)  22.  Wan  nennt  htn  ©torc§, 
tnegen  feiner  fflnijc  unb  ^efonnent)eit,  ben  $t)i(ofop§en  unter  hen 
^ogeln.  (aJJaftug.)  23.  Tlan  ^ie§  i^n  nur  ben  tapferen  2Ba{tt)ar, 
bort  liegt  fein  ^ut  am  DfJ^ein.  (^feffel.)  24.  SSd^renb  biefer 
grd^Iid^en  SSocl^e  ^orte  er  nid^t  auf,  fid)  fetbft  einen  ^errdtf)er 
[^errdterj  ^u  fc^elten.  ((Sbers.)  25.  (Sin  (Sfel  fdjimpft  ben  anberen 
einen  Sangor)ren.  (@^r.)  26.  ^einen  9^eimer  mirb  man  finben, 
ber  ftc^  nid^t  ben  beften  ^iette.  (®.)  21.  9[^ad^e  nid^t  frf)nell 
jemanben  beinen  Sreunb.  (S:raubiu«.)  28.  (Sr  iuar  ^um  (^arbinat 
gemad^t  tt)orbentm  Qa^re  20.  (^.  ®r.)  29.  ^ud)  hen  ©Item  ift 
bie  Qtxt  rafd^  jur  6aae  gemorben.  (grct.)    30»  (Sd^ergenb  erfldrte 


S62  EXERCISES. 

er  x^n  fiir  fetnen  ^efangenen,  unb  bertangte  al§  Sofegetb  ha§ 
S8erfpre(^en,  ein  33ilb  fiir  il)n  gu  malen.  (^.  (3x.)  31.  ^\)x  \)aU 
mi(^  ftet§  al§  eine  geinbtn  nur  betrac^tet.  (@c^.)  32.  SSa^Ie 
nid^t  bie  glie^enbe  jum  greunb,  nid^t  bie  ^letbenbe  5um  geinb. 

(229.)  1.  ^a  ic^  hen  3ftoman  log  bitt,  fo  5«be  ii^  tDieber  gu 
taufenb  attbern  ^ingen  Suft.  (®.)  2.  (Sin  laufenber  geittb  ift 
feinen  6c^u^  $ult)er  luert^  [inert],  (^ip^el.)  3.  SDie  SDurc^^ 
marfd^e  ber  granjofen  mar  man  jmar  getnoljnt.  ((S.)  4.  ^er  $IRann 
fonnte  in  einer  SSiertelftunbe  ^uxM  fein  ;  ^ant  njar  e§  gufrieben. 
(@^iet.)  5.  5nfo  traten  fie  neOeneinanber  in  bo§  (Stiibd)en  nnb 
blieben  beibe  ben  (^rn^  fd)ulbig."  i^ct}.)  6.  ©ttt)a§  iRaufd^  l^alt 
trarm,  unb  ba§  ^ier  ftnb  iDir  einmal  getno^nt  (^rei.) 

(230.)  1.  Qn  biefer  ganjen  Qtit  berlie^  bie  ^od^ter  fie 
nid^t  einen  einjigen  3;:ag.  (."pei?.)  2.  ©ie  blieb  ben  ^benb  ftill  nnb 
feierlidf).  (^^rei.)  3.  ^jat  fie  mir  nid§t  nteineg  S5ater§  Siebe  fd^on 
gefoftet?  {^d}.)  4.  ©o  biele  ©trome  ^lut§  e§  ben  SBarbaren 
gefoftet  \)aitt,  emige  ^onigreid^e  in  (Suropa  gn  griinben,  fo  biel 
foftete  e§  je^t  i§ren  d^riftlid^en  9^adf)!ommen,  einige  ©tabte  in 
(Sl)rien  jn  erobem.  (@^.)  5.  Qd^  fa^,  ba§  er  ein  paar  Mai  bie 
Sippen  offnete,  unb  bann  bod^  tt)ieber  fd^tDieg.  i^ttf.)  6.  Siebe 
©^arlotte,  fagte  er,  id^  tange  ^eute  feinen  (Srf)ritt,  atg  nur  ntit 
S^nen.  {^tt}.)  1.  ©ie  fc^erjen  mutljig  [mutig]  :3l)re  Qa^re  (jin, 
bi§  \>a^  ein  ©lenb  fommt,  bann  gittern  Sie  ben  fReft  ber  ^age. 
(Smmerman.)  8.  ^a^re  lang,  S^^i^^i^^^^i^^^  ^^^Q>  ^^<^9  ^^^  SJ^umie 
bauern.  (@c^.)  9.  SSeifet  bu  no(^,  tnie  tt)ir  einmal  eine  (Stunbe 
lang  iiber  ben  ©a^  ftritten,  ber  mir  fo  fe^r  gefiel?  (^eij.)  10. 
^a§>  ungliidflicfie  SSeib  marb  gefragt,  inomit  fie  fid^  bie  t)ier  ^age 
iiber  genci^rt  I)abe.  (§umb.)  11.  'Sie  reifen  bie  S^ac^t  burd§,  unb 
fommen  fd^on  SJiorgen  frii^.  (^e^.)  12.  ^en  ^ergpfab  ftieg  id) 
fteil  l^inauf.  (gbert.)  13.  ©r  ging  mit  unfid^eren,  langfamen 
(Sd^ritten  ben  SSeg  ^inab.  (^ei).)  14.  9}Junter  fci^rt  ber  gro^e 
ba^  2ehtn  ^inunter.  {Zkd.)  15.  §err  (5kaf,  e§  !ommt  ein  $aufe 
\>a§>  obere  3:%l  ^inab.  (U^.)  16.  ^§>  wax  tt)enige  S'l'^i^e  ^^^^  ^^^ 
franjofifd^en  ^riege.  (^etj.)  IT.  (Sine  l^atbe  ©tunbe  barauf 
ft)urbe  bie  ^pr  t)on  au^en  geoffnet.  (SBinterfelb.)  18.  S5on  ®o§s 
lar  ging  id^   ben  anberen  SD^orgen  ttjeiter.  (-^e^.)    19.    (^leid^ 


EXERCISES.  S63 

barauf  trat  hex  ^ontg  ein,  tm  §ut  auf  bent  §aupte,  ben  ©tod 
in  ber  §anb,  offenbar  nic^t  in  gutet  Sanne.  (^rei.)  20.  ©tide 
§offmmg  im  ©eficl^t,  fa^  er  ha  attein.  (>Sc^.)  21.  ©in  5D^ann 
fte^t  oben,  Iran!  unb  blag,  bie  §aare  milb,  bag  5Inge  nag.  (Sbert.) 

22.  Qc^  eile  fort bor  mir  ben  ^ag  nnb  I)inter  mir  bie  S^ai^t, 

ben  §immet  iiber  mir  nnb  nnter  mir  bie  SSetten.  (®.)  23.  ^anm 
bie  5ingen  au^gerieben,  ^inber,  tangtneilt  i^r  eucl^  fc^on.  [&.)  24. 
2)iefe§  gefagt,  entblogte  ber  reblic^e  ^ater  bie  ©c^eitel.  (SSo§.) 
25.  SDiefeg  nun.  auf  ben  Sao!oon  angemenbet,  fo  ift  bie  Urfac^e 
!Iar.  (2eff.) 

THEME  X. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

1.  I  wish  to  speak  to  thee;  come  with  me.  2.  Why  do 
yon  weep  such  bitter  tears  ?  Did  he  not  die  the  death  of 
the  righteous  ?  3.  I  dreamed  myself  happy  and  gay;  but 
when  I  awoke,  I  found  myself  deserted  and  alone.  4.  Why 
does  he  scold  the  boy  as  rude  ?  He  is  a  very  good  boy. 
5.  He  was  hungry,  but  he  had  nothing  to  eat.  6.  Me- 
thought  I  was  lying*  sick.  7.  Who  taught  you  this  art  ? 
8.  This  old  philosopher  has  taught  me  much,  which  gives 
me  pleasure.  9.  They  call  her  the  most  beautiful  of 
women,  but  she  seems  to  me  idle  and  vain.  10.  Why  did 
he  choose  me  for  his  friend  if  he  did  not  trust  me  ?  11. 
Now  he  reviles  me  as  a  betrayer,  but  I  am  nevertheless 
true  to  him.  12.  I  still  regard  him  as  my  friend,  but 
he  has  declared  me  his  enemy.  13.  War  made  me  his 
prisoner,  but  he  always  regarded  me  as  a  friend.  14. 
Now  that  we  are  rid  of  the  war,  we  shall  have  time  for 
other  things.  15.  They  are  accustomed  to  beer-drinkingf 
and  smoking,  but  we  are  tired  of  it.  J  16.  If  he  has  read 
my  novel,  I  am  contented.  17.  He  remained  here  only  a 
quarter  of  an  hour.  18.  It  cost  the  Christians  streams  of 
blood  to  conquer  a  few  small  cities  in  Syria.  19.  The  visit 
cost  me  a  whole  day,  but  I  shall  visit  her  a  couple  of  times 


♦833.3.    t840.    l^aBencefatt 


364  EXEBCISES. 

more.  20.  Slie  was  silent  a  moment,  then  she  said:  I  will 
not  go  a  step,  if  you  do  not  go  along.  21.  Thirty  years  did 
the  war  last.  22.  I  climbed  up  the  mountain  and  remained 
an  hour  up  there.*  23.  They  asked  me  where  I  had  re- 
mained over  the  hour.  24.  A  few  moments  after  I  saw 
the  man  coming  down  the  valley.  25.  The  next  evening 
I  went  away  and  on  the  seventh  day  I  arrived  at  Goslar. 
26.  Hat  in  hand,  he  awaited  the  king.  27.  On  the  moun- 
tain stands  the  old,  deserted  house,  the  doors  and  windows 
shut,  the  rooms  empty,  everything  cold  and  sad. 

XLLUSTRATiVJ!!  SENTENCES  XIL 
MODAL  AUXILIAEIES. 

(253.)  1.  ^ic  2:ugenb  barf  beg  9iu^me§  ntc^t.  (SBterattb.) 
2.  (S^ott  gebe  mlr  nur  jeben  ^ag  fo  t)iel  ic^  barf  ^um  Seben. 
(dlaubiug.)  3.  !J)arf  eine  folc^e  93^enf(^enftimme  f)ier  ertbnen? 
(®.)  4.  ©ie  ge^orten  ju  ber  fetnereu  %xt  (t)on  ©pielleuten), 
tDxe  fie  fic^  aucl^  Dor  giirftetx  unb  (^rafeu  pren  laffen  burften. 
((Sbergj  5.  Qd)  moc^te  gern  reifen,  aber  ic^  barf  in  biefem  3af)re 
ntc^t  an§  9^eifen  ben!en.  (®.)  6.  2)er  (3ianb'  ift  etntg,  irbifc^  ift 
bie  gorm;  fie  blirfen  mx  derbeffern,  [a,  mv  foKen'§.  (9Jaupac^.) 

1.  ^n  einer  fot(f)en  ^afc^e  barf  fcf)on  ein  Soc^  fein,  e§  fcitlt  nic^t§ 
]^erau§.  (^ebel.)  8.  ^er  (Sd^luiegerbater  biirfte  i^m  nic^t  iuieber 
bor  5(ugen.  {®.)  9.  ^eine  SD^etnung  ift  gefd^rlic^,  fobalb  ein 
jeber  bie  feinige  frei  fagen  barf.  (3ocobi.)  10.  (S§  biirfte  Wo^l 
fo  fommen,  tt)ie  \^  gebad^t  ^abe.  (®..)  11.  ©§  biirfte  nid^t  fcl^mer 
fein,  ha^  nac^5un)eifen.  ((SJ.)  12.  (£r  erjafjtte  ]i^  ©ef^id^ten, 
tt)ie  fein  grennb  SSerner  i^n  itberrafc^en  !onnte,  ha^  Waxmm 
bielCeic^t  erfc^einen  biirfte.  (®.) 

(264.)    1.  $8erad§tnng    1)ah^   ic^    nie    ertragen  fonnen.  (®.) 

2.  Siebe  granci^fa,  icf)  ^abe  bi(^  nocl^  nii^t  njillfommen  l^eigen 
fonnen.  [^e\\.)  3.  (Sin  treuer  "^atf)  [^at],  ein  triiftenb  SSort, 
fann  mand^e  ^f)rdne  trorfnen.  (^ranj.)  4.  !5)er  Wlann  Wax  alt, 
unb  fa^  ju  e^rnjiirbtg  au§,  al§  ha^  man  btefen  5lu§brud^  beS 


bort  obcn. 


EXEECISES.  365 

©efu"^t§  ^cittc  ISd^ertid^  ftnben  fonnen.  (^auff.)  5,  S5et  metuer 
armen  ©eele,  ic^  !ann'§  bergeffeu  I)aberi.  (?eff.) 

(266.)  1.  ^'cin  (Sacrament  mag  Seben  bem  ^obten  tDteber^ 
geben.  (33.)  2.  ®^e  bie  grau  e§  ^inbern  mod)te,  ftie^  er  mit 
bem  <Sd)mert  fief)  burc^  unb  buret).  (Sietaub.)  3.  Si)ie  Seute  mogen 
e§  immer  iDtffen,  ba^  id)  nic^tS  meljr  Ijabe.  Wf.)  4.  (Sin  e^r^ 
ticker  StRann  mag  fterfen  in  it)etd§em  Slteib  er  mU,  man  mu^  i^n 
lieben.  (?eff.)  5.  SSo^I  mag  e§  eud)  beangftigen,  ic^  glaub'g,  t)Dr 
eurem  9^id§ter  ^u  erfd)einen.  (@c^.)  6.  ^ie  ^ogte  troKen  mir 
tjerjagen  unb  bie  feften  ©cutoff er  bre^en  ;  boc^,  n^enn  e§  fein 
mag,  o^ne  ^lut.  ('Sc^.)  7.  (Sr  moc^te  au§  einem  guten  §aufe 
fein.  (?e[f.)  8.  3^^^^  ^eijj  ic^  t)iel,  bod)  mod^t'  id)  alle§  tniffen. 
{®.)  9.  3n  biefer  ^^uuft  mbc^t'  ic^  tva§>  profitiren.  (®.)  10. 
5(uf  bie  ^erge  mod^t'  ic^  flicgen,  mocl^te  fe()'n  ein  griineg  ^^at. 
(^atler^Ieben.)  11.  j[)em  ^abe  id)  bitter  tlnred)t  get^an  in  meinem 
^ergen,  ^ott  mag  e§  mir  bergei^en!  (^ouff.)  12.  Qd^  tuiinfd^e 
in  gar  Dielen  3fiiidfi(^ten,  ha^  S^r  SSatlenftein  balb  fertig  merben 
moge.  (®.)  13.  5((le  gro^en  ©ebaube  t)erfallen  mit  ber  Qeit,  fie 
mbgen  mit  ^unft  ober  o'^ne  ^unft  gebaut  fein.  {2c\l)  14.  !5;)arum 
mag,  ma§  mid  unb  !ann,  gefd^e^en.  (®.)  15.  ^eine  ^^orr)eit, 
tt)ie  unfc^ulbig  fie  auc^  fein  mag,  faun  einen  gteibrief  gegen  ben 
©pott  berlangen.   (Sielanb.) 

(256.)  1 .  §eut'  milffen  (Sie  mir  geftatten,  ha'^  auc^  id^  ben 
Sf^itt  mitmad)e.  (^rei.)  2.  SSiber  SSiHen  mugte  id^  ftet)en  bleiben, 
unb  i^r  nad)ftarren.  (.Corner.)  3.  ^n  feinem  §aufe  mu^te  alle§ 
folib  unb  maffit)  fein.  (@.)  4.  ©in  fpanifd^er  ,^onig  mugte  ein 
red^tgtaubiger  ^4^rin§  fein,  ober  er  mu^te  bon  biefem  ^^rone 
fteigen.  {Bd}.)  5.  (S§  mu^te  nid^t  tiieteg  barin  fte^en,  benn  fie 
ttJar  im  5lugenblide  p  (Snbe.  (^rei.)  6.  ®a§  let^te  ^atte  Tlon^ 
bragon  auf  ,^efe^t  be§  §er5og§  t)on  ^Itba  erbauen  miiffen.  (@c^.) 
t.  ^i§  je^t  mu^t'  icf),  ber  ©rbprinj  (Spanien^,  in  (Spanien  ein 
grember  fein.  (@ci^.)  8.  ^d)  mufs  Iad)en,  menu  id)  an  hen  ^on 
ber  Unfe^Ibarfeit  benfe,  mit  bem  er  fprad).  (Sietanb.) 

(267.)  1.  ^er  partner  ^at  beftod^en  n:)erben  fotlen.  (@d^.) 
2.  SSer  ha§>  9le^te  !ann,  ber  foil  e§  mollen.  (®.)  3.  SS)ie  ^or= 
traitmaler  fotten  nid^t  blo§  barftellen,  lt)ie  fie  einen  SD^enfc^en 
faffen,  fonbern  Vok  jeber  i^  faffen  miirbe.  (®.)    4.  ^a^  einfad^ 


366  EXERCISES. 

(Sd^one  foil  ber*  tenner  fcl^a^en.  (®.)  5.  tlnb  !am^  bte  ^bUt 
fclber  in  bie  ©c^ranfen,  ntir  foil  ber  SD^utt)  [$D^utJ  ntc^t  tDeic^en 
unb  nicl^t  tt)an!ett.  (@(^.)  6.  Qc^  gtng  iljn  gu  befui^en,  ireil  ic^ 
l^offte,  er  folle  ntir^elfen.  (@.)  1.  SDanfenb  pret§^  id^  metneg 
®otte§  (^nabe,  ber  nicl^t  getuoUt,  ha^  id^  p  eueren  SiiB^it  fo 
liegen  foUte,  tt)te  iljr  jeljt  gu  meinen.  (@c^.)  8.  (S^  fte^t  in  ben 
©ternen  gefd^rieben,  ha^  Wix  atte  ^eibe  nid^t  fi|en  bleiben  f ollen. 
(^e^.)  9.  (Sin  glorreid^er  (Smpfang  foEte  bent  jnngen  ©ieger 
bereitet  merben.  ((Sberg.)  10.  S)a  Wax  e§,  tt)o  icf)  bie  gro^e  (Snt= 
bedung  nia^te,  bie  fiirmein  gan§e§  Sebenber^angni^Dott  trerben 
f ottte.  (^e^.)  1 1 .  (Soil  einft  bie  S^ad^melt  bid^  mit  ©egen  nennen, 
mngt  bu  ben  glnd^  ber  S^^itluelt  tragen  fonnen.  OJoupad^.)  12. 
SDie  (£f)axlottt  ^aih,  ^or'  i^,  fott  n)ir!lic^  in  (S^efa^r  fein,  blinb 
gu  tDerben.  (@c^.)  13.  (g§  ftammt  au§  bem  Dlac^Ia^  be§  $tu^ 
tard^,  tct)  fann  e§  bert)eifen,  unb  e§  f oK  ein  ©efcC)en!  be§  ^aifer^ 
Trajan  fein.  ((Sberg.)  14.  ^er  ^apfere  flreitet  fiir  ha^  dtt6:)t, 
fiir  ha^  ^eje^,  fiir  (^ott,  unb  f ottte  e§  fein  auf  Sebenunb  (Sterben. 
(Sofobg.) 

(258.)  1.  Wan  mu§  nid^t  reid^er  fd^einen  tt)oIten,  al§  man 
ift.  (eeff.)  2.  SSitt  man  einen  ^egriff  bon  ber  ^^unft  motto' ^ 
unb  feiner  ©d^iiter  l^aben,  fo  mu|  man  ha^  (l^ampofanto  bon 
^ifa  betreten.  {^.  ®r.)  3.  ^(i)  felbft  moUte  fie  bitten,  mir  einigc 
9[^inuten  ju  fd^enfen.  (^rei.)  4.  $8iele  be^aupten,  baf?  fie  fid^ 
nad^  9[^ontmartre  5uriidEge5ogen  ^abe,  tt)o  man  fie  nod^  im  Sa'^re 
It 60  gefe^en  ^aben  tuill.  (3fc^o!.)  5.  ^Iber  \va§>  finb  benn  ha^ 
fiir  SDienfte,  bie  ber  SSirtl)  unferem  §errn  3)?aJDr  tviU  ertniefen 
l^aben  ?  ($?ef|.)  6.  (Sr  blieb  n)ieber  einige  5lugenblidfe  fte^^en,  tok 
einer  ber  einfd^Iafcn  mill,  (^rei.)  1.  ®u  riffeft  mid^  bon  ber 
^er^meiflung  lo§,  bie  mir  bie  8inne  fd^on  jerftoren  mollte.  (®.) 

(259.)  1.  ©0  meit  ge^t  niemanb,  ber  nid^t  mug.  (@c^.)  2. 
golge  il)m  millig  unb  fro!) ;  millft  bu  nid^t  folgen,  bu  mugt. 
(C)erbcr.)  3.  Qeber  mill  gem  leben,  fattg  er  nur  biirfte.  {%  %  5ft.) 
4.  ^u  gel^ft  nun  fort;  o  §einrid§,  fount'  x^  mit!  (@.)  5.  Qd^ 
mitt  nidt)t  in§  Sodt),  ic^  mitt  fort  unb  bi§  uf)  fort  !ann,  fottft  bu 
mid^  berftedfen.  (gret.)  6.  S5ormart§  muf5t  bu,  benn  riicfmart§ 
fannft  bu  je^t  nid^t  me^r.  (©d^.)  1.  Wtxn  $ferb  fc^eute,  mie  td^ 
5um  @d^(ogt§or  l^erein  itiottte.  (®.)    8.  SBo  fott  td^  l^in ?  Qd^  faun 


EXERCISES.  367 

\>odj  mcE)t  betteltt  ge^en.  (?eanber.)  9.  SHwd)  bcr  atte  (^lauBeng* 
fafe,  bag  ©ebeti*  feliger  fei,  aU  ^Mjmtn,  tPoEte  mtr  nte  in  htn 
^opf.  (§et).)  10.  (Sie  fann  nidjt  burcf)  unb  mag  nic^t  guriic!.  {@c^.) 
11.  2Ba§  foil  ntir  ha^?  SSo^u  fott  bag  alTeg  ?  ((S.)  12.  2Sa§ 
fonnte  fie  aud^  bafiir,  baf?  id)  nidjt  auc^  ber  9J?utter  ai)nlicr)  fa^. 
(|)e^.)  13.  ^a§  :^atte  er  gar  nid}t  gefonnt,  aud^  njenn  er  gemoKt 
l^atte.  (?aube.)  14.  ^d)  !ann  bie  (Srsie^er  nid^t  loben,  bie  f  oId)C 
(S^egenftanbe  nid)t  Dor  i()reu  5lugeu  tiertjeimlic^ten.  Um  S3cr5ei5^ 
ung !  tt)ie  fatten  fie  \)a^  foKen  ?  unb  trie  l)dtten  fie  e§  gefonnt  ? 
(®.)  15.  92id)t  beinen  5Irm  btog  trill  id),  and)  bein  ^uge.  (@t^.y 
16.  SSolten  ©ie  tt)ieber  einen  $Iat^  in  meinem  (S:Dntoir,  ober 
n)oIIen  ©ie,  tt)ie  e§  ben  5Infc^ein  ^at,  noc^  mel)r?  (^ret.)  11,  ^s^ 
l^abe  bie  9}?enfc^en  nie  tierftanben  imb  noc^  tDeniger  beneibet, 
bie  eine  5Irt  (SI)re  barein  fe^en,  gu  fagen :  magft  bu  mi^  ttid)t, 
mag  id^  bid^  au^  nid^t !  (§e^.) 

THEME  XL 

MODAL  AUXTLIAHIES. 

1.  May  these  players  aj^pear  before  you  ?  2,  I  should 
like  to  see  the  players,  but  I  must  not  think  of  it.  3.  No 
one  is  allowed  to  tell  his  opinion  freely  to  the  king.  4. 
"Who  dares  try  to  improve  the  laws  ?  5.  It  may  be  as  you 
say,  but  it  will  be  hard  to  prove  it.  6.  I  have  never  been 
able  to  advise  him.  7.  "Who  could  think  such  an  outbreak 
of  feeling  laughable  ?  8.  I  may  possibly  have  seen  him  al- 
ready. 9.  He  may  be  rich,  but  he  is  not  an  honorable  man. 
10.  I  should  like  to  appear  soon  before  my  judge,  but,  if 
it  may  be,  not  alone.  11.  I  should  like  to  do  him  no  wrong, 
but  I  do  not  want  to  see  him.  12.  I  do  not  demandf  to  see 
the  queen,  however  beautiful  she  may  be.  13.  The  French 
have  driven  out  their  emperor,  may  God  forgive  them  for 
it !  14.  To-day  I  must  read  your  Wallenstein,  J  whether  it 
be  finished  or  not  finished.     15.  I  was  obliged  to  allow 


840.    t  barnac^;  346.2.    %  A  play  by  Schiller. 


368  EXEKCISES. 

him  to  read  my  new  book.  16.  We  had  to  take  the  ride 
too,  or  to  stay  at  home  alone.  17.  I  could  not  help  weep- 
ing when  I  saw  the  poor  Spanish  prince.  18.  He  cannot 
have  been  an  orthodox  prince,  for  he  was  obliged  to  de- 
scend from  the  throne.  19.  This  painter  had  to  paint  his 
portrait  on  command  of  the  king.  20.  Everything  in  his 
house  ought  to  have  been  massive  and  solid,  for  he  was 
very  rich.  21.  He  ought  to  love  the  right,  but  he  does 
fiot.  22.  This  portrait  painter  shall  paint  me  a  portrait 
of  my  wife.  23.  Every  rich  man  ought  to  cherish  art 
and  to  help  artists.  24.  I  was  to  have  visited  you,  but 
I  could  not.  25.  How  am  I  to  make  a  great  discovery? 
26.  If  I  am  to  paint  his  portrait,  he  must  visit  me  every 
day.  27.  The  young  victor  is,  I  hear,  in  great  danger. 
28.  The  gardener  is  said  to  have  been  bribed.  29.  If 
I  am  to  believe  his  story,  he  must  prove  it.  30.  I  must 
have  the  Plutarch,  even  if  it  should  be  very  dear.  31.  I 
do  not  wish  to  appear  richer  than  I  am.  32.  We  wanted 
to  help  her,  but  we  did  not  want  to  give  her  money.  33. 
She  claims  to  have  eaten  nothing  to-day.  34.  The  land- 
lord claims  to  have  given  her  something,  but  we  cannot 
believe  what  he  says.  35.  We  must  help  her,  even  if  she 
should  deceive  us.  36.  I  was  on  the  point  of  giving  her 
something  when  you  came.  37.  We  gave  her  something, 
for  we  had  to.  38.  You  may  go  with  him,  but  I  may  not 
(go)  too.  39.  What  am  I  (to  do)  here  ?  40.  I  cannot  (go) 
back  and  I  am  not  allowed  (to  go)  forward.  41.  I  should 
like  (to  go)  into  the  house,  but  we  must  (go)  away.  42. 
If  you  like  tho  horse,  I  will  give  it  to  you.  43.  I  should 
like  to  praise  your  teacher,  but  I  cannot.  44.  I  dare  not 
(go)  away,  although  I  want  to.  45.  I  do  not  like  him  and 
he  does  not  like  me.  46.  Do  you  know  English  ?  47.  I 
do  not  know  it  and  I  do  not  like  it. 


EXEECISES.  S6& 

ILLUSTRATIVE    SENTENCES    XHX 
THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

(279.)  1.  Sf^ingg  urn  i§n  i^er  tuurbe  gemeitit,  gefungen  imb 
gebetet,  aljer  5lntinou§  \a^  unb  ^orte  nic^tg  t)on  attebem.  ((Sber§.) 
2.  (Sine  SSelt  fi^mtngt  fi(^  in  etrigen  ^reifen  urn  bie  anberen. 
5(uf  jeber  mirb  gefcimpft  iinb  gerungen  unb  geliebt  unb  ge^offt. 
(^od^.)  3.  SSo  mx  erfd^ienen  unb  pocfjten  an,  luarb  nic^t  gegriifet 
nocl^  aufget^n.  {B^.)  4.  ^i§  gum  le^ten  ^lut^tropfen  n)irb 
gefcimpft.  (^.  ®r,)  5.  Qn  Seipgig  tear  (^d  beina^e  tobt  [tot] 
gefc^Iagen  tnorben.  (®rube.) 

(280.)  1.  ^(m  10.  9hit)em()er  1483  n^arb  p  (^i§Ieben  etnem 
ormen  ^ergmanne  §an§  Sntf)er  ein  ©o^ntein  geboren,  ba§  am 
folgenben  3:age  getauft  unb  9Jiartinu§  genannt  luurbe.  (@rube.) 
2.  Hub  tt)ie  bie  fittlic^en,  fo  luaren  bem  ^oI!e  and)  bie  geiftigen 
gortjc^ritte  auf  bie) em  SScge  Derfagt.  (®ermnu§,)  3.  Unb  fo 
raarb  mir  ha§>  SSerfprec^en  abgenommen,  ha^  id)  nac^  9l)tain§  fot* 
gen  fottte.  (®.)  4.  .^cilt  er  bie  9[)Zebai((e  fiir  ci^nlid^,  bie  Arbeit 
fiir  gut,  fo  ift  tjielleicl^t  ber  Pal^  fiir  SSittig  gefunben  unb  ber 
^unftfc^ule  unb  bem  jungen  Tlanm  gebient.  ($?en)alb.) 

(281.)  1.  Wan  ^cilt  micf)  ^ier  gefangen,  toiber  attc  SSolfer* 
re^te.  (@(^.)  2.  gur  tobt  [tot]  X)oh  man  mid)  auf.  (@.)  3.  ©§ 
flingelte,  bie  3^f)iir  offnete  fic^,  bie  ^ertr)anbtfd)aft  erfc^ien.  (^rei.) 

4,  (So  iDeit  mar  id^  geftern  gefommen,  al§  man  mic^  abrief.   (®.) 

5.  §ier  giinbete  fid)  frol)  ha§>  fd^one  Sid^t  ber  SBiffenfd^aft,  be§ 
freien  j[)en!en§  an.  (®.)  6.  5lu§  ©tiefeln  mac^en  fid)  leic^t  ^an^^ 
toffeln.  m 

(282.)  1.  3d^  iDerbe  eben  gum  SRittag^effen  gerufen.  {@d^.)  2. 
gerrara  marb,  mit  9fiom  unb  mit  glorenj,  t)on  meinem  ^ater 
t)iel  gepriefen.  (®.)  3.  ^nrc^  eine  l^intere  ^forte  fii'^r'  id^  end), 
bie  nur  burci)  einen  Wann  tiert^eibigt  [tierteibigt]  njirb.  (@^.) 
4.  Seonarbo'g  (SJemcitbe  im  ©aale  be§  ^a(afte§  ift  nie  boHenbet 
iDorben.  {^.  ®r.)  5.  Dttilie  erinnerte  fic^  jebeg  SSorte^,  n)a§  ge* 
fproc^en  marb.  (®.)  6.  Wx^t  e^er  benf  ic^  biefe§  ^att  ju 
brauc^en,  bi§  eine  '^f)ai  get^an  ift,  bie  untt)ibcrfter)Iid)  ben  §odf|* 
berrat^  [^oc^uerrat]  bejeugt.   {^^.)    7.  SDie  ^ud)bructer!unft 


370  EXERCISES. 

ttjar  fd^on  iiber  ^unbert  ^a^re  erfunben;  beffenungead^tet  erfi^ieti 
ein  ^uc^  nod^  al§  em  §eiltgeg.  (@.)  8.  SDer  ^rief  tft  ja  er* 
l&rod^en  1    S)a§  !ann  mo^I  fein.  (S?e[f,) 

THEME  Xn 
THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

1.  When  I  was  in  Europe  there  was  fighting  in  France. 

2.  Wherever  we  appeared  there  was  singing  and  dancing. 

3.  On  the  12th  of  August  the  Pope  was  found  dead  in  his 
bed.  4.  Luther  is  called  the  greatest  son  of  Germany. 
6.  The  right  of  preaching*  was  denied  him  by  the 
Pope,  and  he  was  called  an  enemy  of  God.  6.  If  he 
goes  to  Leipzig  he  will  be  killed.  7.  He  was  told  that 
there  was  fighting  in  Leipzig,  but  he  would  go.  8.  A 
place  was  found  for  Wittig  in  the  art  school,  and  he  was 
helped  f .  9.  The  place  was  given  him  because  his  work 
was  considered  good.  10.  The  door  opened  and  I  was  called 
away.  11.  This  medal  was  given  my  father  by  the  artist, 
and  it  has  been  much  praised.  12.  The  painting  was  be- 
gun by  Leonardo,  but  it  was  never  finished  by  him.  13. 
Science  and  free  thought  were  denied  to  the  people.  14. 
He  was  led  through  a  back  door  into  the  hall  of  the  palace. 
15.  The  letter  had  been  found  in  his  hands,  but  it  had  not 
been  broken  open.  16.  The  painting  had  been  finished 
before  Leonardo  went  to  Rome.  17.  When  the  child  was 
baptized,  the  relations  appeared. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    SEKTENOES    XIV. 
REFLEXIVES. 

(286-87.)  1.  ©ine  m^  ber  anberen  alfo  berl^etrat^eten  [*ra* 
teten]  ftd^  aHe  i^re  Sugenbfreunbinnen.  {^et}.]  2.  (S§  ftredft  fid^ 
eine  ©kite  bt§  m^  ^inttuerp.  (@d^.)    3.  2)od^  toie  Derge^t  ft^ 

*  845.   t  babur(i^  ge^olfeiu 


EXERCISES.  371 

^rant  unb  (Se^nen;  id)  \mu}k  mic^,  an  btc^  §u  fd^reiden. 
((Sottj^eb.)  4.  @§  ^nben  bie  ^rogen  biefer  SSelt  fid)  ber  (Srbe  be^ 
mac^tigt.   (@rf).) 

(288.)  1.  X^onnt'*  ic^  boc^  in  beinem  ^^au  gefunb  tnic^  hattnl 
(®.)  2.  Qf^  ttjitt  mid)  frci  unb  gliidlic^  traumen.  {<B6).)  3.  ^a 
mitt  id^  mid^  mieber  gefunb  ober  t)ottig  rafenb  gaffen.  (®.)  4. 
DZiemanb  fc^Inmmert  ftc^  fromm.  (@^r.)  5.  ^e§  ©onntag^  in 
ber  9[Rorgenftunbe  mie  rtianbert'^  fid)  am  D^^ein  fo  fc^on.  {aRiilter.) 
6.  S3on  eurer  ga^rt  fe^rt'^  fid)  nic^t  immer  it)ieber.  (@cf|.)  7.  ©S 
giemt  fi(^  nic^t,  ba§  ic^  bcin  ©(^ulbner  bin.  ($?e[f.) 

(289.)  1.  ^(^  erinnere  niic^  mit  grenben  meiner  ^ngenb.  (®j 
2.  ©T  ttjnnberte  fid)  aucl^  iiber  hm  Sauf  ber  SSelt,  benn  er  ^atte 
bie  ganje  franjbfifc^e  9f^et)oIution  eriebt.  {^xtl)  3.  Qd^  f)aht 
mic^  iibcr  gernon)'^  5tu§fef)en  mirffid)  erfc^roden,  fo  t)eraltet  er^ 
fd)ien  er  mir.  {Bd}.)  4.  ^ein  (Sf)renmann  mirb  fid)  ber  ©c^mac^ 
bequemen.  (@d).)  5.  ®er  red^te  ©c^iiler  lernt  au§  bem  ^e!ann= 
ten  ha^  Unbefannte  entmideln,  unb  na^ert  fid)  bem  ^Zeifter.  (@.) 
6.  ^6)  tvxii  mid^nic^t  ber  9k(^enfc^aft  entjie^en;  bie  9fiid)ter  finb 
e§  nur,  bie  ic^  t)erlDerfe.  {Bd).) 

(290.)  1.  ©n  innger  Slater  n)iinfc^t  fid)  ai^aufe.  (@pr.)  2.  ^c^ 
^aht  mir  biefen  9[)tenfd)en  ^um  ^iele  gemac^t,  ^ah^  mir  t)orge=s 
fe^t,  i^n  nid^t  auf5ugeben,  alfo  r)ab'  id)  if)n  gerni^.  (@(^.)  3. 
28ag  fid^  ber  ^ett  getraut,  ha^  fonntet  Q^r  nic^t  magen  ?  {B^,) 


ILLUSTRATIVE    SEnSTTENCES  XV. 
IMPEESONALS. 

(292.)  1.  D  lt)ie  ift  e§  tali  gcn)orben,  unb  fo  traurtg,  ob^  unb 
leer !  {^aUtx^khtn.)  2.  ©§  regnet !  (^ott  fegnet  bie  ©rbe,  bie  fo 
burftig  ift.  ((Snslin.)  3.  ^er  SSinb  ge'^t  fait  unb  mic^  froftelt 
burd^  ben  ^elj.  (^rei.)  4.  Wit  ben  3fif)^^e^i  Q^^^H  ^^  ^^^'  ^^^ 
^anbe  dottig  §u  Ibfen.  (§um.)  5.  $D^ir  o^nt  ein  ungliidffeliger 
51ugenblicf.  (@(f|.)  6.  §einrid^,  mir  grant  t)or  bir!  (®.)  1. 
^o^nen  f  fie  un§,  eg  reuet  fie  morgen.  (Sielanb.)  8.  ^id)  hixnlt, 

*  831.2.    t332.1d.  324.4. 


372  EXEECISES. 

icl^  tuet^  a\i§>  metd^en  gefjieru  uufeve  ^ugenb  feimt.  ($!eff.)  9. 
^ief  baiiert  mid^  euer.  (35oB.)  10.  (Sie  finb  ungerec^t,  ttienn  ©ie 
eineti  fotd^en  ^erbacl)t  au^fpredjen,  unb  mir  5iemt  nic^t,  i§n  ^u 
ertragen.  (^^ret.)  11.  ^ud)  braucl)te  e§  eigeutiid)  immer  ^wti 
SKeufcl^en,  eiiien,  ber'g  jd^e,  unb  eiiien,  ber'g  befc^rieOe.*  (®.)  12. 
3e^t  treibt  e§  mic^  unmiberfte^Iic^  in  ^i)xc  9Jd§e,  unb  id)  mu^ 
S^nen  fagen,  tDte  ey  in  mir  au^fie^t.  (^rei.)  13.  W\v  i)at  'oon 
biefen  Sl^bnigen  unb  ©(^(ac^ten  unb  Sl^riege^t^aten  nur  getrdumt. 
(@d^.)  14.  5ll§  er  mieber  in  bag  §e(Ie  trat,  gidnjte  e§  feud)t  in 
feinen  5tugen.  (^ret.)  15.  ®em  9}liiffiggdnger  fel)!!  eg  ftetg  an 
8eit  sunt  ^f)un.  (^iicf.)  16.  SSenn  e§  Hopft,  fo  !ann  eg  ein  @Idu= 
biger  jein.  (@berg.)  It.  §orc^,  9}?art()e,  braufjen  po(^t  eg  !  (®eibl.; 
18.  (Sinen  fiirc^terlic^en  JftMeg  giOt  eg.  {®.)  19.  5(u(^  im  Sager 
gibt  eg  ber  braDen  SDtdnner  genug.  (^d^.)  20.  5([ier  einen  f(^o^ 
neren  (§engft)  faun  eg  nidjt  geben,  rief  ber  ^rinj.  (@ber«.)  21. 
SOfJir  tt)ar  eg  ©rnft  niit  meiner  ©eligfeit.  (@c^.)  22.  2Bem  ju 
tDoI}!  ift,  ben  getliftet  immer  nac^  ncuen  ^ingen.  (3.  ^r.)  23.  9^un 
tv\x]i  bu  begreifen,  n)ie  mir  tvax,  aU  ic^  nac^  Saf)ren  ber  ^ren- 
nung  if)n  guerft  mieberfa!^.  (^e^.)  24.  Wix  ift  5U  SOZut^e  [3[I^ute], 
begann  ber  doctor,  alg  mdre  ic^  r)ier  nicl^t  fremb.  (grei.)  25. 
Wix  ift,  atg  oO  id)  bie  §dnbe  auf  g  §aupt  bir  legen  foUt' !  (^et.) 
26.  SSie  tvaxh  mir,  alg  ic^  in'g  ^nnere  ber  ^iri^e  trat !  (®c^.) 
21.  5Iug  (S^oburg  mirb  gefc^rieben,  ha^  bie  granjofen  in  tnenig 
^agen  barin  einriiden  merben.  (@(^.)  28.  ®cnn  gcmalt  tt)urbe 
in  ^enebig  tt)ie  iiberalt  ancT^  im  fitnf5el)nten  3ar)rr)unbert.  (^.  ®r.) 
29.  SSir  bebattiren  [==tieren]  iiber  ben  ^egriff  beg  D^ec^teg  nnh  ha 
tt)irb  juraeilen  orbentlic^  berniinftig  gefprDd)en.  (@d).)  30.  Wtvi\]t* 
eg  fo  rafc^  gel^orc^t  fein?  ((^(^.) 

(294-95.)  1.  (^g  Idfet  fid)  im  ©injelnen  iiber  bie  ©c^rift 
nic^tg  fagen.  (@d^.)  2.  ^g  mu^te  ein  anberer  3Seg  gefunben 
merben.  (^.  ®r.)  3.  ©g  tvax  ber  S^^iefe  ©otiatf)  ein  ganj  gefd^r- 
lid^  SO^ann.  (Staiibiug.)  4.  ®g  r)at  if)n  nie  in  bie  grembe  gejogen. 
(33of)tau,)  5.  (5g  foU  mic^  trunbern,  mag  biefeg  ^u(^  eigentlid^ 
ent^alten  mirb.  [^06).)  6.  ©g  furd^te  f  bie  (Spotter  t)a§>  Wltn^ 
fd^engef c^te^t !  m 

•332.5(2.    t331.c 


EXEECISES.  373 

THEME    Xm. 

REFLEXIVES  AND  IMPEESONALS, 

1.  She  did  not  dare  to  take  that  way.  2.  The  en- 
emy have  gained  possession  of  the  whole  city.  3.  This 
man  has  worked  himself  dead  tired.  4.  The  poor  old 
woman  dreams  herself  young  and  beautiful  again.  5. 
Do  you  remember  the  morning  hour  when  we  wandered 
together  by  the  Rhine  ?  6.  We  were  wondering  about 
your  journey.  7.  He  drew  near  to  me,  and  I  rejoiced  in 
his  friendly  words.  8.  He  was  really  frightened  at  the 
news,  for  ho  remembers  the  French  Eevolution,  and  he 
fears  to  experience  another.  9.  I  do  not  trust  myself  to 
write  to  him.  10.  I  wish  for  myself  no  better  judge  than 
he  is.  11.  When  we  went  out  it  was  raining,  and  later  it 
snowed.  12.  It  became  cold  and  he  was  chilly.  13.  I  am 
horrorstruck  at  his  treason,  but  I  am  deeply  sorry  for 
him.  14.  You  will  regret  having  spoken  out  such  a  sus- 
picion.    15.  It  is  not  suitable  for  me  to  describe  it  to  you. 

16.  You  have  certainly  not  seen  that;  you  have  dreamed  it. 

17.  I  pity  the  poor  king,  but  I  pity  more  his  unhappy 
l^eople.  18.  There  is  need  of  several  good  men  in  the  camp, 
for  there  is  always  a  lack  of  soldiers.  19.  There  was  knock- 
ing, and  Martha  went  to  the  door.  20.  How  she  felt  when 
she  saw  him  again  !  21.  She  felt  as  if  he  were  not  a  stran- 
ger to  her.  22.  There  are  many  who  debate  over  the  idea 
of  right,  but  there  are  few  who  understand  it.  23.  There 
was  no  one  who  spoke  sensibly  about  it.  24.  In  the  church 
there  was  singing  and  praying,  and  I  felt  as  if  I  must  sing 
too.      25.    It  was  told    him   that  he  must  obey  quickly, 

26.  It  delights  me  to  hear  what  he  says  about  the  writing. 

27.  I  wonder  what  is  written  from  France. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    SENTENCES  XVL 
PERSON  AND  NUMBER. 

(321.)  1.  SSir  oben  unb  tfir  unten  fotteu  ein0  fein  tn  bcr 
Stebe.  (®5rre«0    2.  ^a^  tarn  e0  mix  nun  ^elfen,  ^a^  bu  unb 


374  EXEKCISES. 

mein  SSater  emft  greunbe  ttjaren  ?  (?eff.)  3.  ^rin§  ^arto§  unb 
i(^  begegnen  biefett  TOttag  itn§  tm  SBorgemad^  ber  ^onigtn.  (®d^.) 
4.  2)er  ha  unb  i(^,  tDtr  ftnb  au§  (Sger.  (@(^.)  5.  D  bu,  ber  bie 
^tmmet  fd^uf !  (Mop.)  6.  ^u,  ber  auf  ben  SSoIfen  t^ront  in 
ber  ^1a6)t  (5lrnbt.)  t.  SStr  anberen,  ble  \vh  t)on  ber  ^efettfd^aft 
Qb^ngen,  mliffen  un§  nac^  i§r  bilben.  (®.)  8.  SSciret  i^r  auii) 
bei  un§,  bie  i^r  mic^  feme  liebt:  o  fo  bauten  mir  ^ier  §)iitten  ber 
greunbfci^aft  un§.  (Mop.) 

(322.)  1.  (Sr  fomo^I  at§  ber  ^erjog  jeigten  fi(^  milbe  nnb 
5ugangli(^.  (^.  @r.)  2.  (£in  §arfner  mit  feiner  ^oc^ter  gingen 
t>or  mir  ^er.  (®.)  3.  D^ic^t  Siebe  bto^,  au(^  3orn  unb  $eftig= 
!eit  trdgt  eine  bunfle  ^inbe  bor  ben  5Iugen.  (O^tenfd^Iager.)  4. 
9Zoc]^  ©tanb,  nod^  filter  tt)irb  gefpart.  (SBielanb.)  5.  ©efa^r 
unb  $rei§  unb  aud^  ber  fRu^m  fei  mein.  (®.)  6.  (Sd^on^eit, 
9^eid^tl)um  [Dteid^tum],  ®f)r'  unb  dJladjt  finft  mit  ber  B^it  in 
obe  D^ac^t.  (33o§.)  t.  ^aneben  tvo^nt  bie  fromme  ^ilgerfd^aar. 
(®.)  8.  ^arauf  fam  be§  3Sege§  eine  d^riftenfc^aar,  bie  auc^ 
guriicfgebtieben  mar.  (U^.)  9.  (Sin  ^rupp  SKdnner  ftanb  am 
®ren§ftein.  {$vtl)  10.  (Sine  5ln5a5I  (Solbaten  fatten  fid§  ge= 
fe^t.  (®.)  11.  3c§  griff  fogleicb  nad^  bent  ^eutel,  in  melc^em 
eine  gute  9[^enge  ((S^olbftiicfe)  fic^  befanben.  (®.)  12.  ©in 
l^alb  §unbert  foId)er  ^emerfungen  madden  einen  ^^^ilologen. 
(geff.)  13.  ^a  fommen  ein  $aar  au§  ber  ^iidje.  (@(^.)  14.  ^a§ 
finb  meine  Sflid^ter.  (^c^.)  15.  ©§  maren  nur  ^unbert  3:^aler, 
fagte  ber  ^tlte.  {^xtl}  16.  ^a,  ha^  tnaren  bie  5(ugen,  bie  treuen, 
flaren  ^ugen,  bie  er  t)or()er  gefe^en.  (@piel.)  17  (Sure  foniglid^e 
SO^ajeftat  finb  au^er  fic^,  unb  fc^einen  tief  bemegt.  (@(f|.)  18. 
(Suer  (Sjceffen^  ^aben  3^re  ^ienerfd^aft  iiberrafc^t.  (®.)  19.  ^er 
gerr  ^ebodma^tigte  l^aben  bie  le^ten  9^ad§te  tt)enig  gefc^tafen, 
fagte  ^art  (^ret.) 

THEME  XIV. 

PEESON  AND  NUMBER. 

1.  He  and  I  will  help  you,  for  we  were  friends  of  your 
father.     2.  I,  who  am  poorest  of  all,  cannot  help  you.    3, 


EXERCISES.  375 

• 
Charitable  man,  thou  who  helpest  every  one,  help  me  also. 
4.  You  and  the  prince  are  to  *  meet  me  to-morrow  in  the 
ante-chamber  of  the  queen.  5.  The  Duke  and  Prince 
Charles  went  into  the  hall  first;  my  father  and  I  followed 
them.  6.  The  king  and  queen  met  us  and  showed  them- 
selves kind  and  gracious.  7.  Beauty,  riches,  and  friend- 
ship have  deserted  me,  but  my  self-respect  I  have  not  lost. 
8.  A  troop  of  pilgrims  met  us  on  the  way.  9.  A  crowd  of 
men  had  remained  behind,  and  a  pair  of  them  had  seated 
themselves.  10.  A  couple  of  gold  pieces  were  found  in 
the  bag  after  he  had  gone.  11.  There  were  a  number  of 
gold  pieces  in  the  bag  when  I  gave  it  to  him.  12.  Those 
were  the  thalers  which  the  old  woman  gave  me. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    SENTENCES    XVIL 
TENSES   OF    THE  INDICATIVE. 

(324.)  1.  ^a§  Staffer  raufc^t^  \>a§>  SSoffer  f^moU,  etn  gifd^er 
fag  baran.  . .  .  Unb  tt)ie  er  fi^t,  imb  mie  er  laufc^t,  t^eilt  [teilt] 
fid^  bie  S^ut^  [glut]  empor ;  au§>  bent  betregten  SSaffer  raufd^t 
em  feuc^teg  SSeiO  IjerDor.  (®.)  2.  5(B  ii^  ^ai)n  mir  mac^e 
burcl^g  ©etrii^I,  ha  tritt  ein  bxaim'  ^o^emeriDeib  mtc^  an,  fagt 
mic^  in§  5(uge  fc^arf  unb  fpridjt.  (@d^.)  3.  ®te  trauernbe  ®er^ 
mania  fragt  feit  Sa^ren,  wami  fo((  bie  red^te  Qt'it  fommen.  {%xtl) 
4.  Qc^  liebe  ^^thha  felt  ^mx  Qa^ren,  feitbem  icl^  fie  juerft  in  ©. 
fennen  lernte.  (®^te(.)  5.  ©ie  fennen  mic^  bort  feit  Uielen  Sal)- 
ren  aU  einen  reblic^en  ^iirger.  (^^ret.)  6.  9}Zorgen  ift  fie  meine 
gran  unb  iibermorgen  ge^e  \^  mit  i^r  fort.  {$?e[f.)  1.  5lbcr  id^ 
ge^e  ^erum,  fie  aufjufuc^^en,  unb  fomme  mieber,  fobatb  ic^  fie 
finbe.  (®.)  8.  ®a§  (Sct)tog  erfteigeu  U^ir  in  biefer  9lac()t,  ber 
©d^liiffet  bin  id)  mad)tig.  SflMr  ermorben  bie  filter,  reifjen 
bic^  au§  beincr  Slammer.  {@(^.)  9.  33erlag  bic^  barauf,  fagte 
er,  ic^  fomme  eud)  nac^.  (^etj.) 

(325.)  1.  Unb  alg  i^  traurig  burrf)  bie  (Sale  ging,  ha  fa^  id^ 
^erjog  §anfen  in  einem  ^xttx  tx)einenb  fte^n.f  {®(^.)    2.  (Seit 

*iotten.    t  343.1.5, 


376  EXEECISES. 

o(^t  ^agen  unb  langer  fel^tte  e§  ntir  fotDo'^t  an  Suft  unb  Sonne 
al§  an  ^efunb^eit  jn  meinen  ^efcf)aften.  (@d^.)  3.  S)er  gmeitc 
(Sto(f  be§  ^orber^anfeg  mar  feit  Dielen  Sci^t:en  nnbeltjo^t. 
f^ret.)  4.  SSa§  er  f^un  tDottte  an  biefem  ^age,  ftanb  jeit  SD^ona^ 
ten  tt)ie  eine  nnabanbertic^e  S^of^ttjenbigfeit  [9^ottt)enbig!eit]  t)or 
feiner  ©eete.  (^eij.)  5.  ^er  giii^ft  nac^^er  berfc^affte  mir  in  bret 
^agen,  it)a§  tc^  gn  SSien  in  brei^ig  nid^t  eriangte.  (@c^.)  6.  (Sr 
felbft  bertraute  mir,  tva§>  id^  gmar  langft  anf  anberem  2Beg  fd^on 
in  (Srfa^rnng  brac^te.  ('Sd^.) 

(326.)  1.  (£r  fommt  ntir  nic^t  juriic!,  tnie  er  gegangen.  {^dj.) 
2.  ^ie  Hcicfje  gran  au§  ber  grembe  ift  in  bcr  Slac^t  geflorben. 
(^rei.)  3.  SSag  ic^  tjermoc^te,  ^ah'  id)  gent  getf)an.  (Bdj.)  4. 
®a  ^aben  ^ingemorfne  SSorte  tnid^  bele^rt,  ba^  feine  ©eete  feft 
ber  SSnnfdfj  crgriffen  ^at,  bid)  gn  befi^en.  (®.)  5.  ©inige  $D^onate 
Derftrid^en,  e^e  an§  9}labrib  eine  Stntmort  !am.  (@c^.)  6.  ^ift  bu 
nid^t  me'^r  HJJinifter?  S^  bin'§  gen)efen,  n)ie  bn  fie^ft.  (6d^.) 
1.  Qd^  ^abe  fie  gefannt,  in  Valencia,  13 or  ^manjig  ^a^i^en.  (^au[f.) 
8.  Tlit  fiinf  (^efeHen  mar  er  an^ge^ogen,  mit  gmeien  fe^rte  er 
jnriic!.  (@Ber8.) 

(327.)  1.  SSa§  ber  5Ib|d)eu  ber  gan^en  nieberldnbifd^en  S^a^ 
tion  nid^t  bermoi^t  ^citte,  inar  bent  geringfd^ci^igen  33etragen  beg 
Slbely  gelungen.  (®c^.)  2.  .3ii^  Sc|miebe  ging  ein  junger  $elb, 
er  '^atte  ein  gtite§  (Sd)tt)ert  befteKt.  (U^.) 

(328.)  1.  Qc^  bringe  bie  le^ten  SSorte  meiner  grennbin,  bie 
©ie  ni(i)t  oljne  ^f^ii^rnng  lefen  trerben.  (@.)  2.  ©r  mirb  anf  mid^ 
flnd^en,  menn  id§  i^m  ha§>  ^ucl)  nid^t  balb  bringe.  ($?eff.)  3.  (£§ 
mirb  tt)of;(  (^elb  im  Coffer  fein,  bacl)ten  bie  Sentc.  (!i?eanber.)  4. 
SJJan  mirb  nngefd^r  anf  eben  bie  5lrt  berfa^ren  fein.  (Stn!el^ 
ntann.)  5.  ^^x  (Sc^reiben  fod  5ng(eid§  ntein  ^ebitit)  fein,  mit 
bem  id§  mid^  einfteHe,  fobalb  id§  e§  er^alten.*  (®.)  6.  28er  im- 
mer  finftere  SJ^iene  mad^t,  ^at  balb  bie  (^nnft  berloren.  (®.)  T. 
liefer  gebrnar  ift  alfo  ^^ingegangen,  o^ne  ©ie  gn  mir  ^n  bringen, 
nnb  idf)  !)abe,  ermartenb  nnb  ^offenb,  balb  ben  SSinter  iiberftan^ 
ben.  ((S(^.)  8.  Unb  menn  eg  (bag  llnterne:^men)  glitcft,  fo  ift  eB 
ijergeben.  {B^,)     9.    SSenn  id&  geftorben  bin,  finbet  er  htn 

*439.a 


EXEKCISES.  377 

(Sd^tiiffet  in  ntelner  SKeftentafc^e.  (^ret.)  10.  graulein,  er  (ber 
SBrief)  ift  unfe^Ibar  jerriffen,  tt)enn  ©ie  ftc^  nic^t  balb  anber§ 
erflaren.  (?e[f.)  11.  ^enn  bu  btc^  aufric^teft,  bift  bu  mit  ein 
paar  ©d^ritten  bort.  (^.  ®r.) 

THEME    XV. 

TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

1.  My  friend  and  I  were  walking  slowly  through  the 
city.  2.  Suddenly  a  strange  man  stands  before  him,  he 
looks  at  him,  says  something  to  him,  and  they  both  leave 
me.  3.  I  try  to  follow  them,  but  they  are  soon  lost  in  the 
crowd.  4.  I  have  been  seeking  them  for  two  hours,  but  I 
do  not  find  them.  5.  As  soon  as  I  find  them,  I  will  bring 
the  man  to  you.  6.  Do  you  know  the  man?  7.  I  have 
known  him  for  years.  8.  She  has  been  my  wife  for  two 
weeks.  9.  Had  you  known  her  long  when  she  became  your 
wife  ?  10.  I  had  known  her  twenty  years,  and  I  had  loved 
her  since  the  first  day.  11.  As  soon  as  she  asks  me  I  shall 
tell  her  the  truth.  12.  If  I  see  that  man  now  I  shall  mur- 
der him.  13.  He  had  not  been  long  in  the  prison,  when 
his  friends  murdered  the  keeper  and  freed  him.  14.  The 
duke  wrote  me,  what  he  wanted  in  *  Vienna.  15.  I  pro- 
*cured  for  him  everything  which  he  had  been  wanting.  16. 
Have  all  your  friends  gone  away?  17.  One  went  yester- 
day, the  other  will  go  to-morrow.  18.  Several  months  have 
passed  since  his  letter  came.  19,  He  went  to  Vienna,  but 
he  did  not  do  all  that  he  promised.  20.  I  knew  the  minister 
in  Madrid.  21.  As  soon  as  he  came  into  the  church  I  knew 
him.  22.  He  had  been  minister,  but  he  was  so  no  more. 
23.  "We  had  brought  him  the  letter  as  soon  as  we  had  re- 
ceived it.  24.  He  had  cursed  us  because  we  had  not 
brought  it  sooner.  25.  The  young  hero  cannot  receive  his 
sword  until  he  has  ordered  it.     26.  You  will  weep  when 

*5U. 


378  EXERCISES. 

you  hear  tlie  last  words  of  my  friend.  27.  I  presume  they 
are  very  interesting.  28.  In  February  my  friend  will 
probably  come,  thought  L  29.  If  I  do  not  find  him  soon, 
I  am  lost.    30.  When  he  is  dead,  I  have  not  a  single  friend. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    SENTENCES   XVHL 
SUBJUNCTIVE  AS  OPTATIVE,  CONDITIONAL  AND  POTENTIAL. 

(331.)  1.  SSe^  eu^,  i()r  ftotjen  fallen !  mz  tone  fiiBer  £Iang 
burc^  eure  Manim  mieber  !  (U^.)  2.  ^a§  tDotte  @ott  nic^t,  ha^ 
bu  bag  bollbringft !  (®rf).)  3.  Q3ilben  mv  un§  ein,  mx  W'dxtn 
auf  ber  (Sifenba^u  ;  plauberii  iDir  trie  in  einem  ^oupe.  ($?ett3alb.) 
4.  3Ser  ©ebnib  i)at,  ber  irarte.  ((Sberg.)  5.  WoQt  nie  ber  ^ag 
erfc^einen,  wo  be§  ran^en  ^riet3e§  §prben  biefeg  ftitte  Zljai 
bnrd)toIien  !  {<Bd^.)  6.  jS)iirft'  id)  njoljl  bie^mnt  mi(^  entfernen  ? 
(®.)  1.  ^Ic^  !  lieber,  guter  WHamx,  mljni  (Sr  *  niic^  n)o^I  anf  feineu 
SSagen.  (aJJu^kr.)  8.  Qd^  fei,  gemd^rt  mir  bie  33itte,  in  eurem 
^unbe  ber  britte.  (®(^.)  9.  SSir  mbgcn  bie  SSelt  fennen  lernen, 
trie  mir  luoEen,  fie  trirb  immer  eine  ^ag=  unb  5^a(^tfeite  ^aben. 
(®.)  10.  Unb  tt)er  ber  SDic^tfunft  ©timme  nic^t  tjernimmt,  ift 
ein  ^arbar,  er  fei  and),  incr  er  jei.  (®.)  11.  ^ie  ginfternig 
[=ni§]  fei  noc!^  fo  bicftt,  bem  Sic^te  triberfte^t  fie  nic^t.  {<B)?x.) 
12.  (@r  fagte)  ha^  niemanb  treber  (S^efcingni^  [^ni§]  noc^  San-. 
be^Dermeifung  jn  fiirc^ten  I}abeu  foKte,  er  ^citte  fic^  benn  eine§ 
politifc^en  ^erbred)en0  fc^ulbig  gemacl^t.  (@c!^.)  13.  Tlan  foE  bie 
alten  ©c^nr)e  nicl^t  fortroerfen,  man  ^ahz  benn  neue.  (^^r.)  14. 
SDie  (Sonne  fin!t,  hdh  teud)ten  mir  bie  ©terne ;  o,  mcirft  bu  ^a, 
(®.)  15.  grommer  '^tah !  o  '^citt'  ic^  nimmer  mit  bem  ©c^trerte 
bid)  tiertaufcl^t.   (@(^.) 

(332.)  1.  (^emiffe  9}^enfc^en  fatten  ^ugenben,  menn  fie  @elb 
:^atten.  (3.  ^.  m  2.  QatV  id)  bicf)  frii^er  fo  gerec^t  erfannt,  e§ 
mare  ^iete§  ungefd^e^'n  gebtieben.  (@d^.)  3.  SSenn  mir  aEen 
l^elfen  Ibnnten,  bann  maren  mir  ^n  beneiben.f  (i^eff.)  4.  SSenn 
©ina  ^ter  mcire,  fagte  er  ganj  taut  ju  fic§,  fie  mad|te  ein  ^ebid^t, 

*  158.3.    t843.ni,l&. 


EXERC5ISES.  379 

ober  au(^  gtuet.  (^e^.)  5.  ^onnt  id)  bod^  ^tn  5tu§gaitg  finbett, 
a^,  tr)ie  \n^lV  i(^  mt^  begtiicft !  (®c^.)  6.  SSie  ftiinb'g  urn  euc^, 
§og'  id^  mein  §eer  jurM.  (®d^.)  1.  ®u.!ottnteft  ^ott  banfen, 
unb  bi(^  t)or  ber  SSelt  gro^  mad)en,  tDenn  bu  in  beinem  Seben 
eine  fo  ebte  ^^t  get^an  ^atteft,  tr)ie  bie  ift,  itm  tuelc^er  tDtllen  ic^ 
gefangen  ft^e.  (®.)  8.  Wix^V  kf)  je^n  9teic^e  mit  bent  "iRMtn 
fc^anen,  i^  rette  mid^  ntd)t  mit  be§  grennbe§  Sebcn.  (@(^.)  9. 
(Sinb  auc^  bie  alten  ^iic^er  nic^t  gnr  §anb,  fie  finb  in  nnferen 
gerjen  eingefd^rieben.  (®cf|.)  10.  IXnter  ben  a^^enfc^en  tvxxh 
man  nic^t  beffer,  iDenn  man  nic^t  f(^on  gut  nnter  fie  fommt. 
(3.  ^.  9i.)  11.  SSenn  biefer  ftarle  %xm  enc^  nic^t  ^ereingefit^rt, 
i{)r  fa^et  nie  ben  IRaud)  Hon  einem  franfifdjen  famine  fteigen. 
(®(^.)  12.  D  fonnt  ic§  bod)  ben  ©treit  in  ber  S^atur  t>erfo§nen, 
unb  5ur  ^ertrciglidjfeit  bie  9[)^enfd)en  auc^  getDo^nen !  [Md.)  13. 
0  ptten  ttiir'y  mit  frifc^er  Xi)ai  bollenbet!  {@(^.)  14.  §atte 
i(^  boc^  immer  gefdjiniegen !  (®.)  15.  @r  trar  fo  ftolj  hax^ 
auf,  al§  nienn  bie  (Smpftubung  fein  gemcfen  trcire.  (@.)  16. 
S^ommt,  fe^t  euc^,  tijut,  al§>  loenn  i^r  gu  §aufe  mcirt!  (®.)  lY. 
Ueberm  *  |)errfcf)er  i^ergi^t  er  nur  ben  Si^iener  ganj  unb  gar,  aB 
tijar^  mit  feiner  SSiirb'  er  fd)on  geboren.  (@c^.)  18.  ^er  ©d}tu^ 
(be§  ^riefe§)  mar  ganj,  ai§>  menu  er  i§n  felbft  gefd)rieben  f)atte. 
(®.)  19.  d^  gilt  bie  Seben^pfltc^t  ^u  erfiillen,  a(§  ob  man  emig  lebe, 
unb  mieberum,  aU  ob  man  ftiinblid)  ftiirbe.  (^luerboc^.)  20.  ©ie 
nidte  nur  leife,  al§>  ob  biefer  SSunfd)  i^r  gefatle.  {(S6ev«.)  21.  Q3ete, 
al§  :§iilfe  fein  5lrbeiten.  ^Irbeite,  al§>  ^iilfe  fein  ^eten.  (@^r.) 
22.  i)a§>  tjerfc^tog  mir  hen  9J2unb,  unb  l)dtt'  icf)  ben  ^ob  be§ 
$8erbrec^er§  barum  (eiben  miiffen.  (^offmami.)  23.  '2)a§  fRecl^t 
gur  ^rone  mar  nidjt  erbtid^,  unb  bod^  f)atte  ein  langere§  2then 
feine§  SSaterS  bie  5Infpriid^e  feine§  einjigen  ©oljneg  me^r 
befeftigt,  unb  bie  §offmmg  ^ur  Sl\one  gefic^ert.  (®.)  24.  33ei 
langerem  Seben  bei  grogen  f  aiferg,  mare  er  (ber  ii!reu55ug)  ge:= 
mi6  nid^t  in  biefem  SO^af^e  bereitelt  morben.  (9?aiinter.)  25.  Unter 
fed^§  5tugen  mad)t  man  bie  biimmften  ©treic^e,  bie  man  unter 
bieren  gar  nid)t  §u  ©tanbe  hxad)tt.  (^e^.)  26.  ^a§  ift  ein  Sreunb, 
ber  fid^  fiir  i^n  tobtfd^Iageti  tie^e.  (Seff.)    2t.  3lber  fageu  @ie 

•65, 


380  EXERCISES. 

felBft,  §err;  m§>  ^atte  e§  ge^otfen?  (§c^.)  28.  (g§  ift  !etn 
9lRenfc§  fo  arm,  ha^  er  nic^t  fterben  !5nnte.  (triiger.)  29.  2Setc|er 
XXnban!6are   ^dtte   ftc^   nic^t   p  entfc^ulbigen   getpu^t!    (?eff.) 

30.  ©eftern  ^Ibent)  entftanb  auf  einmal  ein  leb^after  grieben§= 
ruf.    S^^i^iefern  er  gegriinbet  jet,  mii§   ftc^  balb  ^etgen.  (®.) 

31.  Or)ne  Siebe  t3mge  bie  t^iecifc^e  SSett  ju  ©runbe.  (3afob§.) 

32.  (El,  ^aia,  tt)arum  mare  benit  ha§>  fo  unglaubltc^  ?  (?eff.)  33. 
©0  mbd^f  ic§  leben,  ba^  \(i)  iydtit,  raeitn  icl^  fc^eibe,  gelebet  mtr 
5ur  Suft  imb  anberen  nic^t  gu  Seibe.  (9lucf.)  34.  ^ie  greube 
iiberrafcl^t  un§  oft  auf  einer  ©pur,  tt)o  trir  fie  uic^t  ertrartct 
^citteu.  (SStelattb.)  35.  ^c^  tuiiufc^te,  ha^  bei  S^ueu  iu  Weimar 
bie  (^efc^afte  beffer  ge^en  mbgeu,  al§>  bei  mir.  (@c^.)  36.  SSarum 
fottten  tvxx  nic^t  miinfc^eu,  ncbeu  ben  Unferigen  gu  ru^en,  unb 
menu  e§  aud^  nur  fiir  ein  3ar)rr)unbert  iudre.  ((S.)  31.  ^er 
SD^^eufd^  ift  frei  gefd)affeu,  ift  frci,  unb  \mx'  er  iu  S^^etten  geboren. 
(@(^.)  38.  3Ser  bu  aud^  feift,  ic^  tt)iinfcl}e  9!ettung  btr.  (®.)  39. 
SSie  fe'^r  aud^  euer  3uu're»  miberftrebe,  geljorc^t  ber  Q6t  unb 
bent  (^efe|  ber  ©tunbe.  (®(^.)  40.  9lur  eine§  meig  ic^  fic^er, 
ic^  merbe  ungtii(ili(^,  tnie  biefe  3SaI)l  aucl^  auSfcittt.  (^^rei.) 
41.  IXnter  alien  Umftanben  mugte  er  ber^inbern,  ba^  bie  ©tabt 
in  frembe  (^ettjalt  fame.  (^.  ®v.)  42.  SBon  ben  giiBen  5ie^t  er 
bie  ©c^u^e  bel)eub,  Damit  er  ha^  ^dc^Ieiu  burc^fd^reite.  [<BA),)  43. 
S^er^ei^en  mir,  bamit  man  un§  Uerjei^e.  (©eiime.)  44.  ®er  alte 
9JZeufc^  in  un§  foil  fterben,  bamit  eine  neue  3:ugenb  in  un§  em^ 
porfeime.  (C^erber.)  45.  (Ettva^  fiird^ten  unb  ^offen  unb  forgen 
muB  ber  9}?enfc^  fiir  ben  fommenben  forgen,  ha^  er  bie  ©cl^mere 
be§  ^afein§  ertrage,  unb  ha§>  ermiibenbe  (^leid^maj^  ber  ^age. 
(@d^.)  46.  Ser  einmal  liigt,  bent  glaubt  man  nid^t,  unb  menu 
er  and)  bie  3SaIir^eit  fpricl)t.  (@pr.)  41.  SSie  grof3  bid)  auc^  bie 
^onigin  gu  mac^en  berfpric^t  Iran'  i^rer  ©c^mei^etrebe  nid^t. 
(@(^.)  48.  garret  i^r,  bi§  bag  ber  recl)te  9f^ing  htn  9JJunb 
eroffne  ?  (?eff.)  49.  ©d^ictt  einen  fid^eren  33oten  i^m  entgegen, 
ber  auf  ge^eimen  2Beg  i^n  ^u  mir  fiil)re.  (@*.)  50.  ^u  finbeft  !ei^ 
nen,  ber  fic^  feineg  S^ac^barn  p  fd)amen  braud^e.  (®.)  51.  (S§ift 
unmoglii^,  \>a%  ein  unb  berfelbe  Tltn\^  biefer  SSelt  unb  gugkid^ 
^ott  biene.  (Slaubiug.)    52.  Qd^  mar  nid§t  fo  eingenommen,  hai 


EXERCISES. 


381 


icl^  nid^t  (lemcrft  T)dtte,  \vk  nur  uicutgc  t^n  (Sinn  bcv  garten 
3Sorte  fii^tten.  ((^.)  53.  ^em  t()dttgen  SlRenfc^cn  fommt  e§  bar= 
anf  an,  \)a^  er  ba§  Sf^ed^te  t()ue;  ob  bag  9fted)te  gefc^e^e,  foil  i^n 
nid^t  fiimmern.  (@.) 

THEME  XVI. 
SUBJUNCTIVE  AS  OPTATIVE,  CONDITIONAL  AND  POTENTIAL. 

1.  He  who  has  anything  to  say,  let  him  speak.  2.  Let 
him  rejoice  who  hears  the  voice  of  poetry.  3.  May  war 
never  appear  to  this  peaceful  valley.  4.  May  he  never 
finish  what  he  has  begun.  5.  Come  when  you  can;  be  it 
morning  or  evening,  you  will  be  welcome.  6.  Let  him 
think  what  he  will,  I  shall  still  love  him.  7.  Let  us  sit 
down  and  chat  until  he  comes  back.  8.  May  the  world 
never  become  worse  than  it  is  already.  9.  He  has  not 
been  guilty  of  any  crime,  unless  it  be  of  a  political  one. 
10.  I  will  bless  him,  unless  he  opposes  me.  11.  O,  that  I 
were  not  guilty  of  this  crime !  12.  Would  that  I  had 
never  beheld  this  man !  13.  Had  we  not  exchanged 
peace  for  war.  14.  We  should  not  have  been  afraid,  had 
we  not  been  guilty.  15.  Had  you  known  the  world  better, 
you  would  never  have  trusted  this  man.  16.  He  would 
not  be  imprisoned  here  had  he  not  done  that  noble  deed. 
17.  Had  I  been  able  to  help  him,  I  should  have  felt  my- 
self happy.  18.  How  could  I  have  saved  myself,  if  his 
strong  arm  had  not  led  me  out  ?  19.  If  I  can  find  the 
outlet,  I  will  thank  God.  20.  He  will  make  a  poem  if 
he  hears  of  this  noble  deed.  21.  0,  that  all  had  remained 
undone !  22.  If  we  could  but  help  everyone !  23.  He 
knows  that  poem  as  if  it  were  written  in  his  heart.  24. 
She  nodded,  as  if  she  understood  everything.  25.  They 
acted  quite  as  if  they  were  at  home  here.  26.  He  is  as 
proud  as  if  he  were  forgetting  that  he  was  not  born  with 
this  rank.  27.  He  certainly  would  have  worked  well, 
only  he  was  ilL    28.  O,  that  he  had  lived  longer,  then  my 


382  EXERCISES. 

hopes  would  not  have  been  frustrated.  29.  A  longer  life 
of  the  great  emperor  might  have  secured  the  crown  to 
his  son.     30.  No;  it  certainly  would  not  have  helped  him. 

31.  I  should  not  like  to  suffer  the  death  of  a  criminal. 

32.  He  may  have  written  the  letter  himself;  but  that 
would  be  incredible.  33.  I  should  like  to  know  why  busi- 
ness does  not  go  better.  34.  They  will  certainly  come, 
were  it  only  for  a  few  hours.  35.  We  shall  surprise  them, 
especially  if  they  have  not  expected  us.  36.  However  un- 
grateful he  may  be,  he  will  know  how  to  *  excuse  himself. 
37.  Whoever  he  may  be,  and  whatever  he  may  do,  she  will 
excuse  him  and  love  him.  38.  Man  was  created  that  he 
might  work  and  pray.  39.  Man  must  fear  and  sorrow,  so 
that  he  may  not  love  life  too  much.  40.  He  wishes  to  be 
rich  that  he  may  help  everyone.  41.  He  will  find  not  one 
who  does  not  obey  the  law.  42.  He  had  to  wait  until  the 
city  should  come  into  his  power.  43.  It  does  not  matter 
to  me  whether  they  forgive  me;  I  only  hope  that  I  may 
not  need  to  be  ashamed. 


ILLUSTRATIVE    SENTENCES    XIX. 
SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  INDIRECT  STATEMENT. 

(333.)  1.  (Sr  fiil^Ite,  ba^  er  ein  anberer  SJJenfd^  511  tDerben  be* 
gtime.  (®.)  2.  S5)u  follteft  nid^t  beiifen,  id^  fei  iiber  dlai^t  em 
geiglincj  iinb  ein  ^errcit^er  [^errater]  gemorbeu.  {§e^.)  3. 
^^orncr  f^reibt  mir,  ha^  er  14  ^age  l^ier  §u§ubringen  ^offe. 
(Scf).)  4.  SJteinft  bu,  id)  fei  ein  ^inb  ?  m  5.  S^  ^efte^e  bar^ 
auf,  boB  ficl^  ber  Sorb  entferne.  (@d^.)  6.  (Sie  berlangen  ifjren 
Oberft,  ben  dJla^,  jnriicf;  er  fei  ^ier  auf  bent  (Sc^Io^,  de^anpten 
fie,  bu  ^alteft  i^n  mit  B^^^l^'  ^nb  menn  bn  xijn  nic^^t  Io§ge(ift, 
tt)erbe  man  i^n  mit  bcm  ©d^tnerte  §n  befreien  n)iffen.  {^^.) 
7.  (£r  erblicfte  bie  nftc  M(\(\h,  bie  iftm  mit  gang  t)erftortem  (^e^ 
ftd^t  pfliifterte,  fie  fud^e  iljn  feit  einer  ^albeu  ©tunbe,  er  miiffe 

*  343.111,2. 


EXEEdSES.  383 

^eimfommen.  (^c^.)  8.  ^ie  ©ignorie*  eutfc^utbigte  flc^,  ber  $apft 
laffe  $0iicf)elangelo  ntcl^t  fort;  fobalb  man  f enter  '^aO^aft  iDerbeii 
fonne,  miirbe  ha§>  SSer!  abgeliefert  merbcn.  (^.  ®r.)  9.  2)en 
SBorfcl^Iag,  Uo§>  feine  <So^ne  nac^  bem  9}ZorgenIanbe  abjufenben, 
tnieg  ber  .(l^aifer  al§  unpaffenb  guriic!,  bettn  er  ^abe,  obgleid)  im 
ftebenunbfec^jigften  Qa^re  be§  5IIter§,  noc^  Siraft  gemig,  ftc§, 
tt){e  e^  fcin  ^eruf  er^eifc^e,  an  bie  ©pil^e  ber  S^riften^eit  511 
ftellen.  (9^aumer.)  10.  ^on  entfcf)eibenber  SSlcr)ttg!eit  tt)ar  e§, 
tuelc^en  (Sutfcl)IuJ3  ^aifer  griebricl^  in  biefem  5(ugeubltc!  ergreifen 
ttjerbe.  [dtanxmv.)  11.  (Sr  baif)te  nicl^t  ouber§,  al§  ba^  ber 
©c^aiifpieler  ba§  3:()eater  auffuc^en  merbe.  (@.)  12.  (^§>  ge^t  bie 
9iebe,  baft  e§  if)m  Suft  bereite,  fterben  gu  fe^en.  (Sberg.)  13. 
^ennoc^  erfcl^rerfte  bie  ^^ac^ric^t,  ba^  ber  ^rieg  erflcirt  fei.  (grei.) 
14.  ®ie  ^ermut^ung  [^ermutung],  ba§  ein  SSalb^iiter  ^ier  feine 
SBo^nung  ^abe,  gab  ic^  auf.  (^et).)  15.  2Benigflen§  finbe  ic^  e§ 
ntc^t  billig,  ha^  Ottilie  aufgeopfert  tuerbe.  {®.)  16.  SSer 
fpric^t  i^m  ah,  bci'^  er  bie  SO^enfcl^en  fenne,  fie  gu  gebranc^en 
iDiffe  ?  (®d^.)  17.  ^Ifo  befa^f  er  un§  gn  t^un  nnb  bir  gn  met* 
ben,  e§  fei  bein  ©ofjn  ^on  (S^aefar,  ber  fie  fenbe.  {<Bd).)  18.  Tlan 
fii^Ite,  baJ3  o^ne  bie  gi^ei()eit  aiU^  tjertoren  fei.  (§.  ®r.)  19.  ©r 
fagte  bem  ganbernben  5tmtmann  ^eimlic^,  er  moc^te  boc^  ber 
©a(^e  ein  (E'nbe  ntacf)en.  (®.)  20.  ^d)  tt)oI(te,  fie  tjatten  taufenb* 
ntal  9kc^t,  bn  aber  lebteft  noc!^.  (?aube.)  21.  SSie  fe^^r  tnnnfcfjte 
ic^,  ha%  (Sie  in  biefen  3;:agen  bei  un§  trciren.  (®.)    22.  ©alabin 

antttjortete :   ^er  ^aifer  mlige  bebenfen,  ba^  e§  iDeniger 

(If)riften  gcibe  at§  ©aracenen,  nnb  baJ3  nic^t  gro^e  Sanbftrecfen 
nnb  unfid)ere  ^eere  bie  Mac^t  ber  kitten  trennten  nnb  fc^neKe 
$iilf§leiftnng  t)err)inberten.  SDennocl^  tnode  er,  gegen  (Srnenernng 
be§  griebeng,  3:t)rn§,  3:ripDti»  nnb  ^Intioc^ien,  luelc^e  ©tcibte  bie 
Sfjriften  nod)  befdJ3en,  nid)t  angreifen.  (9Jaumer).  23.  90^ir  melbet 
er  an§  Sinj,  er  tdge  !ran!.  [B6).)  24.  (£r  fragte  fo  angfttic^,  ob 
S^r  ntc^t  berfeljrt  wnret.  m  25.  Sd^  fixrc^te,  Dberft  Antler, 
man  f)at  mit  enc^  ein  fc^dnbtic^  ©piet  getrieben.  (@(^.)  26.  ^ 
tnollte  nic^t  fommen  nnb  n)ir  mn^ten  bod^,  er  Xoax  anf  bem  SSege. 
(®.)    27.  ^a§  ic^  i^ren  9^amen  nie  ge^ort  ^atte.  I  (Self.)    28.  0 

♦  Governing  body  of  Florence  in  the  16th  century. 


384  EXEEOISES. 

ha%  er  feiii  (^emiit^  [(^emiit]  lute  feme  ^imft  an  beinen  Se'^ren 
bilbe !  (®.)  29.  <Sie  tDii^te  nic^t,  wa§  fie  geboren  fei  ?  (5ie  ^citte 
e§  nie  Don  ir)m  erfa^ren,  ha^  fie  eine  dfjriftin  geboren  fei,  unb 
fetne  Qiibin?  ^ie.  {?eff.)  30.  SSa§  fagft  bn  U?  fragte  er  be^ 
troffen.  5((§  td^  gn  SSei^na^ten  l^ier  wax,  "^atte  id^  ni^t  me^r 
an  bid^  geba^t  ?  (^e^.) 

HiLUSTRATIVB    SENTEN-CES   XX. 
CONDITIONAL   TENSES. 

(334-36.)  1.  SSenn  id)  nur  an  mic^  f  eft  ft  benfen  biirfte,  tt)iirbe 
id^  mic^  ^artnacfig  lueigern,  beine  (^ab^  an^une^men.  {(B.)  2. 
SSiirben  fo  oft  neue  ^eifpiele  jur  SSarnimg  bienen,  ioeun  bie 
SSarnung  atterer  ^eifpiele  gefrud)tet  ^(itte?  ((Sngel.)  3.  ^ie 
gliicfUc^  tDiirbe  manc^er  teben,  n)enn  er  fic^  urn  anberer  Seute 
©acl^en  fo  toenig  befiimmerte,  a(§  urn  feine  eigenen.  (^id^tenberg.) 
4.  ^u  tierbienteft,  ^remierminifter  im  Sanbe  5U  fein ;  e§  miirbe 
bann  too^t  gan^  anberg  im  gangen  ^urfiirftent^um  [^tum]  fte^en 
(3|d^o!fe.)  5.  Tlan  glaubte  bie  ^o^men  ^um  ©c^meigen  5U  brin* 
gen,  menn  §ug'en§  *  Ser)re  buret)  ben  greunb  fefter  Derbammt 
n)iirbe.  (®rube.)  6.  (^efe^t,  Seanber  tniirbe  burc^  fie  glii(i(ic^  — 
njerbe  ic^  fein  gi'euub  bfeiben  fonnen  ?  M.)  1.  Xk  boppelten 
SSinbungen  ber  @c^tangen  n^iirben  ben  ganjen  2^xh  tierbectt 
leaden.  (?e[f.)  8.  ^iefe§  ©ingen,  331umenmalen  nub  ^omobie* 
fpielen  miirbe  mi(f)  nic^t  einen  5tugenblirf  gliicflic^  madden  fonnen, 
(^e^.)  9.  (Sr  freute  fi(^  baxan  in  ber  ©offnung,  ta^  ber  %xnf)^ 
ling  batb  atte§  nod^  reic^lic^er  beteben  miirbe.  (®.)  10.  !I)ie  Un* 
tu^e  nnb  Ungemil^ett,  n)ie  td^'^  ^ier  finben  tt)urbe,  ^at  mir 
untern>eg§  alien  §nnger  Dertrieben.  (§e^.) 

THEME  XVn. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  INDIKECT  STATEMENT,  AND  CONDITIONAL 

TENSES. 

L  He  asked  me  whether  I  had  become  a  coward.  2.  I 
answered  I  was  not  afraid  of  him,  and  would  soon  show 

•i05. 


EXERCISES.  385 

him  that  I  was  no  child  more.  3.  Max  wrote  he  did  not 
demand  that  I  should  deliver  the  work  now,  but  he  hoped 
to  receive  it  as  soon  as  it  was  finished.  4.  When  I  found 
him  he  excused  himself ;  he  had  been  looking  for  me  also, 
and  could  not  find  me.  5.  They  say  the  emperor  will  send 
his  sons  alone  to  France;  for  he  is  *  in  his  76th  year,  and  haa 
not  strength  enough  to  put  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
army.  6.  The  prince  told  me  that  war  had  been  declared, 
and  that  everything  would  be  lost  without  the  emperor. 
7.  The  emperor  answered:  he  wished  for  peace  and  would 
like  to  make  an  end  to  the  war.  8.  But  he  could  not 
forget  that  the  French  themselves  had  begun  the  war. 
9.  He  would  not  lead  back  the  army  unless  the  enemy 
should  give  up  all  the  German  cities  which  they  had 
possessed  before.  10.  I  do  not  think  it  just  that  the 
French  should  pay  so  much.  11.  I  thought  they  still 
lived  there.  12.  Did  you  believe  I  was  afraid  ?  I  believed 
he  was  lying  sick  at  Berlin,  and  did  not  know  that  he 
was  on  his  way  to  England.  13.  O,  that  he  would  soon 
appear !  14.  What  do  you  say  ?  I  had  ordered  you  to  do 
that?  I  never  did  so.  15.  If  you  heard  my  warnings 
you  would  be  happy.  16.  We  would  not  take  your  gifts 
if  we  were  richer.  17.  I  should  like  to  be  rich,  then  I 
would  help  everyone.  18.  If  you  had  only  concerned 
yourself  with  your  own  affairs,  you  would  be  rich  already. 
19.  Such  a  hope  would  not  make  me  happy.  20.  A  wise 
king  would  not  have  condemned  the  teaching  of  Huss. 
21.  They  did  not  know  how  they  would  find  it  here.  22. 
He  wrote  me  in  the  hope  that  they  would  soon  arrive. 

ILLUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  XXL 
THE  INFINITIVE  AS  SUBJECT  AND  OBJECT  OP  VERBS. 

(341.)    1.  (Sin  (Sffen  tutrb  gegeben  auf  bent  ©c^to^.  (@(^.)  2. 
S)a§  2e6en  ber  grau  ift  eiu  eiuigeg  ^e^en  unb  ^ommen,  ober 


286  EXEBCISES. 

§ebett  uttb  ^ragen,  ober  ^eretten  unb  (Sd^affen  fiir  ^nbere.  ((S.) 
3.  grei  tDttt  id^  fein  im  §anbeln  imb  tm  5)i(^ten.  ((S.)  4.  Hn§ 
(Sntbeorett,  9JJiffen,  ^erlieren,  DHc^t^^aben  getcu^nt  ber  §tmmet 
feine  (^elteOten.  (^abater.)  5.  D,  fegne,  §err,  mein  SSer!,  meiti 
9^eben  unb  mein  ®en!en.  (.  *  .)  6.  Qe^t  rebe  tntr  Reiner  mel^r 
t)on  33Iei0en,  t)on  ^erOergen !  (@(^.) 

(342.)  1.  ©terben  ift  tiid^tg,  bod^  leben  unb  uid^t  fe'^eu,  ba§ 
ift  ein  IXnglM.  {Bd}.)  2.  SO^enfc^enliebe  iiben,  l^ei^t  gut  fein. 
{(Sberg.)  3.  UnreC^t  letben  fc^meid^elt  grofeen  ©eelen.  (@d^.)  4. 
(£r  Itebte  bie  ^ferbe  unb  e§  t^at  i^m  melj,  bie  ebten  ^^lere 
[^tere]  tobten  §u  fe^en.  ((Sbers.)  5.  ^ie  braunen,  flugen  5lugen 
gu  malen  mar  nic|t§  Seic^teg.  ((Sberg.)  6.  ^^  begriff  e§  freilid^, 
ober  mid§  bariiber  gu  troften,  moKte  mil  tro^bem  nic^t  gelingen. 
(^ei).)  1.  (S§  ift  fo  elenb  betteia  gu  miiffen.  (®.)  8.  (S§ 
fd^merjte  niic^  leb^aft,  biefe  fc^onen  Sac^cn  t)er!aufen  gu  fe^en. 
(®.)  9.  (£§  t^erftanb  fid)  t)ou  felbft,  ba^  trol^  aEem  einem  fold^en 
SP^anne  §u  t^un  gegeben  trerben  mugte.  (^.  ®r.) 

(343.)  1.  5Iner!ennen  t^un  mir  bie  9^ic^tig!eit  ber  Sorberung. 
(®.)  2.  99?ir  mar's,  al§  tf^at'  fein  ^luge  l^inab  in§  ^erj  mir 
fe^en.  mMcv.)  3.  ^er  (^(Mlic^e,  ber  ^e^aglic^e,  ^at  gut 
reben.  (@.)  4.  SSem  ba§  fe^It,  ber  ^at  gut  im  3Sin!e(  filjen  unb 
ttjeife  bie  ^df)feln  §ucfen.  (§e^.)  5.  ^enn  od^,  bie  9}?enfc^en  lieben 
lernen,  e§  ift  ha^  ein^ige  ma^re  ©lite!,  (platen.)  6.  ©rfa^rung 
unb  Uebung  im  Ungliict  lernt  fd^meigen.  (^ebel.)  7.  ®ie  i8atat>ier 
:^atten  i()m  biefe  ^nfeln  erobern  ^etfen.  (<Sci^.)  8.  Qd^  banfe  bir, 
^ott,  ba§  bu  mic^  if)n  ^aft  fe^en  laffen.  (®.)  9.  DftmalS  lie^  er 
t^  in  ben  ^igianfaat  berufen.  (Sbers.)  10.  5lIIe§,  tt)a§  ber^aifet 
iiber  feine  ©iege  fc^reiben  ta^t,  ift  ertogen.  (^rei.)  11.  Qd^  l^ore 
ben  SSagen  borfa^ren.  Sebc  mo^t.  {^ttj.)  12.  ^a  ()ie6  ber 
®o!tor  mi(^  bleiben.  (@ber8.)  13.  (Sd^nett  mirft  bu  bie  9^ot^^ 
menbigfeit  [9^otmenbig!eitl  berfd^minben,  unb  "^zdjt  in  Itnred^t 
fic^  t)crmanbe(n  fe^en.  (®(^.)  14.  ^^  fiil)le  iunge§,  f)eilige§ 
SebcnSgliidf  ueugtii^eitb  mir  burd^  D^eri)  unb  5(bern  rinnen.  (®.) 
15.  SBon  ^uQ^ttb  auf  l)ab'  id)  gelernt  ge^ord^en.  ((^.)  16.  (So 
bitte  id^  iSie  mir  4  ©tik!  bon  ber  griinen  ^apete  au§  granffurt 
fommen  ju  laffen.  (<^c^.)    It.  S)er  ^raf  !§at  mid^  fi^en  fe^en.  (®.) 


EXEKCISES*  387 

18.  Wan  ^attc  ha^  ^offerd^en  in  ber  Wxik  be§  8tmmer§  fte^en 
gelaffen.  (®.)  19.  ®ag  ^etgt  nic^t  (^ott  t)ertrauen,  ba§  :^ei6t 
(^ott  berfuc^en.  (@(^.)  20.  ©tiff  !  jagte  fie,  ^aft  bu  nid^t  flopfen 
fjoren  ?  (ipe^.)  21.  S^^  ^<^^e  nie  fiirc^terlid^er  fluc^en  ^iiren,  oI§ 
(Sie  Iad)en.  ($?e[f.)  22.  SSir  fatten  feit  me^reren  3Sod)en  t)ou 
einem  ^aume  fprec^en  geI)ort,  beffen  ©aft  eitte  naf)renbe  WM) 
\]t  (§um.)  23.  Sa§  fingen,  (befell,  (a^  raufc^en,  unb  ftimmeit 
munter  brein.  (  )  24.  ©prec^en  8ie  nic^t  baDon,  lieber 
greunb,  e§  ift  mir  ti3btUc!^  [totlic^],  tnemt  ic^  bariiber  fpred^en 
Ijoren  mu^.  (!^inbau.)  25.  ^u(^  in  Tld^tv.  f}bvt  man  (Snc^  §erren 
ni^t  befonberg  preifen.  (@(^.)  26.  S^om  fi^eren  ^ort  lagt'^ 
fi(^  gemiit^lic^  [gemiitlii^]  ratljen  [raten].  (@c^.)  21.  2a^  f(ie^, 
iuag  fic^  nic^t  ^Iten  Icijst.  (Hrubt.)  28.  Safet  fic^  an§  einem 
SDemifd)  benn  nid)t§  macl)en  ?  (?eff.)  29.  SSer  blieb  nid^t  fte^en, 
menn  biefe  33eiben  lancjfam  burd)  bie  ^romenabe  tpanbelten? 
(^aiiff.)  30.  ®ie  ^raut  tt^ar  auf  ifjrem  $Ia^  mitten  an  ber  langen 
^afet  fil^en  geblieben.  (^ei^.)  31.  ®er  ^erjocj  SQZilon  fc^Iafen 
lag.  (U^.)  32.  9^eben  fic^  I)atte  fie  einen  ()o^en  ^orb  fte^en. 
(®.)  33.  Qd^  ^b'  im  tiefften  ©runbe  ber  (2ee(e  ru^'n  ein  Sieb. 
(9?u(f.)  34.  Segt  mid^  ^^n,  \vo  fein  Siebenber  fommt  iDeinen. 
(Berber.)  35.  (Inblic^  ber^tpeifelte  er  an  bem  ©elingen  feiner 
5(rbeit,  marf  ben  nnoottenbeten  ^rief  in  bie  ^ifte,  nnb  legte  fid^ 
fd^Iafen.  ((Sber«.)  36.  £'ommt,  laj^t  nn§  ge^'n  fpagieren  in  htn 
t)ie(griinen  SSalb.  (O^ife.)  3t.  9lie  Dergi^t  ber  griiljUng  tDieber^ 
gufommen.  {Zkd.)  38.  ^er  5l(te  lub  5(bam  ein,  ben  ad^ten  ^la^ 
im  gu^rmer!  einjunetjmen.  (Sberg.)  39.  Qljr  5(uge  gebot  t)er^ 
ftcinbig  gn  reben.  (®.)  40.  Sleraunu§  befoljl  feiner  ^od^ter,  i'^m 
einen  ^ed^er  SSein  ju  reic^en.  (eber§.)  41.  ^ie  le^ten  SSorte 
9^utf)'§  fatten  i^m  gn  ben!en  gegeben.  (^berg.)  42.  SDem  freien 
SD^anne  l^at  ®ott  empor  jn  fd)anen  eriaubt.  {^M.)  43.  (S§  lebt 
ein  (S^ott,  5u  ftrafen  nnb  jn  rcicl^en.  ((2c^.)  44.  Xcn  grennb  ju 
erfennen,  muf^t  bu  erft  einen  ©c^effel  (Salj  mit  i()m  gegeffen 
l^aben.  (@pr.)  45.  ®en  ^rei§  be§  2Sett(auf§  ju  getninnen,  barfft 
bu  nic^t  fte()n  nnb  bid^  befinnen.  {@Ieim.)  46.  ^ier  ^retter 
braud^t'§  nur,  biinn  nnb  fc^mat,  ein  miibe§  9[Renfd^ent)er5  ju 
betten.  (Srager.)    47.  ®r  ift  thtn  auSgegangen,  mit  ein  n)enig 


388  E^RSISES. 

S3attb  gu  ^anbeln.  (3.  ®r.)  48.  Unb  bocl^,  ber  Qube  rt)arni(^t 
gu  retten,  unb  ^atte  berbient,  ma§  i^m  broI)te.  (@ber§.)  49.  2Be^ 
ntg  ober  nicl^tS  fte^t  ^u  gemmnen.  (^.  ®r.)  50.  ^er  getter 
bleibt  bettter  (5^nabe  ju  Derjet^en.  (®.)  51.  j?aum  fd^eint  eg  gu 
gtauben.  (®.)  52.  3c|  blicfte  in  ben  unfauberlid^en  glur  ^inein, 
e§  njar  !eine  9}^enfd^enfeete  brinnen  5U  fe(}en  ober  §u  Ijoren.  (§ei).} 
53.  5Da0  53efte,  n)a§  man  bon  t§m  (ernt,  ift  nicl^t  mitjut^eilen 
[4eilen].  (®.)  54.  ®ie  3^^^  tnurbe  i^m  nic^t  (ang,  benn  aud^  er 
l^atte  Diet  gu  ben!en.  (§ei)J  55.  Safari  fd^etnt  mit  ber  S^atnr 
nte  p  t^un  ge'^abt  ^u  l^aben.  (§.  ®r.)  56.  3Ser  e§  je^t  ntd^t 
nterft,  ha^  bie  SCenien  etn  poeti]d)e§  ^robuct  ftnb,  bem  ift  nic^t 
gn  ^elfen.  (@c^.)  5T.  Sangfani  !onnnenbe§  ©liicf  pflegt  cm  Icings 
ften  5U  bleiOen.  (Berber.)  58.  ^ariiber  fc^Iief  id^  ein,  unb  al§  td^ 
emad^te,  glaubte  id^  eOen  nur  getrdnmt  p  I)aben.  (@.)  59.  §ier 
gilt'g,  ntein  (Sot)n,  bem  Sl\ii)er  tt)o§l  ju  bienen.  (Sd^.)  60.  (Seine 
Sartlic^feit  gegen  feine  ^inber  I)inberte  ifjn  nid^t,  fie  in  guter 
guc^t  gu  fatten.  ((SruBe.)  61.  SO^an  mu^te  fi(^  l^iiten,  feine  biel^ 
beutigen  5Cu§briic!e  nic^t  fiir  eine  ^eiDdfjrung  ju  ne^men.  (3?au!e.) 
62.  @r  fnnb  Sotten  bef(^dftigt,  bem  ^Uten  ju^ureben.  {(§>.)  63.  ®r 
befann  fid^  nid^t  (nnge,  bon  feinen  im  gelbe  fte^enben  ^eeren 
fogleic^  ai^t^eljntaufenb  Tlann  ab^ubanfen.  (®d^.) 

ILLUSTRATIVE   SENTENCES  XXIL 
THE  INFINITIVE  AS  ADJUNCT,  ETC. 

(344.)  1.  ^er  S^^^tfjum  [3rrtum]  ift  biet  tetc^ter  p  er!ennen, 
al§  bie  2Bar)rr)eit  5U  finben.  (®.)  2.  Si)a§  ©ie  mit  eintgen 
^artieen  au§  bem  (S^eKini*  anfangen  tt)erben,  ift  mir  lieb  5U  ^oren. 
(S(^.)  3.  ©auerlid^  Wax  ba^  SSaffer,  gefunb  §u  trinfen.  (®.)  4. 
©ie  ift  f(^on  jugleic^  unb  fc!^rec!(ic^  an5ufe()en.  ((Sd^.)  5.  S<^ 
bin  nid^t  jung  genug,  bor  ©o^en  mid^  5U  neigen,  unb  ^ro^  mit 
%xo\}  5U  bcinbigen,  alt  genug.  (®.)  6.  ^d)  wax  geftern  fo  un- 
borfidC)tig,  ein  pnar  .^apitet  im  ^erobot  gu  (efen.  (§et).)  Y.  ^er 
5l(te,  ber  anii)  fonft  fc^mer  5U  lenfcn  wax,  ^attt  fid^  feft  gemei^^ 


*  The  life  of  Benvenuto  Cellim :  see  66 Ac, 


EXERCISES.  389 

gert.  (^etj.)  8.  (Sure  S5erfof}nung  mar  etn  h)entg  ju  fi^neH,  al§ 
ba§  fie  bauer^aft  ^citte  feiit  foKett.  (®.)  9.  ^te  ^naben  marett 
5U  jung,  iim  felbft  eine  ^oKe  5U  fpieten.  (^.  (Sr.) 

(345.)  1.  S3orgefterti  ^atit  id^  eine  ^Ibe  §offnung,  ©ie  biet- 
letd^t  §ier  5U  feljen.  {B^.)  2.  @ein  plo^Iid^er  SSunfc^,  glorenj 
gu  t)erlaffen,  i)attt  bieKeid^t  aber  noc^  anbere  (^riinbe.  (^.  ®r.) 

3.  5(uf  ber  golterban!  I;atte  er  ha§>  ^et^t  guriirfgeiDonnen,  fic§ 
felbft  5U  ad^ten.  (@ber8.)  4.  Qd^  bin  in  ber  Sage,  mir  in  ber 
grembe  al§>  ^ienenber  erft  Qittranen  nnb  gnte  ©efinnnng  er^ 
iDerben  5U  miiffen.  (grei.)  6.  ^ie  iible  (Smpfinbung,  tro|  ber  reb:* 
lid^ften  SO^ii^e  ^uriicfgnbteiben,  berbarb  i^m  ha§>  ^afein.  (@berg.) 
6.  ©ie  grb^te  ^erebtfamfeit  befteljt  in  ber  Slnnft  5U  fd^meigen. 
(C)ippet.)  1.  ^ie  $f(irf)t  5U  beffern  gibt  nn§  ha^'  ^fJec^t  ju  tabeln. 
(@(^efcr.)    8.  ®ann  ^be  id£)  bie  ^flid^t,  i^n  5U  rcic^en.  (gvei.) 

(346.)  1.  ®ie  SSeiber  lieben  bie  6tar!e,  ofjne  fie  nad^p* 
a^men,  bie  9[)^anner  bie  ga^tljeit,  oTjne  fie  ju  ermiebcrn.  (3.  %  'St.) 
2.  Ttan^^txUi  I)aft  bn  berfciumet ;  ftatt  ^n  ^anbeln,  ^aft  ge;= 
troumet,  ftatt  5U  ben!en,  I)aft  gefd^miegen.  (®.)  3.  D^atnr  gab  mt§ 
S5erftanb,  urn  red^t  5U  benfen;  nm  red^t  jn  ^anbeln,  gab  fie  un§ 
ha^'  §er5.  (531umauer.)  4.  ©ie  begniigten  fid^  bamit,  bie  nmliegen^ 
ben  Mofter  p  pliinbern.  (@c^.)  5.  ©ie  tarn  gar  nid[}t  baju,  gegen 
t^^n  ben  ©rant  unb  3^1^^  augjntaffen.  (5(uerBac^.)  6.  ^d^  fonnte 
midf)  nid^t  baran  getDo^nen,  mir  bie  fromme  Stugnftine  fo  ju 
benfen.  (3f(^of!e.) 

(347.)  1.  Sd^  meine0  ^ruber§  ^inber  nid^t  erfennen !  ($?e[f.) 
2.  S^  eine§  9[^anne§  33ilb  in  meinem  S3ufen  tragen !  (@d).)  3. 
Sieber,  tanfenbmat  lieber,  ^ettelbrob  effen  nnb  in  ber  Stnnft 
(^rogeg  erreid^en,  at§  tm  (S^Iiicle  praffen  unb  fc^melgen.  ((Sber«.) 

4.  53arm^er§iger  ©ott —  biefe  ©tunbe  nur  iiberteben  unb  bann 
bic^  preifen,  emig.  (.^et).)  5.  ©ie  fprai^  :  nur  au§  bem  ^ater= 
lanb  nid^t  reifen!  [Md.)  6.  SDer  fteine  $aul  tft  l^iniiberge* 
laufen  unb  ^at  gerufen :  ^ufmad^en,  liebe  9[^utter,  oufmad^en ! 
^Oer  bie  SJluttcr  ift  nid^t  aufgemad^t.  (toc^.) 

(348.)  1.  ^nfitten  in  bem  (^IM,  ^a\>a  trieber  p  umarmen 
unb  mein  ©c^mefterd^en,  norf)  biet  reijenber,  al0  td^  fie  mir  bor* 
gefteUt,  in  (gmpfang  5U  ne^men,  ha^i^i^  i^  l^unbertmal  baran. 


390  EXEECISES. 

(§e^.)  2.  §ter  hai  ic^  i^n,  ft(^  meberjufe^ett,  5i§  i$  tm  Stanbc 
getDefen  fein  iDiirbe,  au§  ber  ©c^Iud^t,  tDO  ein  ^iemlic^  reid^Iid^er 
Ouell  gum  H}^eere  f(o^,  unb  tt»o  roir  bercitg  eiuen  furgen  §alt 
gemad^t  fatten,  abermaB  2Baffer  gu  l^olen.  ((Spiel.)  3.  5ld^,  ^rei= 
lid^  tuerben  fie  i^ti  I)abett  umbringen  tDotteti.  (2cf[.) 

THEME  XVm. 

THE  INFINITrVE. 

1.  I  am  accustomed  to  this  eternal  coming  and  going, 
and  standing  still  is  hard  for  me.  2.  The  selling  of  all  these 
beautiful  things  pained  me  much.  3.  I  have  no  time  for 
painting  or  reading,  I  must  accustom  myself  to  working. 
4  To  suffer  wrong  is  a  misfortune,  but  to  do  wrong  is  a 
greater  one.  5.  To  do  without  is  easier  than  to  beg.  6. 
To  remain  quiet  and  to  hide  myself  was  quite  impossible. 
7.  It  pained  the  child  to  see  such  a  noble  animal  killed, 
and  I  did  not  succeed  in  comforting  him  for  it.  8.  He 
can  well  be  contented,  for  he  has  already  all  that  he 
wants.  9.  We  taught  him  to  obey  his  parents  and  to  love 
all  men.  10.  He  bade  me  come  to  him  and  helped  me 
write  my  letter.  11.  You  will  soon  see  the  wagon  drive  up 
and  the  doctor  go  away.  12.  I  saw  him  go  away,  and  I 
felt  all  my  hopes  disappear.  13.  I  heard  the  emperor  tell 
of  his  victories,  and  he  thanked  God  that  he  had  let  him 
conquer*  this  country.  14.  He  had  seen  his  only  son  killed 
in  this  war.  15.  We  had  her  buy  several  pieces  of  the 
green  carpet.  16.  I  hear  laughing  and  singing,  who  is  it  ? 
17.  Now  they  are  coming,  I  hear  a  knocking.  18.  She 
caused  work  to  be  done  for  the  poor  in  her  house,  and  I 
heard  her  charity  praised  everywhere.  19.  Yes,  we  have 
also  heard  her  praised.  20.  She  does  not  suffer  herself 
to  be  hindered  by  her  illness.  21.  Nothing  bad  can  be  said 
of  her.  22.  Nothing  can  be  made  of  this  man.    23.  Why  did 

*  439.2. 


EXEECISES.  391 

you  remain  sitting  at  the  table  ?  24.  I  had  a  good  friend 
sitting  beside  me,  and  I  wanted  to  talk  with  him.  .25.  "When 
we  went  to  walk  together  he  often  remained  standing,  in 
order  to  look  after  the  people.  26.  He  invited  me  to  go  to 
drive  and  allowed  me  to  take  my  sister  with  me.  27.  He 
commanded  me  to  speak,  but  to  speak  sensibly.  28.  He 
did  not  forget  to  offer  his  guest  a  cup  of  wine.  29.  Wo 
have  come  to  visit  you,  will  you  allow  us  to  come  again  ? 
30.  Spring  comes  to  make  us  happy  again.  31.  Your 
story  is  not  to  be  believed.  You  have  not  heard  the  whole; 
the  best  still  remains  to  be  told.  32.  There  is  not  one  soul 
to  be  saved  out  of  this  house.  33.  You  have  only  to 
command,  we  will  do  anything.  34  He  is  accustomed  to 
going  to  sleep  over  his  book,  and  I  take  heed  not  to  wake 
him.  35.  Nothing  now  hinders  us  from  going  away.  36. 
What  hindered  you  from  seeing  the  emperor?  37.  I  was 
busied  in  helping  the  old  man,  and  did  not  believe  I  could 
leave  him.  38.  Everything  you  say  is  pleasant  to  me.  39. 
Truth  is  hard  to  find,  but  it  is  still  harder  to  recognize  it, 
when  one  has  found  it.  40.  I  am  too  young  to  read 
Herodotus.  41.  He  was  too  old  to  find  new  friends,  but 
he  was  still  too  young  to  die,  therefore  he  lives  lonely  and 
alone.  42.  I  have  no  wish  to  blame  him,  but  I  have  also 
no  wish  of  seeing  him  again.  43.  The  hope  of  improving 
him  gives  me  the  courage  to  blame  him.  44.  I  had  not 
time  enough  to  earn  his  confidence  for  myself.  45.  He 
had  not  the  courage  to  avenge  his  father,  so  he  lost  the 
right  of  respecting  himself.  46.  He  has  the  misfortune  to 
have  survived  all  his  friends.  47.  They  praise  the  virtues 
of  this  great  man  without  imitating  them.  48.  Instead  of 
telling  me  the  truth  he  was  silent,  and  I  went  away  with- 
out recognizing  him.  49.  I  did  not  think  of  blaming 
him.  50.  They  had  to  content  themselves  with  drinking 
some  water.  51.  I  eat  his  bread  and  live  in  his  house  ? 
Never !  52.  Better  be  quite  poor  than  not  to  live  in  one's 
fatherland.  53.  Oh,  to  avenge  my  emperor  I  then  I  can  die 


392  EXERCISES. 

liappy.  54.  I  have  no  wish  to  survive  my  emperor,  who 
was  killed  in  the  last  war.  65.  I  hope  never  to  leave  the 
country  where  I  was  born,  and  where  all  my  friends  have 
lived  and  died. 


ILLUSTRATIVE  SENTENCES  XTOTT. 
PAKTICIPLES. 

(350.)  1.  ^tht  l^anbelnbe  Station  blent  ftd^  unb  anberen 
^olfern.  ((Sotjinger.)  2.  S)u  bift  fein  ©c^iiler  me^r,  fonbern  ein 
iDerbenber  SO^eifter.  (<5berg.)  3.  ^ann  folg'  i<i)  ber  roeibenben 
$eerbe.  (®.)  4.  SSarum  follte  td§  einen  tanjenben  Z^ct  befurfien? 
(^auff.)  5.  ^eftern  mu^te  id^  mic^  munbern,  tt)ie  (Sie  fid^  nad^ 
einer  fd^led^tfd^Iafenben  ^aii)t,  unb  unter  SSolfen  t)on  'Zabah 
xauiS),  no(^  fo  gan§  gut  unb  bei  §umor  ^ielten.  (0(^.)  6.  ®a§ 
^ud^  miirbe  ntir  bei  htn  t)or§abenben  5trbeiten  gute  2)ienfte 
tf}un.  (@d§.) 

(351.)  1.  SDer  ^id^ter  fd^meigt  Don  taufenb  burd^gettjetnten 
^ag^  unb  9^ad£)ten.  (®.)  2.  ^a§  93^dbd^en  ftanb  mit  gerungenen 
^anben.  (^^rei.)  3.  !5)er  geiftreid^e,  ^eitere  Qtaliener  trar  liberaH 
ein  gern  gefe^ener  (^aft.  (^berg.)  4.  ®a§  bolle,  au^gefuttte 
Seben,  foraie  bie  Ieict)te  (Srmiibung  nad^  gett)aner  5(rbeit,  bte§ 
alle§  mar  gemig  fc^on.  ((Sbcr3.)  5.  ^ie  ^ftic^ten  ber  §au§frau 
!ann  tiielleid^t  eine  gemtet^ete  [gemietete]  §anb  erfiiUen,  bie 
^flic^ten  ber  30fJutter  nie.  (Sujom.)  6.  SDer  ^onig  faun  nic^t  affe 
Derbiente  9}Zdnner  fennen.  (?eff.) 

(352.)  1.  5(uc^  bitte  ic^  mir  burd^  Gulping  ba^  SSerseid^mg 
ber  t)on  mir  ein^ufenbenben  ^iidfier  5uruc!fc^ic!en  §u  laffen.  (@4) 

2.  SllU  k^  mic^  luegen  eine§  angufaufenben  Sanbgut§  fur  bid^ 
erfunbigte,  inarb  fogteid^  ein  50Zann  berufen,  ber  mir  berer  ge^n 
antrug.  (3fc^o!!e.)  3.  ^ie  D^ac^a^^mung  ift  angeboren,  ha^  ^a^'^ 
gual^meube  trirb  nid^t  leid^t  erfannt.  (®.) 

(353.)  1.  ©ic^  felbft  getreu  mar  er  ein  (Sd^affenber,  ein  ^or* 
mart^ftrebenber  bi§  gu  feinen  U^ttn  ^agen.  (^enjatb.)  2.  SDiefe 
SSorte  mirften  it)ie  frciftige  'iSr^enei  auf  hQxi  ©enefenben.  (Sbers.) 

3.  ^er  gal^renbe  ftieg  manc^mal  bie  neben  i^m  ©i^enbe  an,  bag 


EXERCISES.  393 

fie  aud^  r)m5orc^e  auf  ha^,  \m§>  man  fage.  (?(ucrBacf).)  4.  ^^  Un 
ved§t  tierlangenb  nac^  ber  ^Tu^fii^rung  S^i^er  Ijielfac^en  ^been, 
unb  erinarte  rec^t  balb  ettt)a§  babon.  (@d).)  5.  Unb  tnenti  ic^ 
in  bie  S^i'^ii^f^  f^^^  "^^'^^  lacl^enb  erfc^ien  fie  mir !  (€>awff-) 

(354.)  1.  5(uf  Sl^iinftigeS  rec^ne  nic^t,  unb  ^aijV  md)t  auf  ^er* 
fprod)ene§,  !(ag^  an  ^erIorene§  nid}t,  unb  ben!^  ni(^t  an  ger- 
bro^ene§.  [Md.)  2.  ^erorbuet  ift  im  encjlif^en  (^efe^,  ba§ 
jeber  5Inge!Iagte  burc^  @efcI)tt)orene  t>on  (Seine^gtei(f)en  foil  ge* 
tic^tet  n)erben.  (@c^.)  3.  (Sie  befam  tdgltc^  ettrag  gefd)cn!t.  (^.) 
4.  3f§  IDu^te  ©te  bei  il)m,  unb  fiiljlte  ntirf)  nid)t  ganj  ijon  i^m 
getrennt.  (^rei.)    5.  (Sr  befam  il)ren  5(nfur)rer  gcfangen.  (@(^.) 

(356.)  1.  ^ie  SSette  fc^manft  unb  fUe^t  unb  fc^i^eat,  unb 
beugt  ftc!^  fcl^dumenb  nieber.  (@.)  2.  (^uten  5lbenb,  TOe !  fagte 
t(^.  ©ie  nicfte  nur  tierbroffen  mit  bent  ^opfe.  (^ei}.)  8.  SJ^einen 
SBater?  ftammelte  U(rld),  unb  fd)aute  bem  5lnberen  bleic^  unb 
fragenb  in§  51ntli^.  ((Sberg.) 

(357.)  1.  ^on  einem  fo  langen  SSege  fomntt  ntan  immer 
ermiibet  an.  (®.)  2.  9^eben  i^m  reitenb,  erijielt  er  au§  feinent 
SRunbe  5Iu§!unft  ilOer  atte  ^unfte.  (^.  ®r.)  3.  -Da  lag  bie  gran. . 
in  einem  armltd)en  ©arge  bon  tofjen  ^(an!en  gebettet.  (Sbers.) 
4.  ©ie  ^atte  grauen  in  ber  .^irc^e  t)or  folc^en  ^itbern  !nieenb 
beten  gefe^n.  ((^orre^.)  5.  gril^  aber  Wax  in  bie  ^ircl^e  gegangen 
unb  ftanb  neOen  feinent  gi^eunbe  an  bie  '^f)nx  gebriidt.  (§et).)  6. 
^a  inarf  fic^  ber  ©chiller  tueinenb  an  bie  ^ruft  be§  Wti]kx^. 
((gbers.)  1.  ^a  erfdjien  ploWid),  alien  unerujartet,  ber  berfc^oKene 
93?eifter.  (§e^.)  8.  ^(It  getuorben  bet  ununterbroc^ener  ^efc^cif^ 
tigung  mit  ber  ^Tunft,  tDar  e§  iljm  unmoglid),  fid)  ber  0en)ot)nten 
^^atigleit  ganj  gu  entl)alten.  (^.  @r.)  9.  (So  Wax  er  ein  paar 
©tragen  n»cit  gegangen,  al§  er,  urn  eine  ©de  biegenb,  eine  Wdn-^ 
nergeftalt  t)or  fic^  erOIirfte.  (§e^.)  10.  ^ie  nja^re  greube  wan^ 
belt  auf  ber  (Srbe,  tuie  bie  ma^re  SSei^^eit,  bon  tuentgen  gefel^en, 
bon  ber  3fiuf)e  begteitet.  (@to(berg.)  11.  @on)ie  bieglamme  be§ 
Sid^t§,  and)  umgetnenbet,  ^inaufftra^It,  fo,  tjom  ©d^idfat  gebengt, 
ftrebet  ber  C^ute  empor.  (Berber.)  12.  SO^lod^teft  bu  begtiidt  unb 
n^eife  enbigen  be§  2eben§  Sf^eife.  ((^.)  13.  ^^eitne^menb  [teilnel^* 
tnenb]  an  f  einem  guge,  §  off  ten  fie  bie  §errfcl^aft  tnieber  ju  er^ 


394  EXEECISES 

langen.  (^,  ®r.)  14.  S8on  ha  ftd^  bxrect  nnd^  Often  tnenbenb,  unb 
im  Zi)aU  beg  5lnio  marfc^irenb,  tDiirbe  er  Slorenj  am  rafd^efteu 
errei^t  l^aben.  (^.  ®r.)  15.  ^od^  enbfic^,  nngetrieben  burd^ 
meineii  D^eim,  angelocft  burd)  greunbe,  bte  fi(^  Dor  mir  in  bie 
SScIt  ^inaugbegeOen,  waxh  ber  (Sntfc^Iu^  sefagt.  (@.) 

(359.)  1.  ^ine  ^tugel  tarn  geflogen;  galt'g  bir  ober  gait  e§ 
mir?  (U§.)  2.  (Sgmont  fam  anf  ben  9}?ar!t  geritten.  (®.)  3.  ^a 
fommt  einmat  gefprungen  fein  jiingfter  (Sbelfnab.  (U^.)  4.  ®a§ 
nenne  id^  gefc^Iafen.  (Corner.)  5.  (SoKft  aud^  nic^t  lange  fiagen 
.  .  nur  frifd^,  nur  frifc^  gefnngen,  unb  aKe§  mxh  n^ieber  gut. 
(e:^ami[fo.)  6.  S^ic^t  (ang  gefeiert,  frifd^  !  ®ie  9}?auerfteine  ^er- 
bei !  ^en  ^ait,  ben  9J?brtet  jugefnijren  !  {2>d).)  1.  ^f^ofen  anf 
ben  SSeg  geftreut,  unb  be§  §arm§  Dergeffen  !  (§oIti).) 

(358.)  1.  (St  unterric^tete  fie  t)on  ben  au^erorbentlid^en 
©(^icffalen  il^rer  langft  al§  tobt  [tot]  6en)einten  ^ante.  (3fd)o'ffe.) 
2.  (£r  begab  fic^  anf  ha§>  i^m  t)om  ^urfiirften  gef(^en!te  Sanbgut. 
(®rube.)  3.  5l((e  geinbe  ber  t)om  ^aifer  ^ur  ©riinbung  unb 
^ultur  feineg  unermegHc^en  9fteic§e§  begonnenen  ^f^eformen 
erttjarteten  nad^  feinem  ^obe  eine  altgemeine  ^egenretiolution. 
(^fc^offc.)  4.  2Bo  ber  ©trom  eine  ^anbban!  iibrig  la^t,  ha  liegen 
mit  offenen  9f^adt)en,  unbemegtid^  mie  gel^ftude  ^ingeftrecft,  oft 
hthtdt  mit  ^ogeln,  bie  ungefd)tad^ten  S^orper  ber  ^ofobile. 
(^um.) 

THEME  XrX. 
PARTICIPLES. 

1.  We  ought  not  to  wake  these  sleeping  children.  2.  If 
we  do  not  wake  the  sleeping  ones,  they  will  not  be  ready 
for  the  intended  journey.  3.  I  said  many  a  consoling  word 
to  the  weeping  maiden,  but  she  did  not  cease  to  lament 
her  lost  friend.  4.  Nothing  can  bring  us  back  the  lost 
ones.  5.  I  have  not  yet  received  the  letters  sent  in  by 
you,  but  I  hope  they  will  bring  us  the  wished-for  news. 
6.  Instead  of  giving  me  the  promised  present,  the  traveller 
gave  me  nothing.  7.  Tired  by  the  long  journey,  he  re- 
mained q^uiet  the  whole  day.     8.  Who  is  the  one  sitting 


EXERCISES.  395 

next  you  ?  9.  I  saw  her  coming  into  the  church  weeping 
and  wringing  her  hands.  10.  Kneeling  before  the  picture, 
and  praying,  she  tries  to  forget  her  unhappiness.  11.  The 
few  words  spoken  by  the  judge  taught  the  accused  that 
he  had  nothing  more  to  hope.  12.  He  knew  himself  to 
be  parted  forever  from  his  friends  and  his  home.  13. 
Accompanied  only  by  a  few  friends,  he  left  Florence,  and 
turning  toward  the  North,  he  soon  reached  the  army.  14 
Marching  directly  to  Florence  the  army  apj^eared 
suddenly,  unexpected  by  everyone,  before  the  city.  15.  A 
man  came  running  into  the  city,  and  brought  the  news 
that  the  enemy  so  long  feared  by  all  would  soon  reach  the 
city.  16.  Then  one  saw  the  women  and  children  come 
weeping  and  complaining  into  the  market-place.  17. 
Arrived  in  England,  I  asked  after  the  sonof  my  long  lost 
but  always  warmly  loved  friend.  18.  I  hoped  to  find 
him  on  the  estate  bought  by  his  father  and  given  by  him 
to  this  son.  19.  But  the  son,  enticed  by  bad  friends,  had 
sold  the  estate  inherited  from  his  father  and  had  betaken 
himself  to  the  city.  20.  Turning  around  the  corner,  and 
going  a  couple  of  streets  further,  I  soon  reached  the  house 
hired  by  him.  21.  Kiding  beside  me,  he'  begged  me  to 
take  part  in  his  expedition.  22.  On  this  way  we  met 
many  riding  and  driving.  23.  It  is  impossible  for  a  man 
grown  old  in  uninterrupted  employment  to  abstain 
entirely  from  his  accustomed  activity.  24.  The  children 
came  springing  to  me,  and  brought  me  the  letter  sent 
by  you. 


VOCABULARIES. 


ABBBEVIATIONS. 


accus.  accusative. 
adj.  adjective. 
adv.  adverb. 
art.  article. 
conj.  conjunction. 
dot.  dative. 
dem.  demonstrative. 
determ.  determinative. 
/.  feminine  noun. 
gen.  genitive. 
impers.  impersonal. 
indec'L  indeclinable. 
insep'le  inseparable. 
inteij.  interjection. 
irdr.  intransitive  verb. 
irreg.  irregular. 


m.  masculine  noun. 

n.  neuter  noun. 

N.  New  or  weak  conjugation. 

num.  numeral. 

0.  Old  or  strong  conjugation. 

vers,  personal. 

vl.  plural. 

poss.  possessive. 

ppl.  past  participle. 

prep,  preposition. 

prow,  pronoun. 

pronH.  pronominal. 

reflex,  reflexive. 

rel.  relative. 

sep'le  separable. 

tr,  transitive  verb. 


EXPLANATIONS. 

Verbs  of  the  Old  or  strong  conjugation,  and  of  the  New  or  weak  if 
irregular,  are  so  noted  (by  an  added  0  ,  or  irreg.  ^  respectively).  Their 
forms  are  to  be  sought  in  the  list  of  irregular  verbs.  Verbs  taking 
fein  as  an  auxiliary  have  an  f  added  after  them;  to  this  an  1^  is  added  if 
the  verb  takes  either  jein  or  l^aben. 

Nouns  have  the  sign  of  their  gender  appended,  and.  the  endings  of 
their  genitive  singular  (except  of  feminines)  and  nominative  plural. 

Adverbs  in  -ly  derived  from  adjectives  and  having  the  same  form 
with  them  (79)  are  not  separately  entered. 

References  are  made  to  the  grammar  by  paragraph  and  division,  as  in 
the  grammar  itself. 


398 


GEEMAN-ENGLISH 


I.  GERMAN-ENGLISH  YOCABULARY. 


aB,  odu.  and  sep'le prefix,  off,  away. 

a^tlltnfctt^  tr.  dismiss  with  thanks, 
discharge. 

5l6cnb,  rn.  -b§,  -be.  evening,  eve. 
sglorfe,  /.  curfew. 

after,  conj.  but,  however. 

aBermalS,  odi^'  again,  once  more. 

aB^iingen,  0.  intr.  depend,  be  de- 
pendent. 

abliefertt,  tr.  deliver,  consign. 

aftnel^men,  0.  tr.  take  off  or  away, 
remove,     gain  or    obtain  from 

ttBrcifCtt,  irdr.    |.     journey  away, 

depart,  go  away. 
ttbrufen,  0.  tr.  call  away. 
Ebft^eu,    m.    -eiieg.    abhorrence, 

loathing. 
^M^tctl,  m.  -b6,  -be.   departure, 

leave. 
aM(t)(^0Cn/   0.  tr.    strike  off,    cut 

off. 
ttftft^reiben,  0.  tr.  write  off,  copy; 

write  and  refuse. 
abfentien,  {reg.   or  irreg.)  tr.  send 

off  or  away,  despatch. 
$l6ftd)t,  /.  -ten.  view,  aim,  inten- 
tion, plan. 
ttbflirc^ett,  0.  tr.  refuse,  deny. 
abtuei^fetn,  irdr.   \)  or  I    change, 

alternate. 
%^fel,  /.  -tn.   shoulder. 
%fi^i,  num.  eight,   f^t^n,  eighteen. 

'-m,  eighty. 
a^ten,  tr.  have  regard  for,  respect; 

esteem,  consider,  value. 
af^tja^ng,  odj.  eight-year-old. 


%dtv,  rn.  -x^,  3lct!er.  cultivated 
field,  acre.    sBttU,  m.  agriculture. 

%t^t\,  m.  -Ig.  nobility. 

%bcr,  /.  -rn.  vein. 

al^nen,  tr.  have  presentiment  of, 
forebode,  suspect. 

li^nli^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  like,  re- 
sembling. 

^^nung,  /.  -gen.  presentiment, 
foreboding. 

aU,  indef.  pron.  and  pron'l  adj.:  col- 
lectivdy,  all,  entire,  whole ;  dis- 
iributivdy,  every,  each,  any,  alL 
alleS,  all,  everything,  everyone: 
see  193. 

alletn,  adj.  (or  adv.)  alone,  single, 
only.  conj.  only,  but. 

allel}em,  adv.  all  that. 

attcrt^riflti^,  adj.  most  Christian 
(title  assumedbythe  French  Icings). 

attgemein,  adj.  common  to  all, 
general. 

flttjUtliel,  adv.  all  too  much. 

5llmttnttt^,  n.  -d}^,  -d^e.  almanach. 

5ttmofcn,  n.  -n^,  -n.  alms,  charity. 

ClS,  conj.  as  ;  as  being,  in  character 
of ;  after  comparative,  than  ;  after 
negative,  other  than,  except,  but; 
with  past  tense,  when,  as  ;  before 
inverted  clause,  as  if.  —  uft, 
as  if. 

olfo,  adv.  and  conj.  thus,  accord- 
ingly, therefore. 

alt,  adj.  (or  adv.)  old,  aged,  ancient. 
sCnglifr^,  adj.  Old  English. 

fitter,  n.  -erS;  -r.  age,  old-age, 
epoch. 


VOCABULABY. 


399 


'd\i\i^,(idj.  (or adv.) elderly,  oldish. 

5lmcri!tt,  n.  America. 

5lmcrif ttttcr,  m.  -rg,  -r.  American. 

ttmcrifanif^,  adj.  American. 

5lmt,  n.  -te«,  lemter.  office, 
charge,  place,  smanit,  wi.  bailiff, 
steward, 

ttmiifant  cidj-  amusing. 

amiiftcrcn,  tr.  amuse. 

an,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  on, 
along,  up.  prep.:  of  position  {with 
dat.  or  accus.),  at,  by,  against, 
along ;  of  time,  on,  upon,  at ;  in 
other  relations,  in  respect  to,  in 
the  way  of,  in,  at,  to,  by,  of. 

anbet,  pron'l  adj.  other,  else ; 
different ;  next,  second:  see  194, 
193. 3c,  203.1a. 

anbctd,  adv.  otherwise,  else,  diffe- 
rently. 

Oncrfcnncn,  {irreg.)  ir.  recognize, 
acknowledge. 

?lnfong,  m.  -gg,  -cinge.  beginning. 

anfangcn,  0.  tr.  set  about,  begin, 
xmdertake.  intr.  begin,  originate. 

5Cnfu^rcr,  m.  -x^,  -r.  leader. 

ttltgcfiorcn,  adj.  (or  adv.)  inborn, 
hereditary. 

tLn^tf^OVCXlf'irdr.  belong,  appertain. 

ongcltlb^ncn,  tr.  accustom,  inure. 

ttllgrcifcn,  0.  tr.  lay  hold  on, 
seize,  assail. 

^Ingjl,  /.  2(engfte.   anxiety,  fear. 

(ingfilii,  adj.  {or  adv.)  anxious, 
distressed. 

an^ttltCtt,  0.  tr.  hold  on  to,  stop, 
detain,   intr.  stop. 

anIlOten,  tr.  listen  to,  hear  to  the 
end. 

anlaufen,  tr.  purchase,  buy. 

anflagen,  tr.  complain  against, 
accuse,  charge. 

anfommen,  arrive,  come;  {voith  auf 
and  accus. )  depend  on,  eg  !omntt 
i^m   uicl)t  barauf   an,    it  is  a 


matter  of  no  consequence  to 
him. 

onfuntigcn,  tr.  announce,  notify. 

aniocfen,  tr.  allure,  entice,  tempt. 

annel^men,  0.  tr.  take  on,  take, 
accept, 

an|)0^en,  intr.  knock  (at  the  door). 

Slnfl^ein,  m.  -u^.  appearance, 
semblance. 

anfel^en,  0.  tr.  look  on  or  at,  re- 
gard. 

5lnfc^en,  n.  -ng,  aspect,  look. 

%nftdbt,  /.  -ten.  view,  sight,  opin- 
ion. 

5lnf|iru^,  m,  -d^eg,  -iid^e.  address, 
claim. 

anfiatt,  prep,  {with  gen.)  instead, 
in  place. 

anfio^eit,  0.  tr.  push  against,  strike 
against,    intr.  stumble,  offend. 

5lnttt^,  n.  -^eg,  -^e,  face,  visage. 

antragen,  0.  tr.  lay  before  some 
one,  propose,  offer. 

dttttCtbcn,  0.  ir.  drive  on,  impel. 

nniXtUn,  0.  tr.  tread  on ;  com- 
mence ;  approach,  accost. 

5(nttlI0rt,  /.  -ten.  answer,  reply. 

antttJOrtcn,  tr.  answer,  reply. 

anDertrauen,  tr.  confide,  trust. 

anlDenbeit,  {reg.  or  irreg. )  tr.  turn 
or  apply  to  something,  apply, 
employ. 

^(nja^I,  /.  number. 

anjtel^en,  0.  tr.  draw  on,  attract. 
refi.  dress  one's  self, 

ttltjuntcn,  tr.  kindle,  light  up. 

5l|jfel,  m.  -%  5tepfe(.  apple. 

%pxi\,  m.  -U.  AprU. 

?(r6ctt,  /•  -ten.  work,  labor ;  re- 
sult of  labor,  performance. 

arbeitcn,  tr.  or  intr.  work,  labor, 
toil, 

^rficitcr,  m.  -rg,  -r.  workman. 

3lrc^i|icl,  n.  -18.    archipelago. 

%xvn,  m.  -meg,  -me.  arm. 


400 


GEEMAN-ENGUSH 


arm,  adj.  (or  adv.)  poor,  needy,  in- 
digent, unfortunate. 

ormCttift^,  adj.  Armenian. 

artnlt^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  poor,  needy; 
mean,  paltry. 

%Xtf  /.  -ten.   kind,  sort,  manner. 

crtig,  adj.  (or  adv. )  well  behaved, 
good,  obedient,  polite,  pretty. 

SlrgCttCi,  /.  medicine,  physic. 

Slrjt,  m.  -te8,-tc.  doctor,  physician. 

airmen  [atmcn],  intr.   breathe. 

ttUt^,  adv.  or  conj.  also,  too,  even. 
after  iDer,  tt)a§,  :c.  ever,  soever. 

ttuf,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  up,  up- 
wards; upon,  open.  prep,  (with 
dat.  and  accus. )  upon,  on,  onto, 
unto,  to ;  after,  on,  toward, 
against,  auf  Uttb  nicbcr.  Tip  and 
down. 

SlttfftaBe,/.  -ben.  task,  problem. 

aufgcbCtt,  0.  tr.  give  up,  resign. 

aufgc^cn,  0.  intr.  f.  go  up,  rise. 

auf$eben,  0.  tr.  heave  up,  lift  up, 
raise. 

auf^iiten,  irUr.  stop,  cease,  finish. 

auffldren,  tr.  clear  up,  explain, 
brighten. 

OUfmtt^cn,  tr.  open,  reflex,  get  up, 
rise. 

aufo|)fern,  tr.  offer  up,  sacrifice. 

aufrt^ten,  tr.  set  up,  erect. 

?lufftt^,  m.  -^eg,  -cii^e.  something 
set  up,  composition,  essay. 

OUfflC^en,  0.  intr.  I  stand  up, 
rise ;   get  up. 

auffudien,  tr.  seek  out,  look  up, 
search  for. 

ttUftl&Ult,  0.  tr.  open. 

ttUfttlttJ^cn,  intr,  f.  wake  up, 
awake. 

5lu9C,  n.  -ge§,  -gen.  eye.  in0  ^ugc 
f  off  en,  fix  the  eyes  upon,  uiltct 
diet  %U^tn,  tete-a-tete. 

^Ugenblitf,  m.  -!eg,  -fe.  moment, 
instant 


5Cugufl,  m.  -t§.  August. 

OUgBrcitcn,  tr.  spread  out. 

5lu0brud),  m.  -d}^,  -iid)e.  outbreak. 

^U0bru(f,  m.  -d^,  -iicfe.  expres- 
sion; phrase. 

augfoHctt,  0.  intr.  |.  faU  out, 
turn  out,  result. 

Wulfit^rung,  /.  carrying  out,  exe- 
cution. 

ou^fuflcn,  tr.  fill  out  or  up. 

5tu^gan9,  m.  -ng8,  -gange.  issue, 
event,  outlet. 

ttuSge^cn,  0.  intr.  f.  go  out,  go 
forth  or  away. 

ouSgtttben,  0.  tr.  dig  out. 

tluSfunft,  /.  -iinftc.  information, 

CUSlttffcn,  0.  tr.  let  out,  let  go; 
omit. 

auSxtibtn,  0.  tr.  rub  out,  rub  open. 

augfj^ta^cn,  0.  tr.  strike  out,  re- 
ject. 

au0fC^Ctt,  0.  intr.  look,  appear. 

au^ett,  adv.  out  of  doors,  outside. 

ttU^cr,  prep,  {with  dat. )  outside  of, 
beside,  except,  au^et  ftt^,  beside 
one's  self.  conj.  except,  unless. 
ttU^cr  tltt§,  except  that. 

(iu^er,  adj.  outer,  external. 

auftcr^olfi,  prep,  {with  gen.)  out- 
side, beyond. 

ttUfecrorilcntUc^,  adj.  extraordinary. 

OUgftire^cn,  0.  tr.  speak  out,  pro- 
nounce. 

aulflO^en,  0.  tr.  thrust  out,  expel, 
utter  abruptly. 

ttttSt^cilen  [steilcn],  tr.  deal  out, 
distribute. 

aud^tel^en,  0.  tr.  draw  out,  extract, 
undress,   intr.  \.   move  out,  re- 


95ttff),  rri.  -(^c8,  -ad^t.  brook. 
JBttjftlcin,  n.  -ng,  -n.  brooklet. 
baifen,  0.  or  K  tr.  bake. 
6a)ien,  tr.  or  intr.  bathe. 


VOCABULAEY. 


401 


©ttl^n,/.  -nen.  path,  road,  way. 

bttltl,  adv.  soon,  quickly. 

93anb,  n.  -be^,  -be.  bond,  fetter. 

$antl,  n.  -beg,  -anber.  ribbon. 

Biinbtgen,  tr.  control,  subdue. 

bang,  adj.  {or  adv.)  anxious,  fear- 
ful, eg  ift  or  tt)irb  einem  bang, 
one  is  or  becomes  fearful  or 
afraid. 

95ttnf,/.  -anfe.  bench. 

Sartor,  in.  -ren,  -ren.  barbarian, 
savage. 

Barmftcrjtg,  ac|/.  (or  oc^u.)  merciful, 
charitable. 

a^arm^crjigfeit,/.  charity. 

Satabter,  w.  Batarian. 

Baucn,  /r.  build. 

95aucr,  m.  -rg  or  -rn,  -r  or  -xn. 
peasant,  rustic. 

Saum,  m.  -me§,  -aume.  tree. 

(eiingfltgen,  tr.  make  anxious, 
alarm. 

Seanttoortung,/.  -gen.  answering, 
reply. 

Setter,  m.  -r§,  -r.  beaker,  goblet. 

kbauern,  tr.  pity,  grieve  for. 

kterfCtt,  ^r.  cover. 

bebcnfen,  (irreg.)  tr.  think  upon, 
consider. 

ficburfen,  {irreg.)  inir.  {with  gen.) 
or  tr.  stand  in  need  of,  need,  re- 
quire. 

93cfcl^l,m.-l«,-Ie.  command,  order. 

Ibefel|len,  O.  tr.  commend;  com- 
mand, order. 

befinben,  0.  reflex,  find  one's  self, 
be  (in  respect  to  health,  etc). 

6cfreien,  tr.  make  free,  free. 

befreunben,  tr.  befriend,  befreutts 

bet,  friendly,  allied. 
(egeBen,    0.    reflex,   betake    one's 

self,  repair;  occur. 
begcgncn,  intr.  (with  dat.)  f.    meet. 
bcgel^en,  0.  tr.  go  about;  commit. 
Begel^ren,  tr,  desire,  covet. 


kginnen,  0.  tr.  begin. 

(egleiten,  tr.  accompany,  escort. 

Seglcitcr,  m.  -rS,  -r.  companion, 
escort. 

bcgliirfen,  tr.  give  happiness  to, 
make  happy,  bless.  Beglitlft, 
blessed,  happy. 

begititgen,  reflex,  content  one's  self, 
be  satisfied. 

Bcgrcifcn,  0.  tr.  comprehend. 

Segriff,  m.  -ffg,  -ffe.  comprehen- 
sion, idea. 

Bc^aglil^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  pleasing, 
comfortable. 

Befallen,  0.  tr.  hold  on  to,  keep, 
retain. 

Bel^au|)ten,  tr.  maintain,  assert^  de- 
clare. 

Bel^ent),  adj.  {or  adv.)  handy,  nim- 
ble, quick. 

Bet,  sq)'le  preflx  and  adv.  near,  by, 
beside,  prep,  {with  dat.)hy,  near; 
at,  in,  with,  among;  at  the  house 
of. 

Beibe,  adj.  both,  the  two. 

Betna^e,  adv.  near,  about,  almost. 

Seif^Jtei,  n.  -Ig,  -le.  illustration, 
example. 

Bei^en,  0.  tr.  bite. 

Seiftanb,  m. -b§.  assistance,  help. 

Befannt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  known, 
noted,  acquainted;  as  noun,  ac- 
quaintance. 

Befommen,  0.  tr.  get,  obtain,  re- 
ceive. 

Befrdnjen,  tr.  adorn  with  a  gar- 
land, crown. 

Befummern,  tr.  afflict,  trouble,  con- 
cern. 

BeleBett,  tr.  enliven,  revive. 

BcleBren,  tr.  teach,  inform,  correct. 

Belo^nen,  tr.  reward,  recompense. 

Bemiidltigen,  reflex,  {with  gen.)  take 
possession  of,  get  into  one's 
power,  seize. 


m 


CERMAN-ENGHSH 


Betnetfett^  tr,  remark,  observe. 

©emcrfung,/.  -gen.  remark,  ob- 
servation. 

Bcitfiiicn,  tr.  envy. 

BettU^en,  tr.  turn  to  use,  use. 

BcoBdt^teit^  tr.  observe,  watcli. 

Bequemen,  tr.  make  convenient. 
reflex,  accomodate  one's  self,  sub- 
mit. 

Sercbtfamfeit  [SctCbW,  /.  elo- 
quence. 

Bcteit,  cidj.  ready,  prepared. 

BctCttcn,  tr.  make  ready,  prepare. 

Bctcit^,  cidv.  already. 

jSBerg,  rn.  -geg,  -ge.  mountain. 
sUlttltn,  m.  miner.  ?|)fttll,  m. 
mountain-path. 

S5ctttf,  m.  -fg,  -fe.  calling,  voca- 
tion, office,  profession. 

Bcrufcn,  0.  tr.  call  upon,  summon. 

Beritimt,  past  ppl.  of  Bctiil^men, 
famous,  renowned. 

Bcft^ttfttgcn,  tr.  busy,  employ,  oc- 
cupy. 

JBcft^ttftigung,  /.  -geit.  employ- 
ment, business. 

JBeft^cil^cnftcit  /•  discretion,  mod- 
esty. 

Bef^retBen,  0.  tr.  describe. 

Beftnnen,  0.  reflex,  bethink  one's 
self,  reflect. 

Beft^ett/  0.  tr.  possess. 

Scft^cr,  in.  -rg,  -r.  possessor. 

iScft^ung,/.  -gen.  possession,  prop- 
erty. 

BcfonJier^,  adv.  in  particular, 
especially. 

Scfonncnl^cit,  /.  -ten.  discretion. 

Bef|ire$en,  0.  tr.  speak  about,  talk 

of,  discuss. 
Bcffcr,  adj.  {or  adv. :  comp.  of  gut), 

better. 
Bcffcrn,  tr.  make  better,  improve, 

correct. 
Befie^en^  0,  tr*  corrupt,  bribe. 


BefleBen,  0.  tr.  stand  up,  endure* 
inir.  stand  firm,  insist. 

BefteUen,  tr.  arrange,  order. 

Befiimmen,  tr.  fix,  determine,  de- 
sign. 

BcfircBcn,  re/lex.  exert  one's  self, 
endeavor,  as  noun,  endeavor,  ef- 
fort. 

Befu^cn,  tr.  go  and  see,  visits  call 
upon. 

Betett,  intr.  pray,  offer  prayer. 

Bettad^ten,  tr.  dwell  upon,  con- 
sider, look  at,  regard. 

Betragen,  0.  tr.  amount  to.  reflex, 
behave,  as  noun,  bearing,  con- 
duct. 

B  etrcff cn,  0.  tr.  befall,  surprise.  Bc« 
troffen,  surprised,  taken  aback. 

ajctt,  n.  -tte§,  -tte  or  -iter  or 
-tten.  bed. 

95ctteIBrob,  n.  bread  obtained  by 
begging. 

Bettein,  intr.  ask  alms,  beg. 

Betten,  tr.  make  the  bed,  bed. 

Settler,  m.  -r8,  -r.  beggar. 

Beugen,  tr.  bend,  bow,  incline. 

Setttel,  w.  -U,  -t.  small  bag, 
money  bag,  purse. 

Beuottmtti^ttgen,  tr.  bestow  full 
power    upon.     SeHottmtt^ttgt, 

(past  ppl.  as  noun)  plenipoten- 
tiary, agent. 

Betnegen,  0.  and  JV.  ti\  induce; 
move,  stir,  agitate. 

Setuegung,  /•  -  gen.  movement, 
agitation. 

Betoeinen,  tr.  weep  over,  bewail. 

BetDCifcn,  0.  tr.  point  out,  show, 
prove. 

BetDUnBern,  tr.  admire. 

Beja^len,  tr.  pay. 

Bejeugen,  tr.  bear  witness  to,  testify. 
BejtDingcn,    0.   tr.    subdue,    van- 
quish. 
l8iBliat§Cf, /. -fen.  library. 


OEEMAN-ENGtISH 


403 


Biegeit/  0.  ir.  bow,  bend. 
38tcr,  n.  -reg,  -re*   beer. 
bteten,  0.  tr.  bid,  offer. 
ISBilil,  n.  -beS,  -cr.  picture,  image. 

ff^mtt,  m.  sculptor. 
Bilt)en,    tr.    shape,    form,   build, 

train. 
fiittig,  adj,  (or  adv.)  reasonable, 

fair,  just ;  cheap. 
IStnbe,  /.  -en.    something  bound 

on,  bandage. 
Btnben,  0.  tr.  bind,  tie,  confine, 

constrain. 
(tnnen,  adv.    within,  prep,   (with 

dot.  or  gen.)  within,  inside  of. 
6i0,  adv.  and  prep,  as  far  as,  until, 

till,  to.   conj.  (for  bi§  ba^)  till 

the  time  that,  till,  until.  —  na^, 

as  far  as.  —  ju,  until. 
3SBt0(^en,   n.  -n^,  -n.    little  bit, 

Httle. 
S3if^0f,   m,    -%    -ofe.    bishop; 

bishop  (a  kind  of  drink). 
JBtffcn,  m.  -n§,  -n.  bit,  morsel. 
fditit,  /.  -ten.   request,  prayer. 
Bitten,  0.  tr.  ask,  request,  beg. 
Bitter,  cidj.  {or  ado.)  bitter. 
BIa§,  adj.  (or  adv. )  pale. 
fdhii,  n.  -tte«,  -atter.    leaf ;  leaf 

of  book,  page. 
Bltttt,  adj.  (or  adv.)  blue. 
BleiBctt,  0.  intr.  f.  continue,  stay, 

remain. 
Bleit^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  pale,  pallid, 

faded. 
BUtfen,  tr.  glance,  look. 
Blinil,  adj.  (or  adv.)  blind. 
Blot,  ^dJ'  i'^'"'  <^<^v-)  bare,  stripped, 

destitute,  mere.   Bfo^fietteit,  tr. 

expose,  lay  open. 
Blitl^en,     irdr.     bloom,     blossom, 

flower. 
Slumc,  /.  -men.  flower,  blossom. 
^Ittmcttmttlcn#   w.  flower   paint- 
ing. 


93lut,  n.  -  teS.    blood;  race, 
^lut^tro^jfcn,  m.  drop  of  blood. 
mmt  bit],  f.  -t^cn.   blossom, 

bloom. 
95oten,  m.  -ens,  -oben.   bottom; 

ground,  floor ;  garret. 
95ol^CniCr,  w.  -r6,  -r.  Bohemian, 

gypsy.    sttlCtB,  n.  gypsy- woman. 
93dW^/  ^-  ~f "/  ~^tt»  Bohemian. 
Botgeit,  tr.  borrow,  lend. 
Bo0  or  Bbfc,   adj.    (or  adv.)  bad, 

evil,  wicked,  angry,  malicious. 
SBof  etc  i^t,  w.  villain,  scamp,  rascal. 
93u0!^eit,  /.  badness,  wickedness, 

anger. 
Soten,  rn.  -n6,  -en.    messenger. 
SrantJ,  m.  -be§,  -dnbe.    fire,  con- 
flagration, brand. 
Brttttt^en,  tr.  use,  employ ;  be  in 

want  of,  need. 
BrttUen,  tr.  brew. 
Btaun,  adj.  (or  adv.)  brown. 
BtdUfen,  i^tr.  move  on  tumultu- 

ously,  roar. 
iiBtaut,  /.  -ante,   bride;    (in  Oer- 

many  betrothed). 
Bteit,  cidj.  (or  adv.)  broad,  wide. 
Bremen,  0.  ir.  break. 
Btennen,  (irreg. )  tr.  or  intr.  bum. 
Srett,  w.  -  tte^,  -tter.  board,  plank. 
Srief,  m.  -fc§,  -fe.  letter. 
Bricflit^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  by  letter, 

written. 
Bringen,  (irreg.)  tr.  bring,  fetch. 
93roi,  n.  -beg,  -be.  bread,  loaf  of 

bread. 
93nirfc,  /.  -en.  bridge. 
^ruter,  w.  -x%,  -iiber.  brother. 
Sriinnlein,    n.    -n8,    -n.    little 

spring. 

93rui!,  /.  -iifte.  breast. 

^uBe,  m.  -en,  -en.  boy,  youth. 

S5ut^,  n.  -t^eg;  -iic^er.  book. 

»tt(i^brurfetfun|t,  /.  art  of  book- 
printing. 


404 


VOCABULABY. 


SBuntl,  m.  -be§,  -unbe.  bond,  tie; 

league,  compact. 
fiUnt,cidj.  (or  adv.)  many  colored, 

gay,  variegated,  bright. 
iSBurgcr,  wi.  -rg,  -r,    townsman, 

burgher,  commoner. 
lEBufen^  m.  -n§,  -n.   bosom,  breast. 

^arbtnal,  m.  -I^/  -le.   cardinal. 

^Wi^f  ^'  -ten,  -ten.  (/.  stin.) 
christian. 

G^l^rificnftcit  /•  Christendom. 

€^rijtCttfc^ttttr,  /.  band  of  christi- 
ans. 

(^rifHit^,  adj.  (,or  adv.)  christian. 

G^igarre,  /.  -reiu  cigar. 

6^ontotr,  n.  -re§,  -re.  counting 
house,  office. 

@iOU|)e,  n.  railway  car  or  car- 
riage. 

ha  {or  llttr),  o,dv.  there,  then,  at 
that  place,  under  those  circum- 
stances, after  rdative,  -ever,  -so- 
ever, in  composiiion  with  preps, 
see  154.3,  166.4,  180 

tiaBci,  ado.  thereby;  by  it  or  them 
or  that:  see  154.3,  166.4,  180, 
and  bei.  —  fcin,  be  present,  take 
part. 

2>at^,  n.  -(^e§,  -cid^er.  roof. 

bafitr,  adv.  therefor,  for  it  or  that 
or  them:  see  154.3,  166.4,  180, 
and  fiir. 

bagegen,  adv.  against  it  or  them 
or  that:  see  154.3,  166.4, 180, 
and  gcgen. 

htifitX,  adv.  thence,  therefore. 

^amc,  /.  -men.  lady. 

bamtt,  conj.  in  order  that. 
ilammern,  intr.  become  dusk. 
JDttnf,  m.  -M,  gratitude,  thanks. 
iJttnfcn,  tr.  thank. 
bann,  adv.  then,  at  that  time. 
Hv,  see  ta. 


tiaran,  adv.  at  or  on  it  or  that  of 

them:  see  154.3,   166.4,  180, 

and  an. 
tliirauf,  adv.  thereupon,  upon  or 

on  it  or  them  or  that:  see  154.3, 

166.4,  180,  and  anf. 
baraul,  ad^).  out  of  it  or  them  or 

that:  see  154.3,  166.4, 180,  and 

anf. 
baretlt,  adv.  thereinto   {^^accus. 

with  in),  into  or  to  it,  etc. :  see 

154.3,  166.4,  180,  and  in. 
btttin  (brin,  or  barinncn),  adv. 

therein  (=  dat.  with  in),  in  it,  etc. : 

see  154.3,  166.4,  180,  and  in. 
tldtob,  ad'\  on  account  of  it,  etc. : 

see    154.3,    166.4,    180,   and 

oh. 
tmtficUctt,  tr.    set  forth,   exhibit, 

represent. 
batum,  adv.  therefore,   about  it, 

etc. :  see  154.3, 166.4,  180,  and 

urn. 
lJtt0,  see  bcr. 

£)afein,  n.  -n§.  being  present;  ex- 
istence. 
ba^e^cn,  0.  intr.  f.    stand  there. 
baucrftaft,    adj.  {or  adv.)  lasting, 

enduring. 
bauern,  intr.  last,  endure. 
babon,  adv.  thereof;  of  or  from  it, 

etc. :  see  154.3,  166.4, 180,  and 

t)on. 
ha^U,adv.  thereto,  to  or  for  it,  etc. : 

see  154.3,  166.3,  180,  and  gu. 
bcfiatticrcit,  intr.  debate. 
December,  m.  -rg.   December. 
1-  tJCtlt,  poss.  adj.  thy,  thine. 
2.  bcin  (or  ticincr),  gen.  sing.  o/bu. 
betnig,  poss.  pro.  thine. 
Uenfcn  (irreg.)  tr.  or  intr.  think; 

think  of,  call  to  mind. 
ttCItlt,  adv.  then,  in  that  case.    tS 

fet  —  tafi,  unless,    conj.  than 

(for  aU),  beginning  a  clause,  for. 


VOCABULARY. 


405 


ticnno^f  conj.  even  in  that  case, 
notwithstanding. 

ber  (bie,  ba§),  demonstr.  pron.  and 
adj.  this  or  this  one,  that  or 
that  one,  etc.;  as  emphatic 
pers.  pron,  he,  she,  it,  they. 
def.  article,  the.  rel.  pron.  who, 
which,  that;  rarely ^  he  who, 
that  which,  etc, 

Dcricnigc  (bieienige,  ba^ienige),  de- 
term,  adj.  and  pron.  that  or  that 
one,  those. 

bcrfctftc  (biefetbe,  bo^fclbe).  determ. 
adj.  and  pron.  the  same;  he,  she, 
it,  etc. 

^CrtOif^,  m.  -f(^e6,  -jd^c.  dervish 
(IVIohammedan  monk). 

bclftttlft  {or  bC^^ttlb),  adv.  or  conj. 
therefore. 

tieff  enungeat^tet,  adv.  or  conj.  never- 
theless. 

ilCJIO,  adv.  so  much  the  (before  a 
comparative) ;  JC  .  .  .  Jjcflo,  the 
.  .  .  the. 

beutf^,  adj.  German,  as  noun:  m. 
a  German;  n.  the  German  lan- 
guage. 

^Ctttft^Ittttll,  n.  Germany. 

bit^t,  adj.  {or  adv.)  thick,  dense. 

ttl^tcn,  tr.  produce  as  the  result  of 
thinking,  compose  {especially  as 
poetry),  invent. 

^i(^tcr,  m.  -r§,  -r.  poet. 

^i^tfun ft,/,  art  of  poetry,  poetry. 

tit,  seettx, 

titntn,  intr.  {with  da,(.)  serve,  be 
of  service  to,  assist. 

Wiener,  m.  -r§,  -r.  servant. 

^icncrfl^aft,  /.  servants  {collec- 
tively). 

^tenjl,  m.  -tc§,  -te.  service,  em- 
ployment. 

^ien^ttg,  m.  Tuesday. 

ilic0  (biefer,  biefe,  biefeS),  dem  adj. 
pron.  this  or  that,  this  one  or  that 


one;  the  latter,  sinaf,  adv.  this 
time. 

^ing,  n.  -ge6,  -ge.  thing,  matter. 

bitCCt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  direct. 

tot^,  adv.  and  conj.  though,  yet, 
nevertheless,  however;  after  all, 
at  least,  surely;  sometimes  simply 
but;  or  only  for  emphasis. 

doctor,  rn.  -r^,  -reu,  doctor. 

^Olk,  ^'  -^^^,  -c^e.  dagger. 

2)0m,  m.  -meg,  -  me.   cathedral. 

bonncrtt,  intr.  thunder. 

^Onncrjttt0,  m.  Thursday. 

tlO|)|)C(n>  tr.  double. 

tojljielt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  double. 

^orf,  n.  -fe§,  -ovfer.  village,  ham- 
let. 

tott,  adv.  there,  in  that  place, 
yonder. 

ttau^en,  adv.  outside,  out  of 
doors. 

txt^tn,  tr.  turn,  twist. 

iirci,  num.  three,  sjc^lt,  thirteen. 
'-m,  thirty. 

brinncn,  see  iitttinncn. 

iiritt,  num.  adj.  third. 

txof^tn,  tr.  or  intr.  {with  dai.) 
threaten,  menace. 

tltb^ncn,  intr.  roar,  ramble,  groan. 

brurfcn,  tr.  print. 

briiden,  tr.  press,  clasp,  jam. 

bu,  pers.  pron.  thou. 

tuxnm,adj.  {or  adv.)  stupid,  dull. 

^umm^cit,/.  -ten.  stupidity. 

tunf el,  adj.  {or  adv. )  dark,  gloomy. 

biinfcl^ttft,  adj.  {or  adv.)  arro- 
gant. 

titnfcn,  intr.  {with  dat.)  seem,  ap- 
pear; seem  or  appear  to. 

Biinn,  adj.  {or  adv.)  thin,  slender. 

tlUt(^^  adv.  and  seple  or  insep'le 
prefix,  through,  throughout,  prep. 
{with  accus.)  through;  through- 
out, during;  by  means  of,  by. 

tlur^ttU0,  adv.  throughout 


406 


GEKMAN-ENGLISH 


2>ttr(^mttrf^,  m.  -fc^eg,  -arfd)e. 
marclaing  through. 

^Urc^mcff cr,  m.  -r§,  -r.   diameter. 

iiurt^ft^rcitcn,  0.  tr.  step  through, 
walk  through. 

t^ttx6)tohtn,  tr.  rage  through. 

tiur^tuetnen,  tr.  weep  through. 

IlUtfcn,  (irreg.)  tr.  be  permitted  or 
allowed,  feel  authorized,  dare, 
need:  see  253, 

turfien  or  burficn,  intr.  or  impers. 
thirst,  be  thirsty. 

burfttg,  adj.  {or  adv.)  thirsty. 

buffer,  ctdj.  {or  adv.)  gloomy,  ob- 
scure, dusky. 

tbtn,  adj.  {or  adv.)  even,  level, 
plain,  adv.  evenly;  usimlly,  just, 
exactly,  precisely,  sfo,  adv.  in 
like  manner,  likewise. 

^htnt,  /.  -en.  even  or  level  tract, 
plain. 

@(^0,  n.  -c^og.   echo. 

^dt,f'  -!en.   edge,  corner. 

ttiti,  adj.  {or  adv.)  of  noble  birth; 
noble,  exalted,    sfnahc,  tn.  page. 

Clle,  adv.  sooner,  earlier,  conj. 
sooner  than,  before,  ere. 

Cllcr,  adv.  sooner,  earlier,  rather. 

®^tC,  /.  -ren.  honor,  glory,  good 
repute. 

elftren,  tr.  honor,  respect,  esteem. 

^^rcnmtttttt,  ra.  man  of  honor. 

e§rlt(^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  honorable, 
honest. 

Clrtoitrilig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  worthy 
of  honor,  respectable. 

ti,  interj.  why!  oh  ! 

eifrig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  eager,  ardent. 

Cigcn,  adj.  {or  adv.)  own,  belong- 
ing to  one's  self;  real;  odd. 

©igent^um  [4nm],  n.  -m§,  -umer. 

property. 
eigenttil^,  adj,  proper,  true.   adv. 

properly  speaking,  really. 


cilcn,  irdr.  \  or  ij,  or  reflex,  hurry, 

hasten. 
ciUg,  adj.  {or  adv.)  hasty,  quick, 

hurrying. 

1.  tin,  adv.  and  seple prefix,  in,  into, 
corresponding  as  prefix  to  in  as 
prep.;  in  composition  with  ad- 
verbs, into,  or  in  with  accus. 

2.  tin,  num.  one;  a  person,  they, 
one. 

3.  cin,  indef.  article,  an,  a. 
etnanber/    indecl.   pron.   one    an- 
other, each  other. 

einbttten,  tr.  {with  reflex.  pr(m.  in 
dat.)  form  in  one's  mind,  imag- 
ine, fancy. 

etncrlei,  adj.  of  one  sort,  the  same, 
indifferent. 

Cinfa^,  adj.  simple. 

etngebortn,  adj.  inborn,  native. 

tini^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  one,  united, 
accordant,    in  pi.  some,  a  few. 

Cinlabcn,  0.  tr.  invite. 

^inltttung,  /.  -gen.  invitation. 

einmal,  adv.  once,  one  time;  once 
for  all. 

Ctnnc^mcn,  0.  tr.  take  in,  receive, 
accept;  take  possession  of,  capti- 
vate, prepossess,  etngenemmeit, 
prejudiced. 

C^innc^mcr,  m.  -x^,  -r.  collector. 

etttritlfen,  intr.  f.  move  in,  enter. 

tin\av\,adj.  (^orodu.)  lonely,  alone. 

Cinfc^lttfen,  0.  irdr.   f.  fall  asleep. 

einfj^rcificn,  0.  tr.  write  in  or 
down,  inscribe. 

etnfcnbeit,  tr.  send  in,  remit. 

^inftt^t,  /.  -ten.  insight,  intelli- 
gence. 

cinfi,  adv.  one  time,  once  (in  the 
past);  some  day  (in  the  future). 

Cittflcttcn,  tr.  put  in.  reflex,  pre- 
sent one's  self,  appear. 

ctntretcn,  0.  intr.  f.  step  in, 
enter. 


VOCABTJLAEY, 


407 


C^tnUcrjlantmi^  [m§],  n.  -ffe§,-ffe. 

understanding,  agreement. 

einjeln^  (^dj.  single,  individual. 

CtnjtCl^cn,  0.  tr.  draw  in  or  on. 
inir.  move  in. 

cinjig,  adj.  (or  adv.)  only,  single, 
sole,  unique. 

^IHnH^n,  /.  -nen.  railroad,  rail- 
way. 

tiki,  adj.  vain. 

®(C9tC,  /.  -ten.  elegy  (plaintive 
poem). 

tltnti,  adj,  {or  adv.)  miserable, 
wretched. 

clf,  num.  eleven. 

©item,  pi  parents.  sfrcuilC,  /. 
parental  joy. 

®m|lftttt0,  m. -gg.  reception,  in  — 
nt^mtn,  receive. 

Cmjlfttngcn,  0.  tr.  receive,  accept. 

©nUlpintlUng,/.  -gen.  feeling,  sen- 
sation. 

CXttpOXf  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  aloft, 
upward,  on  higli.  sfcimcn,  spring 

tip.  sf^ttucn,  look  up.  sflrckn, 

strive  upward,    st^cilcn,  reflex. 

divide  itself  upward. 
(Snte,  n.  -be§,  -ben.    end,  issue, 

conclusion,    am  — ,  in  or  at  the 

end,  finally,    ju  — ,  at  an  end. 

— ntttt^cn,  {withdat.)  put  an  end 

to,  stop. 
Ctttligcn,  tr.  stop,  finish. 
cnt^n^,  fiidj.  (or  adv.)  final,   con- 
cluding, last. 
CngC,  adj.  [or  adv.)  narrow. 
(gngd,  m.  -U,  -I  angel. 
en  gen,  tr.  narrow,  contract. 
(^n^imttv,  m.  -rg,  -r.   (/.  stin) 

inhabitant  of  England. 
englif^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  English. 
Cttts,  inseple  prefix,    forth,    from, 

out,  away:  see  307.3. 
entfiefiren,  tr.  {orintr,  xoith  gen.)  do 

without. 


entBtntien,  0.  tr.  unbind,  set  freey 
release,  absolve. 

entMiJ^en,  tr.  denude,  uncover. 

©ntberfung,  /.  -gen.  discovery, 
disclosure. 

entfcrncn,  tr.  put  far  off,  remove. 
reflex,  go  off,  withdraw. 

entgegen,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix. 
against,  toward,  j^rep.  {with 
dative  preceding)  against,  to 
meet,  sfiel^en/  stand  against, 
oppose. 

ent^ttlten,  0.  tr.  hold  away;  hold 
in,  contain,  reflex,  keep  from, 
abstain. 

entlttjlen,  0.  tr.  let  go,  permit  to 
leave,  dismiss,  absolve. 

entlttttfcn,  0.  intr.  I  run  away, 
escape. 

entlebigen,  tr.  set  free,  deliver. 

tniiodtXif  tr.  entice  or  allure  away; 
elicit. 

cntrUden,  tr.  carry  away,  trans- 
port. 

entfttgen,  intr.  {with  dat.)  renounce, 
give  up. 

entft^eibcn,  0.  {or  N.)  tr.  decide, 
determine.  cnlfd)eiJlCntJ,  deci- 
sive. 

cntf^lie§cn,  0.  tr.  disclose,  reflex. 
make  up  one's  mind,  decide. 

©ntf^lu^,  m.  -ffeg,  -iiffe.  resolu- 
tion, resolve. 

Cntf(^uIti9Cn,  tr.  exculpate,  ex- 
cuse,  reflex,  excuse  one's  self. 

C^ntfC^en,  n.  horror,  dread. 

entjicjen,  0.  Mr.  f.  arise,  spring 
forth,  originate. 

entto  Ctcr,  conj.  either  {followed  by 

uber  or). 

enttntlfeln,  tr.  unwrap,  unfold;  de- 
velop, solve,  explain. 

entjtel^en,  0.  tr.  withdraw,  remove 
or  take  away. 

tXf  P^rs.  pron,  he. 


408 


GEKMAN-ENGUSH 


tXs,  insep'le  prefix,  see  307.4. 
erBarnten,  tr.  move  to  pity,  reflex. 

pity. 
etBauett,  tr.  build  up,  erect. 

1.  ^Xhe,  m.  -en,  -en.  heir,  in- 
heritor. 

2.  @rBe,  n.  -be^.  inheritance. 
etBU^^  cidj'  {or  adv.)  hereditary. 
txhiidtn,  tr.  catch  sight  of,  per- 
ceive. 

(EtBlJnnj,  wi.  hereditary  prince. 

crBrcd)Cn,  0.  tr.  break  open. 

C^ri^e,  /.  -ben.  earth,  ground; 
world.  ©tbcntttUm,  m.  earth, 
surface  of  earth,  sflrit^,  wi.  zone, 
region. 

erfal^ren,  0.  tr.  come  upon,  make 
experience  of,  learn. 

C^rfttftrung,  /.  -gen.  experience. 
in  —  BringCtt,  learn  by  expe- 
rience, learn. 

etflnben,  0.  tr.  find  out,  invent. 

CtftCUCn,  tr.  give  pleasure  to,  glad- 
den, reflex,  {with  gen.)  enjoy,  re- 
joice at. 

etfutteit/  tr.  fill;  fulfil,  perform. 

tX^e^tn,  0.  Mr.  I  go  on,  fare, 
happen. 

crgreifcn,  0.  tr.  lay  hold  of,  seize 
upon. 

txf^dhcn,  cidj.  {or  adv.)  elevated, 
lofty,  subUme. 

erl^alteit,  0.  tr.  obtain,  receive; 
keep,  preserve. 

erl^eBen,  0.  tr.  heave  up,  lift,  ele- 
vate; extol. 

Ctl^cif^cn,  tr.  require,  demand. 

Cr^iircn,  tr.  hear,  hear  of;  grant. 

crittttcrn,  tr.  remind,  reflex,  {with 
gen.)  remember,  recall. 

©rinncrung,  /.  -gen.  remem- 
brance, memory. 

erialten,  reflex,  catch  cold. 

erfennen,  {irreg.)  tr.  perceive,  rec- 
ognize. 


erfcnntni§  \^n\S\,  /.  -ffc  percep- 
tion, knowledge. 

%xitX,  m.  -rg,  -r.  balcony. 

CtflatCtt/  tr.  make  clear,  explain  ; 
declare,  announce.        [inquire. 

erfuntligen,  reflex,  make  inquiries, 

etiattgcn,,  tr.  reach  after,  obtain, 
reach,  attain. 

eriauben,  tr.  allow,  permit. 

CXhhtU,  tr.  live  to  see,  experience, 
have  happen  to  one. 

Ctliigcn,  0.  tr.  produce  by  lying,  in- 
vent,   eriogen,  fabricated,  false. 

Crmortcn,  tr.  murder. 

Ctmiibcn,  tr.  weary,  tire. 

^rmittiung,  /•  weariness,  fatigue. 

©rncucrung,  /.  -gen.  renewal, 
renovation. 

©rnictJtigung,  /.  -gen.  lowering, 
humiliation,  abasement. 

C^tttH,  m.  -teg.  earnestness,  grav- 
ity, seriousness. 

Crnfi,  cidj'  {or  adv.)  earnest,  seri- 
ous, grave. 

tXObtxn,  tr.  overcome,  conquer. 

CroffllClt,  tr.  open,  reveal,  disclose. 

tX(\\lidtn,  tr.  quicken,  revive,  re- 
fresh. 

ettett^en,  tr.  reach,  arrive  at. 

etf^etnen,  0.  intr.  f.  shine  forth, 
come  in  sight,  appear. 

Ctft^rcrfcn,  0.  (or  N.y  Mr.  f.  {or 
reflex.)  be  frightened  or  startled. 

crfj^rcrflil^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  fright- 
ful, dreadful. 

crfl,  adj.  first,  adv.  firstly,  at  first. 

crftcigcn,  0.  tr.  ascend,  climb. 

txioncn,  Mr.  sound  forth. 

Ctttttgcn,  0.  tr.  endure,  bear. 

ertoa^en,  Mr.  f.  awake,  be 
aroused. 

ettna^len,  tr.  elect,  select,  choose. 

tXtOaxttn,  tr.  wait  for,  expect. 

crtocifcn,  0.  tr.  show,  prove, 
render. 


VOCABTJLAKY. 


409 


CrttJCtBctt,  0.  tr.  procure  by  effort, 

earn,  gain. 
erhlicbcrn,  tr,  give  back;  return, 

answer. 
erjal^Ien,  tr.  relate,  recount,  tell. 
C^rja^Iung,/.  -gen.  tale,  story. 

etjiel^en,  0.  tr.  educate,  train. 

^rjic^cr,  m.  -rS,  -r.  educator, 
teacher. 

C^rjicftung,  /.  education,  training. 

t§,pers.  pron.  it:  see  154.3,4. 

C^fcl,  m.  -U,  -I   ass,  donkey. 

cffcn,  0.  tr.  eat.  as  noun,  meal,  re- 
past. 

etltC^,  pron.  adj.  {chiefly  in  pi.) 
some,  sundry. 

etttiad,  indef.  pron.  {indeclinable) 
something,  somewhat,  used  ad- 
verbially, in  some  measure,  a 
little,  rather:  see  188. 

1.  CUer,  poss.  adj.  your,  yours. 

2.  CUCr,  gen.  pi.  of  iu.  of  you,  your. 
@ur0^a,  n.  -Qg.  Europe. 
CUrO|ittif^,  adj.  European. 

etotg,  adj.   {or   adv.)  everlasting, 

eternal. 
©yem^tttr,  n.  -re§,  -re*  specimen, 

copy. 
^CCllCttJ,  /.  -gen.  excellency. 

fal^ren,  0.  intr.  f  or  I},  fare,  go, 
drive,  be  drawn  in  a  wagon;  go 
in  a  boat,  sail.  tr.  drive,  row. 
fpttjicren  fn^rcn,  take  a  drive. 

^tt^rt,  /.  -  ten.  journey,  voyage, 
drive. 

foacn,  0.  intr.  I  fall 

foils,  conj.  in  case,  if. 

f alf(^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  false. 

^amilit,/.  -ien.  family. 

^tt§,  n.  -ffe§,  -affer.  vat,  cask. 

fttffcn,  tr.  hold,  contain;  lay  hold 
of,  grasp,  seize;  comprehend, 
conceive. 

fttfl,  adv.  almost,  nearly. 


fttUi,  adj.  {or  adv.)  decayed  ;  lazy, 
indolent.  [{French). 

i^auteuil,    n.   -(g,   -(g.    armchair 

§c6ruar  m.  -rg.  February. 

^Clicr,  /.  feather,  pen. 

fcl^Icn,  intr.  {with  dot.)  fail,  be 
wanting  (to),  be  deficient;  be  in 
fault,  err.  c0  fc^lt  ttJl .  .  .  {im- 
pers.)  there  is  a  lack  of  .  .  . 

^cftlcr,  wi.  -rg,  -r.  fault,  defect; 
error. 

feicrlit^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  ceremoni- 
ous, festive,  solemn. 

f  cicrn,  intr.  make  holiday,  tr.  cele- 
brate, solemnize. 

^Cicrtag,  m.  holiday. 

^Cigling,  m.  -gg,  -ge.  coward. 

f  eitt,  adj.  {or  adv. )  fine,  delicate. 

fetnti,  adj.  hostile,  inimical. 

Sfctnll,  m.  -beg,  -be.  (/.  stilt) 
enemy,  foe. 

^tlti,  n.  -beg,  -ber.  field,  plain. 

%tU,  m.  -fen,  -fen.  rock,  clitt. 
sfiurf,  n.  piece  of  rock,  cliff. 

^eitflcr,  n.  -rg,  -r.  window. 

fern,  adj.  {or  adv.)  distant,  far  off, 
remote. 

fcrtig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  prepared, 
ready,  finished. 

^Cffel,  /.  -In.  fetter,  chain. 

fcfl,  adj.  {or  adv.)  fast,  firm, 
strong. 

SeH,  n.  -teg,  -te.  festival 

fcflgcfugt,  past  p'ple  of  fcflfiigcn, 

fast  joined. 

feu^t,  adj.  {or  adv.)  moist,  damp. 

gcucr,  n.  -rg,  -r.  fire. 

iJicber,  n.  -rg,  -r.  fever. 

finten,  0.  tr.  find,  discover;  (ioi<^o6- 
ject.  pred  )  deem,  consider,  think. 

i^ittgcr,  rn.  -rg,  -r.  finger. 

flnflcr,  adj.  {or  adv.)  dark,  ob- 
scure. 

§tnftctnife  [sni5],  /.  -ffc»    dark- 


410 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


8fif(!^cr,  m.  -rg,  -r.  fisherman. 

Jlammc,  /.  -men.  flame. 

gfttf(^C,/.-f(^en.  bottle. 

flel^en,  tr.  (or  intr.  with  dot.)  im- 
plore, entreat,  as  noun,  suppli- 
cation, entreaty. 

3f(etft^,  n.  -f(^e6,  -fd)c.  flesh, 
meat. 

ffet^tg,  adj.  {or  adv. )  industriotis. 

fftcgcn,  0.  intr.  f  or  fj,  fly;  rush. 

ffte^en,  0.  intr.  \,  flee,  escape. 

f[te§en,  0.  intr.  ]  orl),   flow,  run. 

Slitter taOt^Cn,pZ.  honeymoon. 

Sforcnj,  n.  Florence. 

SIu^,  m.  -d)zQ,  -iidje.  curse. 

Kuc^en,  intr,  {with  dat.)  curse, 
swear. 

^lur,  /.  -ren.  field;  floor;  hall. 

§lu§,  m.  -ff eg,  -iiffe.  river. 

glutfi  [glut],  /.  -tf)en.  flood, 
wave,  tide. 

folgcn,  intr.  f.  {with  dat.)  follow; 
imitate.    fotgctltJ,  following. 

'goiter,  /•  -t'U.  instrument  of  tor- 
ture.  sBanf,  /.  rack. 

^orbcrung,  /.  -gen.  demand, 
claim. 

^orm^  /.  -men.  form. 

fott,  cidv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  forth, 
forward,  onward;  away,  gone, 
off.    sfcin,  he  away. 

fortrcitcn,  0.  intr.  f,  ride  away. 

^ortfd^riti,  m.  ~tte§,  -tte.  forward 
step,  progress,  improvement. 

forttOCrfcn,  0.  tr.  throw  away. 

^ta^t/f.  -gen.   question. 

fragen,  intr.  or  tr,  {K  or  0.)  ask, 
question. 

franfifj^,  adj.  Frankish. 

^tttttfrci^,  n.  -d^g.  France. 

^ranjofc,  m.  -en,  -en.  French- 
man. 

^ratljoftn,  /.  -innen.  French- 
woman. 

ftttlljoftfc^,  adj.  French. 


^xan,  /.  -auen.  woman,  wife, 
lady. 

^rttUCnft^trffttl,  n.  woman's  fate. 

ftci/  8idj,  {with  gen.)  {or  adv.)  free; 
exempt.  sBticf,  m.  charter,  pri- 
vilege. 

^Xti^tit,  /•  -ten.  freedom,  liberty. 

fteili^,  adv.  to  be  sure,  certainly. 

^reitttg,  m.  Friday. 

frcml),  adj.  (or  adv.)  strange,  for- 
eign, not  one's  own,  unfamiliar, 
unusual,  as  noun,  stranger,  for- 
eigner. 

grcmtC,  /.  foreign  country,  re- 
gion away  from  one's  home. 

ftcffcn,  0.  tr.  eat  {said  of  animals, 
not  men),  devour. 

grcttte,/.  -ben.  joy,  pleasure,  de- 
Hght. 

frcutig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  glad,  joy- 
ous. 

fteuen,  tr.  give  pleasure  to.  reflex, 
be  glad,  rejoice. 

Steunb,  rn.  -beg,  -be.    friend. 

fteunblil!^,  adj.  {or  adt;.)  friendly, 
kind. 

SreunJlf(^ttft,  /.  -ten.  friendship. 

griciJC,  m.  -beng,  -ben.  peace. 

§ricticn|!ruf,  m.  report  of  a  peace. 

frietlUd),  adj.  {or  adv.)  peaceable, 
peaceful. 

^rtctltif^,  in.  -cf)g.  Frederick. 

frilt^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  fresh;  gay, 
lively. 

^riji,/.  -ten.  period,  time. 

frol^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  glad,  joyous, 
happy. 

ftomm,adj.  {oradv.)  pious. 

froflcht,  impers.  {with  accus.)  freeze 
or  shiver,  be  chilly. 

Sfrut^t,/-  -iid^te.  fruit. 

frud)ten,  intr.  bear  fruit;  be  of 
profit. 

frtt^(c),  adj.  {or  adv.)  early;  in 
early  morning;  speedy. 


VOCABULAEY. 


411 


frul^Ct,    0^3'    (or    adv.)    earlier, 

sooner. 
^rii^Uttg,  m.  -gg,  -gc.  spring. 
frill^flUifen,  intr.  breakfast. 
ful^icit^  tr.  feel,   touch;    be   con^ 

vinced  of. 
fullrett,  tn  carry,  bring;  lead,  con- 
duct, drive. 
^U^rtoerl,  n.   -U,    -fe.    vehicle, 

wagon. 
fiinf,  num.  five,  sjc^lt,  fifteen,  sjig, 

fifty. 
i^unfll^en,  n.  -n^,  -n.   little  spark. 
int,  prep,  with  accus.  for;  in  behalf 

of;  instead  of;  before  dbjec,  pred. 

as. 
Sfurc^t,  /.  fear. 
fur^tbar,  adj.  (or    adv.)  fearful, 

terrible. 
.f itr^tCtt,  tr.  be  afraid  of,  fear,  reflex. 

be  afraid,  become  frightened. 
flirt^tcrlic^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  fearful, 

terrible. 
^iirfl,  m.  -ten,  -ten.  prince. 
gfurflitt,  /.  -nnen.  princess. 
guft,  m.  -ufeeg,  -iiBe.  foot,  strttt, 

m.  footstep. 

®tt6e,  /.  -ben.  gift,  present. 

gaffen,  intr.  gape,  stare,  look  with 
astonishment. 

©oncttc,  /.  -ten.  gallery. 

gttltj,  adj.  entire,  whole,  complete. 
adv.  wholly,  quite. 

got,  adj.  (inded.)  finished,  com- 
plete, done.  adv.  completely, 
quite,  absolutely;  very,  exceed- 
ingly.  wUh  negative,  not  at  all. 

©orten,  m.  -m,  -drten.  garden. 

©tirtnet,  m.  -r«,  -r.   gardener. 

@ofl,  m.  -teg,  -afte.  guest,  visitor. 
sftet,  adj.  liberal  to  friends,  hos- 
pitable,  sfreunblilft,  hospitable. 

®attt,  m.  -ten,  -ten.  husband. 

ge,  insep'k  prefiXf  see  307.5. 


©cBtiuilC,  n.  -c§,-C.  building,  edi- 
fice. 

^thtn,  0.  tr.  give,  bestow,  imp.  t$ 
gifit,  etc.  there  is  or  are. 

®ibtX,  m.  -rg,  -r.  giver. 

©cBct,  n.  -tg,  -te.    prayer. 

gcbtetcttf  0.  tr.  order,  command, 
bid. 

gebotctt,  past  pple  (of  geBaren). 

born. 

®tM,  n.  -tg,  -te.  commandment, 
bidding. 

gcbtttUC^cn,  tr.  {rarely  intr.  with 
gen.)  use,  employ. 

@e6urt0tag,  m.  birthday. 

©cbttttfc,  tn.  -!eng,  -fen.  thought, 
idea. 

gcbcnfcn,  {irreg.)  intr.  {genVy  with 
ace. ,  less  often  with  gen.)  think  of, 
remember. 

©ciJicdt,  n.  -teg,  -te.  poem. 

©cbriingc,  n.  -geg,  -ge.  crowd, 
throng. 

©eUttlb,  /.  patience. 

©Cftt^t,  /.  -rcn.  danger,  risk, 
peril. 

gcfii^rlit^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  danger- 
ous. 

©cftiftrte,  m.  -ten,  -ten.  com- 
panion. 

©cfii^rtin, /.  -innen.  companion. 

1.  gefatten,  0.  {with  dat.)  suit, 
please,  meet  the  approbation  of. 

2.  gefttUcn,  past  pple  o/foBcit. 
gcfttngcn,  past  pple   of  fangcn, 

caught,   captured,    imprisoned. 
as  noun,  prisoner,  captive. 
©cfiingni^  [sniS],  n.  -ffeg,  -[fe. 

prison. 

©Cfolgc,  n.  -geg,  -gc.  following, 
escort,  retinue. 

©Cfufti,  n.  -teg,  -te.  feeling,  sensa- 
tion, sentiment. 

gegen,  prep,  (with  ace.)  against, 
opposed  to;  over  against,  oppo- 


412 


GEEMAN-ENGUSH 


site  to.   stCtlOluttOtt,  /.  coTinter- 

revolution. 
©egcnftanb,  m.  -H,  -anbe.  object, 

topic,  subject. 
gegcniikt,    adv.    opposite,    prq). 

(wUhdat.)  opposite,  over  against, 
gel^etm,   adj.    (or  adv.)    private, 

secret. 
@c^cimni§    [mB],  n.  -[fe«,  -ffe. 

secret,  mystery. 
gel^en,   0.  tr.   |.  go,  move,  walk. 

impers.  {with  dat.)    go  or  fare 

with,  be  (in  health  etc.). 
gel^Or^en,    intr.  {with  dat.)  listen 

to,  obey. 
{^el^Otcn,  ii^r.  {with  dat.)  belong  to, 

appertain  to. 
®cifl,  m.  -te8,  -ter.    spirit,  mind. 
geifitg,  adj.   {or  adv.)  relating  to 

the  mind  or    spirit,    spiritual, 

mental. 
getflU^,  adj.  {or  adv.)   spiritual; 

clerical,     as  noun,    clergyman, 

minister. 
fieiflreit^,  adj.  [or  adv.)  spirited, 

witty,  clever. 
getjig,  adj.   {or  adv.)   avaricious, 

covetous. 
geliiuftg,  adj,   {or    adv.)   current, 

fluent,  voluble,  easy. 
@c(tl,  n.  -beS,  -ber.  money,  coin, 

cash. 
©elcgcnl^cit,  /.  -ten.  opportunity, 

occasion. 
gele^rt,    adj.    learned,    as    noun, 

learned  man,  scholar. 
geltngett,  0.  Mr.  \.  {withdal.;  used 

in  3d  pers.  only)  prove  success- 
ful, turn  out  as  desired.    t§  gCs 

lingt  einem,  etc.,    one  succeeds 

or  prospers,    as   noun,  success, 

prosperity. 
gcloben,  tr.  promise,  vow. 
gelten,  0.  intr.  {used  in  3d  pers.  or 

impersonally)  have  value;    {with 


dat.)  concern,  have  to  do 
with. 

gelit^en,  tr.  or  intr.  (with  dat.  or 
accus.)  usuattyin  3d  pers,  desire, 
hanker. 

©Cmttl^I,  m.  -te§,  -le.  spouse,  con- 
sort, husband. 

©cma^Hn,  /.  sinncn.  spouse,  wife. 

(^emdttJe,  n.  -beg,  -be.   painting. 
gemetn,  adj.  {or  adv.)  (wUh  dat.) 

common,  belonging  in  common 

to;  public. 
©Cmiife,  n.  -\t%,  -fe.   vegetables. 
©cmutft  b\ii] ,  n.  -tt|e«,  -t^er.  soul, 

spirit,  disposition. 
gCttlut^lit^  [siitti^],  adj.  {or  adv.) 

good     natured ;      comfortable, 

cozy. 
genetgt,  see  nctgcn. 
©Citcrtti,  m.  -leg,  -ak.   general. 
gencfcn,   0.  intr.   \.    get  well,   re- 
cover. 
@cnie,  n.  -leg,  -leg.  genius. 
gcnicftcn,   0.   tr.  {less  often  inir., 

with  gen.)  enjoy;  use  as  food  or 

drink,  eat. 
genug^  adv.  enough,  sufficiently; 

us&l  as   indecl.    noun,    enough, 

plenty. 
©cnuft,  m.  -ffeg,  -iiffe.  enjoyment, 

pleasure. 
geraDe,  adj.  straight,  direct,  even; 

erect;  plain,  adr.  directly,  just, 

precisely. 

gcrttt^cn  [sratcn],  0.  intr.  f.    get, 

come,  fall;  turn  out,  happen. 

gere^t,  adj.  (or  adv.)  righteous, 
upright,  just,  right. 

gcrc^tfcrttgt,  past  pple  from 
tCC^tfcrtigcn.  justified,  vindi- 
cated. 

geringflfta^ig,  adj.  depreciating, 
contemptuous. 

©cmittttitt,  /.  Germany  (person^ 
ijkd). 


VOCABULARY. 


413 


gCttt,  ctdv.  with  pleasnre,  gladly, 
willingly,  mot^te  — ,  would  like. 
e0  —  if^nn,  like  to  do  it.  c§  — 
l^aben,  be  fond  of  or  like  it. 

©cfttng,  m.  -g§,  -cinge.  song,  sing- 
ing. 

@Cf(!^ttft,  n.  --t§,  -te.  business,  af- 
fair. 

9Cf(ftc^cn,  0.  inir.  f.  (impers.) 
happen,  come  to  pass,  befall, 
take  place,  be  done. 

©Cft^cnf,  n.  ~U,  -fe.  gift,  present. 

@cf(^i^te,  /.  -ten.  story,  tale, 
history. 

@ef(^tc^t,  n.  -m,  -ter.  species, 
race,  family. 

geft^hlinb,  adj.  {or  adv.)  swift, 
rapid,  quick. 

©efctt  or  sUtfTn.  -en,  -en.  comrade, 
companion;  ai)j)rentice. 

@cfcUftf)ttft,  /.  -ten.  company,  so- 
ciety; party. 

(Scfc^,  n.  -^eg,  -^e.  law;  rule. 

©Cfif^t,  n.  -t^,  -te  or  -ter.  sight; 
(pZ.  -ter)  face,  visage;  {pi  -te) 
vision. 

gcftnncn,  0.  intr.  f.  be  minded, 
intend,  purpose.  ^cfonncn, 
minded,  disposed. 

©cfinnunfi,  /.  -gen.  state  of  mind, 
disposition,  intention. 

©Cftttit,  /.  -ten.  appearance,  as- 
pect; form,  shape,  figure. 

gcftttttcn,  tr.  allow,  permit. 

fiCflcrn,  adi\  yesterday. 

0Cfunb,  adj.  (or  adv.)  healthy, 
sound,  well. 

©cfuniJfteit,  /.  health. 

fiCtreu,  adj.  {or  adv.)  true,  faithful. 

©etlJOt^g,  n.  -fe§,  -fe.  anything 
growing;  plant. 

gelua^ren,  tr.  warrant,  guarantee, 
assure;  grant. 

@ettltt^rmi0,  /.  warranting,  grant- 
ing. 


©ehlttit,  /.  -ten.  power,  force, 
might. 

gCtDaltfam,  adj.  {or  adv.)  forcible, 
violent. 

gCtninncn,  0.  tr.  win,  gain,  obtain. 
JU  —  fte^en,  be  to  be  gained. 

gCtt)i§,  adj.  {or  adv.)  sure,  certain, 
undoubting;  certain,  some. 

©etniffcn,  n.  -n§.  consciousness; 
conscience. 

©emitter,  n.  -rg,  -r.  thunder- 
storm. 

gelDO^nen,  tr.  {or  intr.  with  gen.) 
be  accustomed  to.  getOOl^nt, 
wont,  used  to. 

getnb^nen,  tr.  accustom,  habituate. 

gehlb^nlifi,  adj.  {or  adv.)  ordinary, 
customary,  usual. 

©etoitl^t,  n.  -U.    turmoil,  tumult. 

©IttltJ,  w.  -ge^.     lustre,  splendor. 

glanjen,  intr.  shine,  glitter,  glisten. 

©IttI,  n.  -je§,  -a[er.  glass,  tumbler. 

©laube,  m.  -ben^,  -ben.  belief 
faith. 

glauben,  tr.  believe;  think. 

@laukn^fa^,  n.  article  of  faith. 

©IttUbiger,  m.  -x^,  -r.    creditor, 

gleic^,  adj.  like,  resembling;  alike, 
equal ;  direct,  adv.  similarly, 
equally;  directly,  at  once. 

gteit^en,  0.  inir.  {with dat.)  he  like, 
equal,  resemble. 

®(ei^gultijj!cit,  /•  indifference. 

@(et^ma§,  n.  uniformity,  propor- 
tion. 

glei^fietten,  reflex,  put  one's  self 
on  an  equality,  equal,  rival. 

gleic^tDO^t,  adv.  nevertheless. 

®Io(fc,  /.  -fen.  beU. 

glorreit^,  adj.  glorious. 

®lnd,  n.  -feS.  luck,  fortune;  good 
fortune,  happiness. 

glutfen,  intr.  \  or  ^.  {impers. 
with  dat.)  turn  out  well,  suc- 
ceed. 


414 


GEKMAN-ENGLISS 


glitrfU^,    «(?/.    {or   adv.)    happy, 

fortunate. 
fllurffclig,    adj.     highly    blessed, 

bUssful. 
©ntttC,   /.    -en.     grace,     favor, 

mercy. 
gniibig,    adj.   {or   adv.)  gracious, 

propitious. 
@oftl,  n.  -beg.  gold. 
golbcn,  adj.  golden. 
goH)i9,  adj.  golden. 
©Oltlfi^mieb,  m.  goldsmith. 
©Olbflttrf,  n.  gold-piece. 
0Onnen,  tr.   grant  willingly,   not 


@Ott,  rn.  -tteg,  -otter,  god;  God. 

0OttU^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  god-like,  di- 
vine. 

@d^e,  w.  -en,  -en.  idol,  false 
god. 

graven,  0.  tr.  dig. 

©tttf ,  m.  -fen,  -fen.  count,  earl. 

©riifln,  /.  sinncn.  countess. 

©ram,  m.  -meg.  grief,  sorrow, 
dislike. 

griifeli^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  horrible, 
ghastly. 

grauen,  intr.  {impers.  with  dai.) 
cause  horror,  fill  with  dread, 
make  to  shudder. 

graufen,  i^r.  {impers.  wUh  dat.) 
excite  horror  in,  horrify. 

grcifen,  0.  tr.  gripe,  grasp, 
seize. 

@rci0,  m.  -fe8,  -fe.  old  man. 

©rcn^C,  /.  -sen.   boundary,  limit. 

©rcnjjicin,  wi.  boundary  stone. 

©reuci,  m.  -Ig,  -t.  horror,  outrage. 

grimmig,  a,dj.  {or  adv.)  wrathful, 
furious,  fierce. 

gtofe,  adj.  {or  adv.)  great,  large, 
big,  huge,  tall;  eminent,  grand. 

©ruft,  /.  -iiftc.  cave,  hollow;  se- 
pulchre, tomb. 

gtttJl/  adj.  (or  adv.)  green. 


©riin,  n.  -ncg.  green  color,  green, 
ness,  verdure. 

©runtJ,  rn.  -beg,  -iinbe.  ground, 
bottom;  grounds,  reason,  cause. 
Jtt  —  gC^Cn,  go  to  destruction. 

gtunticn,  tr.  lay  the  foundation  of, 
found,  establish. 

griinblitt),  adj.  {or  adv.)  deep,  thor- 
ough. 

©riintlttng,  /.  foundation. 

©rufe,m.  -feeg,-iiBe.  greeting,  sal- 
utation. 

grit^en,  tr.  greet,  salute;  bow  to. 

©uliieit,  m.  -ng,  -n.  florin  (coin  of 
various  values). 

®m%f.  favor,  grace,  goodwill 

gitnfiig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  favorable. 

©unfiling,  m.  -gg,  -ge.  favorite. 

gut,  adj.  {or  adv.)  good,  proper; 
kind.    adv.  well. 

®ni,  n.  -teg,  -liter,  property,  pos- 
session, goods;  estate. 

^aar,  w.-reg,  -re,  hair  {used  coUec- 

tively  or  singly). 
l^ubcn,  {irreg.)  tr.  have,  possess;  as 

avx'y,  have,    gem  — ,  like. 

niitftig  [niitlg]  — ,  need,  want. 
l^ab^aft,  adj.   having  possession, 

with  gen.  and  ttierben,  get  pos- 
session of. 
^afcr,  rn.  -rg.  oats. 
^a^n,  rn.  -ncg,  -nen   or  -dt)ne. 

cock. 
I^ttlft,  adj.  half.  adv.  half,  by  halves. 

sjtoet,  etc.  half  past  one,  etc. 
l^ttlfecr  or  sben,  prep,  {with  gen.)  on 

account  of,  for  the  sake  of. 
§alfte,  /.  -en.  half. 
§tt«e,  /.  -Hen.  hall. 
§ttl0,  rn.  -feg,  -olfe.  neck ;  throat. 

sbanti,  ri.  necklace. 
^ttlt,  rn.  -teg,  -te.  hold;  halt,  stop. 
I^alten,  0.  tr.  hold,  keep,  retain; 

contain;  esteem,  think. 


VOCABtJLAET. 


its 


§ttlttl,  J-  -cinbe.  hand. 

l^anbeln,  intr.  act,  behave;  trade, 
carry  on  commerce,  mit  CttDdl 
— ,  deal  in  something, 

^aniltoerf^  n.  handicraft,  trade. 

I^angen^  0.  intr.  hang,  depend. 

j^dngettf  i'"'-  cause  to  hang,  sus- 
pend. 

^(ltl§,  infh.  -fen§.  Hans,  Jack. 

partner,  w. -r«,  r.  harper. 

^ttrm,  m.  -meg.  harm,  hurt,  in- 
jury; sorrow,  grief. 

l^atten,  intr.  wait,  Hnger  in  expec- 
tation. 

5 art,  ci'dj.  (or  adv.)  hard;  stiff. 
sltacftg,  adj.  stiff-necked. 

^tt^,  m.  -[[e§.   hatred,  enmity. 

P§n^,  «(??■.  (or  adv.)  ugly,  hateful. 

l^a^ig,  adj.  (or  adv.)  hasty,  hurried. 

^ttUfe,  m.  -fee,  -fen.  heap,  pile; 
mass,  company  of  people. 

^ttU|lt,  n.  -te§,  -aupter.  head; 
chief,  leader. 

^auB,  n.  -feg,  -aitfer.  house,  ju 
>^aufe,  at  the  house,  at  home. 
not^  ^(iU\t,  to  home,  home. 

^ttU0frttU,  /.  housewife. 

l^eben,  0.  tr.  heave,  lift,  move. 

^eer^  n.  -re§,  -re.  host,  army. 

^CCrtJC,  /.  -ben.  herd,  flock. 

l^efttg^  adj.  {or  adv.)  vehement,  vio- 
lent, impetuous. 

^Cftigtcit,  /.  vehemence,  impetu- 
osity. 

^eil,  n.  -te6.  health,  prosperity;  as 
exclamation,  hail! 

^eitcn,  tr.  heal,  cure. 

f^tiii^fOdj.  {or adv.)  holy,  sacred. 

I^etligen,  tr.  hallow,  make  or  keep 
sacred  or  holy. 

^Cimot^  [sttt],  -t^en.  /.  home. 

I&cimfommen,  0.  intr.  f.  come 
home. 

i^etmlic^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  private;  se- 
cret 


^Cinri^,  m.  -cf)6.  Henry. 

l^cife,  adj.  {or  adv.)  hot. 

I^eiten,  0.  tr.  bid,  command;  call, 
name,  intr.  be  called  or  named^ 
mean,  signify. 

fitiitV,  odj.  {or  adv.)  clear,  bright, 
cheerful. 

%t\ts,  rn.  -ben,  -ben.  hero. 

iclbcngrofec, /.  heroic  greatness. 
sfinn,  wi-  heroism. 

^Clbin,  /.  sinncn.   heroine. 

l^elfen,  0.  intr.  {with  dat.)  help, 
aid,  assist. 

l^ett,  adj.  {or  adv.)  {of  sound)  clear, 
distinct;  {of  light  or  color)  light, 
clear,  bright. 

^Cttgfi,  wi.  -te§,  -te.  stallion, 
steed, 

^enfer,  m.  -rg,  -r.  hangman,  exe- 
cutioner. 

j^Cr,  ddv.  and  sepHe  prefix,  hither, 
this  way,  toward  the  speaker  or 
the  point  had  in  view  or  con- 
ceived {opposite  of  llin,  hence). 
ttttl .  .  •  ||Ct,  round  about. 

l^eraB^  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  down 
hither,  down. 

I^etan,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  on 
hither,  near. 

^Cranfommcn,  0.  intr.  \.  come  on 
or  near,  approach. 

^erau^,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  out 
hither,  out.  • 

ftcraugfttflen,  O.  intr.  f.   fall  out. 

^CtttU^flntlcn,  0.  tr.  find  out.  re- 
flex, find  one's  way  out,  stand 
forth. 

l^erBet,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  near 
by  hither,  this  way. 

§Ctbfi,  rn.  -teg,  -te.   autumn,  fall. 

I&erein,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  in 
hither,  inward  (toward  the 
speaker). 

^ercinfuftrcn,  tr.  lead  in. 

^crcinfommcn,  0.  intr.  f.  come  in. 


416 


GEEMAN-ENGLISH 


Herntetiet,  ctdv.  and  seple  prefix. 
down  hither,  downward,  from 
above. 

^ttoB,  m.  -g,  -oen.  hero. 

^crr,  rn.  (-rren  or)  -xxn,  -rrcn  {or 
-rrn).  master,  lord;  gentleman; 
{in  address)  sir;  {before  a  name) 
Mr.  Ijcr  ^Crr,  the  Lord,  ^ctts 
gott,  in.  the  Lord  God. 

^Crrf^ttft,  /.  -ten.  lordship,  do- 
minion; master  and  mistress, 
employers;  person  or  persons 
of  rank. 

^crrfc^cr,  m.  -r8,  -r.  ruler,  lord. 

l^etitbct,  adv.  and  sepUe  prefix,  over 
hither,  to  this  side. 

I^erutn,  ado.  and  sq)le prefix,  round 
about,  around. 

lerunter,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix. 
down  hither. 

I^erdor,  odv.  and  seple  prefix,  forth 
or  forward  hither,  forward, 
forth,  out. 

lemorftrtngen,  {irreg.)  tr.  bring 
forth  or  out. 

l^crdortogctt,  intr.  jut  forth,  pro- 
ject. 

^etj,  n.  -genS,  -gen.  heart;  cou- 
rage, spirit. 

l&crjUt^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  hearty,  cor- 
dial. 

^crjog,  m.  -g§,  -oge.  duke. 

I^euttg,  adj.  {or  adv.)  of  today; 
modern. 

l^icr,  adv.  here,  in  this  place. 

lier^er,  adv.  hither,  to  here. 

^ilfc,  same  as  ^itlfe. 

^immcl,  m.  -18,  -(.  heaven,  sky, 
heavens. 

l^tmmltf^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  heavenly, 
celestial. 

5ill,  adv.  and  sepHe  prefix,  hence, 
that  way,  away  from  the 
speaker  or  point  had  in  view 
or  conceived  (ppposUe  to  f^tt, 


hither);  sometimes  simply  along; 

gone,  lost,  too  —  l^tn,  whither. 

—  fcitt,  be  gone  or  away  or  lost. 
fiinah,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  down 

thither,  down. 
l^tnauf,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,   up 

thither,  upward. 
^inaufftral^len,   intr.  shine  up  or 

out. 
I|tnau0,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,   out 

hence  or  thither,  forth. 
^inttU06cgcben,   0.   reflex,    betake 

one's  self  away,  go  forth. 
lirtttUlgC^cn,  0.  intr.  [.    go  out  or 

forth. 
]^ittttU§3tel|en,  0.  tr.  pull  out.  intr. 

f,  march  out. 
l^inDern,  tr.  hinder,  prevent. 
I^inein,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,    in 

thither,  in. 
lincingc^cn,  0.    intr.   f.     go  in 

thither. 
|itteinf(^toinbcln,  reflex,    cheat  or 

swindle  one's  self  in,  get  in  by 

cheating. 
l^ingellen,  0.  intr.  f.   go  there  or 

away;  pass  on,  elapse. 
I^tttl^or^en,  tr.  listen. 
|infommen,0.  Mr.f.  come  forth  or 

away,    get    (to    somewhere    or 

something). 
l^tnlegen,  tr.  lay  away  or  down. 
JinnCtt,  adv.  hence. 
I^tnftttfen,  0.  intr.  f.   sink  down. 
itnftreifen,  tr.  stretch,  extend. 
l^tntet/  adj.  hinder,  back.  adv.  and 

sep'le  prefix,  behind,  back,  in  the 

rear. 
^VXXi\stX,adv.  and  sepHe  prefix,  over 

thither,   over  (from  this  side), 

across. 
I^iniibcrlttufcn,   0.    intr.   f.    run 

across. 
fiinnnitX^adv.aridsep'le  prefix.down 

hence,  down  thilier,  down. 


VOCABtJLAEY. 


411 


^tntoerfen,  0.  tr.  throw  away  or 
down.  ^tngchJOrfcn,  casually 
thrown  out,  chance. 

^ixi,  m.  -ten,  -ten.  shepherd. 

fot^,  ctdj.  (as  declined,  ^o^er,  etc.) 
high,  tall,  lofty,  great. 

^od)mut$  [smut],  »^-  arrogance, 
pride. 

^Ot^toertttt^  [stttt]/m.  high  trea- 
son. 

1^  off  en,  tr.  hope,  expect,  look 
for. 

^Offnung,  /.  -gen.  hope,  expecta- 
tion. 

§i)fli(^fcit,/.  courtesy,  politeness. 

^Oft^iit,/.  door  of  the  courtyard. 

1^0^,  see  ^0^. 

I^dl^nen,  tr,  scorn,  scoff  at. 

ioliJ,  o^j'  {or  adv.)  favorable, 
propitious,  gracious  ;  pleasing, 
lovely. 

I&olen,  tr.  fetch,  bring. 

^oUc,  /.  -en.  hell. 

^ottengei^,  fn.  infernal  spirit. 

§ol5,  n.  -geg,  -ge  or  -otjer.  wood, 
timber. 

I^Ot^en,  irdr.  hearken,  listen;  tr. 
give  ear  to,  hsten  to. 

§OtbC,/.  -ben.  horde,  troop. 

pren,  intr.  or  tr.  hear,  give  ear  to; 
hearken. 

J&iiBfd),  adj.  {or  adv.)  pretty. 

I^ulbigen,  intr.  {withdat.)  pay  hom- 
age to. 

^itlf  e,  /•  helpy-  aid,  assistance. 

^iilfclciflung,  /.  rendering  of 
help. 

I&ulftcit^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  helpful. 

^umor,  rn.  -r^.  humor. 

^untl,  rn.  -be^,  -be.   dog. 

^Untert,  num.  hundred, 

hunger,  w.  -r^.  hunger,  appetite. 

I^ungern,  intr.  (or  tr.  impers.)  hun- 
ger, be  hungry. 

gut,  rn,  -te«,  -iite.  hat. 


I^itten,  tr.  {rardy  intr,  with  gen.) 

have  heed,  watch,    r^ex.  guard 

one's  self,  beware. 
filter,    wi-    -r8,    -r.     guardian, 

keeper. 
giittc,  /.  -ten.  cottage,  hut;  tent, 

tabernacle. 

tc^,  pron.  I. 

^tCC,  /.  -cen.  idea,  notion,  con- 
ception. 

t^r,  1.  nom.  plu.  of  Iju,  ye,  they. 
2.  dai.  sing,  of  fit,  fern,  to  her  or 
it.  3.  poss.  adj.  {for  Sdpers.  sing, 
fern.)  her  or  its.  4.  poss.  adj.  {for 
Sdpers.  plu.)  their;  ^^X,  (in  ad- 
dress) your. 

tl^tig,  poss.  pron,  her,  its;  theirs, 
^^rtg,  your. 

im  =  in  iicm. 

immct,  odv.  ever,  always,  continu- 
ally; yet,  still. 

in,  prep,  {with  dat.  or  accus.)  in, 
into,  to,  at,  within. 

inbem,  conj.  in  or  during  that, 
while. 

intlC^  or  sffcn,  adv.  meanwhile 
conj.  while. 

innct,  odj'  inner,  interior;  as  neu- 
ter nouny  inner  self,  heart. 

inncr^alfi,  prep,  (with  gen.)  inside 
of. 

^nfcl,  /.  -tn.  isle,  island. 

intntefern,  conj.  as  far  as. 

ittlif (^,  ctdj-  {or  €idv.)  earthly,  mor- 
tal. 

ttgenti,  odv.  ever,  soever. 

^rrtftum  [stum],  m.  -m«,-iimer. 
error,  mistake. 

^taticn,  n.  -ng.  Italy. 

^tttUf net,  m.  -rg,  -r.  Italian. 

jtt,  part,  of  assent,  yea,  yes. 
^agb,  /.  -ben.  chase,  hunt;  hunt- 
ing party. 


418 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


jftgen,  intr.  f  or  1^.  huiit,  chase. 
tr.  hunt. 

^tt^r,  n.  -reg,  -re.  year,  if^mtitxi, 
n.  century. 

Sttl^rcSjeit/.  -ten.  season. 

3jimmer,  m.  -r8,  -r.  sorrow,  grie^ 
misery,  lamentation. 

SanUttt,  m.  -r«.  January. 

\t,  adv.  always,  ever,  jc  ...  |C  or 
JC  .  •  .  bcfto,  {before  compara- 
tives) so  much  the . . .  or  the . . . 
the. 

iel>  (jeber,  jebe,  jebeS),  pron.  each, 
every,  either,  see  190. 

ietertnann,  m.  every  man,  every 
one. 

jjebeiSinal,  adv.  each  time,  every 
time. 

ittio6i,adv,  however,  notwithstand- 
ing, yet. 

fCfiKd),  pron.  every,  each,  see  190. 

je^cr  (je  ever  and  ^cr  hither),  Hon 
jel^er^  from  always  to  here  or 
now,  always. 

.^etnanb,  pron.  some  or  any  one, 
somebody. 

jcn  (jener,  jene,  jene8),  pron.  yon, 
yonder,  that,  the  former,  see 
163. 

jenfcitS,  prep,  (with  gen.)  on  the 
other  side  of,  beyond. 

fc^t,  a(^u.  at  the  present  time, 
now. 

^iO^anntt,  /.  Jane,  Joan. 

^uie,  m.  -en,  -en.  Jew. 

^itDin,  /.  -inn  en.  Jewess. 

Nugent),  /.  youth,  time  of  youth; 
young  people,  youth,  sfreuitttn, 
/.  friend  of  youth,  sfrfjcin,  m. 
light  of  youth. 

3ul!,  m.  -m.  July,  srcuolution,/. 
l-evolution  of  July  (1830). 

Suni,  m.  -ni«.  June. 

jun0  CM??.  ;or  a(iu.)  young,  youth- 
ful :  new,  recent. 


^ungc,  m.  -eng,  -en.  young  one, 

youth,  stripling. 
^iittgUng^m.-gg^-ge.  young  man, 
3'^outh. 

^ttffce,  m.  -ee6.  coflfee. 

^aifcr,  m.  -r«,  -r.    emperor,  slog, 

a(^".    emperorless,    without    an 

emperor. 
^ttlf,  m.  -!e§,  -fe.  lime,  chalk. 
fttit  adj.  (or  adv.)  cold,  frigid. 
^amerab,  fn.  -bs  or  -ben,  -ben. 

comrade,  companion. 
^ttmtll,  m.   -ne8,  -ne.    chimney, 

fireplace. 
hammer,  /.  -rn.   chamber,  room. 

s^tXt,  ni.  chamberlain. 
^ttm^f,  m.  -pfeg,  -ampfe.   fight, 

contest,  struggle,  battle. 
fttmUfcn,  intr.  fight,  struggle. 
^ttlinc,   /.    -nen.    can,   tankard, 

pot. 
^a^itel,  n.  -1§,  -t.   chapter. 
Stttt,  rn.  -Ig.   Charles. 
^ttrtcnfllicl,  n.  game  of  cards,  card 

playing. 
^ttrtoffcl,  /.  -In.  potato. 
^aitx,  wi.  -rS,  -r.  tom-cat 
^ttuf,  m.  -fe^,  -ciufe.  purchase,  bar- 
gain. 
faufcn,  tr.  buy,  purchase. 
^ttuflcute,  see  ^ttufmann. 
^ttUfmttnn,m.  -nne§  (rarefy -anner, 

generally  ^anffeute).    merchant, 

tradesman. 
tanm,  adv.  hardly,   scarcely,  but 

just. 
^e^lc/.-Ien.  throat. 
ttimtn,intr.  germinate,  shoot  forth, 

develop. 
fctn,  pron.  no,  not  one,  not  any, 

no  one.  see  195,2. 
better,  rn.  -r§,  -r.  cellar. 
fcitncn,  (irreg.)  tr.  know,  be  ac- 
quainted with. 


TOCABULAET. 


419 


tenner,  tn.  -X^,  -r.  knower,  con- 
noisseur. 

^Crfer,  wi.  -r^,  -r.  prison,  jail,  dun- 
geon. 

^ttU,  /.  -ten.  chain,  fetter, 
bond. 

^tnil,  n.  -beS,  -ber.  child. 

^ittbletn,  n.  -nS,  -lu  little  child. 

^ir^C,  /.  -d)en.  church. 

^i^t,f'  -ten.  chest. 

tlagcn,  intr.  or  tr.  mourn,  bewail, 
lament,  complain. 

^(ang,  m.  -ge§,  -ange.  sound, 
ringing,  clang. 

fJttt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  clear,  bright, 
fair;  evident. 

^lar|ett,  /.  clearness,  brightness. 

^\t\tSp  n.  -be^,  -ber.  garment,  arti- 
cle of  clothing,  dress,  raiment. 

fleitt,  (idj.  {or  adv.)  little,  small;  in- 
significant, petty. 

^Ictnigfcit,  /.  -ten.  trifle. 

^leinoti^  n.  -be§,  -bicn  {or  -be), 
ornamental  or  precious  thing; 
jewel. 

fling  ein,  intr.  tinkle,  ring  the  bell. 

flo|)fen,  intr.  beat,  knock. 

^(ofter,  n.  -r@,  -lifter,  cloister, 
monastery,  convent. 

Hug,  adj.  {or  adv.)  prudent, 
shrewd,  sagacious,  clever. 

^nak,  m.  -ben,  -ben.  boy. 

ftnCJ^t,  m.  -te§,  -te.  servant,  vas- 
sal. 

^nic,  n.  -e8,  -c.   knee. 

fniecn,  intr.  kneel. 

fo^en,  tr.  or  intr.  cook,  boil. 

Coffer,  rn.  -X9,  -r.   coffer,  trunk. 

^0ffctd)en,  n.  -m,  -n.  little  trunk. 

fibin  {or  (Siitn),  n.  -n«.  Cologne. 

^ommonbttnt,  i^-  -  ten,  -ten.  com- 
mander. 

(ommen,  0.  intr.  f.  come,  ap- 
proach, arrive ;  occur,  come 
about. 


^ombbic,/.  -{en.  comedy,  sf^itelett, 

n.  comedy-acting. 

^bmg,m.  -gg,  -ge.  king. 

^bmgin,/. -innen.  queen. 

fbniglil^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  kingly, 
royal. 

^bntgret^,  71.  kingdom,  realm. 

fbnnett,  {irreg.)  tr.  can,  be  able, 
have  power;  he  permitted;  know, 
understand,  see  251,  254. 

^O^lf,  rn.  -fe§,  -bpfe.  head. 

^oxh,  in.  -be§,  -brbe.  basket. 

^br^ICr,  rn.  -r§,  -r.  body ;  sub- 
stance; corpse. 

fofibar,  adj.  {or  adv.)  costly. 

fojien,  tr.  cost. 

fbftUc^,  adj.  or  adv.  costly,  pre- 
cious; delightful,  delicious. 

ftd^Clt,  intr.  crack,  crash. 

^tttft  /•  -Cifte.  strength,  vigor; 
power,  force, 

frdftig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  strong,  vigor- 
ous, powerful,  mighty. 

fttt^cn,  intr.  crow. 

ixmt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  ill,  sick,  dis- 
eased, as  noun,  sick  person,  in- 
valid. 

^tttnfcnktt,  n.  sick-bed. 

^ranf^cit,  /.  -ten.  illness,  sick- 
ness, disease. 

^xant,  n.  -teg,  -autcr.   herb. 

^retlittti,  n.  -ties,  -t)e.  credentials. 

^Xti§,  m.  -feg,  -je.  circle. 

^rCUJ,  n.  -geS,  -ge.  cross,  crucifix. 
sjUg,  rn.  crasade. 

BxtU^CX,rn.  -r8,  -r.  kreuzer  (small 
coin). 

freu^tgeit,  tr.  crucify,  pple  as  noun, 
the  crucified  one. 

Wcg,  m.  -geS,  -ge.  war,  ^tiegcg^ 
t(jttt,  /.  deed  of  war, 

l^rofobil,  n.  {or  m.)  -leg,  -le.  croco- 
dile. 

^rone,  /.  -nen.  crown. 

^ru|J|JCl,  rn.  -Ig,  -I  cripple. 


420 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


^utf)C,  /.  -d^en.   kitchen. 

^Htl  f.  -In.  ball,  bullet. 

ful^r,  adj.  {or  adv.)  cool. 

fu|n,  adj.  (or  adv.)  bold,  daring, 
intrepid. 

^ultUt/  /.  culture,  civilization. 

tUttintCtlt,  tf.  grieve,  trouble,  con- 
cern, reflex,  concern  one's  self, 
care. 

jfitnfttg,  adj.  (or  adv.)  to  come,  fu- 
ture. 

^Unft,  /.  -iinfte.  art,  skill;  art  (as 
distinguished  from  science). 
sf^ulc,  /.  art-school.  ^ 

fiunftlcr,  m.  -rg,  -r.  artist. 

^Ur,/.  -ren.  choice,  election;  right 
of  electing,  sfiirft,  m.  Elector 
(i.  €.  one  of  the  princes  formerly 
entrusted  with  the  election  of 
the  German  emperor),  sfiirftcits 
t^Um  [stum],  n.  electorate  (ter- 
ritory of  an  Elector). 

fnX],  adj.  {or  adv.)  short,  brief. 

fuffen,  tr.  kiss. 

^iiftc,  /.  -ten,  coast,  shore. 

^Utf^Cr,  m.  -x^,  -v.  coachman, 
driver. 

iSaBfal,  n.  -leS,  -le.  refreshment, 
comfort. 

lad^en,  intr.  {rardywith  gren.)  laugh, 
laugh  at. 

la^erlit^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  laughable, 
ridiculous. 

Satien,  m.  -n^,  -n  or  -ciben.  shop, 
staU;  shutter. 

fittge,  /•  -en.    situation,  position. 

Ha^tX,  n.  -V^,  -V.  couch,  sickbed; 
fig.  sickness ;  camp,  encamp- 
ment. 

fittnti,  n.  -be§,  -be  or  -an^ev.  land, 
ground;  territory,  region,  coun- 
try; country  (as  distinguished 
from  city),  auf  tcttl  gatltlC,  in 
the  country,  agut,  n.  country- 


place,  sfirerfe,  /•  stretch  of  land, 

region.     gttniJcStJcrtuetfung,  /. 

banishment. 

1.  Itttig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  long,  ex- 
tended, protracted;  high,  tall. 

2.  lanjj  {or  longc),  adv.  long,  a 
long  while;  by  far,  see  230.1a. 

Sangenol^ren,  m.  a  long-eared  one. 
langetuetien   {or  langtucilen),  tr, 

bore,  tire,  reflex,  be  bored. 

Idng0,  prep,  {with  dat,  or  gen.) 
along,  see  373a. 

longfam,  adj.  (or  adv.)  slow. 

Ittngji,  adv.  very  long  (already), 
long  since,  a  great  while  ago. 

Ittffcn,  0.  tr.  let  alone,  leave;  let, 
permit,  allow,  suffer;  {often  with 
another  verb  in  infin. )  cause,  make, 
effect,  bring  about,  have;  in  im- 
perative, let.  e0  liifet  fl^,  it  can 
be;  it  may  be,  it  is  possible,  see 
343.5d 

SttUf,  inn.  -\t^,  -cinfe.  course,  career. 

laufen,  0.  intr.  \or  ]).  run,  move 
rapidly. 

Saunc,/.  -ncn.  humor,  mood,  tem- 
per. 

Ittttt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  loud,  aloud. 

SttUt,  ini.  -teg,  -te.  sound,  tone. 

leBen,  intr.  live,  exist;  dwell. 

fickn,  n.  -ng,  -n.  life,  hving;  an- 
imation. 

gcBctt^gliilf,  n.  happiness  of  Ufa. 

gekng|ifli(t)t  /•  duty  of  life. 

lebentlig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  living,  alive. 

leb^aft,  adj.  (or  adv.)  Uvely,  viva- 
cious. 

\t^^tn,intr.  be  parched  with  thirst, 
pant. 

Iccr,  adj.  (or  adv.)  empty,  vacant; 
vain. 

Icgcn,  tr.  lay,  put  down,  place. 
refl  X.  lay  one's  self  down. 

le^ncn,  tr.  or  intr.  lean,  incline, 
rest. 


VOCABUIARY. 


421 


Sel^nfiu'^T,  m.  easy  chair,  arm-cliair. 

fUt^Xt,  /.  -ren.  doctrine,  teaching; 
theory;  apprenticeship. 

lel^ren,  tr,  teach,  instruct. 

ficl^tcr,  w^-  -r8,  -r.   teacher. 

fiei6,  rn.  -be§,  -ber.  body;  waist. 

Ici^t,  adj.  {or  adv.)  light,  easy. 

itlh,  adj.  {ojily  predicatively)  disa- 
greeable, painful.  tSi^uimix—, 
I  am  sorry,  I  regret. 

fieib,  w.  -beg.  harm,  hurt,  pain; 
sorrow. 

leiben,  0.  tr.  suffer,  endure,  bear; 
intr.  suffer,  as  noun,  suffering, 
misfortune. 

8cii>enftl)ttft,  /.  -ten.  passion. 
leitietf  interjectional  adv.  alas,  un- 
fortunately. 
Ict^cn,  0.  tr.  lend. 
Icifc,  cidj-  (or  adv.)  not  loud,  soft, 

low,  gentle. 
lenfen,  tr.  (or  intr.)  turn  or  bend 

in  a  desired  direction,   direct, 

manage,  influence. 
lernen,  tr.  (or  intr.)  learn. 
lefcn,  0.  tr.  read. 
Ic^t,   odj.   (or   adv.)  last,   latest, 

final. 
leu^ten,  intr.    shine,    give  light, 

beam. 
Scute,  pi  people,  folks. 
fiil^t,  n.  -m,  -ter  or  -tc.   light, 

brightness;  candle. 
licb,  odj.  (or  adv.)  dear,  beloved; 

attractive,   pleashnt.    —  ^abett, 

hold    dear,    love.     —   fcin,  be 

agi*eeable  or  pleasant  (to  some 

one). 
fiieftt^cn,  n.  -n§,  -n.    little  love, 

darling,  sweetheart. 
fiic6e,  /.  love. 
lithtn,  tr.  love. 
lieber,  (idv.  rather,  sooner,  more 

willingly. 
fiict>#  n.  -be«,  -bsr.   song,  lay. 


Hcgen,  0.  intr.  ^  or  f.  lie. 

fiilte,  /.  -ieu.  lily. 

fiiniJC,  /.  -ben.  linden,  lime- 
tree. 

lint  adj.  left. 

linU,  adv.  to  the  left. 

CiH^C,  /.  -pen.  lip. 

8ob,  n.  -be§.  praise.  stcJittcrin,  /. 
praiser,  panegyrist. 

\ohtn,  tr.  praise,  commend;  pro- 
mise. 

Cot^,  n.  -d)e§,  -ocl)er.  hole;  dun- 
geon.   • 

Siiffcl,  m.  -%  -t  spoon. 

(O^ncn,  tr.  reward,  recompense. 

SOO0,  n.  -feS,  -fe.  lot;  destiny. 

Io0,  CK^.  (or  adu.)  loose,  released, 
set  free;  with  fcin  or  luerbeu, 
governing  accus.  loose  from,  rid 
of.  as  sepHe  prefix  to  verbs,  loose, 
free. 

SbfegcliJ,  n.  ransom. 

lb  fen,  tr.  set  loose,  loosen. 

lo^geben,  0.  tr.  set  loose  or  free, 
release. 

loSma^en,  tr.  make  loose,  loosen; 
disengage. 

lolrct^Cn,  0.  tr.  tear  loose,  tear 
away. 

l0i§f|)rc^cn,  0.  tr.  declare  free,  re- 
lease; acquit,  absolve. 

iiot^  [got],  n.  -tf)e§,  -tf)e.  lead; 
half  an  ounce. 

SottJC,  m.  -en,  -en.  lion.  gbttJCm 
ficgcr,  wi-  lion-conquerer. 

IJuft,  Z'.  -iifte.   air;  breeze,  breath. 

(itgen,  0.  intr.  lie,  speak  falsely. 

Suflp  /.  -iifte.  pleasure,  delight; 
inclination,  fancy.  —  |aben, 
have  desire,  like. 

Ittfltg,  adj.  {or  adv.)  merry,  gay; 
amusing. 

ma^en,  tr.  make,  produce;  cause; 
do,  perform. 


422 


GEKMAN-ENGUSH 


9Jlttt^t,  /.  -a6)it,    miglit,   power, 

force. 
mii^tig,  adj.    {or   adv.)    mighty, 

powerful,  (loith  gen.)  capable  of. 
SRiitl^en,  n.  -n§,  -ll,  girl,  maiden. 
SKttgb,  /.  -agbe.   maid,  maiden. 
aUtti,  m.  -aieS.  May. 
Pttilanil,  n.  -b8.  Milan. 
9Kttinj,  n.  -jeg.  Mayence  (city). 
Pajept,     /.     -ten.       majesty, 

Majesty. 
WlayoXf  rn.  -xi,  -re.  major. 
SWttI,  n.  -leg,  -te  or  -filer,    token, 

sign,  mask;  point  of  time,  time, 

turn. 
malen,  tr.  paint. 
Wt^XtX,    in.    -r8,    -r.       painter, 

artist. 
man,   indef.    pron.   one,    people, 

they,  see  185. 
mattt^,  indef,  pron. ,  in  sing,  many 

a,  many  a  one;  in  pi.  many,  see 

191. 
mant^txlti,adj.  inded.  {or  adv.)  of 

various  sorts,  diverse,  in  many 

ways. 
mttn^mal,     adv.     many     times, 

often. 
Wtaniif  m.  -nne6,  -firmer,    man; 

husband. 
Wdnntx^tWU  f-     figure    of   a 

man. 
SWttltfttrilC,/.  -ben.  mansard  (curb- 
roof). 
Maxt,f-  -!en.  mark  (a  coin,  worth 

about  25  cts). 
aWtttft,  m.  -teg,  -orfte.    market, 

market-place. 
marft^icrcn,  intr.  march. 
Tlaxitxtoti,  m.  death  by  torture. 
Sflarj,  m.  -geg.  March. 
^aUxn,pl  measles. 
3Ktt^,    n.    -^eg,    -^e.      measure; 

standard,  scale,  proportion. 
mdfftt),  adj.  {or  adv.)  massive. 


SWaucr,  /.  -rn.    wall,  sftcln,  m, 

stone  for  building. 
9RaU0,  /.  -fiufe.  mouse. 
2Rcbttittc,  /.  -en.  medal. 
9Kcet,  n.  -reg,  -re.  ocean,  sea. 
mcl^r,  adj.  {or  adv.)  more,  generally 

indeclinable,  but  pi.  nte^re  or  me^s 

rere,    more  than  one,    several. 

after  negative,  any  longer. 
Sfleile,  /.  -len.  mile,    (a  German 

mile    equals    nearly    5    English 

miles). 
mtin,  poss.  adj.  my,  mine. 
mttnctt,  tr.  or  intr.  think,  suppose; 

mean,  signify. 
mcinig,  poss.  pron.  my,  mine. 
SJlcinuilfl,  /.  -gen.  opinion. 
mcijl,  (idj.  most,   adv.  mostly,  for 

the  most  part.    oni  -Cll,  most, 

above  all  others. 
3!lcificr,  «*.  -rg,  -r.   master,  chief, 

leader. 
meltiett,  tr.  mention,  notify,  an- 
nounce. 
SUcngC, /.  -en.  multitude,  crowd. 
9Rcnf(^,  m.  -fcfjen,   -fd^en.    man, 

person,  human  being. 
9Rcnf(^cn:  sgef^lcdjt,  n.   human 

race,     sl^crj,  n.    human    heart. 

Aithe,  /.  philanthropy,  sfeele,  /. 

human  soul,  sfiimme,  /.  human 

voice. 
a^cnfl^ftcit,  /.  humanity. 
mcrfcn,    tr.   mark,   stamp;   note, 

perceive,  observe. 
mcffcn,  0.  tr.  measure. 
SWcffct,  n.  -r§,  -r.  knife. 
meuMiren  [sieren],  tr.  furnish. 
SUtene,  /.  -  en.    mien,  expression 

of  face,  air,  look.  —  ma^ett,  put 

on  a  look, 
mict^en  [4tn],  tr.  hire,  rent 
anU^,  /.  milk. 
mill*  (or  mitbc)  adj.  {or  adv.)  mild, 

meek,  gentle;  benevolent 


VOCAB0LABY. 


423 


9Rtlbc,  /.  gentleness,  mercy. 

5!Jinion,  /.  -neu.  million. 

9Winiftcr,  m.  -i-g,  -r.   minister. 

ailinutc,  /.  "ten.  minute. 

mi^faUen,  0.  Mr.  {vMh  dat.)  dis- 
please. 

mit,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  along, 
along  with;  at  the  same  time; 
likewise,  also.  prep,  (with  dat.) 
with,  along  with,  by. 

mitBrtngen^  {irreg.)  tr.  bring  along 
(with  one),  come  bringing. 

SKitfiurger,  w^.  fellow  citizen. 

mitgcftcn,  0.  intr.  f.  go  along,  go 
too. 

mitma^en,  tr.  join  in  making  or 
doing. 

mitne^mcn,  0.  tr.  take  along  with 
one. 

mitftngcn,  0.  intr.  join  in  sing- 
ing, sing  too  or  with  others. 

SKittag,  m.  -g§,  -ge.  midday, 
noon. 

Sfltttag0effen,  n.  midday-meal, 
dinner. 

mutt,  /.  middle,  midst. 

S!ttttet  n-  -%  ~t  middle;  means, 
instrument. 

mitten,  adv.  (followed  by  prep.) 
midway,  in  the  midst. 

mtttl^etlen  [stcilcn],  tr.  communi- 
cate, impart. 

aHitttUOi^,  m.  -6)^,  -d)e.  Wednes- 
day. 

SWitttJClt,  /.  one's  own  age  or  time, 
contemporaries. 

SRotie,  /.  -ben.  mode,  fashion. 

mogen,  (irreg.)  intr.  or  tr.  may, 
might,  be  permitted  or  allowed; 
like,  choose,  care,  desire,  see 
251,  255. 

9Konat,  m.  -t«,  -tc.  month. 

Monti,  m.  -be§,  -be.  moon. 

aWontttg,  m.  -g§,  -ge.  Monday. 
>,  m.  -beS,  -be.  murder. 


SWorgcn,  m.  ^itg,  -n.  mom,  morn- 
ing; east,  orient;  morrow. 
fian'O,  n.  the  East,  the  Orient. 
sjiunbC,  /.  morning-hour. 

Woxtti,  m.  -U,  -I  mortar. 

tnittie,  adj.  (or  adv.)  tired,  weary. 

Mn^t,  /.  -^en.  toil,  labor,  pains. 

SKumie,  /.  -en.  mummy. 

S^unb,  m.  -beg,  -be  or-iinbe  or 
-iinber.  mouth. 

muntcr,  adj.  (or  a<!i;.)  lively,  brisk, 
cheery,  gay. 

SJluftf, /. -!en.  music 

miiffcn,  (irreg.)  tr.  or  intr.  must,  be 
under  necessity  of,  be  compelled 
or  obliged,  be  unable  to  help, 
have  to,  cannot  but.  see  251, 
256. 

tnitfftg,  adj.  (or  adv.)  unemployed, 
idle,  sgang,  m.  idleness,  sloth. 
sgjingcr,  m.  idler. 

SRut^  mnt],  m.  -ttjea.  mood,  dis- 
position; courage,  spirit,  mettle. 

mut^ig  [mutig],  adj.  (or  adv.)  spir- 
ited, courageous,  daring. 

Wntttv,  /.  -iitter.  mother. 

miittcrU^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  motherly, 
maternal. 

Ittt^,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  atter, 
afterward,  behind;  in  accord- 
ance, conformably,  nad)  unb 
nod),  little  by  little;  nad)  ttJie  \)ov, 
afterwards  as  before,  still. 

prep,  (with  dat.)  after,  behind; 

according  to,  after   the   manner 

•  of;  for,  about;  at,  by;  with  names 

of  places,  to,  toward,  for.  —  often, 

upward,  etc. 

ntt^ttl^men,  intr.  (with  dat.)  or  tr. 
imitate,  copy. 

![Ra^ttftmnng,  /.  -gen.    imitation, 

mimicry. 
9laii\hav,  m.  -v8  or  -xn,  -rn.  neigh- 
bor. 


424: 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


9la^!ommc,  m.  -en,  -eit.  succes- 
sor, descendant. 

9la^loi  m.  -ffe6,  -affe.  thing  left 
behind,  residuum;  heritage. 

JWttt^mittttg,  m.  -g§,  -ge.  after- 
noon. 

JWtt^rit^t,  /.  -ten.  intelligence, 
news. 

mil^fllllTCIt,  inir.  (with  dat)  stare 
after. 

^tt^t,  /.  -ad^tc.  night,  sfcitc,  /. 
night  side,  dark  side. 

nac^tuetfen,  0.  tr.  point  out,  show, 
prove. 

9lat^toclt,  /.  after  world  or  age, 
posterity. 

tlfX^f  adj.  {with  dat.)  nigh,  near, 
close. 

9l(il^er  /.  nearness,  proximity, 
neighborhood. 

naletlt/  if.  bring  nearer,  reflex. 
draw  nigh,  approach;  resemble. 

niilrcn,  tr.  nourish,  support,  nii^s 
tcnb,  nourishing,  nutritive. 

9lrtmc    {or   scn),    m.     -m,    -n. 

name. 
9larr,  rn.  -rren,  -rren.  fool. 
Ittt^,  odj.  {or  adv.)  wet. 
9latton,  /.  -nen.  nation. 
9lainv,  /.  -ren.  nature. 
nthtn,  odv.  beside,  prep,  {with  dot. 

or  accus.)  beside,  by  the  side  of, 

by,  with;  along  with,  besides. 
9lcffe,  m.  -en,  -en.   nephew. 
ne|tnen,  0.  tr.    take,    seize;    take 

away;  receive,  accept. 
ttetgen,  tr.  bend,  bow.  reflex,  bow. 

9CttCi9t,incUned;  favorable,  well 

affectioned. 
JRcigUng,   /.    -gen,      inclination; 

affection,  attachment. 
tiein,  indecl.  no,  nay. 
filtitt,  /•  -!en.   pink,  carnation. 
tlCnncn,    {irreg.)  tr.     name,    caU; 

speak  oi 


9lerb,  m.  -ueg,  -t)e,  or  Jlctbe,  /. 
-tien.   nerve. 

nctt,  adj.  {or  adv.)  neat,  pretty, 
nice. 

neu,  adj.  {or  adv.)  new,  fresh,  un- 
used; recent,  modern. 

neugtertg,  adj.  {or  adv.)  curious. 

ncuglii^Cnil,  adj.  {or  adv.)  newly 
glowing. 

neutt,  num.  nine,  sjcl^tt,  nineteen. 
'-m  ninety. 

1li(^t,  indef.  pron.  naught,  nothing- 
ness. Q^v.not.  —  cinmtti,  not 
even,  no^  — ,  not  yet.   —  nut 

....  fonbcrn  m^,  not  only 

....  but  also. 
tti^tS^  indef.  pron.  indecl.  naught, 

nothing,  adverbially,  in  no  wise, 

not  at  all. 
nidCtt,  intr.  nod. 
nic,  adv.  never,  at  no  time. 
nicber,  adj.   nether,   lower;  low, 

base.  adv.  andsep'lepreflx.  down, 

downward. 
nicbcrtcugcn,  reflex,  bend  down. 
niciicrlttniift^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  Neth- 
erlandish, Dutch. 
niciJCrfe^en,  ^.  set  down.  r^ex.  sit 

down. 
nicilcrtlJCrfeit,   0.  tr.  throw  down, 

prostrate. 
nictirig,     adj.     {or     adv.)     low; 

humble. 
niemaB,  adv.  never. 
9Iicmttnil,  indef.  pron.  nobody,  no 

one,  not  any  one.  see  186. 

1.  no^,  adv.  still,  yet,  further.  — 
ni^t,  not  yet.  —  cttt,  one  more, 
another.    —  etttmal,  once  more. 

2.  ttO^,  conj.  {after  negative,  espHy 
metier)  nor. 

IRortl,  m.  -beg,  -be.  north.  stoiirtS, 

adv.  northwards. 
9lortien,  »^.  -ng.  north,  northern 

region. 


V0CABULAE7. 


425 


ttor))It$,  odj,  (or  adv.)  northerly, 
northern. 

9l0t^  ['^Oi],  /.  -ot!)C.  need,  neces- 
sity; want;  trouble,  misery. 

nbt^ifi  [nbtig],  {with  dat)  adj.  {or 
adv  )  needful,  necessary. 

nbtligCtt  [nbtigcn],  tr.  constrain, 
force,  compel. 

JlOt^ttJCnilig  [mU],  (^j-  necessary, 
indispensable. 

*WotJCmber,  m.  -x%,  -r.  Novem- 
ber. 

nun,  ddv.  now,  at  present. 

nur,  odv.  only,  simply;  but  just, 
scarcely. 

9lu§,/.  -iiffe.  nut.  sbtttUn,  adj.  nut- 
brown. 

nu^cn  (yr  nii^cn,  intr.  {wUhdat.)he 
of  use  to,  profit. 

nu^Ut^,  ddj.  {or  adv.)  useful. 

Of\,  adv.  over,  above,  conj.  whether, 
if;  aU  —,  as  if. 

oBcn,  adv.  above,  aloft,  on  high. 
nac^  —,  upwards. 

Obct,  adj.  upper,  higher. 

Obctfl,  trh.  -te§  or  -ten,  -te  or  -ten. 
colonel. 

oBglett^,  conj.  although,  though. 

CctoBer,  w.  -r8,  -r.  October. 

bllC  or  olj,  adj.  {or  adv.)  vacant, 
deserted,  desolate,  waste. 

VttitX,  conj.  or,  otherwise,  else. 

off  en,  adj.  {or  adv.)  open;  public; 
frank,  sincere. 

Offenbar,  adj.  {or  adv.)  plain,  evi- 
dent. 

Dfflctcr  {or  sjicr),  m.  -r«,  -re.  offi- 
cer. 

oft,  adv.  often,  frequently.  svudU, 
adv.  oftentimes,  repeatedly. 

Cl^etm,  rn.  -m§,  -me.   uncle. 

0|ne,  prep,  {with  accus.)  without; 
but  for,  except,  save.  —  J)tt§, 
but  that,  save  thart 


Ofit,  n.  -rcg,  -rctt.  ear.  sting,  m. 

earring. 
ort)entlt(^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  orderly, 

regular,  proper. 
Drt,  rn.  {or  n.)  -te8,  -te  or  Orter. 

place,  spot,  region. 
Often,  m.  -ng.  east;  eastern  land. 
Ottilie,/.  -ien«.  OttiHa. 

$aar,  n.  -res,  -re.  pair,  couple; 
ein  ^aot  {or  paat),  a  couple, 

two  or  three,  a  few.  see  322.2a. 
^ttlaft,  m.  -t§,  -cifte.  palace. 
^ttntoffcl,  m.  -Ig,  -L  slipper. 
^tt^ier,  n.  -r8,  -re.  paper. 
^aifl,  m.  -m,  -dpfte.  pope. 
SParatieS,  n.  -fee,  -je.  paradise. 
^ortei,/.  -eien.  party,  faction. 
|iartetif((),  adj.  {or  adv.)  factious, 

partial,  partizan. 
^ttttie,  /.  -ieu.    party,  company; 

part,  portion. 
p)ttf!o0ter,  m.  -r§,  -re.   passenger. 
^elj,    rn.   -geg,  -ge.    fur,    furred 

coat. 
^fab,  «*•  -beg,  -be.    path,  track, 

way. 
^f ttff e,  rn.  -en,  -en.  priest,  parson 

{used  generally  contemptuously). 
starrer,  rn.  -rg,  -r.    parson,  min- 
ister. 
^ftttr^of,  m.  parsonage. 
^fertl,  n.  -beg,  -be.  horse. 
i^lfiegen,  0.  or  N.  tr.   {or  intr.  with 

gen.)  wait  upon,  nurse,  cherish; 

enjoy,    be   given   to.    intr,    be 

wont,  be  used  to. 
mWJ-  -ten.  duty 
llfliilfen,  tr.  pick,  pluck. 
^forte,/.  -ten.  door,  gate,  portal; 

port  (of  ships). 
p\m,inierj.  fie! 
^funb,  n.  -beg,  -be.  pound, 
^^ilolog,  m.  -gen,  -gen.  philolo- 

gist. 


426 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


^$ifofo||]&,  m.  -^^en,  -p^en.  phi- 
losopher. 

^ilgcr,  rn.  -r8,  -r.  pilgrim,  sft^attt, 
/.  band  of  pilgrims. 

^Ittgc,  /.  -gen.  plague,  torment, 
calamity. 

^(anf e,  /•  -fen.  plank,  board. 

^la^,  m.  -^eg,  -d^e,  place,  seat; 
situation. 

|ilau))ern,  intr.  chat. 

illo^lif^,  adj.  {or  adv. )  sudden. 

Illunbern,  tr.  plunder,  pillage. 

flO^en,  intr.  knock. 

iioetif^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  poetical. 

iloUtif^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  political. 

^ort,  m.  -teg,  -te.  port,  harbor. 

portrait  ^'  -te§,  -te.  portrait. 
sinaler,  m.  portrait-painter. 

^ofl,/.  -ten.  post,  post-office. 

^rat^t,  /•  -ten.   splendor,  pomp. 

SPriifiilcnt,  m.  -ten, -ten.  president. 

^taffen,  intr.  carouse,  riot. 

^Xti§,  m.  -je8,  -je.  price,  cost; 
prize,  reward ;  praise,  glory. 

Iltetfen,  0.  tr.  praise,  commend. 

^tcmiermittiflcr,  m.  prime-minis- 
ter. 

^reu^e,  m.  -en,  -en.  Prussian. 

^ricflcr,  rn.  -x^,  -v.    priest. 

^rinj,  m.  -jen,  -jen.  prince. 

^rinjcfftn,/.  -innen.  princess. 

Ilribat,  adj.  {or  adv.)  i)rivate. 
sflttltbC,/.  private  lesson. 

^rotlUCt,  n.  -tg,  -te.   product. 

^rofcffor,  m.  -v^,  -ren.  profes- 
sor. 

^iroftttcrcn,  intr.  profit,  gain. 

^romcttttbe,  /.  -en.  promenade, 
walk. 

Quitter,  n.  -r«,  -r.  powder,  gun- 
powder. 

^unft,  m.  -tg,  -te.  point. 

Ouctt,  m.  -HeS,  -He,  (yr  OntUt,  f. 
-en.  spring,  well,  source. 


quetten,  0.  intr.  ^  or  f.  flow  forth, 
burst  out,  gush. 

9taBe,  m.  -en,  -en.  raven. 

Ma^C,  f.  revenge. 

9la(^en,  m.  -m,  -n.  throat,  jaws. 

ttt^en,  tr.  avenge. 

IRong,  w.  -ge§,  -onge.  rank,  class. 

taft^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  impetuous, 
swift,  speedy. 

tttfcn,  intr.  rave,  rage,  tttf cnti,  furi- 
ous, raving,  mad. 

diatfi  [Mai],  m.  -tf)eg, -dt{)c.  coun- 
sel, advice;  counsellor.  s^nu§,  n. 
town-hall. 

tttt^en  [ratcn],  0.  intr.  {mth  dat.) 
give  advice  or  counsel,  advise; 
guess. 

raubett,  tr.  take  by  violence  (from, 
dat.),  rob  of. 

9lau(er,  m.  -x^,  -r.  robber. 

9{ttU(ft,  m.  -c^eS.   smoke. 

tauten,  intr.  smoke. 

tttUl^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  rough,  harsh, 
coarse. 

IRaum,  m.  -meg,  -duntc.  room, 
space,  place.  —  geBett,  give  waj'^, 
yield. 

9JttUf^,  m.  -fc^eg,  -dnjd^e.  noise, 
rush ;  sudden  enthusiasm,  in- 
toxication. 

rauf^en,  intr.  ^  or  f.  move  with  a 
sound  like  rushing  water,  rustle; 
roar,  rush. 

(Ret^enft^ttft/.  reckoning,  account. 

Xt^\itXi,tr.  reckon, calculate,  count, 
estimate,  deem. 

tct^t,  adj.  {or  adv.)  straight,  direct; 
right,  just;  correct,  true,  real; 
{with  dat.)  suitable,  convenient; 
right  (not  left).  adverbially, 
really,  actuallj"^;  very,  quite. 

9lc^t  fi.  -teg,  -te.  right,  justice, 
—  ^aBen,  be  in  the  right. 

te^tgliiufiig,  adj.  orthodox. 


VOCABULAET. 


427 


ttd^tS,  odv,  to  the  right. 

9lctie,  /.  -ben.  speech,  talk,  dis- 
course. —  fte^en,  stand  talk, 
(voifh  dat.)  answer,  be  accounta- 
ble to. 

tebeit/  irdr.  or  tr.  speak,  talk,  con- 
verse. 

rebli^^  adj,  (or  adv.)  honest,  fair. 

^Reform,  /.  -en.   reform. 

9iC9Cn,  m.  -nS.  rain. 

^Icgicrung,  /.  -gen.   government. 

regnen,  intr.  impers.  rain. 

rci^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  wealthy,  rich; 
copious. 

9iti^,  n.  -C^e8,  -d)e.  empire,  realm, 
kingdom. 

XtiH^tn,  intr.  reach,  extend,  tr.  hold 
out,  present,  offer. 

rei^Itt^^  cidj.  (or  adv.)  abundant, 
copious,  plentiful. 

9lcit^t§um  [stum],  m.  -m%,-  iimer. 
riches,  wealth. 

Ut\f)t,f.  -en.    row,  series,  line. 

Utimex,  rn.  -rS,  -r.  rhymer. 

Xtin,  adj.  {or  adv.)  clean,  pure. 

rctnigcn,  tr.  cleanse,  purify. 

9lcifc,  /.  -fen.  journey,  voyage. 

tcifcn,  intr.  f  or  I),  journey,  travel, 
take  a  journey. 

tei^en,  0.  tr.  tear,  snatch  away. 

rcitcn,  0.  intr.  I)  or  \.  ride,  go  on 
horseback. 

better,  rn.  -r8,  -r.  rider,  horseman. 

retjen,  tr.  incite,  excite;  charm,  at- 
tract,  rcijcnb,  charming. 

Uttiox  {or  stiox),  m.  -r§,  -oren. 
rector  (principal  of  a  school). 

^Religion,  /.  -nen.  religion. 

9itfi,m,. -te8, -te.  residue,  remnant, 
remainder. 

^leftttUrtttion,  /.  -nen.   restaurant. 

Xttitn,  tr,  save,  rescue,  deliver. 
reflex,  save  one's  self ;  run  away. 

IRettung,  /.  -gen.  rescue,  deliver- 
ance. 


teuett,  tr.  or  intr.  rue,  repent,  re- 
gret.   c0  rcuct  mid),  I  repent. 

9leboIutton,  /•  -nen.  revolution. 

9l^cin,    m.    -ne§.     (river)    Khine. 

fbxildt,  /•  Rhine-bridge. 
Xi^itn,  tr.  set  jight;  direct;  judge, 

censure. 
(Rit^tcr,  m.  -r§,  -r.  judge.  sflul^I, 

m.  judgment-seat. 

Oii^tigfeit,  /.  rightness*  correct- 
ness. 

(Ricfc,  m.  -fen,  -fen.  giant. 

0ltng,m. -ge§, -ge.   ring. 

tittgett,  0.  tr.  wring,  twist,  intr, 
struggle,  strive,  contend. 

ttng0,  adv.  around,  about.  —  um* 
^tX,  adv.  round  about,  all 
around. 

rinncn,  0.  intr.  Ij  or  f.  run,  flow, 
course. 

IRitt,  m. -tteg, -tte.   ride. 

flitter,  rn.  -r§,  -r.  chevalier, 
knight. 

IRocf,  m.  -deg,  -ocfc.  coat,  petti- 
coat. 

XOi),  adj.  (or  adv.)  rude,  raw, 
rough. 

(RoMe,  /.  -len.  roll,  scroll ;  role, 
part. 

9tam,  n.  -ni§.  Eome. 

tHoman,  m.  -ne§,  -  nc,  novel,  ro- 
mance. 

9Jofe,  /.  -fen.  rose. 

9lO^,  n.  -ffeg,  -ffe.  horse,  steed. 

XOi^  [tot],  adj.  {or  ad>\)  red. 

JRiirfcn,  rn.  -nS,  -n.    back,  rear. 

tiitfen,  tr.  jerk,  pull;  move,  push. 

MdW,  /•  -ten.  regard,  respect, 
consideration. 

riirftnartd,  adv.  backwards,  back. 

tufcn,  0.  intr.  call  out,  cry.  tr. 
call,  call  to. 

iRu^e,  /.  rest,  repose,  tranquillity. 

rul^en,  intr.  rest,  repose. 

HU^ig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  quiet,  tranquil. 


423 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


SJill^rUttg,  /.   moving,     touchiDg; 

emotion. 
lRu|m,  m.  -meg.   fame,  glory. 

Saal,  m.  -te§,  -ak,  hall,  saloon. 

@(l^C,/.  -en»  thing,  matter,  affair, 
concern,  business,  pi.  things, 
goods. 

Sacrament,  n.  -  m,  -te.  sacra- 
ment. 

©aft,  m.  -te§,  -cifte.    sap,  juice. 

^H^,  /•  -en.  talk,  saying;  legend, 
tradition. 

fagen,  tr.  say,  tell,  relate;  speak, 
utter,  declare. 

©ale,  see  Saal. 

Salon,  ni.  -itg,  -n§.  salon,  saloon, 

parlor. 
Salj,  n.  -jeS,  -3c.   salt. 
fammt,   prep.    {wUh    dat.)    along 

with,  together  with. 

SaniJ,  m.  -beg.    sand.   sBanf,  /. 

sandbank. 
fanft,  adj.   {or  adv.)  soft,  gentle, 

mild,  smooth. 

Saracene,  in.  -en,  -en.  Saracen, 

Mussulman. 
Satg,  m.  -geg,  -cirge.  coffin. 
©a^,  m.  -5eg,  -a^e.  proposition, 

sentence. 
fancr,    adj.    (or  adv.)  sour,  tart, 

acid;  disagi-eable,  peevish. 
faUCrU(!^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  tart,  acid, 

sourish. 
faufcn,  0.  intr.  drink  (said  of  the 

lower  animals),  guzzle. 
Sttnglmg,  m.  -gg,  -ge.     nursling, 

baby. 
S(^aar  [S^ar],  /.  -ren.   troop, 

band,  crowd. 
f(!^aben,  intr.  {with  dat.)  harm,  in- 
jure, hurt. 
f^affcn,  0.  tr.  shape,  form,  create, 

make.   0.  or  N.  procure,  obtain, 

provide. 


f^amen,  reflex,  be  ashamed. 
f^anblit^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  disgrace- 
ful, shameful,  infamous. 

©t^ar,  see  S^aar. 

ft^arf,  adj.  {or  adv.)  sharp,  keen, 

cutting;  severe. 
Sc^a^,  rn.  -^e§,  -ci^e.   treasure. 
ft^d^en,  ir.  treasure,  value. 
fr^aubcr^ttft,  adj.  {or  adv.)  awful, 

horrible. 
fc^autn,  intr.   look,   gaze,  see.   tr, 

look  at,  behold,  see. 
f^dumen,  intr.  foam,  froth. 
S^anf|licl,  n.  -l^,  -k.    spectacle, 

sight;  play,  drama. 
St^anf|liclcr,  rn.  -r^,  -r.    player, 

actor. 
S^effcl,  m.  -tg,  -I.  bushel. 
f(!^etben,  0.  intr.  f.    part,  separate; 

go  away;  die. 
ft^eincn,  0.   intr.  shine;  seem  or 

appear. 
S^citcl,  /.    -In.     crown  (of    the 

head). 
S^elm,   m.    -me§,  -me.     rogue, 

knave. 
fc^eltcn,    0.   tr.  or    intr.  reprove, 
chide,  scold ;  revile  as,  call  re-. 
proachfuUy. 
ft^Cnfcn,  tr.  pour  out  for  drinking; 

make  a  present  of,  give,  grant. 
St^CnfjiuBc,    /.     tap-room,     bar, 

room. 
ft^CtJCn,    intr.     joke,    jest,    make 

fun. 
ft^euen,  tr.  be  shy  of;  avoid,  shun; 

shy  (of  a  horse). 
f^ttfen,  tr.  cause  to  happen;  uslp 

send,  despatch,  forward. 
S^frffal,  n.  -Ig,  -te.  fate,  destiny, 

lot. 
ft^te^en,  0.  intr.  or  tr.  shoot. 
S^iff,  n.  -ffeg,  -ffe.  ship. 
S^itb,  w.  -beg,  -be  or-ber.  shield; 
coat  of  arms;  sign,  signboard. 


VOCABULARY. 


429 


fe^im|lten,  tr.  insult,  abuse,  call 
names. 

St()Ittd)t  /.  -ten.  battle. 

S^lttf,  m.  -feg.  sleep. 

ft^lttfcn,  0.  Mr.  sleep. 

©t^lttg,  m.  -geS,  -age.  stroke, 
blow;  shock. 

f^lagen,  0.  tr.  or  Mr.  strike,  bit, 
beat ;  knock  ;  defeat. 

(Sc^Itttige,  /.  -gett.  serpent,  snake. 

f^le^t,  cidj-  (or  adv.)  bad,  base, 
mean. 

S^Tctfc,  /.  -fen.  knot,  bow. 

{(^lie^cn,  0.  tr.  shut. 

©t^loi  n.  -ffe§,  -offer,  lock; 
citadel,  castle,  si^ov,  n.  castle- 
gate. 

©^(Ut^t,  /.  -ten.   ravine,  gorge. 

S glummer,  w.  -x^,  -r.     slumber. 

ftdlummern,  intr.  slumber,  sleep. 

@d)Iu^,  m.  -ffe§,  -iiffe.  closing; 
close,  end,  conclusion. 

©djlilffcl,  w.  -tg,  -t.  key. 

(S^ntttt^,  /.  abuse,  outrage ;  dis- 
grace, shame. 

f^tnal,  adj.  (or  adv.)  narrow, 
slender. 

f^mei^eln,  intr.  {with  dat.)  caress; 
flatter. 

S^mctt^elretie,  /•  flattery. 
S^mcrj,  m.  -jeg  or  -seu§,  -jen. 

pain,  ache  ;  sorrow,  distress. 
f^mcrjen,  intr.   smart,    pain.    tr. 

crimpers,  (with dat.)  pain,  grieve, 

afflict 
f^merjHl^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  painful. 
S^micll,  m.  -beg,  -be.   smith. 
Sj^mictC,  /.  =cn.     smithy,  forge. 
fdinett,     adj.     (or     adv.)    quick, 

speedy,  swift,  rapid. 
\ii)On,  adv.  already,  even. 
Won,    adj.    (or    adv.)    beautiful, 

handsome,  fine,  noble. 
f^Onen,  tr.  (or  intr.  with  gen.)  treat 

■with  consideration,  spare. 


<S(ftbnfteit,  /.  beauty. 

(S^ranfc,  /.  -en.    railing,  barrier. 

pi.  lists  (at  tournaments),  in  tlic 

— tt  fommcn,  enter  the  lists. 
Street,    m.    -c!c§,    -de.     fright, 

terror. 
ft^rcdU^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  terrible, 

frightful. 
f^rcikn,  0.  tr.  write. 
Sdireibttf^,  m.  writing-table. 
fdircten,    0.    intr,    cry,    cry  out, 

scream. 
Shrift,  /.   -ten.    writing;  some- 
thing written,  scripture. 
<S^ritt,  rn.  -tteS,  -tte.  step,  stride, 

pace. 
^^U^,  m.  -'^eS,  -^e.  shoe. 
(S^ulb,    /.    -ben.      debt;    fault, 

crime. 
ft^ulbig^  adj.  (or  adv.)  owing,  in- 
debted for  (with accus.);  culpable, 

criminal,  guilty  of  or  lacking  in 

(with  gen) 
(S^uliincr,  m.  -r§,  -r.    debtor. 
(S^ulc,  /.  -len.  school. 
<S filler,  in.  -x^,  -r.  pupil,  scholar. 
S^urfc,    rn.    -en,    -en.      rascal, 

knave,  villain. 
^M,    m.    -ffeS,   -iiffe.      shot; 

charge  (of  a  gun). 
ft^tnat^,  adj.  (or  adu.)  weak,  feeble. 
@d)Uitt9crin,/.  -nnen.  sister-in-law. 
S^lUttii,  m.  -\m  or   -nen,  -cine 

or  -nen.    swan. 
ft^tuanfcn,  intr.   ]^  or  f.    stagger, 

totter ;  waver. 
ft^ttJttrj,  adj.  (or  adv.)  black. 
fc^tDcBettf  intr.  sweep  (through  the 

air),  soar,  hover,  float. 
ft^tDCigCn,  0.  intr.  keep  silence,  be 

still,  not  talk,  hold  one's  peace. 

as  noun,  silence. 
St^tDCtj,  /.  Switzerland. 
f^tuelgcn,       intr.       gormandize, 

revel,  carouse. 


430 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


Statuette,  /.  -Icn»   threshold. 
fi^tneUen,  0.  intr.  f.    swell,  heave. 
f^tOCt/    odj.    {or   adv.)    grievous, 

sore,  burdensome,  heavy;  hard, 

difficult. 
<Sd)toCtt,  n.  -teS,  -ter.   sword. 
(S^ttJcficr,  /.  -rn.   sister,    sdjctt, 

n.  little  sister. 
(Sc^tUiegcrDtttcr,  m.  father-in-law. 
f(^tt)immen,  0.  intr.  Ijor  \,  swim, 

float. 
f^lningcn,  0.  tr.   or  intr.   swing; 

wave,   brandish,     rejiex.    swing 

one's  self. 
f^ttlbttn,  0.  tr.  or  intr.  swear,  take 

oath  to,  vow. 
fc^tnitl,  ctdj.  {or   adv.)  sultry,  hot 

and  close. 
©t^tuung,  m.  -geS,  -iinge.  swing, 

rotation,  swinging  motion. 
Sc^tDur,  m.  -re§,  -iire.  oath,  vow. 
fc^tO^^,    adj.  of    Swytz    (a   Swiss 

Canton). 
fC^§,  num.  six.  sjcl^n,  sixteen,  sjig, 

sixty. 
Sec,  m.  -ee§.  -een.    lake.  /.  -een. 

sea,  ocean. 
Scele,  /.  -ten.  soul. 
SegCl,  n.  -U,  -I   sail. 
Scgcn,  rn.  -n6,  -n.  blessing. 
fcgncn,  tr.  bless. 
fe^en,    0.   tr.   or  intr    see,   look. 

glance,  perceive  ;   look,  appear. 
fcl&ttCn,   reflex,   long,    yearn,    feel 

eager  desire,    as  noun,  longing, 

yearning. 
<SeftnfUt^t,  /.  eager  desire,  yearn- 
ing. 
\t\\X,  (tdv.  very  greatly,  very  much, 

much. 

1.  fcin,  0.  intr.  f.  be,  exist.  eS  ift, 
there  is,  etc.  ciucm  gut  — ,  be 
fond  of  one.  an  citicm  — , 
depend  on  one ;  be  one's  turn. 

2.  f cin,  poss,  adj,  his,  its. 


3.  fcin,  gen.  of  er  or  e6. 
{etne0glei(t)en,  inded.  adj.  or  pron. 

of  his  kind,  such  as  he. 
f etnig,  poss.  pron.  his,  its. 
fcit,  prep,  {with  dat.)  since,  from  (a 

given    time  till  now),    during. 

conj.  since,  since  the  time  that. 

shtm,    ddv.   since    then,   since. 

C071J.  since,  from  the  time  that. 
<^eiit,  /.  -ten.  side  ;  party  ;  page. 
fclbct,  adj.  inded.  self,  myself,  etc. 

see  155.5. 
fclbfl,  adj.    inded.    self,    etc.    see 

155.5.  adv.  even. 
<BtW :    sat^tung,  /.   self-respect. 

::er^altung,  /.  self-preservation. 
fclig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  blessed,  happy, 

blissful. 
Seligtett,  /.  happiness,  bliss,  sal- 
vation. 
fcltfam,    adj.   {or  adv.)    unusual, 

strange,  wonderful. 
fcnticn,  {irreg.  or  reg.)  tr.  send. 
September,  m.  -rg,  -r.  September. 
fc^en,  tr.   set,  place ;   lay  down, 

lay.  reflex,  sit  down. 
fcufjcn,  intr.  sigh,  groan. 
ft^,  re/lex.  pron.  himself,  herself, 

itself,  themselves  ;  one  another. 

see  155.3,4. 
fitter,  adj.  {or  adv.)  safe,  sure,  se- 
cure. 
ft^etn,    tr.    make    sure,    secure, 

guarantee. 
fie,  pers.  pron.  {Sd  sing.)  she,  her, 

it;    (3d  pi)  they,   them;   Sie, 

you.  see  153.4. 
ftcbcit,  num.  seven,  sjcftn  {or  fith 

3C^n),  seventeen,    sjig  {or  fieh 

m),  seventy. 
Sicg,  m.  -geg,  -ge.    victory,  con- 
quest. 
Sieger,  rn.  -r8,  -r.    victor,  cod^ 

queror. 
ftegreid),  adj.  victorious. 


VOCABtJLAEY. 


431 


IlIBctIt,  (tdj.  (or  adv.)  silver. 
ftngen,  0.  tr.  or  intr.  sing. 
finfcn,  0.  intr.  \,   sink,  fall. 
^inn,  m.-nueS,  -niic  or  nuen.  sense, 
organ   of     perception  ;     mind ; 
intent,  meaning,  import ;  dispo- 
sition, character. 
ftttn^/  «(?/•    {or  adv.)   related   to 
manners    or    morals ;     social, 
moral. 
fi^en,  0.  intr.  sit. 
8natie,  m.  -en,  -en.  slave. 
fo,  adv.  so,  in  this  manner  or  de- 
gree, as.   fo  . .  .  aU  (or  mie) . . . 
as ...  as  ....  fo  cilt,    such  a. 
used  as  rel.  pron.  see  182.1. 
fo :  fbaiti,  adv.  so  soon.    conj.  as 
soon  as.     sglet^,  adv.  immedi- 
ately, at  once,    slange,  conj.  as 
long  as.    soft,  conj.  as  often  as. 
stoic,  adv.   as.    stO0^(,    adv.   as 
well,     fo    tOO^l  ...    aU.  .,  as 
well .  .  .  as  .  .,  both  .  .  .  and. 
<So^n,  m.  -ne§,  -o^ne.  son. 
So^nletn,  n.  -n§,  -n.  Httle  son. 
fol4  pron'l  adj.  such,   cill  folt^Ct, 

such  a. 
(Sotbat,  w.  -ten,  -ten.  soldier. 
foliti,  (Ji'dj.  (or  adv.)  solid,  respect- 
able. 
foUen,    (irreg.)  tr.  shall,    should ; 
owe,  ought ;  be  to,  be  intended 
to ;  be  said  to.  see  251,  257. 
©ommcr,  rfi.  -rS,  -r.   summer. 
fonlJCrn,  conj.   but  (stronger  than 
ttbcr,  and  usually  after  negative). 
Sonnaknti,  m.  -bS,  -be.    Satur- 
day. 
Sonne,  /.  -nen.  sun. 
fonnen,  irdr.  expose  to  the  sun, 

air,  sun. 
Sonnenlt^t,  n.  sunlight,  sunbeam. 
©onntttfi,  wi.  -g«,  -ge.    Sunday. 
fonit,  adv.  else,  otherwise,  besides; 
at  other  time,  heretofore. 


So^l^te,  /.  -ien§.  Sophia. 

"SotgC,  /.  -gen.  care,  anxiety,  sor- 
row. 

fotgen,  intr.  care,  take  care,  make 
provision;  feel  anxiety  or  sorrow. 

S^ianicn,  n.  -n^.  Spain. 
6|)anter,  m.  -x^,  -r.  Spaniard. 
f|ianif(^,  adj.  {(yr  adv. )  Spanish. 
fjlOten,  iT.  spare,  save,  lay  up. 
fjlttt,  adj.    {or  adv.)    late,    tardy, 

slow. 
fijajictcn,  intr.   \)  or  I    walk  (for 
exercise  or  pleasure),  go  abroad. 
—  gCl^Cn,  take  a  walk.  —  fol^ten, 
take  a  drive.     —  rcitcn,  take  a 
ride. 
Sneer,  m.  -re§,  -re.    spear. 
f^eifen,  intr.  eat,  take  food. 
S^iel,  n.  -leg,  -te.    play,   game, 
sport ;    playing,   acting  ;    gam- 
bling ;  trick. 
f|lielen,  tr.   or  intr.    play ;    play 

(music) ;  gamble  ;  act. 
S|JteUente,  pi.  actors,    musicians. 
SJli^e,  /.  -sen.  point,  peak,  head. 
SJjott,  ni.  -tte§,  -tte.    mockery, 

derision,  scorn,  ridicule. 
f|)Otten,    intr.    (with    gen.)   mock, 

scoff  at,  ridicule. 
S^JtOt^e,  /.   -rf)en.     speech,   lan- 
guage. 
f^tedien,  0.  intr.  or  tr.  speak,  talk, 
say,  utter ;    speak  to,   address. 
frei  — ,  pronounce  free,  absolve. 
f^ttngen,  0.  intr.  f  or  t).    spring, 

leap,  jump. 
f|)tut)eln,  intr.  or  tr.  bubble,  gush. 
S|)Ut,  /.  -ven.   track,  trace  ;  way. 
Stttb,  m.  -beg,  -dbe.   staff. 
Stttbt,  /.  -cibte.  city,  town. 
(Stamm,m.  -ammeg,-dmme.  stem, 

stalk  ;  stock,  race,  tribe, 
ftammein,  intr.  or  tr.  stammer. 
fiammen,    intr.  f.  originate,  pro- 
ceed, descend. 


432 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


8tant),  in.  -be§,  -cinbc.  standing  ; 
state,  position,  rank  in  life,  ju 
— C  brtngen,  bring  about,  ac- 
complish, im  — C  fcitl,  be  pre- 
pared, be  able. 

ftaxt,  o,dj.  {or  adv.)  strong,  stont, 
vigorous ;  mighty. 

Static,  /•  -en.    force,  strength. 

flatt,  prep,  (with  gen.)  instead  of ; 
for. 

fiattftnbcn,  0.  intr.  take  place. 

^tdttl,  0.  or  N.  intr.  stick,  remain 
fast ;  lie  hidden,     tr.  set ;  hide. 

fiel^en,  0.  intr.  t)  or  ].  stand,  be 
upright ;  be  situated,  be  ;  stand 
still,  stop,  tuic  ficftt'0?  how  are 
you  ?  how  goes  it  ? 

fietgen,  0.  intr.  f.  step  up;  rise, 
ascend,  climb,  get  up  or  in; 
sometimes  descend,  climb  down. 

flcil,  adj.  {or  adv. )  steep. 

Stein,  m.  -:ie§,  -ne.  stone,  rock. 

ftellen,  tr.  place,  put,  set,  fix  ;  ar- 
range, reflex,  give  one's  self  the 
appearance,  act  as  if,  appear. 

flerbcn,  0.  intr.  die. 

Stern,  TO.-ne8,-tie  (or-nen).  star. 

flctS,  ddv.  steadily,  ever,  always. 

Sticfel,  m.  -I§,  -L  boot. 

flitt,  ctdj-  {or  (idv.)  still,  silent, 
quiet,  calm,  tranquil.  imStitten, 
secretly,   sfdltueigenb,  silent. 

Stimme,  /.  -en.  voice. 

flimmcn,  intr.  or  tr.  give  voice, 
sound ;  harmonize,  agree,  trcin 
ftimmen,  join  in,  join  in  singing. 

Stirn,  /.  -nen.  forehead,  brow. 

Stoif,  n.  -(feg,  -ocfe.  stick,  staff, 
cane  ;  trunk,  stock ;  story  (of 
a  house). 

StofF,  m.  -\\t%,  -ffe.  stuff,  matter, 
material. 

flb^nen,  irdr.  groan. 

flo(j,a(i/.  (or  adu.)  proud,  haughty, 
arrogant. 


Stor^,  m.  -6)t%,  -tx6)t,  stork. 
flbten,  tr.  stir  up,  disturb,  trouble. 
fiO^en,  0.  intr.  or  tr.  push,  thrust, 

strike. 
firafen,  tr.  punish,  chastise. 
Sttttfee,  /.  -§en.  street. 
ftreHen,  irdr.  strive,  struggle,  en- 
deavor; aspire. 
fireifen,  tr.  stretch,  extend. 
Strei^,   in.  -^t^,   -d^e.     stroke, 

lash;  trick,  prank. 
Streit,  ra.  -te§,  -te,  contest,  com- 
bat, conflict. 
jlreitcn,  0.  irdr.  contend,  struggle, 

fight;  argue,  debate. 
fireuen,  tr.  strew,  scatter. 
Strom,  rn.  -meg,  -ome.    stream, 

river. 
Stiib^en,  n.  -w^,  -n.    little  room. 
Sttirf,  n.  -dt^,  -dt.    piece,  part, 

fragment,  bit ;  piece,  play. 
Student,  in.  -ten,  -ten.  student. 
Stubium,  n.  -mS,  -ien.  study ;  pi 

studies. 
Stul^I,  »w.  -Ie§,  -ii^te.  chair. 
fiumnt,  o,dj.  {or  adv.)  dumb,  mute, 

silent. 
Stunbe,  /.  -ben.  hour ;  lesson  (of 

an  hour's  duration) ;  distance  of 

an  hour's  walk. 
fiiinilU^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  hourly. 
Stnrm,  m.  -meg,  -iirme.  storm. 
flUrjen,     intr.    f.     fall    headlong, 

tumble,    rush.      tr.    overthrow, 

ruin. 
fUC^en,  tr-  seek,  search  for,  try  to 

find  or  obtain,  aim  at. 
Siib,  in.  -beg.  south,  sintliftft,  adj. 

South-Indian. 

Siinte,  /.  -ben.   sin. 

fitnbigen,  intr.  sin,  commit  a 
sin. 

fn§,  adj.  {or  adv.)  sweet,  delight- 
ful. 

Stjricn,  n.  -ng.  Syria. 


VOCABULAEY. 


433 


Xdbat,  rti.  -!§,  -!e.  tobacco. 
stdU^,  n.  tobacco-smoke. 

tatein,  tr.  blame,  censure,  re- 
proach. 

^ttfcl,  /.  -In.  table. 

^tt0,  m.  -ge8,  -ge.   day. 

tiiglt^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  daily. 

talentDott,  adj.  {or  adv.)  talented. 

^annc,  /.  -nen.  fir-tree.  Xanntni 
Qtun,  n.  green  of  the  firs. 

^ttnte,  /.  -ten,  aunt. 

^ttnj,  m.  -geg,  -ansc  dance. 

tanjett,  intr.  or  ir.  dance. 

Sa^et  w-  -te§,  -te.  carpet. 

^ojlCtC,/.  -ten.  tapestry,  hangings. 

ta|)f er,  adj.  {or  adv.)  brave,  valiant, 
bold. 

2^ilft^e,  /.  -en.  pocket,  pouch. 

Stttffc,  /.  -en.  cup. 

tdUfett,  tr.  dip,  immerse  ;  baptize, 
christen.  getttttft,  baptized, 
christian. 

taufent),  num.  a  thousand.  sUlttl, 
adv.  a  thousand  times. 

better,-  m.  -x^,  -r.    plate. 

2eufcl,  m.  -Ig,  -t.  devil. 

2ft al,  n.  -Ie§,  -ciler.  valley. 

^ftaler,  m.  -r8,  -r.  dollar,  thaler 
(about  73  cts.) 

%W,  /•  -ten.  deed,  action. 

tftiitig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  active,  busy. 

XWl^ttii,  /.  -ten.  activity,  effi- 
ciency. 

Xf^m  [%m],  m.  -aue0,  -ane.  dew. 

Xitakv,  n.  -r«,  -r.  theatre. 

%Mtt,  m.  -eeS,  -ee.  tea;  tea- 
party. 

Sfteil  [XtW],  m.  or  n.  -Ie§,  -te. 
part,  portion,  share,  jam  — , 
partly,  cincm  3tt  —  tucrticn, 
fall  to  one's  share. 

tfteilncftmcn  [ttiU],  0.  intr.  take 
part,  participate,  be  interested. 

tfteucr  [icttcr],  adj.  {or  adv.)  dear, 
beloved;  expensive. 


Xf^kx  [Xkx] , .  n.  -res,  -re  animal, 
creature. 

tfttcrif(ft  [tiers],  adj.  {or  adv.)  ani- 
mal. 

XiiOX,  n.  -re§,  -re.  door,  gate. 

Xiox,  rn.  -ren,  -ren.  fool,  simple- 
ton. 

Xf^OX^tit,  f. -kn.  folly. 

^ftrfinc,  /.  -en.  tear. 

2ftron,  m.  -neg,  -ne  or  -wen. 
throne. 

tftronctt/  iri/r.  sit  on  a  throne,  be 
enthroned. 

tftun,  0.  tr.  do,  perform  ;  make ; 
put.  intr.  act,  behave ;  carry  on, 
conduct,  irnpers.  matter;  be. 
see  242.3. 

Xf^nx,  f.  -ren.  door. 

ticf,  adj.  {or  adv.)  deep,  profound, 
low. 

Xtcfc,  /.  -fen.  depth,  profundity, 
deep  place. 

Xtfct),  m.  -fcf)e8,  -fd)e.  table. 

Xitel,  rn.  -U,  A.  title  ;  claim. 

Xijittn^m.  -nS.  Titian  (the  painter). 
sfotti,  m.  hall  for  the  paintings 
of  Titian. 

Xo^kx,  f.  -orf)ter.  daughter. 

XoH,  m.  -be§,  -be.  death. 

tobt  [tot],  a(^*.  {or  adv.)  dead,  as 
nown,  dead  or  deceased  person. 

toUtn  [toten],  tr.  kill,  slay,  put 
to  death. 

Xobtenfammer  [XoU],  n.  cham- 
ber of  death. 

tbiltUlft  [tiitliJ^],  adj.  {or  adv.) 
deadly,  mortal. 

tobtfjijlttgen  [tots],  tr.  strike  dead. 

Xon,  rn.  -neS,  -one.    tone,  sound. 

tonen,  intr  resound,  sound  forth. 

triige,  adj.  {or  adv.)  inert,  indo- 
lent, lazy. 

tragen,  0.  tr.  or  intr.  carry,  bear, 
bring  ;  wear ;  support,  endure  ; 
produce,  yield. 


434 


(GERMAN-ENGLISH 


StanI,  m.  -n!e8,  -an!c.  drink, 
beverage. 

ttauen,  in^r.  {with  dat)  trust,  have 
confidence  in,  confide,  reflex. 
trust  one's  self,  venture. 

txautxn,  intr.  mourn,  grieve, 
lament. 

Xvaum,  m.  -mt%,  -dumc.  dream. 

trdumett,  intr.  or  tr.  dream,  fancy. 

traumlo^,  adj.  dreamless. 

trauttg,  odj.  {or  adv.)  mournful, 
sad,  melancholy. 

iraut,  adj.  {or  adv.)  beloved,  dear. 

ixtxhtn,  0.  tr.  drive,  impel ;  carry 
on,  perform,  ein  S|liel  -,  play 
a  trick. 

trcnncn,  tr.  separate,  divide,  part. 
reflex,  part. 

Strcnnung,  /.  -gen.  separation. 

trcten,  0.  intr.  f.  tread,  step,  pro- 
ceed, enter,  eincm  no^c  —, 
come  near  to,  affect. 

treu,  adj.  {or  adv.)  true,  faithful, 
trusty. 

%X\t^,  m.  -beg,  -be.  drift;  im- 
pulse, instinct. 

trinfcn,  0.  tr.  or  intr.  drink. 

trorfen,  adj.  {or  adv.)  dry. 

troifnen,  tr.  or  intr.  Ijor  \.  dry, 
dry  up. 

frolic,  /.  -cn.  tropic. 

^rojlfeit,  m.  -itg,  -n.    drop. 

trofien,  tr.  comfort,  console. 

Xxoi^,  m.  -geg.  defiance,  disdain ; 
stubbornness. 

tro^,  prep,  {with  dat.  or  gen.)  in 
defiance  of,  in  spite  of,  notwith- 
standing, sbcm,  adv.  in  spite  of 
that,  notwithstanding. 

Xrunf,  m.  -M.   drink,  draught. 

Xxu^p,  m.  -ppe§,  -ppe.  troop. 

^U^,  n.  -c^eg,  -iic^er.  cloth,  linen; 
kerchief. 

Sttgcnb,  /.  -ben.  virtue. 

tttgent^aft,  adj.  {or  adv.)  virtuous. 


Ue^el,  n.  -t6,  -t  evil,  ill,  misfortune. 

itbcn,  tr.  practice,  exercise. 

uhtXf  adv.  and  seple  {or  insep'le) 

preflx.  over,  above ;   in  excess. 

tie  !^tit  —,  during  the  time,  see 

230.1a. 
prep,  {with  dat.)  over,  above, 

higher  than  ;  in  the  process  of; 

while,  by  reason  of.  {with  a^cus.) 

over  or  above  ;  across  ;  beyond ; 

after,  by  way   of ;   respecting ; 

over,  more  than. 
itbcraU,  adv.  everywhere. 
itkrMngen,  {irreg.)  tr.  bring  over, 

deliver.      (sep7e)    bring     over, 

carry  over. 
itberflufftg,  adj.   {or  adv.)  super- 
fluous, unnecessary ;  plentiful. 
u6cr]^0U|Jt,     adv.      in      general, 

altogether. 
itbetlaffett,  0.  tr.  {sep'le  or  insep'le) 

leave  over,  turn  over,  relinquish, 

resign,  make  over,  cede. 
ubetlebctt,  tr.  outUve,  survive. 

1.  iificrlegcn,  tr.  {seple)  lay  over, 
turn  over,  (inseple)  turn  over  in 
mind,  consider. 

2.  iibcrlcgen,  see  itkrliegeit. 

itberliegen,  0.  intr.  {seple)  lie  oyer, 
be  deferred,  {insep'le)  be  superior 
to,  surpass,  itftetlegen,  with  dat 
superior  to. 

iikrmorgcn,  adv.  day  after  to- 
morrow. 

iiklTttft^cn,  tr.  surprise,  startle. 

itberfe^en,  tr.  (seple)  set  over  or 
across,    {inseple)  translate. 

itkrfte^en,  intr.  {sepHe)  stand  over 
or  out.  {inseple)  last  over,  last 
through,  outlast,  endure,  live 
through. 

itbertninben,  0.  tr.  overcome,  con- 
quer, subdue. 

iibtig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  left  over,  left. 
—  ilciiicn/  be  left. 


VOCABULAEY. 


435 


u6rt0en0,  adv.  for  the  rest,  more- 
over. 

UeBung,  /.  -gen.  exercise,  prac- 
tice. 

Ufer,  n.  -x^f  -r.  shore,  coast, 
bank. 

U|r,  /.  -retl.  hour  ;  clock,  watch. 
after  numerals,  o'clock. 

Um,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  around, 
about ;  around  about  or  over. 

prep,  {with  accus.)  around, 
about;  near  to;  respecting,  con- 
cerning, {after  verbs  of  asking) 
for.  {with  comparativef  denoting 
arrCt  of  difference)  by.  before  ju 
and  an  infinitive,  in  order,  so  as. 
urn ....  ^cr,  {with  accus.  be- 
tween) round  about,  uui  .... 
toittcn^  {yyith  gen.)  on  account 
of. 

UmaXTMtt^tr.  throw  the  arm  about, 
embrace. 

Umbrtngen,  {irreg.)  tr.  cause  to 
lose  one's  life,  destroy,  kill. 

Umgang,  m.  -gg.  going  around  ; 
roundabout  way  ;  society,  com- 
pany. 

urn  9  eb  en,  0.  tr.  {insepUe)  sur- 
round, environ,  enclose. 

Itni^Ct,  adv.  around,  round  about. 

Umterneit,  intr.  leam  over  again, 
learn  in  a  different  way. 

Umltegen,  0.  intr.  f.  lie  around  or 
about,  umncgenti,  surrounding, 
neighboring. 

Umfcl^cn,  0.  intr.  look  about,  re- 
flex, look  about  one's  self. 

Umftant),  tn-  -beg,  -cinbe.  circum- 
stance. 

Umtoenbett,  {irreg.  or  reg.)  tr. 
turn  about,  reverse,  invert,  intr. 
turn,  turn  back. 

Itns,  neg.  prefix,  same  as  English  un-. 
sQ6dnberli(^,  adj.  unalterable. 
sanfeJ^nltf^,  adj,  inconsiderable, 


insignificant,  stttttg,  adj.  rude, 
naughty.  sBefttnnt,<w^i. unknown. 
ssBetoegJit^,  adj.  immovable.  sBc 
mol^nt,  adj.  uninhabited.  sBtaUt^s 
Bat,  useless. 

Unt,  conj.  and. 

unsllttnfbttr,  adj.  thankless,  scnlls 
Ii(^,  adj.  endless,  scntbc^rlii^, 
indispensable,  setfttftrenftcit,  /. 
inexperience.  sCrmcfeUri,  adj. 
immeasurable.  sCrfc^Ut^,  adj. 
indispensable,  scrtriiglit^,  adj. 
unendurable.  stttOIXXUt,  adj.  un- 
expected, sfe^lbttt,  adj.  infalli- 
ble. sfc^IBttrtctt,  /.  infallibility. 
sgcac^tct,  prep,  {with  dat.  or 
gen.)in  spite  of,  notwithstand- 
ing, conj.  although,  sgcftt^r, 
ado.  about,  nearly,  not  far  from. 
sgClicBt,  adj.  unloved,  sgcmif^t, 
adj.  unmixed,  sgcrc d)t,  adj.  un- 
just, unfair.  sgcf(^e()en,  adj. 
not  happened,  undone.  sgCs 
f^Ia^t,  adj.  uncouth,  unwieldy. 
sgCtUi^^Cit,  /•  uncertainty,  sge? 
JOgcn,  adj.  illbred,  rude,  un- 
mannered.  sgtaublilJ),  adj.  in- 
credible. 

Unglucf,  rn.  ill-luck,  misfortune, 
unhappiness. 

Ultsglutflid),  adj.  unfortunate,  un- 
happy, sgtiirffelig,  adj.  unlucky, 
unfortunate,  miserable. 

Unibcrritttt,  /.  -ten.  university. 

unsmbgtid),  adj.  impossible,  spa^s 
fcnb,  adj.  unsuitable.  stcd)t,  n. 
wrong,  error  ;  injustice,  injury. 
*ru^e,  /.  disquiet,  anxiety. 
sfauftcrlid^,  adj.  not  neat  or 
clean,  dirty,  /ft^ultltg,  adj.  in- 
nocent. 

1.  unfcr,  poss.  pron.  our,  ours. 

2.  unfer,  gen.  pi.  of  i^. 

unferig  (unfrig),  poss.  pron.  our, 
ours. 


436 


OEHMAJJ-ENGUSH 


Unsfit^er,  cw^i-   uncertain,  unsafe. 

Itnten,  odv.  below,  beneath. 

UXdtX,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  below, 
beneath,  under ;  among,  amid. 
prep,  (with  dot.  or  accus.) 
under,  beneath,  below ;  less 
than,  inferior  to  ;  among,  amid, 
between;  during. 

Untcrtcffen,  adv.  during  this  time, 
meantime. 

untergc^cn,  0.  intr.  f.  go  down, 
descend,  set ;  fall,  perish. 

ItntcrliCftCn,  0.  intr.  {sep'le)  lie 
under.  {insepHe)  succumb,  yield, 
be  worsted. 

Untemc^mcn,  0.  tr.  undertake,  at- 
tempt. 

tttttcrri^tcn,  tr.  instruct,  teach. 

ttntcrt^an,  m.  -nen  or  -n§,  -nen. 
subject,  dependent. 

UnttXtOt^^,  adv.  on  the  way,  under- 
way.   . 

UnsUntcrBrO^en,  adj.  uninter- 
rupted. sUtttcrliinilif^,  adj.  un- 
patriotic. stierfO^nH^,  adj.  im- 
placable, irreconcihable.  $tlOilens 
titi,  adj.  unfinished,  incomplete. 
s^DOtfit^ttg,  adj.  destitute  of  fore- 
sight, imprudent,  sfticit,  adv. 
not  far  distant,  prep,  {mth  gen.) 
not  far  from,  near,  stoitierfle^' 
li^,  adj.  irresistible.  stUO^I,  adj. 
unwell,  not  well.  stUUtbtg,  adj. 
unworthy,  derogatory  to  {with 
gen.) 

Urfat^e,  /.  -ci^en.  cause,  motive. 

JBtttcr,  m.  -r«,  -ater.  father,  slonb, 
n.  native  country,  fatherland. 

tJcitcrUj^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  fatherly, 
paternal. 

I55ct(^cn,  n.  -n«,  -11.  violet. 

SBenciig,  n.  -g«.    Venice. 

Her*  insep'le  prefix,  see  307.6, 
405.IU.ld 


bera^ten,  tr.  despise,  disdain. 

95crtt(fttun9,  /•  contempt,  scorn. 

bcraltcn,  intr.  f.  grow  old.  UCU? 
ttltct,  grown  old,  aged. 

HcriinilCrn,  tr.  change,  alter. 

iJCtbcrgcn,  0.  tr.  hide,  conceal. 

Ucrbcffern,  tr.  make  better,  im- 
prove. 

JBerficlfcrung,  /.  -gen.  improve- 
ment, reform. 

tietbteten,  0.  tr.  {with  dot.)  forbid, 
interdict. 

tierbtnben,  0.  tr.  bind  up,  tie  up  ; 
bind  together;  lay  under  an  obli- 
gation. 

!|JcrBrC^en,  0.  tr.  break ;  trans- 
gress, as  noun,  transgression, 
crime,  guilt. 

JBcrirct^cr ,  tn.  -rs,  -r.   criminal, 

transgressor. 

tierbrcnncn,  {irreg.)  tr.  or  intr.  j. 
bum  up,  destroy  by  fire  ;  scorch, 
scald. 

tJCrbringcn,  {irreg.)  tr.  pass  away, 
spend. 

fStX^iat^t,  m.  -tg.  suspicion. 

tiertiammen,  tr.  condemn,  damn, 
sentence,  ppl.  used  as  noun, 
condemned  one. 

tiertieifcn,  tr.  cover  up,  conceal. 

ticrbcrficn,  0.  intr.  f.  spoil,  be 
ruined,  perish.  N.  tr.  spoil,  des- 
troy, ruin,  as  noun,  ruin,  de- 
struction. 

tjerberBItt^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  destruct- 
ible ;  destructive,  pernicious. 

Dettltenen,  tr.  earn,  gain  ;  deserve. 
berbtent,  deserving. 

tJCrbric^cn,  0.  tr.  fret,  vex.  bet* 
broffcn,  averse;  wearied,  dis- 
gusted. 

liSere^rung,  /.  reverence,  venera- 
tion. 

ISBcrein,  m.  -ii8,  -ne.  union,  com- 
bination. 


VOCABULABY. 


437 


tICtCitcTn,  tr.  make  vain,  frustrate, 

render  futile. 
tJerftt^rCtt,  0.  intr.  I)  or  f.  proceed, 

conduct  one's  self. 
ticrfatten,  0.  mtr.  f.    fall  in,    de- 
cline, degenerate,    decay.     tJCt* 

faUcn,  dilapidated,  ruinous. 
JBcrfttffcr,  rn.   -x^,    -r.       author, 

composer. 
iSBcrgttngcn^cit,  /.  the  past,  time 

past. 
tierpnglil^,  adj.    {or  adv.)  tran- 
sitory, perishable. 
tietgeben,  0.  tr.  give  away;  forgive, 

pardon. 
htX^thtnB,  adv.  in  vain,  vainly. 
ncrge^Ctt,  0.  Mr.  j.    pass  away, 

elapse,  as  noun,  error,  offense. 

ticrgttngcn,  gone    by,    elapsed, 

past. 
Uetgcltcn,  0.  tr.  pay  back,  return, 

requite,  recompense. 
tetgeffen,  0.  tr.  (or  Mr.  with  gen.) 

forget. 
ticrgniigcn,    tr.    satisfy,      gratify, 

please,    as    noun,    satisfaction, 

enjoyment,  delight. 
nergbnncn,  tr.    grant    cheerfully, 

not  grudge,  allow. 

tierl^angniftdott  [sniguoH],  adj.  (or 

adv.)  momentous,  fateful. 

Derl^aH  <^^i-  (^^  ^^0  lifted,  hate- 
ful, abhorrent. 

bCtlftctmUl^cn,  tr.  keep  secret,  con- 
ceal. 

tlcrl^cirttt^Ctt  [statett],  tr.  give  in 
marriage,  reflex,  marry,  get 
married. 

llCtltntlCrit,  tr.  hinder,  prevent. 

tietiagen,  tr.  chase  away,  expel. 

lierittufen,  tr.  sell. 

tietflagen,  tr.  accuse ;^complain  of. 
^etllagt  (as  noun),  the  accused. 

JBerfitntiiger,  m.  -rg,  -r.  herald, 
proclaimer,  haxbinger. 


ticrlutjcn,  tr.  make  short,  shorten. 
Ucrlangen,  Mr.  long,    desire,   tr. 

desire,     require,    demand,      as 

noun,     longing,     desire,     wish, 

demand. 
ticrlttff en,  0  tr.  leave,  quit;  forsake, 

desert,   reflex,  {with  auf)  confide 

one's  self  to,   trust  in,  rely  or 

depend  upon. 
tJCrlcbcn,  tr.  live,  spend,  pass. 
Ucrlei^cn,    0.   tr.   lend  out,    let; 

confer,  grant. 
tlCtlc^cn,  tr.  injure,  harm,  hurt, 

wound  ;  hurt  the  feelings  of. 

uetlictcn,  0.  tr.  lose,    ucrlorcn, 

lost,  ruined. 

liBcrlufl,  m.  -t8,  -te.  loss,  detri- 
ment. 

Ucrmogen,  {irreg.)  ir.  have  power 
to,  be  able  to,  can.  as  noun, 
ability ;  property. 

JBcrmut^ung    [=utung],  /.  -gen. 

supposition,  conjecture. 

HCtttCi^mcn,  0.  tr.  become  sensible 
of,  perceive  ;  hear,  understand. 

Dcrniinftig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  reason- 
able, sensible. 

tJCrortincn,  tr.  order,  decree; 
ordain. 

HOcrriit^er    [4tt],    m,    -r«,    -r. 

traitor,  betrayer. 

tJCrreifcil,  intr.  ].  go  on  a  journey, 
travel  off,  set  out. 

bcrfttgcn,  tr.  refuse,  deny. 

ticrfammeln,  tr.  {andreflex.)  assem- 
ble, collect,  gather. 

ftcrfiiumen,  tr.  forget,  omit,  ne- 
glect, miss. 

tJCtfc^affcit,  tr.  procure,  obtain, 
furnish. 

Detf^attcn,  0.  or  K.  Mr.  f,  die 
away.    ticrft^oHcn,  vanished. 

tierf^tetien,  adj.  {or  adv.)  different, 
various,  diverse,  pi.  various, 
sundry. 


438 


GEKMAN-ENGUSH 


Derf^Kc^en,  0.  tr.  shut  up,  close, 
lock  Tip.  tjctf^loffen,  shut, 
locked  up  ;  closed. 

tJCrf^nttt^Ctt,  tr.  disdain,  despise. 

tjcrf^otten,  see  tJcrft^aHcn. 

DCrfrfloncn,  tr.  spare,  exempt. 

tJCrfc^tainiien,  0.  intr,  \.  vanish, 
disappear. 

tCrfcl^tClt,  tr.  wound,  hurt. 

Derfc^cn,  tr.  misplace ;  displace, 
transfer,  put  (into  a  state  or 
condition). 

t^tx[oi^Xitn,tr.  reconcile,  propitiate; 
expiate,  atone  for. 

JBcrfo^nung,  /.  -gen.  reconcilia- 
tion, expiation. 

Iierfliret^cn,  0.  tr.  promise,  as 
noun,  promise. 

95cr|^reiung,  /•  -gen.  promise. 

HOerDanH,  m.  -beg.  understand- 
ing, intelligence,  intellect. 

llCrfidntJig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  under- 
standing, reasonable,  judicious. 

tietfleifen,  tr.  hide,  conceal. 

tietfielien,  0.  tr.  understand,  reflex, 
(impers.)  understand  itself,  be  a 
matter  of  course,  {with  ttUf) 
understand,  know  well. 

Ucrflettcn,  tr.  displace,  reflex,  dis- 
semble. Derftellt  feigned ; 
sham. 

tterjlorctt,  tr.  disturb,  trouble, 
derange. 

ticrjitcij^en,  0.  tr.  spread  over. 
iriir.  f.  glide  away,  elapse. 

UCrfUt^cn,  tr.  attempt,  try,  en- 
deavor. 

ticrtttttft^cn,  tr.  exchange,  barter; 
mistake,  confound. 

ticrt^eibigcn  Nciiitgcn],  tr.  de- 
fend, vindicate. 

tJCrticfcn,  tr.  deepen,  reflex,  be 
lost  or  absorbed.  bCtticft,  deeply 
engaged,  lost,  absorbed. 

^crtrttgli^f eit,  /.  tolerance. 


tJerttttUen,  tr.  entrust,  confide. 
intr.  {with  dat.)  trust  to,  confide. 
Hertraut,  trusted,  trusty,  fami- 
liar, intimate.  ^txtxautn,  n. 
trust,  confidence. 

tiertreibcn,  0.  tr.  drive  away,  ex- 
pel, exile. 

titVtoan1itln,tr.  change,  transform, 
convert. 

JBcrtUttttiltft^ttft,  /.  -ten.  relation- 
ship, kin.  collectively,  relations, 
kindred. 

tJCrhlCt^fcItt,  tr.  exchange;  con- 
found. 

UcrtDCrfen,  0.  tr.  throw  away,  re- 
ject, repudiate. 

^crtuirrung,  /.  -gen.  complica- 
tion, confusion. 

ticrtnorren,  old  pple.  entangled, 
confused. 

!55cr3ci^ni§  [mB],  n.  -ffeg,  -ffe. 
note,  list. 

bcrjcifteit,  0.  tr.  forgive,  pardon. 

iKcrjCi^ung,  /.  pardon,  forgive- 
ness, 

ticrjtticifcln,  intr.  despair. 

^Uerjtoeiflung,  /.  despair,  dec- 
peration. 

^Better,  m.  -r8,  -rn.  male 
cousin. 

\S\t\,  adj.  {or  adv.)  much,  many. 
siJCUtig,  adj.  ambiguous,  sfad^, 
adj.  manifold,  various,  sj^riitl, 
adj.  very  green,  slci^t,  adv  or 
conj.  perhaps,  maybe,  smttf,  adj. 
many  times,  smc^r,  adv.  much 
more,  rather,  sooner. 

tJier,  num.  four,     sjcl^lt,  fourteen. 

JBicrtel,  n.  -t§,  -t    quarter. 
SBogel,  m.  -U,  -oget.  bird. 
UBiiglein,  n.  -n8,  -n.  little  bird. 
^O^ip  m.  -m,  -ogte.    governor, 

prefect,  etc. 
Jgolf,  n.  -!eg,  -i3I!er.  people,  nation. 


VOCABULAET. 


439 


sing,    used    collectively,     folks, 
people. 
f&OlUxVtfilt,  n.  right  of  nations,  in- 
ternational law. 
*   tioff,   adj.   (or  adv.)    full,   filled ; 
complete,  whole,    entire,    seple 
or  insep'le  prefix,   full. 
HoQenben,    tr.  bring  to    a   close, 
end,    complete,    finish.    tJOttctt? 
bet,    completed,    finished,    per- 
fect. 
t\otii^,adj.  {or adv.)  full,  complete, 

entire. 
tioUtommtn,adj.  {or  adv.)  perfect, 

complete. 
tiOtifimtiQ,adj.  {or adv.)  complete, 

entire,  total. 
Hon,  prep,   {with  dat.)    from,    of, 
among,  by,  with ;    concerning, 
about,  by ;  on,  upon.   —  fe(6ft, 
of  itself. 
Iior,  adv.  and  seple  prefix,  before  ; 
formerly,     prep,    {with   dat.    or 
accus.)    before  (in  place  or  in 
time),  in  front  of,  ere  ;  in  sight 
of ;  for,  on  account  of  ;   from, 
against,  more  than,  above,     of 
time,  ago:  e.  g.  Jjot  cincm  ^tt^rc, 
a  year  ago. 
tlOtbei,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  along 
by,  past;  past  and  gone,  over, 
done  with,  t^tfittl,  0.  intr.  \.  go 
past,  pass  by. 
JKortlCrftttUS,  n.  front  part  of  the 

house. 
UOrfoftrcn,  0.  intr.  \.    go  or  drive 

before  or  in  front,  drive  up. 
IKorgcma^,  n.  -c^g, -ad^er.  ante- 
chamber. 
SDorgcf^it^tc,  /.  previous  or  ante- 
cedent history. 
Uorgcficrn,  adv.  day  before  yester- 
day. 
Hor^a^en,  {irreg.)  tr.  have  before 
one  or  in  view,  intend, 


t\OVfitX,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  be- 
forehand, before,  previously. 

dorig,  adj.  former,  preceding, 
last. 

iJOrlcfcn,  0.  tr.  read  before  or  for 
any  one,  read  aloud  ;  lecture. 

^ormtttag,  m.  forenoon.       [dian. 

liSormunD,  m.  -beg,  -iiiiber.   guar- 

Dorne^nten,  0.  tr.  set  before  one's 
self  ;  intend,  propose  ;  under- 
take. 

9)orf(^Cttt,  m.  -Its*  coming  to  light, 
appearance,  gum  —  foiumcn, 
come  to  light,  appear. 

ajorf^tttj,  m.  -gg,  -age.  offer, 
proposal. 

iJOrfc^cn,    tr.    prefix ;     set  over, 
ai)point;  put  before  (one's  self) 
as  an  object,  propose,  intend. 
tlOtftngCtt,  0.  tr.  or  intr.  sing  before 

or  for  one  {dat.),  sing  aloud. 
ttOtjietten,   tr.  put  before;  intro- 
duce,   present ;    personate,   re- 
present ;  plead,  {with  refiex.  dat. ) 
put  before  one's  mind,  imagine, 
fancy. 
95ort^cil  [stcil],  m.  -U,  -le.  advan- 
tage, profit. 
tlOru6cr,    adv.    and   sep'le  prefix.  . 
across  before  or  in  front,  along 
by,  past ;   over,  finished,  done. 
sffiel^cn,  0.  intr.  \.  fly  past,  rush 
past. 
DOtttiatt0,   adv.    forward,    on,   in 
advance,     ffttcbett,  i'dr.   strive 
onward  or  forward. 

tottt^,  adj.  {or  adv.)  awake. 
ttia^en,    intr.     wake,  be    awake; 

watch. 
til  tt^ fen,   0.   intr.  I    wax,  grow, 

increase. 
ttiader,  adj.  {or  adv. )  gallant,  brave, 

clever. 
SBaffe,/,  -fen.  weapon. 


440 


GERMAN-ENGUSH 


ttmgett,  tr.   hazard,  risk,  dare. 
SBttgen,    m.   -ng,  -n  or   -agett. 

wagon,  carriage  ;  car. 
SBal^l/  /•  -len.    choice,   selection, 

election. 
tDfi^klt,  tr.    choose,  select,  elect. 
tua^nen,   tr.   believe  erroneously, 

be  mistaken  in  believing  ;  fancy, 

imagine. 
tOd^X,  adj.  (or  adv.)  true,  real. 
to'df^Vtn'ii,  prep,  {with  gen.)  during. 

conj.    while,  whilst. 

SBttftr^cit,/.  -ten.  truth. 

SBa(t),  m.  -beS,  -dtber.  forest,  wood. 

sl^utct,  tn.  forester. 
SSttni),/.  -anbe.  wall. 
tUttnJlCln,  irdr.  \  or  1^.    go,  walk, 

proceed. 
tnanbern,  intr.    f  or  If,    wander, 

rove ;  travel. 
SSanberer,  m.  -r§,  -r.    wanderer, 

traveller. 
SBonbcrgmann,     m.       wanderer, 

traveller  (on  foot). 
toanitn,intr.]orl).  stagger,  totter, 

waver,  flinch. 
toantt,  odv.   (interrog.)  when?  at 

what  time  ? 

conj.   when ;  at  what  time. 
to  arm,  adj.  (or  adv.)  warm. 
SBttritttng,    /.    -gen.       warning, 

caution. 
tOavUn,  irdr.     wait,  stay,  await ; 

(with  -ouf)  wait  for,  await ;  wait 

on,  serve. 
to  arum,  adv.  (or  conj.)  for  or  on 

account  of  what  or  which,  why, 

wherefore. 
toaB,  pron.  interrog.  or  relat.  what, 

that    which  ;  whatever  ;    why, 

for  what,  /or  cttOttg,  something, 

somewhat ;   how.  —  fiir,  what 

sort  of,  what  kind  of.  —  aut^, 

—  immer,    —  nut,    whatever. 

see  175-6,  179. 


SSttffcr,  n.  -x9,  -r.  water. 

tOC^fcln,  tr.  or  intr.  change,  ex- 
change. 

toetfen,  tr.  wake  up,  wake,  arouse. 

tociJer,  conj.  neither  (withfoUmmn^ 
no^,  nor). 

1.  9Scg,  m.  -ge§,  -ge.  way,  path, 
road,  route ;  mode,  manner, 
means. 

2.  tlAt^,adv.  and sep'le prefix,  away, 
off;  gone,  interjec.  be  gone, 
away,  snc^mcit,  0.  tr.  take 
away,  stoerfcit,  0.  tr.  throw 
away. 

toegen,  prep,  (with  gen.)  on  account 
of,  because  of,  for. 

1.  tOCl^,  adj.  (or adv.)  sad,  painful. 

2.  aSc^,  n.  -f)e8,  -^  -I)e  or  -f)en. 
woe,  pain,  distress,  grief.  —  t|un, 
(withdat.)  give  pain  to,  distress. 

SBcifi,  n.  -be^,  -ber.  woman,  wife. 
toei^en,  0.  intr.  f.  give  way,  lose 

ground,  flinch,  yield ;  (with  dot.) 

yield  to,  turn  out  for. 
toeitien,  intr.   pasture,  feed. 
Xon%txn,tr.  refuse,  deny,  object  to. 
SBct^nat^t,  /.  gen'lly  in  pi.  sfctt, 

Christmas. 
tocil,  conj.   because,  since,  as. 
SBetn,  rn.  -ne§,  -ne.  wine. 
toettten,  intr.   weep,  cry. 
toetneritt^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  incUned 

to  weeping,  whining. 
tOCife,  adj.  (or  adv.)    wise,  sage, 

prudent,   as  noun^    wise    man, 

sage. 
SSetSl^eit  /.  wisdom,  knowledge. 
tOCife,  adj.  (or  adv.)  white. 
tOCit,  adj.  (or  adv.)  wide,  broad, 

large,  far,  far  off,  distant. 
tOCitcr,    adv.      farther,     further; 

besides. 
toe(c^,    interrog.  or  relat.  adj.  or 
pron.  which,  what,  that,  indef. 
pron.  some,  any. 


VOCABULAKY. 


441 


fl&tUc,  f.  -ten.  wave,  billow. 

JBcIt,  /.  -ten.  world,  earth,  uni- 
verse, society,  ^bc^tuinger,  rn. 
conqueror  of  the  world,  slauf, 
m.  course  of  the  world.  stcgiCs 
rcnU,  cidj'  world-governing. 
stDCife,  ctdj.  philosophic,  as 
noun,  philosopher. 

tneniieit,  {reg.  or  irreg.)  tr.  turn, 
turn  about,  direct,  apply. 

toenig,  ci^dj.  {or  adv.)  little,  not 
much;  few,  not  many,  ein — , 
a  little,  a  bit. 

tOCnig|iten0,  adv.  at  least,  at  any 
rate. 

toeitn,  conj.  when  ;  usually,  if,  in 
case.   $Q(ett^,  although. 

tOtV,  pron.  interrog.  or  rdat.  who, 
he  who,  whoever.  —  ttUt^, 
—  nur, whoever,  see  173,  179. 

toetticn,  0.  intr.  f.  become,  come 
to  be,  grow,  as  auxiliary,  see 
240.2,4,  275-77.  —  ^n,  {with 
dot.)  turn  to,  become,  etttem  — , 
fall  to  one's  share,  be  given  to 
one.  impers.  with  pred.  adj.  begin 
to  be  or  feel. 

toerfen,  0.  tr.  throw. 

SBcrf,  ri.  -fe8,  -fe.  work,  deed, 
production. 

teicrt^  [tticrt],  adj.  {or  adv.)  with 
gen.  (of)  or  dnt.  (to)  worthy, 
worth;  dear,  beloved,  deserving. 

SBert^  [ttJcrt],  m.  -i\)t^,  -t^e. 
worth,  value,  price. 

SScfcn,n.  -n8,-n.  being,  existence; 
creature,  living  thing. 

SBcflcntttfd^C,  /.  vest-pocket. 

3Better,  n.  -r§,  -r.  weather  ;  storm. 

tnidltig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  weighty,  im- 
portant. 

SBic^tigfcit,  /.  -ten.  importance, 
consequence. 

toiffeltt,  tr.  wrap  up,  roll,  envelop. 

toitier^  odv.  and  sep'le  w  insep'le  \ 


prefix,  against,  gain  -,  with  -; 
prep,  {with  accus.)  against,  con- 
trary. 

toitierfe^en,  reflex,  {with  dot.)  {in- 
sepHe)  set  one's  self  against,  op- 
pose, resist,  tr.  {seple)  seat  one's 
self  again. 

tQttierfle^en,  0.  intr.  {with  dot.) 
withstand,  resist,  oppose. 

mibctflteben,  intr.  {with  dot.)  strive 
or  struggle  against,  oppose,  re- 
sist, be  reluctant. 

tuibmen^  tr.  dedicate,  devote,  re- 
flex, devote  one's  self. 

tUtlirtg,  adj.  {or  adv.)  contrary; 
repugnant,  offensive,  odious ; 
cross. 

luie,  adv.  {interrog.)  how?  in  what 
way?  in  what  degree  or  measure? 
how! 

conj.  {relat.)  how,  efc. ;  of  man- 
ner and  degree,  as,  like  as,  like  ; 
such  as,  as  if;  of  time,  as,  when. 
—  Ottli^,  —  nur,  however,  how- 
soever. 

tuiciict,  adv.  and  sep'le  or  inseple 
prefix,  again,  anew,  once  more. 

totCbcrbrtngcn,  {irreg.)  tr.  bring 
back  or  again,  restore. 

ttitebergeben,   0.  tr.  give  back, 

restore. 
tOietter^Olen,  tr.    {sep'le)  bring  or 

fetch  back,  {insep'le)  say  again, 

repeat. 
tutetierfe^ren,  intr.  f.   turn  back, 

return. 
toiclJCrfommcn,   0.  intr,  f.    come 

back  again,  return. 
tuietierfe^en,  0.  tr.  see  or  meet 

again,  as  noun,  meeting  again. 

out  — ,    till    we    meet    again  I 

au  revoir. 
tUtetierum,  adv.  over  again,  again, 
SSicge,  /.  -gen.  cradle. 
toiegcn,  0.   tr,  weigh ;  lift 


442 


GERMAN-ENGLISH 


SBtcn,  n.  -ttS.  Vienna. 

SBtefe,  /.  -en.  meadow,  pasture. 

toiltl,  adj.  (or  adv.)  wild,  fierce, 
savage,  unruly. 

SBiKc  or  SBittcn,  m.  -n§,  -n.  will,  in- 
tent, design,  purpose,  um  .... 
tOttten,  (with  gen.)  for  the  sake 
of,  on  account  of. 

toittfommen,  adj.  (or  adv.)  wel- 
come. 

aBiitli,  m.  -beg,  -be.  wind,  sfilats 
tctlt,  pi'  cMcken-pox. 

SStnilung,  /.  -gen.  winding,  coil. 

SBinfel,  m.  -Ig,  -I.  comer,  angle, 
nook, 

SBinter,  m.  -r§,  -r.  winter. 

tnir,  nom.  pi.  of  i^.  we. 

toirfcn,  tr.  work,  produce,  do, 
perform,  operate. 

iQtrfH^,  adj.  (or  adv.)  actual,  real. 

SBirtft  mixt],  m.  -i\)t%,  -t^e.  host, 

landlord. 
miff  en,  (irreg.)  tr.  know,  be  aware 

of;  loith    injin.  know   how.    as 

noun,  knowledge,  learning. 
SBiffenft^ttft,  /.  -ten.  knowledge  ; 

science. 
SBttttiicr  mittotv],  m.   -r8,  -r. 

widower. 

mo  adv.  (interrog.)  where?  in  what 
place?  conj.  (relat.)  where  ;  in 
which,  at  which,  on  which,  etc. 
of  time,  at  which  (time),  when. 
(for  too  compounded  with  prep's, 
instead  of  lottg,  tucr,  etc.  see 
173.2,  180.)  s^cn  (^v.  (inter- 
rog.) or  conj.  (rdat.)  whence, 
from  whence,  sl^ilt,  adv.  or 
conj.  whither,  what  way.  sju, 
adv.  or  conj.  whereto,  to  what 
purpose. 

SBo^e,  /.  -d^en.  week. 

SBoge,  /.  -gen.  wave,  billow. 

1.  toOl||(,  adv.  well,  in  good  manner 
or  degree ;  ojiien  used  to  make  a 


statement  less  definite,  indeed, 
perhaps,  probably,  I  presume. 
etc.  mir  ifl  — ,  I  feel  well.  Uhtn 
(Sic  — ,  farewell,  sbefanitt,  adj. 
well  known,  st^ttt,/.  good  deed, 
kindness,  benefit. 

2.  S8o^(,  n.  -te«.  weal,  welfare,  ad- 
vantage. 

tOOl^nen,  intr.  dwell,  live,  reside. 

SBo^nort,  m.  dwelling  place. 

SBoinuitg,  /.  -gen.  dweUing,  lodg- 
ing, residence,  house. 

SBoIf,  m.  -feg,  -olfe.  wolf. 

SBolfc,  /.  -en.  cloud.  • 

tDOtten,  (irreg.)  tr.  will,  be  willing; 
intend,  desire,  wish ;  be  on  the 
point,  be  about ;  claim,  assert. 
see,  251,  258,  259. 

aSonne,  /.  -en.  joy,  pleasure, 
bUss,  rapture. 

toots,  same  as  tOO. 

UBort,  n.  -teg,  -te  or  -orter.  word, 
term  ;  expression,  speech. 

tounti,  adj.  (or  adv.)  wounded, 
sore,  hurt. 

SSl^untie,  /•  -ben.  wound,  hurt. 

aSunbcr,  n.  -rg,  -r.  wonder, 
miracle. 

iOUnt)Crbttr,  adj.  (or  adv.)  wonder- 
ful, miraculous. 

tuuntierit,  reflex,  wonder,  be  aston- 
ished or  amazed. 

SSuttfi^,  m.  -fc^eS,  -itnfd^e.  wish, 
desire. 

tniinf^cn,  tr.  wish,  desire,  long. 

SBiirilC,  /.  -en.  worth;  dignity, 
high  rank  or  office. 

ttluriJig,  adj.  (or  adv.)  worthy, 
deserving. 

SBiirjc,  /.  -en.  spice. 

SS^irjcI,  /.  -In.  root. 

Xtnit,  /.  -ten.  xenium  (name 
given  to  satyrical  epigrams  by 
Goethe  und  Schiller), 


VOCABULABY. 


443 


S(i%  f'  -Ifctt*  number  ;  figure. 

ja^Icn,  tr.  tell  out;  pay  off. 

ja^ten,  tr.  tell  over,  count,  number. 

3ft^n,  m.  -neg,  -at)ue.  tooth. 

Jtttt,  «d/.  (or  adu.)  tender,  soft, 
delicate ;  slender,  frail. 

^ttrtl^cit,  /•  tenderness,  softness. 

jcirtli^,  cidj-  {<yr  adv.)  tender,  fond. 

SaviiWtiU  /•  tenderness,  fond- 
ness. 

jaubetn,  intr.  delay,  linger,  hesitate. 

ge^tt,  num.  ten. 

Sti^tn,  n.  -n«,  -It.  token,  sign, 
mark  ;  signal ;  miracle,  wonder. 

^ti^tn,tr.  show,  point  out;  dis- 
play, reflex,  show  one's  self, 
appear. 

3ei(e,  /.  -ten.  line,  row. 

^tii,  /.  -ten.   time,  season. 

gcitung,  /.  -gen.  tidings,  news ; 
newspaper. 

Stli,  n.  -teS,  -tc.   tent. 

gets  insep'le  prefix,  see  307.7. 

gCtfitC^cn,  0.  intr  f.  or  tr.  break 
asunder  or  in  pieces,  shatter. 

jerfatten,  0.  intr.  \.  fall  to  pieces, 
crumble,  become  ruined ;  fall 
out.'  jcrf alien,  p'ple,  decayed, 
ruinous  ;  not  on  good  terms,  at 
variance. 

jerfc^cn,  tr.  tear,  mangle. 

jetrctftcn,  0.  tr.  tear  in  pieces, 
rend  asunder,  intr.  f.  be  torn 
asunder. 

jerfloren,  tr.  destroy,  ruin,  demol- 
ish. 

gerflrcuttng,  /.  -en.  scattering; 
diversion,  amusement;  absence 
of  mind. 

Jtel^en,  0.  tr.  draw,  pull ;  attract ; 
extract,  obtain,  bring  ;  bring  up. 
reflex,  draw  or  move  slowly, 
march ;  stretch,  extend,  intr.  f. 
proceed,  move;  march,  go  on 
an  expedition. 


3icl,  n.  -\%,  -le.  end,  limit ;  goal, 

aim,  object. 
jicmcn,  intr.   (with  dat,)  beseem, 

become,  suit,  be  fitting  for. 
Jtemltt^,  cidj.   {or  adv.)   suitable, 

proper;  moderate,  tolerable. 
jictcn,  tr.  adorn,  ornament. 
dimmer,  n.  -r«,  -r.  room,  aparte- 

ment. 
3inn,  n.  -nneg.  tin.    sfolbttt,  w. 

tin-soldier. 
Jtttetn,  intr.  tremble,  quake. 
^orn,  ni.  -ne^.    anger,  wrath. 
jornig,  adj.  {or  adv.)  angry. 
jU,    adv.    and    sep'le    prefix,    to; 

together,    closed ;    with   adj.  or 

adv.  too,  overmuch,  in  excess. 
prep,  {with  dat.)  to,  unto ;  in 

addition  to,  besides  ;  at,  in,  by; 

in  order  to,  for ;   on,  in ;   with 

preceding,  dat.,  toward,  as  sign 

ofinfin.,  to,  in  order  to. 
jukrcitcn,     tr.     prepare,     make 

ready. 
jubringen,  {irreg.)  tr.  with  accus. 

and  dat.  bring  to,  offer,  present; 

with    accus.    only,    pass  (time), 

spend. 
3utf)t,    /.    -ten.      training,    dis- 
cipline. 
jUcfen,  intr.  \)  or  \.    move  with  a 

quick    motion,    throb,    quiver, 

flash,  tr.  shrink,  shrug. 
Surfer,  m.  -rg,  -r.   sugar,   stuett 

n.    sweetmeats,    confectionary, 

candy. 
JUCrfl,  adv.  at  first. 
jufa^ren,  0.  intr.  f.  {wUhdat.)  dniye 

or  ride  to,  come  in,  approach. 
3Ufluflern,  tr.  whisper. 
jufriebcn,  adj.  {or  adv.)  at  peace, 

content,  pleased. 
Sug,  m.  -geg,  -iige.  drawing,  pull; 

impulse ;  draught,  breath ;  ex- 
pedition, 


4M 


GERMIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


JupngTi^,  adj,  (or  adv.)  access- 
ible, affable. 
gugeften,  0.  intr.  [.  {with  dat)  go 

to,  approach  ;   go  on,  proceed, 

happen,  come  to  pass. 
3U0CI^  ''^-  "^^r  ~f'   rein,  bridle. 
gUglctt^,  ddv.  at  the  same  time. 
JUgreifen,  0.  Mr.  {with  dot.)  take 

hold  of,  seize  ;  lay  hold,  fall  to. 
^Ufunft,  /.  time  to  come,  future. 
juma^cn,     tr.     make    to,     shut, 

fasten. 
gunge,  /.  -gen.  tongue;  language, 

speech. 
JUtetien,  intr.  {with  dat.)  address; 

exhort,  urge ;  try  to  console  or 

pacify. 
3tttU(f ,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix,  back- 
ward, back ;  behindhand,  in  the 

rear. 
JuriilfblciBcn,   0.   intr.  f.    remain 

behind. 
jururfgetdittttcn,  0.  tr.  win  back 

again. 
JUritdfe^rCtt,  intr.   f.    turn  back, 

return. 
glttitrffommcn,    0.   irdr.    \.    come 

back,  return. 
JUriirff^irfcn,  tr.  send  back. 
JUritrffein,    0.  intr.   \.    be  behind 

hand  or  back. 
§ttrttrfllCrtttngett,  tr.  demand  back. 


juriirftocifcn,  0.  tr.  send  back,  re- 
ject. 

JUriirfjic^en,  0.  tr.  draw  back, 
withdraw,  reflex,  move  back, 
retreat,  withdraw. 

JUfammen,  adv.  and  sep'le  prefix. 
together,  in  company,  jointly. 

jufammenf^mcljcn,  0.  intr.  f. 
melt  together,  run  together, 
dwindle  away. 

jttfammcnjiurjcit,  intr.  f.  tumble 
together,  collapse,  fall  in. 

JUtrauen,  tr.  {with  dat.)  entrust  to, 
confide  in.  as  noun,  trust,  con- 
fidence. 

jUDOr,  adv.  before,  formerly. 

JUtQCKeit,  adv.  at  times,  occasion- 
ally. 

gtUttng,  m.  -geS,  -dnge.  compul- 
sion, coercion,  force. 

Jttlttnjig,  num.  twenty. 

Jtuat,  adv.  or  conj.  to  be  sure,  in- 
deed. 

gtoerf,  m.  -cfe§,  -(fe.  aim,  end, 
design,  purpose. 

jhiei,  num.  two.  smaU,  twice. 

}ttietfetto0,  adj.  {or  adv.)  doubt- 
less. 

JtOCifcIn,  intr.  doubt. 

gtUCig,  rn.  -ge«,  -ge.  twig,  branch 

Jtllingen,  0.  tr.  force,  compel 

3tt)0(f,  num.  twelve. 


n.  ENGLISH-GERMAN  YOCABULART. 


a,  an,  indef.  art.  ein,  einc. 

able,  adj.  fal)ig. 

able !  to  be  — ,  !onueu  (irreg.):  see 

254. 
about,  prep,  urn  (accus.),  iilicr  (ac- 

cus.  or  dat).  adv.  ^erum,  uinl^er; 

ungefal)v.  round  aboat,  urn .... 

l)erum. 
above,  adv.  obcn.  prep.  lUcr. 
abstain,    Mr.    fid)    cutI)aUcu    0. 

(from,  (?af.). 
accept,  <r.  ainic^nteii  0.  tr. 
accompany,  tr.  licfllciteu. 
accordingly,  adv.  nlfo. 
account:  on  —  of,   prep.  tDcgcn 

(gen.),  \)0V. 
accuse-,  tr.  auftngcn  (of,  gen.). 
accustom,  tr.  gcuio()ncn  (to,  an). 
accustomed,  adj.  getuoljiit  {govern- 

imj  accufi.  with  fciii). 
acquainted:  be  —  with,  fcuucu 

(irreg.)  tr.  become  —  with,  ten- 

ncn  tcrncn. 
acre,  9l(!er,  m.  -v^,  9tccfcr. 
act :  —  as  if,  t^nn  nt«  0. 
activity,  3:i)Qtigfcit,  /. 
admire,  tr.  bcnjnnbcvn, 
advantage,    ^^ovtl)eiI 

-%  -Ic. 
advice,   Stot^    [^at], 

-atl)e. 
advise,  tr.  ratten  [rotcn]  0.  Mr. 

(dat.). 
aflkir,  <Ba^e,  f.  -d)tn ;  @e|d^aft,  n. 

-t«,  -tc. 


m. 


afraid :  be  — ,  fid)  filrd^ten  (of, 

nor). 
after,  prep,  nad}  (dat).  one .... 

another,  nad)cinanbci:.  adv.  and 

conj.  nad)bem. 
afternoon,    9?ad)nnttag,   m.  -gs, 

-ge. 

afterwards,  adv.  no(^^er,  baronf, 

barnad). 
again,  adv.  tuieber,  nod^  einniat. 

come    — ,    mieberfommen     0. 

Mr.  \. 
age,  ?ntcr,  n.  -r8,  -r. 
alas,  m<er;.  iuel)!  0.6)  \ 
alive,  ad>.  Icbcnbig. 
all,  adj.  all  (see  193),  gan;;. 
allow,  tr.  erlanben.  Mr.  (daf.)taffcn 

0.  be  — ed,  biirfcn  :  see  253. 
alone,  adj.  or  adv.  allein.  all  — , 

gan,^  allein. 
along,  prep,  enttang  (grew.). 
already,  adr.  jd)on,  bereit«. 
also,  adv.  and),  nod). 
altliough,  conj.  obglcic^,  obfc^on. 
always,  adv.  innner,  ftet^. 
America,  'iltnicvifa,  n.  -a«. 
American,  "Jlincvitaner,  m.  -v«,-v  ; 

5lmerifanerin,  /.  -innen. 
American,  adj.  anieritanifd). 
among,  prep,  nnter  {dat.  or  accus.). 
amuse,  tr.  aniiifiven.  be  -  d,  fid) 

amiifircn. 
amusement,  3Seignugen,n.  -n«,-n, 
amusing,  adj.  aniiifant. 
an,  see  su 


446 


ENGLiSH-GimMAN 


and,  conj.  unb. 

angry,  adj.  gornig, 

animal,    3:1) ier    [Xkx],   n.    -re«, 

-re. 
another,  adj.  ein  anber,  nod^  ein : 

see  198.30. 
answer,  tr.    and  intr.   ontworten 

(dat). 
answer,  5tnttt)ort,  /.  -ten. 
antechamber,  3Sorgemac^,  n.  -d^e«, 

-dc^er. 
any,  ady.  irgenb  ein.  not—,  !ein: 

see  195.2.  —  one,  3ebei%  3eber- 

mann.   —  thing,  dtwa^,  ma^, 

oUeg.  not  —  thing,  9^i(f)tg. 
appear,  intr.    erfc^einen  0.,   Qug= 

jel)en  0.,  fcl)einen  0. 
apearance,  5tnfel^en,  n.  -n§,  -n. 
apple,  5lpfet,  m.  -Is,  ^lepfel. 
April,  ?rpril,  m.  -I8. 
arm,  3(rm,  m.  -meg,  -nte.  -chair, 

?e^nftu^I,  m. 
army,  §eer,  n.  -reg,  -re. 
aroond,  prep,  um  (accws.),  um . . . 

^eriint. 
arrive,  intr.  anfommen  0.  f. 
art,    ,(?un[t,  /.    -iinfte.     -school, 

^unftfd^ule,/. 
artist,  ^iinftler,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
as,  ad  \  ot^,  tt)ie ;  fo.  as  if,  atg  ob. 

as  soon  as,  fobatb. 
ashamed :  be  — ,  ftd)  fd)Qmen. 
ask,  fr.  frag  en.  —  after,  fid)  er= 

funbigen  na6). 
asleep,  adv.  im  ©c^fafe.    be  — , 

|ci)(afen. 
assemble,    tr.    tierfammefn,    jam= 

ntetn.  intr.  ftd)  tterfammetn. 
at,  prep,  an,  ^u,  bei,  um.  —  home, 

in  §aufe.  —  twelve  o'clock,  nm 

gttjolf  Uf)r.  —  an  end,  ^,u  Gnbe. 

—  all,  ganj  unb  gar.   not  —  all, 

gar  nid)t.    —  least,  menigfteng. 
Angnst,  Stnguft,  m.  -tS. 
aunt,  2:antc,  /.  -ten. 


anthor,  5>crfaffer,  m.  -r«,  -t* 
antnnin,  iperbft,  m.  -teS,  -tc. 
avenge,  tr.  rcic^en. 
await,  tr.  ermarten,  marten  auf. 
awake,  tr.  mecfen.  intr.  trwadjcn, 

aufmaci^en. 
away,  adj.  meg,  fort,  be  — ,  fort 

fein. 

back,    adj.  l^inter.    adv.  gururf; 

riicfmarts. 
bad,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)   fd^Ied^t,  boje. 

—  fortune,  Ungliicf,  n. 
bag,  ^^eutel,  n.  -l^,  -I 
bake,  tr.  bacfen  0.,  bratenO. 
baptize,  tr.  taufen. 
bar-room,  ©c^enfftube,  /.  -ben. 
be,  intr.  fein  0.  \.,    merbcn  0.  \., 

bleiben,  0.  f.  be  (as  to  health), 

fid}  befinben  0.  there  are,  etc. 

eg  gib t,  etc. 
bear,  tr.  iragen  0.,  ertragen  0. 
beautiful,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  fc^on. 
beauty,  ®i1)bn^eit,/.  -ten. 
because,  conj.  meit. 
become,  intr.  merben  0.  f. 
bed,  ^ett,  n.  -tteg,  -tte  or  -tten. 

to  -,  ^u  «ette,  ing  S3ett. 
beer,  ^ier,  n.  -reg,  -re. 
before,  prep,  ijor  {accus.or  dat.). 

conj.  beoor,  e^e.  adv.  t>orber. 
beg,  tr.  bitten  0.,  betteln.  go  beg- 
ging, bettetn  ge'^en. 
begin,  intr.  anfangen  0. 
t^eginning,  5lnfang,  m.  -gg,  -ange. 
behind,    prep.  Winter  {accus.    or 

dat.). 
behold,  tr.  erbticfen. 
belief,  ©laube,  m.  -eng,  -en. 
believe,  tr.  gtanben. 
belong,    intr.  ge^oren,  ange^orcn 

(to,  dat.). 
bench,  33an!,  /.  -an!e. 
beseem,  impers.  jiemen  {dat),  fid) 

giemen. 


VOCABULAKY. 


U7 


beside,  prq).  ncoen  (accus.  or  dat). 

adv.  and}. 
best,  adj.  (or  adv.)  be  ft 
betake  one's  self,  ftd^  begeben  0. 
betrayer,  ^erriitljer  [4er],  m.  -rg, 

-r. 
better,  adj.  (or  adv.)  beffer, 
better,  tr.  Derbcffern. 
bid,  tr.  I)eit3eu  0.,  befet)ten  0.  (dat). 
bi?,  o,dj.  grof3,  birf,  t)od^. 
bind,  tr.  binben  0. 
bird,  5>oge(,  m.  -tg,  -oget.  little  — , 

5>ogIeiu,  n.  -tt§,  -n. 
birthday,  ©eburt^tag,  m. 
bit,  ©tiicf,  n,  -(fg,  -cfe ;  33igc^cn,  n. 

-xi9,  -n. 
bite,  <r.  bei^en  0. 
bitter,  ad/,  (odu.  -ly)  bitter,  grim= 

mig. 
blaek,  adj,  fc^iuarg, 
blame,  tr.  tabetn» 
bless,  tr.  fegnen. 
blood,  ^lut,  n.  -teS. 
blossom,  53(utt)e  [i8(ute],  /.  -tfjen. 
blue,  adj.  hlau. 
book,  ^nd),n.  -d)e8,  -iid^er. 
bom,  geboren. 
both,  adj.  beibe,  atle  beibe. 
bottle,  §Iafcf)e,  /.  -fdjen. 
boy,  ^uabe,  m.  -en,  -en. 
braye,  adj.  (adv.  -ly)  tapfer. 
bread,  33vob,  w.  -beg. 
break,  tr.   bred) en   0.    intr.    t)tV' 

bred)en,  3erbred)en  0.   —  open, 

erbrec^en  0. 
breakfast,  griif)ftu(f,  n.  -dg,  -de. 
breakfast,  intr.  frut)ftuden. 
bribe,  tr.  beftec^en  0. 
bridge,  53rude,  /.  -den. 
bright,  adj.  l)eU. 
bring,  tr.  bringen  (irreg.).  —  back, 

tDicberbringen  0.,  njieber^olen. 
broad,  adj.  breit. 
brook,    53ad),    m.   -d^eg,  -M)e; 

©riinntein,  n.  -n8,  -n. 


brother,  35rnber,  m.  -r«,  -ilber. 
building,  ©ebdube,  n.  -beg,  -be. 
bnm,  /r.  brennen  (irreg.).  Mr.  Der* 

brennen  (irreg.). 
business,  @cfd)dft,  n.  -t§,  -te, 
busy,  adj.    bcfc^aftigt.    be  —  or 

busied,  fid)  bejdiaftigen. 
but,  conj.  ober,  fonbern,  atlein,  boc^. 

nothing  — ,  nid)tg  atg. 
buy,  tr.  fanfen. 
by,  prep,  bei,  neben.  a/^er  passive, 

bnrc^,  tjor.  longer  —  three  feet, 

nm  brei  gu^  Idnger,  etc. 

call,  <r.  rnfcn  0.,  nennen  (irreg.), 

tiei^en  0.  —  away,  abrufen.  be 

called,  l)ei§cn. 
camp,  Imager,  n.  -rg,  -r. 
can,  (irreg.)  fijnnen  :  see  254. 
carpet,  Sapete,  /.  -ten. 
carriage,  Sag  en,  m.  -ng,  -agcn  or 

-n. 
carry,  tr.  tragen  0. 
cast  down,  <r.  ftiirjen. 
castle,  Bd)io^,  n.  -ffeg,  -offer. 
cathedral,  S)om,  m.  -meg,  -me. 
catch,  tr.  fan  gen  0.    —  cold,  \\6) 

erfditen. 
cause,  mir*.  laffen :  see  343.1. 56,  d. 
cease,  intr.  anfpren. 
certainly,  ad>\  getui^. 
change,  tr.  dnbern,  tierdnbern.  intr. 

fid)  uerdnbern. 
charitable,  adj.  borm^er^^ig. 
charity,  53armt)er5igfeit,/.  /  Sobl^ 

tt)dtigfeit,  /. 
Charles,  ^arl,  m.  -Ig. 
charming,  a^j.  (adv.  -ly)  rcigcnb, 

ollerliebft. 
chat,  intr.  ^tonbern. 
cheap,  adj.  bitlig. 
cherish,  tr.  fc^dljen. 
child,  ^inb,  n.  -beg,  ~ber. 
chilly :  be  — ,  froftein,  impers.  vMh 


448 


ENGLISH-aERMAN 


choose,  tr.  voa\)len. 

Christian,  Sfirift,  m.  -ten,  -ten; 

(5l)ri[tin,  /.  -innen. 
church,  ^ird)c,  /.  -cf)eiu 
city,  @tabt,  /.  -abte. 
claim,  make  —  to,  ttjotten:  see 

258. 
clever,  adj.  flug. 
climb,     tr.    fteigen   0.,     ^inauf* 

fteigen. 
cloister,  ttofter,  n.  -r8,  -oflcr. 
clothes,  clothing,  tieibcr,  pL 
cloud,  2Bo(fe,/.  -fen, 
coachman,  tntjc^er,  m.  -r8,  -r. 
coat,  9Jo(f,  m.  -deg,  -ocfe. 
coffee,  taffee,  m.  -eeg. 
cold,  acZ/.  {adv.  -\j)  iaU.  catch  — , 

fic^  erfdlten. 
Cologne  (the  city),  ^otn,  n.  -n8. 
colored,  adj.  bunt. 
come,  intr.  fommen  0.  j.  —  back, 

juriidfommen,   guriicffeliren.    — 

forth,  ^ert>or!ommen.  —to  one's 

help,  einem  ju  C^utfe  fommen. 

—  out,  l)inau§fommen. 
comfort,  tr.  troften. 
command,  tr.  ^eigen,  befeljien  {dat.) 

0.,  gebieten  {dat.)  0. 
command,  S3efe^(,  m.  -U,  -le. 
commit,  tr.  bege^cn  0. 
communicate,  tr.  mitt^eiten  [4ei* 

ten]  (to,  daf.). 
companion,  ©efa^rte,  m.  -en. 
company,  ©efeUfd^aft,  /.  -ten. 
complain,  intr.  flag  en. 
complete,  tr.  tJoUenben. 
complete,  adj.   {adv.  -ly)    tooEig, 

tiollenbet. 
comrade,  tomerab,  m.  -ben,  -ben ; 

©efett,  m.  -en,  -en. 
concern  one's  self,  ft(^  befiimmern. 
concerning,  prep,  ntegen  {gen.). 
condemn,  tr.  Derbammen. 
confidence,  SSertrouen,  n.  -n§. 
conquer,  tr.  erobcrn. 


consider,  tr.  betraci^ten.  —  as,  IjaU 

ten  fiir  0. 
console,  tr.  troften. 
contain,  tr.  ent{)atten  0. 
contemplate,  tr.  betrac^ten. 
content,  adj.  gufrieben. 
content  one's  self,  fid^  begnitgen. 
cook,  tr.  tod) en. 
cool,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  fii^I. 
copy,  tr.  abfci^reiben  0. 
corner,  @de,  /.  -den. 
cost,  tr.  foften. 
costly,  adj.  foftUc^,  foftbar. 
count  (earl),  @raf,  m.  -fen,  -fen. 
countess,  ©rafin,  /.  -innen. 
country,  ?anb,  n.    -be§,  -cinber. 

natiye  — ,  25aterlanb,  n. 
couple,  ^aar,  n.  -reg,  -re. 
courage,  9JJutt)  [3}?nt],  m.  -t^e§; 

Xa^ferfeit,  /. 
cousin,  35etter,  m.  -r§,  -rn ;  ^ou-- 

fine,/,  -nen. 
coward,  geigting,  m.  -g§,  -ge. 
create,  fc^offen  0. 
crime,  SSerbrec^en,  n.  -ng,  -n. 
criminal,  SSerbrec^er,  m.  -r^,  -r. 
crowd,    ©ebrange,    n.   -eg,    -e; 

3}?enge,  /.    -gen;     ©d^aar,  /. 

-ren. 
crown,  ^rone,  /.  -nen. 
cup,  Xaffe,  /.  -ffen ;    ^ed^er,  m. 

-rg,  -r. 
curse,  tr.  flrn^en  intr.  {with  dat.  m- 

auf). 
cut,  tr.   fc^neiben  0.    —  off,   ah' 

j(|lagen  0.,  abfc^neiben  0. 

dance,  intr.  tonjen. 
danger,  @efat)r,  /.  -ren. 
dangerous,  adj.  gefci^rlid^. 
dare,  intr.  \x6)  ttjagen ;  biirfen :  see 

253. 
dark,  adj.  bnnfel. 
daughter,  2;od^ter,  /.  -od)ter. 
day,  2;ag,  m.  -geg,  -ge. 


VOCABULAEY. 


449 


dead,  adj.  tobt  [tot]. 

dear,  adj,  \\t^,  wert^  [n)ert],  t^euer 

[teuer]. 
death,  iob,  m.  -beg,  -be. 
debate,  infr.  bebattieren,  ^x6)  \ixtU 

ten  0. 
deceiye,  tr.  betriigen  0. 
December,  S)eceTnber,  m.  -r8. 
declare,  <r.  erfldren. 
deed,  %\)ai,  f.  -ten. 
delight :  it  delights  me,  e8  freut 

deep,  ac?;.  tief. 

deliyer,  tr.  abUefern. 

demand,  tr.  tierlangen. 

deny,  tr.  tjerfagen. 

descend,  tr.  {or  intr.)  !^erab=  or  ]^in= 

unter^fteigen  0. 
describe,  tr.  befc^reiben  0. 
description,      33e|c^reibung,      /. 

-gen. 
desert,  tr.  oerloffen  0. 
deserre,  tr.  tjerbienen.   -ing,  ber^ 

bient. 
devote  one's  self,  ftd)  tDibmen. 
die,  intr.  fterben  0.  |. 
difficult,  adj.  f(f)tt)er. 
diligent,  adj.  (adv.  -ly)  ftei^ig. 
dinner,  3}fittagge[fen,  n.  -n^,  -n. 
direct,    adj.    (adv.     ,-ly)    birect, 

geraben  3Beg§. 
disappear,  intr.  »erfc!^tt)inben  0. 
discovery,    (Srfinbnng,    /.   -gen; 

(Sntbecfung,  /.  -gen. 
distant,  adj.  entfernt,  fern,  lueit. 
divine,  adj.  gottlic^. 
do,  tr.  (or  intr.)  t{)nn  0.,  ma6)cn. 

—  without,  entbe^ven.  how  — 

you  —1  njie  gef)t  c%  3l)nen? 
doctor,    %vit,   m.    -te«,   Heqte; 

2)octor,  m.  -r§,  -ren. 
dog,  ^nnb,  m.  -beS,  -be. 
door,  X()ur,/. -ren. 
down,    adv.    ^ernnter,    ^inunter, 

^erab,  ^inab  :  see  362.3,  379.1. 


draw  near,  intr.  fi6)  ndljtvn  (to, 

dat.). 
dream,  Xxanm,  m.  -meg,  -dnme, 
dream,  intr.  {or  tr.)  trannten. 
dress,  ^leib,  n.  -beg,  -ber. 
dress,  tr.   !(eiben.   intr.    fid)    an^ 

jjie^en  0. 
drink,  tr.  trinfen  0. 
drive,  tr.  {or  mir.)  fal)ren  0.,  fii'^^ 

ren.  —  (for  pleasure),  fpa^ieren 

fa^ren.   —  by  or  past,   Dorbet 

fa^ren  (an).  —  out,  tr.  tierjagen. 

—  up,  t)orfal)ren. 
duke,    ^er^og,   m.  -geg,   -ge   or 

-oge. 
during,  prep,  tcd^renb  {gen,), 
duty,  ''WW,  /.  -ten. 
dwell,  intr.  n)o()nen. 
dwelling,  2So()nnng,  /.  -geiu 

each,  pron.  adj.  jeber,  ein  ieber.  — 

one,  jeber  :  see  190.  —  other, 

einanber ;    fid),  nng,    etc. :    see 

155.4. 
eager,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  eifrig. 
ear,  O^x,  n.  -reg,  -ren.    -ring, 

Ol^rring,  m. 
early,  adj.  frii^. 
earn,  tr.  geratnnen  0. 
earnestness,  (Srnft,  m.  -fteg. 
earth,  ©rbe,  /.  -ben. 
easy,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  Ieic!^t. 
eat,  tr.  e[fen  0.,  fpeifen  irdr. 
education,  (Srjiet^ung,  /. 
either,    conj.     meber,     enttt)eber. 

either . . .  .  or .  .  .,  entmeber . . . 

ober .  .  . 
emperor,  ^aifer,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
employment,     53ef(^dftignng,    /. 

-gen. 
empty,  adj.  h\it,  (eer. 
end,  (Snbe,  n.  -eg,  -n.  at  an  — ,  ^n 

(Snbe. 
endeavor,  intr.  f\6)  beftreben,  t3er= 

[idjen. 


450 


ENGLISH-GERMAN 


endeavor,  53eftreben,  n.  -nS. 
enemy,  geinb,  m.  -be«,  -be* 
England,  ©ngtanb,  n.  -b8. 
EngUsh,  adj.  englifd^. 
Englishman,  (Suglcinber,  m.  -r8, 

-r. 
enjoy,   <r.    \\6)  freuen  (gen.),   ge* 

itie^en   0.    (gen.),    fro^  werben 

(gen.). 
enough,  adv.  germg. 
entice,  in  loden,  antocfen. 
entire,  adj.  gan^.   {adv.  -ly)  ganj 

unb  gar,  uoUig. 
especially,  adv.  befonberS. 
estate,  @ut,  n.  -teg,  -iiter;  :2anb= 

gut,  n. 
eternal,  ad/,  (adu.  -ly)  ett)ig. 
eyen,  adu.  felbft,  aucf).  —  if,  felbft 

njenn,  ouc^  iDenn,  obg(eid). 
evening,  2tbenb,  m.  -b§,  -be. 
every,  jebeu  (190).  every  one,  eiu 

jeber,  alle,  aU^^  (193.3),  3eber» 

mann  (187).  everything,  olles 

(193).       everywhere,       adv. 

liberalt. 
evil,  a^i.  bo8. 
evil,     bag    53bfe,     33o8l)eit,     /. 

-ten. 
example,  53eif^iet,  n.  -Ig,  -le.  for 

— ,  sum  ^eifpiel. 
exchange,  tr.  uertaufc^en. 
excuse,  tr.  entfci^ulbigeu. 
expect,  tr.  ertuarten. 
expedition,  ^uq,  m.  -geS,  -iige. 
experience,  t.  eriebeu. 
explain,  tr.  erffaren.    -  one's  self 

to  anyone,   einem  dlttt  fte^eu 

0. 
eye,  5luge,  n.  -g,  -u. 

lace,  (5)efTrf)t,  n.  -tg,  -ter. 

IkU,  intr.  fallen  0.   —  together, 

aufontmenftiirgen. 
family,  ^amilie,  /.  -ien. 
famous.,  adi.  berii^iUu 


far,  ac?j.  (or  adv.)  n)eit.   not — , 

unmeit.    not  —  from,  prep,  un* 

tt)eit  (gren.). 
fate,  @d^icffa(,  n.  -Ig,  -le. 
father,    5Sater,    m.    -rg,    -ater. 

—  land,  35aterlanb,  n. 
fault,  ^el)ler,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
fear,  ^urc^t,  /. 
fear,    tr.    fiirc^ten,    fid^    fiird^ten 

(t)or). 
fearful,  ad;,  furd^tbar. 
February,  gebruar,  m.  -rg. 
feel,  intr.  fid)  fii'^Ien,  fi(^  beftnben 

0.,  fein  (w)i</i  c?af.) ;  see  292.4. 
feeling,  ©efiibt,  w.  -leg,  -le. 
fellow-citizen,  9)iitburger,  m.  -rg, 

-r. 
fetch,  tr.  l^oten. 
few,  adj.  wenig,   menige.   a  — , 

einige  (pi),  nid)t  tjiele. 
field,  ^etb,  n.  -beg,  -ber. 
fight,  intr.  fampfen. 
find,  tr.  finben  0. 
fine,  acZ/.  fein ;  fd)bn. 
finger,  finger,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
finish,  tr.  toottenben. 
finished,  adj.  fertig,  tjoltenbet. 
fire,  ^euer,  n.  -rg,  -r. 
first,  adj.  erft.  adv.  erft,  suerjlt, 
flame,  glamme,  /.  -men. 
Florence,  ^^lorenj,  n. 
flower,  33Iume,  /.  -men. 
follow,  tr.  folgen  (dat). 
foUowing,  adj.  folgenb. 
fool,  %\)ov,  m.  -reg,  -ren. 
foolish,  adj.  bumm. 
foot,  gu§,  m.  -ffeg,  -iiffe. 
for,  conj.  benn.   prep,  fiir  {accus.\ 

IM  (dat.),  feit  (dat.),  uor  (da/.  c«r- 
accws.). 
forbid,  tr.  Derbieten  0. 
force,  tr.  jttjingen  «^. 
foreign,  adj.  fremb.   —  land,  Ut 

^rembe. 
forest,  2BaIb,  m.  -beg,  -iitbcr. 


TOCABULARY. 


451 


foreyer,  adv.  auf  ctuig. 

forget,  tr.  tiergeffen  0. 

forgive,  tr.  dergeben  0. 

former,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  frut)er. 

fortune,  ©lucf,  n.  -cfe«,  -cfe. 

forward,  adv.  oortucirts. 

four,  num.  t)ier. 

France,  gvanfreic^,  n.  -d^g. 

Frederick,  gviebrid^,  m.  -d)^, 

free,  <r.  befreien. 

free,      adj.      {adv.      -ly)     frei. 

—  thought,  ®eban!enfrei^eit,  /. 
freedom,  ^rei^eit,  /. 

French,  adj.  franjbfifd^.    —  man, 
granpfe,       m.      -fen,       -fen. 

—  woman,  ^rangbfin,  /.  -innen. 
fresh,  adj.  frifd^. 

friend,  grennb,  m.  -beg,  -be. 
friendly,  adj.  {or  adv.)  freunbli^. 
friendship,  greunbf(i)aft,  /.  -ten. 
fright,  @c^re(f,  m.  -de8,  -de. 
fHghtened :  be  — ,  erfc!^re(f en,  fic^ 

erfc^recfen  (iiber). 
from,  prep,  tjon,  au^  {dat);  dnt. 

case:  see  222.1,3. 
fruit,  f^rnc^t,  /.  -ucf)te. 
frustrate,  tr.  tjereitetn. 
full,  adj.  X)oU  (of,  gen.). 
furnish,  tr.  nteublieren. 
further,  adj.  {or  adv.)  n)elter. 

game,  @piet,  n.  -teg,  -Ic. 
garden,  ©orten,  m.  -n6,  -cirten. 
gardener,  ©artner,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
gay,  adj.  fro^r  (i^  coZor)  bunt. 
general,  @cnera(,  m.  -I§,  -ale. 
genius,  ®enie,  n.  -leg,  -leg. 
gentleman,  §err,  m.  -rrn,  -rren. 
German,  adj.  beutfd^.   noun,  ber 

2)eutfd)e,  e<c. 
Germany,  5)pntfrf)(anb,  n.  -b8. 
get,  #r.  ^oten,  »erf(i)Qffen.     away, 

fid^  (oSmac^en  (oon).  —  up,  auf* 

ftet)en  0. 
gift,  ®aht,  /.  -beiu 


girl,  aJJabd^en,  n,  -n§,  -n. 

give,  tr.  fc^enfen,  geben  0.  —one's 

hand,  bie  ^anb  reic^en.  —  up, 

tr.  entfagen  0.  {dat.),  auf  geben  0. 
glad,    adj.  gliicflic^.     be  — ,  fic^ 

fveuen. 
glance,  intr.  blicfen. 
glass,  ©lag,  n.  -feg,  -ofer. 
go,   intr.  get) en   0.    —  along  or 

too,  mitgel^en.    —  away,  fort:= 

ge^en,    abreifen.    —  out^  aug= 

ge^en,  ^inaugge^en. 
God,  @ott,  m.  -tteg,  -otter. 
godlike,  adj.  gotttid^. 
gold,    @otb,   n.  -beg.    —  piece, 

©otbftM,  n. 
golden,  adj.  gotben. 
good,  adj.  gut.    a  —  deal,  t)iet. 

—  fortune,  ©liid,  n.  -cfeg. 
government,  ^iegierung,  /.  -gen. 
gracious,  adj.  gudbig. 
great,  adj.  gro^,  t)oc^. 
green,  adj.  griin. 
grim,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  grimmig. 
grow,  intr.  njad)fen  0. ;  tuerben  0. 
guardian,  ^ormunb,  m.  -beg,  -be. 
guest,  @aft,  m.  -teg,  -afte. 
guilty,  adj.  frfjulbig. 

hair,  §aar,  n.  -reg,  -re. 

half,  adj.  {or  adv )  t)atb.    —  an 

hour,  eine  ^atbe  @tunbe. 
hall,  @aat,  m.  -teg,  -dte. 
hand,    §anb,  /.   -dnbe.    on  the 

other—,  adv.  bag  eg  en. 
handsome,  adj.  fc^on. 
hang,  tr.  or  intr.  ^dngen. 
happiness,  ©tiicf,  n.  -deg. 
happy,  adj.  gtiidtic^. 
hard,  adj.  ^art,  fd)tt)er. 
hardly,  ado.  fanm. 
hasty,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  ^aftig,  eitig. 
hat,  |)ut,  m.  -teg,  -iitc. 
hate,  tr.  t)offen. 
hateful,  adj.  {or  adv.)  ge^dffig. 


452 


ENGLISfl-GEEMAN 


hatred,  ^a%  m.  -ffeg» 

hare,  tr.  ^aben  (irreg.).  haye  to, 

miiffen :  see  256.   hare  (a  thing 

done),  laffen:  see  343.1,56,d. 
helpers,  pron.  er ;  berjenige,  ber. 

—  who,  113  er. 
head,     Mopl    m.     -feg,    -o^Jfe; 

@pi^e,  /.  -^en. 
health,  @ejunbt)eit,  /. 
healthy,  adj.  gefunb. 
hear,  tr.  l^oren. 
heed,  tr.  aditen  (j/en.).  take—,  fic^ 

l^iiten. 
heir,  (Srbe,  m.  -ben,  -ben. 
help,  tr.  ^etfen  0.  (dat),  gu  ^iilfe 

fommen  (c^ai.)- 
help,  C^iitfe,  /• 
helpfal,  ac?/.  t)ulfreic^. 
Henry,  ^einric^,  m.  -c^g. 
her,  pers.  pron.    [te.  poss.  pro/i. 

\\)x,  ber  i^rige. 
hero,  §elb,  m.  -ben,  -ben. 
heroine,  ^elbin,  /.  -innen. 
hide,  tr.  tjerbergen  0. 
hi^h,  adj.  l}od)  (t)o^er  etc.). 
him,  it)n.    —  self,  felbft. 
hinder,  tr.  ^inbern. 
hii-e,  tr.  ntiet^en  [mieten]. 
his,  poss.  pron.  fein,  ber  feinige. 
history,  ©efc^id^te,  /.  -ten. 
hold,  tr.  fatten  0. 
home,  ^eimat   [=mat],  /.  -en.   at 

— ,  lu  §aufe. 
honor,  (S^re,  /.  -ren. 
honor,  tr.  e^ren. 
honorable,     adj.     e^rtid^,   el^ren- 

^aft. 
hope,  intr.  ^  off  en. 
hope,  ^offnung,  /.  -gen. 
horrorstrnck :  be  — ,  grauen  (im- 

pers.  with  dot.). 
horse,  ^ferb,  n.  -be8,  -be. 
hot,  adj.  t)ei^. 
hour,  @tunbe,  /.  -ben. 
house,  ^au«,  w.  -jeg,  -aufer. 


how,  adv.  itiie.  — erer,  adv.  n)le 

and) ;  bod). 
humanity,  3)lenf(^t)eit,  /. 
hundred,  num.  t)unbert. 
hunger,  hunger,  m.  -rg. 
hun^y :  be  -  ,  '^nngern  {impers. 

with  accus.). 
hunt,  tr.  jag  en. 
hunt,  3agb,  /.  -ben. 
hunter,  Sciger,  m.  -r«,  -r. 
hurry,  intr.  eilen. 
hurry,  (Sile,  /. 
husband,  Wann,  m.  -nc8,  -dnner; 

@atte,  m.  -en,  -en. 
hut,  §utte,  /.  -ten. 

I,  pers.  pron.  ici). 

idea,  33egriff,  m.  -p,  -ffe. 

idle,  adj.  trcige,  faul. 

if,  conj.  tt)cnn.  as  — ,  a(8  ob. 

ill,  ac?/.  franf. 

illness,  ^ronffieit,  /.  -ten. 

imitate,  tr.  nad)a^nten  (dat.). 

important,  adj.  widjtiQ. 

impossible,  adj.  unnioglid). 

imprisoned,  adj.  gefangen. 

improve,  tr.  oerbeffern,  beffern. 

in,  prep,  in  {dat.  or  accus.):  see 

376. 
inclined,  adj.  geneigt. 
incredible,  adj.  unglaubUci^. 
indifference,  @Ieid)gu(tig!eit,  /. 
indifferent,  adj.  g(eid)gu(tig,  einer^ 

lei  {indeclinable). 
indispensable,  adj.  nnentbe^rtit^. 
industrious,  adj.  flei^ig. 
industry,  S^citigfeit, /. 
inexperience,  Unevfa^reul)eit,  /. 
inherit,  tr.  erben. 
injure,  tr.  fd^abcn  (dat),  uerle^en. 
instead   of,    prep,    ouftatt,    ftatt 

(gen.  or  injin.  with  jn). 
intend,  intr.  t)orboben;  fld^  (dat.) 

t)ornef)men,  beabfidjtigen. 
interesting",  adj.  intereffant. 


VOCABULAEY. 


4:53 


into,  prep,  in  (accus.):  see  376. 
invitation,  ©intabung,  /.  -gen. 
invite,  tr.  eintobeu  0. 
it,  pers.  pron.  e§ ;  'ba^,  baSjenige. 
Itoly,  Stalien,  n.  -lens. 

January,  3attuar,  m.  -rg. 
jew,  3ube,  m.  -ben,  -ben. 
journey,  W\\t,  /  -fen. 
journey,   inir.  reifen.    —  away, 

abreifen. 
joy,  i^renbe,  /.  -ben. 
judge,  9Jid)tei%  m.  -r^,  -r. 
judgment-seat,  9?id)terftu^l,  m. 
July,  3uU,  m.  -Us. 
June,  3nni,  m.  -nig» 
just,  oc?;.  biEig. 

keep,  tr.  be^alten  0.,    er^atten  0. 

—  from,  \\^  ent^alten. 
keeper,  ^iiter,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
kill,  tr.  tobten  [toten]. 
kind,  adj.  freunblirf). 
kind,  %xi,  f.  -ten.    what  — of, 

tt)ag  fiir  :  see  175. 
kindness,  2Bot)Ut)at,  /.  -ten. 
king,  ^onig,  m.  -gg,  -ge. 
knee,  ,^nie,  n.  -eg,  -e. 
kneel,  Mr.  fnieen. 
knife,  SO^effer,  n.  -rg,  -r. 
knock,  i^j^r.  ffopfen,  ipoc^en. 
know,  tr.   It)  iff  en  (irreg.),  fennen 

(irreg.),  evfennen. 
known,  adj.  befannt. 

lack:  there  is  a  —of,   eg  fe^U 

(il)m)  an. 
lady,  !5)ame,  /.  -men. 
lament,  tr,  bemeinen. 
lamp,  ?ampe,  /.  -pen. 
land,  ?anb,  n.  -beg,  -anber. 
landlord,  mxt^  [SEStrt],  m.  -tfjeg, 

-tf)e. 
large,  cw?/.  gro§. 
last,  cwi/.  le^t. 


last,  intr.  bauern. 

late,  adj.  or  adv.  fpdt. 

laugh,  intr.  Iarf)en. 

laughable,  adv.  Icici^ertid^. 

law,  @efe^,  n.  -^eg,  -^e. 

lay,  tr.  leg  en. 

lazy,  adj.  fant,  trdge. 

lead,  tr.  fiiljren.    —  back,  juriidE^ 

gie{)en    0.      —    out,     l^inaug= 

fii^ren. 
learn,  tr.  (ernen. 
learned,  adj.  gele'^rt. 
least:  at     ,  cidu.  njenigfteng,  ant 

tt)enigften. 
leave,  tr.  tterlaffen ;  laffen  0. 
left,  adj.  Unf. 

less,  adj.  or  adv.  minber,  weniger. 
letter,  S3rief,  m.  -feg,  -fe. 
library,  8ibUott)e!,  /.  -!en. 
lie,  intr.  Uegen  0. 
life,  ?eben,  n.  -ng,  -n. 
lift,   tr.    ^eben   0.     —  up,   er« 

l^eben  0. 
light,  2id}t,  n.  -teg,  -ter. 
light,  tr.  an^iinben,  anfteden. 
like,  adj.  gleid^. 

like :  be  like,  gleici^en  0.  (dat.), 
like,  tr.  {or  intr.)  lieben,  mogen 

(irreg. :  see  255),  gern  ^aben.  I 

—  it,  eg  gefoUt  mir. 

listen,  intr.  ^ord)en,  3ut)bren,  an= 

t)oren. 
little,  adj.  !tein,  ircnig. 
live,  intr.  Icben ;  luo^nen. 
lonely,  adj.  einfam. 
long,  adj.  lang.  adv.  tange,  tdngft. 

—  ago,   Idngft.    as  —  as,  fo= 
lange. 

look,  tr.  (or  intr.)  fet)cn  0.,  btirfen, 
onfefjen.  —  down,  l^innntev 
blicfen,  ^innnterfet)en. 

lose,  tr.  Derlieren  0. 

love,  /r.  tieben. 

love,  IHcbe,  /. 

lowj  adj.  niebrig. 


454 


ENGLISH-GERMAN 


lyin^,  pp'le  of  ticg en  0. 

maid,  SJJagb,  /.  -agbe» 

make,  tr.  mad)en. 

man,  aJlenjc^,  m.    -\6)tn,   -fd^en; 

ajJann,  m.  -nne§,  -tinner. 
mansard,  9}?anfarbe,  /.  -ben. 
many,  adj.   or   noun,   t)iet,    tjiele. 

—  a,  mand^. 
March,  Maxi,  m.  -^eS. 
march,  intr.  marfd^ieren. 
mark  (a  coin),  Ttavt,  f.  -fen. 
market:    —  place,    'Sflaxtt,  m. 

-fte§,  -cirfte. 
massiye,  '^idj.  maffidc*. 
master,  ilReifter,  m.  -r«,  -r. 
matter:   it  does  not  matter  to 

me,  e«  fommt  mir  nid^t  barauf 

on. 
May,  Wai,  m.  -aie8. 
meantime,  adv.  and  conj.  inbcffen. 
meat,  ^leifc^,  n.  -fd^eS,  -jd^e. 
medsd,  9)^ebaitle,  /.  -en. 
meet,  tr.  {or  intr.)  begegnen  (dat), 

treffen  0.,  fid)  begegnen. 
merchant,  ^anfmann,  m.  -anneg, 

-anner  or  (more  generally)  ^auf= 

leute. 
methinks,     impers.    mic^    bun!t, 

from  biinfen. 
ndle,  9Reile,  /.  -ten. 
milk,  mild),  /. 
mine,  poss.  pron.  mein,  bcr  niel= 

nige. 
minister,  SQfinifter,  m.  -r8,  -r. 
minnte,  9JJinute,  /.  -ten. 
misfortune,  UngliicE,  n.  -de8. 
mock,  tr.  {or  intr.)  fpotten  {gen.). 
modesty,  ^efc^eiben^eit,  /. 
moment,  9Jlinnte,  /.  -ten ;  3(ugen^ 

blidf,  m.  -dfeS,  -de. 
monastery,  ^tofter,  n.  -rg,  -ofter. 
money,  @etb,  n.  -be8,  -ber. 
month,  ajJonat,  m.  -tg,  -te. 
moon,  3Jlonb,  m.  -beg,  -be  or  -ben. 
more^  adj.  (or  adv.)  nte^r. 


morning,  aJJorgcn,  m.  -n8,  -n. 
most,  adv.  am  meiften. 
mother,  aJJutter,  /.  -litter. 
mountain,'  53 erg,  m.  -geg,  -ge. 
mourn,     tr.    (w   intr.     beweinen, 

flagen. 
move,  intr.  ^te^en  0.    —  in,  ein= 

jie^en.  —  out,  angjie^en. 
moTcment,  33en)egung,  /.  -gen. 
Mr.,  §err,  m.  -rrn,  -rren. 
much,  adj.  {or  adv.)  oiel. 
murder,  9JJorb,  m.  -beg,  -be. 
murder,  tr.  ermorben. 
music,  a^nfif,  /. 
my,  poss.  pron.  mein, 

name,  tr.  nennen  {irreg.). 
name,  9Zame,  m.  -ng,  -n. 
naughty,  adj.  unartig. 
necessary,  adj.  not^ig  [notig]. 
neck,  ^n(g,  m.  -feg,  -alfe. 
necklace,     ^algbanb,    n.    -beg, 

-cinber. 
need,  tr.  bebiirfen,  brand^en. 
need,  ajott)  mot],  f.  -ot^e.   there 

is  —  of,  eg  braud^t. 
neighbor,  9^ad)bar,  m.  -rg  or  -rn, 

-rn. 
neither,  conj.  tucbcr.  — ....  nor, 

njeber ....  nod^.  pron.   feiner, 

etc. 
nerve,  9?ert)e,  /.  -tien. 
never,  adv.  nie,  niemolg. 
nevertheless,  adv.  bennot^,  boc^. 
new,  adj.  nen. 
news,  a?ad)rid^t,  /.  -ten. 
newspaper,  S^itnng,  /.  -gen. 
next,   adj.   m6)\i  {sup.    of  na^), 

onber :  see  203.1a. 
night,  aJad^t,  /.  -odfite. 
no,  adv.  nein.   adj.  !ein.  —  one, 

Reiner,  a^iemonb.     —  longer, 

nid^t  me^r. 
noble,  adj.  ebet.    noun,  ber  @b!e, 

5(beUge, 


VOCABULABY. 


455 


nobleman^  (Sbetmanu,  m. 

nod,  intr.  nicfen. 

north,  9^orb  or  S'Jorbeu,  m.  -ng. 

northern,  adj.  norblic^. 

not,  adv.  nid)t.    —  one,  !ein  eiu= 

^iger,  etc. 
nothing,    noun,   ^id^t€,  n.    adv. 

nic^tg.  —  hut,  ni(^tg  alg. 
novel,  9Joman,  m.  -n^,  -tie. 
NoYemher,  9?otjember,  m.  -r8. 
now,  adv.  je^t. 
nomher,  5luso^(,  /. 

ohey,  ir.  ge^orc^en  (dat), 
obliged:  be  —  to,  ntuffen:  see 

256. 
ocean,  2J?eer,  n.  -re8,  -re. 
o'clock,  Ut)r, /.;  see  211.3. 
October,  October,  m.  -rg. 
of,  prep.  \}on{dat.). 
offer,  <r.  anbieten  0.,  reic^en. 
officer,  Offijier,  m.  -r§,  -re. 
often,  adv.  oft. 
old,  adj.  ait 

on,  prep,  auf  {dat.  or  accus.). 
once,  ac?u.  einnmt^.  at  — ,  gleidf). 
one,  num.  eiu.    adj.  ein,  eine,  ein, 

etc.    pron.  einer,  eine,  eing,  etc. 

indef.    pron.     man:    see    185. 

not—,  fein. 
only,  adj.  einjig.   adu.  olleiu,  nur. 

not  — . . .  .  but  also,  uicf)t  nur 

....  fonbern  and). 
open,  tr.  offnen,  aufmac^eu. 
opinion,  9iReinung,  /.  -gen. 
opportunity,  ©etegen^eit,  /.  -ten. 
oppose,  tr.  fid^  njiberfetien. 
opposite,  prep,  gegeniiber  (dat.). 
or,  conj.  ober. 
order,   tr.  beflellen;    befe^Ien  0. 

(dat). 
order:  in  —  to  or  that,  conj.  ha% 

bomit:    see   332.56,    urn:    see 

346.1. 
orthodox^  adj.  re^tgtaubin. 


other,  adj.  aitber. 
otherwise,  adv.  fouft. 
ought,  intr.  joUeii :  see  257. 
our,  poss.  adj.  uiifer,  ber  un[rigc. 
out  (of),  prep,  aug  ((?ai.). 
outbreak,     5lugbru(^,    m.     -d^g, 

-iic^e. 
outlet,  5Iuggaug,  m.  -g§,  -angc. 
outside,  prep.  au§er^atb  (gen.). 
over,  prep,  iiber  {dat.  or  accus.), 

adv.  '^Iniiber. 
own,  adj.  eigen. 
owner,  S3efi^er,  m.  -r8,  -r. 

pace,  @d)ritt,  m.  -tteg,  -tte. 

pain,  tr.  fc^merseu  {dat.). 

pain,  ^d)mer3,  m.  -3e3  or  -;5ett6, 

-sen. 
paint,  tr.  or  intr.  maten. 
painter,  9Jfa(er,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
painting,  ©emcitbe,  n.  -beg,  -be, 
pair,  ''^aax,  n.  -reg,  -re, 
pale,  adj.  bta§. 
palace,  ^^^ataft,  m.  -tg,  -cifle. 
parents,  p^  (Sltern. 
part,  2:^ei(  [2^ei(],  m.  or  n.  -leg, 

-le.   take  — ,  t^eilnet)men  [teil=] 

0. 
part,  tr.  trennen.  intr.  fid^  tren^ 

nen. 
pass  (time),   tr.  ^ubringen,    tier* 

bring  en  {irreg.).  intr.  Derftreid^en 

0. 
past,  adv.  tiorbei. 
pastor,  starrer,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
path,  ^|?fab,  m.  -beg,  -be. 
pay,  tr.  begalilen. 
peace,  ^riebe  or  -ben,  w.  -eng, 

-en. 
peaceful,  adj.  friebtid^. 
peasant,  33aner,  m.  -rg  or  -rn,  -r 

or  -rn. 
pen,  ^cber,  /.  -  rn. 
people,  pi.  l^cntc ;  SSotf,  n.  -fe« 

-ol!er» 


456 


ENGLTSH-GERMAN 


penetrate,    ir.    burd^bringen    0. 

(sep'le). 
perhaps,  adv.  toieUeii^t ;  tno'^L 
philosopher,  ^t)iIofopt),  m.  -p^tn, 

pictnre,  53ilb,  n.  -be8,  -ber. 
piece,  @tu(f,  n.  -cfeg,  -cfe» 
pilgrim,  ^^Ulger,  m.  -rS,  -r. 
pity,  iy.  bebauern,  be!(agen ;  bau* 

ern  {impers.).  take  —  on,  fid^  er* 

barmen  (gen.). 
place,  ^(al^,  m.  -^e^,  -ci^e. 
plant,  tr.  ipftansen. 
plant,  ^ftanje,  /.  -^tn ;  @enjac^§, 

n.  -fe8,  -fe. 
plate,  XtUtx,  m,  -rs,  -r. 
play,  mtr.  fpielen. 
play,  @^iei,  /i.  -Ie8,  -Ic. 
players,  pZ.  @^ielleutc. 
pleasant,  adj.  angene^nt. 
please,  ir.  gef alien  0.  {dnt). 
pleasure,  ^reube,  /.  -ben;  SSer^ 

gniigen,  n.  -n^,  -n, 
pluck,  tr.  pfliicfen. 
poem,  ®ebi(^t,  n.  ~m,  -te. 
poet,  2)i(^ter,  m.  -r6,  -r. 
poetry,  2)ic^t!unft,  /. 
point,    @pl^e,  /.   -3en,    he   on 

the    —  of,    ttJoHen    eben:    see 

258. 
politeness,  ^bflid^!eit,  /. 
political,  adj.  politifd^. 
poor,  adj.  arm. 
pope,  -^apft,  m.  -te§,  -apfle. 
portion ;  he  the  —  of,  einem  in 

%\)z\[  {Zn\]  iDPrben. 
pojirait,  ^|>ortrait,  n.  -m,  -te. 
possess,    tr.    befi^en,    im   iBefi^ 

:^aben. 
possession,    93efi^ung,    /.    -gen. 

take  or  gain  —  of,  fid)  bemtid^- 

tigen  igen.),  erringen  0.  tr. 
post,  ^^oft, /.  -ten. 
potato,  tartoffet,  /.  -In. 
pound,  ^fnnb,  n.  -beS,  -be. 


power,  ma^i,  f.  -ad^te ;  ©etrati; 

/.  -ten. 
powerful,  adj.  mac^tig. 
praise,  tr.  toben,  preijen  0. 
pray,  intr.  beten. 
preach,  inir.  prebigen. 
prepare,  tr.  jnbereiten. 
preserye,  tr.  erbalten  0. 
president,    ^rdfibent,    m.   -ten, 

-ten. 
presume :  I  presume,  ttjo^l  with 

merben :  see  328. 
pretty,  adj.  pbfc^. 
price,  ^rei«,  m.  -je§,  -fe. 
pride,     ^od^mut^     [=mut],     m. 

-t^eg. 
prince,  ?^urft,  m.  -ten,  -ten ;  ^ring, 

m.  -jen,  -gen. 
princess,  ^iirftin,  /.  -inncn. 
print,  tr.  bruden. 
prison,  ©efangni^  [=nig],n.  -ffe3, 

-ffe. 
prisoner,     ©efangen     {p'ple    as 

noun). 
prohahly,     adv.     n)al)rf(^einUd^, 

tt»ol)l:  see  328. 
procure,  tr.  t>erfd)affen. 
professor,  ^rofeffor,  m.  -rs,  -ren. 
promise,  tr.  tjerfprec^en  0. 
promise,  S5erfprec^en,  n.  -n8,  -n. 
pronounce,  tr.  auSfpred^en  0, 
proud,  adj.  ftolg. 
proye,  tr.  beweifen  0.,  nad^njcifen 

0. 
Prussia,  ^ren^en,  n.  -n«. 
Fi*ussian,  adj.  preufeifd^.  noun,  bet 

^reu^e. 
punish,  tr.  ftrafen. 
pupil,  ©driller,  m.  -r§,  -r. 
put,  tr.  or  intr.  je^en,  ftellen,  tegcn, 

ftedfen.  —  himself,  ftcfi  ftetlen. 

quarter,  33iertel,  n.  -I«,  -I. 
queen,  ^bnigin,  /.  -innen. 
question,  tr.  fragen. 


VOCABULAEY. 


457 


question,  %xaQt,  f.  -en. 
qnick^  adj.  (adv.  -ly)  fci)uel(I,  rofcl). 
qniet,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  ru^ig. 
qnite,  adv,  gang,  Dollig. 

race,  ©efc^lec^t,  n.  -te§,  -ter. 

railroad,  @ijenbot)n,  /.  -nen. 

rain,  intr.  impers.  regnen. 

rain,  3tegen,  m.  -ng. 

rank,  9iang,  m.  -ge§,  -cinge. 

reach,  <r.  erreii^en. 

read,  ir.  or  intr.  lejen  0.  —  alond, 

tjortefen  (to,  dat). 
ready,  ad/,  bereit. 
really,  adv.  tvivtii^, 
receive,  tr.  emtifangen  0. 
recognize,  tr.  erfeixnen  {irreg.). 
reconcile,  tr.  Derfo^neiu 
red,  adj.  rot^  [rot], 
regard,  tr.  betrac^ten. 
regret,  intr.  reuen  {impers.  with 

accus.). 
rejoice,  intr.  ftc^  freuen  (in,  gen.  / 

over,  iihtXf  auf). 
relations,  pi.  5Serix)anbtfcf)aft,  /. 
release,  ir.  entlaffen  0  ,  eutbinben 

0.  (from,  gen.). 
remain,  intr.  bleiben  0.  f,  —  be- 
hind, surucfbteibeit. 
remember,     tr.      fi(^     erinnern 

{gen.  or    an),    gebenfen  {irreg.) 

{gen.). 
repeat,  tr.  inieber'^oteu  {insep'k). 
respect,  tr.  ac^tcn. 
rest,  9?ut)e/7. 

restaurant,  SfJeftauration,  /.  -nen. 
revile,  tr.  fc^intpfen. 
revolution,  9?et)olution,  /.  -nen. 
reward,  tr.  to^nen. 
Rhine,  $Rt)ein,  m.  -  ne8. 
ribbon,  53onb,  n.  -be§,  -cinbe'r. 
rich,  adj.  reid). 
riches,  9leid^t^um  [=tum],  m.  -m^, 

-iimer, 
rid,  adj.  Io0  (of,  accus.). 


ride,    intr.   rettcn  0.    —  away, 

fortreiten. 
ride,  $Ritt,  m.  -tteS,  -tte. 
right,  adj.  rec^t. 
right,  9?e(f)t,  n.  -m,  -te. 
righteous,  oc?/.  g credit 
ring,  9ting,  m.  -ge8,  -ge. 
rise,  intr.  auffte^en  0.  f.,    (of  the 

sun)  aufge'^en  0.  f. 
robj  ir.  raubeu,  beraubett. 
Bome,  9tom,  n.  -m«. 
roof,  '^ad),  n.  -c^eg,  -ad^er, 
room,  3itttmer,  n.  -ra,  -r. 
rude,  adj.  rau^,  ungegogeu. 
run,  intr.  laufen  0.  f.    —  away, 

entlaufen  (from,  dat.). 

sad,  adj.  traurig. 

sake :  for  the  —  of,  prep,  tucgen 

{gen.). 
same,   adj.  \dh,  gteid).     the  — , 

berfelbe,  etc. 
save,  tr.  rettett. 
say,  ir.  fag  en. 

scamp,  S3ofert)i(^t,  m.  -tg,  -te. 
scholar,    ©chiller,   m.    -r8,    -r; 

@elet)rte  (r),  m.  -en,  -en. 
school,  <2>dink,  f.  -len. 
science,  2Biffenjd)aft,  /.  -ten. 
scream,  intr.  fd^reien  0. 
scold,  tr.  fd^elten,  0. 
sculptor,  53ilb^auer,  m.  -r8,  -r." 
season,  3al)re§seit,  /.  -ten. 
seat  one's  self,  fid)  fe^sen. 
secret,  ©e^eimnife  [=uig],  n.  -ffeS, 

-ffe. 
secure,  tr.  fic^ern. 
see,  tr.  fe^en  0.    -  about  one,  ftd^ 

uinfe^en.  —  again,  tviebevfe^en. 
seek,  tr.  fuc^en. 
seem,  intr.  fd^einen  0. 
seldom,  adv.  felten. 
self,     pron.     fclbft,    felber:     see 

155.5. 
self-respect,  ©elbftad^tung,  /. 


458 


ENGLISH-GERMAN 


sell,  tr.  Derfaufcn  (to,  dat). 
send,  tr.  fd^icfen,  fenben  (reg.  or 

irreg.)  —  in,  einfeuben, 
sensible,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  oevniinftig. 
September,  (September,  m.  -r§. 
servant,  2)iener,  m.  -x^,  -v. 
senrice,  S)ienft,  m.  -fteg,  -ftc. 
set,  <r.  je^en  ;  (of  the  sun)  uttter^ 

ge'^en  0.  f.    —  over,  iiberfe^en 

(sep'Ze). 
several,    adj,    pi    me^rere:    see 

192.2;  Derfc^iebene, 
she,  pers.  pron.  fte. 
sheplierd,  ^irt,  m.  -ten,  -ten. 
shoe,  @cf)u^,  m.  -I^eg,  -l^e. 
shop,  $?oben,  m.  -ng,  -aben. 
short,  ac?/.  furg, 
show,  tr.  jetgen, 
shut,  <r.  fc^Ue^en  0.,  jumod^en. 
sick,  «c?/.  franf.    —  bed,  ^ran!en= 

bett,  n. 
sickness,  ^ranf^eit,  /.  -ten. 
silent :  be  — ,  intr.  fd^meigen  0. 
silver,  @i(ber,  n.  -r8. 
silver,  adj.  filbern» 
sin,  intr.  jiinbigen. 
since,  prep,  feit  (dat.).    adv.  feit= 

htm.  conj.  ba,  inbem. 
sing,  tr.  or  intr.  fingen  0.   —  too 

or  at  the  same  time,  join  in 

— ing,  mitfmgen. 
single,  adj.  ein^ig.  not  a  — ,  !ein 

einglger,  etc. 
sister,  ©c^mefter,  /. 
sit,  intr.  ftljen  0.    —  down,  fid) 

fe^en. 
sleep,  m^r.  fd^Iafen  0.    go  to  — , 

einfc^Iafen. 
slow,  adj.  {adv.  -ly)  Tang  jam. 
slumber,  @(^(ummer,  m.  -r«,  -r. 
small,  adj.  flein. 
small-pox,  tie  331ottern,  pi. 
smoke,  tr.  or  intr.  rand^en. 
smoke,  0?aud^,  m.  -df)e6. 
snoWj  ii^r.  and  impers.  jdE|neien. 


so,  adv.  and  conj.  fo,  at[o  ;  e8 :  see 

154. 4e. 
soldier,  @oIbat,  m.  -ten,  -ten. 
solid,  at?/.  foUb. 
some,  prcn.  ad/,  eintg,  cttid^ ;  et:= 

it)a§,  tttag;   trelc^e:  see  176.2. 

—  thing,  etma8,  njag.  —  body, 

Semanb. 
son,  ®o^n,  m.  -ne8,  -o^ne. 
song,  ?ieb,  n.  -beS,  -ber. 
soon,  adv.  haih. 
sorrow,  (©ef)mer,5,  m.  -jeS,  -gen; 

(gorge,  /.  -en. 
sorrow,  intr.  leiben  (?. 
sorry :    be  —  for,  bebanern  tr. ; 

fid)  erbormen  {gen.). 
sort :  what  -  of,  nja«  filr. 
soul,  (geele,  /.  -len. 
south,  (Siibcn,  m.  -n3. 
southern,  ac(;.  fiiblid^. 
Spain,  ©panien,  n.  -icn3. 
Spanish,  ad/,  fpanifd). 
Spaniard,  (gpanier,  m.  -r§,  -r. 
spare,  ir.  fd)onen,  t)erfd)onen. 
speak,    tr.   or   intr.    fpred^en   0., 

reben.  —  out,  augfpredjen  0. 
spend,  tr.    (of   time)  tjerbringen 

{irreg.),  tterleben. 
spiritual,  adj.  geiftig. 
spite !  in  —  of,  prep,  tro^  {gen.). 
spoil,  tr.  tierberben  0. 
spoon,  ?offet,  m.  -t8,  -t. 
spring,  ^rut)Ung,  m.  -gg,  -gc. 
spring,  mfr.  fpringen  0.  \)  or  f. 
stand,  intr.  [te'^en  0.  I)  or  |. 
stay,  m<r.  bleiben  0.  f. 
step,  (Sd)ritt,  m.  -tte«,  -tte. 
still,  etc?/,   ftitt,    fd)meigenb.   adv. 

noc^,  ftetg ;  bod^. 
stop,  intr.  author  en,  fte'^en  bleiben. 
story,  ®efd)idf)te,  /.  -ten. 
strange,  adj.  fremb. 
stranger,  ber  ^rembe,  etc. 
stream,  (Strom,  m.  -meS,  -omc. 
street,  @tra^e,  /.  -^en. 


VOCABULARY. 


459 


strength,  ^raft,  /.  -afte. 
stretch,    tr.    ftrecfen.     Mr.    fid) 

ftrecfeit. 
strike,  ir.  fci^tagen  0.  —  off,  (xl-- 

fd)(agen. 
strong,  adj.  ftarf. 
student,  ©tubent,  m.  -ten,  -tcit. 
study,  ©tubium,  n.  -mg,  -ien. 
stupid,  adj.  biimm. 
style,  aJJobe,  /.  -ben. 
sublime,  adj.  er'^aben.    {with  dat) 
succeed,  intr.  gelingen  0.  {impers. 
such,   pron.    adj.  or   adv.    fotd). 

—  a,  fold)  ein,  ein  fotcl),  jo  ein. 
sudden,  {adj.  -ly)  plbt^lic^. 
suffer,  intr.  {or  tr.)  teiben  0. 
sufficiently,  adv.  genng. 
suitable:  be  — ,  piemen  {Impers. 

with  dal.). 
summer,  (Sommev,  m.  -r^,  -r. 
sun,  ®onne,  /.  -nen. 
Sunday,  ©onntog,  m.  -g§. 
sure,  adv.  getuijs.   to  be  — ,  jnjar, 
surrive,  tr.  iiberlebeu. 
suspicion,  5>erbac^t,  m.  -t§. 
sweet,  adj.  \n^. 
Switzerland,  @d)tt)ei5, /. 
sword,  >2)C^mert,  n.  -te8,  -ter. 

table,  Zi\6). 

take,  tr.  ne^men  0.  —away,  n)cg= 

ne^men.    —  along  or  too,  ntit= 

ne'^men. 
talk,     Mr.    reben,     fpred^en    0. 

—  over,  befprecl^en  0. 
tall,  adj.  gro^,  \)o^. 
task,  ^nfg  abe,  /.  -ben. 
tea,  2:t)ee,  m.  -eeg,  -ec. 
teach,  <r.  le'^ren. 

teacher,     ^tljttv,    m,    -x^,    -r; 

SOfJeifter,  m.  -r8,  -r» 
teaching,  ?e^rc,  /.  -rem 
tear,  X{)rdne,  /.  -nen. 
tell,  <r.  erj^ci^Ien,  fag  en. 
terrible^  adj.  furd)tbar. 


thaler,  ^'^nter,  m.  -r8,  -r. 

than,  conj.  (x\^,  benn» 

thank,  tr-.  banfen  {dat.). 

thanks,  2)an!,  m.  -leg. 

that,  c?em.  pro>2.  jener,  berjenige, 

etc. ;    reZ.    pron.  tDeld),  ber,  efc. 

cory.  \i(x%  bamit.  in  order  — , 

bamit 
the,  de/.  ar^.  ber  (bie,  ba§).  con/. 

or  adv.  je,  befto. 
theatre,  it)eater,  n.  -r§,  -r. 
their,  poss.  pron.  i'^r,  ber  il)vig. 
then,    adv.   bann,    borauf.    conj. 

benn,  bann,  fo. 
there,  adv.  ba,  bort.  —  are,  etc., 

eg  gibt,  etc.,  e6  finb,  etc. 
therefore,  adv.  or  conj.  barnm. 
they,  pers.  pron.  [ic.  indef.  man. 
thine,  poss.  pron.  bein,  ber  beinig. 
thing,  2)ing,  n.  -geg,  -ge ;  'Bo.&^t, 

f.  -en. 
think,    Mr.     benfen    (irreg.)    ge* 

benfcn.  (of,  gren.). 
thirst,  infr.   biirften  {impers.  with 

accus.). 
this,  (^ew?.  pron.  bie0. 
thou,  pers.  pron.  bu. 
thought,  ®eban!e,  m.  -fen§,  -!cn. 
three,  num.  brei. 
throne,    3:^ron,  m.  -neg,  -ne  or 

-nen. 
through,  pnp.  bnrc^  (accws.). 
thunder,     Conner,    m.    -r§,   -r. 

-storm,  ©emitter,  n.  -r§,  -r. 
time,  3cit,  /•  -ten.  three  times, 

breintat,  etc.  sometimes,  mand)= 

ntal. 
tire,  tr.  ermiiben. 
tired,  adj.  miibe,  ermiibet.   be  — 

of  it,  eg  miibe  fein,  eg  fatt  ^ahtn. 
to,  prep.   3u,  nad^  {dat.),    in,  an 

{accus.),  big  (da<.)  ;  ici^/i  in/in.  ju. 
today,  adv.  ^cute.   of  — ,  today's, 

l^eutig  {adj.). 
together,  adv.  jnfammcn. 


460 


ENGLISH-GERMAN 


tomorrow,  adv.  morgcn. 
tone,  2;on,  m.  -neg,  -one. 
too,  adv.  ju  ;   an6).  —  mnch,  ju 

t)iet  or  fe^r,  all^ufe^r. 
toward,   prep,  iiad)  (dat),   gegen 

(accws.),  gen. 
town,  ^tabt,  /.  -dbte.    —  hall, 

9latl)l)aug  maU],  n. 
translate,  tr.  uberfe^en  (inseple). 
travel,  intr.  rcifeit  j  or  f). 
treason,  33en*at^  [=trot],  m.  -f^e^. 

high--,  ^oc^tjerrat^,  m. 
tree,  93aum,  m.  -nteS,  -aunte. 
tremble,  intr.  jittern. 
troop,  Zxnpp,  m.  -ppt^,  -ppe. 
tropic,  Xrope,  /.  -pen. 
trouble,  9Jiu^e,  /. 
true,  adj.  iDaljr;   trcu.   it  is  — , 

adv.  3tt)ar. 
truly,  adv.  toa^rtic^,  tra'^r^aftig. 
trust,  tr.  trauen,  tjertrauen  (dat.). 
truth,  SSa^r^eit,  /. 
try,  intr.  t)erfut^en. 
turn    (to),    intr.    biegen  0.,    fic^ 

menben ;  tuerben  (gu)  0. 
twice,  adv.  jmeimal. 

twig,  B^eig^  wi-  -gc8,  -gc. 

two,  nwm.  jttjei, 

ngly,  «(^i.  PBtic^. 

unable:    be  — ,    nid^t    fbuneu: 

see  254. 
nncle,  Onfel,  m.  -Ig,  -I ;  D^elm, 

m.  -m^,  -me. 
under,    prep,    unter    (cZa^.    and 

accus.). 
understand,  tr.  berftel^en  0. 
undertake,  intr.  or  tr.  ftd^  (dat.) 

Dornet)men  0. 
undone,  adj.  ungefd^e^ett. 
unending,  adj.  enbloS,  unenbUc^. 
unexpected,  adj.  unern)artet. 
ungrateful,  adj.  unbanfbar. 
nnhappiness,  Ungliic!,  n.  -d^. 
unhappy,  adj.  mtgliicfUc!^. 


uninterrupted,      adj.     uuutitcr^ 

brod^en. 
university,  UniDerfttcit,  /.  -ten. 
unknown,  adj.  unbefannt. 
unless,  conj.  o^ne  bQJ3,  njenn  ni^t, 

eg  fei  benn :  see  331. le. 
until,  conj.  bis,  bi§  ta^.  prep,  big 

(dat.). 
unwell,  adj.  or  adv.  unmo^t. 
unworthy,  adj.  nnwiirbig. 
up,  adv.  or  prep.  au\,  an  (dat  or 

accus.),  '^inauf. 
upon,  prep,  anf  (dat.  or  accus.). 
usual,  adj.   (adv.  -ly)  get»b^nli(^. 


as 


it)ie  genjo^ntic^. 


use,  tr.  benu^en.    be  of—,  nnt3eu 

(to,  dat.). 
useless,  adj.  unbranc^bor. 

vain,  adj.  eitct. 

vainly,  in  vain,  adv.  tjergcbeng. 
valley,  Zljai,  n.  -leg,  -citer. 
vanquish,  tr.  begtuingen  0. 
vegetable,  ©eniiife,  n.  -feg,  -fc. 
very,  adv.  fe^r. 
victor,  ®ieger,  m.  -rg,  -r. 
victorious,  adj.  ftegreid). 
victory,  @ieg,  m.  -geg,  -ge. 
Tienna,  SSien,  n.  -ng. 
village,  2)orf,  n.  -feg,  -orfer. 
violet,  ^eilc^en,  n.  -ng,  -n. 
virtue,  Slugenb,  /.  -ben. 
visit,  tr.  befuc^en. 
visit,  Sefu(^,  m.  -d^eg,  -6)t, 
voice,  ®timme,  /.  -men. 

wagon,   Bag  en,   m.  -ng,   -n  or 

-agen. 
wait,  intr.    ioarten  (for,  gen.  or 

auf). 
wake,  tr.  medfen.  intr.  aufwad)en. 
walk,  intr.   get)en   0. ;    ivanbern. 

take  a  — ,  fpagieren  gef)en. 
wander,  intr.  manbern  f. 
wanderer,  Sanberer^w.  -xi^-x^ 


VOCABULABY. 


461 


want,  fr.  {<yr  infr,)  n)flnfd)en,  iroHen 

{irreg.). 
war,  ^'rieg,  m.  -ge§,  -gc. 
warm,  adj.  voaxm, 
warning,  Sarnutig,  /.  -gen. 
watch,  intr.  wac^en. 
watch,  U()u,  /.  -ren. 
water,  SSaffer,  n.  -r6. 
way,  3Beg,  m.  -geg,  -ge.  on  the  — , 

untertt)eg§. 
we,  p^s.  pron.  ttJtr. 
weak,  adj.  jrf)tt)acf). 
weary,  adj.  miibc. 
weather,  Setter,  n.  -vg. 
Wednesday,  9)litttt)od^,  m.  -c^g. 
week,  SSocf)e,  /.  -en. 
weep,  intr.  tueinen. 
weigh,  intr.  (or  tr.)  tt)legen  0. 
welcome,  adj.  tDlUfommen. 
well,  adv.  gut,  tt)o^L 
what,  prori.  was ;  wetcf).  —  kind 

of,  toa^  fiir.   -  ever,  was  aud). 

Mer;.  n)ie!  tuaS! 
when,  adv.  a\^,  tuenn  ;  wann. 
where,   adv.  roo.     —  erer,  wo, 

tt)o  auc^. 
whether,  con/,  ob. 
which,  pron.  tuetd),  tuer,  ttJaS  efc. 

that  — ,  n?ag. 
while,  adv.  inbem,  ttja^renb. 
white,  adj.  wti% 
who,    pron.    tt)er,    n)e((f)er,    efc, 

ber,  e*c.    he  — ,  she  — ,  \vtx, 

ber«  or  bie^jenige.  —ever,  nier 

aud^. 
whole,  adj.  gan^. 
whose,    pron.    njcffen    {gen.    of 

ttjer). 
why,    adv.    tDarutn;    Wa^:    see 

176.3. 
widower,  SBitttner  [Sitttjer],  m. 

-r«,  -r. 
wife,  %xa\x,  f.  -€n;   ©attin,  /. 

-nnen. 
willingly,  adv.  gertu 


window,  ^enj^er,  n.  ~^r§,  -r. 
wine,  SBein,  -ne8,  -ne. 
winter,  SBinter,  m.  -rS,  -r. 
wisdom,  SBeiS^elt,  /. 
wise,  adj.  njeife,  gete^rt. 
wish,  tr.  or  intr.  tDiiiifd^en,  ttJoUen 

(trreg  ).   wished  for,  ertt}imfd)t. 
wish,  2Bunf(^,  m.  -fc^eS,  -iinfc^e, 
with,  prep,  ntit  (dat.). 
withdi*aw,    tr.    juriid^iel^en    0. 

intr.  fid^  guriid^ie^en. 
without,   prq).    o^ne  {accus.    or 

infin.  with  ju). 
woman,    Seib.    n.    -be«,   -ber; 

gran,  /.  -en. 
wonder,  intr.  iuunbevn.  —  at,  fic^ 

ttjunbern  iiber. 
wood,  ^oli,  n.  3e«,  -je ;   Satb,  m. 

-bes,  -dlber. 
word,  Sort,  n.  -te8,  -orter. 
work,  m^r.  orbeiten. 
work,  ?lrbeit,  /.  -ten ;   Serf,  n. 

-  !eg,  -!e. 

world,  Sert,  /.  -ten. 

worse,  worst,  comp.  and,  superl. 

of  bad,  fc^ (ed)t. 
wretched,  adj.  nngliidfeUg. 
wring",  tr.  ring  en  0, 
write,  tr.   or   intr.    fc^reiben    0. 

—  in,  register,  elnfc^reiben, 
writing,  @d)reiben,  n.  -n8. 
wrong,  Unrec^t,  n.  -teS,  -te, 

year,  3al)r,  n.  -re8,  -re. 

yes,  ac?v.  ja. 

yesterday,  ac?v.  geftern. 

yet,  adv.  noc^.    not  — ,  nod)  nid)t. 

yon,  pers.  pron.  'tixi,  \\\x,  <B\t :  see 

153. 
young,  adj.  jnng, 
yonr,  poss.  pron.  bein,  i^r,  3^t» 

e^c*  see  157. 
youth,  rvng'-nb,  /. 
youth,  young  man,  Siingliug,  m. 


463 


INDEX. 


^^^The  references  are  to  Sections,  not  to  pages. 


a,  pronunciation  of,  8;  a  for  aa  in 
new  orthography,  8.1. 

a,  pronunciation  of,  15;  d  for  e  in 
new  orthography,  15.1. 

miant,  400.2. 

Absolute  construction,  with  accu- 
sative, 230.3;  -with  infinitive, 
347. 

accent,  55. 

accessary  clause,  see  dependent. 

accusative  case,  general  office  of, 
59.4,  226;  with  transitive 
verbs,  227.1;  with  intransitive, 
227.2;  double  accus.,  with 
verbs,  227.3;  accus.  with  prepo- 
sitions, 228,  375-6;  with  ad- 
jectives, 229;  accus.  of  measure 
and  time,  230.1,2;  accus,  ab- 
solute, or  of  accompanying 
circumstance,  230.3. 

active  voice  of  verb,  233.3. 

address,  use  of  pronouns  in,  153. 

adjective,  usual  adjunct  of  noun, 
110;  when  declined,  114-7; 
rules  of  adj.  declension,  118- 
28;  indeclinable  adj.  126.4; 
origin  of  double  declension  of 
adj.,  132;  adj.  as  noun,  129; 
as  adverb,  130,  363.1,2;  adj. 
with  etwaS,  \va^,  iud)t§,  129.5; 
comparison  of  adj.,  133-42; 
absolute  use  pf  comparative  adj., 
142.2;  modifying  adjuncts  of 
adj.,  143-6;  their  place,  147:— 
agreement  of  adj.,  62,  209; 
genitive  dependent  on  adj . ,  2 1 7 ; 
dative  do.,  223;  accusative  do., 
229: — primitive  adj.,  413;  adj. 
derived  from  verbs,  414;  deri- 
ved by  suffix,  415;  by  prefix, 
416;  compound  adj.,  423^ 


adjective  clause,  437,  444.2, 
110.1c. 

adjective  phrase,  compound,  437. 
2a,  147.2,  358. 

adverb,  office  of,  361;  usual  ad- 
junct of  adjective,  144;  of  verb, 
317;  of  noun,  110.2,  369.3;  of 
preposition,  369.1;  complement 
of  preposition,  379;  used  as 
adj.,  369.3 ;  place  of  adv., 
319.2/,  370;  classification  of 
adverbs.,  362;  derivation  of  ad- 
verbs, from  nouns,  364;  from 
adj . ,  36  3 ;  from  adj . ,  by  derivative 
endings,  363.3 ;  by  combination, 
365;  from  pronominal  roots, 
367.2;  original  adverbs,  367; 
ordinal  adv.,  207.3;  comparison, 
368;  adjective  as  adv.,  130, 
363.1,2;  participle  as  adv.,  356; 
comparison  of  adjectives  by  adv., 
141. 

adverbial  clause,  438,  444.3, 
144.2. 

adverbial  predicate,  adjective  asj 
116.16,  316.26. 

5(e,  see  a. 

5leu,  see  an, 

ai,  pronunciation  of, 

all,  193. 

aller,  prefixed  to  superlatives, 
142.3. 

alphabet,  German,  1-3;  its  origin, 
1;  written  character,  2.1,  pp. 
275-77;  use  of  capitals,  4. 

aU,  in  sense  of  *asif,'  332. 26,  c, 
4336;  do.  in  substantive  clause, 
436. 3^;  omission  of  al^  after  fp 
and  adverb  or  adjective,  438. 
Sd,e. 

outer,  194. 


19.1. 


464 


INDEX. 


npodosis,  332.1. 

appositive  adjective,  110.16,  116. 
2,4;  do.  noun,  59.4:,  111.2;  in 
nominative,  213.2. 

arrangement  of  the  sentence,  rules 
for  429-39;  summary  of  rules, 
440-44;  additional  remarks, 
rhetorical  arrangements,  445-6. 

articles,  declension,  63-4;  com- 
bination with  prepositions,  Q5; 
rules  for  use,  66;  place,  67. 

Aryan  languages,  see  Indo-Euro- 
pean. 

assertive  sentence,  427. 

attributive  adjective,  110.1a,  115. 

au,  pronunciation  of,  20. 

aUf  pronunciation  of,  21.2. 

auxHiaries,  of  tense,  239-41;  of 
mood,  see  modal  auxiliaries; 
causative  auxiliary,  242.2; 
•omission  of  auxiliary  of  tense, 
439.3a;  verbs  taking  either 
tjobtn  or  fetn  as  auxiliary,  241.3. 

atj,  pronunciation  and  use  of,  19.3. 

b,  pronunciation  of,  23;  English 
correspondent  of,  459.L 

bases,  3936. 

be=,  derivation  and  use  of,  307.2, 
405.III.la. 

bcibc,  1996. 

C,  pronunciation  and  use  of,  24. 

capitals,  use  of,  4;  in  pronouns  of 
address,  153.3-5. 

cardinal  numerals,  197-201;  their 
derivatives,  202-8. 

cases  of  declension,  their  uses,  59, 
212-30:  arid  see  accusative, 
dative,  genitive,  nominative. 

causative  auxiliary,  242  2;  causa- 
tive derivative  verbs,  404.1.1. 

Celtic  languages,  relationship  of, 
450. 

C^,  pronunciation  of,  43;  English 
correspondents  of,  460. 

df  pronunciation  and  use  of,  30, 

classes,  under  first  declension,  how 
determined,  69;  first  class,  75- 
80;  second,  81-6;  third,  87- 
90. 


cognate  accusative,  227.2a. 

collective  noun,  agreement  of  verb 
with,  322.2. 

comparative  degree,  134  fE.;  de- 
clension of,  140.1. 

comparison,  of  adjectives,  133- 
42;  degrees  and  endings,  134- 
5;  modification  of  vowel,  136; 
irregular  and  defective  compari- 
son, 139;  declension,  140: — of 
participles,  355;  of  adverbs, 
368. 

composition  or  combination  of 
words,  418-25. 

compound  adjective  phrase,  437. 
2a,  147.2,  358. 

compound  foi-ms  of  verb,  238-42. 

compound  nouns,  gender  of,  61.4; 
inflection  of,  68.1;  formation 
of,  421-2. 

compound  verbs,  with  prefixes, 
233.4,  296-311;  with  otiier 
elements,  312-3. 

compound  words,  418;  their  fre- 
quency in  German,  419;  ortho- 
graphy, 4196,c;  pronunciation 
of  finals  and  initials  in,  53; 
accent,  55.2-4;  rules  of  forma- 
tion of  compound  verbs,  420; 
nouns,  421-2;  adjectives,  423- 
4;  particles,  425,  365. 

conditional  clauses,  inversion  in, 
433,  443.5. 

conditional  tenses,  formation  o^ 
240.2c;  their  use,  334-6. 

conditional  use  of  subjunctive, 
332. 

conjugation,  defined,  231;  rules 
respecting,  232-313;  conjuga- 
tions, distinction  and  origin  of, 
246 ;  New  conjugation,  247-60; 
Old  conjugation,  261-73 ;  mixed 
conjugation,  272. 

conjunctions,  382;  their  classi- 
fication, 383;  general  con- 
nectives, 384;  adverbial  con- 
junctions, 385 ;  subordinating 
conjunctions,  386. 

consonants,  pronunciation  o^ 
23-54. 

copula,  316.1a,  426.26;  omission 
of,  in  dependent  clause,  439.3, 

correspondences  between  English 


INDEX. 


465 


and  German  words  and  letters, 
452-61. 
countries  and  places,  declension  of 
names  of,  103. 

b,  pronunciation  of,  25;  English 
correspondent  of,  458.1. 

ha,  added  to  relative  pronoun, 
182.2. 

ba  or  bar,  in  combination  with 
prepositions,  as  substitute  for 
pronoun  of  third  person,  154. 
2,3;  for  demonstrative,  166.4; 
for  relative,  180. 

dative  case,  general  use  of,  59.3, 
221;  dat.  with  verbs,  222;  of 
possession,  with  luerben,  etc., 
222.  II.  Id;  with  impersonal 
phrases  of  condition,  222.  II.  1/, 
292.4;  of  interest  or  concern, 
222.III.;  possessive  dat.,  222. 
Ilia, 6;  dative  with  adjectives, 
223;  with  prepositions,  224, 
374,  376;  with  nouns,  225.1; 
in  exclamations,  225.2:— use  or 
omission  of  e  in  dat.  of  nouns, 
71.15,  83;  old  dat.  sing.  fem. 
in  u,  95. 

day  of  the  month,  expression  of, 
216. 5d. 

declension,  defined,  57;  rules  of 
decl.,  58-208;  decl.  of  articles, 
63-4;  of  nouns,  68-108;  of 
adjectives,  118-28,  140;  of 
pronouns,  151-95 ;  of  numerals, 
198-208;  uses  of  the  forms  of 
decl.,  209-30. 

defective  declension  of  nouns, 
100;  defective  theme  in  declen- 
sion, 98. 

definitive  article,  see  articles ;  use 
in  generaUzing  sense,  66.1,2;  in 
senoe  of  possessive,  66.3,  161. 

demonstratives,  163-71;  use  of, 
in  sense  of  personal  or  posses- 
sive pronouns,  166.26,  171. 

denominative  verbs,  405. 

dependent  clauses,  426.2d,  435, 
444;  their  arrangement,  434-9, 
444;  their  introduction  in  a 
period,  439.5;  omission  of 
auxiliary  or  copula  in,  439.3. 

ber,  as  definite  article,  63;  as  de- 


monstrative aajective  or  pro- 
noun, 163,  164.1,2,  166  ;  as 
relative,  177-8. 

bcrer,  164.2. 

derivation  of  words,  393-417. 

S)ero,  162. 

determinative  pronouns,  167-71; 
use  of,  instead  of  personal  or 
possessive  pronouns,  171. 

bteS,  163,  165-6. 

digraphs,  vowel,  18-22;  conso- 
nant, 43-51. 

dimidiative  numerals,  207.1. 

diphthongs,  pronunciation  of, 
18-22. 

doubled  vowels,  7.1,  53;  modified 
vowels  not  doubled,  14.2; 
doubled  consonants,  7.2,  52.2, 
53. 

biirfen,  251,  253. 

e,  pronunciation  of,  9;  c  for  ec  in 
new  orthography,  9 .1;  e  fofr  a  in 
new  orthography,  15.1. 

ei,  pronunciation  of,  19.2. 

ein,  as  indefinite  article,  63;  as 
indef.  pronoun,  195.1;  as 
numeral,  198. 

eintg,  189. 

emp=,  derivation  and  use  of, 
307.3. 

emphasis  or  impressiveness,  in- 
version for,  431gf,  443.2. 

endings  of  inflection  and  of  deri- 
vation, see  suffixes. 

English  language,  relation  of  Ger- 
man to,  447-52 ;  corresponden- 
ces between  English  and  German 
words  and  letters,  452-61. 

eiit=,  derivation  and  use  of,  307.3; 
405.  III.  16. 

er=,  derivation  and  use  of,  307.4; 
405.IIL1C. 

e6,  special  uses  and  constructions 
of,  154.4;  omission  of,  as  im- 
personal subject,  293. 

etiid),  189. 

tUva^,  188;  form  of  adjective 
with,  129.5. 

etn^etrf),  189. 

eu,  pronunciation  of,  21.1;  for  au 
in  new  orthography,  21.3. 

@W.«  162. 


m 


INDEX. 


exclamation,  construction  of ,  391, 

432.1c,  439.4a. 
expletive     personal    pronoun   in 

dative,  156,  222. Ulb. 
eh,    pronunciation    and    use    of, 

19.3. 

f,  pronunciation  of,  26;  English 
correspondents  of,  459.3, 

factitive  predicate,  see  objective 
predicate. 

feminine,  see  gender:  classification 
of  fem.  nouns  in  declension, 
69.2,  70;  fem.  noun  invariable 
in  singular,  71.1a;  exceptions, 
95. 

first  or  strong  declension  of  nouns, 
69,  73,  74-90;  its  first  class, 
75-80;  second,  81-6;  third, 
87-90:— of  adjectives,  1 18-28, 
132. 

foreign  nouns,  declension  of,  86, 
92.1a,2c,  97.2,  101;  gender, 
61.5. 

foreign  words,  pronunciation  of, 
54;  of  t),  ie,  e,  t,  d)  in,  13,  18, 
24,  37,  43.3;  of  g  in  words 
from  French,  27;  accent,  55.5. 

fractional  numerals,  207.2. 

fiir  in  nja§  fiir,  175,  177,  179. 

future  perfect  tense,  how  formed, 
240.26;  its  use,  328. 

future  tense,  how  formed,  240.2a; 
its  use,  328;  present  in  sense  of 
future,  324.4. 

g,  pronunciation  of,  27,  43;  Eng- 
lish correspondents  of,  460. 

ge=,  derivation  and  use  of,  307.5; 
use  as  prefix  of  participle,  243. 3 ; 
its  origin  as  such,  243.3c. 

gegeffen,  271.3. 

gender,  60;  general  rules  for,  in 
nouns,  61;  in  adjectives  etc., 
62;  of  compound  nouns,  421.1; 
gender  of  personal  pronoun, 
154.1. 

genitive  case,  general  office  of, 
59.2,  215;  gen.  with  nouns, 
216;  its  place,  216.6;  with  ad- 
jectives, 217;  with  prepositions, 
218,   873;    with  verbs,   219, 


220.2-4;  substitution  of  dative 
with  t)0U  for,  216.4;  adverbial 
gen.,  220.1;  predicate  gen., 
220.2;  gen.  with  interjections, 
220.5:— form  of  gen.  deter- 
mines declension  of  a  noun, 
69.1,  70;  use  of  e§  or  g  in,  83; 
of  en  or  n,  93;  old  gen.  sing, 
of  feminines,  in  it,  95;  omission 
of  sign  of  genitive,  101.5;  gen. 
of  second  adjective  declension 
used  instead  of  first,  121.3. 

Germanic  or  Teutonic  group  of 
languages,  449-50;  its  divi- 
sions, 451;  progression  of 
mutes  in,  453-60. 

German  language,  relation  of  to 
English,  447-61;  history  of, 
462-9. 

Gothic  language,  relationship  of, 
451.4. 

gradation  of  vowels,  see  variation. 

Greek  language,  relationship  of, 
450. 

Grimm's  law  of  progression  of 
mutes,  453. 

^,  pronunciation  of,  28;  used  to 
denote  a  long  vowel,  7.1;  Eng- 
Ush  correspondents  of,  460. 

l)aben,  conjugation  of,  239.1,4a; 
use  as  auxiliary,  240-1 ;  origin 
of  use,  240.4.' 

Hebrew  etc.,  not  related  with  Ger- 
manic languages,  450.76. 

I^ier,  compounded  with  preposi- 
tions, in  sense  of  demonstrative, 
166,4, 

High-German  subdivision  of  Ger- 
manic group  of  languages,  451. 
2;  its  history,  463-9. 

hour  of  the  day,  expression  of, 
211.3, 

hypothetical  period,  construction 
of,  332.1,2. 

i,  pronunciation  of,  10;  ic  for  tin 
new  orthography,  18.1. 

ie,  pronunciation  of,  18. 

3{)ro,  162. 

imperative  mood,  235.4,  237.5, 
270;  filled  up  from  subjunctive 


INDEX. 


467 


present,  243.1;  use,  337;  sub- 
stitutes for,  338. 

imperative  sentence,  see  optative. 

imperfect  tense,  see  preterit. 

impersonal  verb,  233.26,  291-5; 
relation  to  passive,  294;  omis- 
sion of  impers,  subject,  293 ;  with 
genitive  object,  219.4;  with 
dative  of  subject,  222.11. le; 
accusative  of  subject,  227.2c. 

impressiveness  or  emphasis,  inver- 
sion for,  431j7,  443.2. 

indeclinable  words,  56.3,  360; 
indeclinable  adj.,  126.4. 

indefinite  article,  see  articles. 

indefinite  pronouns  and  numerals, 
184-95. 

indefinite  subjects  of  verbs,  1 54.4, 
166.3;  agreement  of  verb  after, 
154.4d,  322.3. 

Indian  (East)  languages,  relation- 
ship of,  450. 

indicative  mode,  235.2;  uses  of 
its  tenses,  323-8;  use  of  indica- 
tive instead  of  subjunctive, 
330c,  332.5c,  333.5. 

indirect  statement,  subjunctive  of, 
333. 

Indo-European  family  of  lan- 
guages, 449-50. 

Indo-Germanic,  see  Indo-Euro- 
pean. 

infinitive,  verbal  noun,  235.5, 
339;  ending,  237.1a;  ^vl  assign 
of,  243.2,  341;  perfect  inf., 
240. 1(Z;  use  of  inf.  for  participle 
in  perfect  and  pluperfect,  240. 
Ic,  251.4a;  inf.  as  noun,  340; 
inf.  as  subject  of  a  verb,  342; 
as  object,  343;  subject-accusa- 
tive of  inf.,  343.1.5a;  active  inf. 
in  sense  of  passive,  343.1. 5c,  (?, 
ni.l&;  more  special  cases,  343. 
1.6;  inf.  of  purpose  or  design, 
343.III.1;  inf.  dependent  on 
adjective,  344;  on  noun,  345; 
on  preposition,  346;  in  absolute 
construction,  347;  inf.  clauses, 
348;  with  preposition,  346.2; 
place  of  inf.  348.2,  319.2a-6; 
— two  infin. ,  place  of  transposed 
verb  with,  439.2,  444. 3&. 

inseparable  prefixes,  297.2,  307; 


conjugation  of  verb  with,  302- 
6;  denominative  verbs  foi-med 
with,  405.III.1. 

interjections,  56.4,  387-9;  inter- 
jectional  use  of  other  parts  of 
speech,  390;  inter)  ectional  or 
exclamatory  construction,  391; 
construction  of  cases  with  in- 
ter)., 392. 

internal  change  as  means  of  inflec- 
tion and  derivation,  400. 

interrogative  pronouns,  172-6; 
their  use  as  relatives,  176.1;  as 
indefinites,  176.2. 

interrogative  sentence,  427;  order 
of,  432.1,  443.3,  439.46. 

intransitive  verb,  233.1,  227. 
la,  6;  construction  of  accusative 
with,  227.2,  288.1;  impersonal 
passive  from,  279.2;  reflexive 
from,  288.2. 

inverted  order  of  sentence,  431-3, 
441,  443;  inversion  after  ad- 
verbial clause,  438.3/;  after 
appositive  adjective  phrase, 
431(Z;  in  exclamatory  clause, 
432.1c. 

irregular  declension  of  nouns,  96- 
100;  irr.  comparison  of  adjec- 
tives, 139,  irr.  conjugation  of 
verbs,  249-60. 

irregular  verbs,  list  of,  pp.  278-84; 
equivalent  to  Old  or  strong 
verbs,  236  2  Rem.l,  246.3. 

Italic  languages,  relationship  of, 
450. 

iterative  numerals,  206. 


\,  pronunciation  of,  29, 
\(x,  360a. 
|eb,  jeber,  190. 
jebermann,  187. 
jebmeb,  icbmeber,  190. 
leflUd),  190. 
jemanb,  186. 
ien,  jener,  163,  165-6. 


f,  pronunciation  of,   30;  English 

correspondents  of,  460. 
!ein,  195.2. 
fbmten,  251, 254. 


468 


INDEX. 


r,  pronunciation  of,  31. 

Latin  language,  relationship  of, 
450. 

letters,  German,  see  alphabet. 

Low-German  subdivision  of  Ger- 
manic languages,  451.1,  452.1. 

Luther's  influence  on  German  lan- 
guage, 467-8. 

m,  pronunciation  of,  31. 

man,  185. 

man&i,  191. 

masculine,  see  gender. 

measure,  use  of  singular  instead  of 
plural  in  expressing,  211.2; 
noun  of  measured  substance  not 
in  genitive,  216.5a;  accusative 
of  measure,  230.1. 

tnetir,  192.2. 

Meistersanger,  works  of,  465.2c. 

Middle  High-German  period,  dia- 
lects, Uterature,  463.2,  465; 
transition  to  New,  466. 

Minnesanger,  works  of,  465.2a. 

mi^,  as  prefix,  313. 

mixed  conjugation,  272;  declen- 
sion of  nouns, 97;  of  adjectives, 
124. 

modal  auxiliaries,  242.1,  251-9. 

modes,  235.2-4. 

modified  vowels,  origin,  14, 
400.1;  pronunciation  of,  15-7, 
21.2;  in  declension  of  nouns, 
69,  75,  78,  79.n.,  81,  84, 
85,  87,  88,  93.3  ;  in  compari- 
son of  adjectives,  136  ;  in  in- 
flection of  verb,  250.2,  251, 
268.2,3,  269.n.l,  270.2a. 

ntogen,  251,  255. 

Moeso-Gothic,  see  Gothic. 

month,  invariable  after  numeral 
designating  day,  216.4d 

multiplicative  numerals,  204. 

miiffen,  251,  256. 

mutes,  progression  of,  in  Germanic 
languages,  453-6;  correspon- 
dences of,  in  English  and  Ger- 
man, 457-60. 

Tt,  pronunciation  of,  32. 
n=declension  of  nouns,  73;  of  ad- 
jectives, 132. 
nein,  360a. 


neuter,  see  gender. 

New  or  weak  conjugation,  charac- 
teristics and  origin  of,  236.1, 
246.2,3;  mles  of,  247-60;  irre- 
gular verbs  of,  249-60. 

New  High-German  period  and 
dialects,  463.3,  467-9;  tran- 
sition from  Middle  to,  466. 

New  orthography,  5. 

XIQ,  pronunciation  of,  45;  English 
correspondent  of,  460. 

Nibelungenhed,  46  5. 2b. 

nid}t,  position  in  sentence,  319.2/. 

nic^t^,  188;  form  of  adjective 
with,  129.5. 

niemanb,  186. 

nominative  case,  uses  of,  59.1, 
212-4. 

normal  or  regular  order  of  sen- 
tence, 319,  430,  441-2. 

noun,  declension  of,  68-73;  first 
declension,  74-90;  second  de- 
clension, 91-5;  irregular  declen- 
sion, 96-100;  foreign  nouns, 
101;  proper  names,  102-8; 
modifjdng  adjuncts  of  the  noun, 
109-12;  equivalents  of,  113; 
adjective  used  as  noun,  129; 
infinitive,  340;  noun  as  adjunct 
of  adjective,  145,  147.3;  geni- 
tive dependent  on  a  noun,  216; 
dative  do.  225 ;  syntax  of  nouns, 
see  the  several  cases: — primitive 
nouns,  407 ;  derivative,  408  - 
12;  compound,  421-2. 

numbers,  in  declension,  58;  rules 
for  use,  210-11;  in  conjuga- 
tion, 235.3;  rules  for  use,  322; 
of  verb  or  adjective  with  ®ie, 
'you,'  153.4. 

numerals,  196-208;  cardinals; 
197-202;  ordinals,  203;  multi- 
pHcatives,  204;  variatives,  205; 
iteratives,  206 ;  dimidiatives, 
207.1;  fractional,  207.2;  inde- 
finite, 189-95. 

0,  pronunciation  of,  1 1 ;  o  for  00 
in  new  orthography,  11.1. 

b,  pronunciation  of,  16. 

objective  predicate,  noun  as,  316. 
16,  227.26,  36, c;  adj.  as,  116.1c, 
.316.2c. 


INDEy 


469 


Oe,  see  B. 

Old  or  strong  conjugation,  charac- 
teristics of,  246.1.3,  261-73; 
changes  of  radical  vowel  in,  262; 
classification  of  verbs  of,  263- 
7;  rules  of  inflection  of,  268- 
71;  conjugation  of,  273. 

Old  High-German  period,  dialects, 
literature,  463.1,  464. 

omission,  of  auxiliary  or  copula  in 
dependent  clauses,  439.3;  of 
certain  endings  of  adjective  de- 
clension, 126;  of  subject  of 
impersonal  verb,  293. 

optative  or  imperative  sentence, 
427;  its  arrangement,  432.2, 
443.4. 

optative  use  of  subjunctive,  331. 

ordinal  numerals,  203;  their  deri- 
vatives, 207;  ordinal  adverbs, 
207.3. 

p,  pronunciation  of,  33;  English 
correspondents  of,  459.2. 

participles,  verbal  adjectives,  235. 
6,  349;  forms,  237.6,7,  243.3; 
use  as  adjectives,  131,  148;  as 
adverbs,  356;  comparison  of, 
355;  participial  clauses,  357- 
8: — present  part.,  form,  237.6; 
use  and  office,  350,  353,  355- 
8:— past  part.,  form,  237.7, 
246,  271;  use  of  ge  as  sign  of, 
243.3;  value  and  office,  351, 
854-8;  certain  special  uses, 
359;  adjectives  in  form  of  past 
part.,  351.3:— future  passive 
part,,  278,  352. 

parts  of  speech,  enumeration  and 
classification  of,  56. 

passive  voice,  233.3,  274;  its 
forms,  275-7  ;  future  pass,  par- 
ticiple. 278,  352;  pass,  formed 
from  what  verbs,  279;  cases 
used  with,  280;  infrequency  of 
its  use,  281 ;  distinction  of  pass. 
from  past  participle  with  fein, 
282;  pass,  use  of  active  ini&ni- 
tive,  343.I.5c,d,III.16. 

perfect  tense,  240.1a,  c;  use,  326; 
omission  of  auxihary  of,  439.3, 

Persian  languages,  relationship  o^ 
45Q. 


personal  forms  of  the  verb,  814a. 

personal  pronouns,  declension  of, 
151-2;  use  in  address,  153; 
other  rules  respecting,  154;  re- 
flexive use,  155 ;  expletive  dativo 
of,  156:  possessive  dative  of, 
161,  222.IIIi>;  declension  of 
adjective  after,  125.2;  place  of, 
319.36;  do.  in  inverted  and 
transposed  clauses,  431^,  439. 
1,  443.56,  444.3a. 

persons  of  verb,  235.3,4;  endings 
of,  237.2,3,5;  rules  respecting 
use,  321. 

persons,  declension  of  names  ©4 
104-8. 

pf,  pronunciation  o^  46.1;  origin, 
459.4. 

pi),  pronunciation  of,  46.2. 

pluperfect  tense,  240. 16,  c;  use, 
327;  omission  of  auxiliary  o^ 
439.3. 

plural,  its  ending  determines  class 
under  first  declension  of  nouns, 
69;  irregular  formation  of,  in 
nouns,  97.2,  99,  100,  101. 
3-5;  singular  used  for,  in  expres- 
sions of  measure,  211.2. 

positive  degree  of  adjectives,  134, 

possessive  dative,  222.nia,&, 
225.1. 

possessive  pronouns  or  pronomi- 
nal adjectives,  157-8;  declen- 
sion, 159;  used  as  nouns,  160; 
definite  article  or  poss.  dative 
used  for,  161;  old  style  expres- 
sions and  abbreviations  for, 
162;  used  instead  of  genitive  of 
pronoun,  158.2,  216.3. 

potential  use  of  subjunctiye^ 
332.3. 

predicate  of  a  sentence,  426.2, 
428.2. 

predicate  adjective,  116.1,  316.2; 
its  form  in  superlative,  140.26. 

predicate  noun,  213,  316.1;  verb 
in  plural  to  agree  with,  822.3. 

prefixes,  origin  of,  395. 

prefixes  of  verbs:  separable,  297. 
1,  298;  inseparable,  297.2, 
302,  307;  separable  or  in- 
separable, 297.3,  808-9. 

prepositions,  371;  classification. 


470 


INDEX. 


372;  prep,  followed  by  genitive, 
218,  373;  by  dative,  224, 
374;  by  accusative,  228.1, 
375;  by  dative  or  accusative, 
224.2,  228.2,  376;  by  infini- 
tive, 346. 1 ;  by  infinitive  clause, 
346.2;  by  substantive  clause, 
377,  436. 3c?;  by  adverbs, 
378  ;  taking  adverb  as  comple- 
ment, 379  ;  combination  of 
prep,  with  definite  article,  65. 

prepositional  phrase,  380;  as  ad- 
junct of  noun,  112;  of  adjective, 
146;  of  verb,  318. 

present  tense,  235.1,  268;  use, 
324;  in  sense  of  our  preterit, 
324.2;  of  perfect,  324.3;  of 
future,  324.4. 

preterit  tense,  235.1,  269;  its 
origin,  246.3;  use  325;  in  sense 
of  our  pluperfect,  325.2;  of 
perfect,  325.3. 

primitive  words,  402;  verbs,  403; 
nouns,  407;  adjectives,  413; 
adverbs,  367. 

principal  parts  of  verb,  237. 1. 

progression  of  mutes  in  Germanic 
languages,  453-60. 

pronouns,  substantive  and  adjec- 
tive use  of,  149;  classification, 
150;  personal  pron.,  151-6; 
reflexive,  155;  possessive,  157- 
62;  demonstrative,  163-71; 
determinative,  167-71;  inter- 
rogative, 172-6;  relative,  177- 
83;  indefinite,  184-95. 

pronunciation,  6-55. 

proper  names,  declension  of, 
102  8. 

protasis,  332.1. 

q,  pronunciation  of,  34,  39. 
qu,  pronunciation  of,  47. 
question,     see    interrogative    sen- 
tence. 

r,  pronunciation  of,  35. 
reciprocal  use  of  reflexive  pronoun, 

155.4. 
redundant  declension,  99. 
reflexive  use  of  personal  pronouns, 

155;  reflexive  pronoun,  155.3; 

reciprocal  reflexive,  155.4. 


reflexive  verb.  233.2a,  283;  con- 
jugation of,  284-5 ;  from  what 
verbs  formed,  286-7;  from  in- 
transitives,288;  cases  used  with, 
289;  with  reflexive  object  in 
dative,  290;  with  genitive  ob- 
ject, 219.3. 

regular  order  of  sentence,  see  nor- 
mal order. 

regular  verbs,  246.3. 

relative  pronouns,  177-83;  com- 
pound rel.,  179.1-3;  indefinite, 
179.4;  compound  relative  used 
for  our  simple,  179.5;  agree- 
ment of  verb  with  rel.,  181, 
321.2. 

root  of  verb,  237.  la ;  roots  of  lan- 
guage, 3936,  398. 

rotetion  of  mutes,  453. 

j,  pronunciation  of,  36;  English 
correspondents  of,  458.3;  use 
of  long  or  short  §  (f  or  g)  in 
writing  or  printing,  3.1. 

Sanskrit  language,  relationship  of, 
450. 

Scandinavian  languages,  relation- 
ship of,  451.3. 

f  A,  pronunciation  of,  48 

@e.,  162. 

second  or  weak  declension  of 
nouns,  70,  73,  91-5;  of  adjec- 
tives, 119-28,  132. 

fein,  conjugation  of,  239.2,46; 
use  as  auxiliary,  240-1;  origin 
of  use,  240.46. 

fetber,  felbft,  added  to  reflexives, 
155.5,  169.3. 

sentence,  definition  and  constitu- 
ents, 426,  428;  kinds,  427; 
arrangement,  429-46. 

separable  prefixes,  297-8;  con- 
jugation of  verbs  with  such, 
299-301;  place  of  prefix,  299. 
1,  319.2c,d;  denominative  verbs 
formed  with,  405.  in.  2. 

fid),  155.3. 

simple  predicate  adjective,  116. 
la,  316.2a. 

Slavic  or  Slavonic  languages,  re- 
lationship of,  450. 

fo,  as  relative  pronoTin,  182.1; 
with  atg  omitted  after,  438. 3d,  e. 


INDEX. 


471 


\o\d),  170. 

foUen,  251,  257. 

2>x„  162. 

[[/  %  pronunciation  and  use  of, 
49;  English  correspondents  of, 
458.3. 

^,  romanized  as  ss,  2.2;  §  for  §,  in 
new  orthography,  49.1. 

stems,  3936. 

strong  declension,  see  first  or 
strong  declension. 

strong  conjugation,  see  old  or 
strong  conjugation. 

subject  of  a  sentence,  426.2, 
428.1. 

subjunctive  mood,  235.2;  nature 
and  use,  329-30;  optative 
subj.,  331;  conditional  and 
potential,  332 ;  of  indirect  state- 
ment, 333 ;  other  less  frequent 
uses,  332.5. 

subordinate  clause,  see  dependent. 

substantive,  see  noun. 

substantive  dependent  clause, 
113.3,  436,  444. 

suffixes,  origin  and  relation  of, 
394-5  ;  formation  of,  418c. 

superlative  degree,  of  adjective, 
134-42;  declension  of,  140-1,2; 
predicate  form,  140. 2&;  adver- 
bial form,  140.2c,  363.2;  sup. 
absolute  and  relative,  142. 1 ;  do. 
in  adverbs,  363.2c;  sup.  inten- 
sified by  aUer,  142.3. 

t,  pronunciation  of,  37;  English 
correspondent  of,  458.2;  t  for 
hi  in  new  orthography,  25.1;  t 
fortt),  37.3. 

tenses,  simple,  235.1;  compound, 
240-1;  use  of,  indicative, 
324  8. 

Teutonic  languages,  see  Germanic. 

t^,  pronunciation  of,  37,  50; 
English  correspondent  of,  458. 
2;  ^  of  tt)  omitted  in  new  ortho- 
graphy, 37.3. 

themes,  3936. 

t^un,  as  auxiliary,  242.3. 

time,  accusative  of,  230.2;  geni- 
tive of,  220.1. 

titles,  declension  of,  108;  plural 
verb  used  with,  322.4, 


transitive  verb,  233.1,  227.1a,6. 

transposed  order  of  dependent 
clauses,  434,  441,  444;  limited 
to  clauses  grammatically  depen- 
dent, 439.6;  of  interrogative 
and  exclamatory  clauses,  439.4. 

^,  pronunciation  of,  51. 

u,  pronunciation  of,  12. 
ii,  pronunciation  of,  17. 
Ue,  see  ii. 

ui,  pronunciation  of,  22. 
Umlaut,  400.1. 

t),  pronunciation  of,  38. 

variation  of  radical  vowel  in  Old 
conjugation,  400.2,  262-7. 

variative  numerals,  205. 

ber=,  derivation  and  use  of,  307.6, 
405.  m.  Id 

verb,  essential  characteristic  and 
office  of,  232,  314;  classifica- 
tion, 233;  simple  forms  of, 
235-7;  principal  parts,  237.1; 
compound  forms,  238-41 ; 
auxiliaries,  of  tense,  239;  of 
mood,  242.1,  251-9;  other, 
242.2,3;  Old  and  New  conjuga- 
tions, 245-73;  passive  voice, 
274-82;  reflexive  verbs,  283- 
90;  impersonal,  291-5;  com- 
pound, 296-313,  420:- ad- 
juncts of  verb,  315-8;  their 
order,  319;  object,  315;  predi- 
cate noun  or  adjective,  316;  ad- 
verb, 317;  prepositional  phrase, 
318;  genitive  case  with  verbs, 
219-20;  dative,  222,  225.1; 
accusative,  227,  230: — primi- 
tive verbs,  403;  derivative, 
404-6. 

\)id,  192. 

vocative,  nominative  in  sense  of, 
214. 

voices,  active  and  passive,  233.3. 

boll,  as  prefix,  313. 

vowels,  pronunciation  of,  7-22; 
quantity,  7;  modified  vowels, 
14-7. 

rt),  pronunciation  of,  39. 
tt)a«,  129.5,   172-3,   176,  179; 
tpq?  fiir^  175,  177,  179, 


472 


INDEX. 


weak  declension,  see  second  or 
weak  declension. 

weak  conjugation,  see  New  or 
weak  conjugation. 

toeld),  172,  174,  176-9. 

toenig,  192. 

Wer,  172-3,  176,  179. 

Werben,  conjugation  of,  239.3,4c; 
as  auxiliary  of  future  and  con- 
ditional tenses,  240.2,4;  of 
passive  voice,  275-7. 

ttJiffen,  260. 

wo  or  wov,  combined  with  prepo- 
sitions, in  interrogative  sense, 
173.2;  in  relative  sense,  180. 

njoHen,  251,  258. 

word-combination  or  composition, 
418-25. 

word-formation  or  deri/ation,  in- 


troductory-explanations, 393-7; 
principles,  398-402;  means  of 
derivation,  399-400;  rules  of 
derivation,  403-17. 
written  character,  German,  2.1, 
pp.  275-77. 

JT,  pronunciation  of,  40. 

h,  pronunciation  and  use  oL  13, 
19.3,  41. 

2,  pronunciation  of,  42;  English 
correspondents  of,  458.3. 

2er=,  derivation  and  use  of,  307.  f. 
405.ni.le. 

JU,  as  sign  of  infinitive,  341. 

gnjeen,  jtro,  199«. 


GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

HENRY   HOLT  &   CO.,   New  York. 

These  hooks  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  indicated. 

♦ 

Grammars  and  Exercise  Books. 

Blackwell's  German  Prefixes  and  Suffixes.    By  J.    S.   Blackwell, 

Professor  in  the  University  of  Missouri.     16mo.     137  pp. 
Huss's  Conversation  in  German.     By  H.   C.  O.  Huss,  Professor  of 

Modern  Languages  in  Princeton  College.     12mo.     230  pp. 
Joynes-Otto  First  Book  in  German.     For  young  pupils.     By  Bmil 

Otto.     Revised  by  Edward  S.  Joynes,  Professor  in  the  South 

Carolina  College.     12mo.     116  pp.     Boards. 
Joynes-Otto  Introductory  German  Lessons,  The.     New  edition,  with 

full  vocabularies.     By  Prof.  Edward  S.  Joynes.    12mo.   252  pp. 
Keetels's  Oral  Method  with  German.    By  Jean  Gustave  Keetels. 

12mo.     371  pp. 
Otis's  Elementary  German.    By  Charles  P.  Otis.     16mo.    832  pp. 

^^°  There  are  two  editions  of  this  hook:  I.  In  German  type;  II.  In 
Roman  type,  which  edition  will  only  he  sent  when  specially  ordered. 
Otto's  German  Conversation  Grammar.     By  Dr.  Emil  Otto.     New 

edition,  revised,  and  in  part  re-written,  by  Wm.  Cook.    12mo. 

Half  roan.     591  pp. 
Otto's  Elementary  German  Grammar.    With  a  vocabulary  by  George 

MoRiTZ  Wahl.     12mo.     315  pp. 
Otto's    Translating   English   into    German.      By  Dr.    Emil    Otto. 

Edited  by  Prof.  Rhodes  Massie  and  Prof.  Edward  S.  Joynes. 

12mo.     167  pp. 
Spanhoofd's  Deutsche  Grammatik.     By  A.  W.  Spanhoofd,  teacher  in 

St.  Paul's  School,  N.  H.     16mo.     187  pp. 
Wenckebach  und  Schrakamp's  Deutsche  Grammatik  fiir  Amerikaner. 
*  By  Carla  Wenckebach,   Professor  in  Wellesley  College,  and 

Josepha  Schrakamp.     12mo.    291  pp. 
Whitney's  Compendious  German  Grammar.     By  Wm.  D.  Whitney, 

Professor  in  Yale  University.     12nio.     472  pp.     Half  roan. 
Whitney's  Brief  German  Grammar,  based  on  the  author's  "Compen- 
dious German  Grammar."  By  Wm.  D.  Whitney.    16mo.   143  pp. 
Whitney-Klemm  German  by  Practice.     By  Dr.  L.  R.  Klemm.    Edited 

by  William  D.  Whitney.    12jno.     305  pp. 

Natural  Method  and  Conversation  Books. 
Game  of  German  Conversation.     By  Mme.  F.  Jeff  Tensler. 
Heness's  Der  neue  Leitfaden.     Beim  Unterricht  in  der  deutschen 

Sprache.    By  Gottlieb  Heness.     12mo.    403  pp. 
Heness's    Der  Sprechlehrer   unter   seinen  Schlllern.    By  Gottlieb 

Heness.    12mo.     187  pp. 
Kaiser's  Erstes  Lehrbuch.    By  H.  C.  Kaiser,  Ph.D.  12mo.   128  pp. 
Pylodet's  German  Conversations     By  L.  Pylodbt.    ISmo.    ^8  pp. 


HENRY  HOLT  &=  CO.'S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS, 

Schrakamp  und  Van  Daell's  Das  Dentsche  Buch.  By  A.  N.  Van  Daell 
and  JosEPHA  Schrakamp.     12mo.     144  pp. 

Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch  1    18mo.     147  pp.     Boards. 

Stern's  Studien  und  Plaudereien.  First  Series.  By  Sigmon  M.  Stekn, 
Director  of  Stern's  School  of  Languages.     12mo.     262  pp. 

Stern's  Studien  und  Plaudereien.  Second  Series.  By  Sigmon  M. 
Stern  and  Menco  Stern.     12mo.     380  pp. 

"Wenckebach's  Deutscher  Anschauungs-Unterricht.  By  Carla  and 
Helene  Wenckebach.     12mo.     451  pp. 

Williams's  German  Conversation  and  Composition.  By  Alonzo  Wil- 
liams, A.M.,  Professor  in  Brown  University.     12mo.     147  pp. 

Reading  Books. 

Fouque's  TJndine.     With  introduction,  notes,  and  vocabulary,  by  H.C. 

G.  VON  Jagemann,  Professor  in  the  Indiana  University.     190  pp. 
Key's  Fabeln  fiir  Kinder.     Illustrated   by  Otto   Speckter.     With 

vocabulary.     {In  roman  type.)    12mo.     52  pp.     Boards. 
Joynes-Otto    Introductory    German    Reader.     By    Dr.    Emil    Otto. 

With  notes  and  vocabulary  by  Prof.   Edward  S.  Joynes.    12mo. 

282  pp. 

Klemm's  lese-  und  Sprachbuecher.  In  sieben  Kreisen.  By  Dr.  L.  R. 
Klemm. 

Klemm's  Abriss  der  Geschichte  der  deutschen  Literatur.     Kreis  VIII. 

12mo.     385  pp. 
Meissner's  Aus  meiner  Welt.      Geschichten  fur  Grosse  und  Kleine. 

With  vocabulary  by  Carla  Wenckebach.     12mo.    127  pp. 
Otis's  Grimm's  Maerchen.     Selected  and   edited,  with  introduction, 

notes,  and  vocabulary,  by  Charles  P.  Ottis.     151  pp. 
Otto's  German  Reader.     By  Prof.   E.   P.   Evans.     12mo.     239  pp. 

Half  roan. 
Schrakamp's  Erzaehlungen  aus  der  deutschen  Geschichte.     By  Josepha 

Schrakamp.     12mo.    286  pp. 
Simonson's  German  Ballad  Book.     Prepared  by  Prof.  L.  Simonson,  of 

the  Hartford  (Ct.)  High  School.     12mo.     304  pp. 
Storme's  Easy  German  Reading.     By  G.  Storme.     16mo.     356  pp. 
Wenckebach's  deutsches  Lesebuch.    By  Carla  and  Helene  Wencke- 
bach.    12rao.     316  pp. 
Wenckebach's  Die  schoensten  deutschen   Lieder.        By  Carla  and 

Helene  Wenckebach.     12mo.     363  pp. 
Whitney's  German  Reader.     By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in 

Yale  University.     12mo.     523  pp.     Half  roan. 
Whitney-Klemm  Elementary  German  Reader.      By  Dr.  L.  R.  Klemm. 

Edited  by  Prof.  W.  D.  Whitney.     12mo.    237  pp. 
Dictionary. 
Whitney's  Compendious  German  Dictionary.      (German-English  and 

English-German.)    By  William  D.  Whitney.    8vo.    900  pp. 

A  complete  catalogue  and  price-list  of  Henry  Holt  d  Oo,'s  educa- 
iional  publications  will  be  sent  on  application. 

3 


HENRY  HOLT  &>  CO:S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 


Whitney's  German  Texts. 

Selected  and  annotated  under  the  general  editorship  of  Professor  Wiixiam  D. 
Whitney.    16mo.    Cloth. 

Goethe's  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris.  With  an  introduction^nd  notes  by  Frank- 
lin Carter,  President  of  Williams  College.    113  pp. 

Faust.    I.  Theil.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  William  Cook, 

late  Professor  in  Harvard  University.    220  pp. 

Lessing's  Minna  von  Barnhelm.  With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  W. 
D.  Whitney,  Professor  in  Yale  University.    138  pp. 

Nathan  der  "Weise.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  H.  C.  G, 

Brandt,  Professor  in  Hamilton  College.    158  pp. 

Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell.  With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  A.  Sachtle- 
BEN,  Professor  in  the  College  of  Charleston,  S.  C.    199  pp. 

Maria  Stuart.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Edward  S.  Joynes, 

Professor  in  South  Carohna  College.    222  pp. 

Seidensticker's    German    Scientific   Monographs. 

With  >otes.    12mo.    Paper. 

No.  I.  Uber  Goethe's  Naturwissenschaftliche  Arbeiten.  Von  H.  Helmholtz. 
53  pp. 

No  II,  Uber  Bakterien,  die  Kleinsten  lebenden  Wesen.  Von  Dr.  Ferdinand 
CoHN.    55  pp. 

Student's   Collection    of    Classic    German    Plays. 

12mo.    Paper. 
Goethe's  Hermann  und  Dorothea.  With  notes  by  Calvin  Thomas.  104  pp. 

Egmont.    Edited  by  Professor  William  Steften.    113  pp. 

Koerner's  Zriny.    With  an  introduction  and  notes  by  Edward  R.  Ruggles, 

Professor  in  Dartmouth  College.    126  pp. 
Lessing's  Emilia  Galotti.    With  notes,    82  pp. 
Schiller's   Der  Nefie  als  Onkel.     With  notes  and  a  vocabulary  by  A. 

Clement.    99  pp. 
Jungfrau  Von  Orleans.    Edited  by  Rev.  A.  B.  Nichols,  Instructor  in 

German  in  Harvard  University.     203  pp. 

Wallenstein's  Lager.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    60  pp. 

Die  Piccolomini.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    139  pp. 

"Wallenstein's  Tod.    With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Krauss.    210  pp. 

Wallenstein,  complete  in  one  volume.    Cloth. 

College  Series  of  German  Plays. 

12mo.    Paper. 

Einer  muss  heiraten,  by  Wilhelmi  ;  and  Eigensinn,  by  Benedix.    With 

notes.    63  pp. 
Three  German  Comedies.    I.  Er  ist  nicht  eifersuechtig,  by  Elz;  IL 

Der  Weiberfeind,  by  Benedix  ;  III.   Ln  Wartesalon  erster  Classe, 

by  Mueller.    With  notes.    24  pp. 
Der  Bibliothekar.    By  Gustav  von  Moser.    With  notes.    162  pp. 
Die  Journalisten.    By  Gustav  Freytag.    With  notes.    178  pp. 
Zopf  und  Schwert.    By  Gutzkowt.    With  notes.    173  pp. 
Englisch.    By  Goerner.    With  notes  by  A.  H.  Edoren.    61  pp. 
Badekuren.    By  Putlitz.    With  notes.    69  pp. 
Das  Hera  vergessen.    By  Putlitz.    With  notes.    79  pp, 

3 


HENRY  HOLT  &>  CO:S  GERMAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 
Stern's  Selected  German  Comedies. 

Selected  and  Edited  by  Professor  S.  M.  Stern.    12mo.    Paper, 

Ein  Knopf.    By  Julius  Rosen.    41  pp. 

Der  Schimmel.    By  G.  von  Moser.    55  pp. 

Sie  hat  ihr  herz  entdeckt.    By;  W.  Mueller  von  Koenigswintbb.    79  pp. 

Simson  und  Belila.    ByEMiLCLAAR.    55  pp. 

Er  sucht  einen  Vetter.    By  Jungman.    49  pp. 

Er  muss  tanzen.    By  C.  A.Paul.    51  pp. 

Gaenschen  von  Buchenau.    By  W.  Friedrich.    59  pp. 

German  Plays  for  Children. 

Kinder-Comoedien.    By  various  authors.    Edited  and  annotated  in  German 
by  Professor  Th.  Heness.    Five  plays  in  one  volume    12mo.    141  pp. 

UnterFialtungs  Bibliotliek.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Andersen's  Bilderbuch  ohne  Bilder.    With  notes  and  vocabulary  by  Pro- 
fessor L.  SiMONSON  of  the  Hartford  (Ct.)  High  School.    104  pp. 
Die  Eisjungfrau  u.  andere  Geschichten.   With  notes  by  E.  C.  F.  Kbauss. 

150  pp. 

Auerbach's  Auf  "Wache;  Koquette's  Der  gefrorene  Kuss.    The  two  in 

one  volume.    With  notes.    126  pp. 

Carove's  Das  Maerchen  ohne  Ende.    With  notes.    45  pp. 
Ebers'  eine  Frage.    With  introduction  and  notes.    117  pp. 
Eichendorff  s  Aus  dem  Leben  eines  Taugenichts.    132  pp. 
Pouqu6's  Undine.    With  a  glossary  of  the  principal  words  and  phrases. 

137  pp.     See  also  Jagetiiann's  edition  under  Reading  Books. 

Sintram  und  seine  Gefaehrten.    114  pp. 

Grimm's  Die  Venus  vor  Milo  ;  Kafael  und  Michel- Angelo. '  139  pp. 
Grimm's  Kinder-  und  Hausmaerclien.    With  notes.    228  pp.    See  also 

Otis's  edition  under  Reading  Books. 
Hauflfs  Das  kalte  if  erz.    61  pp. 

Heine's  Die  Harzreise.    With  introduction  and  notes.    97  pp. 
Heyse's  Anfaung  und  Ende.    54  pp. 

Die  Einsamen.    44  pp. 

Hillern's  Hoeher  als  die  Kirche.    With  notes  and  vocabulary.    46  pp. 
Muegge's  Biukan  Voss.    55  pp. 

Signa  die  Seterin.    71  pp. 

Mueller's  Deutsche  Liebe.    With  English  notes.    121  pp. 
Nathusius'  Tagebuch  eines  armen  Praeuleins.    163  pp. 
Ploennies'  Princessin  Use.    With  notes  by  J.  M.  Merrick.    45  pp. 
Putlitz's  "Was  sich  der  wald  erzaehlt.    62  pp. 

Vergissmeinnicht.    With  English  notes.    44  pp. 

Biehl's   Der   Much  der   Schoenheit.    With  introduction  and  notes  by 

Francis  L.  Kendall.    77  pp. 
Schiller's  Das  Lied  von  der  Glocke.    With  introduction  and   notes  by 

Charles  P.  Otis,  Ph.D.    70  pp. 
Storm's  Immensee.    With  notes.    34  pp. 
Tieck's  Die  Elfen ;    Das  Kothkaeppchen.    With  notes  by  Professor  L. 

SiMONSON.      41   pp. 

Vilmar  and  Richter's  German  Epic  Tales.    Told  in  prose.    Die  Nibe- 
lungen,  von  A.  F.  C.  Vilmar.    "Walther  und  Hildegund,   von  Au- 

BERT  RTCHTER.     100  pp 

4 


FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS 

PUBLISHED   BY 

HENRY   HOLT  &   CO.,    New  York. 

These  books  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  indicated^ 


Grammars  and  Exercise  Books. 

Borel's  Grammaire  Frangaise.    A  I'usage  des  Anglais.  Par  Eugene  Borel. 

Revised  by  E.  B.  Coe,    \imo.    450  pp.    Half  roan. 
Delille's  Condensed  French.  Instruction.  By  C.  J.  Delillk.  18mo.  143  pp. 
Eugdne's  Student's  Comparative  French  Grrammar.     To  which  are 

a<Wed  Fi-ench- English  Exercises.      Kevised  by  L.  H.  Buckingham,  Ph.D. 

12mo.    284  pp. 
Eugene's  Elementary  French  Lessons.     Revised  and  edited  by  L.  H. 

Buckingham,  Ph.D.    12mo,    126  pp. 

Gasc's  The  Translator.— English  into   French.      By  Professors  Gasc,  L. 

Brun,  and  others.    12mo.    220  pp. 
Gibert's  French  Manual.    A  French   Pronouncing  Grammar  for  Young 

Students.    By  M.  Gibert,    12mo.    112  pp. 
Julien's  Petites  Legons  de  Conversation  et  de  Grammaire.    By  F.  Julien. 

Square  12ino.    222  pp. 
Otto's  French  Conversation  Grammar.    Revised  by  Ferdinand  Bocher, 

Professor  of  Modern  Languages  in  Harvard  University.    12mo.  489  pp.  Half 

roan. 
Pylodet's  Beginning  French.    Exercises  in  Pronouncing,  Spelling,  and 

Translatitig.    By  L.  Pylodet.    16mo.     180  pp.    Boards. 

Sadler's  Translating  English  into  French.  By  P.  Sadler.  Revised  and 
annotated  by  Prof.  C.  F.  Gillette.    12mo.    285  pp. 

The  Joynes-Otto  Introductory  French.  Lessons.  By  Edward  S.  Joynes, 
Professor  in  University  of  South  Carolina.     12nio.    275  pp. 

The  Joynes-Otto  First  Book  in  French.    By  Edward  S.  Joynes.    12mo. 

116  pp.    Boards. 
WTiitney's  French  Grammar.    By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in  Yale 

University.    12mo.    442  pp.    Half  roan. 
Whitney's  Practical  French.    Taken  from  the  author's  larger  Grammar, 

and  supplemented  by  conversations  and  idiomatic  phrases.     By  Professor 

W,  D.  Whitney. 
Whitney's  Brief  French  Grammar.    Systematically  arranged,  with  exer^ 

cises.    By  William  D.  Whitney.    16mo.    177  pp. 

Natural  Method  and  Conversation  Books. 

AUiot's  Contes  et  Nouvelles.  Suivis  de  Conversations,d'Exercices  de  Gram- 
maire.   Par  Madame  L.  Alliot.    12mo. 

Aubert's  Colloquial  French  Drill.  By  E.  Aubkrt,  Professor  in  the  Normal 
College,  New  York  City.    Part  I.  l6rao.    66  pp.    Part  H.  118  pp. 

Le  Jeu  des  Auteurs.    96  Cards  in  a  Box. 

Moutonnler's  Les  Premiers  Pas  dans  I'Etud  e  du  Frangais  par  la 

m6thode  natiirelle.    Par  C.  Moutonnier.    12mo.     197  pp.    Illustrated. 

Pour  Apprendre  a  Parler  FranQais.    12mo.    191  pp. 

Parlez-vous  Frangais  ?  A  pocket  manual  of  French  and  English  Conversa- 
tion, with  hints  for  pronunciation  and  a  list  of  the  irregular  verbs.  l8mo. 
111pp.    Boards. 

I 


HENR  Y  HOL  T  6-  CO.  \S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Biodu's  Lucie.  Familiar  Conversations  in  French  and  English.  By  Mme.  A. 
Riodu.    1-^mo.    1J8  pp. 

Stern  &  M6ras'  fetude  Progressive  de  la  Langue  Francaise.  By  Sigmon 
M.  Stern  and  Bapi^iste  Meras.    K'lno.    288  pp. 

Witccmb  &  Bellenger's  French  Conversation.  Dialogues  on  Familiar 
bubjects,  to  which  is  annexed  tlie  Summary  of  French  Grammar,  by  Deullk. 
ISmo.    259  pp. 

Reading  Books. 

^sop's  Fables  in  French.    With  vocabulary.    16mo.   237  pp. 
Alliot's  Les  Auteurs  Contemporains.    Extraits  choisis  d'oeuvres diverses, 
avee  Notices  Biographiqiies  et  Motes.     By  Mme.  L.  Alliot.     12mo.    371pp. 

Aubert's  Litt^rature  Frangaise.   Premiere  Annee.    By  E.  Aubkrt.    16mo 

338  pp. 

Bocher  s  Progressive  French  Beader.  With  notes  and  vocabulary  by 
F.  BocHER,  Professor  in  Harvard  Univer>ity.     12mo.    291   pp.    Half  roan. 

Fisher's  Easy  French  Beading.  Historical  tales  and  anecdotes,  arranged 
with  foot-notes,  contaiuing  irans^latioiis  of  the  principal  words.  16mo.  253  pp. 

Fleury's  L'Histoire  de  France.  Racontee  a  la  Jeunesse.  Par  M.  Lam^ 
Fleury.     16mo.    372  pp. 

De  Janon's  Becueil  de  Po6sies.  A  I'usage  de  la  Jeunesse  Am^ricaine.  Far 
Mlle.  Camille  de  Janon.     16mio.     18t)  pp. 

Joynes-Otto  Introductory  French  Beader,  The.  Edited,  with  notes  and 
vocabulary,  by  Edwaro  S.  Joynes,    12mo.    \m  pp. 

Julien's  Practical  and  Conversational  Beader  in  French  and  English.  By 
F.  JuLiEN.    Square  12mo.     18..'  pp. 

Lacombe's  Petite  Histoire  du  Peuple  Frangais.    By  Paul  Lacombe. 
With  Grammatical  and  Explanatory  Notes  by  Jules  Bufi.     12mo.    212  pp. 

La  Fontaine's  Fables  Choisies.  Edited,  with  notes,  by  Leon  Delbos.  12mo. 
119  pp.    Boards. 

Pylodet's  Beginner  French  Beader.  With  a  complete  vocabulary.  Ar- 
ranged by  L.  Pylodet-     16nio.     ::'35  pp.    Boards. 

Pylodet's  Second  French  Beader.  With  a  complete  French-English  vo- 
cabulary.    Compiled  by  L.  Pylodet.    Illustrated.     12mo.    277  pp. 

Pylodet's  La  Litt6rature  Frangaise  Classique.  Tir6es  des  Matinees  Lifct6- 
raires  d'  Edouard  Mennechet.     12mo.     393  pp. 

Pylodet's  La  Litt6rature  Frangaise  Contemporaine.  Recueil  en  prose 
et  en  vers.     12mo.    310  pp. 

Pylodet's  Gouttes  de  Bos6e.    Petit  Tr6sor  poetique  des  Jeunes  Personnes. 

l8mo.     188  pp. 

Pylodet's  La  Mdre  I'Oie.  Poesies,  6nigmes,  chansons  et'rondes  enfantines. 
Ilkistre.     8vo.    80  pp. 

Whitney's  Short  French  Reader.  With  notes  and  vocabulary.  By  W.  D. 
Whitney.    16mo. 

Dictionaries. 

Bellow's  French  and  English  Dictionary  for  the  Pocket.  32mo.  600  pp. 
The  same.    Larger  print.     12nio.    600  pp.     Half  roan. 

Gases  K"ew  Dictionary  of  the  French  and  English  Languages.    By 

Ferdinand  E.  A.  Gasc.    8vo.    French-English  part,  600  pp.    English-French 
part,  586  pp.     One  volume. 

Gasc's  Improved  Modern  Pocket  Dictionary.  By  F.  A.  E.  Gasc.  18mo. 
French-English  part,  201  pp.    English-French  part,  387  pp.  One  volume. 

A  descriptive  catalogue,  with  prices,  of  Henry  Holtd:  Co.^s  educational publU 
cations  will  be  sent  on  application. 


HENR  V  HOL  T  &=  CO:s  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS. 
Students'  Collection  of  Classic  French  Plays. 

The  first  six  with  full  uotes  by  Prof.  E.  S.  Joynes.    The  last  three  with  notes 
by  Leon  Delbos,  M.A.    12mo,    Paper. 

Le  Cid.    Par  CoRNEiLLE.    110  pp. 

Athalie.    Far  Racine.    117  pp. 

liB  Misanthrope.    Par  Moliere.    130  pp. 

L'Avare.    Par  Moliere.    132  pp. 

Esther.    Par  Racine.    66  pp. 

Cinna.    Par  Corneili.e.    87  pp. 

Le  Bourgeois  Gentilhomme.    Par  Moliere.    140  pp. 

Horace.    Par  Corneillk.    78  pp. 

Les  Plaideurs.    Par  Racine.    80  pp. 

The  foregoing  in  3  vols.,  three  plays  in  each,  in  the  above  order.    12mo.    Cloth. 

Ronnantic  French  Drama.    (12mo.    Flexible  covers.) 

Buy  Bias.    By  Victor  Hugo.    With  notes  by  Rena  A.  Michaels.    117  pp. 

College  Series  of  Modern  French  Plays. 

With  Euglish  notes  by  Prof.  Ferdinand  Bocher.    12mo.    Paper. 

La  Joie  Fait  Peur.    Par  Mme.  de  Girardin.    46  pp. 
La  Bataille  de  Dames.    Par  Scribe  et  Legouve.    81  pp. 
La  Maison  de  Penarvan.    Par  Jules  Sandeau.    72  pp. 
La  Poudre  aux  Yeux.    Par  Labiche  et  Martin,    59  pp. 
Jean  Baudry.    Par  Augusts  Vacquerie.    7:2  pp. 
Les  Petits  Oiseaux.    Par  Labiche  et  Delacour.    70  pp. 
Mademoiselle  de  la  SeigliSre.    Par  J.  Sandeau.    99  pp. 
Le  Bom-an  d'un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre.    Par  O.  Feuillbt.    100  pp. 
Les  Doigts  de  F6e.    Par  E.  Scribe.    HI  pp. 
Above  in  2  vols.    Cloth.    Vol  I.  containing  the  first  five,  Vol.  II.  the  last  four. 

Modern  French  Comedies.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

Le  Village.    Par  O.  Feuillet.    34  pp. 

La  Cagnotte.    Par  MM.  Eugene  Labiche  et  A.  Delacour.    83  pp. 

Les  Pemmes  qui  Pleurent.  Par  MM.  Siraudin  et  Lambert  Thiboust.  28  pp. 

Les  Petites  Mis6res  de  la  Vie  Humaine.    Par  M.  Clairville.    35  pp. 

Le  Niaise  de  Saint  Flour.    Par  Bayard  et  Lemoine.    38  pp. 

Un  Caprice.    Par  Alfred  de  Musset. 

Trois  Proverbes.    Par  Th.  Leclerq.    68  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Valerie.    Par  Scribe.    39  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Le  Collier  de  Perles.    Par  Mazeres.    56  pp.    With  vocabulary. 

Selected  French  Comedies. 

Original  text,  with  a  close  English  veision  on  opposite  pages. 
En  Wagon.    ComMie  en  1  acte.    Par  Eugene  Verconsin.    12mo.    44  pp. 
C'6tait  Gertrude.  Comedie  en  1  acte.  Par  Eugene  Verconsin.  12rao.  54  pp. 

French  Plays  for  Children.    (12mo.    Paper.) 

La  Petite  Maman,  par  Mme.  de  M.  ;  Le  Bracelet,  par  Mme,  de  Gaule.  38  pp. 

La  Vieille  CousinCj  par  E.  Souvestre;  Les  Bicochets.    52  pp. 

Le  Testament  de  Madame  Patural,  par  E.  Souvestre;    La  Demoiselle 

de  St.  Cyr,  par  Drohoyowska.    54  pp. 
La  Lotene   de   Francfort,    par  E.  Souvestre.    La  Jeune   Savante, 

par  Mme.  Curo.    47  pp. 

French  Plays  for  Girls.    (l2mo.    Paper.) 

Trois  Comedies  pour  Jeunes  Filles:  I.  Les  Cuisinieres;  II.  Le  Petit 
Tom;  III.  La  Malade  Imaginaire.   Par  Lemercieb  de  Nkuville.  134  pp. 

3 


HENRY  HOLT  &>  CO:S  FRENCH  TEXT-BOOKS, 
Bibliotheque  d'Instruction  et  de  Recreation. 

12mo  volumes.    Paper  or  Cloth. 

Achard's  Clos-Pommier,  et  Les  Prisonniers  du  Caucase.    Par  Xavibr 

DE  Maistrb.    Cloth.    144  pp. 

Achard*s  Clos-Pommier.    Paper.    106  pp. 

B6dolli6re's  M6re  Michel.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    138  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Biographies  des  Musiciens  C616bres.    Cloth.    871  pp. 
The  same.    Paper. 

Carraud  et  Segur's  Contes  (Les  Petites  Filles  Modules,  par  Mme.  de  Skgur, 
et  Les  Gouters  de  la  Grand'mere,  par  Mme.  Z.  Carraud).  With  a  list  of 
difficult  phrases.    Cloth.    193  pp. 

Carraud's  Les  Gouters  de  la  Grand*m6re.  With  a  list  of  difficult 
phrases.    Paper.    95  pp. 

Choix  de  Contes  Contemporains.   With  notes.    By  B.  F.  O'Connor.  Cloth. 

300  pp. 

■ The  same.    Paper. 

Erckmann-Chatrian's  Conscrit  de  1813.  With  notes.  By  Prof.  F. 
BocHER.    Cloth.    236  pp. 

■  The  same.    Paper. 

Le  Blocus.    With  notes.    By  Prof.  F.  Bocher.    Cloth.    258  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Madame  Th6r6se.    With  notes.    By  Prof.  F.  B6cher.    Cloth    216  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Pallet's  Princes  de  I'Art.    Cloth.    834  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Feuillet's  Koman  d*un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre.    Cloth    204  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

P6val's  '  Chouans  et  Bleus.'    With  notes.    Cloth.    188  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Poa's  Contes  Biographiques.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    189  pp. 

The  same.    Paper, 

Petit  Bobinson  de  Paris.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    166  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Mac6*s  Bouch6e  de  Pain.    (L'Homme.)    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    260  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

De  Maistre's  Voyage  Autour  de  ma  Chambre.    Paper.    117  pp. 

Les  Prisonniers  du  Caucase.    Paper.    38  pp. 

Merim6e's  Columba.    Cloth.    179  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Porchat's  Trois  Mois  sous  la  Neige.    Cloth.    160  pp. 

• The  same.    Paper. 

Pressens6's  Rosa.    With  vocabulary.    By  L.  Pylodbt.    Cloth.    286. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Saint-Germain's  Pour  une  Epingle.    With  vocabulary.    Cloth.    174  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

Sand's  Petite  Fadette.    Cloth.    205  pp. 

The  same.    Paper. 

S6gur  et  Carraud's  Contes.  (Petites  Filles  Modules;  Les  GoMers  de  la 
Grand'mere.)    Cloth.     193  pp. 

S6gur's  Les  Petites  Filles  Modules.    Paper.    98  pp. 
Souvestre's  Philosophe  sous  les  Toits.    Cloth.    137  pp. 
— —  The  same.    Paper. 


Jjl  <Z^JLf  .        i  -«-^  =A-.t„„..J<3    .   f    ' 


^f  ^  itJlv.t>-v-^^t.Xe>    i-<>Xv/v>C'Q^»-^-^o 


^r^\ 


